Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080198849 | SCALING VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS USING SERVICE INSERTION ARCHITECTURE - In one embodiment, service routers may register their serviced VPNs with a service directory/broker (SDB), and edge routers may register their attached VPNs. The SDB may then return service headers, each corresponding to a particular VPN, and also returns an address of a service router corresponding to each service header to the edge routers. An edge router may then push an appropriate service header onto a received packet, and forward the packet to the corresponding service router, which forwards the packet based on a maintained VRF for a VPN according to the service header (e.g., thus the edge routers need only maintain limited/reduced VRFs). Also, services provided by the service routers may be distinguished using service headers accordingly. In this manner, the edge routers may forward packets requiring one or more desired services to service routers configured to perform such services. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198850 | Peer-to-peer communication system and method - A method and system of enabling communication between peers in a peer-to-peer (P2P) network in the presence of network address translators (NAT). The method includes: assigning a unique peer identifier to each one of the plurality of peers in the P2P network; establishing an overlay topology connecting each peer to a subset of the plurality of peers in a structured connection pattern based on the unique peer identifier of each peer, each one of the plurality of peers having more connections to close peers and fewer connections to distant peers; and routing messages between peers through the established overlay topology. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198851 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM INCLUDING INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND TERMINALS, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD FOR THE SAME - An information processing system includes an information processing apparatus configured to perform a call control; and terminals configured to communicate with the information processing apparatus. The information processing apparatus sets an SDP in an SIP message based on network connection environment data indicating existence or non-existence of a NAT (Network Address Translator) apparatus connected with each of the terminals and a type of the NAT apparatus. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198852 | ADDRESS CONVERTER FOR GATEWAYS INTERCONNECTING NETWORKS OF DIFFERENT ADDRESS FORMATS - In a gateway, a packet received from a first network contains first address data conforming to the first network in the packet header and second address data conforming to a second network in an auxiliary header. The first address data of the packet is then rewritten with the second address data of the packet and transmitted from the gateway to the second network. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198853 | APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING ACTIONS BASED ON PACKET CLASSIFICATION AND LOOKUP RESULTS - A method and apparatus are provided for implementing predefined actions based upon packet classification and lookup results in a communications network processor. A plurality of sets of rules is defined. Each rule set includes at least one rule and each rule has a set of masked compares for comparing results of hits and misses of table lookups. Each masked compare set has an associated field for selecting an action. The action defines a set of one or more commands and each command defines a processing operation. One rule set is identified based upon the packet classification result for a received packet. When one of the rules is identified having a match of the masked compares, then the action of associated with the identified rule is selected. Otherwise a default action is provided responsive to no rule of the identified rule set having a match of the masked compares. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198854 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LOCAL PACKET TRANSPORT SERVICES WITHIN DISTRIBUTED ROUTERS - A system and method for routing packets within a router having a plurality of loosely-coupled route processors, including a first route processor, and a line card operably coupled to the plurality of distributed-route-processors. Each route processor includes an internal forwarding information base (IFIB). Each IFIB includes information that is used to route packets addressed to elements within the router. | 08-21-2008 |
20080205399 | Method and System for Routing in Communication Networks Between a First Node and a Second Node - A system and a method of transmitting information between a first node ( | 08-28-2008 |
20080205400 | LOW DEVIATION FIELD MODULATION FOR TRANSFER OF INFORMATION - An interface receives a packet stream associated with a source and a destination. The packet stream includes multiple packets, each packet including a header and a payload. A system generates a modulated stream for inclusion in the packet stream and performs a low deviation modification to a header field in each of the multiple packets to include the modulated stream in the packet stream. The system then transmits the packet stream including the modulated stream. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205401 | Setting a Forwarding Address in an Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Routing Protocol Domain at a Boundary with a Different Routing Protocol Domain - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a neighbor discovery message and a border routing message through an interface at a particular router. The interface communicates with a border network segment between first nodes routing with IPv6 using a first routing protocol and different second nodes routing using a different routing protocol. The messages are received from an alien router. The border routing message includes foreign routing data that indicates a route among the second nodes. If the alien router's interface on the border segment does not have a global IPv6 address, then a fictive IPv6 address is generated, which includes a global prefix of an IPv6 address for the particular router and an interface identifier associated with the alien router. The fictive IPv6 address and the foreign routing data are inserted into a domain scope external advertisement message that is sent to the first nodes. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205402 | Network resource teaming on a per virtual network basis - A computer system teams its network resource ports on a per virtual network basis. The system configures one or more virtual networks. For each of the one or more configured virtual networks, the system establishes a team comprising two or more of the network resource ports. The system selects a layer2 address that is uniquely associated with one of the ports of the team. The system assigns the selected unique layer2 address to be the primary layer2 address for the team. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205403 | Network packet processing using multi-stage classification - Methods and systems for processing packets in data network using multistage classification are disclosed. An example method for processing packets includes receiving a data packet at a first processing stage and examining the packet at the first processing stage to determine a first attribute of the packet. Based on the first attribute, a first classification is assigned to the packet. In the example method, the packet and the first classification are communicated from the first processing stage to a second processing stage and the packet is examined at the second processing stage to determine a second attribute of the packet. Based on the second attribute, a second classification is assigned to the packet. The example method further includes processing the packet based on the first classification and the second classification. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205404 | Method and System for Implementing Virtual Circuit Status Consistency - A method and a system for implementing virtual circuit status consistency. A transmitting provider edge router (PE) send an extended network layer reachability information (NLRI) message to a remote PE; the remote PE updates the status of the virtual circuit from the remote PE to the transmitting PE, according to the received extended NLRI message, so as to make the status of the virtual circuits between the transmitting PE and the remote PE consistent. A system for implementing virtual circuit status consistency, the first provider edge router (PE | 08-28-2008 |
20080205405 | CLASSIFICATION SUPPORT SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FRAGMENTED IP PACKETS - A wire-speed forwarding platform and method for supporting multifield classification of a packet fragmented into a plurality of fragments in the wire-speed forwarding platform, comprising: receiving a fragment of the fragmented packet at the forwarding platform and deriving a key from one or more fields of the received fragment; and performing multifield classification of the received fragment by matching the key to a rule out of a plurality of rules, the rule comprising a plurality of fields including at least one field for specifying whether the received fragment's fragmentation characteristics are to be applied when performing the multifield classification. | 08-28-2008 |
20080212585 | Preventing Loops during Recovery in Network Rings Using Cost Metric Routing Protocol - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving advertised costs to reach a destination address from neighbor routers. Based on the advertised costs, a minimum first cost to reach the destination address from the local router through the neighbors is determined. The first cost corresponds to a successor among the neighbors. Also determined is a minimum second cost of the advertised costs excluding only an advertised cost from the successor. The second cost corresponds to a second router. If it is determined that communication with the successor is interrupted, and the second cost is not less than the first cost, then it is determined whether the second cost is equal to the first cost. If so, then a data packet, which is directed to the destination address and received from a neighbor that is different from the second router, is forwarded to the second router. | 09-04-2008 |
20080212586 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CLASSIFYING PACKETS - A method and apparatus for classifying packets, e.g., at wire speed are disclosed. The method receives a packet and processes the packet through a hardware-based packet classifier having at least one evolving rule. The method then processes the packet through a software-based packet classifier if the hardware-based packet classifier is unable to classify the packet. In one embodiment, the at least one evolving rule is continuously modified in accordance with learned traffic characteristics of the received packets | 09-04-2008 |
20080212587 | RELAY APPARATUS AND PACKET RELAY METHOD - A relay apparatus to relay packets transmitted/received between apparatuses connected via a network and method. The relay apparatus includes physical ports to transmit/receive the packets. The relay apparatus also rewrites transmission-destination identification information of a packet transmitted to the relay apparatus based on a transfer rule stored in advance. The relay apparatus also transfers control for performing control so that the packet in which the transmission-destination identification information has been rewritten is output from one of the physical ports based on the transfer rule. | 09-04-2008 |
20080219261 | Apparatus and method for processing data streams - A system and method for processing data streams is disclosed. The system receives data packets for data streams, screen the data packets for searched patterns, and forward the data packets for their respective stream processing. Generally, the data packet is scanned for viruses before being forwarded for further processing. When an out-of-order data packet is received, a copy is made and the data packet is forwarded without being scanned. When a delayed data packet is received, it is scanned for virus along with the saved copy of the out-of-order data packet. If a virus is detected, the delayed packet is dropped and its connection reset. If no virus is found, the delayed packet is forwarded for further processing. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219262 | Generic UDP multiplexing for voice over internet protocol (VOIP) - In one embodiment, data for a plurality of sessions is received. For example, a plurality of packets for voice data may be received from a plurality of end points. A destination for each of the connections is then determined. For example, the voice data may be destined for different gateways (and other end points). In some cases, the voice data for the sessions may be destined for the same destination. In this case, a plurality of packets is multiplexed into a multiplexed packet. The multiplexed packet includes a layer three network header. Also, each of the packets in the multiplexed packet includes a transport packet header. The multiplexed packet is then sent to the single destination. Each of the packets in the multiplexed packet can be extracted and processed as if a single one of the packets was received individually. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219263 | Method of Sharing Network Identifier and Mobile Router - In a case where internal links connected to plural mobile routers in a mobile network respectively have unique network identifiers initially set, the mobile router, when receiving a network identifier different from the initial setting advertised from another mobile router, selects either one of the network identifier initially set to the self and that advertised, as a network identifier of the internal link connected to the self. Then, if the one selected is identical to that initially set, the mobile router advertises the network identifier to within the mobile network and registers it in a home agent. If not identical, the mobile router registers the one advertised in the home agent as a network identifier of the internal link connected to the self. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219264 | Upstream Label Allocation on Ethernets for MP2MP LSPS - An apparatus or method for upstream label allocation on LANs for multipoint (MP) label switched paths (LSPs). In one embodiment of the method, a first router receives a first incoming labeled data packet, wherein the first incoming labeled data packet comprises a first data packet and one or more first labels. The first router creates a first outgoing labeled data packet, wherein creating the first outgoing labeled data packet includes the step of swapping the one or more first labels of the first incoming labeled data packet with a context label and a forwarding label, wherein the first outgoing labeled data packet comprises the first data packet, the context label, and the forwarding label. Ultimately, the first router transmits the first outgoing labeled data packet to second and third routers via a LAN. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219265 | Method for tagging SIP contact headers while preserving the contact header format towards softswitches - A private communications network and method of managing calls in a private communications network. A Session Border Controller (SBC) listens for private network voice communications originating from private communications devices, e.g., Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) devices sending/receiving Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) communications such as SIP messages. The SBC assigns a unique port to each registering communications device and adds a path header with a single, common SBC port to the SIP register messages. A softswitch responds by adding a route header to identified voice communications. Thereafter, all identified voice communications pass through a single, common SBC port. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219266 | ROUTING PATHS ONBOARD SATELLITE WITH REFERENCE TERMINAL FUNCTIONALITY - Satellite communications systems, methods, and related devices are described. A satellite communications system may include routing and switching functionality onboard the satellite. Such a system may include a satellite in communication with terminals (e.g., subscriber terminals or gateways) either directly, or via one or more other satellites through an inter-satellite link. The satellite may be configured with different beams which each provide service to a coverage area. A ground-based network control center (NCC) may dynamically allocate bandwidth and process data measured on the satellite. A novel partition of functionality between the satellite and the NCC is described. Routing paths on the satellite, and the distribution of routing tables within the system, are described as well. | 09-11-2008 |
20080225849 | AUTOMATED VALIDATION OF PERIPHERAL DIRECTOR HARDWARE - A system and method of automating the validation and control of peripheral director hardware in a switched fabric network. A system is provided that includes a script language processor for interpreting high-level statements and generating command functions understood by an application programming interface (API) associated with the switched fabric network, wherein the command functions include a query switch command, a query interface switch command, a write switch command, and a display result command; and a system for generating an output in response to a set of command functions submitted to the switched fabric network. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225850 | UNIFIED TRANSMISSION SCHEME FOR MEDIA STREAM REDUNDANCY - In one embodiment, a network session is established for transmitting a media stream. The media stream is encoded into a first set of media stream packets and the first set of media stream packets transmitted according to the established network session. The media stream is also encoded into a second set of retransmission-based repair packets and used as a second redundant copy of the media stream. The second set of retransmission packets are transmitted regardless of receiving any indication of lost or dropped packets during the network session. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225851 | Enabling routing of data on a network based on segmented data accessed from a non-network enabled device - A system and method for enabling routing of data on a network based on segmented data accessed from a non-network enabled device is disclosed. The technology includes a method for enabling routing of data on a network based on segmented data accessed from a non-network enabled device. The method includes detecting a non-network enabled device locally coupled to a first computer system, the first computer system coupled to the network. The method for enabling sharing of non-network enabled devices on a network also includes enabling routing of data through the non-network enabled device to a second computer system coupled to the network by using the first computer system as a communication interface between the non-network enabled device and the second computer system wherein the second computer system is automatically identified based on recognizing a portion of the data as indicating a routing destination and wherein the data is segmented into a plurality of portions prior to routing. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225852 | Methods and apparatus providing two stage tunneling - A system receives a packet at a first node. The packet is destined for a second node. The system identifies a full routing node from a plurality of network devices. The full routing node is capable of providing routing information for each of the nodes within the plurality of network devices. The plurality of network devices comprises a subset of nodes, and a subset of full routing nodes. The subset of nodes is not capable of providing routing information for each of the nodes within the plurality of network devices. The system transmits the packet to the full routing node for future transmission to the second node. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225853 | LOGICAL BRIDGING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system and method of extending a standard bridge to enable execution of logical bridging functionality are disclosed. In some implementations, a logical bridge may assign source logical port information to a data packet based on characteristics of the data packet, employ the source logical port information to learn the source address and to forward the data packet to a logical egress port, and map the logical egress port to a physical egress port at which the data packet is to be egressed. A tunnel interface may optionally be applied to a data packet upon egress. | 09-18-2008 |
20080232369 | MAPPING MECHANISM FOR ACCESS NETWORK SEGREGATION - Communication nodes, systems and methods are described which provide an association between messaging and access resource and admission control functions (A-RACFs) within an IP addressing zone. The association can be communicated within messages using, for example, a topology zone identifier. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232370 | Method of communication in LAN without setting IP - A method of communication in LAN without setting IP is provided, especially for LAN with a host device and at least a peripheral device. The method includes: (1) the host device sending the peripheral device a broadcast search packet through LAN, (2) the peripheral device establishing a new routing table according to the packet, (3) the peripheral device returning a response packet containing IP data to the host device, (4) the host device establishing a new routing table according to the response packets returned from peripheral device, and (5) the host device performing wired or wireless LAN communication with peripheral device according to the new routing table. Therefore, the host device and the device can automatically detect IP data even they may belong to different sub-net to achieve the communication in LAN without setting IP. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232371 | Remote data access techniques for portable devices - A wide-area network (“WAN”)-based service enables remote data access transactions between participating endpoints within a group of participating endpoints that includes at least one server and at least one portable electronic device. Each participating endpoint is configured for communication via one or more communication networks and stores the same or different data items on behalf of a user. The WAN-based service maintains information about each participating endpoint in the group and its network accessibility, and also maintains one or more catalogs of available data items. The WAN-based service identifies a communication network available to both participating endpoints, and a direct or proxied communication session is established between the portable electronic device and the other participating endpoint via the communication network. Selected data items are downloaded, uploaded, accessed or synchronized via the communication session. The use of digital rights and identity management techniques in combination with the WAN-based service is also discussed. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232372 | Methods and systems for interworking RSVP-based external control plane protocols with internal control plane protocols - The present invention provides improved methods and systems for interworking Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)-based external control plane protocols with internal control plane protocols, such as Optical Signaling and Routing Protocol (OSRP). The present invention utilizes only a high-level mapping in which a trigger is created in the internal control plane protocol to initiate the desired internal control plane action or vice versa. The external control plane protocol messages and fields are encapsulated as data in the internal control plane messages and fields and are processed only at the remote end of the internal domain. By encapsulating the entirety or parts of the external control plane protocol messages and fields ensures that necessary information is carried from an ingress border node to an egress border node. At the egress border node, the encapsulated external control plane protocol messages and fields are mapped back to the external control plane protocol, without having to make changes to the internal control plane protocol or perform processing at intermediate nodes. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232373 | System and method for extending battery life - According to one embodiment of the invention, a method comprises determining whether a non-unicast message is to be transmitted by a transmitting device, which may involve a setting a Delivery Traffic Indicator Map (DTIM) Interval value to reflect a longer periodicity than associated with a Listen Interval. After such determination, the non-unicast message may be converted into one or more unicast messages for transmission. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232374 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING LOCATIONS OF FIELDS IN A DATA UNIT - At least a portion of a data unit is provided to a programmable memory unit to identify an attribute of a field in a header of the data unit. The header is parsed in response to an output of the programmable memory unit. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232375 | PACKET TRANSMISSION DEVICE - There is provided a packet transmission device which comprises a packet transfer processing part and a control part. The packet transfer processing part includes a table memory comprising a path selection table, a link status table, and a node status table. In these tables, information of each of paths, links, and nodes are stored and linked each other. A link/node status monitoring part in the control part monitors a packet outputted from the packet transfer processing part transmission and detects a fault occurred in a transmission of the packet. The fault is reflected on the information of paths in the tables only by updating the information of links and nodes and the path for packets outputted from the device is assigned in a short time. | 09-25-2008 |
20080240098 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING FLEXIBLE VIRTUAL FORWARDING TABLE - A method and apparatus for providing a flexible virtual forwarding table for packet networks are disclosed. For example, the method receives one or more packets from at least one customer endpoint device, where the one or more packets are destined for a destination node. The method then locates a route for routing the one or more packets by consulting one or more virtual forwarding projection tables, wherein each of the one or more virtual forwarding projection tables contains a subset of the routes that are stored in a virtual route forwarding table. Finally, the method forwards the one or more packets towards said destination node using said route. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240099 | ADDRESS REQUEST AUTHORITY PERCENTAGE PROTOCOL (ARAPP) - A method and apparatus that routes packets in a network is disclosed. The method may include receiving a packet from a first communication device in the network requesting an IP address, determining if another communication device owns the requested IP address, wherein if another communication device does not own the requested IP address, giving the IP address to the first communication device, otherwise, if it is determined that a second communication device is claiming ownership of the IP address, determining whether the first communication device or the second communication device owns the IP address using an address request authority percentage protocol (ARAPP) function, wherein based on the results of the ARAPP function, the first communication device is given the IP address, otherwise the IP address request from the first communication device is denied. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240100 | LAYER THREE SATELLITE FUNCTIONALITY IN A DATA NETWORK - Method and system for providing access layer satellite architecture in a data network including receiving a data packet from an access layer network device, the data packet including a Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) identifier associated with a port on the access layer network device, performing a route lookup procedure based on the received data packet to determine a destination of the data packet, updating an ARP table with a Media Access Control (MAC) address associated with the VLAN identifier and the port of the received data packet, and transmitting the data packet to a destination network device, is disclosed. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240101 | Management of redundant and multi-segment pseudo-wire - A system and method of managing redundant and multi-segment pseudo-wire, including calculating two aggregated endpoints with two or more local endpoints, at least one local endpoint being a backup endpoint, mapping the aggregated endpoints and a plurality of nodes interconnected with one another and the local endpoints, determining an overall status of the system and setting an overall status indicator, determining an operational status of individual components in the system and setting associated status indicators. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240102 | Method and system for policy-based routing in a private network-to-network interface protocol based network - A method for policy-based routing of calls between nodes in a network, comprising: entering policy constraint indices for selected addresses in respective entries of an address translation table, the address translation table for accessing by a first node of the network to selectively translate attributes of calls based on respective addresses prior to transmission over the network to a second node, the policy constraint indices pointing to respective policy constraints for routing calls between the first and second nodes; receiving a call at the first node, the call including an address; accessing the address translation table using the address to determine whether the call requires assignment of a policy constraint by presence of an entry for the address in the address translation table and by presence of a policy constraint index in the entry; and, if the call requires assignment of a policy constraint, identifying a policy constraint with the policy constraint index, assigning the policy constraint to the call, and routing the call between the first and second nodes in accordance with the policy constraint. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240103 | Three-port ethernet switch with external buffer - System and method for routing data packets in an Ethernet switch. A preferred embodiment comprises receiving a data frame at a first port, wherein the data frame comprises a header portion and payload portion. The header portion is analyzed to determine a destination port for the data frame. A destination status is added to the header portion to create a modified header portion. The modified header portion is stored in an on-chip memory. The payload portion is stored in an off-chip memory. An on-chip CPU instructs a DMA controller how to route the data frame. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240104 | Port management system - A method is provided for a port management system in which a switch is automatically provisioned with network resources. A command or set of commands are stored and automatically executed on the switch upon the occurrence of a defined network event. The command or set of commands may be associated with one or more ports on the switch. When executed, the commands cause a change to a port configuration and/or policy on the switch to control access to a network resource. The network resource may include any device or service accessible on the network. The defined network event may include any network event associated with a device or user connected to the network. The command or set of commands may reference variables, control structures, and functions to modify command execution. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240105 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EXTENDING A SERIAL PROTOCOL TO CREATE A NETWORK IN A WELL MONITORING ENVIRONMENT - A method is disclosed for extending a serial protocol to create a network in a well monitoring environment, including determining at a receiver node whether a message subnet mask ID in a received message is different from the Node Subnet Mask ID and rejecting the received message if the subnet mask ID in the received message does not match the subnet mask ID for the receiver node. A system for extending a serial protocol to create a network in a well monitoring environment also disclosed. A data structure used by the system and method is also disclosed. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240106 | Method and apparatus for MAC address learning - The invention includes a method and apparatus for synchronizing line card forwarding databases. A method includes receiving a data packet at a line card, generating a control packet for each of at least one other line card to enable an address update operation thereat, and propagating the at least one control packet toward the at least one other line card. The control packet, or packets, is generated in response to a determination to perform an address update operation for the received data packet. The address update process may be implemented as an ingress address update process or an egress address update process. This address update process performed in conjunction with an address aging process. | 10-02-2008 |
20080247392 | Validating Internal Routing Protocol Information Passed Through an External Routing Protocol - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving authenticated site data that includes site ID data and address data. The site ID data indicates a unique site ID for each site among multiple sites for a first network that uses an internal routing protocol. Multiple edge sites of those sites are separate from each other and connected to a second network that is under separate administrative control of at least one different party. The address data indicates network addresses associated with each site of the plurality of sites. An external routing protocol message is discounted based on the authenticated site data. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247393 | Methods and systems for using a link management interface to distribute information in a communications network - In various exemplary embodiments, the present invention provides a low-cost, low-processing overhead mechanism for distributing routing, topology, reachability, and recovery information across the interface between two nodes that may then be used by a network or client device to populate a topology database, route a connection, recover from a connection failure, etc. Specifically, the methods and systems of the present invention use a link management interface and the associated link management protocol(s) to distribute this routing, topology, reachability, and recovery information, adding it to the normal link management protocol(s). | 10-09-2008 |
20080247394 | Cluster switching architecture - A network switch including at least one data port interface supporting a plurality of data ports, at least one stack link interface configured to transmit data between the network switch and other network switches, and a CPU interface configured to communicate with a CPU. A memory management unit in communication with the at least one data port interface and the at least one stack link interface is provided along with a memory interface in communication with the at least one data port interface and the at least one stack link interface, wherein the memory interface is configured to communicate with a memory. A communication channel is provided for communicating data and messaging information between the at least one data port interface, the at least one stack link interface, the memory interface, and the memory management unit, wherein the memory management unit is configured to route data received from each of the at least one data port interface and the at least one stack link interface to the memory interface. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247395 | INTERNET PROTOCOL SWITCH AND USE OF THE SWITCH FOR SWITCHING A FRAME - Internet Protocol (IP) switch and method for switching an IP frame to an IP destination address. The IP switch includes access ports, interswitch ports, and a switching table. Each access port is connected to a corresponding host in a LAN. The interswitch ports are configured to be statically connected to routers within the Internet in connections that cannot be overwritten by dynamic learning. The switching table includes entries, each entry having an IP address, a port identifier, and a routing protocol internal metric indicative of confidence in the entry. The method for switching the IP frame includes: receiving the IP frame, reading the IP destination address from the IP frame, ascertaining a matching IP address in the switching table that matches the IP destination address, directing the IP frame to a specific port, transmitting the IP frame from the specific port to the IP destination address. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247396 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND COMPUTER PROCESSING AN IP PACKET, ROUTING A STRUCTURED DATA CARRIER, PREVENTING BROADCAST STORMS, LOAD-BALANCING AND CONVERTING A FULL BROADCAST IP PACKET - Method for processing content of an Internet Protocol (IP) packet and method for processing a full broadcast IP packet. Processing content of an IP packet includes: extracting IP source and destination addresses and payload from the IP packet; and generating an IP frame encapsulating the IP source and destination addresses and the payload between a preamble field and an error checking field. Processing a full broadcast IP packet includes: receiving the full broadcast IP packet including an IP source address and a full broadcast IP destination address; ascertaining a closest matching IP address and a subnet thereof in a switching table of an IP switch; replacing the full broadcast IP destination address in the IP packet with a subnetted source address generated by applying the subnet mask to the IP source address; transmitting the IP packet to all IP addresses in the switching table within the subnetted source address. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247397 | Network clustering for improving connection management and re-routing capabilities - Embodiments of the present invention relate to re-routing data packets in a communication network according to at least a first version and a second version of a protocol. | 10-09-2008 |
20080253372 | Scheduling packet transmission - Scheduling packet transmission. A plurality of data packets is received, wherein at least a portion of the plurality of data packets is associated with one media unit and comprises different quality information. Profit-to-size ratios or distortion-to-size ratios for the data packets are determined. A plurality of schedules of the data packets are determined utilizing dynamic programming for a plurality of data rates based at least in part on the profit-to-size ratios or distortion-to-size ratios. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253373 | System and Method for Supporting Flexible Overlays and Mobility in Ip Communication and Computer Networks - There is provided a system and method for providing a simple yet flexible overlay network on top of any IP networks to enable diverse network applications whereby much of the rigidities of IP protocol suite are eliminated without any modifications to the applications. In particular, the system includes: a plurality of c-nodes; one or more source terminal nodes connected to an IP network; and one or more destination terminal nodes connected to the IP network. Here, the source terminal nodes send IP packets over the plurality of c-nodes to the destination terminal nodes to accomplish arbitrary communications between arbitrary groups of the source terminal nodes to arbitrary groups of the destination terminal nodes. More specifically, a method employing the system utilizes the concept of connection ID and headers that can be inserted anywhere in the IP packet. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253374 | Apparatus and method for communicating with receiving end via internet - The invention provides a method for a transmitting end to communicate with a receiving end, which is assigned with an IP address, via the Internet. The method of the invention includes the steps of: the transmitting end receives an information stream from a DVB-H network; the information stream contains a DVB-H packet header and a datagram, which contains an IP packet header and an IP packet payload. Additionally, the method of the invention further includes the steps of: the transmitting end decodes the information stream to remove the DVB-H packet header and obtains the datagram, then it writes the IP address of the receiving end in the IP packet header; and then the transmitting end transports the datagram with the IP address of the receiving end to the receiving end via the Internet. | 10-16-2008 |
20080259922 | INTERSECTION-BASED CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT - A configuration management system and related methods are provided to facilitate intersection-based management of configuration information for network devices. In one example, a method includes polling a plurality of network devices to determine address entries stored by address tables of the network devices. The method also includes applying a hash function to the address entries to determine a plurality of key-value associations. The method further includes maintaining a hash table comprising the key-value associations. Each key of the hash table corresponds to an address entry stored by one or more of the address tables. Each value of the hash table identities which of the address tables are storing the address entry corresponding to the associated key. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259923 | Forwarding data in a data communication network - An apparatus for forwarding data in a data communications network having as components nodes and links therebetween is described. The apparatus is arranged to forward data towards a destination on a label switched path and advertise in a label advertisement to nodes in the network in a label advertisement its label for the label switched path and its label for a repair label switched path for use in the event of non availability of a component in the network. The apparatus is further arranged to advertise to a remote node in the network in a label advertisement additional information for deriving repair label switched path information at the remote node. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259924 | Marked packet forwarding - A network, network devices, and methods are described for marked packet forwarding. A network device includes a network chip having a number of network ports for receiving and transmitting packets. The network chip includes logic to decapsulate a packet received from a tunnel, mark the packet with a handle associated with an originating network device of the packet using information from an encapsulation header, and forward the marked packet to a checking functionality having a destination address different from an original destination address of the packet. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259925 | Extensions to IPv6 neighbor discovery protocol for automated prefix delegation - In one embodiment, a method comprises detecting, by a router, a first router advertisement message from an attachment router that provides an attachment link used by the router, the first router advertisement message specifying a first IPv6 address prefix owned by the attachment router and usable for address autoconfiguration on the attachment link. The router detects an unsolicited delegated IPv6 address prefix from the attachment router and that is available for use by the router. The router claims a second IPv6 address prefix from at least a portion of the delegated IPv6 address prefix, for use on at least one ingress link of the router. | 10-23-2008 |
20080267185 | FIELD MODULATION FOR TRANSFER AND MEASUREMENT OF FLOW STATISTICS - A first network device determines flow statistics information associated with a flow. The first network device modulates the time-to-live (TTL) header field in a packet associated with the flow to include flow statistics information. The packet includes a header and a payload. The first network device transmits the packet to a second network device. The second network device demodulates the TTL header field to determine flow statistics information. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267186 | Method to Transfer Data Packets From First Portable Source Endpoint Belonging to Moving Network to Second Destination Endpoint Belonging to Second, Preferably Packet Oriented Network - Address translation is performed by a home domain of a first, e.g., mobile, network which may be moving relative to a second, e.g., packet oriented network, to convert the address of a first endpoint in the mobile network, associated with the home address of the first network to a second destination endpoint belonging to the second network. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267187 | Method for Providing Virtual Private Network Services Between Autonomous Systems - The present invention relates to providing virtual private network (VPN) services between two or more Autonomic Systems (AS). An aggregation edge router (ASBR) is provided in two or more autonomous systems (Asx,Asy). The aggregation edge routers are configured such that routing peering between the two or more autonomous systems is done between the aggregation edge routers in these autonomous systems. Each aggregation edge router is a routing peer of other edge routers (PE) in its own autonomous system. The Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) network is used between the different autonomous systems. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267188 | Data Transmission Method - A method of transmitting data between a plurality of inter-connected elements. The method comprises receiving a message from a first element, said message comprising a routing key plus optionally a data payload. The routing key is processed to identify a plurality of said inter-connected elements, and data is transmitted to said identified plurality of inter-connected elements. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267189 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VERIFYING UPDATE INFORMATION IN BGP - A method for verifying update information in Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), includes: upon receipt of an update message, verifying, by an Autonomous System (AS), the update message according to a determined maximum time of verifications; and trusting the update message if the verifications are successful. The update message may be AS_PATH and/or prefix. In the invention, upon receipt of an update message, the AS verifies the update information according to the maximum time of verifications, which ensures that the time of verifications will not exceed the maximum time of verifications when the AS verifies the update information. Accordingly, load on CPU is decreased during verification of the update information and hence the network convergence speed is improved. | 10-30-2008 |
20080273532 | Direct Assembly Of A Data Payload In An Application Memory - A system and method for direct assembly of data payload in an application memory. A transmission control protocol offloading process is applied by network interface card components on a packet header to provide a direct memory access (DMA) task with precise application memory location pointers to a DMA engine. The DMA engine uses the DMA task to place the data payload directly in the application memory. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273533 | Adaptive Packet Transmission with Explicit Deadline Adjustment - The embodiments of the invention relate to source content streaming, particularly to transmitting data units scheduled for dropping or non-transmission. This data unit in the buffer scheduled for dropping is instead transmitted by dropping one or more consecutive data units later in the transmission order in the buffer and which meet a lower priority threshold. In some embodiments, the data unit is transmitted with a modified time value, e.g., a modified timestamp and/or an allowable presentation time range value. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273534 | Signaling Completion of a Message Transfer from an Origin Compute Node to a Target Compute Node - Signaling completion of a message transfer from an origin node to a target node includes: sending, by an origin DMA engine, an RTS message, the RTS message specifying an application message for transfer to the target node from the origin node; receiving, by the origin DMA engine, a remote get message containing a data descriptor for the message and a completion notification descriptor, the completion notification descriptor specifying a local memory FIFO data transfer operation for transferring data locally on the origin node; inserting, by the origin DMA engine in an injection FIFO buffer, the data descriptor followed by the completion notification descriptor; transferring, by the origin DMA engine to the target node, the message in dependence upon the data descriptor; and notifying, by the origin DMA engine, the application that transfer of the message is complete in dependence upon the completion notification descriptor. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273535 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASSIGNING A VIRTUAL ADDRESS TO AND TEXT-MESSAGING TO MULTIPLE TEXT-CAPABLE DESTINATION ENTITIES - A virtual address is configured. A destination address and a capability information associated with each destination entity of a set of destination entities associated with a destination party are configured. Each destination entity from the set of destination entities is a push-capable, text-message-capable entity. Each destination entity from the set of destination entities is associated with a virtual address. The virtual address defines a destination remote from the destination party and remote from premises associated with the destination party. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273536 | EARLY DETECTION OF FALSE START-OF-PACKET TRIGGERS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK NODE - An apparatus, a carrier medium storing instructions to implement a method, and a method in a node of a wireless network able to receive packets that exactly or substantially conform to a wireless network standard according to which each packet includes a header having bits that have respective correct values in the case that the packet exactly conforms to the standard. The method includes receiving a start-of-packet (SOP) trigger that indicates that a packet may have been received, checking one or more bits in the header to determine whether or not they have their respective correct values, and continuing to process the packet in the case that the checking indicates that the checked bits have their respective correct values. In one implementation, the header includes a first field modulated at a known rate that has one or more reserved bit locations, and a second field modulated at a data rate indicated in the first field. In such an implementation, the checking includes processing the first field and checking one or more bits in the first field to determine whether or not they have their respective correct values, and, if the checked bits of the first field have their respective correct values, checking the second field for integrity. | 11-06-2008 |
20080279185 | ENHANCED PACKET CLASSIFICATION - A method for classifying a data packet containing a header is provided. The method may comprise parsing the header of a data packet into header elements. Rules in secondary lookup tables generated from a primary lookup table may be accessed. The respective header elements of the data packet may be compared to the respective fields of each of the secondary lookup tables, and rule results for each of the secondary lookup tables in a combinable format may be generated. In another embodiment, a method for generating secondary lookup tables from a primary lookup table is provided. The method may comprise accessing a primary lookup table defining packet classification rules and generating multiple secondary lookup tables from the primary lookup table. For each secondary lookup table, a selection of classification rules and a selection of fields of the multiple fields based on a rule set identifying predefined entries may be extracted. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279186 | System and Method for Communication of Uncompressed Visual Information Through a Network - DisplayPort micropackets of uncompressed visual information are adapted to conventional network infrastructure with a switch having DisplayPort ports, network ports and a packet converter. The packet converter encapsulates DisplayPort packets for communication through network ports and extracts DisplayPort packets from network packets for communication through DisplayPort ports. An address resolution table associates the switch ports with each other and with a packet converter operation by using a control field that defines the packet converter operation for information received at each port, such as encapsulation, extraction or native switching. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279187 | PACKET STRUCTURE FOR A MOBILE DISPLAY DIGITAL INTERFACE - A packet structure for a Mobile Display Digital Interface (MDDI) includes a flexible sub-frame length to efficiently transmit large packets. A windowless video stream packet avoids repetitive transmissions of video packets when some parameters are unchanged, saving bandwidth. An enhanced reverse encapsulation packet combines the feature of a separate round trip delay packet with a separate reverse encapsulation packet. A link freeze is used to halt a transmission of a data stream at any point in the transmission and resume the transmission by a host. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279188 | Method And Apparatus For Performing Network Processing Functions - A novel network architecture that integrates the functions of an internet protocol (IP) router into a network processing unit (NPU) that resides in a host computer's chipset such that the host computer's resources are perceived as separate network appliances. The NPU appears logically separate from the host computer even though, in one embodiment, it is sharing the same chip. | 11-13-2008 |
20080285560 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND PROGRAM FOR MAKING ROUTING DECISIONS - A computer system, method and program for routing. A router receives a message packet, and in response, the router reads a payload in the message packet to identify an application that sent the message packet or a user of the application that sent the message packet, as identified from the reading of the payload. The router determines a routing path for the message packet based at least in part on the identity of the application that sent the message packet or the user of the application that sent the message packet. The router forwards the message packet to a next hop in the routing path which was determined. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285561 | Systems and methods for Internet Protocol transparency - A method for implementing IP transparency includes requesting an IP address from an Internet service provider (ISP), receiving a first IP address from the ISP responsive to requesting an IP address from the ISP, receiving a request for an IP address from a communication device, sending the first IP address to the communication device responsive to receiving the request for an IP address from the communication device, receiving a first IP packet from the communication device, and sending the first IP packet to the ISP. The first IP packet has the first IP address as a source address in a header of the first IP packet. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285562 | FLEXIBLE ROUTING TABLES FOR A HIGH-RADIX ROUTER - A system and method for routing in a high-radix network. A packet is received and examined to determine if the packet can be routed adaptively. If the packet can be routed adaptively, the packet is routed adaptively, wherein routing adaptively includes selecting a column, computing a column mask, routing the packet to the column; and selecting an output port as a function of the column mask. If the packet can be routed deterministically, routing deterministically, wherein routing deterministically includes accessing a routing table to obtain an output port and routing the packet to the output port from the routing table. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285563 | Routing Information Management Apparatus and Computer Program of the Same - In order to provide the routing information of both the present time and the past, provide the latest routing information very quickly and improve searching speed of the routing information, a routing information management apparatus includes: a routing information receiving portion receiving routing information which broadly notifies a change/withdrawal of a communication route and which is received from an observation apparatus of communication routes; and a routing state table generation portion which generates a routing state table of each of the communication routes including both a route existing time based on a received time of the routing information and a range of an address space obtained by digitizing a prefix involved in the routing information, and which stores the routing state table in a routing information database. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285564 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING TRANSPORT FRAME AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING TRANSPORT FRAME - Provided are a method and apparatus for creating a transport frame in order to identify the starts of packets, and a method and apparatus for processing the transport frame. In the method of creating the transport frame, at least one packet to be transported by being loaded in the transport frame is received. Then, information about the start location of a first packet, that is, a packet whose head and tail are both in the transport frame and which comes first within the transport frame, among the received at least one packet is created. Next, the transport frame, including the at least one packet and the start location information about the first packet, is created. | 11-20-2008 |
20080291915 | Processing packet flows - In one embodiment, an apparatus comprises a first logic configured to determine an identifier associated with a packet and determine a flow count index associated with the identifier, and a flow counter, coupled to the first logic and configured to count a number of packet flows associated with the flow count index. The embodiment also includes a second logic, coupled to the first logic and the flow counter, wherein the second logic is configured analyze the packet to determine if the packet is a part of a new packet flow that has not been counting in the flow counter, and if it has not been counted, incrementing the flow counter. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291916 | Systems and methods for dynamic quality of service - Systems, methods, and apparatus for routing are provided in which a connection track comprising a plurality of network or transport layer packets, received by a router, is identified by examination of header fields of one or more first packets in the plurality of packets. One or more quality of service (QoS) parameters is associated with the connection track by determining whether the track encodes a data type by (i) an identification of a predetermined application protocol used within the one or more first packets and/or (ii) a comparison of a payload of one or more packets in the plurality of packets to known data type formats. A first QoS parameter is set to a first value in a first value range when the connection track contains the first data type. The connection track is routed through the router in accordance with the one or more QoS parameters assigned to the connection track. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291917 | System and method for designing and implementing packet processing products - A system and method for allowing a user to create instructions for building a packet processing integrated circuit. The system includes a user interface for allowing a user to define a desired packet processing algorithm ( | 11-27-2008 |
20080298366 | Agnostic Network Architecture - Procedures for agnostically redirecting WAN link communications for WAN link throughput optimization are described. In an example, a WAN communication, targeted to a remote resource, is redirected to a local port proxy. The local port proxy may enforce WAN link policy on the communication to optimize communication flows occurring over the physical WAN link thereby increasing the relative efficiency of the physical WAN link. A remote port proxy may be included for forwarding the communication to the target remote resource via a separate communication connection. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298367 | VIRTUAL NETWORK CONNECTION SYSTEM, VIRTUAL NETWORK CONNECTION APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - There is provided a virtual network connection apparatus including a first storage unit that stores first correspondence information representing a correspondence relationship between a real address of an information processor in a site and a virtual address of the information processor in a virtual network, an address conversion unit that executes an address conversion for transmitted information between an information processor in the site and an information processor outside of the site by referring to the first correspondence information, a second storage unit that stores second correspondence information representing a correspondence relationship between a name of an information processor in the site and a real address of the information processor, a generation unit that generates third correspondence information representing a correspondence relationship between a name of an information processor in the site and a virtual address of the information processor based on the first and the second correspondence information. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298368 | COLLECTIVE NETWORK ROUTING - Disclosed are a unified method and apparatus to classify, route, and process injected data packets into a network so as to belong to a plurality of logical networks, each implementing a specific flow of data on top of a common physical network. The method allows to locally identify collectives of packets for local processing, such as the computation of the sum, difference, maximum, minimum, or other logical operations among the identified packet collective. Packets are injected together with a class-attribute and an opcode attribute. Network routers, employing the described method, use the packet attributes to look-up the class-specific route information from a local route table, which contains the local incoming and outgoing directions as part of the specifically implemented global data flow of the particular virtual network. | 12-04-2008 |
20080304485 | CENTRALLY CONTROLLED ROUTING WITH TAGGED PACKET FORWARDING IN A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention include a method, an apparatus, and logic encoded in one or more computer-readable tangible medium to carry out a method. One method includes tagging packets and forwarding packets in a wireless mesh network using stored forwarding information for the tag, wherein the forwarding information is according to a centrally determined routing method and tag distribution method. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304486 | MULTIPLEXED DATA STREAM PROTOCOL - Multiplexed data stream protocols are described. In one embodiment, a method to provide a multiplexed data stream protocol includes packetizing a data stream to provide packets with headers and transmitting the packets through an interface which is not designed to use Internet Protocol (IP) addresses. The headers contain data for flow control and sequencing and are associated with a port for an application, and the headers allow multiple applications to maintain an arbitrary and changeable number of multiple concurrent sessions through the interface. The headers may be Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) like headers and may not include IP like headers. Systems, computer readable media, software architectures and other methods are also described. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304487 | Enhancing subscriber location tracking mechanism for voice over internet protocol services - A system for providing a Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) service has an Internet Protocol (IP) address detector for detecting an IP address assigned to a customer by an IP network during a VoIP communication session with the customer. An IP address database stores detected IP addresses. The IP address detector is configured for detecting a first IP address assigned to a customer during a first VoIP communication session with the customer, and for detecting a second IP address assigned to the customer during a second VoIP communication session with the customer. The second IP address is compared with the first IP address to produce an address change signal indicating a change in a physical location of the customer when the second IP address does not correspond to the first IP address. | 12-11-2008 |
20080310415 | APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING PACKETS AND METHOD OF DOING THE SAME - An apparatus for processing a packet includes a packet processor operating in accordance with a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, to process a packet, and a clock-signal generator producing the clock signal and transmitting the clock signal to the packet processor, wherein the clock-signal generator generates a clock signal having a frequency defined in accordance with a time interval at which packets are input into the apparatus. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310416 | VLAN SERVER - A method for processing data received from at least one of VLANs, the method including: obtaining, based on a VLAN tag included in a MAC header of a MAC frame received from the VLAN and a first destination IP address included in an IP header of the MAC frame, a second destination IP address, changing the first destination IP address of the IP header to the second destination IP address, and generating an IP packet by deleting the MAC header from the MAC frame. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310417 | DIFFERENTIAL FORWARDING IN ADDRESS-BASED CARRIER NETWORKS - The invention relates to enabling differential forwarding in address-based carrier networks such as Ethernet networks. There is described a method of and connection controller for establishing connections ( | 12-18-2008 |
20080310418 | OUTPUT QUEUED SWITCH WITH A PARALLEL SHARED MEMORY, AND METHOD OF OPERATING SAME - A network switch includes an input layer to receive a data stream with a set of cells. Each cell includes data and a header to designate a destination device. The input layer includes a set of input layer circuits. A selected input layer circuit of the set of input layer circuits receives the data stream. The selected input layer circuit includes a set of queues corresponding to a set of destination devices. The selected input layer circuit is configured to assign a selected cell from the data stream to a selected queue of the set of queues. The selected queue corresponds to a selected destination device specified by the header of the selected cell. An intermediate layer includes a set of intermediate layer circuits, each intermediate layer circuit has a set of buffers corresponding to the set of destination devices. A selected intermediate layer circuit of the set of intermediate layer circuits receives the selected cell and assigns the selected cell to a selected buffer corresponding to the selected destination device. An output layer includes a set of output layer circuits corresponding to the set of destination devices. A selected output layer circuit of the set of output layer circuits stores the selected cell prior to routing the selected cell to a selected output layer circuit output node. | 12-18-2008 |
20080317030 | Method of creating address forwarding table in ethernet ring network - Provided is a method of creating an address forwarding table in an Ethernet ring network. The method includes the steps of: broadcasting, at each Ethernet node, a ring learning frame having information for measuring cost in the frame's payload in both directions; and receiving, at each Ethernet node, two ring learning frames transferred from different Ethernet nodes and recording a ring learning frame containing information having the minimum cost in the Ethernet node's address forwarding table. Accordingly, by creating an intelligent address forwarding table, it is possible to efficiently prevent a loop without conventionally using a closed loop, and to rapidly transfer a frame through an optimal path. | 12-25-2008 |
20080317031 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND DATA PROCESSING METHOD - A communication apparatus which receives data including a destination address from an external apparatus, changes the destination address included in the received data to an address of the communication apparatus, and sends the data whose destination address was changed to an address of the communication apparatus. | 12-25-2008 |
20080317032 | METHODS FOR USING A TRANSLATION/INSTRUCTION SYSTEM TO REDIRECT A MULTIPROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING (MPLS) PACKET - A multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) packet is processed by receiving an MPLS packet that has first header information including at least a first MPLS label at a first MPLS network node. A translation system is operated to obtain second header information that includes at least a second MPLS label. The MPLS packet is modified with the second header information. The MPLS packet is routed to a second MPLS network node based on the second header information. | 12-25-2008 |
20090003344 | ASYNCRONOUS BROADCAST FOR ORDERED DELIVERY BETWEEN COMPUTE NODES IN A PARALLEL COMPUTING SYSTEM WHERE PACKET HEADER SPACE IS LIMITED - Disclosed is a mechanism on receiving processors in a parallel computing system for providing order to data packets received from a broadcast call and to distinguish data packets received at nodes from several incoming asynchronous broadcast messages where header space is limited. In the present invention, processors at lower leafs of a tree do not need to obtain a broadcast message by directly accessing the data in a root processor's buffer. Instead, each subsequent intermediate node's rank id information is squeezed into the software header of packet headers. In turn, the entire broadcast message is not transferred from the root processor to each processor in a communicator but instead is replicated on several intermediate nodes which then replicated the message to nodes in lower leafs. Hence, the intermediate compute nodes become “virtual root compute nodes” for the purpose of replicating the broadcast message to lower levels of a tree. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003345 | NETWORK DEVICE DYNAMIC HELP - There are provided a method, system, logic and network device to provide additional information and at least one recommended action relating to error information reported by a feature module of the network device. The method comprises generating a request that includes error information reported by a feature module of a network device, the error information including one or more runtime parameters associated with the network device. The method further comprises transmitting the generated request and receiving a response to the request including additional information and the at least one recommended action relating to the error information, the additional information and the at least one recommended action being based at least in part on the one or more runtime parameters. The network device comprises a feature module to report error information including one or more runtime parameters associated with the network device, a help module to generate a request including the error information reported by the feature module and to receive a response to the request, the response including additional information and at least one recommended action relating to the error information, the additional information and the at least one recommended action being based at least in part on the one or more runtime parameters, and a communication module to transmit the generated request and to receive the response to the request. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003346 | LOCATION BASED MESSAGING - The present invention extends to methods, systems, and computer program products for location based messaging. A user at one computer system selects at least on other computer system that is to receive an electronic message. The at least one other computer system is selected based on the location of the at least one other computer system, without having to know an electronic identifier of any users at the at least one other computer system. The computer system refers to a mapping that maps computer systems locations to corresponding electronic addresses. Messages can then be sent to the electronic addresses. Accordingly, embodiments of the present invention facilitate at least semi-anonymous electronic communication in a network computing environment and significantly mitigate the perceived need of an immediate response that is often associated with responding to (potentially in person) verbal communication. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003347 | Backhaul transmission efficiency - In one embodiment, the method includes determining, at a first network element, whether to turn on compression of a header for a packet transport protocol used for a communication flow between the first network element and a second network element. The determining is based on a type of the communication flow, and the packet transport protocol is a protocol for transport of packets between the first and second network elements. The method further includes sending a compression mode indictor to the second network element along with a context identifier. The compression mode indicator indicates the determination, and the context identifier for use in identifying the communication flow. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003348 | IP aggregation with blackhole entry - Provided is a method of route aggregation in a communication system. The method includes receiving an advertised aggregated network routes from a first router, the advertised aggregated network route including at least one blackhole subnetwork route, and updating a forwarding information base (FIB) to include the at least one blackhole route. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003349 | Network system having an extensible forwarding plane - A platform for seamlessly hosts a plurality of disparate types of packet processing applications. One or more applications are loaded onto a service card on the platform. A programmable path structure is included that maps a logical path for processing of the packets through one or more of the plurality of service cards according to characteristics of the packets. Multiple path structures may be programmed into the platform to offer different service paths for different types of packets. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003350 | NETWORK SCALING WITH SUMMARIZED INTERNET PROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHED PATHS - In one example embodiment, a system and method are shown that includes receiving information defining a route to a network device. Further, a routing summary summarizing the route to the network device is generated. Additionally, an aggregate label is selected that corresponds to a defined class and to the routing summary. Moreover, the aggregate label and the defined class are advertised into a domain. | 01-01-2009 |
20090010258 | PACKET PRIORITIZATION IN AD HOC NETWORKS - A wireless communication device operable as a node in an ad hoc network ( | 01-08-2009 |
20090010259 | DEVICE, SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF CLASSIFICATION OF COMMUNICATION TRAFFIC - Device, system, and method of classification of communication traffic. For example, a communication traffic classifier includes: a dynamically configurable port and address classifier to classify an unclassified packet based on port and address configuration information received from an application protocol classifier. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010260 | TOKEN PROTOCOL - The invention provides a method of transmitting one or more tokens over a link between processors, whereby configurations of logical transitions on the lines are used to signal respective codes. The method comprises: transmitting a token by signalling a sequence of codes selected from said codes on the lines; and transmitting one or more additional codes on the lines to ensure that the total number of logical transitions on each line returns the link to a quiescent state following the signalling of said one or more tokens and additional codes. | 01-08-2009 |
20090016348 | QUALITY OF SERVICE WITH CONTROL FLOW PACKET FILTERING - A system is provided comprising a fabric coupling together a plurality of computing devices, wherein the fabric transfers a stream of packets between the computing devices. Each computing device comprises a Quality of Service (“QOS”) filter that monitors incoming packets to filter out packets of a maintenance type and permit transfer of packets of a transaction type. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016349 | Host device interface with a point of deployment (POD) and a method of processing broadcast data - A host device interfacing with a point of deployment (POD) and a method of processing broadcast data are disclosed. Herein, an Internet Protocol (IP) physical interface unit receives an Ethernet frame including broadcast data; and a routing engine transforms the Ethernet frame to an IP packet when a destination address included in the Ethernet frame matches with an address of a pod and routs the transformed IP packet to an extended channel connected to the POD. Accordingly, it is possible to protect contents using a conditional access provided by the existing cable card and process broadcast data received on all types of transmission protocols including an IP protocol over a wired/wireless network using a channel provided for connection between the existing cable card and the host device. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016350 | Packet transmission method and device - In a packet transmission method and device, when a received packet is written in a packet buffer, an address of the packet buffer is stored as a read address for each destination corresponding to a physical port and storing information of the received packet. The read address of a destination designated by the received packet information is read and saved when the received packet is read out of the packet buffer in accordance with a scheduling control. Then, the saved read address is taken out in accordance with an arbitration control and a received packet corresponding to the saved read address is read from the packet buffer. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016351 | Error resilient protocol data unit boundary detection - The present invention provides systems and methods for boundary detection of protocol data units in a communication system. A protocol entity such as a header check sequence (HCS) validation circuit is used to compute header check sequences of protocol data units in a packet burst. If a given HCS is valid, then the payload of the respective protocol data unit may be used. However, if the given HCS is invalid, then a parallel sliding window is used to compute other possible HCSs to identify a protocol data unit boundary. Once the boundary is located, then the payload may be used. Even if a protocol data unit is invalid or a header is not found, other protocol data units in a packet burst may be used in accordance with aspects of the invention. Such operation reduces the number of retransmissions required due to invalid HCSs. | 01-15-2009 |
20090022155 | Using PSTN Reachability to Verify Caller ID Information in Received VoIP Calls - A system for verifying caller ID information in received VoIP calls. In particular implementations, a method includes receiving a caller identification (ID) identifying a calling party telephone number in a call initiation message transmitted from a VoIP call agent; determining the identity of the VoIP call agent; verifying that a public switched telephone network (PSTN) call to the calling party telephone number would arrive at a VoIP call agent having the determined identity; and applying, responsive to the call initiation message, one or more rules based at least in part on the verifying step. | 01-22-2009 |
20090028150 | Protocol-Independent Packet Header Analysis - Analyzing a packet header in a data communications system involves using a descriptor mask to control selective comparison between one or more bits of the packet header and one or more bits of a session descriptor. Setting a mask bit to one state indicates that a comparison between a corresponding bit of a received packet header and a corresponding bit of a session descriptor should be performed, whereas setting the mask bit to an alternative state indicates that no comparison should be performed. A comparison result is generated that indicates whether all of the one or more bits of the packet header match corresponding ones of the one or more bits of the first session descriptor. The descriptor mask and session descriptor are programmable, so that the comparison hardware design is protocol-independent. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028151 | PACKET LEVEL PRIORITIZATION IN INTERCONNECTION NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for packet level prioritization in interconnection networks. An embodiment of an apparatus includes a transmitter to transmit a data stream to a recipient apparatus, the data stream including a plurality of data packets, the data packets including data packets of a first priority and data packets of a second priority. The apparatus further includes a network unit to direct the operation of the transmitter, the network unit to divide the data stream into multiple sub-streams, including a first sub-stream for data packets of the first priority and a second sub-stream for data packets of the second priority. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028152 | NODE APPARATUS - To satisfy a quality required for each traffic and perform switching for a packet segmented into cells without packet reassembly, there is provided a node apparatus including a header processing section ( | 01-29-2009 |
20090028153 | Method for Transmitting Information in a Multicast Environment - It is disclosed that in a multicast network environment individual information ( | 01-29-2009 |
20090028154 | Method And Device For Learning Forwarding Feature Information - A method and device for learning data forwarding information includes a forwarding table recording forwarding feature information stored in a switch device, and wherein corresponding service importance levels for the forwarding feature information are configured. The method includes receiving new forwarding feature information, determining whether the forwarding table is full; if full, determining whether to write the new forwarding feature information into the forwarding table according to the service importance level of the new forwarding feature information; otherwise recording the new forwarding feature information into the forwarding table, and recording service importance level corresponding to the new forwarding feature information. The disclosure also provides a device for learning data forwarding information. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028155 | BROADBAND ACCESS FOR VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS - A method for providing a virtual private network includes assigning to each edge device of a service provider a unicast IPv6 address, from an IPv6 address block of the service provider for a local area network of a user. The method also includes assigning to each edge device of the service provider a virtual private network specific multicast IPv6 address. The method also includes encapsulating a local area network frame in an IPv6 packet when a mapping of a destination address to an egress edge device does not exist. The method also includes adding a virtual private network identification header to a header of the IPv6 packet and broadcasting IPv6 packets having multicast addresses over the service provider network to all of the edge devices serving the virtual private network. The method also includes transmitting, authenticating and decapsulating the IPv6 packet. | 01-29-2009 |
20090034526 | COMPRESSED MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) HEADER STRUCTURE FOR MAC OVERHEAD REDUCTION IN MOBILE WORLDWIDE INTEROPERABILITY FOR MICROWAVE ACCESS (WiMAX) SYSTEMS - A packet data structure comprising a compressed medium access control (MAC) header structure capable of significantly reducing MAC header overhead for small payload applications, such as Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) and interactive gaming and to increase the capacity of such applications. In various implementations, the packet data structure may be used in mobile Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) systems designed to operate in accordance with the Institute for Electronic and Electrical Engineers (IEEE) standards such as the 802.16e-2005 standard and/or the evolving IEEE 802.16m standard. Various embodiments are described and claimed. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034527 | Method of combating the sending of unsolicited voice information - A method of combating the sending of unsolicited information in a packet transmission network from a sending entity to a destination entity, the unsolicited information being of voice type and being sent during a call that includes a call set-up stage during which a call signaling message is transmitted in the network, followed by an on-going call stage during which said unsolicited information is transmitted. The method includes a step of detecting unsolicited information during said call. The method also includes a reaction step triggered following detection of unsolicited information during the call. A system for combating the sending of unsolicited information is also disclosed. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034528 | METHOD OF COMPRESSING AND RESTORING IP PACKETS TRANSMITTED THROUGH BROADCAST NETWORK - A method of compressing and restoring an Internet Protocol (IP) packet which is transmitted through a broadcast network is provided. According to the method, by using a characteristic of a transmission structure of a broadcast network, that is unlike ordinary packet switching communication networks, a field value that can be removed from a header part of an IP packet is determined. Then, the determined field value is removed from the header, and an IP packet having a header formed with the remaining field values is generated, thereby compressing the header of the IP packet more effectively compared to the header of the conventional static IP packet. In addition, by transmitting a compressed IP packet instead of a static IP packet which is periodically transmitted according to the conventional method, compatibility that the compression method can be used together with conventional compression methods is guaranteed. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034529 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING PACKETS VIA HEADER-COMPRESSION CHANNELS - Various embodiments are described for routing packets via header-compression channels. A communication device sends ( | 02-05-2009 |
20090034530 | PACKET CLASSIFICATION USING MODIFIED RANGE LABELS - A method and system for encoding a set of range labels for each parameter field in a packet classification key in such a way as to require preferably only a single entry per rule in a final processing stage of a packet classifier. Multiple rules are sorted accorded to their respective significance. A range, based on a parameter in the packet header, is previously determined. Multiple rules are evaluated according to an overlapping of rules according to different ranges. Upon a determination that two or more rules overlap, each overlapping rule is expanded into multiple unique segments that identify unique range intersections. Each cluster of overlapping ranges is then offset so that at least one bit in a range for the rule remains unchanged. The range segments are then converted from binary to Gray code, which results in the ability to determine a CAM entry to use for each range. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034531 | Host device interfacing with a point of deployment (POD) and a method of processing broadcast data - A host device interfacing with a point of deployment (POD) and method of processing broadcasting data are disclosed. An IP physical interface unit receives a frame including an internet protocol (IP) packet carrying broadcast data through a network modem. A routing engine routs the frame based on a destination information included in the frame. An IP to TS Decapsulator extracts a MPEG-2 TS packet from the IP packet included in the routed frame. And a multiplexer augments the extracted MPEG-2 TS packet with Packet Header carrying an identification information, multiplexes the augmented MPEG-2 TS packet and forwards the multiplexed MPEG-2 TS to the POD. | 02-05-2009 |
20090041013 | Dynamically Assigning A Policy For A Communication Session - In one embodiment, assigning a policy to a communication session includes facilitating the communication session for an endpoint. Policy data is determined from one or more messages communicated subsequent to communication of a request message requesting a service for the endpoint. A policy is assigned to the communication session in accordance with the policy data. | 02-12-2009 |
20090041014 | Obtaining Information From Tunnel Layers Of A Packet At A Midpoint - In one embodiment, a midpoint obtains information from packets by monitoring a communication session between a subscriber side endpoint and a network side provider. The communication session involves a packet flow comprising one or more packets, where a packet comprises tunnel layers. The midpoint establishes one or more target layers of the tunnel layers and performs the following for each tunnel layer at least until a last target layer is reached: identifies a protocol associated with a tunnel layer, parses the packet according to the identified protocol, and extracts target information from the tunnel layer if the tunnel layer is a target layer. | 02-12-2009 |
20090041015 | METHOD FOR ALLOCATING DATA PACKET TRANSMISSION AMONG MULTIPLE LINKS OF A NETWORK, AND NETWORK DEVICE AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT IMPLEMENTING THE METHOD - A method for intelligently distributing packets of a data stream to multiple links of a network for simultaneous transmission via the multiple links, and for periodically re-allocating the distribution, achieves higher network throughput. The method has particular application for streaming audio-video traffic on a home local area network that has a source device, like a media server PC, and a destination device, like a digital TV. One of the links is assigned as the primary link (PL), and another link is assigned as a backup link (BL). Periodically a signal is sent from the source device over each link to the destination device and the round-trip travel time (RTT) for the signal and response for each link is measured. The RTT for a link is a good measure of the current end-to-end link status and generally will change during the time that the data stream is being transmitted as a result of certain events, such as traffic load and interference. The RTT on the PL (RTT-PL) and the RTT on the BL (RTT-BL) are used to adjust the allocation of packets simultaneously transmitted on the links. | 02-12-2009 |
20090041016 | Method, system and device to track and record user call experience - A computer-implemented method, system, and device are described for managing user call experiences in a packet network. User devices are grouped into network clusters. A network infrastructure device receives objective quality information for calls on a packet network for each user device in a network cluster in the packet network. A portion of the user devices in the network cluster is selected, and subjective quality information representing a call experience rating is obtained from each selected user device. The network infrastructure device generates a signature for each user device in the network cluster using the objective and any subjective quality information. The signature represents a user experience during a call, indicates network elements specific to the call and a user device configuration during the call. The signatures of the portion are analyzed to determine a golden signature for the network cluster, the golden signature representing a preferred call experience. | 02-12-2009 |
20090041017 | Hash lookup table method and apparatus - A method includes generating an N-bit generated hash key for an M-bit search key. A data value associated with a matching hash key stored in a content addressable memory is retrieved. The matching hash key is then validated. The content addressable memory supports 2 | 02-12-2009 |
20090041018 | System and Method for Configuring and Executing Communication Diversion with a Globally Routable User Agent Uniform Resource Identifier - A method for diverting a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message is provided. The method includes using at least one Globally Routable User Agent Uniform Resource Identifier (GRUU) to determine a recipient to which the SIP message is diverted. | 02-12-2009 |
20090041019 | MULTI-PROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING - A multi-protocol label switching network or domain ( | 02-12-2009 |
20090046717 | METHODS TO IMPROVE TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL (TCP) PERFORMANCE OVER LARGE BANDWIDTH LONG DELAY LINKS - TCP options are provided to address TCP performance problems during data exchanges over large bandwidth long delay communication links. These options address problems such as in sequence tail drops, inaccurate estimations of available bandwidth over a communication link, and slow responses to dynamic changes in link conditions. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046718 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR POLICY ROUTING - An apparatus and method for policy routing is provided. The method includes: A. configuring a policy routing to a label switching path and obtaining and saving forwarding information; and B. performing packet forwarding based on the forwarding information. The apparatus includes: a label switching path managing unit, for saving first forwarding information of the label switching path; a route managing unit, for saving second forwarding information of the label switching path; a configuring unit, for transmitting configuration parameters to the label switching path managing unit, and obtaining the first and/or second forwarding information of the label switching path from the label switching path managing unit and/or route managing unit; a forwarding information maintenance unit, for maintaining the first and second forwarding information of the label switching path saved in a node of policy; and a packet forwarding unit, together with the forwarding information maintenance unit, for forwarding the packet, which solves the problem that the prior art couldn't well support strategic route for a MPLS packet. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046719 | Method and Apparatus for Implementing Multiple Portals into an RBRIDGE Network - Shortest-path spanning trees are created outward from each portal on a Rbridge network with nodes on the network being assigned to the spanning trees. For those nodes equidistant to two portals, an election process is used to determine which tree the node should join. To enable routes associated with nodes on the Rbridge network to be distinguished from routes external to the Rbridge network, messages may be transmitted between the portals. The messages enable portals to identify routing updates received from the external network as containing internal routes, so that traffic that is required to pass between nodes on different trees may pass over the Rbridge network rather than over the external network. | 02-19-2009 |
20090052451 | ACCESS CONTROL LIST MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - An Access Control List management tool for use in distributed communications networks, compares Access Control Entries for conflicts and optimizes the ACE order by frequency of use, thus by detecting errors in the construction of ACLs and reducing the number, on average, of access entries that must be maintained and processed greatly improves the efficiency of transfers. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052452 | SIGNALING COMPRESSION INFORMATION USING ROUTING PROTOCOLS - An ability to compress packets is announced from a customer edge router (CE) to other CEs through a routing protocol packet. An announcement of that ability is received from another CE through a routing protocol packet. A compression technique is then matched. The CE receives compression information from the other CE in a routing protocol packet, and determines that a compression technique identified therein matches any compression technique the CE is programmed to use. The CE then flags packets transmitted from/received by the CE to be compressed/decompressed according to the matched compression technique. Alternatively, the CE may match by transmitting compression information identifying a compression technique to the another CE in a routing protocol packet; the another CE receives the routing protocol packet and determines that a compression technique identified in the compression information of the routing protocol packet matches any compression technique the another CE is programmed to use. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052453 | Method and apparatus for improving the performance of voice over IP (VoIP) speech communications systems which use robust header compression (RoHC) techniques - A method and apparatus for use in improving the performance of Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) communication systems which use Robust Header Compression (RoHC) techniques for reducing communications protocol overhead. Specifically, having recognized that in VoIP applications (unlike, for example, data services applications), severely late packets cannot be used, a “RoHC-Guard” filters out packets that are very late, making it impossible for RoHC to perform the costly and unnecessary re-sync. In accordance with one embodiment of the invention, a RoHC-Guard module, operating as a pre-filter to a RoHC module, saves, rather than merely discards, late packets. Then, if a predetermined number of such packets are consecutively received, they are provided to RoHC module. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052454 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR COLLECTING DATA FROM NETWORK TRAFFIC TRAVERSING HIGH SPEED INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) COMMUNICATION LINKS - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for collecting data from network traffic traversing a high speed Internet protocol communication links are disclosed. According to one method, a plurality of packet classification filters is cascaded to form n stages of the packet classification filters connected to series, where n is an integer of at least two. At the nth stage, network traffic copied from a high speed IP communication link is received and first packet classification processing is performed to identify an attribute of each packet of the network traffic. If the attribute is identifiable at the nth stage and is of interest for a first type of data collection processing, the first type of data collection processing is performed for the packet. If the attribute is not identifiable at the nth stage, the packet is forwarded to at least one additional stage of the n stages for second packet classification processing that is different from the first packet classification processing to identify the attribute. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052455 | Mobile terminal and message transmitting/receiving method for adaptive converged IP messaging - A mobile terminal and message transmitting/receiving method are disclosed for adaptive converged IP messaging. The mobile terminal supporting converged IP messaging (CPM) converts a CPM message into an adaptive converged message and transmits the adaptive converged message. Upon reception, a received message is converted into a CPM message according to a message identifier. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052456 | Packet-processing apparatus and method - The present invention provides a packet-processing apparatus for receiving and processing N packets in a series, wherein N is a natural number, and each of the packets has a current header. Additionally, the packet-processing apparatus includes an agent, a processing unit, a monitoring unit, a lookup table, and a control unit. Particularly, the packet-processing apparatus according to the invention can process the N packets effectively and flexibly. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052457 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATIC INTER-DOMAIN ROUTING OF CALLS - A method and apparatus for inter-domain routing of calls in a network, where the network represents a first wide area network. A routing node of the network advertises its access to a range of addresses in a second wide area network and a cost for access to the range of addresses to all adjacent nodes in the network. Each of the adjacent nodes inserts an entry in its own routing table associating access to the range of addresses in the second wide area network with the network address of the routing node and the cost for access. Each adjacent node then modifies the cost for access by adding its own cost and advertises its access to the range of addresses in the second wide area network and the modified cost for access to all of its adjacent nodes. When a call addressed to a destination address in the range of address in the second wide area network is received at each node of the network, then the node searches for the entry in its routing table corresponding to the range of addresses in the second wide area network having the lowest cost for access and connects the call to the adjacent node associated with the entry having the lowest cost. The routing node can also advertise one or more protocol types which it can support, where the protocol types are associated with the routing node in the routing table in each adjacent node and a call having a given protocol type is also routed at each node of the network based upon its protocol type. | 02-26-2009 |
20090059926 | Method for determining transmission path of router system - Disclosed is a method for determining a transmission path of a router system, in which a forwarding table of the router system is managed with a dualized address system including an absolute address indicating a physical port and a relative address indicating the place of the absolute address. Only the absolute address in a relative forwarding table can be changed without changing the relative address when traffic congestion occurs on a certain port of the router system or when load-balancing is needed, so that the router can actively cope with a real-time change of a destination address. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059927 | Host device interfacing with a point of deployment (POD) and a method of processing broadcast data - A host device interfacing with a point of deployment (POD) and a method of processing a broadcasting data are disclosed. A broadband interface unit received a MPEG transport packet through a cable. A demodulator demodulates the received MPEG transport packet. An IP physical interface unit for received a frame including an internet protocol (IP) packet through a network. A routing engine transforms the frame to an IP packet and routs the IP packet based on a destination information included in the frame. And a multiplexer generates IP MPEG packet and CableCARD MPEG packet by appending a Packet Header carrying identification information and packet identification information to each of the IP packet and the demodulated MPEG transport packet, multiplexes the IP MPEG packet and the CableCARD MPEG packet and sends the multiplexed IP MPEG packet and CableCARD MPEG packet to the POD. | 03-05-2009 |
20090067427 | ROUTING DEVICE, ROUTING MODULE AND ROUTING METHOD FOR AN ACCESS NETWORK - The invention relates to a routing device for an access network, a routing module therefor and a routing method for an access network. The routing device comprises forwarding means able to determine a destination device for a message sent by a sending device. The message contains an anycast address being assigned to a first possible destination device and at least one second possible destination device of a group of destination devices. The forwarding means are able to determine the first destination device or the at least one second possible destination device out of the group of destination devices by assignment data. The assignment data comprise a link between the sending device and the destination device. The assignment data comprise credential data and/or are determined by means of credential data of a user of the sending device. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067428 | Apparatus, Method and Computer Program Product Providing High Performance Communication Bus Having Preferred Path Source Routing, Multi-Guarantee QoS and Resource Reservation, Management and Release - Disclosed are methods, apparatus and computer program products, in accordance with exemplary embodiments of this invention, that provide a communication network having an enhanced data packet source routing procedure, that provide enhanced QoS functionality in a communication network where a first network protocol layer implements QoS with relative guaranties and best effort, while an underlying layer provides physical resource distribution between data pipes with absolute QoS guaranties, and that provide provides resource reservation, management and releasing for per flow resource management with strict/hard QoS guaranties. The communication network may employ optical and/or electrical data paths. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067429 | PACKET FORWARDING APPARATUS SUITABLE FOR FORWARDING EXTENDED FRAME - A packet forwarding apparatus (L | 03-12-2009 |
20090073980 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An information processing apparatus ( | 03-19-2009 |
20090073981 | Methods and Apparatus for Network Packet Filtering - Software and methods are disclosed for reducing the computational cost involved in network packet filtering The technology provides user level network packet filtering without incurring a context switch and minimizes the copying of data during packet filtering. The technology reduces or eliminates the need for expensive operating system data locks when performing network packet filtering. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073982 | TCP PACKET COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND TECHNIQUES RELATED THERETO - A protocol processing unit processes a packet used for connection establishment according to TCP/IP based on management information on the connection establishment and processes a packet used for payload transmission. A payload packet transmission/reception processing unit having a hardware configuration performs transmission/reception processing on the packet used for the payload transmission based on the management information. A connection synchronization processing unit performs synchronization processing for synchronizing the management information held by the protocol processing unit with the management information held by the payload packet transmission/reception processing unit. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073983 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING GATEWAY TO TRANSMIT IPv6 PACKET IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for providing a gateway for IPv6 packet transmission in a WLAN system are provided, in which a gateway takes over a TCP/IP protocol stack from a legacy 6LoWPAN node for providing a gateway for IPv6 packet transmission in a WLAN system. One or more service request messages for data communications are received from a plurality of 6LoWPAN nodes, and a virtual interface is generated for allocating IPv6 addresses to the 6LoWPAN nodes by adding a predetermined IPv6 address prefix to addresses of the 6LoWPAN nodes set in the service request messages. A socket adaptation layer is interfaced for receiving the IPv6 addresses from the virtual interface and transmitting data packets to the 6LoWPAN nodes, and when data packets are transmitted and received to and from the 6LoWPAN nodes, an on-going file is controlled and managed, and the data packets are routed. | 03-19-2009 |
20090080428 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SCALABLE SWITCH FABRIC FOR COMPUTER NETWORK - A system and method are provided for processing storage commands between a host and a target. The system includes a first line card, a system card, and a second line card. The storage command that is issued from the host is received by the first line card. The first line card determines whether or not it can process the request by itself and, if so, forwards the storage command to the second line card for forwarding (and eventual processing) by the target. If the first line card cannot process the storage command by itself, it forwards the storage command to the system card for additional processing. The revised storage command is issued from the system card to the first line card. The first line card then issues the revised storage command to the second line card for eventual processing by the target. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080429 | PACKET-BASED PROCESSING SYSTEM - A packet-based processing system suitable for various applications, such as for a base station or a terminal in a wireless communication system, is described. The packet-based processing system may include multiple processing modules and at least one transport module. The processing modules may send packets to one another via a common packet interface and may operate asynchronously. The transport module(s) may forward the packets sent by the processing modules and may operate asynchronously with respect to the processing modules. Each processing module may include a network interface, at least one buffer, a packet parser, a packet builder, and at least one processing unit. Each processing module may support at least one service. Each packet may include a header and a payload. The header may include a source service address for a source service sending the packet and a destination service address for a recipient service receiving the packet. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080430 | Host device interfacing with a point of deployment (POD) and a method of processing broadcast data - A host device interfacing with a point of deployment (POD) and a method of processing a broadcasting data are disclosed. An IP physical interface unit receives a frame including an internet protocol (IP) packet carrying broadcast data through a network modem. A Routing Engine transforms the frame to an IP packet and routs the IP packet based on a destination information included in the frame. And a Multiplexer generates an IP MPEG packet by appending a Packet Header carrying identification information to the IP packet, multiplexes the IP MPEG packet and forwards the multiplexed IP packet to the POD. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080431 | EDGE DEVICES FOR PROVIDING A TRANSPARENT LAN SEGMENT SERVICE AND CONFIGURATION SUCH EDGE DEVICES - A transport LAN segment service is provided over a transport network. The transport network will include edge devices configured to support one or more transparent LAN segments. Configuration is simplified by advertising TLS-port-label information, layer | 03-26-2009 |
20090086734 | Method and Apparatus for Providing a Distributed Forwarding Plane for a Mobility Home Agent - The invention includes a method and apparatus for providing a distributed forwarding plane for a mobility home agent. The invention provides a method for controlling routing of packets for a mobile node in a network comprising a network domain including a plurality of forwarding elements being controlled by a control element. A method includes computing a route from one of the forwarding elements toward the mobile node and propagating the computed route toward that one of the forwarding elements. The route is computed using location information associated with the mobile node and routing information associated with the network domain. | 04-02-2009 |
20090092136 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PACKET CLASSIFICATION, MODIFICATION AND FORWARDING - A system may include a processor that is arranged and configured to receive initial data packets from a data stream, to classify the initial data packets from the data stream and to populate one or more tables with information based on the classification of the initial data packets from the data stream. The system may include a bus in communication with the processor and an engine, in communication with the bus, that is arranged and configured to process subsequent data packets from the data stream using the information present in the one or more tables such that the subsequent data packets from the data stream bypass the processor. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092137 | VIRTUALIZED APPLICATION ACCELERATION INFRASTRUCTURE - In one example embodiment, a system and method is illustrated that includes processes a first data packet using a first operating system, the first data packet received from a first network. A second operation is shown that processes a second data packet using a second operating system, the second data packet received from a second network. Further, an additional operation is shown that determines a route associated with the first data packet and the second data packet, the route including at least one of a logical route or physical route. Moreover, an operation is shown that parses the first data packet into at least one first logical segment, and parsing the second data packet into at least one second logical segment. An operation is shown that transmits the first logical segment and the second logical segment as at least one data packet across the WAN. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092138 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GENERATING AND PARSING MAC PDU IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for generating and parsing a MAC PDU in a mobile communication system are provided in which LCIDs of MAC SDUs to be multiplexed are checked, the length of an LF is determined for each of the MAC SDUs, referring to LF lengths predetermined for the LCIDs, a MAC header including the LCIDs and LFs of the determined lengths for the MAC SDUs is generated, and a MAC PDU is generated by attaching the MAC header to payload including the MAC SDUs. During the MAC header generation, if a padding size required for the MAC PDU generation calculated taking into account the absence of a last LF in the MAC header is larger than the length of the last LF, the last LF is included in the MAC header, the required padding size is recalculated, taking into account the inclusion of the last LF, and a padding is added according to the re-calculated padding size. | 04-09-2009 |
20090097486 | Common Checksum Computation for Internet Protocol Version 4 and Version 6 Transmissions - Checksums for internet protocol transmissions of certain transport layer messages are generated using IPv6 pseudo-headers for both IPv4 and IPv6 internet protocol transmissions. For IPv4 transmissions, IPv4 information is mapped into an IPv6 pseudo-header, and the checksum is computed using the IPv6 pseudo-header. Among other things, embodiments of the present invention allow checksums for both IPv4 and IPv6 internet protocol transmissions such transport layer messages to be computed using a common checksum computer. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097487 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL AUDIO IN SPDIF FORMAT TO ONE OR MORE RECEIVERS - Methods and systems for transmission of digital audio in SPDIF format to one or more receivers may include packetizing at least one decoded SPDIF data frame to generate at least one SPDIF packet. The at least one SPDIF packet may be transmitted, via one or more networks supporting packet based communication, for processing. The at least one SPDIF packet may be received via said one or more networks supporting packet based communication. The received at least one SPDIF packet may be de-packetized to generate at least one decoded audio data frame. The generated at least one decoded audio data frame may be transmitted to at least one speaker. The one or more networks may comprise one or more of the Internet, an Intranet, a wireless LAN, and/or a Bluetooth connection. One or more channel status bits may be extracted from the decoded SPDIF data frame, prior to the packetizing. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097488 | Method for filtering packets coming from a communication network - A method of filtering packets coming from a communication network ( | 04-16-2009 |
20090103535 | Software Architecture System And Method For Communication With, And Management Of, Components Within An Appliance Utilizing Functionality Identifiers - A network system comprising a system of devices having a plurality of nodes defining a communications network. At least one identifier from a pre-determined group of identifiers is associated with each of the nodes and identifies the functionalities that are applicable to that node or device associated with that node. In one embodiment, at least one of the nodes can transmit the at least one identifier by a message sent over the communications network for receipt by at least one of the nodes to thereby publish the functionalities over the communications network. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103536 | Method and System for Reducing Look-Up Time in Packet Forwarding on Computer Networks - A method and system for reducing the lookup time in packet forwarding on computer networks. A first lookup is performed in a memory tree to find a first protocol forwarding entry in the memory tree. The forwarding entry includes first protocol (e.g., EGP) information and cached associated second protocol (e.g., IGP) information. Both EGP and IGP information are retrievable with the first lookup and used in the determination of an EGP route for the data packet. If the cached IGP information has been invalidated due to address updates, a second lookup can be performed to find an original IGP entry in the memory tree, the information from which can be cached in the EGP forwarding entry if a background maintenance task has finished designating all the EGP entries as having out-of-date caches. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103537 | SYSTEM FOR SWITCHING BETWEEN COMMUNICATION DEVICES, SWITCHING METHOD, AND SWITCHING PROGRAM - A switching system in which a unique additional address is used for each session, and session information is transferred as it is without rewriting the session information when a communication device such as a server is switched, a switching method, and a switching program are disclosed. The switching system comprises a switching device ( | 04-23-2009 |
20090103538 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device is, in an MPLS network including a first area and a second area, the first area being notified of aggregate route information into which pieces of route information on a plurality of routes are aggregated, and using an LDP for generating an LSP, located in the first area but spans between the first area and the second area and receives a message for generating the LSP using one of the plurality of routes within the second area, wherein the communication device is stored with aggregate route information, pieces of route information and labels, then determines whether the route information in the message is stored or not when receiving the message, and, if not stored, executes a label distribution process if the route specified by the route information is one of the routes aggregated with the stored aggregate route information. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103539 | Probe Insertion for One or More Network Address Translated Addresses - In various embodiments, one or more methods and/or systems described may provide probing and/or data replication capabilities for monitoring a user's computing device and the data the user's computing device transmits and/or receives to and/or from one or more networks. In some embodiments, an authorization signal may be intercepted, where the authorization signal may convey information about the user and/or the user's computing device, and a probe to replicate data to and/or from the user's computing device may be initiated. In various embodiments, the replicated data may be communicated to a mediation computing device, where one or more analyses may be performed. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103540 | Method for address translation device traversal for SIP signaling messages through temporary use of the TCP transport protocol - A method for establishing a communication session between a first client (C | 04-23-2009 |
20090103541 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR FILTERING PACKETS - The present disclosure discloses a method, system, and apparatus for filtering packets. The method includes setting packet filtering information that uniquely identifies the basic characteristics of a media stream in an Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)-based packet header. As an apparatus for filtering packets, a media gateway (MG) uses the packet filtering information sent by the media gateway controller (MGC) to filter packets for the media stream when transferring the media stream. The method, system, and apparatus enable packet filtering for the media streams in an IPv6-based PS network. Moreover, the filtering conditions in the packet filtering information in the present disclosure is triplet information that uniquely identifies the basic characteristics of a media stream and can be obtained from the IPv6 packet header, thus reducing the complexity of the packet filtering process. | 04-23-2009 |
20090109973 | Programmable passive probe - A configurable probe takes advantage of inter-dependent probe control elements that pass data control signals from one control element to the other for controlling data extraction. The control elements operate in parallel on one word at a time, based upon a state established by one of the control elements. The data to be considered is established by timing offsets dependant upon packet header lengths, and a function to be performed on the data is controlled by individual control units based upon template information individual to each control element. The probe is agnostic about protocols. It operates on stream of packet words and executes its functions according to defined templates. It is the host that controls the probe and determines what protocol header to parse and how. The controlling host instructs the probe via defined templates that act as state machine definitions what to do and when. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109974 | Hardware Based Parallel Processing Cores with Multiple Threads and Multiple Pipeline Stages - A pipelined out-of-order process and system for handling data packets in a network device. The process and system are scalable to support throughput in excess of 10 Gbps. The system includes a set of processing cores that offload the table look up operations and similar operations from the central processing unit. The central processing unit receives the requisite data needed for performing forwarding, routing, NAT, firewall maintenance and similar operation on data packets from the set of processing cores. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109975 | SEPARATION OF DATA AND CONTROL IN A SWITCHING DEVICE - A method and apparatus for switching a data packet between a source and destination in a network. The data packet includes a header portion and a data portion. The header portion includes routing information for the data packet. The method includes defining a data path in the router comprising a path through the router along which the data portion of the data packet travels and defining a control path comprising a path through the router along which routing information from the header portion travels. The method includes separating the data path and control path in the router such that the routing information can be separated from the data portion allowing for the separate processing of each in the router. The data portion can be stored in a global memory while routing decisions are made on the routing information in the control path. | 04-30-2009 |
20090116483 | Supporting BGP Based IP-VPN In A Routed Network - A new type of Provider Edge (PE) device is used to support BGP-based IP-VPNs. Each VRF instance in a PE device is associated with a dedicated IP address (Service IP address). Each service IP address is dedicated to a VRF in a PE device. The service IP address is distributed by BGP for VPN route association. Customer/VRF IP packets can be sent to a VRF instance in the egress PE device using service IP header encapsulation (with IP Destination Address=Service IP address of egress PE's VRF & IP Source Address=Service IP address of ingress PE's VRF). This obviates the need for explicit tunnels in the core. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116484 | Parallelizing Peer-to-Peer Overlays Using Multi-Destination Routing - A method is provided for parallelizing overlay operations in an overlay network. The method includes: identifying an overlay operation having a parallel messaging scheme; determining a destination address for each parallel message in the messaging scheme; encoding each destination address into a data packet; and transmitting the data packet over the overlay network using a multi-destination, multicast routing protocol. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116485 | Packet relay method and device - A packet relay method and device in which even in the presence of a relay device between transmitting and receiving devices, a normality of a protection route can be surely confirmed is provided; A specific source address or destination address are registered, and when a route normality confirmation packet having the source address or destination address is received, the packet is transmitted to a protection route regardless of a hash operation; The registering can include link aggregation information in addition to the source address or destination address and the transmitting is made when the route normality confirmation packet consistent with both of the source address or destination address and the link aggregation information is received. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116486 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING AN ATTENUATION FACTOR - The present invention discloses a method for obtaining an attenuation factor. The method is adapted to process the synthesized signal in packet loss concealment, and includes: obtaining a change trend of a signal; obtaining an attenuation factor, according to the change trend of the signal. The present invention also discloses an apparatus for obtaining an attenuation factor. A self-adaptive attenuation factor is adjusted dynamically by using the latest change trend of a history signal by using the present invention. The smooth transition from the history data to the data last received is realized so that the attenuation speed is kept consistent between the compensated signal and the original signal as much as possible for adapting to the characteristic of various human voices. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116487 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of performing a multimedia communication session over a communication link using Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and over a communication link using User Datagram Protocol (UDP), including the acts of: receiving a request, over the TCP link, to register from a client terminal located within a private network; a probe data packet to the client terminal, over the TCP link, requesting to send a data packet over the UDP link; and receiving a data packet from the client terminal that contains information relating to an address of the client terminal and a dynamic port over which the multimedia communication session is to be established. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116488 | METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTING TRAFFIC BY MEANS OF HASH CODES ACCORDING TO A NOMINAL TRAFFIC DISTRIBUTION SCHEME IN A PACKET-ORIENTED NETWORK EMPLOYING MULTI-PATH ROUTING - Hash-code value ranges are determined for a traffic distribution among the nodes along a multipath route in a packet-oriented network, according to a predefined traffic distribution in the network. Starting from one or more start nodes, the traffic distribution is determined successively as a function of the hash-codes along the multipath route for each node, including branches, and an allocation of value ranges for the hash-codes to the outbound links is defined. The advantage is that it enables a desired distribution of traffic along any number of multipath routes by distribution on the basis of hash-codes. | 05-07-2009 |
20090122797 | ROUTING OPERATIONS USING SENSOR DATA - In one embodiment, a method comprises an Internet Protocol (IP) router receiving sensor data from at least one of a second IP router or an attached host sensor node, the sensor data distinct from link data of a network link; the IP router generating sensor information based on storing the sensor data with metadata describing reception of the sensor data by the IP router in a routing information base; and the IP router executing a routing operation based on the sensor information stored in the routing information base. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122798 | IP NETWORK SYSTEM AND ITS ACCESS CONTROL METHOD, IP ADDRESS DISTRIBUTING DEVICE, AND IP ADDRESS DISTRIBUTING METHOD - An IP network system includes an IP address generating device that sets a specific area in a node identifier of an IP address as an access control area that can be filtered by a network layer control device, and generates an IP address including a communication policy of the IP network system embedded in the access control area, and the network layer control device capable of filtering the access control area, wherein the network layer control device is configured to perform filtering setting according to the communication policy and thereby performs access control. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122799 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A PLURALITY OF IDENTIFIER FIELDS IN A PACKET SWITCH NETWORK - A method is provided for transmitting a sequence of N virtual network identifier fields from a client entity to a server entity, the server entity belonging to a packet switching transport network. The method includes, at the level of the client entity, choosing a coder from among a plurality of coders, coding the sequence of N identifier fields with the aid of the chosen coder, and writing the coded sequence and the associated coding parameters in a packet. At the level of the server entity, on receipt of a packet, the method includes reading the coding parameters in the packet received, so as to identify at least the coder used and in decoding the coded sequence received with the aid of a decoder corresponding to the identified coder. | 05-14-2009 |
20090129385 | VIRTUAL NETWORK INTERFACE - A virtual network has network interfaces coupled by a multipoint tunnel ( | 05-21-2009 |
20090129386 | Operator Shop Selection - An access node for an Ethernet network is connected between an access point of user devices and a broadband remote access server for access to a plurality of service providing networks. It includes a VLAN handling unit having a memory for storing identifications of Ethernet frames transmitted in a first VLAN including the access node and a local virtual router function unit of the access server in a second VLANs. Each of the second VLANs including the access node, the local virtual router function unit and one of the virtual router function units of the access server for each of the virtual router function units. A control unit commands the handling unit to transmit frames from a new user device that has connected itself to the access point into the first virtual local area network. The control unit also receives information from the access server in respect of routing frames and its commands to the handling unit to transmit frames from user device which is connected to the access point and the frames from which are transmitted into the first VLAN to be instead transmitted into one of the second VLAN as given by the information received from the broadband remote access server, the frames thereby being transmitted to the server of the respective service providing network. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129387 | EXTENDING AN IP EVERYWHERE NETWORK OVER A PLURALITY OF FLOODING DOMAINS - In one embodiment, a border node receives a message that includes routing information indicating connection of a network device to a domain. The border node then updates a routing database with the routing information, and also uses a network address for the network device to determine whether to propagate the routing information. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129388 | Sip header reduction - A SIP header reduction protocol operating on a communication network to compress the SIP header fields on SIP control messages used to initiate a SIP communication session. The new protocol is implemented on the mobile use equipment (UE) ( | 05-21-2009 |
20090129389 | METHOD FOR MANAGING FRAMES IN A GLOBAL-AREA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, CORRESPONDING COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM AND TUNNEL ENDPOINT - A method for managing frames in a global-area communications network comprises a plurality of sub-networks linked to one another by tunnels at the ends of which there are tunnel endpoints, at least one of the sub-networks comprising at least one source device connected to one of said tunnel endpoints through said sub-network. When a given tunnel endpoint receives from a local sub-network, to which said given tunnel endpoint is connected, a frame sent out by a source device in the global-area network, the given tunnel endpoint performs the following steps: obtaining, from said frame, an address of the source device; verifying that the obtained address is included in a first list of addresses comprising addresses associated with source devices connected to remote sub-network or sub-networks distinct from the local sub-network; and in the event of positive verification, discarding said frame. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129390 | Method for transferring a stream of at least one data packet between first and second electric devices and corresponding device - Systems and methods for transferring a stream of at least one data packet between a first electronic device and second electronic device through a network-on-chip are disclosed. These systems and methods can comprise storing data packets in memory means provided in a network interface and transferring data packets from the memory means to the second electronic device. Packets can be transferred from the memory means after a quantity of packets is stored in the memory means, the quantity of packets being determined according to a value of a control parameter. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129391 | Virtual Ethernet MAC Switching - A method of sending an information package from a first data network to at least one second data network through a communications network, in particular a SDH or SONET network, comprises a first plurality of access points, a second plurality of MPLS switches, a third plurality of paths defined from each of the access points to an Ethernet switch including MPLS switching capabilities via at least one of the MPLS switches, and a fourth plurality of paths defined from the Ethernet switch including MPLS switching capabilities to each of the access points via at least one of the MPLS switches. The method further comprises receiving the information package at a specific access point and adding a header including a MPLS label to the information package. The information package including the header is sent to the Ethernet switch including MPLS switching capabilities via a path of the third plurality. The Ethernet switch includes MPLS switching capabilities and switching and sending the information package including the header to at least one further specific access point corresponding to the at least one second data network, removes the header from the information package, and sends the information package from the at least one further specific access point to the at least one second data network. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129392 | MULTIPLE QUEUE PAIR ACCESS WITH A SINGLE DOORBELL - A method for controlling access by processes running on a host device to a communication network includes assigning to each of the processes a respective doorbell address on a network interface adapter that couples the host device to the network and allocating instances of a communication service on the network, to be provided via the adapter, to the processes. Upon receiving a request submitted by a given one of the processes to its respective doorbell address to access one of the allocated service instances, the adapter conveys the data over the network using the specified instance of the service, subject to verifying, based on the doorbell address to which the request was submitted, that the specified instance was allocated to the given process. | 05-21-2009 |
20090135822 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING PACKET FORWARDING - A technology is disclosed for reducing the number of encapsulations required when MAP forwards a packet to a mobile node which is layered within mobile networks, with mobile networks nested and multiple mobile routers chained behind MAP (Mobility Anchor Point). MAP | 05-28-2009 |
20090135823 | ROUTING SYSTEM, CONTROL ELEMENT, ROUTING METHOD AND FORMING METHOD FOR EXCHANGING TABLE AND FORWARDING TABLE - In a routing method, a control element firstly forms a forwarding table and an exchanging table according to a routing table. Next, a first forwarding element receives a packet, and then obtains a label from the forwarding table according to a destination address of the packet, and determines to output the packet from the first forwarding element or a second forwarding element according to the label. If the packet is to be outputted from the first forwarding element, it is directly outputted to the destination address of the packet; otherwise the second forwarding element receives the packet and the label. Next, the second forwarding element obtains a next forwarding path from the exchanging table according to the label to forward the packet. The control element and the first and second forwarding elements constitute a routing system. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135824 | Route Selection in Wireless Networks - A system and method for discovering a route between a source node and a destination node in a wireless network including setting an intermediate reply flag of a route request message by the source node, flooding the wireless network with the route request message and responding to the route request message with route reply message by a first intermediate node having a valid route to the destination node, are described. Also described are a system and method for discovering a best route in which case the route reply message becomes a first route reply message. The system and method for discovering a best route includes selecting by the destination on the best route between itself and the source node based on cumulative metrics received in route request messages received by the destination node, creating a further route reply message and unicasting the further route reply message to the source node. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135825 | Providing an Independent Compression Server Within a Network, as Well as a Method, Network Station and HDCP Server - The invention is related with the problem of utilizing data compression in a network of distributed stations. Often header compression is used to improve the bandwidth usage in networks, in particular wireless networks. Header compression could be implemented in access points or routers, but both implementations have serious problems, e.g. due to limited CPU power, lack of scalability, or handover latency. To resolve the problems the invention proposes to use a dedicated data compression server in the network and a new protocol to transparently deploy data compression in the network. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135826 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CLASSIFYING PACKETS - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method of classifying packets that can support a quality of service (QoS) in a network system. An apparatus for classifying packets according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention includes, a first unit that analyzes input data packets, extracts pluralities of specific fields from the data packets using an analyzed result, and outputs the pluralities of specific fields; pluralities of second units that compare data of a first portion of the pluralities of extracted specific fields with data in a table, determine whether items that satisfy a predetermined condition exist in the table, and output hit signals and pointers indicating positions of the items that satisfy the predetermined condition when the items that satisfy the predetermined condition exist in the table; and a third unit that compares data of a second portion of the pluralities of extracted specific fields and key data including the pointers input from the pluralities of second units and rule data in a is rule table and outputs classes corresponding to the items when the key data and the rule data are matched. | 05-28-2009 |
20090141721 | Deterministic Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Labels - Disclosed are, inter alia, methods, apparatus, computer-readable media, mechanisms, and means for deterministically determining MPLS labels as functions of addresses of Forwarding Equivalence Classes (FECs), and using these determined labels in the forwarding of packets. By each packet switching device in a network deterministically determining the same MPLS label to use for each FEC, each packet switching device knows what label will be used by the other packet switching devices, without running Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) or another label publishing protocol. Additionally, this knowledge extends to all packet switching devices in a network, not merely neighboring packet switching devices, which allows a packet switching device to specify a stack of labels to define a desired path through the network for explicit path routing and/or fast rerouting of traffic without having to previously establish a tunnel or path using Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP), for example. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141722 | TRANSPARENT NETWORK SERVICE ENHANCEMENT - Embodiments of the invention may be used to optimize communications between a first routing device and a second routing device. The first routing device may receive a packet for forwarding towards a destination. The first routing device may modify the packet to announce the presence of the first routing device to other routing devices. Thereafter, a second routing device may receive the modified packet and recognize the presence of the first routing device. In turn, when sending a packet back towards a source address identified in the modified packet, the second routing device may modify such a packet to announce the presence of the second routing device to the first routing device. Thereafter, the first and second routing device may optimize traffic between the first and second routing device. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141723 | FRAME AGGREGATION - A packet network employs frame aggregation to reduce the number of physical-layer frames employed to transfer a given amount of user data. A packet network might employ physical (PHY) and medium access control (MAC) layers of a wireless local area network (WLAN) operating in accordance with one or more IEEE 802.11 standards. Frame aggregation combines several separate, higher-layer frames with user data into one PHY-layer frame, thus increasing the amount of user data per PHY-layer frame transmitted. Frame aggregation improves the efficiency by reducing both PHY-layer overhead and MAC-layer overhead. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141724 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR VITUAL CIRCUIT ROUTES - A method and apparatus for virtual circuit routes is described. A method in a network element comprises associating a virtual circuit to a layer 3 next hop, the virtual circuit being associated with a layer 2 protocol specific logical circuit, receiving a packet on the logical circuit, processing the packet with configuration information indicated by the virtual circuit, and forwarding the packet to the layer 3 next hop associated with the virtual circuit without processing the packet's layer 3 header. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141725 | LINE-TIMING IN PACKET-BASED NETWORKS - In a packet-based (e.g., Ethernet) network, such as the network of central offices and base stations of a wireless telephone system, a node receives one or more incoming packet-based signals from one or more other nodes of the network and recovers a clock signal from each incoming packet-based signal. The node selects one of the recovered clock signals as the node's reference clock signal. When the node is part of a base station, the node uses the selected clock to generate and transmit one or more outgoing packet-based signals to one or more central offices. The node also uses the selected clock to generate the base station's wireless transmissions. In one implementation, the base stations and central offices are connected by Ethernet facilities. | 06-04-2009 |
20090147787 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RTP EGRESS STREAMING USING COMPLEMENTARY DIRECTING FILE - A hardware accelerated streaming arrangement, especially for RTP real time protocol streaming, employs a directing file determining the pointers, header lengths and offsets of a block of one or more data packets to be sent out through a network accelerated streaming system. The directing file is established by a control processor, for example working in the background, and is stored to provide information making it possible to determine certain information including header sizes and pointers to RTP payload and other data, without the need during egress of the data for analysis related to the type of media or protocol concerned. This relieves the control processor of functions that would otherwise require attention, and permits the egress process to proceed in a repetitive manner, preferably relying insofar as possible on hardware elements for speed and reserving the control processors computational capacity for control functions that may be more complex but are infrequent and/or not time sensitive for streaming in real time. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147788 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF DOWNSTREAM SERVICE FLOWS CLASSIFICATION FOR HEADEND CABLE MODEM - A method and apparatus of classifying downstream service flows for a cable modem is provided. A method of classifying downstream service flows, the method including: classifying a service flow based on a Quality of Service (QoS) using a destination address of an inputted packet; composing an internal header including corresponding service flow information based on the classifying of the service flow; and adding the internal header to the inputted packet. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147789 | NETWORK ELEMENT APPARATUS AND INTERMEDIATE ROUTER APPARATUS - As an apparatus itself moves, its access section gets access to a router using a temporarily assigned global address when making a roaming connection to a different network from a network to which the apparatus belongs currently. A message generating section generates a binding update message, which contains a global address which is uniquely assigned to a network element apparatus, the above temporarily assigned global address, and a global address of the router, to transmit the generated message via the access section to a router, which is a serving router after move. This makes it possible to deliver packets among moving networks with the minimum delay to an intended recipient. | 06-11-2009 |
20090154460 | METHOD FOR RECOVERING LOST HEADER - A method is disclosed that includes sending ( | 06-18-2009 |
20090154461 | Network Switching System - A handling address range is pre-assigned to each of switching devices consisting a network switching system. The switching device has a data receiving unit, an assigned data transport unit, an unassigned data transport unit, and a lower transport layer transport unit. The data receiving unit receives data including a destination address in a network layer and a destination identifier in a lower transport layer. If the destination identifier specifies the device itself, the assigned data transport unit and the unassigned data transport unit perform data transfer, whereas if the destination identifier specifies a device other than itself, the lower transport layer transport unit performs data transport. When the destination address is assigned address, the assigned data transport unit generates data including an identifier of a device corresponding to the destination address, and transports the generated data. When the destination address is not assigned address, the unassigned data transport unit transport the data to a switching device among the plurality of switching devices consisting the switching system to which the destination address is assigned. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154462 | SWITCH AND PACKET FORWARDING METHOD - A switch that performs packet forwarding processing based on a label for a connection in which a communication path is specified by the label, includes a receiving unit that receives loopback information with a label of a first layer used for packet forwarding for a first connection, and a packet processing unit that transmits a first loopback packet having a packet including the loopback information, a label of the first layer, and a label of a second layer used for packet forwarding for a second connection layered on the label of the first layer, and also transmits a second loopback packet having the packet including the loopback information and the label of the second layer. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154463 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING NETWORK SERVICES OVER SHARED VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK (VPN) - A method includes tagging core routes of a core network service node associated with the core network service with an assigned core service specific route target, and distributing the core routes tagged with the assigned core service specific route target to one or more customers subscribing to the core network service associated with the core service node, whereby the customers are enabled to reach the core network service node via a core network service VPN. A network architecture includes an edge network having provider edge nodes configured to form a core network service VPN logically between subscribing customer network sites and a core service network, the core service network providing a core network service, the core service network including a core network service node, and a plurality of customer network sites having customer edge nodes attached to associated provider edge nodes of the edge network, wherein each customer edge node is configured to import routes tagged with a core service specific route target, and wherein the core network service node is configured to import routes tagged with a core service specific customer route target. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154464 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIMULATING NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION - A system for simulating NAT (network address translation) performed in an internet protocol (IP) sharing device to be selectively operated in one of different network address translation (NAT) schemes includes a first network interface linking the IP sharing device with an internal network and a second network interface linking the IP sharing device with an external network. A Network Driver Interface Specification (NDIS) interface hooks packets incoming to the external network or outgoing from the internal network. A NAT unit has a mapping table and performs a network address translation of the hooked packets with reference to the mapping table, wherein the mapping table identifies IP addresses and port numbers of the packets to be translated by the NAT unit. | 06-18-2009 |
20090161676 | MULTI-LAYERED PACKET SECURITY - Methods and media for multi-layered packet security control are described. In one embodiment, a header of a packet is modified to include an identifier that identifies a manner in which the packet should be subject to a particular set of a plurality of sets of rules. The particular set of rules dictates how the packet is to be handled. Further, in one embodiment, the packet is communicated to a routing component, and the routing component is configured to reference the identifier to determine which, if any, of the plurality of sets of rules to apply to the packet. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161677 | COMMUNICATION PROXY METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - A communication proxy method, device and system are provided, including: after receiving a packet communicated between a provider device and the access device, performing a conversion process between the physical port and the logic port to physical port information or logic port information in the packet received according to the mapping information between the physical port and the logic port. Thus, it is ensued that the variation of the physical port does not affect the process in which the provider device provides services and the safety of each physical port in the access device is also guaranteed. | 06-25-2009 |
20090168778 | EXTENDING COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS - The invention provides a method of transmitting data in a communication network comprising a first node and a second node. The method comprises initiating a communication session according to a first predetermined communication standard, wherein the first predetermined communication standard is a session-based protocol for establishing and controlling media sessions. The method further comprises transmitting from the first node to the second node, within the session, a first message comprising a header portion and a body portion, the header portion being configured according to the first predetermined communication standard. The body portion comprises data configured according to a second communication standard, the second communication standard providing a schema for creating methods of requesting service functions. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168779 | Integration of multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) - Methods and apparatus relating to integration of Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) are described. In an embodiment, MPLS labels may be inserted into incoming Internet Protocol (IP) packets to form MPLS packets. Other embodiments are also disclosed. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168780 | MPLS P node replacement using a link state protocol controlled ethernet network - When a MPLS Virtual Forwarding Entity (VFE) on a Link State Protocol Controlled Ethernet Network learns a forwarding equivalency class (FEC) to label binding from an attached MPLS-LER, it will determine an associated MAC address for the FEC, and advertise the FEC/label binding along with the MAC address. Nodes in the Ethernet network will install shortest path forwarding state for the MAC to the MPLS-VFE advertising the FEC/label binding. Each MPLS-VFEs on the Ethernet network that receive the advertisement will update its database and generate a label that is distributed to attached MPLS LERs using LDP. When the MPLS-LER needs to transmit traffic to the FEC, it will use the label provided by the MPLS-VFE. The MPLS-VFE maintains a mapping between the label and the MAC address so that it may use the MAC address to forward the packet across the Ethernet network. | 07-02-2009 |
20090175275 | FLEXIBLE NETWORK PROCESSOR SCHEDULER AND DATA FLOW - A network processor dataflow chip and method for flexible dataflow are provided. The dataflow chip comprises a plurality of on-chip data transmission and scheduling circuit structures. The data transmission and scheduling circuit structures are selected responsive to indicators. Data transmission circuit structures may comprise selectable frame processing and data transmission functions. Selectable frame processing may comprise cut and paste, full dispatch and store and dispatch frame processing. Scheduling functions include full internal scheduling, calendar scheduling in communication with an external scheduler, and external calendar scheduling. In another aspect of the present invention, data transmission functions may comprise low latency and normal latency external processor interfaces for selectively providing privileged access to dataflow chip resources. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175276 | Packet forwarding apparatus with function of limiting the number of user terminals to be connected to ISP - A packet forwarding apparatus for connecting a plurality of user terminals to an ISP management server has a management table indicating the relationship between a connection port identifier and specific header information in association with the MAC address of each of the user terminals so that, in a communication protocol procedure executed between each of the user terminals and the ISP management server prior to communication with a wide-area network, the packet forwarding apparatus discards a packet for the user terminal when it is determined that the specific header information cannot be assigned to the user terminal based on the management table. | 07-09-2009 |
20090185564 | System, method and apparatus for automated ATM to ethernet provisioning - A system, method, and apparatus for network service provisioning includes receiving a network address request from a subscriber device. The network address request includes at least one data cell including a channel identifier associated with the subscriber device. The channel identifier identifies the subscriber device for a cell-switched network The method further includes determining the channel identifier from the network address request, and generating a customer tag using the channel identifier. The customer tag identifies the subscriber device for a packet-switched network The method further includes storing the channel identifier and the customer tag in a provisioning table for use in provisioning the subscriber device for the packet-switched network | 07-23-2009 |
20090190588 | Data Packet Switching - Embodiments related to switching of data packets have been described. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190589 | FLEXIBLE TIME STAMPING - In an example embodiment, an apparatus comprising a physical layer processing device that comprises logic configured to process a packet received from a physical layer interface is disclosed. The physical layer processing device logic is further configured to determine a preamble portion of the packet and a data portion of the packet. The physical layer processing device logic is further configured to insert a timestamp into the preamble portion of the packet. The physical layer processing device logic forwards the packet with the timestamp inserted into the preamble. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190590 | Server Machine and Network Processing Method - An object of the present invention is to provide a server machine and network processing method capable of running a plurality of same server applications at a time on a single OS in a single sever machine. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190591 | Obtaining Information on Forwarding Decisions for a Packet Flow - In one embodiment, an apparatus comprises one or more forwarding logic components and logic coupled to a plurality of network interfaces. The logic is operable to: receive address information that identifies a packet flow; generate a synthetic packet based on the address information; provide the synthetic packet to the one or more forwarding logic components; retrieve forwarding information that indicates one or more forwarding decisions for the synthetic packet made by the one or more forwarding logic components; and report the forwarding information. Each of the one or more forwarding logic components is operable to make a forwarding decision for the synthetic packet as part of processing packets in the packet flow, and to store, as part of the forwarding information, data indicating the forwarding decision for the synthetic packet that is made by that forwarding logic component. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190592 | TWO-STAGE COMPUTER NETWORK PACKET CLASSIFICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - A two-stage computer network packet classification method and system is proposed, which is designed for integration to a network system for classification of packets within the network system. The proposed method and system is characterized by the use of a two-stage operation for packet classification; wherein the first-stage operation involves the use of a decision-tree data module whose leaf nodes are used to store a bit vector that represents a cluster of rule groups that are located within a particular cut region in a multidimensional Euclidean space that is mapped to the field values of the input packet; and the second-stage operation involves the use of a bit-vector lookup table data module to retrieve a set of bit vectors which represent a set of possible rules in each rule group and which are intersected to find a matched rule for the input packet. This feature allows the packet classification to be implemented with low memory requirement and enhanced system performance. | 07-30-2009 |
20090196290 | ON-DEMAND MAC ADDRESS LOOKUP - Described is looking up network information (e.g., port data) on demand upon receiving a (e.g., DHCP) request packet containing a MAC address. The MAC address may be looked up in a cache to find the port data. If not cached or cached but outdated, the lookup continues via a querying process that finds the relevant switch containing the port data; the cache is updated based on the querying process result. Successful querying results in a valid cache entry, while unsuccessful querying results in an invalid entry. For port data associated with the MAC address found via the cache or via querying, the port data is used to respond to the request packet, e.g., to assign an IP address to a network device corresponding to that MAC address. For a MAC address determined to be invalid via the cache or via querying, the request is rejected. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196291 | COMPUTER NETWORK PACKET CLASSIFICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM BASED ON A NONOVERLAPPING RULE GROUP ENCODING SCHEME - A computer network packet classification method and system based on a nonoverlapping rule group encoding scheme is proposed, which is designed for integration to a network system for classification of packets within the network system. The proposed method and system is characterized by the use of a nonoverlapping rule group encoding scheme which organizes a database of rules into nonoverlapping rule groups and creates a number of consecutive projected intervals over the dimension of each classification-related field of the packet header, whereby a projected-interval to encoded-bit-vector lookup table and an encoded-bit-vector to rule-group lookup table can be established. During the operation of packet classification, these two lookup tables are used to find the corresponding rule for each incoming packet. This scheme allows the encoded bit vectors to have a reduced bit length, and therefore allows the packet classification to be implemented with low memory requirement and enhanced performance. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196292 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY SETTING IP ADDRESS - An embodiment of the present invention relates to a method of setting an IP address of an electronic apparatus including receiving a router advertisement transmitted from the router, receiving prefix information of the router advertisement, additionally storing an IP address based upon the received prefix information as an IP address of the electronic apparatus when the electronic apparatus has setting for maintaining the prefix information, and rewriting a presently registered IP address with an IP address based upon the received prefix information when the electronic apparatus does not have the setting for maintaining the prefix information. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196293 | Packet transfer unit - The present invention relates to a packet transfer unit, which comprises a search key memory that stores a search key for a transfer destination of a packet and verification information generated from the search key, in association with a storage location of transfer information memorized in a transfer information memory, wherein a transfer information acquisition unit searches the search key memory by using the search key generated based on the header information and the verification information generated from the search key, acquires storage location information of the transfer information from the search key memory when a match with the search key and the verification information memorized in the search key memory is found, and acquires the transfer information stored in the transfer information memory based on the acquired storage location information, and wherein a transfer unit transfers the packet based on the acquired transfer information. | 08-06-2009 |
20090201930 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR IMPROVED DISTRIBUTION OF DATA - A method for improved distribution of data in a computing environment includes receiving data for distribution in the computing environment, receiving configuration data of the computing environment, parsing the data for distribution using the configuration data, and outputting header information of a packet, the packet including the data for distribution. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201931 | Method and apparatus for transferring IP transmission session - A method for transferring an IP transmission session is disclosed, including the following: a transmission session is created between the first node and second node based on a single IP protocol; the first node and second node obtain a transferable address pair by exchanging the session transfer management signaling; the transferable address pair is checked for bidirectional reachability; the transferable address pair is available if reachable in both directions, or is not available if unreachable in either direction; and the transmission session is transferred through the available transferable address pair. An apparatus for transferring an IP transmission session is also disclosed. Through the technical solution under the present disclosure, a session can be transferred in a network where IPv4 coexists with IPv6 without substantially affecting continuity of the end-to-end transmission session, thus fulfilling the requirements in the transition period during which IPv4 coexists with IPv6. | 08-13-2009 |
20090207842 | FRAME RELAY APPARATUS AND ROUTE LEARNING METHOD - A frame relay apparatus includes an acquisition unit for acquiring a frame from an input port connected to a first subnet, a setting unit for setting an output port corresponding to a destination of the frame acquired by the acquisition unit, an assignment unit for assigning, to the frame, a flag indicating whether the output port of the frame set by the setting unit is connected to a second subnet, and a registration unit for storing the flag assigned to the frame by the assigning unit as well as a source address of the frame acquired by the acquisition unit and a port number in a learning table for storing a correspondence between an address and the port number. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207843 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION CONTROL IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving packets at a network element for a communications flow from an end user, the network element receiving the packets if the flow is initiated through a wireless network and through a wireline network. A network address translation (NAT) binding occurs for the end user at the network element, the NAT binding including an Internet Protocol (IP) address for the end user, the NAT binding being controlled by policy infrastructure coupled to the network element. The network element can be provided along a routing path for the flow (e.g., the IP session), irrespective of whether mobility services are used by the end user. The policy infrastructure can also support NAT control between home and visited networks with the visited network retaining control and privacy over the actual NAT elements being used. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207844 | MINIMAL DECODING METHOD FOR SPATIALLY MULTIPLEXING DIGITAL VIDEO PICTURES - Multiple video picture frames are combined into a spatial multiplex video picture frame that may be fully decoded and displayed. The video display of the spatial multiplex video picture frame is a composite combination of all of the video picture frames that have been combined, and may have an appearance such as a mosaic. Multiplexing the video picture frames involves removing picture headers, creating a picture header for the spatial multiplex video picture frame, and altering the headers of individual components of each video picture frame. The new header for the spatial multiplex video picture frame indicates a slice format frame, and headers of the individual components are altered to provide a slice format based picture position for each video picture frame. The headers of the individual components are altered to become slice based, such as in accordance with the ITU-T H.263 video standard, prior to establishing the slice based picture position if the frames are not already of the slice format. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207845 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR AVOIDING LABEL COLLISION IN PBT CONTROLLED BY GMPLS - A method for avoiding label collision in PBT controlled by GMPLS is provided. The method is as follows. A label to be assigned is selected for a label switched path (LSP) to be established. It is judged whether the label selected from labels to be assigned is repeated by previously assigned labels. The selected label is used as the label of the LSP if the selected label is not repeated by any of the previously assigned labels. The embodiment of the present invention also provides a device for avoiding label collision. Thus, the problem of label collision in PBT controlled by GMPLS is effectively solved. | 08-20-2009 |
20090213856 | System and Method for Providing Transformation of Multi-Protocol Packets in a Data Stream - A system and method for facilitating packet transformation of multi-protocol, multi-flow, streaming data. Packet portions subject to change are temporarily stored, and acted upon through processing of protocol-dependent instructions, resulting in a protocol-dependent modification of the temporarily stored packet information. Validity tags are associated with different segments of the temporarily-stored packet, where the state of each tag determines whether its corresponding packet segment will form part of the resulting modified packet. Only those packet segments identified as being part of the resulting modified packet are reassembled prior to dispatch of the packet. | 08-27-2009 |
20090219935 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING PACKETS TO A GUEST OPERATING SYSTEM - In general, the invention relates to a method for transferring a packet. The method includes receiving the packet by a physical network interface, determining a virtual network interface card (VNIC) using a virtual switching table, where the VNIC is located on a computer operatively connected to the network express manager (NEM) via a chassis interconnect, and the VNIC is executing on a host operating system (OS) in the computer. The method further includes transferring the packet to a receive ring (RR) associated with the VNIC, wherein the RR is located on the NEM, providing the network express manager with a receive descriptor, transferring the packet to the guest OS memory using the receive descriptor, and notifying the guest OS that the packet is in the guest OS memory. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219936 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OFFLOADING NETWORK PROCESSING - The invention relates to a method for processing a packet. The method includes receiving the packet by a physical network interface, determining a target virtual network interface card (VNIC) using the destination address and a virtual switching table (VST), transferring the packet to a receive ring (RR) associated with the target VNIC, wherein the RR is located on the NEM, determining, by the target VNIC, that the packet is in the RR, determining, by the target VNIC, that the packet is to be processed using an offload engine, transferring the packet to offload memory located on an offload computer, wherein the offload computer is operatively connected to the NEM via the chassis interconnect and wherein the offload engine is executing on the offload computer, processing the packet by the offload engine to obtain a processed packet, and transferring the processed packet to a target computer memory using the chassis interconnect. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219937 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BIASING OF NETWORK NODE PACKET PRIORITIZATION BASED ON PACKET CONTENT - A method and apparatus for biasing of network node packet prioritization based on packet content. The method may include marking a packet of data from a data stream of packets. The packet can be marked with a packet type such that subsequent nodes determine the relative priority of the packet with respect to other packets from the same data stream based on the packet type marking. The marked packet can then be transmitted. According to a related corresponding embodiment, a method can include receiving a packet at a node in a network, the node including a plurality of packet queues including a higher priority queue and a lower priority queue. The relative priority of the packet can be determined relative to other packets from the same packet source and intended for the same destination, where the relative priority can be based on the contents of the packet. The relative priority may also be based on a marking of the packet. The packet can be assigned to a higher priority queue based on a higher relative priority of the packet. The assigned packet can then be transmitted. | 09-03-2009 |
20090232137 | System and Method for Enhancing TCP Large Send and Large Receive Offload Performance - A system and method for enhancing TCP large send and large receive offload performance are disclosed. A method may include: (a) receiving from a particular sender one or more incoming packets, each incoming packet having control information indicating a source node and a destination node for that packet; (b) determining the source node and the destination node of each incoming packet based on the control information of each packet; (c) determining a number of successive incoming packets that have the same source node and the same destination node; (d) determining whether the number of successive incoming packets having the same source node and the same destination node is greater than a predetermined minimum threshold; and (e) pausing transmission of packets from one or more senders other than the particular sender if the number of successive incoming packets having the same source node and destination node is greater than the predetermined minimum threshold. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232138 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, TUNNEL COMMUNICATION DEVICE, TUNNELL COMMUNICATION METHOD, PROXY RESPONSE DEVICE, AND PROXY RESPONSE METHOD - Provided is an information processing system and the like that can make a communication between plural information processing devices belonging to different LANs. A first tunnel communication device includes a first address correlating information memory unit that stores information for correlating an address in a first LAN with an address in a second LAN, a first address translating unit that translates an address of a packet on the basis of the correlating information, a first P2P communication setup unit that sets up a P2P communication with a device as a destination, and a first tunnel communication unit that makes a tunnel communication through a path of a P2P communication. The packet transmitted from a first information processing device is translated in address, is encapsulated, and is then transmitted through the path of the P2P communication. The packet transmitted from the device as a destination is decapsulated, is translated in address, and is then transmitted to the first information processing device. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232139 | MULTIPLE VIRTUAL LOCAL AREA NETWORK DATABASES IN A SWITCH WITH A RELATIONAL LOOKUP ENGINE - An apparatus and method for transferring data through a network switch. The network switch comprises a plurality of ports each having at least one port identifier and associating with at least one virtual local area network (VLAN) database, and a relational lookup engine storing a plurality of relations between at least one media access control (MAC) address and the at least one port identifier. At least one port receives a frame of data comprising a destination MAC (DMAC) address and the relational lookup engine uses the DMAC address to retrieve an associated port identifier that identifies a port to which the frame is forwarded. A source MAC (SMAC) address of the frame is used to produce an input relation for the relational lookup engine to identify the associated port identifier that identifies the port that received the frame of data for learning associations between the ports and MAC addresses. | 09-17-2009 |
20090238184 | CONTENT DRIVEN PACKET SWITCH - A packet switch routes data packets based on both packet headers and data payloads in the data packets. The packet switch receives data packets, identifies a destination port of the packet switch for each data packet based on a packet header of the data packet, and routes the data packet to the destination port. Additionally, the packet switch selects data packets among the data packets received by the packet switch based on the data payloads of the received data packets, identifies a trace port of the packet switch for each selected data packet, and routes the selected data packet to the trace port. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238185 | RELAY BASED HEADER COMPRESSION - Relays can be used to facilitate communication of a packet, such as from a base station to a mobile device. The packet can include a header that designates an intended destination for the packet. The header can transfer such that the intended destination designation can be sent with or without being decompressed at a relay. If there is more than one relay involved in communication, then the header can configure such that the header is accessible without performing decompression. However, if there is one relay stop, then the header can compress the designator in such a way that decompression should occur. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238186 | Interface system and method of controlling thereof - Provided are an interface system and a method of controlling the interface system. The interface system may include a memory, a first processor, a second processor, and an interface unit. The memory may be configured to store received data in packets. The first processor may be configured to analyze a header of each of the packets to obtain analysis information. The second processor may be configured to receive and process a payload of the packet that includes the analyzed header and the payload. The interface unit may be configured to transmit only the payload to the second processor based on the analysis information. Since the interface system and the method may directly transmit only the payload of the packet to the processor without copying the payload to a separate memory, memory usage efficiency and system performance may be improved and power consumption may be reduced. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238187 | Distributed Method for Minimum Delay Multi-Hop Data Delivery in Vehicular Networks - An inventive method for data delivery in a multi-hop vehicular network with multiple vehicles and intersections is presented. The method comprises, at each source vehicle, initiating packet flow, labeling packets with destination coordinates and a current location, and forwarding the packet flow, and at each intersection, selecting a header vehicle, computing a backlog indicator and listening for broadcasts with a matrix and delay information, updating the matrix in accordance with the backlog indicator if the matrix is present, otherwise initializing the matrix, forwarding the packet flow, and broadcasting the matrix from the header vehicle. In one embodiment, selection of the header vehicle is performed based on random countdown and vehicle ID. The method converges to the optimal (lowest latency) state irrespective of the initial starting point of the network and continues to tend towards the optimal state even as the network conditions alter. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238188 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FORWARDING INFORMATION - An information forwarding method includes obtaining data information to be forwarded which carries a route indicator indicating a destination edge network, obtaining route information to a border router in the destination edge network according to the route indicator, and sending the data information to the border router in the destination edge network for forwarding. An information forwarding device is also provided. | 09-24-2009 |
20090245257 | Network On Chip - A network on chip (‘NOC’) that includes integrated processor (‘IP’) blocks, routers, memory communications controllers, and network interface controllers, with all communications including a route code specifying a route through the routers of the NOC from a source to a destination, each router including routing logic that directs a communication to one of four ports of the router, the one port identified by the first two bits in the route code. The routing logic in the router shifts the route code to discard the first two bits of the route code before transmitting the communication through the one port. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245258 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FORWARDING PACKET DATA - An apparatus includes an input part, a plurality of output parts, and a switching part. The input part inputs a packet and builds at least one forwarding data block including a predetermined destination identifier and packet data extracted from the inputted packet. The switching part includes a forwarding destination storing section for storing, in association with a predetermined destination identifier, a forwarding destination identifier identifying one of the plurality of output parts, and receives the at least one forwarding data block from the input part, and forwards it to one of the plurality of output parts on the basis of forwarding destination storing section which is updated in response to a change in the operating state of the plurality of output parts. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245259 | FAST REROUTE (FRR) PROTECTION AT THE EDGE OF A RFC 2547 NETWORK - In one embodiment, an edge device in a first routing domain is configured to communicate with a second routing domain via a data link. The edge device receives a data packet containing a destination address that is reachable via the second routing domain and an indication that the data packet is a protected packet that was previously rerouted from another edge device in the first routing domain via a Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Fast Reroute (FRR) backup path. The edge device determines if communication with the second routing domain is still available via the data link, and if so, removes the indication that the data packet is a protected packet and forwards the data packet to the second routing domain, and, if not, drops the data packet to prevent the data packet from being rerouted a second time in the first routing domain on another MPLS FRR backup path. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245260 | METHOD AND APPARATUS PROVIDING MEDIA AGGREGATION IN A PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK - Techniques are described for aggregating multiple media packets to improve end-to-end bandwidth efficiency. The techniques include using an RTP aggregation protocol that is not sensitive to packet loss to aggregate multiple media packets under a single header. According to the RTP aggregation protocol, the single header for an aggregated media packet comprises a version field, a zero field, a sequence number field and a trunk ID field. The single header encapsulates the aggregated payload, which is an aggregation of Real-Time Protocol (RTP) segments. An RTP segment either has a compressed format or an uncompressed format. The uncompressed RTP segment includes the complete uncompressed RTP packet copied from the original User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet. The compressed RTP segment includes the payload of the original RTP rather than the complete original RTP packet. | 10-01-2009 |
20090257433 | APPARATUS, METHOD, SYSTEM AND PROGRAM FOR COMMUNICATION - Embodiments provide an apparatus, method, and storage medium wherein a communication identifier of a session or part of a session is provided in a package or added to a message. An apparatus may check, based on the communication identifier of package or the received communication identifier, whether or not a service indicated by the communication identifier is supported. A decision of transferring the service may be based on the communication identifier. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257434 | PACKET ACCESS CONTROL METHOD, FORWARDING ENGINE, AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A packet access control method includes: setting a first bandwidth parameter, and judging whether a received packet needs to be forwarded according to information on the received packet; querying the ACL according to the information on the packet if the packet does not need to be forwarded; performing a corresponding action if the packet hits an ACL rule, or sending the packet to the control plane by applying the first bandwidth parameter if the packet hits no ACL rule. Moreover, a packet forwarding engine and communication apparatus is provided. Through the method, packet forwarding engine and communication apparatus under the present invention, both precise control and service operation stability are implemented, thus improving stability of the apparatus and availability of the whole network. | 10-15-2009 |
20090262738 | METHOD FOR PROMPTLY REDIALING A BROADBAND ACCESS SERVER - A method for promptly redialing a broadband access server is disclosed. The method includes: sending a PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate (PADT) packet to a BAS from a client computer upon the condition that the client computer has been abnormally disconnected from the broadband access server (BAS), sending a responsive PADT packet to the client computer if the client computer is allowed to perform the prompt redial. The method further includes: sending a PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation (PADI) packet to the BAS from the client computer, sending a PPPoE Active Discovery Offer (PADO) packet to the client computer, sending a PPPoE Active Discovery Request (PADR) packet to the BAS from the client computer, sending a PPPoE Active Discovery Confirmation (PADS) packet to the client computer from the BAS so as to create a new connection between the client computer and the BAS. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262739 | NETWORK DEVICE OF PROCESSING PACKETS EFFICIENTLY AND METHOD THEREOF - A network device includes a first memory, a second memory, a receiver, a CPU, a transmitter, and a header cache controller (HCC). The HCC is coupled to the first memory and the second memory. The receiver, the CPU, and the transmitter access the first memory and the second memory via the HCC. The HCC can map an address of the first memory storing a header of a packet to an address of the second memory so as to store the header of the packet in the second memory. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262740 | Transmission Information Transfer Apparatus and Method Thereof - A transmission information transfer apparatus for realizing the MAC VLAN function with low latency includes: a VLAN table memory that manages a VID and a VLAN membership; a VLAN cache which is a cache memory that manages a VLAN Cache Index and VLAN membership in association with one another; an FDB that manages the VID, DA, and output port information in association with one another and further manages the VID, SA, and VLAN Cache Index in association with one another; an extraction section that extracts the VID, DA, and SA included in an input packet; an FDB search section that acquires output port information associated with the VID and DA, as well as the VLAN Cache Index associated with the VID and SA; a table controller that acquires the VLAN membership associated with the VLAN Cache Index; and an output port determination section that determines an output port of a packet. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262741 | Transparent Provisioning of Services Over a Network - An apparatus and method for enhancing the infrastructure of a network such as the Internet is disclosed. A packet interceptor/processor apparatus is coupled with the network so as to be able to intercept and process packets flowing over the network. Further, the apparatus provides external connectivity to other devices that wish to intercept packets as well. The apparatus applies one or more rules to the intercepted packets which execute one or more functions on a dynamically specified portion of the packet and take one or more actions with the packets. The apparatus is capable of analyzing any portion of the packet including the header and payload. Actions include releasing the packet unmodified, deleting the packet, modifying the packet, logging/storing information about the packet or forwarding the packet to an external device for subsequent processing. Further, the rules may be dynamically modified by the external devices. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262742 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRAVERSING A NAT DEVICE FOR PEER-TO-PEER HYBRID COMMUNICATIONS - An improved system and method are disclosed for peer-to-peer communications. In one example, the method enables an endpoint to traverse a NAT device using a stateless reflector. | 10-22-2009 |
20090268734 | EFFICIENT ADDRESS-SPACE EXTENSION TO PSEUDO MULTI-HOMED HOSTS - A residential gateway ( | 10-29-2009 |
20090268735 | Look-Up Table Based Approach for Layer Combining in ISDB-T and ISDB-TSB Receivers - A method of layer combining based on generating a look-up table in an Integrated Services Digital Broadcasting (ISDB) receiver includes obtaining a transmission parameter configuration, generating the look-up table based on the transmission parameter configuration, assembling a null transport stream packets and a valid transport stream packets from a plurality of layers of a multiplexing frame, and generating a completed transport packet stream using the look-up table. The receiver may generate the look-up table by at least one of generating the look-up table in real time or selecting from a look-up table set based on the transmission parameter configuration. The transmission parameter configuration may include at least one of a transmission mode, a guard interval, a modulation, and a coding rate. The look-up table may define an order of the null transport stream packets and the valid transport stream packets from the plurality of layers in the multiplexing frame. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268736 | Early header CRC in data response packets with variable gap count - A method is provided for processing commands issued by a processor over a bus. The method includes the steps of (1) transmitting the command to a remote node to obtain access to data required to complete the command; (2) receiving from the remote node a response packet including a header and a header CRC; (3) validating the response packet based on the header CRC; and (4) before receiving the data required to complete the command, arranging to return the data to the processor over the bus. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268737 | Method and Apparatus for VLAN-Based Selective Path Routing - An illustrative embodiment of the present invention includes a method for routing at least one packet from at least one source node to at least one destination node, each node is operatively coupled to a given packet switch within a plurality of packet switches operatively coupled to a given circuit switch. The method includes a step of establishing one or more Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs). Each VLAN comprising a subset of the plurality of packet switches operatively coupled to the given circuit switch. At least one of the one or more VLANs comprises the at least one packet switch to which the source and destination nodes are operatively coupled. The method also includes a step of routing the at least one packet from the source node to the destination node over at least one loop-free path comprised of one or more packet switches within a given VLAN. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268738 | METHOD OF PROCESSING DATA PACKETS - A method and apparatus for processing data packets. Each data packet comprises data intended to indicate a source of the data packet. The method comprises creating a data packet at a control element. The data of the second data packet intended to indicate a source of the second data packet comprises data indicating the first source, and further comprises data indicating that the second data packet was created by the control element, the second data packet is transmitted to a destination. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268739 | Transparent Bypass and Associated Mechanisms - A network component comprising at least one processor configured to implement a method comprising transparently snooping a path control message comprising a first path identifier, wherein the path control message is sent between a plurality of routers and is not intended for the network component, analyzing a plurality of frames each comprising a second path identifier, and diverting at least some of the frames away from at least one of the routers, wherein the second path identifier in the diverted frames matches the first path identifier. Included is a method comprising configuring a bypass path by snooping a control frame comprising a label switched path (LSP) identifier, and routing a plurality of data frames associated with the LSP identifier to the bypass path without routing any subsequent control frames associated with the LSP identifier to the bypass path. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268740 | MEMORY ORGANIZATION IN A SWITCHING DEVICE - A network device switches variable length data units from a source to a destination in a network. An input port receives the variable length data unit and a divider divides the variable length data unit into uniform length data units for temporary storage in the network device. A distributed memory includes a plurality of physically separated memory banks addressable using a single virtual address space and an input switch streams the uniform length data units across the memory banks based on the virtual address space. The network device further includes an output switch for extracting the uniform length data units from the distributed memory by using addresses of the uniform length data units within the virtual address space. The output switch reassembles the uniform length data units to reconstruct the variable length data unit. An output port receives the variable length data unit and transfers the variable length data unit to the destination. | 10-29-2009 |
20090274153 | System and method for implementation of layer 2 redundancy protocols across multiple networks - The system, method, and article of manufacture of the present invention allows multiple customers connected to a common external network to each implement a layer 2 redundancy protocol, such as the spanning tree protocol, in order to prevent layer 2 loops. Accordingly, a method is presented for providing an independent loop free layer 2 topology between a external network and a customer network comprising tagging control packets originating on the customer network with a unique identifier and tunneling the control packets received from the customer network between a plurality of boundary interface devices at the external network such that the control packets are routed back to the customer network based on the presence of the unique identifier in the control packet. The layer 2 redundancy protocol on the customer network converges based at least in part on the presence of control packets appearing on more than one port on the customer network. | 11-05-2009 |
20090279546 | FLEXIBLE METHOD FOR PROCESSING DATA PACKETS IN A NETWORK ROUTING SYSTEM FOR ENHANCED EFFICIENCY AND MONITORING CAPABILITY - According to an embodiment of the invention, a network device such as a router or switch provides efficient data packet handling capability. The network device includes one or more input ports for receiving data packets to be routed, as well as one or more output ports for transmitting data packets. The network device includes an integrated port controller integrated circuit for routing packets. The integrated circuit includes an interface circuit, a received packets circuit, a buffer manager circuit for receiving data packets from the received packets circuit and transmitting data packets in one or more buffers and reading data packets from the one or more buffers. The integrated circuit also includes a rate shaper counter for storing credit for a traffic class, so that the integrated circuit can support input and/or output rate shaping. The integrated circuit may be associated with an IRAM, a CAM, a parameter memory configured to hold routing and/or switching parameters, which may be implemented as a PRAM, and an aging RAM, which stores aging information. The aging information may be used by a CPU coupled to the integrated circuit via a system interface circuit to remove entries from the CAM and/or the PRAM when an age count exceeds an age limit threshold for the entries. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279547 | NETWORK-AWARE ADAPTER FOR APPLICATIONS - Streams of data traffic from various applications may be handled by a network-aware adapter module as part of a greater platform for filtering communicating the streams to intelligent network components. A distinguishing factor associated with a given data stream may be determined and used as a basis for selecting a QoS policy setting for the given data stream. The selected QoS policy setting may then be signaled to a media access control layer to take advantage of the QoS function of the embedded underlying active media type that is active and optimal (both from technical and business perspective) to carry out the communication for the application. | 11-12-2009 |
20090285213 | Inter-Local Peer Group (LPG) Routing Method - An on-demand method of routing data between a plurality of local peer groups (LPG). Each LPG includes a plurality of moving nodes. The method comprises transmitting a route request message from a source node, relaying the route request message to a native boundary node; forwarding the route request message to a foreign boundary node, determining if the destination node is within an LPG for the foreign boundary node; relaying the route request message to another boundary node if the destination node is not within the LPG, relaying the route request message to the destination node if the destination node is within the LPG, receiving the routing request message at the destination node, transmitting a routing response to the source node, relaying the routing response to the source node through a path discovered by the route request, receiving the routing response at the source node, and transmitting the data, upon receipt of the routing response. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285214 | SYSTEM CONTROLLER, SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE, AND METHOD OF TESTING INTERFACE - A semiconductor device capable of connecting plurality of external devices. When an interface with a first external device that can be connected to the semiconductor device is tested, a packet to be transferred from the first external device to another second external device is artificially generated. The generated packet is transferred to the second external device, and a response is monitored. Thus, the interface for connection to the first external device is tested while avoiding an actual packet transfer between the semiconductor device and the first external device. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285215 | Internet Protocol Version Six (IPv6) Addressing and Packet Filtering in Broadband Networks - A method comprising sending a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) message comprising an Identity Association for Prefix Delegation (IA_PD) Prefix option comprising a Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) prefix and a length of the IPv6 prefix to a device having a media access control (MAC) address, receiving from the device a packet comprising a source MAC address and a source IPv6 address, and dropping the packet when the MAC address is equal to the source MAC address and the leftmost bits of the source IPv6 address defined by the length are not equal to the IPv6 prefix. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285216 | MAINTAINING SECRECY OF ASSIGNED UNIQUE LOCAL ADDRESSES FOR IPV6 NODES WITHIN A PRESCRIBED SITE DURING ACCESS OF A WIDE AREA NETWORK - A network includes network nodes and a gateway. Each network node has a corresponding unique in-site IPv6 address for communication within a prescribed site, each in-site IPv6 address having a first IPv6 address prefix that is not advertised outside of the prescribed site. Network nodes can obtain from within the prescribed site a unique extra-site IPv6 address for mobile or extra-site communications. The extra-site IPv6 address has a second IPv6 address prefix, distinct from the first IPv6 address prefix, advertised by the gateway to the prescribed site and the wide area network. The gateway establishes a secure connection (e.g., tunnel) with each corresponding IPv6 node using its corresponding extra-site IPv6 address, and creates a corresponding binding cache entry specifying the corresponding extra-site IPv6 address and in-site IPv6 address. Hence, the gateway provides wide area network access while maintaining secrecy of the in-site IPv6 addresses. | 11-19-2009 |
20090296710 | System and Method for Obtaining Network Link State Information From Sequential Distance Vector Routing Tables - A method of determining the state of network links based on differences in corresponding distance-vectors in a sequence routing table updates, and a network management system performing the method. The network management system comprises least one monitoring apparatus adapted to determine the state of network links. The monitoring apparatus may be a router in the network adapted to determine link status, or a personal computer or server peered with a router and configured to determine the state of network links based on differences in corresponding distance-vectors in a sequence of routing table updates. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296711 | AFFINITY-BASED TRANSACTION PROCESSING - A transaction message is received at a router. A determination is made whether the transaction message includes an affinity. The affinity indicates an administrator-specified preference regarding processing of the transaction message. When the transaction message includes the affinity, a server system to process the transaction message is identified based on the affinity and based on a system affinity of the server system. The system affinity specifies processing characteristics of the server system. The server system includes a set of servers. The transaction message is modified to identify the server system and routed to a message queue. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296712 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR CEC BLOCK TERMINATION - A CEC block termination function, operated by a manipulating switch including at least one HDMI-CEC input port and at least two HDMI-CEC output ports, enables the manipulating switch to receive a CEC block which was initiated by a device, optionally acknowledge (ACK) the block, modify the received block, and supply the modified block to one or more devices. Optionally, a section of the CEC block may be modified, the entire CEC block may be modified, or the CEC message may be partially or completely modified. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296713 | DECOUPLING FUNCTIONALITY RELATED TO PROVIDING A TRANSPARENT LOCAL AREA NETWORK SEGMENT SERVICE - A transport LAN segment service is provided over a transport network. Responsibilities for configuring, provisioning and forwarding over a transport LAN segment are divided between layer 2 and 3 service provider edge devices, where the layer 3 edge device handles discovery and tunneling responsibilities, the layer 2 edge device handles learning and flooding responsibilities, and information can be exchanged between the layer 2 and 3 edge devices. Configuration is simplified by advertising TLS-label information, layer 2 address learning, and flooding when the needed configuration information has not yet been learned or discovered. | 12-03-2009 |
20090303998 | Packet Re-transmission Controller for Block Acknowledgement in a Communications System - A re-transmit processor for a wireless communication system includes a pointer memory which contains pointers associated with particular packet data in a host memory. The re-transmit processor directs data associated with said pointers to be applied to a media access controller, which optionally contains an encryption function, the output of which is coupled to a block buffer and to an output interface. Upon receipt of a transmission request, the host memory locations associated with the pointers are read and the data directed to the media access controller, which adds a header, a CRC, and optionally encrypts the data, thereafter placing it in the block buffer and the output interface. Upon provision of the packet data to the MAC, the associated pointer is initialized to a FREE or UNUSED value, and upon receipt of an acknowledgement of the packet accompanied by a packet identifier from a receiving station, the packet associated with the packet identifier is removed from the block buffer. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303999 | Method And Device For Transmitting Data Packets - In order to simplify the management of packets to be transmitted, we implement:
| 12-10-2009 |
20090304000 | OUTBOUND TRANSMISSION OF PACKET BASED ON ROUTING SEARCH KEY CONSTRUCTED FROM PACKET DESTINATION ADDRESS AND OUTBOUND INTERFACE - A method is described that involves associating an outbound packet with a first network interface and constructing a search key from an identifier of the first network interface and the outbound packet's destination address. The method further entails submitting the search key to a routing function where the routing function identifies the outbound packet's next hop address. The method also involves transmitting the outbound packet to a node identified by the next hop address from the first network interface. | 12-10-2009 |
20090304001 | SOURCE ADDRESS BASED ROUTING PROCESS - A method is described that entails assigning a source network address to an outbound packet, associating the outbound packet with a network service and identifying a first network interface associated with the network service. The method further entails inquiring into and confirming that the first network interface is associated with the source network address. The method further entails constructing a search key from an identifier of the first network interface and the outbound packet's destination address. The method further entails submitting the search key to a routing function, the routing function providing the outbound packet's next hop address. The method further entails transmitting the outbound packet to a node identified by the next hop address from the network interface. | 12-10-2009 |
20090310610 | Packet-Layer Transparent Packet-Switching Network - Packet forwarding systems and methods allow packet-layer transparent, multi-stage packet forwarding among a set of network access points. Packet forwarding across networks utilizing the invention is directly controllable through the upper-layer nodes, e.g. routers, interconnected by such transparent packet forwarding networks. The systems and methods provide packet-layer routing, switching and forwarding look-up-table free and transparent forwarding of label-encapsulated multi-protocol packet traffic among a set of routers. The invention enables flexible and efficient packet multicast and anycast capabilities along with real-time dynamic load balancing and fast packet-level traffic protection rerouting. The invention replaces the need for packet forwarding look-up-tables in a router interconnect network by a set of rules using which such network forwards packets directly based on their forwarding labels inserted in the packet headers by the routers exchanging packets through said network, thus simplifying network management and equipment implementation, and facilitating optimization of packet traffic flow across communications networks. | 12-17-2009 |
20090316698 | PROCESSING OF PACKET FRAGMENTS - In one embodiment, the present invention is a technique for processing fragments received at a node (e.g., a router) in a datagram-based communication system in order to provide a wide range of protection against potential fragment-based attacks. Received fragments are examined as they are received to verify that they do not overlap one another and that the fragment sequence does not exploit common weaknesses in IP packet-reassembly algorithms. Valid fragment sequences that represent potential threats to the receiver can be reordered and/or fully or partially re-assembled and re-fragmented into a fragment sequence that eliminates or reduces the threat to the receiver. Fragmented sequences that represent a likely attack are blocked, as are subsequent fragments of the associated packet. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316699 | NETWORK CLUSTERING - A network clustering facility is described. The network clustering facility receives a message having a location identification that identifies a destination for the message and comprises at least two components, selects a network node identified by the components of the location identification, determines whether a link exists to the selected network node, and identifies a best link to the selected network node. The network clustering facility comprises a clustering subsystem, an advertising subsystem, and a routing layer. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316700 | CASCADED MEMORY TABLES FOR SEARCHING - Devices, systems, methods, and other embodiments associated with cascaded memory tables for searching are described. In one embodiment, an integrated chip is implemented with two or more address tables. The two or more address tables are implemented with separate memory tables to store addresses. The two or more address tables are comprised of a first address table and a second address table. Connection lines connect the first address table and the second address table to create a cascaded address table. Search logic initiates a search of the first address table for an address. If the address is not found, the search logic initiates a search of the second address table through the connection lines. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316701 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING IP-BASED USN WITH CONVENTIONAL IP NETWORK - An Internet protocol (IP)-based ubiquitous sensor network (USN) system is disclosed. The IP-based USN includes a plurality of sensor nodes having unique IP addresses and an IP-USN router. The IP-USN router has a table that stores each location address of the sensor nodes and periodically broadcasts its own presence information for updating the location addresses stored in the table. The sensor nodes in the IP-based USN system have unique IP addresses. Therefore, desired information and services from any external network may be obtained. | 12-24-2009 |
20090323690 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CLASSIFYING PACKETS IN A NETWORK INTERFACE CARD AND INTERFACE FOR PERFORMING THE SAME - A method for processing packets. The method includes receiving a first packet by a network interface card (NIC) from a network, determining, using a first classification level, a first receive ring group (RRG) for the first packet, determining, using a second level classification, a first receive ring (RR) in the first RRG for the first packet, sending the first packet to the first RR, and sending the first packet from the first RR to a host operatively connected to the network interface card, wherein the first packet is received by a first virtual network interface card (VNIC) associated with the first RRG, where the first RRG is located in the NIC. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323691 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO PROVIDE VIRTUAL TOE INTERFACE WITH FAIL-OVER - A method for processing packets. The method includes receiving a first packet by a first socket on a host, determining by the first socket to process the first packet using a first virtual Transmission Control Protocol offload engine (VTOE), transmitting the first packet to the first VTOE, wherein transmitting the first packet to the first VTOE bypasses a first virtual network stack interposed between the first socket and first VTOE, transmitting the first packet to a HW TOE operatively connected to the host, processing the first packet, using the HW TOE, to obtain a first processed packet; and transmitting the first processed packet to a network operatively connected to the HW TOE, where the HW TOE is associated with the first VTOE and a second VTOE in the host. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323692 | Hashing packet contents to determine a processor - The disclosure includes a description of an apparatus having circuitry to determine a first hash value for a first packet tuple of a first packet traveling in a first direction of a duplex connection and determine a processor for the first packet from a set of multiple processors based, at least in part, on the first hash value. The apparatus includes circuitry to determine a second hash value for a second packet tuple of a second packet traveling in a second direction of the duplex connection and determine the same processor for the second packet from the set of multiple processors based, at least in part, on the second hash value. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323693 | Method and apparatus for managing route information and forwarding data in access devices - The present invention provides a method for creating routes in access devices of the communication network by using access response messages. With the method provided by the present invention, services can be distinguished and forwarded based on destination IP sub-networks, so that different services can be distributed in access devices. In this way, on the premise that services are distinguished based on layer 3, the requirements for access devices are reduced and layer 2 networks on the user side are not required to carry out route protocols, which decreases administrators' maintenance work and is the important condition for the realization of plug&play and reduces the requirements for marginal routers. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323694 | LABEL SWITCHING TYPE OF PACKET FORWARDING APPARATUS - A label switching type packet forwarding apparatus having a routing information table in which a forwarding type of a reception packet, output port identification information, and output routing information of a specific layer in the OSI reference model determined by the forwarding type are defined in correspondence with routing information which is found upon reception of a packet, for converting a header of a reception packet in accordance with the packet forwarding type and the output routing information obtained by a table search. | 12-31-2009 |
20100002699 | PACKET TAGGING FOR EFFECTIVE MULTICAST CONTENT DISTRIBUTION - A transmitter of network data sends packets with packet type tags in their headers to indicate to a receiver the data type, content type, or priority type of the packet so that packets that are not required by the host processor can be easily screened by the receiver, relieving the host processor of the processing of packets it does not need. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002700 | Methods and Systems for Network Packet Routing Using Embedded Geographic Routing Information - Systems and methods for network packet routing using geographic information, for example, for routing packets in an IP communication network using geographic routing information embedded in a packet's IP address. One method comprises assigning a device's geographic location and including in its IP address a subnet prefix and a portion comprising an identifier indicative of the device' geographic location. One method facilitates routing of a packet by addressing the packet to a destination device with an IP address comprising a subnet prefix and a portion comprising an identifier indicative of the device's geographic location. The method may further comprise routing the packet from a source device to the destination device using the identifier. One embodiment is a system of a subnet of IP compatible nodes. One or more of these node devices are assigned an IP address comprising a subnet prefix identifying its respective subnet and a portion comprising an identifier indicative of its geographic location. One or more router nodes may be capable of using the geographic location of an IP address in a packet to route the packet, for example to select to which subsequent node to send the packet. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002701 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MEDIA COMMUNICATION THROUGH NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION - A method for media communication through NAT includes assigning a relay port and sending a command to a media relay server by a soft switch device, amending signaling messages of a caller IP terminal and a callee IP terminal so that media packets of the caller IP terminal and the callee IP terminal are transmitted to the media relay server using the soft switch device, and receiving the media packets on the relay port, recording IP addresses, and establishing corresponding connection of the caller IP terminal and the callee IP terminal for relaying the following media packets as the media relay server. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002702 | FRAME FORWARDING APPARATUS - A MVAC spoofed frame or a loop frame generated by a user is prevented from obstructing communication and the source port ID of a fraud is reported to the network administrator. A MAC frame forwarding apparatus adds the input port ID and the source MAC address of a received frame. The MAC frame forwarding apparatus has a frame forwarding management table and a frame discarding management table. The frame discarding management table has a MAC address to be discarded, indicating a received frame to be discarded if the address matches the source MAC address of the received frame, a target port ID, and the number of discarded frames. A management apparatus discards a received frame if the source MAC address matches the MAC address to be discarded and counts the number of discarded frames. If the number of discarded frames exceeds a predetermined level, the port ID, the MAC address, and the number of discarded frames are reported to the management apparatus, and the source port of the fraud is reported to the administrator. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002703 | Packet Relay Device And Method For Transferring Packet Therein - A packet relay device receives an input packet via a first communication port out of a plurality of communication ports of the packet relay device and transmits the input packet via a second communication port out of the plurality of communication ports. The packet relay device includes a learning table storage, a header adder, a discard determiner, and a packet reducer. The learning table storage stores a source address contained in the input packet, in association with an input port identifier capable of identifying the first communication port. The header adder adds an internal transfer header containing the input port identifier to the input packet to generate an internal transfer packet. The discard determiner determines whether to discard the internal transfer packet. The packet reducer reduces the internal transfer packet to preserve at least the source address and the input port identifier upon determining to discard the internal transfer packet. | 01-07-2010 |
20100008361 | CARRIER'S CARRIER WITHOUT CUSTOMER-EDGE-TO-CUSTOMER-EDGE BORDER GATEWAY PROTOCOL - According to one aspect of the present invention, a method includes obtaining a first advertisement at a first provider edge (PE) device from a first customer edge (CE) device that is associated with a virtual private network, and sending a second advertisement on a control plane path associated with a border gateway protocol after obtaining the first advertisement. The first PE device has a routing and forwarding table. The first advertisement identifies a plurality of local routes associated with the first VPN, and includes a first indication that information relating to the plurality of local routes is not to be stored in the routing and forwarding table. The second advertisement identifies the local routes, an address of the first CE device, and the first CE device as a next hop. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008362 | PROTOCOL CIRCUIT LAYER - A protocol circuit layer is described. The protocol circuit layer may employ a routing layer to determine optimal routes when establishing a circuit. The circuit layer may employ a link layer to send data packets over links to other network nodes. A naming layer may employ circuits to establish a distributed database of associations between network node addresses and their network locations. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008363 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DISTRIBUTE NETWORK IP TRAFFIC - Example methods and apparatus to distribute network IP traffic are disclosed. A disclosed example method includes receiving a first IP control packet at an input of a first server, the first IP control packet being received from a first router, selecting a second router within a router array associated with the first router to send the first IP control packet, the first server selecting the second router by matching a destination IP address of the first IP control packet to a first IP address subspace associated with the second router, transmitting the first IP control packet to the second router, and updating a forwarding table in the first router by associating the destination IP address of the first IP control packet with a first control path from the first router to the second router. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008364 | Methods and apparatus to limit transmission of data to a localized area - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for limiting transmission of data to a localized area in a networked environment. In an example method, a request to transmit data from a source device to a sink device is received. If the data to be transmitted is localized data, a time to live value associated with the data is set to first predetermined value. If the data to be transmitted is not localized data, a time to live value associated with the data is set to a second predetermined value. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008365 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSPARENT LAN SERVICES IN A PACKET NETWORK - A network apparatus includes a customer network portion having a customer premises equipment (CPE) bridge configured to connect to internal network entities of the customer network portion and to edge bridges of a provider network portion interconnecting separate customer network portions. The CPE bridge is configured to determine a transparent local area network service (TLS) for a packet received from one of the internal network entities based on a media access control (MAC) address of a destination of the packet in a different separate customer network portion. The CPE bridge is also configured to modify the packet to indicate the determined TLS, for the provider network portion to utilize to transmit the packet based on the determined TLS to a second CPE bridge associated with the destination, without the provider network utilizing the destination MAC address. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008366 | MESSAGE TRANSFER PROGRAM, MESSAGE TRANSFER METHOD, AND MESSAGE TRANSFER SYSTEM - A transmitting apparatus extracts header information from messages stored in a queue to generate a digest by collecting the extracted header information. The transmitting apparatus transmits the digest to receiving apparatuses specified by address information stored in a address information storage unit. Upon receiving a message obtaining request specifying any header information contained in the digest from any of receiving apparatuses, the transmitting apparatus reads out a message corresponding to the specified header information from the queue to transmit the message to the receiving apparatus that transmitted the message obtaining request. The receiving apparatus stores therein receiving conditions that specifies a message to be received from the transmitting apparatus and searches the digest received from the transmitting apparatus for the header information that satisfies the receiving conditions. The receiving apparatus transmits a message obtaining request that contains the retrieved header information that satisfies the receiving conditions to the transmitting apparatus. | 01-14-2010 |
20100014521 | ADDRESS CONVERSION DEVICE AND ADDRESS CONVERSION METHOD - It is possible to perform access from a global network side to a private network side so as to realize mutual communication between the global network and the private network while maintaining security. A table setting unit ( | 01-21-2010 |
20100014522 | Method for Managing Communication Connections By Network Address Translating (NAT) Network Nodes - The invention relates to a method for managing communication connections in a communication system, comprising the following steps: generation of a connection request with a source network address internally valid in the communication system, over at least one network address translating network node to a network element outside the communication system, acceptance of a connection confirmation with a valid network address of a network element outside the communication system, providing the source network address internally valid in the communication system an the network address valid outside the communication system to a connection entry provided on the network element outside the communication system. | 01-21-2010 |
20100020798 | True Ring Networks With Gateway Connections Using MAC Source Address Filtering - A method in a network device implements source address filtering, including gateway address filtering, to enable network devices to be configured in a true Ethernet ring network. By implementing source address filtering or source address filtering with gateway address filtering, a true ring network can be formed using Ethernet protocols where all the links between the network devices in the ring are active paths while avoiding data packets being switched endlessly around the ring. In one embodiment, a data packet in the true ring network is terminated when the source address of the data packet matches the local address of the network device. In another embodiment, a data packet in the true ring network is terminated when the source address of the data packet matches the address of the gateway switch connected to the network device. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020799 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DATA FILTERING FOR DATA PACKETS - A method and system for filtering data packets, is provided. One implementation involves filtering data packets using a set of filters, each filter having a bit mask and corresponding bit values, by categorizing the filters into different groups based on their bit mask value differences, and generating a new mask of bits having corresponding bit values, applying the new mask to the incoming packet to select a filter category for the incoming packet, and filtering the incoming packet by applying the group of filters for the selected category to the incoming packet. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020800 | Communication Device - A device including: a receiving unit receiving a packet; a packet determining unit determining whether the received packet is a head fragment packet or an intermediate or last fragment packet; a search control unit using search data registered previously for searching for packet information and search data used for identifying the same fragment of the fragment packet on the same search address; and an assembly processing unit assembling the fragment packets, wherein the search control unit extracts a fragment identifier from the head fragment packet and registers the fragment identifier as the search data on the same search address as the search address of the search data registered previously for searching for the packet information and extracts the fragment identifier of the intermediate fragment packet or the last fragment packet, makes a search in a way that uses the fragment identifier as search target data, and assembles the fragment packets. | 01-28-2010 |
20100027543 | LAYER TWO MAC FLUSHING/RE-ROUTING - A method may include receiving a packet including a destination address, identifying a destination address entry based on the destination address, the destination address entry including an address identifier, comparing the address identifier to an event identifier, determining whether an event occurred based on the comparison, and forwarding the packet on an alternate path if it is determined that the event occurred. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027544 | LAYER-2 PACKET RETURN IN PROXY-ROUTER COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL ENVIRONMENTS - A Layer 2 packet return mechanism in a proxy, such as a web cache, operatively associated with a redirecting router. In a particular embodiment, the present invention provides a Layer 2 packet return mechanism in a Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP) network environment. In one embodiment, the present invention provides an efficient mechanism allowing a proxy or web cache to recognize WCCP redirected packets, forwarded using Layer 2 forwarding mechanisms, and subsequently to return unprocessed packets to the original forwarding WCCP router using a Layer 2 packet return mechanism. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027545 | DATA PATH ACCELERATION OF A NETWORK STACK - An apparatus may include a flow cache module that is arranged and configured to derive, at runtime, a custom sequence of code segments for packets belonging to a specific connection using a first packet of the specific connection and a parser module that is arranged and configured to identify packets as belonging to the specific connection using an Internet Protocol (IP) tuple of the packets, where the flow cache module is arranged and configured to apply the custom sequence of code segments to the identified packets. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027546 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING ROUTING A ROUTING REGISTRY - A method and apparatus for processing a route update in a network are disclosed. For example, the method receives at least one route update from a customer edge (CE) device by a centralized routing registry. The method identifies at least one interface of a provider edge (PE) device associated with the CE device, and forwards the at least one route update to the at least one interface of the provider edge (PE) device. | 02-04-2010 |
20100034202 | SUCCINCT REPRESENTATION OF STATIC PACKET CLASSIFIERS - A computer-implemented method of classifying packets of data transmitted over a data communications network includes providing a memory-storable packet classifier rule defined by a plurality of filters, each filter uniquely corresponding to a one of a plurality of actions to be taken in transmitting the data packets over the data communications network; and classifying a data packet according to the packet classifier rule by generating at least one supemode trie subject to a predetermined constraint for reducing accesses to a memory in which the packet classifier rule is stored. A system including a combination of hardware and software modules is provided for carrying out the method. A computer-readable storage medium is also provided for storing a computer program for carrying out the method. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034203 | Method and equipment for demultiplexing variable size protocol data units - The present invention relates to a method for demultiplexing MAC service data units encapsulated into MAC protocol data units, said MAC service data units comprising IP protocol data unit wherein said method comprises the following steps:
| 02-11-2010 |
20100040057 | COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication method for establishing a signal path between a communication apparatus in a local network and a Voice over IP server is provided. The communication method comprises sending a first Internet Protocol (IP) data packet containing private address information to a network server with a public address, the communication apparatus receiving a second IP data packet containing a VIA header, the communication apparatus determining the presence of source address information of the first IP data packet in the VIA header, and the communication apparatus failing the registration when no source address information is found. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040058 | Systems and Methods of Configuring a Resource Pool as a Network End Point - A resource pool aggregator is disclosed. The resource pool aggregator facilitates a faster data communication between resource pools. The resource pool aggregator includes a plurality of network interfaces to receive and send data packets. A packet collector module couple of the plurality of network interfaces is included to process and route the data packets. A data store coupled to the packet collector module is provided to store IP addresses of computers in the resource pools. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040059 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESTRICTING NETWORK ACCESS USING FORWARDING DATABASES - This specification describes a system that can offer, among other advantages, dynamically allowing or rejecting non-DHCP packets entering a switch. In addition, a FDB is commonly used by a bridge or switch to store an incoming packet's source MAC address and its port number, then later on if the destination MAC address of another incoming packet matching any entry in FDB will be forwarded to its associated port. Using the techniques described herein, not only this will be completely transparent to user, the techniques can also result in an increase in switch performance by blocking unwanted traffic at an earlier stage of forwarding process and freeing up other processing units at a later stage, like switch fabric or packet processing stages. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040060 | FAST EMULATION OF MAC TABLE FLUSHING FOR ELAN UNICASTS - According to one general aspect, an apparatus may include a plurality of ports, a port forwarding processor, and a queue controller. In some embodiments, the plurality of ports may be configured to receive and forward packets within a communications network. In various embodiments, the port forwarding processor may be configured to determine a destination port associated with a received packet. In one embodiment, the queue controller may be configured to define at least one emulated local area network (ELAN) via a respective service member set that identifies which ports are members of the service member set, determine whether or not the destination port is a permitted member of the service member set, and, if the destination port associated with the received packet is not a permitted member of the service member set, flood the received packet to the permitted members of the service member set. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040061 | MPLS TRANSPORT NETWORK SCHEME - A method of partitioning the header stack of a data packet, said header stack conforming to a label switching protocol and comprising a plurality of headers each of which comprises a label field to which a label value is assignable to enable a label switching node to route said packet in a network routing domain of label switching protocol in a communications system comprising a plurality of networks, the method comprising the steps of: receiving said packet at an edge node of a routing domain in said communications system; and processing the label header stack at the edge node to add a new stack entry having a label field comprising a value which delimits the header stack entries between a stack domain configurable by said node belonging to a first routing domain of said label switching protocol and at least one other stack domain configurable by a node belonging to another routing domain of said communications system, whereby a MPLS transport network scheme can be implemented. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040062 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FORWARDING DATA UNITS IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A network device ( | 02-18-2010 |
20100040063 | GENERALIZED SERIALIZATION QUEUE FRAMEWORK FOR PROTOCOL PROCESSING - A method for processing packets. The method includes receiving a first packet, wherein the first packet is associated with a first protocol, classifying the first packet using a protocol associated with the first packet, sending the first packet to a first receive ring based on the classification, sending the first packet from the first receive ring to a first virtual network interface card (VNIC) based on an operating mode, sending the first packet from the first VNIC to a first protocol specific virtual network stack (VNS), wherein the first protocol specific VNS is configured to only process packets associated with the first protocol, and processing the first packet by the first protocol specific VNS to obtain a first processed packet. | 02-18-2010 |
20100046517 | Address translator using address translation information in header area on network layer level and a method therefor - An address translator carries out address translation between a private address and a global address on a source address or a destination address included in the header of a received packet. The translator includes an address translation processor for applying address translation information to the header area of the received packet on a network layer level and carrying out address translation on the network layer level by means of the address translation information. Thus, the translator can establish high transparency, high possibility to establish interconnection, impartial assurance for users, high throughput and high availability, and thus provide open measures minimizing interrupt actions of any communication as well as possible. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046518 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A physical frame is constructed, the physical frame including a medium access control super-frame payload which in turn includes a plurality of medium access control frames. With respect to the constructed physical frame, virtual carrier sense information is set in the plurality of medium access control frame so that a result of carrier sense is identical to another by virtual carrier sense based on the plurality of medium access control frames in the medium access control super-frame payload. The physical frame in which the virtual carrier sense information has been set is transmitted to a destined communication apparatus. | 02-25-2010 |
20100054250 | RELAY APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING CLIENT DEVICE WITH SERVER - A simple means is used to realize a virtual network communication via an home network and Internet. A relay device | 03-04-2010 |
20100054251 | METHOD OF PROCESSING PACKET FOR IMPROVING PERFORMANCE OF ETHERNET SWITCH - Provided is a method of processing a packet for improving performance of an Ethernet switch. According to the present invention, a routine of searching a virtual local area network (VLAN) table by a decapsulation microblock and a bridge microblock may be performed by a core component when a core component generates tables and thus the number of memory accesses may be reduced. Also, VLAN port state information of an input port and VLAN port tagging information of an output port may be stored in metadata and may be transmitted to a next microblock. Accordingly, a duplicate memory access routine of the bridge microblock and an encapsulation microblock may be removed and thus an access time delay may be reduced, thereby improving performance of an Ethernet switch. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054252 | System and method for external resolution of packet transfer information - When a packet transfer equipment receives a packet, it extracts several types of information contained in the received packet such as the destination IP address and the destination port number and, using the extracted information as the key, inquires of a packet transfer method resolution server about the information related to the packet transfer method. The server keeps the correspondences between several types of information contained in the packet and one or more type of information related to the packet transfer method in the database and, in response to the inquiry from the packet transfer equipment, replies one or more type of information related to the packet transfer method. The packet transfer equipment rewrites several types of information such as the destination IP address and the destination port number according to one or more type of information obtained and transfers the received packet. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054253 | ARP PACKET PROCESSING METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE - An Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packet processing method, a communication system and a device are disclosed. The method includes: receiving an ARP packet, and judging the type of the ARP packet; when the ARP packet is an ARP request, responding to the ARP request if an entry corresponding to the ARP request is found in a local ARP table; and when the ARP packet is an ARP response, reporting the ARP response if an entry corresponding to the ARP response is found in the local ARP table and a reporting parameter in the entry indicates permission of reporting; or discarding the ARP response if no entry corresponding to the ARP response is found in the ARP table. | 03-04-2010 |
20100061370 | Systems and Methods for Optimized Route Caching - A method for optimized route caching includes comparing a destination address of a network packet to a first set of prefixes in a routing cache, and comparing the destination address to a second set of prefixes in a full routing table when a longest matching prefix for the destination address is not found in the routing cache. The method further includes copying the longest matching prefix and a set of sub-prefixes of the longest matching prefix from the full routing table to the routing cache, and forwarding the network packet. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061371 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND PROTOCOLS FOR SECURING DATA IN TRANSIT OVER NETWORKS - Methods, systems, and protocols are described for securing data in transit over networks. A communication session is initiated between a client and a server. One or more communication channels can be set up between the client and the server. Each established communication channel may have zero or more intermediary nodes that are selected by the client or by the server to process information exchanged between the client and the server via the communication channels. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061372 | ROUTER DEVICE AND SCALABILITY IMPROVEMENT METHOD FOR USE THEREIN - A router device has a line relay processing unit including a PUSH processing unit for adding a label to a frame and forwarding the frame and a POP processing unit for removing the label from the frame and forwarding the frame, and a relay processing unit including a SWAP processing unit for swapping the label of the frame and forwarding the frame. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061373 | ROUTE SELECTING METHOD AND ROUTER APPARATUS - A route selecting method includes performing a route search for obtaining route information from destination information contained in a received packet; attaching the route information obtained by the route search to the received packet; storing the packet having the route information in a buffer; reading the packet stored in the buffer sequentially from the route information attached to the packet; | 03-11-2010 |
20100067529 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR MESSAGE PROCESSING - A message processing method, device, and system are provided in the embodiments of the present invention. The method comprises: receiving service messages and identifying the protocol type of the service messages; performing protocol adaptation according to the protocol type; and reconstructing the content of the service messages after protocol adaptation according to the corresponding content reconstructing policies and sending the service messages after content reconstructing. The present invention implements information embedment into the content over different protocols without proxy server settings. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067530 | DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PREVENTING PACKET PROLIFERATION IN A MULTI-DEVICE LINK AGGREGATE NETWORK - A Provider Edge PE | 03-18-2010 |
20100074256 | SERVICE RECOGNITION METHOD OF ROUTER IN IPV6 ENVIRONMENT - Provided is a service recognition method of a router in IPv6 environment, allowing a router to facilitate access of a mobile terminal to various services by using service information of a service header and identification information of the mobile terminal included in an IPv6 packet transmitted from the mobile terminal. The service recognition method includes: a) looking up predefined service cache by using service identification of IPv6 packet as index key of the service cache when the IPv6 packet including the service ID in a service header is received from the mobile terminal; b) changing destination address into address of the service server when the address of the service server and service control information are determined through the lookup of the service-cache to request service and perform service control; and c) routing to the mobile terminal by using the IPv6 packet when service response is transmitted from the service server. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074257 | DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING FREQUENCY SELECTIVE BASEBAND AND METHOD THEREOF - Provided are a digital communication system using frequency selective baseband and a method thereof. A transmitter of the digital communication system, includes: a preamble/header transmission processing unit for spreading a preamble for frame synchronization and a header including data information; a data transmission processing unit for spreading data by using spread codes having dominant frequency in a desired frequency band, i.e., frequency selective spread codes; and a multiplexer for multiplexing the spreaded preamble and the spreaded header from the preamble/header transmission processing unit and the frequency selective spreaded data from the data transmission processing unit and transmitting the multiplexed signal in digital. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074258 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING ADDRESSES IN A NETWORK - Disclosed is a method for managing addresses in a network. The network includes a plurality of nodes. The method includes receiving at a first node, a node capability index value of a second node, from the second node. Further, the method includes determining at the first node, a set of addresses to be assigned to the second node based on the node capability index value of the second node. Thereafter, the method includes assigning the set of addresses to the second node by the first node. A system for managing the addresses in the network is also disclosed. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074259 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A ROUTER HAVING MULTIPLE PROCESSING PATHS - A method for processing a packet having a header and a payload, the method including filtering the header to determine needs indicated by the packet header, selecting one of a time sensitive logical processing path, a non-time-sensitive logical processing path and a special needs logical processing path in response to the needs indicated by the packet header and processing the filtered packet header on the selected logical processing path. | 03-25-2010 |
20100080222 | AUTOMATIC RD REWRITE TECHNIQUE TO ACHIEVE FAST CONVERGENCE IN INTER-AS NETWORKS - A virtual private network (VPN) is formed with a pair of autonomous systems (ASes) connected by each having at least two autonomous system border routers (ASBRs) connected to the corresponding ASBRs at the other AS, referred to as an Option B VPN-IPv4 network. Route reflectors (RRs) only reflect the best Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) paths, providing no backup BGP paths for fast convergence. Advantageously, an automatic route distinguisher (RD) rewrite component at the ASBRs creates unique prefixes and advertises the original RD as transitive attribute in an update message to external AS peers. Each RD gets mapped to another unique prefix at the ASBR and also that two ASBRs will create different unique prefixes. Thus, the route reflector sees different prefixes and reflects all of them. The ingress provider edge (PE) router can import the prefixes and correctly obtain the alternate paths for fast convergence. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080223 | EFFICIENT ACL LOOKUP ALGORITHMS - A rule management system and methods are disclosed. A rule management system includes a processor and an interface for receiving data comprising a plurality of data fields. The processor includes in a data structure nodes corresponding to combinations of first and second data field values. The data structure includes a node for each combination of first and second data field values for which there exists at least one rule and does not include at least one node corresponding to at least one combination of first and second data field values for which there does not exist a rule. The processor associates rules with each node of the data structure. A node and an associated set of rules for processing a data packet may be identified by determining first and second indices into the data structure that correspond to first and second data field values of the received data packet. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080224 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PACKET CLASSIFICATION BASED ON POLICY VECTORS - In one embodiment, a method, comprising producing a first policy vector based on a first portion of a data packet received at a multi-stage switch. The method also includes producing a second policy vector based on a second portion of the data packet different than the first portion of the data packet. A third policy vector is produced based on a combination of at least the first policy vector and at least the second policy vector. The third policy vector including a combination of bit values configured to trigger an element at the multi-stage switch to process the data packet. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080225 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ROUTING USING MULTI-STAGE ROUTE ENTRY LOOKUP - The invention relates to a method for routing packets. The method includes receiving a first packet to route, obtaining a first route entry using a first IP address associated with the first packet, where the first route entry includes a first prefix, a first route nexthop generation (RNG) and a first route nexthop pointer (RNP) to a second route entry. The method further includes comparing a route generation (RG) for the second route entry with the first RNG where the RG for the second route entry and the first RNG are equal, obtaining a first neighbor cache entry (NCE) from a first NCE pointer (NP) stored in the first route entry, and routing the first packet using the ARP information in the first NCE, where a route dependency list pointer (RDLP) in the second route entry points to the first route entry. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080226 | SERVICE PATH SELECTION IN A SERVICE NETWORK - A service chain system is provided. The system includes a packet of data that is operable to pass through a network of service nodes as defined by a service chain; and a service classification device that is operable to change the service chain based on a system performance. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080227 | Network device with proxy address resolution protocol - A network device includes a proxy ARP (address resolution protocol) unit for comparing a target IP (Internet protocol) address contained in an ARP request frame with a first set of IP addresses in a proxy ARP table of the proxy ARP unit, and for generating an ARP reply frame containing a MAC (media access control) address of the network device according to a result of the comparison. In addition, the network device includes a routing table for storing a second set of IP addresses for IP packet routing. Furthermore, the network device includes a processing unit coupled between the proxy ARP unit and the routing table. The processing unit is operable for receiving the ARP request frame, assigning an IP address to a host logging onto the network device, and updating the assigned IP address into the proxy ARP table and the routing table respectively. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080228 | Demand-based distribution of internet protocol routing information across a network - Systems and methods are described that disassociate Internet route table growth from the ability of a router to maintain service. A network operator may base their network design using predetermined devices implemented from the beginning of service as constrained routers. This eliminates concern that these devices would require upgrade or replacement in the future. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080229 | METHOD OF EXCHANGING INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK, CORRESPONDING COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method of performing transactions in a communication network in which is exchanged between Intellectual Property (IP) cores has information transported in packets which include a header for transporting control information and one or more payloads transporting content. A versatile packet format is used which is adapted to transport different traffic patterns generated by the IP cores using different protocols for simple interoperability between the IP cores and also providing configurability of the granularity arbitration process to correct crossing the routers in the communication network. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080230 | TRANSLATOR FOR IP NETWORKS, NETWORK SYSTEM USING THE TRANSLATOR, AND IP NETWORK COUPLING METHOD THEREFOR - A translator for coupling a first IPv4 network and a second IPv6 network having different addressing architectures for IP addresses so as not to exhaust the IP addresses of one of the two networks, a network system using the translator, and a network coupling method. When a packet is transferred from the IPv6 network to the IPv4 network, the translator assigns any of previously prepared IPv4 addresses to an IPv6 address stored in a source storing field of the IPv6 packet. The assigned address is stored in a source storing field of an IPv4 packet. A packet translation unit assigns the foregoing IPv6 address to an IPv4 address stored in a destination storing field of the IPv4 packet, when a packet is transferred from the IPv4 network to the IPv6 network, and stores this address in a destination storing field of the IPv6 packet. | 04-01-2010 |
20100085968 | Routing Data in a Computing Device - A computing device comprises an architecture | 04-08-2010 |
20100085969 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK, INFORMATION PROCESSOR AND ADDRESS ASSIGNING METHOD - A communication network of the present invention includes: a plurality of superordinate nodes | 04-08-2010 |
20100085970 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING MULTICAST COMMUNICATION - A method of providing multicast communication between a home domain and a mobile device visiting a foreign domain comprises receiving a request to participate in a multicast session from the mobile device and registering the mobile device, from which the request was received, with a sub-session associated with the requested multicast session. The method further comprises providing details of the sub-session to the mobile device; and upon subsequent receipt of a multicast packet corresponding to the multicast session, encapsulating the received multicast packet within a sub-session packet, the sub-session packet comprising the sub-session address as its destination address, and sending the sub-session packet to a care-of address for the mobile device. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085971 | COMPUTER TRACKING AND LOCKING - A method and system are provided for locating a device connected to a network. The method comprises querying the network to determine an address of the device connected to the network; accessing network address information to determine a switch IP address and a switch port associated with the address of the device; and correlating the switch IP address and switch port with a physical location of the device within the network. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085972 | METHOD AND ROUTING DEVICE FOR ADVERTISING ROUTING INFORMATION - A method for advertising routing information by a routing device includes: checking whether a routing device is active; by the routing device, generating routing information, and marking the routing information with a check result; and advertising the routing information. With the present invention, a route attribute of routing information is set, so that the routing information can reflect the active or standby state of the active routing device and standby routing device; after the routing information is advertised, the routing of a remote routing device is affected. Thus, the remote routing device always selects the active routing device to forward packets, which ensures the reachability and connectivity of the network. | 04-08-2010 |
20100091772 | PROVIDING IPTV MULTICASTS - A method of operating a Reliable Transmission Protocol switch node to provide an IPTV multicast. IP packets transporting an encrypted media stream are received from an IPTV Head-end. The media stream contains complete image frames. Unencrypted identifiers identifying packets containing complete image frame data are also received. The received packets are stored in a buffer, and on receipt of a request from a media renderer to provide the IPTV multicast, the packet(s) containing the last complete image frame in the media stream and all subsequent packets are sent to the media renderer. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091773 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING NETWORK-CONNECTED USER - A system and method for identifying a network-connected user are disclosed. The method includes connecting a user end device to a routing device and guiding the user end device to a specific routing path by the routing device according to a programmed file of the user end device, thereby overcoming the drawbacks of prior techniques in which routing devices configured by ISPs can only forward data packets based on IP addresses and a routing table, being unable to make routing orientations according to characteristics of the data packets. The present invention facilitates management of data packets of specific network users and can provide more flexible combinations of service content. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091774 | Dynamically assigning packet flows - In general, in one aspect, the disclosure describes a method includes accessing data of an egress packet belonging to a flow, storing data associating the flow with at least one queue based on a source of the data of the egress packet. The method also includes accessing an ingress packet belonging to the flow, performing a lookup of the at least one queue associated with the flow, and enqueueing data of the ingress packet to the at least one queue associated with the flow. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091775 | PACKET SWITCHING SYSTEM - A packet switching system includes a forwarding processing unit determining a destination of an input packet by analyzing the input packet and outputting it as an output packet, the forwarding processing unit comprises an ingress interface card checking if the input packet has a sequential cyclic number and an egress interface card creating a sequential cyclic number and assigning it to the output packet. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091776 | Packet Processing Device, Frame Control Method, And Communication Device - A packet processing device for processing data conveyed by at least one data block including a plurality of packets including a control packet having control data, includes: a packet processor for receiving and storing the data block; and a controller for processing data in each data block stored in the packet processor, wherein the controller processes each of the packets in a data block successively received by the packet processor packet by packet until the controller finds a control packet among the processed packets in the data block, and upon finding of the control packet in the data block, the controller collectively processes remainder of the data in the data block. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091777 | BURST PROCESSING MODEM AND RELATED METHODS - A burst processing modem and related methods. Implementations of a first method of demodulating bursts from a plurality of channels may include receiving a plurality of channels from a received beam and separating the plurality of channels and storing a plurality of frames in a random access memory (RAM) array with a channelizer where each frame of the plurality of frames includes one or more bursts. The method may include serially reading, using a demodulator in response to receiving a timing signal, a desired burst from a frame stored in the RAM array wherein a burst time plan identifying the desired burst is used by a receive frame state machine to generate the timing signal. The method may include demodulating and decoding the desired burst using a demodulator and a decoder to produce a quantity of packet data, and sending the quantity of packet data to a specified destination. | 04-15-2010 |
20100098080 | Payload Header Suppression with Conditional Field Suppression - A conditional payload header suppression is disclosed to improve compression, by providing the flexibility to dynamically introduce fields/header bytes, which change temporarily or infrequently in packets. The embodiment also uses a dynamic mask as part of the payload header suppression packet to indicate which of the conditionally suppressed header bytes are present in the packet sent over the air or the communication medium. An embodiment of this invention increases the header compression for packets such as IP/UDP/RTP (VOIP) and TCP ACK in communication networks, such as WiMax. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098081 | LONGEST PREFIX MATCHING FOR NETWORK ADDRESS LOOKUPS USING BLOOM FILTERS - Methods and systems for performing parallel membership queries to Bloom filters for Longest Prefix Matching, where address prefix memberships are determined in sets of prefixes sorted by prefix length. Hash tables corresponding to each prefix length are probed from the longest to the shortest match in the vector, terminating when a match is found or all of the lengths are searched. The performance, as determined by the number of dependent memory accesses per lookup, is held constant for longer address lengths or additional unique address prefix lengths in the forwarding table given that memory resources scale linearly with the number of prefixes in the forwarding table. For less than 2 Mb of embedded RAM and a commodity SRAM, the present technique achieves average performance of one hash probe per lookup and a worst case of two hash probes and one array access per lookup. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098082 | METHOD FOR APPLICATION BROADCAST FORWARDING FOR ROUTERS RUNNING REDUNDANCY PROTOCOLS - A method for application broadcast forwarding for routers running redundancy protocols in a network is provided. The network includes a first router running at least one program instance of a redundancy protocol at one interface, and a second router running at least one program instance of the redundancy protocol at one interface. A relay agent is enabled on both the first and second routers. The method includes, for each router, determining at least one preference ID for the router, determining a broadcast ID of each incoming broadcast packet, matching the broadcast ID of the incoming broadcast packet with the at least one preference ID of the router, and relaying the incoming broadcast packet from a first network domain to a second network domain if the broadcast ID of the incoming broadcast packet matches one preference ID of the router. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098083 | Packet transfer device, packet transfer method, packet transfer program and communication device - A packet transfer device includes: an address conversion unit that allocates a global address to a plurality of private addresses of the plurality of private networks and converts address information and a port number included in a header of a received packet;
| 04-22-2010 |
20100098084 | INTERNAL SUBSTITUTION BI-LEVEL ADDRESSING FOR COMPATIBLE PUBLIC NETWORKS - Communications traffic in a network is addressed. An original signal comprising an embedded destination service address is receiving at an ingress capable network device of the network. A database server is queried to obtain an internal routing address corresponding to the embedded destination service address. A transit signal corresponding to the original signal and including at least the embedded destination service address is routed through the network to an egress capable network device of the network according to the internal routing address. The transit signal enables the egress capable network device to restore the embedded destination service address and to forward the transit signal from the network. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098085 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR IMPLEMENTING ACTIVE/STANDBY SWITCHOVER - A method for implementing an active/standby switchover includes: sending received data to an active device corresponding to a physical IP address in a mapping relation with a preset communication identification (ID); changing the physical IP address of the active device in the mapping relation with the communication ID to the physical IP address of a standby device for switchover when determining that the system needs to perform the active/standby switchover; sending the received data to the standby device corresponding to the physical IP address in the mapping relation with the preset communication ID after the system performs the active/standby switchover. A system and device for implementing an active/standby switchover are also disclosed. With the method, system, and device provided by the present invention, a long interruption of ongoing services is prevented when the active/standby switchover is performed. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098086 | Preventing Forwarding of a Packet to a Control Plane - This invention includes tools that prevent forwarding of a packet to a control plane of a packet switch. The tools receive a packet comprising indicia suggesting that the packet be forwarded to a control plane of a packet switch. After receiving the packet, the tools may modify the packet to prevent the packet from being forwarded to the control plane, intercept the packet before it is received by the control plane, or otherwise prevent the packet from being forwarded to the control plane. The tools may also forward the packet from a source port of a packet switch to a destination port of the packet switch without forwarding the packet to the control plane of the packet switch. | 04-22-2010 |
20100103935 | USING A CACHE OF OUTGOING PACKET IDENTIFIERS TO RECOVER FROM A PROTOCOL ERROR IN GTP-U - A process of using a cache of outgoing packet identifiers to recover from a protocol error includes assigning a receive identifier associated with a user entity to a traffic stream at a receive node. The receive identifier is sent to a transmit node. The transmit node is instructed to associate the receive identifier with a receive plurality of data packets of the traffic stream. The transmit identifier associated with the user entity is assigned to the traffic stream at the transmit node. The transmit node identifier, the receive node identifier, and the address of the receive node are stored in a transmit cache at the transmit node for each of the receive plurality of data packets. The receive plurality of data packets is sent from the transmit node to the receive node. An error message is received at the transmit node from the receive node, indicating that the receive identifier was not recognized. The transmit cache is searched for the transmit node identifier using the receive node identifier and the address of the receive node. The user entity associated with the transmit node identifier is identified, and the user entity is removed. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103936 | Self-configuration of a forwarding table in an access node - The present invention relates to an access node ( | 04-29-2010 |
20100103937 | SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING GENETIC ALGORITHM TO PROVIDE CONSTRAINT-BASED ROUTING OF PACKETS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A Path Generator connects to a communication network and uses genetic algorithms to assign flows to paths. Genotypes encode flow to path assignments for working and protection paths. Genotype fitness functions are computed as a weighted sum of constraint fitness functions. Each constraint fitness function evaluates the degrees to which the genotype is a satisfactory solution. The system can be used for network modeling. It can also receive requests for on-demand assignment of flows and on-demand rerouting of flows. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103938 | Context Sharing Between A Streaming Processing Unit (SPU) and A Packet Management Unit (PMU) In A Packet Processing Environment - A context-selection mechanism is provided for selecting a best context from a pool of contexts for processing a data packet. The context selection mechanism comprises, an interface for communicating with a multi-streaming processor; circuitry for computing input data into a result value according to logic rule and for selecting a context based on the computed value and a loading mechanism for preloading the packet information into the selected context for subsequent processing. The computation of the input data functions to enable identification and selection of a best context for processing a data packet according to the logic rule at the instant time such that a multitude of subsequent context selections over a period of time acts to balance load pressure on functional units housed within the multi-streaming processor and required for packet processing. In preferred aspects, programmable singular or multiple predictive rules of logic are utilized in the selection process. | 04-29-2010 |
20100111087 | Method and an Arrangement for Handling a Service Request in a Multimedia Network - A method and arrangement for handling a service request in a session control unit in a multimedia network. Upon receiving the service request from a user equipment, the session control unit checks a service profile associated with a user-identity of the service request in order to find an application server to which the service request is to be routed. Prior to routing the service request, an ensuring entity ensures the service request will include a primary user-identity. In the application server, the primary user-identity is used to find stored data, which is necessary for executing the requested service. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111088 | MESH NETWORK - A mesh network has a plurality of nodes that can be arranged in a two or three dimensional arrangement. The address-based mesh routing scheme sends a full address and full data on every clock cycle. The system can include broadcasting to columns, rows, planes, or all system elements using a single data transaction. A selectable routing scheme can be random, fixed, or adaptive, depending on user configuration. A registered transaction-weight scheme is provided that can stall transactions in a mesh without having to resend data. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111089 | METHODS FOR EXCHANGING DATA IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND APPARATUSES UTILIZING THE SAME - A communication system is provided. A first communications device transmits at least one first message including predetermined bit sequences. A second communications device determines one or more antenna weighting vectors (AWVs) and one or more bitloading vectors (BLVs) by using the first message in accordance with a predetermined rule and transmits a second message including information pertinent to the AWVs and the BLVs to the first communications device. The first communications device further communicates with the second communications device about an AWV selected from the AWVs and the first and second communications devices apply the selected AWV to the corresponding antennas before exchanging data. The data includes a header carrying information pertinent to a BLV selected from the BLVs used to encode the data and a payload is transmitted to the second communications device. The second communications device decodes the data in accordance with the selected BLV. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111090 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING TRAU FRAME OVER A PACKET NETWORK - A method for transmitting a transcoder & rate adaptation unit (TRAU) frame over a packet network according to one embodiment of the present invention includes: receiving a packet TRAU (P_TRAU) frame sent from an opposite device; parsing the P_TRAU frame to obtain control information required for packet network transmission; and processing data in the P_TRAU frame according to the control information. A system and device for transmitting a TRAU frame over a packet network are also provided. With the P_TRAU frame that carries the control information required for packet network transmission, the Abis interface may use the packet mode instead of the time division multiplex (TDM) mode for transmission bearer and the delay, jitter, packet loss, and disorder in the packet mode are solve | 05-06-2010 |
20100118875 | INTERCONNECTING NETWORK PROCESSORS WITH HETEROGENEOUS FABRICS - A method and apparatus to perform protocol translation for a modular system may be described. | 05-13-2010 |
20100124227 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRONICALLY ROUTING DATA - Systems and methods for electronically routing data are provided. A data hub for electronically routing data may include an interface module that receives an electronic communication from a data source. The electronic communication may include a destination identifier associated with an intended destination for the communication, a source identifier associated with the data source, a command identifier associated with a command included in the communication, and a payload that includes data associated with the command. Further, the data hub may include a routing module that determines the intended destination based at least in part on the destination identifier, and routes the electronic communication to the intended destination. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124228 | REMOTE ACCESS TO LOCAL NETWORK - Multiple protocol tunnels (e.g., IPsec tunnels) are deployed to enable an access terminal that is connected to a network to access a local network associated with a femto access point. A first protocol tunnel is established between a security gateway and the femto access point. A second protocol tunnel is then established in either of two ways. In some implementations the second protocol tunnel is established between the access terminal and the security gateway. In other implementations the second protocol tunnel is established between the access terminal and the femto access point, whereby a portion of the tunnel is routed through the first tunnel. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124229 | FORWARDING PACKETS USING NEXT-HOP INFORMATION - A method may include receiving a packet associated with a flow of packets, the packet including a destination address; selecting one of a plurality of memory banks, the selected memory bank being associated with the flow of packets, wherein each of the plurality of memory banks stores the same next-hop information for forwarding the packet to the destination address; accessing, in the selected memory bank, the next-hop information for forwarding the packet to the destination address; and forwarding the packet to the destination address based on the next-hop information. | 05-20-2010 |
20100128727 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, RECEIVING APPARATUS, TRANSMITTING METHOD, AND RECEIVING METHOD - A transmitting apparatus that transmits data to a plurality of receiving apparatuses. The transmitting apparatus includes a transmission part that transmits information for extracting the data whose header is compressed, and a control part that controls the transmission part to transmit the information in a specified cycle to the one or more first receiving apparatus and to transmit the information to a second receiving apparatus at a timing independent of the specified cycle when that second receiving apparatus did not receive the information during the specified cycle. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128728 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR REMOVING MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL ADDRESSES - The present invention discloses a method, system and device for removing Media Access Control (MAC) addresses. The method includes: sending, by a first User-facing Provider Edge (UPE), a MAC Address Withdraw message, when a handover happens on an access network; receiving, by a network provider edge (NPE), the MAC Address Withdraw message; and removing, by the NPE, a Backbone Media Access Control (B-MAC) address table corresponding to a Virtual Private LAN Service (VPLS) network and forwarding the MAC Address Withdraw message, if the message carries no specific identifier; or directly forwarding, by the NPE, the MAC Address Withdraw message, if the message carries a specific identifier. In the present invention, a specific identifier is added to a MAC Address Withdraw message so as to avoid unnecessary MAC address learning by NPE and UPE devices and to reduce the impact, caused by MAC address learning, on network devices. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128729 | PACKET FORWARDING DEVICE WITH PACKET FILTER - To provide a packet forwarding device which minimizes degradation in packet forwarding performance at the time of execution of filtering there is provided a technique in which a destination decision processing unit of a destination decision and filtering unit decides whether to execute filtering on the basis of at least one of an input interface, an input port number, an output interface, and an output port number of an input packet and a plurality of pieces of information constituting the header of the packet. A filtering unit executes filtering only for a packet for which execution of filtering is decided. The packet forwarding device with the destination decision and filtering unit need not execute filtering for all packets and can minimize degradation in packet forwarding performance caused by filtering. | 05-27-2010 |
20100135299 | Method and Apparatus for Processing an Audio Signal - A method for processing an audio signal, comprising the steps of extracting an ancillary signal for generating the audio signal, an extension signal included in the ancillary signal, and header identification information indicating whether a header is included in the ancillary signal from a received bit stream, reading length information of the extension signal from the header if the header is included in the ancillary signal according to the header identification information, skipping decoding of the extension signal or not using a result of the decoding based on the length information, and generating the audio signal using the ancillary signal. Accordingly, in case of processing the audio signal by the present invention, it is able to reduce a corresponding load of operation to enable efficient processing and enhance a sound quality. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135300 | ROUTING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING DIFFERENT PATH BY SERVICE - Disclosed is a routing method and apparatus for providing a different path by service. The routing method includes determining a service identification (ID) indicating a service requested by a packet by using a header in the packet; and searching for a service forwarding table corresponding to the service ID from a plurality of service forwarding tables storing different next hops by service and determining the packet's next hop. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135301 | MOBILITY IN IP WITHOUT MOBILE IP - Not Mobile IP (NMIP) comprises methods for implementing macro-mobility in an IP network, wherein macro-mobility means the ability of a node to change its network-layer, e.g., IP, address without disturbing existing transport-layer and application-layer sessions, e.g., conversations. When two NMIP nodes establish a new NMIP session, they exchange pseudo-random numbers, or nonces, and store the nonces in a session table. When a first node changes its IP address, the first node sends to the second node an address-update message that contains the new IP address and the first node's nonce. If the received nonce matches a nonce in the session table, then the second node updates its protocol control blocks with the new IP address, and sends an address-update reply message to the first node. Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) can be used to secure or replace the exchange of nonces. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135302 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING L2/L3 PACKET - An L2/L3 packet processing and method are disclosed to process various Ethernet packets by interworking with a PBBN (Provider Backbone Bridges Network), a PBN (Provider Bridges Network), and an IPN (Internet Protocol Network). | 06-03-2010 |
20100142531 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENHANCING ROUTING IN MULTIPROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING (MPLS) - A method and a system for enhancing routing in MultiProtocol Label Switching (MPLS) are provided. The method includes obtaining signaling protocol information from a plurality of routers and storing the signaling protocol information. Further, the method includes receiving a request from a router. The request includes a destination address, a signaling protocol and at least one other constraint. Further, the method also includes determining a Signaling Protocol specific Constrained based Explicit Route (SPCER) to the destination router from the signaling protocol information, and providing the SPCER to the router. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142532 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ROUTING PACKET TRAFFIC - A system and method are disclosed for routing packet traffic. A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a Provider Edge (PE) router having a routing element that routes packet traffic between a plurality of autonomous systems according to one or more Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) tables each having a plurality of Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) Autonomous System (AS) numbers. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142533 | TRANSPARENT NETWORK SERVICE ENHANCEMENT - Embodiments of the disclosure may be used to optimize communications between a first routing device and a second routing device. The first routing device may receive a packet for forwarding towards a destination. The first routing device may modify the packet to announce the presence of the first routing device to other routing devices. Thereafter, a second routing device may receive the modified packet and recognize the presence of the first routing device. In turn, when sending a packet back towards a source address identified in the modified packet, the second routing device may modify such a packet to announce the presence of the second routing device to the first routing device. Thereafter, the first and second routing device may optimize traffic between the first and second routing device. | 06-10-2010 |
20100150157 | PEER TO MULTI-PEER ROUTING - A collaboration system using peer-to-multi-peer distribution of messages representing changes to a shared workspace. Each peer determines a distribution mechanism for messages to each of the target peers sharing the workspace. The selected distribution mechanism may depend on capabilities of a home relay associated with a peer initiating a message. Further, messages to subsets of the target peers sharing the workspace may be distributed using a session for each subset on which each message is sent only one time. The subset of target peers associated with some of the sessions may be selected so that target peers for which communication attempts have failed are grouped in the same session. In some scenarios, the initiating peer may provide multiple routing paths for target peers in a session and the home relay server may appropriately forward the message to the target peers, using one of the routing paths. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150158 | Programmable Packet Processor With Flow Resolution Logic - A programmable packet switching controller has a packet buffer, a pattern match module, a programmable packet classification engine and an application engine. The packet buffer stores inbound packets, and includes a header data extractor to extract header data from the inbound packets and to store the extracted header data in a header data cache. The header data extractor also generates a header data cache index and provides it to the packet classification engine for it to retrieve the extracted header data. The packet classification engine has a decision tree-based classification logic for classifying a packet. Each of the leaves of the tree represents a packet classification. The packet classification engine uses the header data cache index to retrieve the header data to perform multiple header checks, starting at a root of the tree and traversing branches until a leaf has been reached. The application engine has a number of programmable sub-engines arrayed in a pipelined architecture. The packet classification engine provides start indicators based on the packet classification to the programmable sub-engines to identify application programs to be executed. The sub-engines includes a source lookup engine, a destination lookup engine and a disposition engine, which are used to make a disposition decision for the inbound packets in a processing pipeline. The pattern match module is used to compare the packet to a pre-defined pattern in order to provide a disposition recommendation. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150159 | MULTI-PROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING IN A NETWORK DEVICE - A network device for processing data packets includes input logic, a register, route lookup logic and output processing logic. The input logic receives a data packet having at least one multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) tag, stores the packet and forwards a portion of the packet including the MPLS tag. The route lookup logic receives the portion of the packet, generates next hop information based on the MPLS tag and determines whether at least one MPLS tag is to be removed from the packet before the packet is to be output by the network device. The route lookup logic also modifies a start offset value in the register for each MPLS tag that is to be removed and forwards the start offset. The output processing logic receives the start offset and begins processing the data packet for output at a location identified by the start offset. | 06-17-2010 |
20100158002 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NODE, TERMINAL, PROGRAM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a communication system formed of two or more networks in which a part or all of nodes belonging to each said network form a plurality of combinations of nodes so as not to overlap with other node on the network to which each node belongs, the nodes belonging to the same combination are connected with each other and terminals are connected under the control of a part or all of the nodes belonging to the same combination, a node belonging to the combination transmits a frame received from a terminal under the control of the node itself to any of adjacent nodes on the network to which the node itself belongs and a node belonging to the same combination to which the node itself belongs and connected to the node itself. This obtains a highly reliable communication system whose desired transmission capacity can be realized at low costs and which can be restored from an abnormal state in a short time period. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158003 | SHARING OF NETWORK SECURITY AND SERVICES PROCESSING RESOURCES - Systems and methods are disclosed of routing traffic in a network that include classifying incoming data packets using the content of the incoming data packets that remains relatively consistent during a network session. These systems and methods also include ordering the incoming traffic according to at least one internet protocol address comprised within the incoming traffic, hashing the at least one internet protocol address and the destination port within the incoming traffic, and determining a destination service module for the incoming traffic. Through these systems and methods, data can be routed without the need for complete flow tables. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158004 | OFFLOADING CONTENT ROUTING COST FROM ROUTERS - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to reconfiguring communication routing architecture. A determination may be made that loading on one or more routing entities require adjustment. Adjustment may be required in situations where, for example, the amount of data to convey or the number of clients to service overcome the abilities of the router. In reconfiguring the communication routing architecture, some of the routing responsibility for the heavily loaded routers may be offloaded to neighboring routers and/or clients. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158005 | System-On-a-Chip and Multi-Chip Systems Supporting Advanced Telecommunication Functions - A system-on-chip integrated circuit (and multi-chip systems based thereon) that includes a bridge interface that provides transparent bridging of data communicated between integrated circuits. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158006 | DIFFERENTIATED PRIORITY LEVEL COMMUNICATION - Provided are methods, apparatuses and systems for providing prioritized data distribution at a customer premise. A network access component may receive priority information from a trusted source, the priority information being indicative of an association between at least one identifier and a respective priority level. The network component may determine a particular identifier associated with data received from a communication entity. The network access component may determine a particular priority level associated with the data based on the particular identifier and the priority information. The network component may also prioritize at least a portion of the data on a basis of the particular priority level. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158007 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AGGREGATING SINGLE PACKETS IN A SINGLE SESSION - A method and apparatus for aggregating single packets in a single session are disclosed. If the amount of single packets in a single session exceeds a threshold value, it is detected that attack traffic is being inputted and the single packets in the single session are aggregated into a single flow, thus preventing degradation of a network performance due to the single packets in the single session. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158008 | SWITCHING EXCHANGE - In a network system where a switching exchange accommodating an ISDN provides TDMoIP packet communication over an IP network, measures for packet loss prevention need to be taken during a period during which a TDM service is packet-transferred over the IP network. When a transmitting-end switching exchange in the above network system multiplexes TDM data, the present invention varies the degree of multiplicity in accordance with the delay in the IP network and the type of data. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158009 | HIERARCHICAL PACKET PROCESS APPARATUS AND METHOD - Provided is a hierarchical packet processing apparatus and method. In one general aspect, a packet is analyzed, divided into an upper layer and a lower layer. It is determined whether a property of the packet to be analyzed has been already analyzed or has to be re-analyzed with respect to each of the upper and lower layers of the packet. Therefore, deep packet inspection is performed only when it is required, and thus assurance of quality of service (QoS) during packet processing can be achieved, as well as reduced waste of resources. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158010 | METHOD FOR FORWARDING PACKET IN MPLS L3VPN - The present invention relates to a method for forwarding a packet which is to provide a VPN service using an IPv4 address in an MPLS network. The method for forwarding the packet according to the present invention extracts routing information including a VRF identifier from a packet, when the packet is received at one or more CE routers in the MPLS network, searches for next hop information in a forwarding table by using the VRF identifier and a prefix, substitutes the searched next hop information by destination information of the received packet, and transmits the packet to an output port. According to the present invention, since the plurality of forwarding tables for providing the VPN are provided without extending a memory, the packet forwarding can be stably performed. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158011 | REPEATER AND REPEATING METHOD - A repeater stores retrieval situation of an address retrieved as an address identical with the transmission destination address of the reception frame in association with each address registered in the learning table, refers to, when the transmission source address of the received frame is registered in the learning table, the retrieval situation of the address stored in association with a port identical with the port that receives the frame from among retrieval situations, specifies an address to be overwritten by the transmission source address of the reception frame, overwrites and registers the transmission source address of the reception frame on the specified address, and updates, when the address identical with the transmission destination address of the received frame is retrieved from the learning table, the retrieval situation stored in association with the retrieved address. | 06-24-2010 |
20100158012 | PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS AND A RECORDING MEDIUM STORING A PACKET COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A packet communication method and a packet communication system capable of making an IPv4-compatible application operating on an information processing apparatus communicate with another information processing apparatus connected to an IPv6 network without using an address translation router. In the information processing apparatus connected to the IPv6 network, an IPv4-to-IPv6 protocol conversion control function is incorporated in a LAN driver. A protocol conversion control module receives an IPv4 packet from a protocol control module. When a send destination IPv4 address contained in a header of the packet is registered in an address translation table incorporated in the protocol conversion control module, an IPv6 address is generated to be sent onto a LAN. Unless the send destination IPv4 address contained in the packet header is registered in the address translation table incorporated in the protocol conversion control module, the IPv4 packet as received is intactly sent onto the LAN. | 06-24-2010 |
20100165991 | SIMD processing of network packets - Executing a single instruction/multiple data (SIMD) instruction of a program to process a vector of data wherein each element of the packet vector corresponds to a different received packet. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165992 | Transmission system, device and method that prevent data loss - This specification discloses a transmission system, device and method that prevent data loss. The invention uses a first channel and a second channel to send same packet encapsulating same target data to a receiving end. After confirming the reception of the packet, the receiving end drops the duplicated packet. The receiving end only processes yet processed packet. This technique can reduce the chances of losing data. | 07-01-2010 |
20100172355 | Rapid I/O Traffic System - High speed networking systems such as PCI-Express and Serial Rapid I/O are based on the exchange of packets across switched networks of high speed serial links. Information in the headers of these packets indicate the kind of transaction they represent. Queuing all received packets in a single queue will cause interactions between transaction types. Indirection can be used create the effect of multiple independent queues from a shared memory. This provides efficient centralized packet storage, while allowing independent processing of different transactions types. | 07-08-2010 |
20100177774 | NEIGHBOUR DISCOVERY PROTOCOL MEDIATION - The invention is directed to providing NDP mediation over an IP interworking VLL. ICMPv6 Neighbor Discovery and Inverse Neighbor Discovery messages are intercepted by provider edge (PE) devices to learn both IPv6 interface addresses and link-layer addresses of customer edge (CE) devices before forwarding the messages to the CE devices, and in some cases after altering the messages to make them more meaningful to the receiving CE devices. In this manner, the CE device interface addresses do not need to be communicated over the LDP control link, as in IPv4 ARP Mediation. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177775 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING ETHERNET MAC CIRCUITS - An Ethernet MAC sublayer is provided for supporting Ethernet MAC circuits in an Ethernet Network. In accordance with one embodiment, an Ethernet MAC sublayer is provided for processing and setting up circuits. The MAC sublayer provides support for higher level signaling and routing applications to implement Ethernet MAC circuit functionality. The MAC sublayer provides interrupts for WAN learning and circuit setup. The MAC sublayer also provides address table entry extension to allow for usage of multiple links between nodes. The routing application is used to manage routing information, maintain a MAC to port mapping database, and manage port resources. The signaling application is used to set up and manage circuits. In accordance to various embodiments, circuits of various types and properties can be managed in the Ethernet Network. | 07-15-2010 |
20100183009 | DISCRIMINATORY MTU FRAGMENTATION IN A LOGICAL PARTITION - Communication between nodes on distinct physical computer systems typically involves fragmentation of packets, such that packet size complies with a communication protocol's specified maximum transmission unit (MTU). However, communications between logical partitions on the same computer system (“virtual nodes”) do not have to comply with a MTU. A computer system can handle packet sizes for intra-system communications between virtual nodes larger than the MTU. Functionality can be implemented to determine that a packet's source and destination are virtual nodes on the same physical machine. This can enable the system to virtually transfer packets for intra-system communication without fragmentation. | 07-22-2010 |
20100183010 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORWARDING PACKETS - A method for forwarding packets first checks a forwarding table of a bridge to find whether the destination information for a packet is included in the forwarding table. If the information is found, this packet is forwarded to the destination through a physical layer directly without passing through the bridge. This method improves the efficiency of the frame aggregation of an AP (Access Point) and enhances the throughput in a WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network). | 07-22-2010 |
20100183011 | SEQUENTIAL FRAME FORWARDING - A data center includes a switch device, an initiating system, and first and second computing systems. A frame is received at an ingress port of the switch device from the initiating system. The frame requires processing sequentially by the first and second computing systems. Identified, in response to information carried in the frame, is a first egress port through which to forward the frame to the first computer system. The frame is received in return from the first computing system after the first computing system completes processing the frame. In response to information carried in the frame received from the first computing system, a second egress port is identified through which to forward the frame to the second computer system. The frame is forwarded to the second computer system through the second egress port for processing by the second computing system before the frame is returned to the initiating system. | 07-22-2010 |
20100183012 | DATA TRANSMITTING APPARATUS AND DATA RETRANSMITTING METHOD - A data transmitting apparatus is provided for making it possible to send out a retransmitting packet at early timing even in the case where a delivery tree structure is unclear. A transmitting terminal device ( | 07-22-2010 |
20100189107 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FORMING, MAINTAINING AND/OR USING OVERLAPPING NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus related to routing in communications networks are described. Various embodiments are well suited to wireless communications systems lacking centralized control, e.g., a mobile wireless communications system supporting the dynamic formation and/or maintenance of overlapping peer-to-peer ad hoc networks. A node can establish multiple links, e.g., with different links corresponding to different overlapping networks. Next hop packet routing information, e.g., forwarding tables, are maintained on a per network basis. A node determines the next hop routing for a received packet to be forwarded based on the link upon which the packet was received, which is associated with a particular network, and the included packet destination address. The same destination address may, and sometimes does, correspond to different next hop nodes for different networks. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189108 | Method of implementing traversal of multimedia protocols through network address translation device - The present invention discloses a method of implementing traversal of multimedia protocols through Network Address Translation device, wherein the Network Address Translation (NAT) device establishes a mapping relationship between address of a terminal in a private network and address of a terminal in a public network, and enables the terminal in the private network to access the public network with a common address, so as to implement the interaction of media streams between the terminal in the private network and the terminal in the public network, in which the common address is a address of the private network for accessing the public network. | 07-29-2010 |
20100195653 | SYSTEM FOR FORWARDING A PACKET WITH A HIERARCHICALLY STRUCTURED VARIABLE-LENGTH IDENTIFIER - One embodiment provides a system that receives a packet with a hierarchically structured variable-length identifier (HSVLI). An HSVLI indicates a piece or collection of content and may be hierarchically structured, comprising contiguous components ordered from a most general level to a most specific level. The length of a respective identifier is not fixed. During operation, the system converts the HSVLI into a fixed-length key. Subsequently, the system obtains forwarding information based on one or more longest-prefix matches with a longest-prefix-match lookup engine using the fixed-length key. Next, the system forwards the packet to an output port based on the forwarding information. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195654 | SYSTEM FOR FORWARDING PACKETS WITH HIERARCHICALLY STRUCTURED VARIABLE-LENGTH IDENTIFIERS USING AN EXACT-MATCH LOOKUP ENGINE - One embodiment provides a system for forwarding packets with hierarchically structured variable-length identifiers (HSVLIs), wherein the computer includes a processor. During operation, the system converts an HSVLI into a number of fixed-length addresses, wherein the HSVLI indicates a piece of content and is hierarchically structured, and comprises contiguous components ordered from a most general level to a most specific level. In addition, the length of a respective HSVLI is not fixed. The system further performs an effective longest-prefix-match lookup by performing multiple exact-match lookups based at least on the fixed-length addresses. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195655 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FACILITATING FORWARDING A PACKET IN A CONTENT-CENTRIC NETWORK - One embodiment provides a system that facilitates forwarding a packet. During operation, the system receives a packet with a hierarchically structured variable-length identifier (HSVLI). The system then performs a lookup at a forwarding engine based at least on the packets HSVLI. The system further makes a forwarding decision based on the lookup. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195656 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - There is provided a communication apparatus which, in an ad-hoc network, when receiving control packets from a plurality of terminals, can determine whether or not there is a collision among the control packets, and, based on the determination, can be prevented from continuing to be out of the network due to a collision among the control packets transmitted from the plurality of terminals. In the communication terminal, a communication section receives a control packet which periodically comes up on a communication path. When the communication apparatus receives a plurality of control packets which are defective in at least payload portions thereof within a predetermined time period, if a control section determines that source addresses included in header portions of the control packets which are defective in the payload portions thereof include a source address which is not identical to the other source addresses, the control section determines that the control packets are transmitted from a plurality of terminals and collide with each other. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195657 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELF-ROUTING IN SYNCHRONOUS DIGITAL CROSS-CONNECTION - The present invention discloses a method for self-routing in synchronous digital cross-connection, comprising: self-routing transmitting means insert a CM data into a STM-N data stream according to a frame header indicator and a self-routing start address signal; self-routing receiving means extract the CM data from the STM-N data stream according to the frame header indicator and the self-routing start address signal, and write the CM data into a cross-connection control memory. The present invention also discloses a system for self-routing in synchronous digital cross-connection, comprising: self-routing transmitting means and self-routing receiving means, wherein, the self-routing transmitting means comprise a self-routing transmitting control unit, a first CRC checking unit and an inserting data generating unit, the self-routing receiving means comprise a self-routing extracting control unit, a second CRC checking unit and a cross-connection control memory. The present invention provides users with a self-routing scheme for synchronous digital cross-connection, which can be realized with ease, occupies less resource, has better reliability and is suitable for large capacity cross configuration. | 08-05-2010 |
20100202455 | METHOD FOR SECURE NETWORK BASED ROUTE OPTIMIZATION IN MOBILE NETWORKS - The present invention provides a method of route optimization involving a first mobile device associated with a first home gateway. One embodiment of the method is implemented in a first mobility forwarding entity and includes registering the first mobile device at the first mobility forwarding entity. The first mobile device is registered using a session key included in a registration message transmitted by the first mobile device. The embodiment also includes establishing a secure route between the first mobility forwarding entity and a terminating node using the session key. The secure route bypasses the first home gateway. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202456 | Method and Apparatus for Stream Adaption in a Packet Switched Network - A method is disclosed for use in a packet switched network, comprising carrying descriptor information relating to options for stream adaptation, for example media stream adaptation, in the packet switched network using at least one of the Next Step in Signalling, NSIS, and Resource Reservation Protocol, RSVP, signalling protocols. Carrying the descriptor information may comprise receiving (S | 08-12-2010 |
20100202457 | Highly Integrated Media Access Control - A supervisory communications device, such as a headend device within a communications network, monitors and controls communications with a plurality of remote communications devices throughout a widely distributed network. The supervisory device allocates bandwidth on the upstream channels by sending MAP messages over its downstream channel. A highly integrated media access controller integrated circuit (MAC IC) operates within the headend to provide lower level processing on signals exchanged with the remote devices. The enhanced functionality of the MAC IC relieves the processing burden on the headend CPU and increases packet throughput. The enhanced functionality includes header suppression and expansion, DES encryption and decryption, fragment reassembly, concatenation, and DMA operations | 08-12-2010 |
20100202458 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, DATA FORWARDING UNIT, AND CONTROLLER - A first communication terminal attaches information to be used to recognize whether or not header decompression processing is required and to recognize a forwarding route to a second communication terminal, to compressed data obtained through compressing a header of original data destined for the second communication terminal, and sends the compressed data to the network. Upon receipt of the compressed data, a data forwarding unit in a network recognizes, based on the information, whether or not the compressed data requires the header decompression processing and the forwarding route, and sends, if the compressed data does not require the header decompression process, the compressed data to the recognized forwarding route without decompressing the header. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202459 | COMMUNICATING METHOD BETWEEN IPv4 TERMINAL AND IPv6 TERMINAL AND IPv4-IPv6 CONVERTING APPARATUS - In an apparatus, there are provided an IP transmitting and receiving unit for transmitting and receiving an IPv4 packet and an IPv6 packet; an IP header converting unit for performing a mutual conversion of the IPv4 packet and the IPv6 packet by an IP header conversion; a DNS substituting unit for receiving a domain information capturing request sent from an IPv4 terminal or an IPv6 terminal and substituting its process; an IPv4 address capturing unit for capturing an IPv4 address from a DHCP server; and an IP address conversion information holding unit for holding an IPv6 address of the IPv6 terminal and the IPv4 address captured by the IPv4 address capturing unit in correspondence to each other. Thus, a communication with the IPv4 terminal can be executed without preliminarily fixedly allocating the IPv4 address to the IPv6 terminal. | 08-12-2010 |
20100208734 | Communications relay device, program and method, and network system - The present invention relates to a communications relay device placed between networks. The communications relay device includes a unit of translating a content of a call control packet flowing between the networks, a unit of storing translation information for translating a content of a data packet for each session, a unit of translating a data packet in accordance with the stored translation information, a unit of analyzing a content of a call control packet flowing between a first communication device placed in the first network and a communication device for call control and registering translation information, and a unit of associating two pieces of translation information generated based on call control packets relevant to a session between communication devices placed in the first network. | 08-19-2010 |
20100215041 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR IMPROVED DUAL DEVICE LOOKUP IN A ZONING SAS EXPANDER - Apparatus and methods for full address resolution in a zoning SAS expander. A single memory circuit is used in a zoning SAS expander to store zone information associated with the SAS address (e.g., WWN) of devices exchanging information through the expander. The source and destination addresses in a received SAS frame are used as inputs to the memory circuit to generate outputs of the memory circuit representing the source and destination zone group identifiers. These outputs are then applied to the zone permission table to determine the zoning permission for forwarding the frame through the expander. Pipelined logic within the expander sequences the operations of the memory circuit and the zone permissions table to account for clock cycle delays in processing of each. In one exemplary embodiment, the memory circuit is a content addressable memory (CAM). In another exemplary embodiment, the CAM also includes port routing information. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215042 | ETHERNET LINK AGGREGATION - A system and method of transmitting data across a link aggregation group, the method comprises: receiving a packet sourced from a client having a MAC header and an IP header at an input port of a first upstream switch for transmission from the first upstream switch along a link aggregation and at least two down stream switches to a server, said MAC header having a Destination MAC address and a Source MAC address, and the IP header having a Source IP address and a Destination IP address; changing the destination MAC address from a down stream destination to another down stream destination; sending the packet through a first link aggregation to a first down stream switch; using a hash calculation for changing the Source MAC address of the packet in the first down stream switch to a new address; sending the packet through a second link aggregation to a second down stream switch having an address; and sending the packet from the second down stream switch to a server having a server address. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215043 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELAY APPARATUS - A trunk line topology network is configured with: ECUs | 08-26-2010 |
20100215044 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING OF THE OBJECT-BASED AUDIO CONTENTS - The present invention relates to a system for transmitting and receiving audio, particularly, to a method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving of object-based audio contents, which packetizes audio objects having the same characteristic. To achieve the above, the present invention includes filtering a plurality of ESs according to common information, adding a packet header to the respective filtered ESs and generate ES packets, aggregating all the generated ES packets and then adding a multi-object packet header to the aggregated ES packets to generate an object packet, and multiplexing the generated object packet, packetizing the multiplexed object packet according to a transmitting media and transmitting the packetized object packet. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215045 | Method and Apparatus for Direct Frame Switching Using Frame Contained Destination Information - Frame contained destination information may be used by a switch to identify an appropriate output port for a given frame without performing a table access operation. This reduces the processing requirements of the switch to enable the switch to handle frames more efficiently. The frame contained destination information may be contained in the frame's local destination MAC addresses (DA) such that a portion of the DA directly indicates, for each switch that handles the frame, an output port for that switch. Different portions of the DA may be used by different switches, depending on where they are in the network hierarchy. Large switches may also use sub-fields within their allocated portion in the DA to identify internal switching components. A location resolution server may be provided to store and distribute IP and MAC addresses and respond to local ARP requests on the local domain. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215046 | LOGICAL SEPARATION AND ACCESSING OF DESCRIPTOR MEMORIES - A packet header processing engine includes a memory having a number of distinct portions for respectively storing different types of descriptor information for a header of a packet. A packet header processing unit includes a number of pointers corresponding to the number of distinct memory portions. The packet header processing unit is configured to retrieve the different types of descriptor information from the number of distinct memory portions and to generate header information from the different types of descriptor information. | 08-26-2010 |
20100220724 | METRO ETHERNET SERVICE ENHANCEMENTS - Numerous enhancements to metro Ethernet network (MEN) services include an enhancement of the overall MEN Quality of Service (QoS) architecture, an enhancement to classification at the provider edge, the use of Ethernet QoS classes, enhancements to policing and marking at ingress provider edge equipment, the provision of traffic management functions at egress provider edge equipment, the use of multiple Ethernet virtual connections (EVCs) and Aggregate EVCs, an enhancement to QoS across an external network-network interface and an enhancement to treatment of Ethernet service frames in a core network. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220725 | High Rate OFDM Communications Using Bit Allocation Tables - Messages transmitted between a receiver and a transmitter are used to maximize a communication data rate. In particular, a multicarrier modulation system uses messages that are sent from the receiver to the transmitter to exchange one or more sets of optimized communication parameters. The transmitter then stores these communication parameters and when transmitting to that particular receiver, the transmitter utilizes the stored parameters in an effort to maximize the data rate to that receiver. Likewise, when the receiver receives packets from that particular transmitter, the receiver can utilize the stored communication parameters for reception. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220726 | SOURCE SPECIFIC MULTICAST LAYER 2 NETWORKING DEVICE AND METHOD - Bridge domain communication methods and devices are presented for efficiently communicating information in a bridge domain based upon group indications and source indications. Packets with a source and destination indication are received. A bridge domain communication process is performed at the bridge level wherein a packet is selected for forwarding based upon a source and group indication. For example, a determination is made if a particular bridge domain corresponds to the group destination indication in the received packet. The source indication in the packet is compared with a tracked source designation indication. Output ports associated with the tracked source designation indication are identified if the tracked source designation indication matches the received source indication. The communication packet is forwarded on identified ports. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220727 | PACKET PROCESSING IN A MULTIPLE PROCESSOR SYSTEM - Packet processing is provided in a multiple processor system including a first processor to processing a packet and to create a tag associated with the packet. The tag includes information about the processing of the packet. A second processor receives the packet subsequent to the first processor and processes the packet using the tag information. | 09-02-2010 |
20100226369 | Network system having an extensible forwarding plane - A platform for seamlessly hosts a plurality of disparate types of packet processing applications. One or more applications are loaded onto a service card on the platform. A programmable path structure is included that maps a logical path for processing of the packets through one or more of the plurality of service cards according to characteristics of the packets. Multiple path structures may be programmed into the platform to offer different service paths for different types of packets. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226370 | NETWORK SYSTEM - When label switching is performed on a conventional MPLS packet, a bit error may occur in an MPLS label header of the MPLS packet and user data may misdelivered. To avoid such misdelivery of the user data, an HEC function is attached to the MPLS label header. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226371 | NODE APPARATUS - To satisfy a quality required for each traffic and perform switching for a packet segmented into cells without packet reassembly, there is provided a node apparatus including a header processing section ( | 09-09-2010 |
20100226372 | PACKET COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND NODE AND USER DEVICE - A node compares an address resolution result corresponding to first packet data that is sent by the user device for accessing a first content server and an address resolution result corresponding to second packet data having the sender of the first packet data as the local node. When the addresses are different, the node allocates the second address resolution result to the user device, and configures a communication path between the user device and a second content server indicated by the second address resolution result. The user device accesses to the second content server on the communication path using the allocated second address resolution result. | 09-09-2010 |
20100232432 | EXTENDED SAF PACKET TO SUPPORT VOLUMINOUS MEDIA DATA - Provided are an extended Simple Aggregation Format (SAF) packet to support voluminous media data and a method of generating the extended SAF packet. The extended SAF packet includes an SAF access unit including an SAF fragment unit obtained by dividing the voluminous media data into a data size suitable for transmission through an SAF packet and a field that provides information about the type of the SAF fragment unit, and an SAF packet header including a field that provides information about whether the SAF access unit carries the SAF fragment unit. Thus, it is indicated that the SAF packet carries the SAF fragment unit from information of the SAF packet header, and the type of the SAF fragment unit, a sequence number of the SAF fragment unit and a total access unit length from information of the SAF access unit. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232433 | Methods And Systems For Resolving A First Node Identifier In A First Identifier Domain Space To A Second Node Identifier In A Second Identifier Domain Space - Methods and systems are described for resolving a first node identifier in a first identifier domain space to a second node identifier in a second identifier domain space. In one aspect, a first node identifier from a first identifier domain space is identified. The first node identifier is included in data for transmission to a recipient. A network directory service node address is determined for a network directory service node configured to resolve the first node identifier to a second node identifier in a second identifier domain space. A message including the data and addressed to the recipient is generated. The message is transmitted to the recipient in association with transmitting, to the recipient, the network directory service node address. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232434 | PROGRAMMABLE HASH-TUPLE GENERATION WITH PARALLEL RULE IMPLEMENTATION INDEPENDENCE - Techniques have been developed to facilitate concurrent evaluation of hash rule entries in ways that allow an implementation to maintain a deterministic resultant hash irrespective of variations in the allocation of particular rules to particular storage banks or evaluation logic, such as may occur with rule set revisions. Similarly, uniform deterministic hash results can be assured even across a range of implementations that support greater or lesser levels of concurrent rule evaluations. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232435 | LOGICALLY PARTITIONED NETWORKING DEVICES - Systems, methods, and other embodiments associated with logically partitioned networking devices are described herein. One example method includes receiving a message from a common interface. The message comprises a logical partition header (LPH) and a network segmentation header (NSH). The LPH may be associated with a logical partition of a networking device. The NSH is associated with a grouping (e.g., segmentation) of networking devices. The example method may also include forwarding the message to the grouping of networking devices based, at least in part, on the NSH and a virtual route forwarding (VRF) table. Forwarding the message to the logical partition of the networking device based, at least in part, on the LPH. | 09-16-2010 |
20100238928 | METHOD OF ROUTING AN SIP MESSAGE IN THE EVENT OF UNAVAILABILITY OF INTERMEDIATE NODES - Method of routing in a telecommunications network an SIP message intended to be routed through intermediate entities constituting nodes of a signaling path. According to the invention, said method comprises a step of bypassing an intermediate entity able to be bypassed if unavailable. Application to the IMS architecture. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238929 | METHOD FOR CLASSIFYING NETWORK PACKET - A method for classifying a network packet includes the steps of: receiving a network packet which includes a plurality of specific data; providing a basic rule table which includes a plurality of basic rules corresponding to the plurality of specific data; providing a composite rule table which includes a plurality of composite rules corresponding the packet classes, and each of the composite rules includes a specific calculation; each of the basic rules generates an output result according to the corresponding specific data; each of specific calculation generates a calculated result of the corresponding composite rule according to part or all of the output results; determining the packet class of the network packet according to the calculated results. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238930 | ROUTER AND METHOD OF FORWARDING IPV6 PACKETS - A method of a router to process IPv6 packets includes: receiving a packet and determining whether the packet is IPv6 packet; determining the source of the IPv6 packet according to the control information of the IPv6 packet if the packet is IPv6 packet; modifying the control information of the IPv6 packet according to the source of the IPv6 packet, and transmitting the IPv6 packet directly to a wide area network (WAN) or a local area network (LAN) according to the modified control information of the IPv6 packet. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238931 | Technique for Handling Residual Space in Packet Data Transmissions - The invention relates to techniques for handling residual space occurring in packet-based data transmissions, wherein according to one embodiment of a method for controlling a packet-based data transmission, in case an amount of residual space in the packet ( | 09-23-2010 |
20100238932 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCED PACKET AGGREGATION - Systems and methods for reducing the latency and for increasing throughput for MoCA devices that are connected via a coax network are provided. One method according to the invention includes, in a network having a plurality of network modules, each of the plurality of network modules being connected to a coax backbone, communicating over the coax backbone between the plurality of network modules. The method further includes a requesting the use of aggregated messages. The method further includes aggregations of messages at the Ethernet packet layer and/or at the MAC layer. The resulting messages can be received while making more efficient use of the MoCA network. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238933 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus includes a signal termination unit that includes a point data management unit and performs reception processing by receiving a signal including an address code for identifying a plurality of remote signaling points, and a plurality of call processing units that perform call processing for the plurality of the remote signaling points, the point data management unit manages call-processing point data, and wherein the signal termination unit, upon receipt of the signal, extracts a code of the non-masked range of the address code having a wild card, and recognizes the call processing unit number corresponding to the extracted code of the non-masked range by referring to the call-processing point data, and transmits to the call processing unit having the recognized call processing unit number the corresponding address code describing all the bits of the code set in the masked range and the code set in the non-masked range. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238934 | EFFICIENT DISCOVERY AND VERIFICATION OF PATHS THROUGH A MESHED OVERLAY NETWORK - The present invention provides an efficient system and method for routing information through a dynamic network. The system includes at least one ingress point and one egress point. The ingress and egress point cooperate to form a virtual circuit for routing packets to destination subnets directly reachable by the egress point. The egress point automatically discovers which subnets are directly accessible via its local ports and summarizes this information for the ingress point. The ingress point receives this information, compiles it into a routing table, and verifies that those subnets are best accessed by the egress point. Verification is accomplished by sending probe packets to select addresses on the subnet. Additionally, the egress point may continue to monitor the local topology and incrementally update the information to the ingress to allow the ingress to adjust its compiled routing table. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238935 | Method for Routing Ad-Hoc Signals - An ad-hoc network is a typically a dynamic collection of nodes capable of communicating therebetween without the aid of pre-established infrastructure. Ad-hoc networks differ from traditional networks in that the topology of interconnections between nodes is inherently dynamic and not fixed. Generally, the routing protocols belong to two groups: proactive and reactive. Proactive protocols attempt to maintain correct and up-to-date routing information at every node. Reactive protocols, in turn, collect necessary routing information only if a pair of nodes are to establish a communication. In accordance with embodiments of the invention a reactive ad-hoc network protocol is disclosed that uses controlled flooding to broadcast packets of information within the ad-hoc network. Furthermore, the ad-hoc network protocol does not maintain up-to-date routing information at every node in an ad-hoc network and does not utilize specific control messages to assure that packets within the ad-hoc network follow optimal paths. | 09-23-2010 |
20100246581 | Method and Apparatus for Packet Routing - Methods and apparatus for routing a packet in a network are described. The network has a topology characterized by a hierarchical structure of nodes including n layers. L represents a layer in the structure and is an integer with L=0 representing a lowest layer and L=n−1 representing a highest layer. The method includes receiving at least a packet header of a packet at a first node and based on the packet header, determining whether to transmit the packet to a second node in either layer L, layer L+1, or layer L−1. The packet can be transmitted to the second node as soon as the packet is received at the first node without waiting to receive the entire packet and without copying the packet prior to transmission from the first node. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246582 | Subscriber Access Network Achitecture - A subscriber network architecture includes a packet processing node that communicates with a network backbone and with a plurality of access nodes. The access nodes also communicate with a plurality of subscriber devices. The packet processing node controls Quality of Service (QoS) levels for the subscriber devices, routes user data to subscriber devices based on downstream communication channels of the access nodes and QoS levels, and receives data from subscriber devices (via the access nodes) for forwarding across the network backbone. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246583 | RELAY DEVICE, STATE INFORMING METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A relay device which forwards a packet received from a first device to a second device, the relay device includes a detection unit that detects that the relay device has been in a specified state, a generation unit that generates a packet that contains information for identifying the relay device and information indicating that the relay device is in the specified state when the detection unit detects that the relay device has been in the specified state, and a transmission unit that transmits the generated packet to a specific transmission destination. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246584 | MAINTAINING PACKET ORDER USING HASH-BASED LINKED-LIST QUEUES - Ordering logic ensures that data items being processed by a number of parallel processing units are unloaded from the processing units in the original per-flow order that the data items were loaded into the parallel processing units. The ordering logic includes a pointer memory, a tail vector, and a head vector. Through these three elements, the ordering logic keeps track of a number of “virtual queues” corresponding to the data flows. A round robin arbiter unloads data items from the processing units only when a data item is at the head of its virtual queue. | 09-30-2010 |
20100254385 | Service Insertion Architecture (SIA) in a Virtual Private Network (VPN) Aware Network - Systems, methods, and other embodiments associated with interworking a VPN and an SIA are described. One example apparatus includes a mapping data store to store a mapping between two logical groups of network devices having separate forwarding planes that are at least partially incompatible. The apparatus includes an instantiation logic to establish the mapping based on unique identifiers associated with the logical groups. The apparatus also includes an encoding logic to implicitly encode information to identify the first logical group in a packet received from the first logical group, provided to the second logical group, and then provided back to the first logical group. The implicitly encoded information is configured to be used without modification by the forwarding plane associated with the second logical group and is configured to facilitate a member of the second logical group resolving the mapping. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254386 | ACCESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE HAVING DISSIMILAR ACCESS SUB-NETWORKS - A subscriber network architecture includes a packet processing node that communicates with a network backbone and with a plurality of access nodes. The access nodes communicate with a plurality of user devices. The packet processing node controls Quality of Service (QoS) levels for the subscriber devices, routes user data to devices via the access nodes and receives data from devices via the access nodes for forwarding across the network backbone. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254387 | NETWORK PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE - A network processor for processing information elements is described. Each information element is associated with a flow and comprises at least one information element segment. A policy controller stores an information element into at least one information segment storage unit within a memory, and determines whether an information element segment conforms to a predetermined quality of service (“QoS”). A traffic processor selects the information element segment for forwarding based on at least one QoS parameter. A forwarding processor forwards the selected information element segment to an egress port. | 10-07-2010 |
20100260183 | NETWORK CONNECTION DEVICE, SWITCHING CIRCUIT DEVICE, AND METHOD FOR LEARNING ADDRESS - A network connection device includes a processor and a switch unit. The processor learns an address. The switch unit outputs a packet received from a first port out of a plurality of ports to a second port. The switch unit manages a table including an entry which includes an address, status data, and an identifier of a port. The switch unit generates a first entry including a first address included in a first packet received via a first port, status data indicating “learning”, and an identifier of the first port, in the absence of the first address in the table, and requests the processor to learn the first address. The switch unit withholds requesting the processor to learn a second address included in a second packet received via the first port, when the second address is included in a second entry along with status data indicating “learning”. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260184 | CONTROL APPARATUS - An arithmetic operation portion including a swap arithmetic operation portion which performs an arithmetic operation of swap information concerned with a path route of a packet, and a label processing portion which sets adjustment of a first label based on a result of the arithmetic operation executed by the swap arithmetic operation portion is provided in a control apparatus to thereby attain compatibility between dispersion of packet transfer load and reduction of an error rate in each link. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260185 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR FORWARDING PACKETS - A method for forwarding packets is disclosed herein. After packets are received, the packets are forwarded to the corresponding transmission channels according to the packet type, or according to the packet type and the message type and/or service type. A system and an apparatus for forwarding packets are disclosed herein to forward important packets and packets with higher priorities more rapidly and more reliably at higher QoS, especially when the resources are not enough or the network is congested. | 10-14-2010 |
20100265948 | Handling of received implicit null packets - A router includes a network ingress processor and a network egress processor. The network ingress processor is configured for modifying a received MPLS packet such that an internal header thereof includes a pre-configured IP flow identifier therein in place of an as-received MPLS flow identifier. Such modifying is performed in response to the network ingress processor parsing a MPLS label stack of the received MPLS packet to determine if an existing MPLS label of the label stack needs to be replaced with an Implicit Null label and in response to determining that there is no other label in the MPLS label stack. The network egress processor includes a flow selector configured for directing packets dependent upon a type of flow identifier included in an internal header thereof, for receiving the modified MPLS packet, and for replacing the internal header with a port-specific header. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265949 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PERFORMING FLOW COMPILATION PACKET PROCESSING - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for performing flow compilation packet processing are disclosed. In one embodiment, the method includes receiving a packet at a packet processing device and determining if the packet is associated with a packet flow previously processed at the packet processing device. If the received packet is determined to be associated with the packet flow, at least one database containing compiled flow programs is queried to locate a compiled flow program previously used to process the packet flow. The method also includes utilizing the located compiled flow program to process the received packet. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265950 | ACCELERATION THROUGH A NETWORK TUNNEL - Methods and systems for implementing acceleration through a packet encapsulation protocol tunnel, are described. The method includes establishing a packet encapsulation protocol tunnel between a first network endpoint and a second network endpoint, sending packets with a packet encapsulation protocol tunnel header from the first network endpoint to the second network endpoint, and removing the packet encapsulation protocol tunnel headers from the packets. The method further includes storing the packet encapsulation protocol tunnel headers in a storage memory, performing acceleration on the packets, and retrieving the packet encapsulation protocol tunnel headers from the storage memory. Further, the method includes replacing the packet encapsulation protocol tunnel headers on the packets, and sending the packets with the packet encapsulation protocol tunnel headers through the packet encapsulation protocol tunnel to the second endpoint. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265951 | ROUTING METHOD AND NODE - A routing protocol unit ( | 10-21-2010 |
20100265952 | REMAPPING MODULE IDENTIFIER FIELDS AND PORT IDENTIFIER FIELDS - A method of adjusting fields of a datagram in the handling of the datagram in a network device may comprising receiving a datagram, with the datagram having at least module identifier fields and port identifier fields, at a port of a network device, adding or subtracting an offset value to at least one of the module identifier fields and at least one of the port identifier fields of the datagram based on data registers in the network device, and forwarding the datagram to a legacy device based on the module and port identifier fields of the datagram. A size of each of the module identifier fields and the port identifier fields handled by the legacy device may be smaller than a size of the module identifier fields and port identifier fields handled by the network device. | 10-21-2010 |
20100272107 | TECHNIQUE FOR ADDRESS RESOLUTION IN A DATA TRANSMISSION NETWORK - A technique for address resolution in data transmission networks, for example ARP-based address resolution in IPv4 networks. An embodiment of the technique comprises the following steps performed in a host of the data transmission network: Maintaining an association of at least one physical address with at least one network address range comprising multiple network addresses; obtaining a target network address; comparing the target network address with the network address range to determine an associated target physical address; and providing the determined target physical address, e.g. for initiating a data transmission. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272108 | Media Access Control Bridging in a Mesh Network - A network comprising a switch configured to learn a source address (SA) for a source node with a source port that receives a frame comprising the SA if the SA is not previously learned on another port and to subsequently forward any frame comprising a destination address (DA) for a destination node that matches the learned SA on the source port associated with the SA. A network comprising a switch configured to flood a frame received on a receiving port if the frame comprises a DA that is not previously learned on a source port and to distinguish the flooded frame from other forwarded frames by labeling the flooded frame, wherein the frame is flooded on a plurality of ports. A method comprising disabling a plurality of filtering database (FDB) entries that correspond to a plurality of addresses that are associated with a port, and sending the addresses in a control frame. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272109 | INTELLEGENT NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR AND METHODS FOR NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION - An intelligent network address translation system and methods for intelligent network address translation. In one embodiment, a network packet is received from a host device, and a stored record associated with the host device is identified. The stored record includes information relating to connection parameters associated with the host device. Using the stored record, a processor determines whether the network packet should be assigned a dedicated address. If so, then the network packet is transmitted using communication parameters including a dedicated IP address. If the packet should not be assigned a dedicated address, then the packet is transmitted using connection parameters including a default public IP address and a port number. | 10-28-2010 |
20100278180 | PACKET FORWARDING METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - A packet forwarding method, a packet forwarding device, and a packet forwarding system are provided. The method includes: acquiring, by a first board, a source media access control (MAC) address and an input port number in a packet, and looking up a MAC address table according to the source MAC address; learning the source MAC address if no same entry is found; and looking up a forwarding policy table according to the input port number to acquire a forwarding policy, and sending the packet to a second board according to the forwarding policy, so that the second board learns the source MAC address to realize synchronization of MAC addresses. The synchronization of MAC addresses is realized by acquiring the forwarding policy without changing a current forwarding process or influencing an execution efficiency of a central processing unit (CPU). | 11-04-2010 |
20100278181 | POINT-TO-MULTI-POINT/NON-BROADCASTING MUTLI-ACCESS VPN TUNNELS - A system establishes a virtual private network (VPN) tunnel to a destination and determines a next hop for the VPN tunnel. The system inserts the next hop, and an address associated with the destination, into an entry of a first table. The system inserts the next hop, and a tunnel identifier corresponding to the established VPN tunnel, into an entry of a second table. The system associates one or more security parameters, used to encrypt traffic sent via the VPN tunnel, with the tunnel identifier. | 11-04-2010 |
20100284403 | SCALABLE ROUTING POLICY CONSTRUCTION USING DYNAMIC REDEFINITION OF ROUTING PREFERENCE VALUE - In general, techniques are described to dynamically redefine a preference value used during route resolution. A network device, such as a router, may implement the techniques to improve a usability aspect of the router. The router may comprise an interface card that receives messages describing one or more of a plurality of routes. The router may also include a control unit that stores data defining a policy. The policy may comprise rules by which the router determines the preference value for one of the plurality of routes. The policy dynamically redefines the preference value as two or more bit fields rather than viewing the preference value as an integer value. The control unit further sets each of the two or more bit fields of the local preference value in accordance with the policy and associates the at least one of the routes with the determined local preference value. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284404 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PACKET STEERING IN A MULTI-CORE ARCHITECTURE - Described herein is a method and system for distributing whole and fragmented requests and responses across a multi-core system. Each core executes a packet engine that further processes data packets and data packet fragments allocated to that core. A flow distributor executing within the multi-core system forwards client requests to a packet engine on a core that is selected based on a value generated when a hash is applied to a tuple comprising a client IP address, a client port, a server IP address and a server port identified in the request. The packet engine maintains each element of the tuple and forwards the request to the selected core. The packet engine can also process data packet fragments by assembling the fragments prior to transmitting them to the selected core, or by transmitting the data packet fragments to the selected core. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284405 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEARCHING IP ADDRESS - The present disclosure provides IP address lookup method and apparatus. In one embodiment of the disclosure, an IP address lookup apparatus stores node information generated for a binary search-on-levels architecture in a universal multi-hashing table prior to searching with an advance filtering by a universal Bloom filter minimizing the number of accesses to the universal multi-hashing table before executing the IP address lookup. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284406 | SWITCH WITH FUNCTION FOR ASSIGNING QUEUE BASED ON A DECLARED TRANSFER RATE - In an asynchronous transfer mode switch, a plurality of queues is provided for accumulating transfer cells, and a queue assignment processing section, receives a message for establishing a connection and assigns to the connection one of the queues having a forwarding rate close to a declared rate included in the message and not exceeding the declared rate. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284407 | NEXTHOP TO A FORWARDING TABLE - A router receives destination address information for a packet and determines, among entries in a first forwarding table, a closest match for the received destination address information. The router receives a pointer to a second forwarding table in accordance with the closest match determined in the first forwarding table and determines, among entries in the second forwarding table, a closest match for the received destination address information. | 11-11-2010 |
20100290467 | Discovery and Capability Exchange Management in a Virtualized Computing Platform Utilizing a SR-IOV Adapter - In various embodiments a traffic class manager is a resource within a virtualized computer systems trusted entity (i.e. a hypervisor, trusted partition, etc.) which maps requirements from a platform management and associated network capabilities onto an SR-IOV adapter in order to appropriately allocate SR-IOV adapter and network resources to the virtualized computer partitions. In various embodiments the traffic class manager defines network traffic classes that meet the objectives of a platform administrator based on the capabilities of the SR-IOV adapter and the network attached to the adapter ports. Once the traffic classes are defined, in various embodiments, the traffic class manager enforces the assignment of a traffic class to a virtual interface queue pair within a partition. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290468 | Negotiated Secure Fast Table Lookups for Protocols with Bidirectional Identifiers - During connection establishments for a protocol with bidirectional identifiers, connection data is allocated, the locally selected identifier is a pointer to the allocated connection data, and a mathematical transformation is applied to the pointer. The pointer and a result of the mathematical transformation are included in a first and second portion of the connection establishment packets respectively. Upon receipt of a data packet for that protocol, a first and second portion of the data packet (which correspond to the first and second portion of the connection establishment packets) are extracted. The same mathematical transformation used during connection establishment is applied to the data extracted from the first portion of the data packet. The result of that mathematical transformation is compared with the data extracted from the second portion of the data packet. If the values match, then the data extracted from the first portion is trusted and dereferenced to access the allocated connection data associated with that data packet. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290469 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING FAST REROUTE OF A UNICAST PACKET WITHIN A NETWORK ELEMENT TO AN AVAILABLE PORT ASSOCIATED WITH A MULTI-LINK TRUNK - A method, apparatus and computer program product for providing fast reroute of a packet is presented. A unicast packet is received by an FDU in a data plane of a network element and a destination is determined for the packet. A lookup is performed in a port state table maintained by the FDU to determine an available local port that is in an UP state for the destination, and if no local port is UP, then a lookup is performed in the port state table to determine an available remote port that is in an UP state for the destination. If a port in the UP state cannot be determined for the unicast packet, then the packet is dropped. | 11-18-2010 |
20100296514 | METHOD, DEVICE, COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT AND SYSTEM FOR REPRESENTING A PARTITION OF N W-BIT INTERVALS ASSOCIATED TO D-BIT DATA IN A DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for representing a partition of n w-bit intervals associated to d-bit data in a data communications network, said method comprising the steps of: providing in a memory ( | 11-25-2010 |
20100303074 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HIGHER DATA RATES ON LINKS WITH VARIABLE FRAME SIZES - Methods and apparatus for communicating IP datagrams efficiently within communication links employing variable frame sizes bundles IP datagrams into data payloads. The number of datagrams that can fit within a current frame size is determined, a bundle header indicating that the bundle header is associated with a bundled IP datagram is generated that includes information for unpacking bundled IP datagrams. The bundle header is joined to one or more IP datagrams to form a data payload that is communicated as a frame payload without indicating in a frame header that the frame includes bundled IP datagrams. Information in the bundle header enables a receiver processor to extract the IP datagrams from the frame payload without requiring modifications to the frame header. A bundle header may precede each IP datagram, or one bundle header may include a map IP datagrams in the frame payload. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303075 | MANAGING TRAFFIC ON VIRTUALIZED LANES BETWEEN A NETWORK SWITCH AND A VIRTUAL MACHINE - A computer readable medium comprising software instructions for managing resources on a host, wherein the software instructions comprise functionality to: configure a classifier located on a NIC, to forward packets addressed to a first destination address to a first HRR mapped to a first VNIC, wherein packets addressed to the first destination address are associated with a first PFC lane; configure the classifier to forward packets addressed to a second destination address to a second HRR, wherein packets addressed to the second destination address are associated with a second PFC lane; and transmit, by the first VNIC, a pause frame associated with the first PFC lane to a switch operatively connected to the physical NIC, wherein the switch, in response to receiving the pause frame, stores packets associated with the first PFC lane in a buffer without transmitting the packets. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303076 | OPTIMISING PACKET SWITCHED NETWORKS - A method of routing packets between nodes of a packet switched network, the method comprising receiving a packet at a first node, the packet comprising routing information and payload data, sending said routing information to a second node in the routing path via a first transmission medium having a relatively high transmission speed, and sending said payload data to said second node via a second transmission medium having a relatively low transmission speed. Upon receipt of said routing information, said second node is able to prepare or begin preparation for onward routing of the packet in advance of receipt of said payload. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303077 | ROUTING OF A COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method for routing data packets in a network including a plurality of nodes ( | 12-02-2010 |
20100303078 | METHOD FOR EXTENDING THE USE OF SINGLE IPV4 ADDRESSES TO MULTIPLE NETWORK END-HOSTS - An address resolution system is provided where network devices are arranged to share a common public network address in a public network environment. The address resolution system includes: an address resolution table residing at a router and configured to store a public network address and a source port assigned to each network device registered with the router in connection with a hardware address that uniquely identifies each of the registered network devices; a port management agent residing on a given network device that is configured to receive a request to assign a source port to an application residing on the given network device and transmit the assignment request to the router; and an address resolution service residing at the router that is configured to query the address resolution table in response to the assignment request from the agent and transmit a reply to the agent based on results from the query of the address resolution table. | 12-02-2010 |
20100309915 | VIRTUAL LEASED LINE ADDRESS RESOLUTION PROTOCOL CACHE FOR CUSTOMER EDGE INTERNET PROTOCOL ADDRESSES - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a provider edge node and a method performed on the node including one or more of the following: storing, in a cache on the node, an association between an Internet Protocol (IP) address of the customer edge device and a Media Access Control (MAC) address of the customer edge device; storing, in a backup memory in the node, a copy of the last-known IP address of the customer edge device; removing the stored association from the cache in response to a cache-clearing event, while maintaining the copy of the last-known IP address in the backup memory; sending an address discovery message, the address discovery message requesting an updated MAC address corresponding to the last-known IP address maintained in the backup memory; and updating the cache to reflect the updated MAC address upon receipt of an additional address update message from the customer edge device. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309916 | IN-LINE PACKET PROCESSING - A method and apparatus for in-line processing a data packet while routing the packet through a router in a system transmitting data packets between a source and a destination over a network including the router. The method includes receiving the data packet and pre-processing layer header data for the data packet as the data packet is received and prior to transferring any portion of the data packet to packet memory. The data packet is thereafter stored in the packet memory. A routing through the router is determined including a next hop index describing the next connection in the network. The data packet is retrieved from the packet memory and a new layer header for the data packet is constructed from the next hop index while the data packet is being retrieved from memory. The new layer header is coupled to the data packet prior to transfer from the router. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309917 | ENHANCED PACKET CLASSIFICATION - A method for classifying a data packet containing a header is provided. The method may comprise parsing the header of a data packet into header elements. Rules in secondary lookup tables generated from a primary lookup table may be accessed. The respective header elements of the data packet may be compared to the respective fields of each of the secondary lookup tables, and rule results for each of the secondary lookup tables in a combinable format may be generated. In another embodiment, a method for generating secondary lookup tables from a primary lookup table is provided. The method may comprise accessing a primary lookup table defining packet classification rules and generating multiple secondary lookup tables from the primary lookup table. For each secondary lookup table, a selection of classification rules and a selection of fields of the multiple fields based on a rule set identifying predefined entries may be extracted. | 12-09-2010 |
20100316051 | PACKET PROCESSING USING BRAIDED TRIES - Packets are processed (e.g., routed or classified) in accordance with a braided trie, which represents the combination of two or more different original tries (e.g., representing different forwarding/classification tables). The different tries are combined by twisting the mappings for specific trie nodes to make the shapes of the different tries more similar. Each node in the braided trie contains a braiding bit for at least one original trie indicating the mapping for that trie's node. Trie braiding can significantly reduce the number of nodes used to represent the different original tries, thereby reducing memory usage and improving scalability. Braided tries can be used for such applications as virtual routers and packet classification in which different forwarding/classification tables are represented by a single braided trie stored in shared memory. | 12-16-2010 |
20100316052 | RECURSIVE PACKET HEADER PROCESSING - According to one general aspect, an apparatus may include an ingress port, a header cache, and a plurality of ingress recursion engines. In some embodiments, the ingress port may be configured to receive a packet that comprises a data portion and a header portion, wherein the header portion comprises at least one header. In various embodiments, the header cache may be configured to store at least a part of the header portion of the packet. In one embodiment, the plurality of ingress recursion engines may be configured to recursively process the header portion, from outer-most header to inner-most header, until an adjacency value for the packet is determined. In some embodiments, each ingress recursion engine may be configured to process a header from the header portion. | 12-16-2010 |
20100316053 | ADDRESS LEARNING METHOD AND ADDRESS LEARNING SWITCH - A switch operating in a multistage switch network is provided. The switch includes a plurality of ports, a first processor for processing a source address and a destination address of a packet received by the plurality of ports, and a second processor for including a memory storing data of the packet, and for outputting, under the control of the first processor, the data of the packet stored on the memory, wherein the first processor calculates a hash value of the source addresses of the packet in accordance with a specific hash function, identifies a output port connected to a switch that corresponds to the hash value and is to learn the source address, and causes the second processor to output the data of the packet to the output port. | 12-16-2010 |
20100316054 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SENDING MAPPING INFORMATION - A method, system, and apparatus for sending mapping information are disclosed. The method includes the following steps: An endpoint searches a mapping server to obtain Egress Tunnel Router (ETR) information used for forwarding a data packet sent by the endpoint in a transit network; and the endpoint adds the ETR information to the data packet and sends the data packet to an Ingress Tunnel Router (ITR). With the present invention, the ITR does not need to search for Routing Locator (RLOC) information or Autonomous System Number (AS No.) information, the pressure of searching for mapping information on the ITR is relieved, the problems such as forwarding performance deterioration and packet loss caused by ITR overload are avoided, and the risks of Distributed Denial of Service (DDOS) attacks are reduced. | 12-16-2010 |
20100322245 | ROUTING MANAGER HIERARCHY - There are provided a scalable method for mobility management applied to an IP-based network system including a plurality of routers and a plurality of servers, a part of which serve as a home routing manager (HRM), a part of which serve as local routing managers (LRM) for individual mobile nodes. The method at least comprises the steps of sending a first query about a routing address of a destination mobile node toward the HRM, based on an activation notification (AN) from an ingress access router (AR) of the plurality of routers, triggered by a source mobile mode, from an LRM receiving the activation notification; relaying the first query via one or more intermediate routing managers (IRM) closer to the HRM until the first query reaches the HRM; and in response to the first query, sending the routing address of the destination mobile node back to the ingress access router through the relay path from the HRM. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322246 | DISTRIBUTED OPERATION - A method comprises determining that at least one data portion is missing from a first data set; the first data set comprising a plurality of data portion; creating a second data set having a plurality of parts from the plurality of data portions; inserting an indicator for each data portion in the second data set; the indicator indicating the end of the respective data portion; and calculating which parts of the second data set are affected by one or more data portions which have not been received. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322247 | INTERNETWORK DEVICE - An internetwork device comprises a receiving module, an inter-device packet transfer interface, an inter-device packet transfer controller, an address translation module, and a transmission module. The receiving module receives a packet from a first network. The inter-device packet transfer interface carries out inter-device packet transfer involving transfer of a packet to or from another internetwork device. The inter-device packet transfer controller controls the inter-device packet transfers such that multiple fragmented packets created from a same original packet are collected by the same internetwork device, the fragmented packets being packets created by dividing a single original packet into multiple parts. The address translation module translates between a local address used within a specific network and a global address used across multiple networks, for at least one of a source address and a destination address of a packet. The transmission module transmits an address-translated packet to a second network. | 12-23-2010 |
20100329255 | Multiple Compression Techniques For Packetized Information - In one embodiment, the present invention includes a method for comparing a packet header to a stored packet header, generating a comparison vector based on the comparison, and transmitting the packet from the transmitter without the packet header if the packet header and the stored packet header match. A data portion of the packet may be compressed and transmitted using a different compression technique. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329256 | ARCHITECTURE AND SYSTEM FOR COORDINATED NETWORK-WIDE REDUNDANCY ELIMINATION - A network employing redundancy-aware hardware may actively allocate decompression tasks among different devices along a single path to improve data throughput. The allocation can be performed by a hash or similar process operating on a header of the packets to distribute caching according to predefined ranges of hash values without significant additional communication overhead. Decompression of packets may be similarly distributed by marking shim values to match the earlier caching of antecedent packets. Nodes may use coordinated cache sizes and organizations to eliminate the need for separate cache protocol communications. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329257 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTIVE DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS - A method of selective direct memory access (DMA) in a computer system having a network interface card (NIC), a processor subsystem, and a memory accessible to the subsystem, including the steps of the NIC receiving a plurality of packets from an external source; the NIC decoding a portion of each packet and determining whether the packet should be accepted by the computer system based on a predefined rule; and if the packet is accepted, selectively truncating the packet based on the predefined rule, and storing the truncated packet in the memory. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329258 | DYNAMICALLY ENABLING MPLS STATIONS AND PORTS USING AN ARP DATABASE - A method of dynamically enabling MPLS stations and ports using an ARP database is disclosed. The method of dynamically enabling MPLS stations and ports using an ARP database includes augmenting an ARP database with labels distributed via Label Distribution Protocol. The augmented ARP database includes for each ARP entry a list of labels that were advertised to an immediate neighbour. Subsequent use of the ARP database allows for automatic enabling/disabling of MPLS stations and allows labels to be used only on the appropriate ports as advertised to immediate neighbours. The method of dynamically enabling MPLS stations and ports using an ARP database is particularly useful for restricting ports and labels for security purposes, and to automatically provide configuration updates in a timely manner. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329259 | UPPER LAYER BASED DYNAMIC HARDWARE TRANSMIT DESCRIPTOR RECLAIMING - In general, the invention relates to reclaiming transmit descriptors by configuring a media access control (MAC) to execute a first MAC layer thread to reclaim a first number of transmit descriptors (TDs) from a first hardware transmit ring (HTR) using a first reclaim algorithm, where the first reclaim algorithm is associated with a first transmission pattern and a first TDR status. The invention further includes receiving, by a virtual NIC (VNIC) executing within the MAC layer, a first number of packets, forwarding the first number of packets to a device driver on the host associated with the physical NIC, and forwarding the first number of packets from the device driver to the physical NIC using the first number of TDs, where the first plurality of TDs are reclaimed by the first MAC layer thread according to the first reclaim algorithm. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329260 | GENERIC PACKET BLOCK APPLICABLE TO MULTIPLE ROUTING SCHEMES IN LOW-POWER SENSOR NETWORKS AND METHOD OF PROVIDING THE SAME - The present invention relates to a generic packet block applicable to multiple routing schemes in low-power sensor networks and a method of providing the same which reduces operations and information required for a routing scheme in the low-power sensor network and provides flexible extension applicable to various multi-hop routing schemes. The generic packet block includes a generic routing header and routing block, and the method of providing the same is widely applicable to a multi-hop routing. The generic routing header includes a routing packet type, routing address information, and the like, commonly required for the multi-hop routing. The routing block is located in a routing packet body and includes routing cost information changeable depending on a routing scheme, and information changeable depending on a routing operation scheme. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329261 | DATA PROCESSING APPARATUS, DATA PROCESSING METHOD AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - An apparatus, in which a plurality of modules is connected with each other and processes a packet having information, includes a storage unit for storing first information indicating an order of processing performed by its own module and second information indicating an order of modules which perform processing, a reception unit for receiving a first packet and transmitting the first packet including information corresponding to the first information, a processing unit for processing data included in the first packet, a generation unit for generating a second packet including the processed data and the second information, and a transmission unit for comparing the information included in the first packet with the second information included in the second packet, and transmitting the packet having a latter processing order. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329262 | System and Method for Parsing Frames - A system for parsing frames including a first cell extraction circuit (CEC) configured to identify a first cell from a first frame, a first parser engine operatively connected to the first CEC, where the first parser engine is configured to generate a result based on the first cell, and a first forwarding circuit operatively connected to the first parser engine and configured to forward the result, where the first CEC, the first parser engine, and the first forwarding circuit are associated with a first frame parser unit. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329263 | Apparatus and Method for Prioritizing Communications Between Devices - An apparatus and method for prioritizing communications between devices are provided. According to one aspect, an interface device for providing communications between at least one source device and at least one destination device comprises an input, logic, and an output. The input of the interface device receives data in a first format from the source device. The logic identifies the destination device for receiving the data. The logic then identifies a second format compatible with the destination device and translates the data from the first format to the second format. Transmission of the translated data is then prioritized by the logic based on characteristics of the translated data, which may include the format of the translated data or a service plan associated with the destination device or source device. The translated data is then transmitted to the identified destination device via the output. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329264 | SCALING EGRESS NETWORK TRAFFIC - In an embodiment, a method is provided. The method of this embodiment provides generating one or more packets of data, the one or more packets of data being associated with a connection; and associating the one or more packets with one of a plurality of transmit queues based, at least in part, on the connection associated with the one or more packets. | 12-30-2010 |
20110002335 | Techniques for Introducing In-Band Network Management Packets in Multi-Protocol Label Switching Networks - A system and method for introducing in-band network management packets (INMPs) in a Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) network. MPLS is an emerging technology, which integrates Internet Protocol (IP) routing with label switching techniques. MPLS intends to provide new capabilities in the area of traffic engineering for IP networks. These traffic engineering capabilities will have to be combined with a set of complementary operation, administration and maintenance (OA&M) functions for effectively managing and operating MPLS-based networks. This invention uses INMPs for carrying OA&M information to label switching routers (LSRs) for effectively managing and operating MPLS-based networks. This invention also includes techniques for distinguishing INMPs from user packets in an MPLS network. This invention further includes using a predetermined code in a shim header of an MPLS packet to determine whether an MPLS packet is an INMP or a user packet. The predetermined code may be provided in an experimental field or a time-to-live field in the shim header of the packet. Alternatively, a label may be reserved for distinguishing an INMP from a user packet. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002336 | ADDRESS SEARCH METHOD AND PACKET PROCESSING DEVICE - A packet processing device includes a first search table in which an entry including an index value and a destination address is registered and a second search table in which a combination of header information and a destination address is registered. The packet processing device receives as an input a combination of header information and a destination to be registered and calculates an index value by one-way function calculation using the input header information. If the calculated index value is different from the existing entry in the first search table, the calculated index value and the input destination are registered as a new entry in the first search table. If the calculated index value is the same as the index value of the existing entry, a combination of the header information and the destination address represented by the existing entry is registered together with a combination of the inputted header information and the destination address in the second search table, and the destination address of the existing entry is deleted. By using the header information of a transfer packet, the packet processing device searches the first and the second search tables in parallel for the destination of the packet. | 01-06-2011 |
20110007743 | FILTER-BASED FORWARDING IN A NETWORK - A router receives a packet at an ingress interface. The router classifies the received packet based on at least a first field value contained in the header of the packet. According to the classification of the received packet, the router associates one of the plurality of forwarding tables to the packet. The router then performs a lookup operation in the associated forwarding table according to at least a second field value contained in the header of the packet. Based on the lookup operation, the router determines an egress interface and transmits the received packet from the determined egress interface. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007744 | Packet forwarding apparatus and method - A network device includes at least one source physical port coupled to a network, and a plurality of egress ports. A logical port assignment mechanism assigns source logical port information to a data packet received via one of the at least one physical port. The source logical port information is based on characteristics of the data packet, and the source logical port information corresponds to a logical entity that is different from any source physical port. A forwarding engine determines one or more egress ports for forwarding the data packet based on at least the assigned source logical port. | 01-13-2011 |
20110019674 | END-TO-END INTER-DOMAIN ROUTING - According to a first aspect of the present invention there is provided a method of constructing an end-to-end routing path across multiple packet switched domains. The method comprises generating a domains topology identifying all possible domains, the border elements of those domains and the inter-domain links. When a request is received for computation of a path from a source entity in a first domain to a destination entity in a second domain, all domains and inter-domain links that cannot or are unlikely to feature in the requested path are removed from the domains topology. Candidate intra-domain paths for each remaining domain are then computed, with each candidate intra-domain path being mapped to a logical link defined by its two ends, at least one end being a border element and the other being a border element or the source or destination entity. Attributes for each logical link are determined, together with attributes of the remaining inter-domain links. A virtual network topology is generated by combining the logical links and their associated attributes with the remaining inter-domain links and their associated attributes. This allows a best end-to-end route to be determined by analysing the virtual network topology. | 01-27-2011 |
20110026523 | Network Node Of A Packet Switching Communications Network And Method For The Distribution Of Data Traffic In A Packet Switching Communications Network - Several network node addresses are assigned to at least one link in a network node of a packet switching communications network that contains several network nodes and several links leading to other network nodes. The data-packet traffic that arrives at the network node is divided between the number of configured network node addresses that lead to a target network node and is transmitted. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026524 | METHOD OF UPDATING ROUTING TABLE, DATA TRANSFER APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM - A method of updating a routing table includes: receiving, from an issue-source node, a write packet that includes update data for updating the routing table; attempting to recognize, based upon contents of the write packet, a partition in which the issue-source node is included; determining whether to permit updating the routing table based upon (1) whether the partition including the source node is recognized and (2) whether port information and partition information in the update data are stored in the routing table; and updating the routing table when updating is permitted. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026525 | Ethernet Switch and System - An Ethernet switch includes a plurality of network ports, wherein visibility of data packets traffic is configured by loading port-mirroring related configuration data from a configuration memory device into the Ethernet switch upon power-on reset. As a result, no manual configuration by a user is required, and the hardware cost of the Ethernet switch is reduced. The Ethernet switch is further configured to enable pass-through of Power over Ethernet (PoE) inline power between two selected network ports. A USB connector is further included and adapted for the Ethernet switch to receive input power from a USB port of a USB host device and for the Ethernet switch to send and receive data packets to and from the USB host device. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026526 | INFORMATION PROVISIONING APPARATUS AND INFORMATION PROVISIONING METHOD - Information provisioning includes acquiring a data stream of content that is composed of a plurality of segments, and actual data of metadata that includes information related to the content and information related to the plurality of segments. The metadata is divided into metadata processing units (MPU) corresponding to segments subjected to processing in the plurality of segments. A capsulized stream is generated that includes packetized elementary stream (PES) packets acquired by packetizing the segments subjected to processing of the data stream and metadata PES packets acquired by packetizing at least one MPU, the metadata PES packets including control information of the metadata. The control information includes an overwrite_flag which indicates whether previous metadata is to be overwritten. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026527 | TAG-BASED INTERFACE BETWEEN A SWITCHING DEVICE AND SERVERS FOR USE IN FRAME PROCESSING AND FORWARDING - A data center includes a blade server rack with a switch device in communication with a plurality of servers. To process a frame, the switch device determines, from content in a frame header by the switch device, a port through which to forward the frame to a server. The switch device inserts a value into a particular field, for example, a VLAN (virtual Local Area Network) tag, in the frame header before forwarding the frame. The server performs a specific action related to processing the frame based on the value inserted by the switch device into the particular field in the frame header. The server can modify the value in the particular field of the frame header before returning the frame to the switch device, with the switch device performing a specific action based on the value in the particular field of the frame header as modified by the server. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026528 | METHOD OF DATA TRANSMISSION IN A DATA COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method of data transmission in a data communication network includes negotiating a connection between a source terminal and a destination terminal in the data communication network. During the connection negotiation process, optimal field lengths are determined for recording a source identifier and a sequence number in data packets transmitted in the connection. The source identifier identifies a connection from the source cnd to the destination end of the data transmission, while the sequence number identifies the relative position of a data packet in a series of data packets transmitted in the connection. The length of the source identifier and sequence number fields may either be calculated or selected from a set of predetermined field length values. Data packets formatted according to different transmission protocols (“secondary data packets”) that are received for transmission through the data communication network are packed into one or more “primary data packets” formatted according to the transmission protocol of the data communication network. In addition to a source identifier and sequence number, the primary data packets include a first packet offset to identify the location of a first new secondary data packet that is packed into the primary data packet. A first packet offset field length is determined during connection negotiation. The data transmission method of the invention includes packing one or more secondary data packets, or a portion thereof, in a primary data packet to fill the primary data packet, thus minimizing unused data bits in the primary data packet. After transmission, the primary data packets are reordered, if necessary, and the secondary data packets are unpacked therefrom. | 02-03-2011 |
20110032937 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SHARING A PAYLOAD AMONG MULTIPLE HOMED NETWORKS - Systems and methods that permit an end device to partition a payload into payload portions for simultaneous transmission over multiple networks so as to increase the effective bandwidth available to the end device. The end device may also receive portions of a partitioned payload via multiple networks and reassemble the payload into its pre-partitioned form. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032938 | DISTRIBUTED RSVP-TE IN A MULTI-CHASSIS NODE ARCHITECTURE - A network device includes a multi-chassis system in which each chassis includes a RSVP-TE protocol stack that may provide RSVP-TE services for LSP tunnels associated with each chassis. The multi-chassis system may include an administrative chassis. The administrative chassis may forward RSVP messages to other chassis of the network device. The administrative chassis may encapsulate the RSVP messages with a chassis address. The other chassis may de-encapsulate the RSVP messages and process the RSVP messages according to the RSVP-TE protocol. The administrative chassis may obtain session information associated with other chassis based on RSVP messages received. The administrative chassis may manage adjacency mechanisms and failure and recovery mechanisms. The multi-chassis system including the distributed RSVP-TE protocol stacks may minimize scalability issues and improve performance when high-capacity routing and/or switching services are needed. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032939 | NETWORK SYSTEM, PACKET FORWARDING APPARATUS, AND METHOD OF FORWARDING PACKETS - A network system includes: a first network; an authentication server; a second network; a network; and a packet forwarding apparatus, wherein the packet forwarding apparatus includes: a forwarding route table storage storing a first forwarding route table containing packet routing information to the second network, and a second forwarding route table containing packet routing information to the second network and the third network; and a forwarding route table selector that, prior to determination of successful authentication for the terminal apparatus, selects the first forwarding route table as a search forwarding route table, and that upon receipt of determination of successful authentication for the terminal apparatus, selects the second forwarding route table as the search forwarding route table. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032940 | TRIGGERING BANDWIDTH RESERVATION AND PRIORITY REMARKING - In one embodiment, a reservation proxy monitors for received connectivity check messages or beginning-of-media-flow indication messages. When either type of message is observed, the reservation proxy requests resource allocation for a media flow associated with the received message. The amount of resource allocation requested may be coordinated by exchanging messages with a call controller or policy server for one of the endpoints of the media flow, or the amount of resource allocation may be identified within the received message. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032941 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ACCELERATING TCP/IP DATA STREAM PROCESSING - A network device includes an interface ( | 02-10-2011 |
20110032942 | FAST PATH COMPLEX FLOW PROCESSING - Methods and systems for processing complex flows are provided. According to one embodiment, a packet associated with a complex flow is received. A first flow-based packet classification is performed based on a first set of attributes of the packet. A first flow processing operation is identified by performing a first flow cache lookup based on the first flow-based packet classification and the first flow processing operation is performed on the packet. After performing the first flow processing operation on the packet, a second flow-based packet classification of the packet is performed based on a second set of attributes of the packet. A second flow processing operation is identified by performing a second flow cache lookup based on the second flow-based packet classification and the second flow processing operation is performed on the packet. Finally, the packet is sent to an egress interface. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032943 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICES FOR PROCESSING MESSAGES IN MULTIMEDIA MESSAGING SERVICE - A method for processing messages in MMS, which includes: after receiving a message from a user side, an MMSC notifying a home Value Added Service Applications Server corresponding to receivers of the message to process the message according to each identifier, which is carried in the message, of the receiver that belongs to the Value Added Service Applications Server and that is carried in the message. A system for processing messages in the MMS is further disclosed. By adopting the technique solution provided in the invention, it could successfully implement the message service of a terminal sending messages to multiple receivers that belong to the same Value Added Service Applications Server. Moreover, it could further reduce the message flux between the MMSC and the Value Added Service Applications server so as to reduce the occupancy of the communication resources, increase the efficiency and save the cost. | 02-10-2011 |
20110038375 | EFFICIENT TCAM-BASED PACKET CLASSIFICATION USING MULTIPLE LOOKUPS AND CLASSIFIER SEMANTICS - A method is provided for constructing a packet classifier for a computer network system. The method includes: receiving a set of rules for packet classification, where a rule sets forth values for fields in a data packet and a decision for data packets having matching field values; representing the set of rules as a directed graph; partitioning the graph into at least two partitions; generating at least one lookup table for each partition of the graph; and instantiating the lookup tables from one partition on a first content-addressable memory and the lookup tables from the other partition on a second content-addressable memory device. | 02-17-2011 |
20110044338 | THROUGHPUT IN A LAN BY MANAGING TCP ACKS - A method and apparatus are described for managing acknowledgements, including identifying data packets and acknowledgements with a connection, determining which of the acknowledgements can be eliminated, replacing the acknowledgements that can be eliminated with a single acknowledgement and transmitting the single acknowledgement. An alternative method and apparatus are described for managing acknowledgements, including receiving a data segment, keeping track of connections, determining if there are enough data segments for a pre-determined number of channel time allocations and generating the acknowledgments for a selected connection if there are enough data segments for the pre-determined number of channel time allocations. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044339 | SERVER-SIDE LOAD BALANCING USING PARENT-CHILD LINK AGGREGATION GROUPS - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: establishing, at the network node, a first Child Link Aggregation Group (CLAG), wherein the first CLAG includes at least one link to a first downstream node; establishing, at the network node, a second CLAG, wherein the second CLAG includes at least one link to a second downstream node; establishing, at the network node, a Parent Link Aggregation Group (PLAG), wherein the PLAG includes the first CLAG and the second CLAG; receiving, at the network node, a packet including an address of a destination of the packet; determining that the destination of the packet is associated with the PLAG; and transmitting the packet over both the first CLAG and the second CLAG. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044340 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ECMP LOAD SHARING - A packet classifier and a method for routing a data packet are provided. The packet classifier includes a content addressable memory, a translation table and a parameter memory. The method includes looking up a content addressable memory for a base address into a parameter memory using a header of the data packet. The base address is related to the routes under ECMP for forwarding the data packet. From among these addresses, using multiple headers of the data packet, an adjustment to the base address is computed. The adjustment specifies an actual address to the parameter memory corresponding to a selected route for forwarding the data packet. The parameter memory is then accessed using the actual address to obtain parameter values relevant to the selected route. The data packet is then forwarded according to the parameter values thus obtained. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044341 | METHOD FOR DATA PACKET CLASSIFICATION IN A DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The present invention pertains to a method for performing specific data forwarding actions depending on the nature of data traffic comprising data packets, which method comprises the steps of: —receiving incoming data traffic of a specific nature, belonging to at least a specific class among a number of pre-defined classes, step | 02-24-2011 |
20110044342 | METHOD FOR POPULATING A FORWARDING INFORMATION BASE OF A ROUTER AND ROUTER - A method for populating a forwarding information base of a router of an autonomous system (AS) in the Internet's Default Free Zone (DFZ), wherein the forwarding information base contains a multitude of entries, each entry mapping a destination prefix to at least one route to reach the destination prefix, is characterized in that for each prefix advertised to the router, the autonomous system (AS) the advertisement was received from is determined, and that a decision is made whether to include the prefix into the forwarding information base of the router or not, wherein in the decision the autonomous system (AS) and/or predefined characteristics of the autonomous system (AS) the prefix is learned from is/are considered. Furthermore, a corresponding router for deployment in autonomous systems (AS) in the Internet's Default Free Zone (DFZ) is disclosed. | 02-24-2011 |
20110051728 | Method for Optimizing a Route Cache - A system and method for managing a route cache to reduce the risk of disruption from denial of service attacks. All traffic arriving on a front interface from local (on-link) nodes (e.g., neighbor nodes) can be treated normally. However, for packets arriving from remote (off-link) sources addressed to a given destination IP address, a single, shared route cache entry can be used. The source-address field in this entry can be zeroed-out since it will not be used for traffic coming from any one source. Similarly, for all packets going to off-link destinations through the front-interface, another single shared route cache entry can be created and used. The destination-address field in this entry can be zeroed out since it will not be used for traffic going to any one destination. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051729 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES RELATING TO PSEUDO RANDOM NETWORK CODING DESIGN - A method of providing a pseudo random network coding design may include receiving, at a receiver node, signaling including an index of a codebook communicated from a transmitter node employing network coding, utilizing the codebook associated with the index to generate a coding coefficient used to employ the network coding, and decoding the signaling using the coding coefficient. A corresponding apparatus is also provided. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051730 | MULTI-LAYER DATA PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - A multi-layer data processing apparatus and method. The multi-layer data processing unit may classify received multi-layer data into lower layer data and higher layer data using lower layer information, and generate and output a traffic flow of the lower layer data or traffic flows of the lower layer data and the higher layer data with reference to a rule information table. In the rule information table, pieces of lower layer rule information may be linked to pieces of higher layer rule information. | 03-03-2011 |
20110058553 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CONNECTIVITY IN A NETWORK WITH MULTIPLE PACKET PROTOCOLS - Methods and systems are provided for routing or forwarding packet data conforming to two different communication protocols simultaneously in a computer network. The first protocol may be a legacy protocol, such as IPv4, with routing being performed in a manner that maintains legacy behavior and functions. Such functions may include network address translation. The second protocol may be a newer protocol, such as IPv6, with the routing or forwarding being performed through reduced complexity bridging that enables simplified connectivity of second protocol devices. The bridging performed typically requires less memory and processing power than traditional routing techniques such as those implemented for the first protocol. Reduced memory and processing power requirements enable the second protocol routing functions to be added to legacy equipment that would not otherwise be able to support routing of the second protocol packet data. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058554 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVING THE QUALITY OF REAL-TIME DATA STREAMING - A method for improving quality of real time data streaming over a network. The network includes a plurality of nodes. A source node in the plurality of nodes transmits a real time data packet to a destination node in the plurality of nodes. First, the source node obtains maximum latency information about the data packet of a data frame. The source node stores information about the maximum latency in the data packet. Then, the source node and zero or more intermediate nodes route the data packet from the source to the destination such that the data packet reaches the destination before the maximum latency expires. Each intermediate node, updates the maximum latency of a packet by subtracting the time spent by the packet at the intermediate node from the maximum latency value received along with the packet. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058555 | TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD - A transmission apparatus that receives plural packets and transmits a frame of a synchronous network, includes a multiplexing part that divides, in segment units, the plural packets, each segment having a predetermined length, and multiplexes the segments to generate a data stream signal; a transmitting part that transmits the data stream signal to a mapping part; and the mapping part that maps the data stream signal in the frame of the synchronous network. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058556 | GENERIC ROUTING ENCAPSULATION BEARING METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - A Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) bearing method, apparatus and system are provided. In the transmission and bearing of GRE frames, multiplexing frame header information of the GRE frames is obtained by inquiring mapping of the GRE frames; then the GRE frames that meet a predetermined multiplexing condition are set in payloads of one outer Internet Protocol (IP) frame according to the obtained multiplexing frame header information of the GRE frames. In this way, for data frames with small payloads, unnecessary encapsulation overheads are reduced, and the transmission efficiency of the data frames is improved. Thus, the network bandwidth resources are saved, and the system transmission performance is improved. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058557 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND/OR DEVICES FOR PROVIDING NETWORK ACCESS - Certain exemplary embodiments comprise a method that can comprise, via an Ethernet Channel Service Unit (ECSU), providing a packet conversion between a Serial Wide Area Network (WAN) protocol and an Ethernet network protocol. The ECSU can be adapted to provide access to a network service between a first device adapted to communicate using an Ethernet protocol via the Ethernet network and a second device adapted to communicate using a serial protocol via the Serial WAN. | 03-10-2011 |
20110064080 | METHOD FOR WLAN LINK AGGREGATION AND SYSTEM FOR USING THE SAME - A system with WLAN link aggregation comprises an access point, a station and a remote host. The station is equipped with a first network interface unit and a second network interface unit. The first network interface unit and the second network interface unit are configured to forward packets to or receive packets from the access point. After receiving packets from the first network interface unit, the second network interface unit or the remote host, the access point modifies headers of the packets and forwards the packets to the first network interface unit, the second network interface unit or the remote host. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064081 | NETWORK PROTOCOL HEADER ALIGNMENT - Techniques for routing a payload of a first network protocol, which includes header information for a second network protocol, include communicating a packet. In a circuit block, a first type for the first network protocol and a second type for the second network protocol are determined. The circuit block stores a classification that indicates a unique combination of the first type and the second type. A general purpose processor routes the packet based on the classification. Processor clock cycles are saved that would be consumed in determining the types. Furthermore, based on the classification, the processor can store an offset value for aligning the header relative to a cache line. The circuit block can store the packet shifted by the offset value. The processor can then retrieve from memory a single cache line to receive the header, thereby saving excess loading and ejecting of cache. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064082 | CHANNEL HOPPING SCHEME FOR UPDATE OF DATA FOR MULTIPLE SERVICES ACROSS MULTIPLE DIGITAL BROADCAST CHANNELS - Data broadcast over different channels may be updated in a digital broadcast receiving device. The device may include a receiver unit, a processor, memory instructions embodied in the memory for execution on the processor. The instructions may be configured to implement the method for updating data broadcast over different channels. A first digital broadcast signal may be received over a first channel. The receiving device may be tuned to a second channel at a predetermined time to receive a second digital broadcast signal. Selected data may be extracted from the second digital broadcast signal and stored or utilized with the receiving device. An update schedule may be generated for data transmitted with a digital broadcast signal. A broadcast time for an update packet may be determined from a packet header. A schedule packet may be generated containing the broadcast time and broadcast before the update packet. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064083 | Anycast-Based Internet Protocol Redirection To Alleviate Partial Routing Tables - Systems and methods are described that instruct routers having constrained hardware/memory to redirect all outbound traffic to a helper router. The helper router contains a full routing table that can forward any packet to its destination. In a large service provider network, helper routers may be distributed at multiple locations across the network. Since packets must detour through the helper router, the distributed helper routers minimize latency. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064084 | PIPELINED PACKET SWITCHING AND QUEUING ARCHITECTURE - An architecture for a line card in a network routing device is provided. The line card architecture provides a bi-directional interface between the routing device and a network, both receiving packets from the network and transmitting the packets to the network through one or more connecting ports. In both the receive and transmit path, packets processing and routing in a multi-stage, parallel pipeline that can operate on several packets at the same time to determine each packet's routing destination is provided. Once a routing destination determination is made, the line card architecture provides for each received packet to be modified to contain new routing information and additional header data to facilitate packet transmission through the switching fabric. The line card architecture further provides for the use of bandwidth management techniques in order to buffer and enqueue each packet for transmission through the switching fabric to a corresponding destination port. The transmit path of the line card architecture further incorporates additional features for treatment and replication of multicast packets. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064085 | Method and Apparatus for Controlling the Routing of Data Packets - Method and apparatus for controlling the routing of data packets in an IP network ( | 03-17-2011 |
20110069706 | TECHNIQUES FOR NEXT-HOP OPTIMIZATION - Techniques for efficiently storing and using routing and associated next-hop information in a network device. The amount of next-hop information that is stored for routes in a routing table is reduced by reducing the amount of duplicate next-hop information that is stored by a network device. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069707 | PACKET DETECTION AND COARSE SYMBOL TIMING FOR ROTATED DIFFERENTIAL M-ARY PSK MODULATED PREAMBLE SIGNAL - A packet detection and coarse symbol timing recovery system for preamble signal modulated with rotated differential M-ary phase shift key (PSK) modulation includes a differential detection unit, to provide a symbol signal responsive to a received signal. A preamble sequence correlator performs a preamble sequence correlation on the symbol signal to produce a correlator signal. A metric calculation unit performs a metric calculation on the correlator signal to produce a metric. A packet detection unit determines that a packet is detected and produces a sample index. A coarse symbol timing unit finds a peak of the calculated metric signal outputs a sample index for the peak as coarse symbol timing information. The sample indexes are used in processing a physical layer convergence procedure (PLCP) header and physical layer service data unit (PSDU) block. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069708 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PROCESSING DIGITAL BROADCASTING SIGNAL IN TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER - A method and an apparatus for processing digital broadcast signal are disclosed. The method of processing a digital broadcasting signal in a transmitter includes performing RS (Reed-Solomon) encoding on signaling data containing cross layer information between a physical layer and a upper layer, wherein the signaling data includes a first field indicating a protocol version change of the signaling data, a second field indicating a length of an extension field of a header included in the signaling data, and at least one field indicating a number of ensembles for at least one of a first transmission mode and a second transmission mode, and wherein the ensembles include a collection of services, each of the services being a package of packetized streams of mobile service data, forming data groups including the signaling data and the mobile service data, forming mobile service data packets including the signaling data and the mobile service data in the data groups, transmitting the digital broadcasting signal including the mobile service data packets during slots, wherein the first transmission mode is a mode in which the mobile service data are transmitted while reserving greater than 118 packets out of 156 packets in the slot and the second transmission mode is a mode in which the mobile service data are transmitted while reserving less than or equal to 118 packets out of 156 packets in the slot. | 03-24-2011 |
20110075665 | Method and System for Transmitting an Address Into an Electronic Form for a Participant of a Communication Link - A method and a system for transferring a PIM-address in an electronic formula of a PIM-application, based on a communication connection between end devices of subscribers in a communication system are provided. A communication system address, which identifies the second end device, detects user input of a first subscriber. The detected communication system-address is converted into a PIM address which identifies a second subscriber, the PIM-address to the PIM-application and the transferred PIM-address is input into a field of the electronic formula of the PIM-application. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075666 | Autoconfiguration Of An IPv6 Component In A Segmented Network - Autoconfiguration of an IPv6 component in a segmented network including receiving an IPv6 packet; determining whether the received IPv6 packet is a router advertisement or a router solicitation; if the received IPv6 packet is a router advertisement, then retrieving through an out-of-band link a MAC address for the IPv6 component, removing a MAC address of a sending router, inserting in the packet instead an internal MAC address for forwarding packets to the IPv6 component, removing a multicast destination MAC address, inserting in the packet the destination MAC address of the IPv6 component, and forwarding the packet to the IPv6 component as a unicast message; if the received IPv6 packet is a router solicitation, then removing the MAC address of the sending IPv6 component, inserting in the packet instead an external MAC address for forwarding packets to the router, and forwarding the packet to the router as a multicast message. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075667 | LAYER 2 SEAMLESS SITE EXTENSION OF ENTERPRISES IN CLOUD COMPUTING - Various embodiments relate to a Cloud Data Center, a system comprising the Cloud Data Center, and a related method. The Cloud Data Center may include a logical customer edge router to send packets between addresses in a private enterprise network and addresses in a logical network within a cloud network using Layer 2 protocol and MAC addressing. The logical network may have resources, known as virtual machines, allocated to the private enterprise network and may share a common IP address space with the private enterprise network. A directory at the Cloud Data Center may correlate the enterprise IP addresses of virtual machines with a MAC address, cloud IP address, and a location IP address within the logical network. The Cloud Data Center may double encapsulate packets with MAC, cloudIP, and locIP headers, when sending a packet to a destination in the logical network. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075668 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system for performing communication based on the Real-time Transport Protocol/RTP Control Protocol (RTP/RTCP) comprises a communication control device, a first NAT device and a second NAT device, a caller terminal device, and a callee terminal device. The caller terminal device transmits a first packet to the communication control device, receives a second packet that contains a second port number that is stored in the second NAT device, determines whether the second port number is one of an odd number and an even number; and transmits, in a case where it has been determined that the second port number is an odd number, an RTP packet to a port number that is computed by adding 2n−1 to the second port number, then transmits an RTCP packet to a port number that is computed by adding 2n to the second port number. | 03-31-2011 |
20110080911 | Forwarding of Packets to a Same Location Having a Same Internet Protocol (IP) Address Embedded in a Different Advertised Route - Routes advertised in a network may include an Internet Protocol (IP) address and one or more values to distinguish the route from other route(s) including the same IP address. Routes in a same context (e.g., within a same Virtual Private Network or for an entire network) with a same IP address are considered to refer to a same destination. When these routes are associated with different paths through a network, these different paths can be used to forward traffic for packets associated with routes including a same IP address (in a same context), particularly in response to a network problem. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080912 | TCP RECEIVER ACCELERATION - A method for processing network information may include performing by one or more processors and/or circuits integrated within a single chip, classifying a header portion of a received packet based on connection context information within the received packet. The connection context information may be acquired by the single chip from a memory external to the single chip. The connection context information for the received packet may be updated based on the classifying. At least a payload portion of the received packet may be communicated to a destination, based on the updated connection context information. The classifying, updating and communicating may be performed asynchronously. The header portion of the received packet may be parsed and/or validated. The connection context information of the received packet may be evaluated. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080913 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR LAYER-2 TO 7 SEARCH ENGINE FOR HIGH SPEED NETWORK APPLICATION - High-speed networking application equipments with a layer-2 to layer-7 hardware search engine and method are with flexibility and performance improvement. The multi-layer switches/routers, network address translation (NAT) gateway, firewall/VPN router and network attached storage (NAS) may use the search engine for fast and efficient search requirement. | 04-07-2011 |
20110085549 | DATA ROUTING ACCELERATION - Systems, devices and methods for improving network performance are disclosed. In particular, in one embodiment, a method of processing data packets in an electronic network is provided. The method includes receiving data packets at a receive stack of an electronic network device and creating a first packet from at least a portion of each of the set of data packets. The first packet includes an indicator that the first packet is a first packet type. Additionally, the method includes passing the first packet to one of a bridge and IP layer of the receive stack. A first packet inhibitor at the one of the bridge and IP layer is bypassed upon recognizing the first packet as a first packet type. The first packet is routed to a transmit stack of the electronic network device from the one of the bridge and IP layer. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085550 | Zero-latency network on chip (NoC) - Packet format configurability is extended for packets transported on physical links of an Intellectual Property (IP) core interconnect by using at least two independent parameters: one parameter governing data-width and one parameter governing latency penalty. The at least two independent parameters allow creation of transport protocol packets without additional latency insertion, which is useful for low-latency applications. The at least two independent parameters also allow creation of narrow packets with multi-cycle additional latency, which is useful for latency tolerant, area sensitive applications. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085551 | STAGGERCASTING METHOD AND APPARATUS USING TYPE OF SERVICE (TOS) INFORMATION - A stagger transmitter manipulates the Type of Service (TOS) information contained in packets transmitted therefrom. Downstream network devices, such as a network Multiplexer (MUX), use the TOS information to handle the packets. A MUX controls the bandwidth allocated to each of the original and staggered streams in accordance with the TOS information. The stagger transmitter manipulates the TOS information of packets in accordance with other information contained in the packets, such as Network Abstraction Layer (NAL) information. As such, the staggered stream copies of more important packets, as indicated by their NAL information, can have their TOS information set by the stagger transmitter so that a network MUX will forward such staggered packets in addition to the original packets, thereby providing redundancy and error protection for such packets. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085552 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FORMING VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK - Technology for forming a virtual private network (VPN) is provided. A VPN gateway that supports mobility with a connection node having a virtual home address (HoA) and a care of address (CoA) includes a mobility support unit, a data security unit, and a virtual address converter. When a packet is transferred from the connection node, the mobility support unit sustains a binding relationship between a home address (HoA) of the connection node and the changed CoA, and processes a mobility tunnel for the packet, thereby generating a first conversion packet. The data security unit performs a security test of the first conversion packet. The virtual address converter converts the HoA of the connection node, which is a source address of the first conversion packet in which the security test is complete, to a private network internal address that can be used in the VPN, thereby generating a second conversion packet. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085553 | OUTPUT QUEUED SWITCH WITH A PARALLEL SHARED MEMORY, AND METHOD OF OPERATING SAME - A network switch includes an input layer to receive a data stream with a set of cells. Each cell includes data and a header to designate a destination device. The input layer includes a set of input layer circuits. A selected input layer circuit of the set of input layer circuits receives the data stream. The selected input layer circuit includes a set of queues corresponding to a set of destination devices. The selected input layer circuit is configured to assign a selected cell from the data stream to a selected queue of the set of queues. The selected queue corresponds to a selected destination device specified by the header of the selected cell. An intermediate layer includes a set of intermediate layer circuits, each intermediate layer circuit has a set of buffers corresponding to the set of destination devices. A selected intermediate layer circuit of the set of intermediate layer circuits receives the selected cell and assigns the selected cell to a selected buffer corresponding to the selected destination device. An output layer includes a set of output layer circuits corresponding to the set of destination devices. A selected output layer circuit of the set of output layer circuits stores the selected cell prior to routing the selected cell to a selected output layer circuit output node. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085554 | Method and Device for Maintaining Routes - A method, system, and device for maintaining routes are provided. A communications network includes multiple point of presence (PoP) groups, where each of the PoP groups includes one or more PoP nodes. PoP nodes within the same PoP group issue routing information of the same super prefix. PoP nodes within different PoP groups issue routing information of different super prefixes. The method further includes the following steps. A PoP node acquires routing information of a detailed prefix covered by a super prefix issued by the PoP node and synchronizes the routing information of the detailed prefix with other PoP nodes within the same PoP group. The method, system, and device reduce flow of data forwarded by each PoP node. | 04-14-2011 |
20110090906 | PACKET REDIRECTION IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method of controlling the re-direction of IP packets to an IP host having two or more different IP addresses comprises generating a first of said IP addresses as a one-way function of the second IP address. The method further comprises accepting a request to re-direct a packet destined to said first IP address to another IP address only if the other IP address is the second IP address. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090907 | SERVICE SEGREGATION ACCORDING TO SUBSCRIBER SERVICE ASSOCIATION - Processing a plurality of packets through at least one service, a privilege granter monitors at least two authentication packets to obtain a source unique network identifier, one of which does not have a vendor specific attribute and detects an authentication packet among the at least two authentication packets, and the authentication packet having the vendor specific attribute. The privilege granter receives at least one response authentication packet having at least one service definition identifier, the service definition identifier corresponding to the source unique network identifier, responsive to detecting the authentication packet having the vendor specific attribute and builds an entitlement database to pair the source unique network identifier to the service definition identifier. The privilege granter receives a session packet and determines that the source unique network identifier corresponds to a user entitlement in the entitlement database. The privilege granter routes the session packet to an addressable service. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090908 | ADAPTIVE MULTI-INTERFACE USE FOR CONTENT NETWORKING - One embodiment provides a system that forwards a packet with a hierarchically structured variable-length identifier (HSVLI) in a network. An HSVLI indicates a piece of content and indicates a hierarchical structure of contiguous components ordered from a most general level to a most specific level. The length of the HSVLI is not fixed. During operation, the system receives a packet which contains an interest for a piece of content with an HSVLI. Subsequently, the system determines forwarding information for the HSVLI based on one or more of: knowledge of content which matches the HSVLI, a forwarding policy, and contextual information about the network. Next, the system configures a forwarding engine with the forwarding information. The system then forwards the packet based on the forwarding information. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090909 | MULTIFUNCTIONAL CONTROL CHANNEL FOR PSEUDOWIRE EMULATION - A system advertises a multifunctional control channel (MFCC) in an interface parameter sub-type-length-value (TLV) of an advertisement label mapping message that is dispatched to a network device. The system also processes a reply label mapping message that is transmitted from the network device in response to the advertisement label mapping message and updates a label information base to establish a pseudowire and a MFCC associated with the pseudowire. | 04-21-2011 |
20110096780 | LABEL DISTRIBUTION PROTOCOL SYNCHRONIZATION IN MULTI-PROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING ENVIRONMENTS - A method may include determining that a label distribution protocol (LDP) session is not associated with an interface of a network device, wherein the interface of the network device is included in a targeted LDP session. Interior gateway protocol (IGP) metric information for both a physical interface associated with the network device and a forwarding adjacency label switched path (FA-LSP) associated with the targeted LDP (tLDP) session may be configured to each indicate a high cost. The configured metric information may be transmitted to other network devices in a network that includes the LSP and the targeted LDP session to inhibit selection of the targeted LDP session by the other network devices when routing data through the network. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096781 | METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATED TO A DISTRIBUTED SWITCH FABRIC - A method of sending data to a switch fabric includes assigning a destination port of an output module to a data packet based on at least one field in a first header of the data packet. A module associated with a first stage of the switch fabric is selected based on at least one field in the first header. A second header is appended to the data packet. The second header includes an identifier associated with the destination port of the output module. The data packet is sent to the module associated with the first stage. The module associated with the first stage is configured to send the data packet to a module associated with a second stage of the switch fabric based on the second header. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096782 | METHOD FOR CONVERTING NETWORK ADDRESS - In a network environment in which an endpoint identifier and a routing locator are separated from each other, a first router receives a data packet including an endpoint identifier of a first host and an endpoint identifier of a second host that is a communication target of the first host from the first host managed by the first router in order to convert a network address. A message requesting external address prefix information of the second host is transmitted to a second router managing the second host. In addition, the external address prefix information is received from the second router and a routing locator of the second host is generated by converting internal address prefix information of an endpoint identifier of the second host into the external address prefix information of the second host in the data packet. | 04-28-2011 |
20110103383 | TWO DIMENSIONAL LOCATION TRANSPARENCY OF SOFTWARE SERVICES - Provided are methods and systems distributing a data message to an unknown destination device across at least one spatial boundary and at least one administrative domain boundary from an originating device. The system includes at least one distributor module that exists within each administrative domain of a network through which the data message may originate, may terminate or may traverses in route from the originating device to the unknown destination device. Each administrative domain within each of a plurality of equipment platforms has at least one distributor module. The system also includes a domain bridge spanning the at least one administrative domain boundary within an equipment platform of the plurality through which the data message traverses in route to the unknown destination device. The system operates using a network discovery service whereby an advertisement is published for a specific type of data by the unknown destination device. The advertisement is promulgated throughout the network. Each distributor module in the network acts a surrogate for the unknown destination device by accepting the data and relaying it to another surrogate until it arrives at the destination device. The system allows the data to pass through both spatial and administrative barriers automatically. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103384 | ROUTING DEVICE AND METHOD OF CONFIGURATION FOR NETWORK NAME RESOLUTION OF SAME - There is provided a routing device configured for operatively interconnecting a first digital data network (DDN) and a second DDN. The routing device comprises a first and second interface for operative connection with the respective first and second DDN and for transferring data packets associated with the first and second DDN. The routing device further comprises a processing system for processing the data packets and for transferring the data packets between the first interface and the second interface based upon address information encoded in the data packets. The processing system is configured with a routing device designation for identifying the routing device and a network address associated with the first DDN. Upon activation of the routing device, the processing system returns the network address in response to a network name resolution request for the routing device designation encoded in one or more first data packets characterized by one or more predetermined network protocols received from the first DDN. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103385 | Apparatus and Method for Hardware Payload Header Suppression, Expansion, and Verification - The present invention provides methods for performing payload header suppression (PHS), expansion, and verification in hardware. A PHS verify circuit reads a data packet until it reaches the location where the first byte must be compared to PHS rule verify bytes. Next, all the relevant bytes in the payload header are compared to the PHS vile verify bytes obtained from a payload header suppression rule mask. Upon completion of the compare, a flag is generated to a PHS suppress circuit indicating that verification has passed or failed. For payload headers passing the verification process, the payload header suppress circuit examines the payload header suppression mask to identify one or more bits in the payload header for which an associated byte string is to be suppressed. Next, the associated byte string for each of the identified bits are suppressed to generate a suppressed packet payload header. Finally, a payload header suppression index is added to the suppressed packet payload header. The data packet, including the suppressed packet header and suppression index are then transmitted. Once received, a payload header suppress circuit on the receiver end examines the payload header suppression index to determine if the payload header has been suppressed. For each suppressed payload header, each bit in the payload header is compared to a payload header suppression mask to determine if the bit has been suppressed. Next, for each suppressed bit, a byte string is retrieved from a payload header suppression rule and inserted into the suppressed payload header. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103386 | System and Method for Communication of Uncompressed Visual Information Through A Network - DisplayPort micropackets of uncompressed visual information are adapted to conventional network infrastructure with a switch having DisplayPort ports, network ports and a packet converter. The packet converter encapsulates DisplayPort packets for communication through network ports and extracts DisplayPort packets from network packets for communication through DisplayPort ports. An address resolution table associates the switch ports with each other and with a packet converter operation by using a control field that defines the packet converter operation for information received at each port, such as encapsulation, extraction or native switching. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103387 | STATEFUL NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION PROTOCOL IMPLEMENTED OVER A DATA NETWORK - A technique is disclosed for synchronizing NAT information stored on different network devices that have been configured to implement a network address translation protocol. Each of the network devices includes a respective NAT data structure configured to store NAT information. The NAT information includes at least one NAT entry relating to a network node engaged in a communication session with at least one other network node. At least one NAT entry in a first NAT data structure is modified. The first NAT data structure is associated with a first NAT network device. A first NAT transaction message is generated which includes information relating to the modifications performed on the first NAT data structure. The first NAT transaction message is transmitted to at least one other NAT network device to thereby cause that device to modify its respective NAT data structure using information from the first NAT transaction message. In this way, synchronization of NAT information stored on each of the network devices may be achieved. | 05-05-2011 |
20110110370 | Compressed virtual routing and forwarding in a communications network - In one embodiment, an apparatus includes a plurality of network site interfaces in communication with two or more networks, each of the networks associated with a different Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) instance, and a processor configured for mapping the VRF instances to an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) adjacency and transmitting VRF information on the IGP adjacency along with a VRF identifier indicating the network associated with the VRF information. A method is also disclosed. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110371 | Establishing Directed Communication Based Upon Physical Interaction Between Two Devices - A method and system for establishing communication with a device is provided. Aspects of an exemplary embodiment include detecting, at a first device, a physical interaction involving the first device and a second device; requesting assignment of a network address usable for establishing communication between the first device and the second device, wherein the network address is based on information associated with the detected physical interaction; and automatically transferring content between the first device and the second device using the network address based on information associated with the detected physical interaction. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110372 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO PERFORM HYBRID SWITCHING AND ROUTING FUNCTIONS - A system aggregates connections to multiple customer devices. The system receives data, performs switching functions on the data when the data is to be transmitted in a first direction, performs routing functions on the data when the data is to be transmitted in a second direction, and transmits the data in the first or second direction. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110373 | COMPOSITE NEXT HOPS FOR FORWARDING DATA IN A NETWORK SWITCHING DEVICE - A network device includes a memory, a routing engine and a forwarding engine. The memory stores a forwarding table and the routing engine constructs a first composite next hop that includes multiple next hops, where each of the multiple next hops represents an action to be taken on a data unit as it transits the network device or represents another composite next hop, and where the first composite next hop specifies a function to be performed on the plurality of next hops. The routing engine further stores the composite next hop in an entry of the forwarding table. The forwarding engine retrieves the composite next hop from the forwarding table, and forwards a data unit towards one or more network destinations based on the composite next hop. | 05-12-2011 |
20110116505 | PACKET HEADERS AS A TRIGGER FOR AUTOMATIC ACTIVATION OF SPECIAL-PURPOSE SOFTPHONE APPLICATIONS - Methods, devices, and systems for automatically controlling the activation and/or deactivation of communication applications are provided. More specifically, methods, devices, and systems are provided such that the inspection of communication packet headers can be leveraged as a trigger for automatically activating and/or deactivating communication applications and the population of a corresponding user-interface to the application. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116506 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR REROUTE AND GENERATION OF BACKWARD ROUTING INFORMATION - Methods and systems for reroute and generation of backward routing information are provided. When an originator node wants to transmit a packet to a destination node and cannot transmit the packet to a next node recorded in a routing table, the originator node records a backward packet tag and information of the originator node into the packet, and transmits the edited packet to a backup node recorded in the routing table. The backup node retrieves a backward routing table in response to the backward packet tag to see whether a forwarding node corresponding to the originator node and the destination node is a backward routing terminal. If not, the backup node transmits the packet to the forwarding node. If so, the backup node removes the backward packet tag and the information of the originator node from the packet, and transmits the packet to the forwarding node. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116507 | ITERATIVE PARSING AND CLASSIFICATION - Some of the embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method comprising performing, by an iterative parser and classifier engine, a first parsing and classification cycle on a data packet, based at least in part on header information of the data packet; generating a first parsing and classification result based at least in part on performing the first parsing and classification cycle; and performing a second parsing and classification cycle on the data packet, based at least in part on header information of the data packet and the first parsing and classification result. Other embodiments are also described and claimed. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116508 | RING COUPLING NODES FOR HIGH AVAILABILITY NETWORKS - Exemplary embodiments are directed to a network coupling device connected over a respective first and second port in a communication network with a ring topology operating with full duplex links. When sending information, the coupling device inserts two duplicate frames in the ring, one over each of its ports. The frames containing information that identifies these two frames as a pair of duplicates of the same frame. Each similar device in the ring includes a Switching Element that receives a frame from one port and forwards the frame to the other port without modification. The Switching Element discards a frame that was originally sent by that same node, discards a frame that it already forwarded in that direction, and/or discards a frame that it cannot recognize as being a member of a pair. A further similar device on the ring is able to receive the two duplicate frames and pass the earlier received frames of a pair to the application, while discarding the later, received frames based on the identification within the frames. | 05-19-2011 |
20110122874 | HETEROGENEOUS FORWARDING INFORMATION BASES IN LINE CARDS - A device may include a control module configured to distribute sets of routing entries to line cards, each of the sets including a portion of a master table for looking up routes based on network addresses. In addition, the device may include a first one of the line cards configured to receive one of the sets of routing entries, store the received set of routing entries in a local table, receive a packet from a network, obtain a routing entry using the local table based on an address associated with the packet, and send the obtained packet to a second one of the line cards, the second line card associated with the routing entry. Further, the device may include the second line card configured to forward the packet toward the address in the network. | 05-26-2011 |
20110128959 | HASH-BASED PREFIX-COMPRESSED TRIE FOR IP ROUTE LOOKUP - A method and apparatus for performing an Internet Protocol (IP) network lookup in a forwarding device including an internal processor memory storing a first next hop information table and membership query information, and an external processor memory storing a plurality of prefix-compressed trees and a second next hop information table is described. In another embodiment consistent with present invention, a method (and apparatus) for creating stored data structures representing network forwarding information used for network route lookup is described. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128960 | HASH-BASED PREFIX-COMPRESSED TRIE FOR IP ROUTE LOOKUP - A method and apparatus for updating stored data structures representing network forwarding information used for network route lookup is described. By making sure there is only one level of dependency between data structures storing forwarding information, these data structures may be updated quickly and with minimal overhead | 06-02-2011 |
20110128961 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR UTILIZING VARIABLE RATE PROGRAM STREAMS IN A NETWORK - Apparatus and methods for transparently using otherwise wasted bandwidth associated with variable-rate program streams to deliver additional content. In one embodiment, the network comprises a broadcast switched architecture (BSA), and the program streams are loaded up to a target rate using “null” packets and then delivered over the network infrastructure to a plurality of hub sites. The streams are then unloaded to reproduce the original variable streams, and the bandwidth vacated by removal of the null packets used as the transport mechanism for additional (e.g., non time-sensitive) content to be delivered to the subscribers. The process can also be substantially automated and anticipatory (through, e.g., transmission of null bit insertion data downstream). The invention can also advantageously be implemented with minimal modifications to existing infrastructure, and supports business and operational supervisory processes. Network server, QAM modulator, and CPE apparatus implementing the aforementioned methodologies are also disclosed. | 06-02-2011 |
20110134919 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTABLE RELIABLE MULTICAST DELIVERY OF DATA USING A PRESENCE SERVICE - A mechanism for selectable reliable multicast delivery of data, such as presence information or other media, to communication devices is implemented in a communication system. A multicast group includes a plurality of communication devices, wherein a subset of the plurality of communication devices sends a subscription for reliable multicast delivery of data to a presence server using a presence service. For those devices in the subset having a confirmed mode of multicast delivery enabled, the data is sent using the confirmed mode of multicast delivery, wherein an acknowledgement is required upon receipt of the data. For all remaining devices in the multicast group, the data is sent using an unconfirmed mode of multicast delivery, wherein no such acknowledgement is required. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134920 | HANDLING DATA PACKETS RECEIVED AT A ROUTING NODE - A method applied in a routing node, and a forwarding engine implemented in a routing node, are provided for handling data packets received at the routing node. A N-tuple comprising N elements is extracted from a first header of a data packet. A default meta-field is added to the N elements, providing a N+1-tuple. The N+1-tuple is used to make a first lookup of inspection rules. The default meta-field makes the inspection rules apply to the first header. The data packet is handled according to a result of the first lookup, wherein a possible outcome is a finding of a second header within the data packet. If a second header is found, a new meta-field value is set and a second lookup is made. The second lookup of the inspection rules is made according to N elements from the second header and the new value of the meta-field. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134921 | ATM SWITCH WITH OAM FUNCTIONS - An ATM switch allowing simplified OAM processing only on the line incoming side is disclosed. An incoming line circuit has a header conversion table storing information indicating whether the system is an end point of an OAM processing flow for each connection and an OAM table storing an AIS flag and an RDI flag for each connection. As for an OAM cell found by referring to these tables to be forced to go back to its own port, an switch output port number is rewritten in the OAM function section. In addition, in the case of an AIS cell, the function type is rewritten so as to become an RDI cell. In the case of an LB cell, the LB indication is rewritten so as to become a return LB cell, and switching to its own port is conducted in the ATM switch core. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134922 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORWARDING PACKETS IN IPV6 ACCESS NODE - In view of the technical problems that exist during implementing IP address anti-spoofing in an access node device in an IPv6 access network, the present invention proposes a packet forwarding method and apparatus in an IPv6 Access Node, for forwarding a packet from a Residential Gateway. In the method, the access node device first receives a packet from the Residential Gateway, then obtains a network prefix in a source UPv6 address of the packet, judges whether the network prefix in the source IPv6 address of the packet is a valid network prefix of a CPN corresponding to the Residential Gateway, and if yes, forwards the packet finally. Particularly, in the present invention the access node device can automatically obtain valid network prefix using technical means such as snooping a network prefix allocation reply message. Therefore, the present invention greatly increases operation efficiency and security of the IPv6 access network and simplifies network management of the IPv6 access network. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134923 | Intelligent Adjunct Network Device - An adjunct network device includes several ports, an uplink interface, and an adjunct forwarding engine coupled to the ports and the uplink interface. A first port is configured to receive a packet, which includes a destination address. The adjunct forwarding engine is configured to send the packet to the uplink interface if the destination address is not associated with any of the ports. The packet is sent to one of the ports if the destination address is associated with the one of the ports. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134924 | MULTI-PATH NETWORK - The present invention provides a multi-path network for use in a bridge, switch, router, hub or the like, comprising a plurality of network ports adapted for connection with one or more devices, each device having a different identifying address data; a plurality of network elements; and a plurality of network links interconnecting the network elements and connecting the network elements to the network ports, wherein the multi-path network further comprises separately addressable memory elements each adapted for storing device address data and the multi-path network is adapted to distribute a plurality of device address data amongst the plurality of memory elements. | 06-09-2011 |
20110142045 | IPv6 VLAN TAG PACKET TRANSPORT OPTIMIZATION - A network device receives an Ethernet frame sent from an originating device toward a destination device, determines whether the frame includes an Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) payload, and determines whether the frame is one of an ingress frame or an egress frame for a virtual local area network (VLAN). The network device determines a VLAN tag for the frame when the frame is an ingress frame and inserts the VLAN tag in a portion of a source internet protocol (IP) address field or a destination IP address field of the IPv6 payload, when the frame is an ingress frame. The network device extracts a VLAN tag from a portion of the source IP address field or a destination IP address field of the IPv6 payload, when the frame is an egress frame. The frame is then output to one of the VLAN or the destination device. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142046 | Selective label retention in a label switching network - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving from a label distribution peer, a prefix/FEC to label mapping at a network device and processing the prefix/FEC to label mapping at the network device, wherein processing includes determining if a next hop interface of the prefix/FEC is in a same area as a link between the network device and the label distribution peer. The method further includes retaining the prefix/FEC to label mapping if the label distribution peer is a next hop for the prefix/FEC and if the next hop interface of the prefix/FEC is in the same area as the link between the network device and the label distribution peer, otherwise discarding the prefix/FEC to label mapping. An apparatus is also disclosed. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142047 | BACKBONE EDGE SWITCHING APPARATUS AND PACKET PROCESSING METHOD OF THE BACKBONE EDGE SWITCHING APPARATUS - Provided is a backbone edge switching apparatus and a packet processing method of the backbone edge switching apparatus. The backbone edge switching apparatus may generate and manage an integrated service flow by performing a lookup according to multiple layers with respect to an input packet. Accordingly, it is possible to provide various and effective transmission services. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142048 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING COMMON CARRIER SELECTION SERVICE IN DISTRIBUTION NETWORK - A distribution network system of a distribution network providing a common carrier selection service includes a distribution network device and a user portal server. The distribution network device detects a terminal that attempts to access the distribution network, determines whether or not the terminal has subscribed to the common carrier selection service, and connects the terminal to a common carrier as a service provider selected by the terminal according to the determination result. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142049 | MEDIA OVER IP PERFORMANCE ENHANCEMENT - A method of transmitting data traffic from a network node comprising the steps of identifying a plurality of data packets as being members of a data session adding a timestamp to the header or data payload of each packet within the session wherein the timestamp is an additional timestamp and transmitting the packets to their destination. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142050 | HASHING PACKET CONTENTS TO DETERMINE A PROCESSOR - The disclosure includes a description of an apparatus having circuitry to determine a first hash value for a first packet tuple of a first packet traveling in a first direction of a duplex connection and determine a processor for the first packet from a set of multiple processors based, at least in part, on the first hash value. The apparatus includes circuitry to determine a second hash value for a second packet tuple of a second packet traveling in a second direction of the duplex connection and determine the same processor for the second packet from the set of multiple processors based, at least in part, on the second hash value. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142051 | End-To-End Network Access Analysis - Instances of router models and filter models respectively are populated with configuration data from routers and filters in a network ( | 06-16-2011 |
20110142052 | METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING DATA PACKETS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SWITCHING DEVICE - In a method for transferring data packets in a communication network, first data packets having a low priority are transferred between a transmitter and a receiver and second data packets having a high priority compared to the first data packets are preferably transferred between them. In a second data packet to be transferred it is checked whether presently a first data packet is being transferred. If yes, the transfer of the first data packet is interrupted or stopped and the second data packet is then transferred. After the transfer of the second data packet, the transfer of the un-transferred first data packet is repeated or the rest of the incompletely transferred first data packet is transferred. Each first data packet is stored in an intermediate memory in parallel with a transmission and is only deleted from the intermediate memory after complete transfer of the first data packet to the receiver. | 06-16-2011 |
20110149962 | EMBEDDING OF MPLS LABELS IN IP ADDRESS FIELDS - MPLS labels may be inserted in IPv6 source or destination IP address fields, potentially reducing network overhead bandwidth. In one implementation, a network device may receive a packet; determine whether the packet is an ingress packet for a MPLS LSP; determine an MPLS label for the packet when the packet is an ingress packet; insert the MPLS label in a portion of a source IP address field or a destination IP address field of the packet, when the packet is an ingress packet; and output the packet to the LSP. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149963 | DISTRIBUTED ROUTING ARCHITECTURE - A hierarchical distributed routing architecture including at least two levels, or layers, for receiving, processing and forwarding data packets between network components is provided. The core level router components receive an incoming packet from a network component and identify a distribution level router component based on processing a subset of the destination address associated with the received packet. The distribution level router components receive a forwarded packet and forward the packet to a respective network. The mapping, or other assignment, of portions of the FIB associated with the distributed routing environment is managed by a router management component. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149964 | DISTRIBUTED ROUTING ARCHITECTURE - A hierarchical distributed routing architecture including at least three levels, or layers, for receiving, processing and forwarding data packets between network components is provided. The core level router components receive an incoming packet from a network component and identify a distribution level router component based on processing a subset of the destination address associated with the received packet. The distribution level router components that receiving a forwarded packet and identify a transit level router component based a second processing of at least a subset of the destination address associated with the received packet. The transit level router components receive the forwarded packet and forward the packet to a respective network. The mapping, or other assignment, of portions of the FIB associated with the distributed routing environment is managed by a router management component. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149965 | DISTRIBUTED ROUTING ARCHITECTURE - A hierarchical distributed routing architecture including at least three levels, or layers, for receiving, processing and forwarding data packets between network components is provided. The core level router components receive an incoming packet from a network component and identify a distribution level router component based on processing a subset of the destination address associated with the received packet. The distribution level router components that receiving a forwarded packet and identify a transit level router component based a second processing of at least a subset of the destination address associated with the received packet. The distribution level router components maintain address routing information a first and second memory. The transit level router components receive the forwarded packet and forward the packet to a respective network. The mapping, or other assignment, of portions of the FIB associated with the distributed routing environment is managed by a router management component. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149966 | Header Processing Engine - Roughly described, a header processing engine for a network interface device has a header recognizer to parse the headers of a data packet stored at a buffer to identify the type and position of each header in the packet; a constructor unit; and a processor including an execution pipeline. The header recognizer is configured to, for each header: select in dependence on the header type commands stored at a command memory; and form one or more messages for the constructor unit identifying the selected commands and the position of the header in the data packet. The commands selected for the packet headers are collectively such as to, if executed by the constructor unit, cause the constructor unit to generate a data structure which operates to cause the processor to process of the packet headers without accessing the data packet at the buffer. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149967 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING NETWORK PACKETS ADAPTED FOR MULTIMEDIA STREAMS - A system and a method for transmitting network packets are provided. The system includes an information module, a scheduling module, and a forwarding module. The information module receives and records media information of a plurality of multimedia streams. The scheduling module calculates a guaranteed bit rate of each multimedia stream according to the media information provided by the information module, and rearranges isochronous packets of the multimedia streams in the first time slots of a plurality of clock cycles according to the guaranteed bit rates so that the transmission of the isochronous packets satisfies the guaranteed bit rates. The length of each clock cycle is a predetermined length. The length of the first time slot and the predetermined length are in a predetermined ratio. The forwarding module transmits all the packets of a clock cycle to a network at every a time interval of the predetermined length. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149968 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING INTERNET NETWORK - An Internet network control method is disclosed. When an inter-layer interworking occurs in the Internet network, an upper layer transmits control information on layers related to the interworking to the layers. Therefore, a uniform system for packet exchange in the Internet network is provided. Additionally, since a packet header of a packet transmitted among the layers includes an identifier (ID) regarding a slice, information may be distributed in a centralized system or a distributed system. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149969 | Method of Controlling Data Propagation Within a Network - The present invention provides a method of limiting the frequency of floods within a data network, the floods arising as a data frame is routed to an unknown destination, the method comprising the steps of: (a) receiving ( | 06-23-2011 |
20110149970 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING ETHERNET FRAME IN NETWORK BRIDGE AND THE BRIDGE - Provided is a method of transmitting an Ethernet frame via a network bridge, the method includes receiving a frame header from a previous node connected to the network bridge; receiving a header cyclic redundancy check (CRC) flag and header CRC with respect to the frame header from the previous node; determining whether to forward the Ethernet frame including the frame header by referring to the header CRC flag and the header CRC; and forwarding the Ethernet frame from the previous node to a next node connected to the network bridge according to the determination. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149971 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING PACKETS - A method, an apparatus, and a system for processing packets are disclosed. The method is applied to a distributed architecture of multiple service boards; the distributed architecture includes a main control board, at least one service board, and at least one interface board. The method includes: determining a specified CPU corresponding to a received packet; and, by the service board corresponding to the CPU, processing the received packet. Through the embodiments of the present invention, the received packets are processed in the service board corresponding to the specified CPU. Therefore, the packets are evenly distributed to all service boards for being processed, the workload of the main control board is relieved, the service throughput is increased significantly, and the packet processing efficiency of the whole architecture is improved. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149972 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM, NETWORK SWITCH AND BANDWIDTH CONTROL, FOR SITE-TO-SITE COMMUNICATIONS - A communication network system is disclosed in which local-branch-site-line network switches accommodating local-branch-site lines, and at least one data-center-site-line network switch accommodating at least one data-center-site line, are interconnected via a carrier network. This system include: a first bandwidth controller, disposed at each local-branch-site-line network switch, configured to limit a bandwidth of each of inbound packets and/or outbound packets to a pre-selected bandwidth α, wherein the inbound packets flow from the instant local-branch-site-line network switch or other local-branch-site-line network switches, and the outbound packets flow to the instant local-branch-site-line network switch or other local-branch-site-line network switches; and a second bandwidth controller, disposed at each local-branch-site-line network switch, configured to limit a bandwidth of each of inbound packets and/or outbound packets to a pre-selected bandwidth β broader than the bandwidth α, wherein the inbound packets flow from the data-center-site-line network switch, and the outbound packets flow to the data-center-site-line network switch. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149973 | Packet Forwarding In A Network - A method of providing packet routing information comprises: encoding routing information from a source node to one or more destination nodes into a compact representation of set membership; and putting the compact representation of sets into a header of a packet that is to be sent from the source node to the destination node(s). The compact representation may be obtained by: generating d representations of a set of identifiers; generating d candidate compact representations of set membership from the d representations of the identifiers; and selecting one of the candidate compact representation of set membership. The selection may be made on the basis of which of the candidate compact representations has the lowest rate of returning false positives. | 06-23-2011 |
20110158236 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING A CALL TO AN AGGREGATE ENDPOINT DEVICE - A method and an apparatus for processing a call to an aggregate endpoint device over a network are disclosed. For example, the method receives a session request by an application server, wherein a route header for the session request comprises an aggregate endpoint identifier, and determines at least one Public User Identity (PUID) of the aggregate endpoint device in accordance with the aggregate endpoint identifier. The method obtains a Serving-Call Session Control Function Fully Qualified Domain Name (S-CSCF FDQN) of a Serving-Call Session Control Function (S-CSCF) that performs a termination processing for the aggregate endpoint device, and forwards the session request to the S-CSCF with a route header that comprises the PUID of the aggregate endpoint device. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158237 | MODIFICATION OF PEER-TO-PEER BASED FEATURE NETWORK BASED ON CHANGING CONDITIONS / SESSION SIGNALING - A device communicates with feature peers, associated with a network, to obtain information associated with the feature peers, and receives a customer packet that includes a feature header. The device also modifies, based on the feature peer information, current condition state signaling, and other information, the feature header to create a modified customer packet, and determines, based on the feature peer information, the current condition state signaling, and the other information, which of the feature peers support a feature associated with the modified customer packet. The device further selects, from the determined feature peers, a set of feature peers for the modified customer packet to traverse, and forwards, based on the modified feature header, the modified customer packet to one of the feature peers in the selected set of feature peers. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158238 | IP Cache - Each device (A, B) keeps an IP cache list storing IP address of devices it has communicated with in the past over an IP network ( | 06-30-2011 |
20110158239 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATING PACKET MULTIMEDIA TO RESTRICTED ENDPOINTS - A method, performed in a network element, for communicating packet multimedia data between a first endpoint and a second endpoint, the method comprising the machine-implemented steps of receiving an outbound multimedia data packet; determining if the outbound multimedia data packet originated from a first endpoint that is logically behind a security device; determining and storing information identifying a logical pinhole in the security device, wherein the logical pinhole is associated with expected inbound multimedia data packets directed to the first endpoint; performing an action that keeps the logical pinhole open during all of a communication session between the first endpoint and the second endpoint; and forwarding inbound multimedia data packets directed from the second endpoint to the first endpoint via the logical pinhole. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158240 | Method and apparatus for realizing unicast reverse path forwarding - The present invention discloses a method and apparatus for realizing unicast reverse path forwarding. In this method, an access equipment snoops into and obtains an announcement message from a router, wherein the announcement message contains address prefix information; the access equipment establishes a prefix table based on the obtained address prefix information, receives an access request message from a customer premises equipment, determines whether a source IP address of the access request message exists in the prefix table, and decides whether to forward the message to the router based on a result of determining. According to the technical solution provided by the present invention, the message from the customer premises equipment is processed through the obtained routing information of the router interface, thus a pseudo data packet can be filtered out, and address filter control is realized at the access equipment. | 06-30-2011 |
20110164616 | Methods and apparatus for processing superframes - Methods and apparatus for transmitting a plurality of packets in a switch having a plurality of input ports and a plurality of output ports are disclosed. Two or more packets are received at one or more of the plurality of input ports. One of the plurality of output ports via which to send each of the two or more packets is identified. A request message is sent to an arbitrator. A grant message is then received from the arbitrator in response to the request message. A frame including the two or more received packets is generated. The frame is then sent to the one of the plurality of output ports when the grant message is received. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164617 | Enhanced Hierarchical Virtual Private Local Area Network Service (VPLS) System and Method for Ethernet-Tree (E-Tree) Services - A network apparatus comprising a trunk end point associated with an Ethernet-tree (E-Tree) service in a network domain and configured to forward a frame that comprises a tag according to the tag in the frame, wherein the tag in the frame is a root tag that indicates a root source of the frame or a leaf tag that indicates a leaf source of the frame, and wherein the trunk end point is coupled to a second end point associated with the E-tree service outside the network domain. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164618 | MEMORY ORGANIZATION IN A SWITCHING DEVICE - A router for switching data packets from a source to a destination in a network in which the router includes a distributed memory. The distributed memory includes two or more memory banks. Each memory bank is used for storing uniform portions of a data packet received from a source and linking information for each data packet to allow for the extraction of the uniform portions of a data packet from distributed locations in memory in proper order after a routing determination has been made by the router. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164619 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING EMERGENCY SERVICE AND PACKET CONTROL FUNCTION ENTITY - A method and system for supporting emergency service over a High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) Access Network (AN) and a Packet Control Function (PCF) entity. The method comprises the following steps: an AN function entity sends information indicating whether a user is using an emergent service to a PCF entity (S | 07-07-2011 |
20110164620 | BANDWIDTH VARIABLE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND BANDWIDTH VARIABLE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A bandwidth variable communication apparatus includes: a route exchange unit including a route exchange function for switching an output port of a stream signal of one or more wavelengths input from an input port based on both or a part of wavelength and time, and including a bandwidth change function for changing passable frequency bandwidth in a section from the input port to the output port through which the stream signal passes; and a control unit including a control information transmit-receive function for transmitting and receiving control information for both or a part of the route exchange function and the bandwidth change function of the route exchange unit, and including a control function for controlling the route exchange unit based on the control information. All or a part of the input ports and the output ports are connected to other communication apparatuses via transmission routes. | 07-07-2011 |
20110170544 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A GIGABIT ETHERNET IP TELEPHONE CHIP WITH INTEGRATED SECURITY MODULE - A method for processing Ethernet data and may include receiving Ethernet data via at least one Ethernet physical interface transceiver (PHY) integrated within a single Ethernet IP telephone chip. At least one secure application key may be received from a secure server by an on-chip security module (OSM) integrated within the Ethernet IP telephone chip for processing the received Ethernet data. The Ethernet IP telephone chip may be authenticated prior to the processing of the received Ethernet data using a security processor integrated within the OSM. The received Ethernet data may be processed by the Ethernet IP telephone chip based on the received at least one secure application key. The at least one secure application key may be communicated only from the secure server to the Ethernet IP telephone chip. The received Ethernet data may include one or both of video data and/or voice data. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170545 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, NETWORK NODE, AND DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A data transmission method is provided. The method is used to transmit multiple data packets, and includes the following steps. Multiple acquired data packets are mapped to different sessions according to data header information of the data packets, in which each session corresponds to one or more data packets. A data packet is encapsulated into a session message, in which the encapsulated session message includes a session identifier of the session corresponding to the one or more data packets. Multiple session messages belonging to the same session are transmitted to a next network node through at least two tunnels in link layer. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170546 | LOGICAL SEPARATION AND ACCESSING OF DESCRIPTOR MEMORIES - A packet header processing engine includes a memory having a number of distinct portions for respectively storing different types of descriptor information for a header of a packet. A packet header processing unit includes a number of pointers corresponding to the number of distinct memory portions. The packet header processing unit is configured to retrieve the different types of descriptor information from the number of distinct memory portions and to generate header information from the different types of descriptor information. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170547 | GEOLOCATION ASSISTED DATA FORWARDING STORAGE - A method includes, in a network of interconnected computer system nodes, receiving a request from a source system to store data, directing the data to a computer memory in conjunction with its geolocation, geolocation enabling selecting nodes that are proximate to each other or a user to increase speed and efficiency, and continuously forwarding the data from one computer memory to another computer memory in the network of interconnected computer system nodes in conjunction with their geolocations without storing on any physical storage device in the network. | 07-14-2011 |
20110176548 | Method and System For Service Preparation of a Residential Network Access Device - The invention relates to a method and system of service preparation of a residential network access device from one or more remote provisioning devices to prepare said residential network access device to receive a network service over a communications network. The method comprises the steps of receiving a line identifier indicating a physical line used by said residential network access device to connect to said communication network; transmitting an IP address from said one or more provisioning devices to said residential network access device for which said line identifier has been received, said IP address being a source address for said residential network access device, and transmitting software code portions to said IP address of said residential network access device, said software code portions being required for receiving said network service. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176549 | METHOD OF BUS CONFIGURATION TO ENABLE DEVICE BRIDGING OVER DISSIMILAR BUSES - Several local IEEE1394 buses are bridged together over a second bus type to create a global bus wherein each local bus node is able to address nodes across the global bus without the local nodes being aware of the bridging operation. A bridging device operates by translating local bus node addresses to a global bus for communication over the second bus type. Alternatively, the local bus node identification process is controlled by the bridging device operating as the root node to cause the local nodes to be identified with a node address that is unique for the global network. The second bus type operates as a backbone for the global network and can be any type of communication bus or network with capability to transport the local bus traffic. The bridging devices that interface the local IEEE1394 buses to the backbone contain portals specific to each bus type that can communicate data between the dissimilar buses. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176550 | METHOD FOR FORWARDING PROTOCOL FRAMES IN SPANNING RINGS AND A SHARED NODE OF MULTI-RINGS IN THE ETHERNET - The present invention provides a method for forwarding a protocol frame in spanning rings, applied to the Ethernet ring network including a crossed or tangent ring and sub-ring. The method comprises steps as follows: when an interconnection node of the ring and the sub-ring receives a protocol frame from a sub-ring, if the topology of the sub-ring is changed, the interconnection node updates its address forwarding table according to the address updating information carried in the protocol frame, and sends the address updating information to the ring; the nodes of the ring update their address forwarding table respectively according the updating information. The present invention selectively sends information of sub-ring protocol frame to the ring via the interconnection node of the ring and the sub-ring. Such scheme that information of the sub-ring protocol frame is selective sent at the interconnection node not only solves the problem of updating address in spanning rings, but also decreases the amount of protocol frames sent from the sub-ring to the ring, and thereby greatly improves the performance and efficiency of the network. | 07-21-2011 |
20110182292 | DYNAMICALLY ASSIGNING PACKET FLOWS - In general, in one aspect, the disclosure describes a method includes accessing data of an egress packet belonging to a flow, storing data associating the flow with at least one queue based on a source of the data of the egress packet. The method also includes accessing an ingress packet belonging to the flow, performing a lookup of the at least one queue associated with the flow, and enqueueing data of the ingress packet to the at least one queue associated with the flow. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182293 | METHOD FOR INTERCEPTING AND SEARCHING HOST IN IPV6 NETWORK - Disclosed herein are methods of searching for a host in a network using IPv4 and of blocking and searching a host in an IPv6 network which blocking access to an unauthorized network. The present invention provides a method of searching for a host in an IPv6 network, including the steps of requesting host information, including link-layer address information and IP address information about an IP to be searched for, by sending a Neighbor Solicitation (NS) packet in which the IP to be searched for is set in an ICMPv6 target address to the network, after sending the NS packet, waiting for a predetermined time by taking a processing speed of a host and a transfer rate according to a network environment and state into consideration, after the predetermined time of waiting, determining whether a Neighbor Advertisement (NA) packet of the IP to be searched for has been received, and if, as a result of the determination, the NA packet of the IP to be searched for is determined to have been received, acquiring the host information from the NA packet. | 07-28-2011 |
20110188502 | METHOD FOR MANAGING MAC ADDRESS FOR OPEN NETWORK ADAPTOR - A MAC address management method for use in a computer system having a disk device to store a MAC address and assigns the MAC address to an open network adaptor (ONA) printed board, which has a memory retaining a MAC address and an open network adaptor, mounted into the computer system. The METHOD includes: reading, when an ONA printed board is mounted into the computer system for the first time, the MAC address from the memory on the ONA printed board and storing the MAC address in the disk device and invalidating the MAC address; and validating, if a migration instruction is inputted, the MAC address stored in the memory of the ONA printed board mounted in the computer system. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188503 | Ethernet Forwarding Database Method - A technique is described for retrieving data from a hash table in an Ethernet bridge. The table has a plurality of columns, each of which has a hash function, thereby creating respective different hash key values. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188504 | SMART ROUTING BETWEEN PEERS IN A POINT-TO-POINT LINK BASED SYSTEM - Smart routing between peers in a point-to-point link based system begins when a device of a plurality of devices in a point-to-point link interconnected system receives a packet from an upstream link or a downstream link. The processing continues when the device interprets the packet to determine a destination of the packet. If the device is the destination of the packet, the device accepts the packet. If, however, the device is not the destination of the packet, the device forwards the packet on another upstream link or another downstream link without alteration of at least one of: source information of the packet and destination information of the packet. | 08-04-2011 |
20110194560 | MULTICAST ADDRESS TO PACKET IDENTIFIER MAPPING FOR BROADCAST SYSTEMS - A mapping method for simplifying broadcast systems, such as Digital Video Broadcast Terrestrial (DVB-T). Broadcast address information is mapped to the Packet Identifier (PID) field of a Motion Picture Expert Group level 2 transport stream (MPEG2-TS). Table complexity can be minimized, or the service information (SI) tables can be removed without impacting hardware level discrimination of likely relevant packets. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194561 | SUMMARIZATION AND LONGEST-PREFIX MATCH WITHIN MPLS NETWORKS - In general, techniques are described for summarizing label mappings and thereby enabling longest-prefix match within Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) networks. More specifically, a first router included within a first area of a network comprises a control unit that maintains a label space defining labels available for mapping to a plurality of addresses assigned to network devices within the network. The control unit reserves a contiguous set of the labels of the label space and maps the contiguous set of labels to first area addresses. The first area addresses include those addresses of the plurality of addresses available for assignment to network devices within the first area. The first router also includes an interface card that transmits, to a second router of a second area of the network, an advertisement that advertises a summarized version of the mapping between the contiguous set of labels and the first area addresses. | 08-11-2011 |
20110200045 | System and Method for Data Communication Between a User Terminal and a Gateway via a Network Node - Systems and methods are provided for communicating data. A user terminal is connected to a first data communication network, and a first network node is connected to the first and a second data communication network. A gateway is connected to the second and a third data communication network. The user terminal packetizes data according to protocols corresponding to a protocol stack. The user terminal further transmits packetized data to the gateway via the first network node and via the first and second data communication networks and determines whether the packetized data arrived at the gateway. The user terminal also modifies the packetized data by replacing at least a part of a first header corresponding to a specific protocol of the protocol stack with a replacement. When the gateway receives the packetized data it depacketizes the data and generates, based upon replacement information, a specific payload according to a predefined protocol. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200046 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Disclosed herein is a communication apparatus, including: a transmission policy holding section configured to hold transmission policies each corresponding to a conversation; and a transmitted frame control section configured to modify transmitted frames of the conversation in accordance with the corresponding transmission policy held by the transmission policy holding section. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200047 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR DIAMETER PROTOCOL HARMONIZATION - According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for providing Diameter protocol harmonization. The method includes steps occurring at a Diameter node. The method further includes determining a first Diameter protocol associated with received Diameter information that is to be sent to a destination. The method also includes determining a second Diameter protocol associated with the destination. The method further includes harmonizing the received Diameter information such that the harmonized Diameter information is compatible with the second Diameter protocol. The method also includes providing the harmonized Diameter information to the destination. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200048 | Modem with Voice Processing Capability - A system is configured to facilitate bidirectional voice communication between a number of data and/or telephony devices. | 08-18-2011 |
20110206046 | Source-based queue selection mechanism in the routing environment - The invention is directed to a method and system for selecting queues for source-based queuing in a packet router, requiring only one flow per destination route. The invention stores source interface information for each packet while it is being processed. The invention applies to packet routers including IP routers, Ethernet routers and Label Switched Routers (LSR). | 08-25-2011 |
20110206047 | Multiple Network Architecture Providing for Migration of Devices - In providing seamless migration of virtual or physical devices among networks of a virtual local area network (VLAN) such as one spanning multiple data centers, a same virtual anycast Medium Access Control (VMAC) is used for reaching default gateways in virtual and/or physical devices. Each network is typically configured such that source MAC learning for the VMAC should happen only for packets coming from the local default gateway. In this manner, when a device is migrated between networks of the VLAN, the same IP address and corresponding MAC address (typically still residing in the MAC cache of the migrated device) can be used to reach the local default gateway. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206048 | DATA TRANSFER SYSTEM AND METHOD - A transmission source bridge collects packets sent from nodes connected to a serial bus in accordance the IEEE1394 Standards, into one packet in an order they are to be transmitted and then sends them onto an ATM network, so that a transmission destination bridge receives this packet and divides it into a plurality of smaller packets and transfers them, in the order they were sent, to nodes connected to the serial bus in accordance with the IEEE1394 Standards. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206049 | TARGETED FLOW SAMPLING - A device may include two or more line interfaces. One of the line interfaces may include a component to buffer a packet that is received at the line interface, perform a lookup of information related to selecting a flow based on a header of the packet, apply a symmetric hash function to addresses in the header to obtain a hash when the information related to selecting the flow indicates the flow is to be selected based on a random method, compare the hash to a particular number using the information related to selecting the flow, the particular number being same for the line interfaces, sample a flow when the hash matches the particular number, create a flow record for the flow, and sample packets based on the flow record. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206050 | PPP TERMINATING EQUIPMENT, NETWORK EQUIPMENT AND METHOD OF RESPONDING TO LCP ECHO REQUIREMENT - In a PPP terminating equipment | 08-25-2011 |
20110206051 | I/O BUS SYSTEM - A multi-route connection bridge | 08-25-2011 |
20110211579 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND NETWORK NODE FOR SETTING UP A LABEL SWITCHING PATH - The present invention relates to communications technologies and discloses a method, a system, and a label switching router for setting up a Label Switching Path (LSP). The method includes: an ingress edge node sends a label request packet to a downstream node, where the label request packet carries an Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) property flag of a Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC); the downstream node that receives the label request packet sends the label request packet to a next-hop node according to the property flag; and the node that receives the label request packet performs label mapping according to a path of the label request packet, binds a label to the FEC, and sets up an LSP. An ECMP property flag indicating setting up an ECMP route is permitted is introduced in the process of setting up an LSP. Therefore, setup of an ECMP route is prevented for the FEC that imposes special requirements, and management and maintenance of the network are facilitated. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211580 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CONTROLLING METHOD, AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A terminal connected to a network stores association information between a physical address and a logical address of the terminal as first association information in an address association information storing unit. The terminal obtains association information between a physical address and a logical address, which is transmitted to the terminal via the network, as second association information. The terminal determines, based on the first association information stored in the storing unit and the second association information, whether or not the logical address included in the first association information is duplicate. If the logical address is determined to be duplicate, the first association information is notified to a device belonging to the network to which the terminal belongs, and the device is instructed to resolve duplication of the logical address. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211581 | TRANSLATOR FOR IP NETWORKS, NETWORK SYSTEM USING THE TRANSLATOR, AND IP NETWORK COUPLING METHOD THEREFOR - A translator for coupling a first IPv4 network and a second IPv6 network having different addressing architectures for IP addresses so as not to exhaust the IP addresses of one of the two networks, a network system using the translator, and a network coupling method. When a packet is transferred from the IPv6 network to the IPv4 network, the translator assigns any of previously prepared IPv4 addresses to an IPv6 address stored in a source storing field of the IPv6 packet. The assigned address is stored in a source storing field of an IPv4 packet. A packet translation unit assigns the foregoing IPv6 address to an IPv4 address stored in a destination storing field of the IPv4 packet, when a packet is transferred from the IPv4 network to the IPv6 network, and stores this address in a destination storing field of the IPv6 packet. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211582 | Interconnects using Self-timed Time-Division Multiplexed Bus - A method of sending signals, including data and timing information, between transportation units on a communication bus of an integrated circuit, by generating clock triggers for every transportation unit on the bus, thereby initiating each preceding one of the transportation units to start sending the signals in a wave-front to an adjacent succeeding one of the transportation units, where the wave-front is initiated at each of the transportation units at a common point in time, and every transportation unit applying a timing adjustment to at least one of the data and timing information that it receives in the signals from the preceding transportation unit, to at least one of (1) capture the data from the preceding transportation unit, (2) relay the data without modification from the preceding transportation unit to the succeeding transportation unit on the communication bus, and (3) load new data to the communication bus, with updated timing information in a succeeding wave-front. | 09-01-2011 |
20110216769 | Dynamic Path Selection - A switch/router dynamically selects a path from multiple available paths between a source destination pair for a frame. A hash function generates a hash value from frame parameters such as source ID, destination ID, exchange ID, etc. The hash value is given as an input to a plurality of range comparators where each range comparator has a range of values associated with it. If the hash value falls within a range associated with a range comparator, that range comparator generates an in-range signal. A path selector module detects which range comparator has generated the in-range signal, and determines a path associated with that range comparator from previously stored information. The frame is transmitted via the selected path. The ranges associated with each range comparator can be non-overlapping and unequal in size. The number of range comparators can be equal to a number of selected multiple paths. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216770 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING NETWORK PACKETS AND RELATED PACKET PROCESSING CIRCUIT - A packet processing circuit for use in a routing device is disclosed including: an input/output interface; and a processor coupled with input/output interface for, when receiving a first network packet having a destination network protocol address addressed to an external network section and having a destination physical address different from the physical address of the routing device, generating a second network packet having a destination network protocol address the same as the first network packet and having a source physical address the same as the physical address of the routing device. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216771 | ASYMMETRIC PACKET SWITCH AND A METHOD OF USE - The present invention relates to a packet switch and a packet switching method. An example embodiment of the present invention comprises at least three network ports, at least one instrument port, a mux-switch, a packet switch fabric, and an address table. The embodiment updates the address table to include the source address of each ingress packet of each network port and associate the source address with that network port. The mux-switch routes the ingress packet traffic of each network port according to the identity of the network port so that at least a copy of the packet traffic of one of the network ports is routed to an instrument port. The packet switch fabric routes the packets from the instrument ports to the network ports according the destination address of the packet and the identity of the network port that is associated with the destination address as recorded in the address table. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216772 | Multi-Protocol Support Over Ethernet Packet-Switched Networks - Described are methods and communications network for carrying pseudowires over packet-switched network. A communication network includes a packet-switched network (PSN), a first provider edge (PE) device in communication with a second PE device through the PSN, and a pseudowire (PW) established between the PE devices for emulating a service across the PSN. The PW has a Virtual Circuit Connection Verification (VCCV) control channel that carries an Ethernet Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) message. In some embodiments, various data plane encapsulation formats enable a PW to emulate an Ethernet or a non-Ethernet service over an Ethernet PSN. Each encapsulation format includes an Ethernet tunnel header and a PW header that encapsulates an Ethernet or non-Ethernet payload. | 09-08-2011 |
20110222537 | NETWORK CONTROLLER CIRCUITRY TO ISSUE AT LEAST ONE PORTION OF PACKET PAYLOAD TO DEVICE IN MANNER THAT BY-PASSES COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL STACK INVOLVEMENT - An embodiment may include network controller to be comprised in a first node. The node may be communicatively coupled to a network and may include a host processor to execute an operating system environment. The operating system environment may include, at least in part, a communication protocol stack and an application. The circuitry may receive, at least in part, a packet from the network. The packet may include, at least in part, a header and payload. At least one portion of the payload may be associated with the application. The circuitry may issue at least one portion of the header to the stack. The circuitry may issue the at least one portion of the payload to a destination device in a manner that by-passes involvement of the stack. The destination device may be specified, at least in part, by the application. Many alternatives, variations, and modifications are possible. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222538 | Method and System for L3 Bridging Using L3-To-L2 Mapping Database - A method may include creating an L3-L2 database on a first switch, the database having one or more entries, each entry: (a) associating a Level 3 (L3) unique identifier associated with a virtual local area network (VLAN) communicatively coupled to the first switch to a Level 2 (L2) unique identifier associated with the VLAN, and (b) associating the L3 unique identifier with a port of the first switch. The method may also include receiving a network packet at the first switch. The method may additionally include determining if a destination VLAN for the network packet has a corresponding entry in the L3-L2 database. The method may further include switching the network packet to the port in response to a determination that the destination VLAN for the network packet has a corresponding entry in the L3-L2 database, such that the packet is communicated to one of: (a) the destination VLAN, and (b) a second switch intermediate to the first switch and the destination VLAN. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222539 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR AUTOMATICALLY SELECTING BETWEEN INTERNET PROTOCOL SWITCHING MODES ON A PER-MODULE BASIS IN A PACKET FORWARDING DEVICE - The subject matter described herein includes methods, systems, and computer readable media for automatically selecting between Internet protocol switching modes on a per-module basis in a packet forwarding device. According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a packet forwarding device including at least one input/output (I/O) module. The at least one I/O module includes a longest prefix matching (LPM) table, an Internet protocol forwarding database (IPFDB) and the packet forwarding device includes an IP routing table and an IPFDB. When the I/O module operates in an LPM mode, the IPFDB on the I/O module is populated with entries corresponding to active hosts, the LPM table on the I/O module is populated from the IP routing table with routes learned from IP routing protocols, and layer 3 packets received by the I/O module are routed using the IPFDB and LPM table of the I/O module. An automatic mode-selection module determines a capacity of the LPM table on the I/O module. The automatic mode-selection module also determines a total number of IP routes stored in the IP routing table and determines a relationship between the total number of IP routes and the capacity of the LPM table. In response to determining that the total number of IP routes has a predetermined relationship with the capacity of the LPM table, the automatic mode-selection module also automatically switches the I/O module from the LPM mode to an IPFDB mode, where the IPFDB and the LPM table are populated with entries corresponding to active hosts and layer 3 packets received by the I/O module are routed using the IPFDB and LPM table of the I/O module. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222540 | PACKET ASSEMBLY MODULE FOR MULTI-CORE, MULTI-THREAD NETWORK PROCESSORS - Described embodiments provide a packet assembler for a network processor. The network processor includes a plurality of processing modules for processing received packets into one or more processed-packet portions. A shared system memory of the network processor receives processed-packet portions corresponding to packet assemblies. Each of the packet assemblies has associated tasks. A packet assembly processor constructs an output packet for each packet assembly from the processed-packet portions in accordance with instructions from the tasks associated with the packet assembly. The packet assembly processor coordinates storage of the processed-packet portions for each output packet that is read from the system memory based on the instructions from the tasks associated with the corresponding packet assembly. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222541 | Network System, Edge Node, and Relay Node - Edge nodes form point-to-point communication paths with one another. Multiple communication paths set at one port of an edge node and/or a relay node are regarded as a group. Identification information of the port and identification information of a group that outputs a frame inputted into the port are previously stored as associated with each other. If the destination address of a frame inputted into the port is unknown, an outgoing interface search unit identifies at least one group corresponding to the port. The frame is outputted from a port corresponding to the identified group. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222542 | SOURCE ADDRESS BASED ROUTING PROCESS - A method is described that entails assigning a source network address to an outbound packet, associating the outbound packet with a network service and identifying a first network interface associated with the network service. The method further entails inquiring into and confirming that the first network interface is associated with the source network address. The method further entails constructing a search key from an identifier of the first network interface and the outbound packet's destination address. The method further entails submitting the search key to a routing function, the routing function providing the outbound packet's next hop address. The method further entails transmitting the outbound packet to a node identified by the next hop address from the network interface. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222543 | METHOD FOR FORWARDING DATA PACKET, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE - A method for forwarding data packet, a communication system, a Carrier Grade Network Address Translation (CGN) device, and an access gateway are provided. The CGN device communicates with the access gateway through an Internet Protocol Version 4 (IPv4) network and is used for receiving a first data packet forwarded by the access gateway and determining whether the first data packet is an IPv4 packet or an IPv6-over-IPv4 tunnel packet; forwarding the first data packet to the IPv4 network if the first data packet is the IPv4 packet; and decapsulating the first data packet if the first data packet is the IPv6-over-IPv4 tunnel packet to a first IPv6 packet, and sending the first IPv6 packet to an IPv6 network or the IPv4 network. Therefore, technical problems of fully utilizing the IPv4 network and, gradually increasing deployment of the IPv6 network, and realizing communication are solved. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222544 | VLAN Protocol - A switch includes a plurality of ports including at least one bus port associated with ports connected to other switches in a network and a memory to store a hash table including MAC addresses and VLAN ids of ports in the network. For each one of the VLAN ids, one of the MAC addresses identifies one of the other switches having ports belonging to the one of the VLAN ids without identifying the ports of the one of the other switches that belongs to the one of the VLAN ids. | 09-15-2011 |
20110228777 | ROUTING PROTOCOL APPARATUS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS - Apparatus, systems, and methods may operate to traverse intermediate nodes in a network during message routing operations to determine an original routing path for a source message by using proactive routing between clusters of nodes in the network, and both proactive and reactive routing within the clusters; to select the original routing path according to a greedy energy strategy that operates to define the original routing path as a path having a greater energy value associated with the intermediate nodes than other paths; and upon discovery of selfish nodes, to direct removal of the selfish nodes from route caches associated with traversed nodes, and to determine an alternate routing path for the source message in the network by searching upstream route caches in the traversed nodes in the network to discover the alternate path. Additional apparatus, systems, and methods are disclosed. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228778 | Packet node for applying service path routing at the MAC layer - A packet node and corresponding methods are provided for providing services to packets received at the packet node. At an ingress card, a packet is classified and a virtual media access control (VMAC) address is attached to the packet. The VMAC address identifies a service component for providing a service to the packet. Layer two switching of the packet is made within the packet node, based on the VMAC address. After processing of the packet by the service component, a new VMAC address is attached to the packet. Further layer two switching of the packet, based on the new VMAC address, may lead to further processing by another service component or to forwarding of the packet beyond the packet node. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228779 | DISTRIBUTED PACKET SWITCH HAVING A WIRELESS CONTROL PLANE - A packet network device such as a network switch includes a number of functional cards or chassis modules at least some of which are connected to both an electrical backplane and a wireless backplane. The electrical backplane provides data plane signal paths and the wireless backplane provides control plane signal paths. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228780 | Service Prioritization in Link State Controlled Layer Two Networks - An apparatus comprising a node configured to maintain a plurality of downloaded forwarding states for a plurality of link state based services that are associated with the node and a plurality of other nodes in a network comprising the node, and a plurality of advertised service identifiers (IDs) that correspond to the link state based services, wherein the service IDs are ordered in sequence from higher priority to lower priority link state based services, and wherein work is instantiated at the node according to the ordered sequence from higher priority to lower priority link state based services. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228781 | Combined Hardware/Software Forwarding Mechanism and Method - A forwarding system comprises a identification engine, a hardware forwarding engine configured to process an ingressing packet, a software forwarding engine configured to process the ingressing packet, and a selection engine. The selection engine is configured to select one of the hardware forwarding engine or the software forwarding engine to process the ingressing packet. The selection is based on at least one of an indication of resource availability or a classification of the ingressing packet based on a priority of a flow as determined by the identification engine. In some embodiments, the selection engine selects different forwarding engines to process different packets of a same flow based on changes in resource availability or classification of the ingressing packet. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228782 | Method for Performing Protocol Translation in a Network Switch - A system and method are disclosed for processing a packet. Processing the packet comprises receiving the packet; translating the packet from a first protocol-specific format to a canonical packet format; translating the packet from the canonical packet format to a second protocol-specific format; and forwarding the packet. | 09-22-2011 |
20110235640 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FORWARDING AND SWITCHING OVER PROTECTED PATHS - In one embodiment, a method for telecommunications includes steps of receiving a first packet through a first port, and determining whether the first packet arrived over a protected path. If the first packet arrived over a protected path, the method also includes the steps of hashing a source address of the first packet, adding a first entry into a forwarding table, and adding a second entry into the forwarding table. The protected path is coupled to at least the first port and a second port. The first entry includes the result of hashing the packet, and an identification of the first port. The second entry includes the result of hashing the packet, and an identification of the second port. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235641 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS,AND PROGRAM - In an apparatus that can be connected to an external apparatus to which multiple addresses are allocated over a network, a packet including certain identification information is transmitted to the external apparatus by using a first address as a destination. If a packet that is received includes the certain identification information, a source address of the received packet is extracted. If the extracted source address is a second address different from the first address, the second address is used as the destination in the subsequent transmission of a packet to the external apparatus. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235642 | PRESERVING THE ORDER OF PACKETS THROUGH A DEVICE - A network device includes one or more sprayers, multiple packet processors, and one or more desprayers. The sprayers receive packets on at least one incoming packet stream and distribute the packets according to a load balancing scheme that balances the number of bytes of packet data that is given to each of the packet processors. The packet processors receive the packets from the sprayers and process the packets to determine routing information for the packets. The desprayers receive the processed packets from the packet processors and transmit the packets on at least one outgoing packet stream based on the routing information. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235643 | REDIRECT CHECKING IN A NETWORK DEVICE - A network device for performing redirect checking includes an input device and processing logic. The input device receives a data packet on a first one of a number of interfaces. The data packet includes source and destination addresses. The processing logic assigns an incoming interface to the data packet and generates forwarding information identifying a next hop for the data packet. The processing logic also identifies an outgoing interface based on the next hop and determines whether the incoming interface index is equal to the outgoing interface index. The processing logic also determines whether the data packet originated from a station that is part of the same subnet as the next hop. When both of these conditions are met, the processing logic generates a redirect message. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235644 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSPARENT LAN SERVICES IN A PACKET NETWORK - A network apparatus includes a customer network portion having a customer premises equipment (CPE) bridge configured to connect to internal network entities of the customer network portion and to edge bridges of a provider network portion interconnecting separate customer network portions. The CPE bridge is configured to determine a transparent local area network service (TLS) for a packet received from one of the internal network entities based on a media access control (MAC) address of a destination of the packet in a different separate customer network portion. The CPE bridge is also configured to modify the packet to indicate the determined TLS, for the provider network portion to utilize to transmit the packet based on the determined TLS to a second CPE bridge associated with the destination, without the provider network utilizing the destination MAC address. | 09-29-2011 |
20110243133 | Port management system - A method is provided for a port management system in which a switch is automatically provisioned with network resources. A command or set of commands are stored and automatically executed on the switch upon the occurrence of a defined network event. The command or set of commands may be associated with one or more ports on the switch. When executed, the commands cause a change to a port configuration and/or policy on the switch to control access to a network resource. The network resource may include any device or service accessible on the network. The defined network event may include any network event associated with a device or user connected to the network. The command or set of commands may reference variables, control structures, and functions to modify command execution. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243134 | Data Frame Forwarding Using a Distributed Virtual Bridge - Systems and methods to forward data frames are provided. A particular method may include receiving a data frame at a distributed virtual bridge. The distributed virtual bridge includes a first bridge element coupled to a first server computer and a second bridge element coupled to the first bridge element and to a second server computer. The distributed virtual bridge further includes a controlling bridge coupled to the first bridge element and to the second bridge element. The controlling bridge includes a global forwarding table. The data frame is forwarded from the first bridge element to the second bridge element of the distributed virtual bridge using address data associated with the data frame. A logical network associated with the frame may additionally be used to forward the data frame. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243135 | Systems and Methods for Minimizing the Number of Forwarding Identifiers in a Network Element with Distributed Architecture - A method may include, by a first network interface: receiving a packet having a flow via a first port of the first network interface; examining the packet to determine an ingress local forwarding identifier (LFID) associated with the flow of the packet; converting the ingress LFID to a global forwarding identifier (GFID) of the network element; and forwarding the packet to a switching element. The method may also include, by the switching element: determining a second network interface for egress of the packet based on the GFID; and forwarding the packet to the second network interface. The method may further include, by the second network interface: converting the GFID to an egress LFID associated with the flow of the packet; and forwarding the packet to a second port of the second network interface and a flow of the second network interface based on the egress LFID. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243136 | Forwarding multi-destination packets in a network with virtual port channels - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a multi-destination packet at a switch in communication with a plurality of servers through a network device, identifying a port receiving the multi-destination packet at the switch or a forwarding topology for the multi-destination packet, selecting a bit value based on the identified port or forwarding topology, inserting the bit value into a field in a virtual network tag in the multi-destination packet, and forwarding the multi-destination packet with the virtual network tag to the network device. The network device is configured to forward the multi-destination packet to one or more of the servers based on the bit value in the multi-destination packet. An apparatus for forwarding multi-destination packets is also disclosed. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243137 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FIBRE CHANNEL INTERCONNECTION OF PRIVATE LOOP DEVICES - Methods and apparatus for Fibre Channel interconnection is provided between a plurality of private loop devices through a Fibre Channel private loop device interconnect system. In the preferred embodiments, the Fibre Channel private loop device interconnect system is a fabric or an intelligent bridging hub. In one aspect of this invention, a Fibre Channel private loop device is connected to two or more Arbitrated Loops containing, or adapted to contain, one or more private loop devices. Preferably, the interconnect system includes a routing filter to filter incoming Arbitrated Loop physical addresses (ALPAs) to determine which Fibre Channel frames must attempt to be routed through the fabric. Numerous topologies of interconnect systems may be achieved. In another aspect of this invention, a method is provided for implementing a logical loop of private loop devices by segmenting the logical loop into a plurality of sets, assigning each set to a physical Arbitrated Loop and connecting the Arbitrated Loops to a Fibre Channel private loop device interconnect system. Additional methods are provided for restricting attached devices to Arbitrated Loop physical addresses within certain ranges. Additionally, methods are provided for resetting hosts, the method generally comprising the steps of detecting the addition of a storage device to a first Arbitrated Loop, and thereafter, resetting the Arbitrated Loop or loops on which a host or hosts reside on second Arbitrated Loop. Methods for operation with use of SCSI initiators generate a link service reject when no address match is found, or when an address match is found, but where no device with the destination ALPA exists on the Arbitrated Loop corresponding to the destination. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243138 | SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING PATH MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION UNIT BY DETECTING REPETITIONAL IP PACKET FRAGMENTATION AND METHOD THEREOF - A fragmentation repetition detection apparatus ( | 10-06-2011 |
20110249674 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING PACKET - The present invention provides an apparatus and method for processing a packet. An interface processing module selects one from all service processing modules as a service processing module for processing a packet; if the service processing module needs to perform tunnel processing for the packet, the service processing module transmits the packet after performing the tunnel processing; if another service processing module needs to perform tunnel processing for the packet, the service processing module transmits the packet to a service processing module needing to perform tunnel processing for the packet. According to the present invention, the packet can be processed uniformly by the service processing module, so it is not unnecessary to store session states in the service processing modules, and also not unnecessary to perform synchronization between the service processing modules, which greatly decreases complexity of processing the packet and saves system bandwidth. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249675 | Telecommunication systems - A telecommunications system having a format converter provides bi-directional communications between TDM signals on one side and ATM signals on the other. An ATM aggregate receives and transmits ATM signals, and a TDM interface receives and transmits TDM signals. The format converter has an ATM bus and a TDM bus connected to their respective interfaces, and service-specific adapters are connected between the ATM bus and the TDM bus. | 10-13-2011 |
20110255537 | Controlling Directional Asymmetricity in Wide Area Networks - In one embodiment a method includes detecting, at a first Wide Area Network (WAN) device deployed at an edge of a WAN, a packet passing through the first WAN device and departing a node with which the first WAN device is associated for another node connected to the WAN, identifying, by the first WAN device, a network destination address to which the packet is addressed, obtaining from memory accessible to the first WAN device an identifier of another WAN device associated with the network destination address, and marking the packet with the identifier to generate a marked packet. The marked packet is then received by a WAN device, which detects the identifier, and passes the marked packet to the identified WAN device. In an embodiment, the WAN device associated with the network destination address is a WAN device that first detects a synchronization-acknowledgement (SYN-ACK) packet. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255538 | METHOD OF IDENTIFYING DESTINATION IN A VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENT - Techniques are described for identifying destinations in a virtual network by defining virtual entities such as a port profile as the destination for network policies, such as redirect or span to be a logical set of ports (i.e., ports belonging to a port-profile or a port group) where the members of the set of ports may be added/removed dynamically without requiring any changes to the network policy. Further, a network administrator (or other user) may predefine the destinations for a network policy even before some or all of the destinations are active on a given virtualized system. In such cases, the network policies may go into effect when the required entities become available. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255539 | Communication System and Communication Control Device - Provided is a communication system which connects a unified C/U router to a network having C/U separation, wherein the stopping of U-plane communication of the unified C/U router is prevented even when the messages transmitted from a C-plane controller of the network having C/U separation do not arrive because of faults in the network having C/U separation. The routing information of a C-plane message (routing protocol) received by a U-plane controller is sent to an adjacent peer without being reflected in a routing table of the U-plane controller. The routing table of the U-plane controller is generated on the basis of the routing information (FIB information) received directly from the C-plane controller. In addition, a keep-alive packet from the unified C/U router is not sent to the C-plane controller and keeps alive the connection with the user router at the transmission destination. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255540 | System and Method for Adapting a Packet Processing Pipeline - An apparatus for forwarding packets includes a packet processing pipeline having a processing unit that processes packets compliant with a recognized communication protocol. A first port coupled to the packet processing pipeline is configured to receive a packet that does not comply with the recognized communication protocol and has a header that conforms to a second communication protocol. A data extraction unit extracts first destination information from the header of the packet and, based on the first destination information, generates second destination information that conforms to the recognized communication protocol. The processing unit determines, based on the second destination information, an egress interface to which the packet is to be forwarded. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255541 | IP MULTIPLEXING FROM MANY IP HOSTS - The invention relates to a method for multiplexing data packets from different IP hosts to one multiplexing packet before it is sent to a destination IP host, where the different data packets in the multiplexing packet are distributed to the different destination IP hosts. | 10-20-2011 |
20110261816 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR DISABLING AN OPERATIVE COUPLING TO A NETWORK - Methods and systems are described for disabling an operative coupling to a network. In an aspect, first data received for forwarding is forwarded between a first node in a first network and a second node in a second network by a network relay via a first operative coupling to the first network of a first network interface hardware component in the network relay and via a second operative coupling to the second network of a second network interface hardware component in the network relay. A determination is made that a specified decoupling condition is met. The second operative coupling is disabled subsequent to the forwarding and in response to the determination while the first operative coupling remains enabled for receiving second data for forwarding. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261817 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR ENABLING AN OPERATIVE COUPLING TO A NETWORK - Methods and systems are described for enabling an operative coupling to a network. In an aspect, first data is detected for forwarding between a first node in a first network and another node by a network relay including a first network interface hardware component operatively coupled to a first network. A determination is made that a second operative coupling to a second network of a second network interface hardware component in the network relay is disabled. The second network interface hardware component is configured to enabled the second operative coupling, in response to the determination. Data received for forwarding between the first network and the second network is forwarded via the enabled second operative coupling. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261818 | Transmission apparatus and transmission method - When a packet received from a ring network is addressed to a device on a local network established under a transmission apparatus, then that transmission apparatus detects whether a memory device installed therein is in the memory full state. If the memory device is determined to be in the memory full state, then the transmission apparatus sends the packet, which was received from the ring network, back to the ring network. Subsequently, when the memory device recovers from the memory full state, the transmission apparatus sends the packet to the specified device in the local network. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261819 | LIST DIGEST OPERATION DISPERSED STORAGE NETWORK FRAME - A method begins by a processing module generating a payload section of a dispersed storage network (DSN) frame regarding a list digest request operation by generating a start slice name field of the payload section to include a start slice name of a slice name range, generating an end slice name field of the payload section to include an end slice name of the slice name range, and generating a maximum response count field of the payload section to include a maximum slice name response count. The method continues with the processing module generating a protocol header of the DSN frame by generating a payload length field of the protocol header to include a payload length that represents a length of the payload section, generating an operation code field to indicate the list digest request operation, and generating remaining fields of the protocol header. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261820 | USER-SPECIFIED KEY CREATION FROM ATTRIBUTES INDEPENDENT OF ENCAPSULATION TYPE - An integrated circuit has a hardware decoder that parses a frame to identify a type of encapsulation. The integrated circuit also has a number of hardware parsers, each parser being coupled to the decoder by an enable line. During packet processing, one of the parsers is enabled by the decoder, based on the value which identifies the encapsulation type. The enabled parser retrieves one or more attributes from the frame, depending on the encapsulation. The integrated circuit also has a register, coupled to each parser. The register holds the attributes retrieved by the parser. The integrated circuit also has a key generation hardware which creates a key, by concatenating from the attributes register, certain attributes that are pre-selected by a user for forming the key. The integrated circuit supplies the key to a memory to look up a set of user-specified actions to be performed on data in the frame. | 10-27-2011 |
20110268118 | METHOD FOR ROUTING DATA PACKETS USING VLANS - In a method for routing packets between a plurality of switches in a computer network, in which paths between the plurality of switches are identified as a plurality of virtual local area networks (VLANs) stored in a balancing table, a packet to be routed from a source switch to a destination switch is received. In addition, a VLAN is selected from the plurality of VLANs in the balancing table to route the packet through the computer network and the packet is routed through the selected VLAN. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268119 | PACKET PROCESSING ARCHITECTURE - A method to process a packet is described herein. The method comprises receiving a packet including a header and a payload. The header is parsed using a packet processor to determine type and priority of the packet. The header is then processed using a hardware acceleration block based on one or more of incoming bandwidth, priority and type of the packet. The custom hardware acceleration block generates header modification data that is sent to the packet processor. The header is modified using the packet processor, based on the header modification data, to generate a modified header. The modified header is appended to the payload and transmitted. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268120 | FABRIC SWITCHING - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch system. The switch includes one or more ports on the switch configured to transmit packets encapsulated based on a first protocol. The switch further includes a control mechanism. During operation, the control mechanism forms a logical switch based on a second protocol, receives an automatically assigned identifier for the logical switch without requiring manual configuration of the identifier, and joins a Ethernet fabric. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268121 | ADDRESS-SHARING SYSTEM - Access routers ( | 11-03-2011 |
20110268122 | MULTIPROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING (MPLS) INTERFACE WITH VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK (VPN) APPLICATION - A method comprising receiving, from a first node, a first packet at a network application server via a first local area network (LAN); receiving, from a second node, a second packet at the network application server via a second LAN; associating the first packet with a first VPN based on receiving the first packet via the first LAN; and associating the second packet with a second VPN based on reception of the second packet via the second LAN, wherein the first VPN and the second VPN include overlapping network address spaces. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268123 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING LOCATIONS OF FIELDS IN A DATA UNIT - A packet processor for processing a data unit received from a network includes a header analyzer unit configured to obtain indications of locations in a header of the data unit of one or more fields to be parsed from the data unit to perform a packet processing operation on the data unit. The header analyzer unit comprises a ternary content addressable memory (TCAM), and a memory separate from the TCAM and coupled to an output of the TCAM, wherein a content of the TCAM and a content of the memory are programmable. The header analyzer unit is configured to obtain, responsive to a lookup of at least one portion of the data unit in the TCAM, indications of locations in a header of the data unit of one or more fields to be parsed from the data unit to perform a packet processing operation on the data unit. The packet processor further comprises a parser configured to parse the header using the indications of locations of one or more fields in the header to obtain data from the one or more fields. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268124 | Encapsulating Large Ethernet Frames - A method comprising receiving a data frame, encapsulating the received data frame into a reflected frame message (RFM) encapsulated frame, and if the received data frame causes the RFM encapsulated frame to exceed a maximum service data unit size, either the data frame is truncated or the data frame is split into two smaller frames and those two smaller frames are encapsulated by two separate RFM frames, wherein if a truncation flag is set to true, the data frame is truncated and the truncated data frame is encapsulated in one RFM. | 11-03-2011 |
20110274110 | METHOD FOR PREVENTING MAC SPOOFS IN A DISTRIBUTED VIRTUAL SWITCH - Described herein are techniques for preventing MAC address spoofs in a virtualization cluster. When a virtual switch first sees a new MAC address on a port designated as being a secure port, the packet is redirected to a virtual supervisor agent used to manage the distributed virtual switch. Assuming the MAC may be bound to the secure port, the supervisor agent broadcasts a message to both the virtual switch that redirected the packet and to virtual switches on other virtualization servers within the cluster. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274111 | EDGE LINK DISCOVERY - A method for discovering a link between an entry-exit device of a computer network and a customer edge device is disclosed. The customer edge device includes an address and the entry/exit point device includes a routing table. Interfaces with the routing table and addresses of the computer network related to the entry/exit point device are obtained. Either a routing protocol or the routing table is used to obtain routing information. The routing information is compared to a selected address to find a match. The routing information the matches the selected address represents the address of the customer edge device. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274112 | Method and Apparatus for Forwarding Data Packets using Aggregating Router Keys - Method and apparatus for supporting the forwarding of received data packets in a router ( | 11-10-2011 |
20110280242 | TECHNOLOGY FOR FLUSHING AND RELEARNING MAC ADDRESSES IN TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A technique for performing a flushing process at a port of a network switch, where the flushing process comprises a flooding operation and an operation of relearning MAC addresses. In the method, these two operations are made independent, and the operation of relearning MAC addresses is started before termination of the flooding operation. An operation of forwarding packets to the relearned MAC addresses can be started before termination of the flooding operation. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280243 | TCP/IP Offload Device - A host CPU runs a network protocol processing stack that provides instructions not only to process network messages but also to allocate processing of certain network messages to a specialized network communication device, offloading some of the most time consuming protocol processing from the host CPU to the network communication device. By allocating common and time consuming network processes to the device, while retaining the ability to handle less time intensive and more varied processing on the host stack, the network communication device can be relatively simple and cost effective. The host CPU, operating according to instructions from the stack, and the network communication device together determine whether and to what extent a given message is processed by the host CPU or by the network communication device. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280244 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PACKET STEERING IN A MULTI-CORE ARCHITECTURE - Described herein is a method and system for distributing whole and fragmented requests and responses across a multi-core system. Each core executes a packet engine that further processes data packets and data packet fragments allocated to that core. A flow distributor executing within the multi-core system forwards client requests to a packet engine on a core that is selected based on a value generated when a hash is applied to a tuple comprising a client IP address, a client port, a server IP address and a server port identified in the request. The packet engine maintains each element of the tuple and forwards the request to the selected core. The packet engine can also process data packet fragments by assembling the fragments prior to transmitting them to the selected core, or by transmitting the data packet fragments to the selected core. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280245 | NEXT HOP CHAINING FOR FORWARDING DATA IN A NETWORK SWITCHING DEVICE - A route for a data unit through a network may be defined based on a number of next hops. Exemplary embodiments described herein may implement a router forwarding table as a chained list of references to next hops. In one implementation, a device includes a forwarding table that includes: a first table configured to store, for each of a plurality of routes for data units in a network, a chain of links to next hops for the routes; and a second table configured to store the next hops. The device also includes a forwarding engine configured to assemble the next hops for the data units based on using the chain of links in the first table to retrieve the next hops in the second table and to forward the data units in the network based on the assembled next hops. | 11-17-2011 |
20110286457 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO ROUTE CONTROL PACKETS BASED ON ADDRESS PARTITIONING - Methods and apparatus to route control packets based on address partitioning. A disclosed example method includes receiving a packet in a server, determining the packet is a control packet, forwarding the packet to a processor, identifying via the processor an address prefix of the packet, accessing a forwarding table and determining via the processor at least one of a router or an outgoing interface that corresponds to the identified address prefix, transmitting the packet from the processor to the server via the outgoing interface, and statically forwarding the packet from the server to the router based on an interface that received the packet from the processor. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286458 | DYNAMIC UPDATE OF ROUTE TABLE - A method and apparatus for dynamically modifying routing information in an interconnect architecture without quiescence is herein described. Each agent/node holds routing information regarding target agents/nodes in an interconnect architecture, which may include routing preferences. When a node is to be hot removed, it generates port disable messages to neighbors. The neighbors disable a port the disable message is received on and generates a completion message back to the not to be removed. The node to be removed continues to route messages until it receives a completion; at which time it disables a corresponding node. When all nodes are disabled the device may be removed. Other nodes in the interconnect architecture learn of an agent removal through use of return cycles when messages reach dead ends during attempted routing of cycles. Furthermore, hot addition of a node includes broadcasting of an enable message to enable nodes for routing to the added node. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286459 | Methods and Devices for a Client Node to Access an Information Object Located at a Node of a Secured Network via a Network of Information - A method for a client node (D | 11-24-2011 |
20110286460 | Negotiated Secure Fast Table Lookups for Protocols with Bidirectional Identifiers - During connection establishments for a protocol with bidirectional identifiers, connection data is allocated, the locally selected identifier is a pointer to the allocated connection data, and a mathematical transformation is applied to the pointer. The pointer and a result of the mathematical transformation are included in a first and second portion of the connection establishment packets respectively. Upon receipt of a data packet for that protocol, a first and second portion of the data packet (which correspond to the first and second portion of the connection establishment packets) are extracted. The same mathematical transformation used during connection establishment is applied to the data extracted from the first portion of the data packet. The result of that mathematical transformation is compared with the data extracted from the second portion of the data packet. If the values match, then the data extracted from the first portion is trusted and dereferenced to access the allocated connection data associated with that data packet. | 11-24-2011 |
20110292938 | System and Method of Redirecting Internet Protocol Traffic for Network Based Parental Controls - A method of redirecting traffic on a network includes receiving a subscriber request to use a parental control service, assigning to the subscriber's access device an Internet protocol (IP) address from a block of addresses reserved for the service, receiving a transaction, determining that the transaction is from an address in the block, and redirecting the transaction to a parental control device on the network. A network-based parental control system includes an access device for an account that uses a parental control service, a dynamic host configuration protocol server that assigns to the access device an IP address from a block of addresses reserved for the parental control service, a parental control policy device, and a router that receives a transaction from the access device, determines that the transaction is from an address in the block, and redirects the transaction to the parental control policy device. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292939 | METHOD & APPARATUS FOR FORWARDING TABLE REDUCTION - A LAN includes a router that is connected to two or more racks of servers and each of the servers can support a plurality of virtual machines. The router is configured to forward data packets based on IP destination addresses or based on destination MAC addresses and builds and maintains forwarding tables in support of data packet forwarding in the layer 3 and the layer 2 network environment. In support of layer 2 forwarding, the router builds and maintains an aggregated MAC switching table that is comprise of a subset of the table entries typically needed to switch packets to their destination, and in support of layer 3 forwarding, the router or switch builds and maintains an aggregated ARP forwarding table that is comprised of a subset of the table entries typically needed to forward packets to their destination. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292940 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION PATH USING LABELS - A communication path is established by a sequence of nodes so that a data packet is transferred using labels each being assigned to a data link connecting each pair of adjacent nodes along the communication path. The sequence of nodes includes an origination node, one or more relay node, and a termination node, with being positioned in this order along the communication path. The origination node provides each of downstream nodes of the origination node with a path message for requesting establishment of the communication path. Each relay node, upon being provided with label assignment request information, performs label assignment processing for assigning a label to a data link connecting the relay node and an adjacent upstream node without depending on the label assignment processing performed on other nodes along the communication path so that the label assignment processing is concurrently performed on each of the downstream nodes. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292941 | TRANSMITTER AND CONTROL INFORMATION CONFIGURATION METHOD - A transmitter includes: a receiving unit to receive apparatus identification information that identifies transmitter and path identification information that identifies a data transfer path from another transmitter coupled to a local apparatus; a comparing unit to compare a value indicating an address assigned to the another transmitter to a value indicating an address assigned to the local apparatus; and a configuring unit to configure the local apparatus with apparatus identification information and path identification information determined by the local apparatus, or apparatus identification information and path identification information included in a frame received by the receiving unit, based on comparison results by the comparing unit. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292942 | ROUTER, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND PROGRAM - A router has a sending module that sends information to a data center connected with a wide-area-network when the router has been connected with the wide-area-network, the information being registered in the router beforehand and including information relating to an information-management-device that starts up a virtual machine and a virtual router, an opening module that acquires a protocol setting information from the data center and opens a channel leading to a gateway in the data center on the basis of the protocol setting information, and a communication module that acquires an address of the virtual router to be connected with the virtual machine which has been started up on the basis of the information relating to the information-management-device from the data center and communicates with the virtual router via the channel on the basis of the acquired address of the virtual router. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292943 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORWARDING PACKETS - The present invention relates to the field of communication technologies, and discloses a method and an apparatus for forwarding packets to solve the problems in the prior art, namely, if a long Internet Protocol (IP) address needs to be searched for at the time of forwarding a packet, the number of Ternary Content Addressable Memories (TCAMs) need to be increased, or an external Random Access Memory (RAM) needs to be accessed for more times, which leads to a high cost and low performance. The method includes: extracting a first bit sequence from a destination address of a received packet, and using the first bit sequence as a key value; searching for a preset TCAM entry by using the key value, and obtaining an index value returned by the TCAM entry; and using the index value and a second group of bits in the destination address of the packet as conditions for searching, according to a predetermined algorithm, for a preset Forwarding Information Base (FIB) entry, and obtaining a forwarding address of the packet. The technical solution under the present invention is applicable to searching a table for an Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) address in a router. | 12-01-2011 |
20110299530 | NETWORK MONITOR AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A network monitor is provided that permits a user to work using only the network monitor without a computer to display an image on the network monitor so that the user's convenience is improved. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299531 | FLOODING PACKETS ON A PER-VIRTUAL-NETWORK BASIS - Methods and techniques for flooding packets on a per-virtual-network basis are described. Some embodiments provide a method (e.g., a switch) which determines an internal virtual network identifier based on one or more fields in a packet's header. Next, the method performs a forwarding lookup operation based on the internal virtual network identifier. If the forwarding lookup operation succeeds, the method can process and forward the packet accordingly. However, if the forwarding lookup operation fails, the method can determine a set of egress ports based on the internal virtual network identifier. Next, for each egress port in the set of egress ports, the method can flood the packet if a virtual network identifier in the packet's header is associated with the egress port. Flooding packets on a per-virtual-network basis can substantially reduce the amount of resources required to flood the packet when a forwarding lookup operation fails. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299532 | REMOTE PORT MIRRORING - A switch that facilitates remote port mirroring is described. The switch can include an encapsulation mechanism and a forwarding mechanism. The encapsulation mechanism can be configured to encapsulate a copy of a first packet in a second packet, thereby preserving header information (e.g., a VLAN identifier and/or a TRILL header) of the first packet. The forwarding mechanism can be configured to forward the first packet using header information of the first packet, and forward the second packet using header information of the second packet. The second packet can be received at a destination switch which extracts the first packet from the second packet, and sends the first packet on a port which is coupled to a network analyzer. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299533 | INTERNAL VIRTUAL NETWORK IDENTIFIER AND INTERNAL POLICY IDENTIFIER - Systems and techniques for processing and forwarding packets are described. Some embodiments provide a system (e.g., a switch) which determines an internal virtual network identifier and/or an internal policy identifier for a packet based on a port on which the packet was received and/or one or more fields in the packet. The system can then process and forward the packet based on the internal virtual network identifier and/or internal policy identifier. In some embodiments, the system encapsulates the packet in a TRILL (Transparent Interconnection of Lots of Links) packet by adding a TRILL header to the packet. In some embodiments, the scope of an internal virtual network identifier and/or an internal policy identifier may not extend beyond a switch or a module within a switch. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299534 | VIRTUAL PORT GROUPING FOR VIRTUAL CLUSTER SWITCHING - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch. The switch includes a port that couples to a server hosting a number of virtual machines. The switch also includes a set of virtual port grouping information and a virtual port grouping mechanism. During operation, the virtual port grouping mechanism determines whether a frame is traveling from a virtual port group to the same virtual port group. If the frame is not traveling to the same virtual port group, the virtual port grouping mechanism prevents the frame from being forwarded. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299535 | NAME SERVICES FOR VIRTUAL CLUSTER SWITCHING - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch that facilitates name services in a virtual cluster switch. The switch includes a name service database indicating at least one media access control (MAC) address learned at a second switch. The switch also includes a control mechanism. During operation, the control mechanism distributes information on a locally learned MAC address to the second switch. In addition, the control mechanism receives information on a MAC address learned at the second switch. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299536 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LINK AGGREGATION ACROSS MULTIPLE SWITCHES - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch. The switch includes a forwarding mechanism and a control mechanism. During operation, the forwarding mechanism forwards frames based on their Ethernet headers. The control mechanism operates the switch in conjunction with a separate physical switch as a single logical switch and assigns a virtual switch identifier to the logical switch, wherein the virtual switch identifier is associated with a link aggregation group. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299537 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF SCALING A CLOUD COMPUTING NETWORK - Disclosed are a system, method, and article of manufacture of scaling a cloud computing network are disclosed. A virtual switch receives a data packet from a virtual machine. The virtual machine and the virtual switch can be implemented on the same host device. The virtual switch can remove the virtual MAC address from the data packet. The virtual switch can then include a physical MAC address or a synthetic MAC address of a target host. A synthetic MAC address can be utilized for multicast traffic where want to associate a separate MAC with each tenant of the host. The data packet can be sent to a target host. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299538 | APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CONNECTION BETWEEN NETWORKS - When an internal terminal (TM | 12-08-2011 |
20110305241 | METHOD OF IMPLEMENTING TRAVERSAL OF MULTIMEDIA PROTOCOLS THROUGH NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION DEVICE - The present invention discloses a method of implementing traversal of multimedia protocols through Network Address Translation device, wherein the Network Address Translation (NAT) device establishes a mapping relationship between address of a terminal in a private network and address of a terminal in a public network, and enables the terminal in the private network to access the public network with a common address, so as to implement the interaction of media streams between the terminal in the private network and the terminal in the public network, in which the common address is a address of the private network for accessing the public network. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305242 | LABEL SWITCHING TYPE OF PACKET FORWARDING APPARATUS - A label switching type packet forwarding apparatus having a routing information table in which a forwarding type of a reception packet, output port identification information, and output routing information of a specific layer in the OSI reference model determined by the forwarding type are defined in correspondence with routing information which is found upon reception of a packet, for converting a header of a reception packet in accordance with the packet forwarding type and the output routing information obtained by a table search. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305243 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR IMPLEMENTING VIRTUAL-SWITCH - The present invention provides a method and a device for implementing a V-Switch. Through setting up a V-Switch correlation with respect to at least two VLAN tags, a DRE performs a V-Switch transmission on an Ethernet frame received according to the V-Switch correlation with respect to at least two VLAN tags. The invention can expand the number of V-Switch connections carried on a local link to 4096×4096, or even to 4096×4096×4096 . . . . Therefore, the problem of insufficient VLAN tag resources is solved, and the requirements for the scale of V-Switch technology is met. Moreover, a more effective V-Switch method is provided, the switching capability of V-Switch is improved, and the application scale of V-Switch technology is enlarged. | 12-15-2011 |
20110310898 | 4TO6 NETWORK STACK FOR IPV4 APPLICATIONS - Systems, methods and computer storage media for utilizing IPv6 addressing for globally unique identification of network endpoints when communications from or to an IPv4 compatible application. An IPv4 packet of data that is from and/or directed to an IPv4 endpoint is encapsulated in an IPv6 packet of data. An IPv6 compatible address is identified for a destination of the IPv6 packet of data. The IPv6 address is a globally unique identifier that is comprised of an IPv4 identifier that represents an IPv4 address of the encapsulated IPv4 packet. The IPv6 packet of data is communicated to the destination identified by the IPv6 address. A 4 to 6 stack may intercept the incoming IPv6 packet of data before the destination to strip the IPv6 header information revealing the IPv4 packet of data. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310899 | Distributed Virtual Network Gateways - Computerized methods, systems, and computer-readable media are provided for distributing virtualized gateway functionality to multiple nodes within a physical network. Initially, drivers that carry out the gateway functionality are provisioned to cooperate with endpoints instantiated on the network nodes, while a directory service is implemented to maintain a mapping between virtual internet protocol (IP) addresses and location-dependent addresses, as well as a table enumerating transformation actions according to known pathways connecting the endpoints within a network. In operation, the directory service replies to requests from the driver (carrying source and destination IP addresses of data packets) with the appropriate location-dependent addresses (utilizing the mapping) and the appropriate transformation action(s) (utilizing the table). The transformation action(s) include rewriting headers of the data packets to include the location-dependent addresses, encapsulating the data packets as inner data packets within respective outer data packets, or configuring the data packets with a tunneling protocol. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310900 | COMMUNICATION RELAY APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION RELAY SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION RELAY METHOD - A communication relay apparatus includes a frame transfer unit. The frame transfer unit has a function to change destination information included in a frame, which is a unit of data transfer, from information indicating the own apparatus into information indicating a predetermined external communication apparatus without changing source information included in the frame, when the frame is received. Further, the frame transfer unit has a function to transfer the frame after the change to the external communication apparatus. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310901 | PACKET FORWARDING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PROCESS RULE UPDATE METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Provided are a packet forwarding apparatus, a communication system, a process rule update method that can accurately delete process rules used for packet forwarding and the like. The packet forwarding apparatus comprises: a process rule storage unit storing a process rule defining a process content for each flow; a packet process unit using a process rule matching a received packet among the process rules and processing a received packet; an end determination information extraction unit extracting information for checking a flow end from the received packet; and a flow end check unit deleting, when a flow end is checked based on the extracted information, a process rule corresponding to the flow. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310902 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SERVICE ROUTING - A routing method, apparatus and system are disclosed. The method includes: receiving from a service provider a service registration request which carries a service logical address, a service physical address, and a message rule; registering routing information according to the service registration request; and routing a request message of a service requestor according to the routing information. The present invention enables routing of the request message of a service requestor according to the service logical address, service physical address, and message rule, so that routing is more flexible and more convenient. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310903 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR MIGRATING VPN ROUTING AND FORWARDING INSTANCES - A method, an apparatus and a system for migrating VPN Routing and Forwarding (VRF) instances are disclosed. The system includes: a first BGP process, configured to: send a VRF instance and configuration information of BGP peers in the VRF instance to a second Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) process; instruct a Transport Control Protocol (TCP) to back up a TCP link to the second BGP process in a hot backup mode, where the TCP link is related to peer sessions of the BGP peers in the VRF instance; and the second BGP process, configured to: receive routes in an Adjacent Ingress Routing Information Base (Adj-RIB-IN) sent by the first BGP process unit. In the embodiments of the present invention, BGP peers services of the VRF instance are not interrupted, and the sessions are not disconnected; a peer device cannot perceive the migration process of a router completely; and changed routing information in the migration process is updated after the migration. | 12-22-2011 |
20110317699 | METHOD FOR MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL ADDRESS LEARNING AND LEARNING RATE SUPPRESSION - A method, apparatus and computer program product for Media Access Control (MAC) address learning and learning rate suppression are presented. A Forwarding Data Unit (FDU) maintains two cache tables, each of the cache tables used for harvesting MAC addresses. The FDU uses the cache tables in an alternating manner, wherein when one of the cache tables is used for harvesting MAC addresses the other one of the cache tables has its contents bundled into a packet for forwarding to a control plane of the FDU. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317700 | METHOD FOR REAL-TIME SYNCHRONIZATION OF ARP RECORD IN RSMLT CLUSTER - Embodiments herein include systems and methods for providing a mechanism for efficient data synchronization of ARP records between two peer nodes of an SMLT system. Such techniques include modifying control information of ARP packets transmitted between peer nodes of the SMLT system to indicate originating SMLT ports. Techniques also include disabling MAC synchronization control messaging across the IST link. These techniques enable real-time synchronization ARP records for MAC learning without needing dedicated control messaging over the IST, thereby providing nodal and SMLT port failover and recovery. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317701 | Communication system, control device, processing rule setting method, packet transmission method, and program - A communication system comprises control devices, and forwarding nodes each includes packet processing unit that performs processing of a received packet based on a processing rule set in advance or received from control device associated with the node. First control device among the control devices, in response to a predetermined trigger, refers to correspondence between forwarding nodes and control devices, and transmits, among forwarding path information, at least forwarding path information that includes a forwarding node associated with the first control device, to second control device associated with a forwarding node that is not associated with first control device, among forwarding nodes on a forwarding path of the received packet. Second control device generates and sends the processing rule to a forwarding node on the forwarding path, among forwarding nodes associated with the second control device, based on the forwarding path information. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317702 | Two-Hop Star Network Topology Extension - Relayed nodes communicate with a target hub using a relaying node in a two-hop star network. The relayed nodes transmit a first encapsulating frame having a payload that comprises an encapsulated frame. The first encapsulating frame is formatted as a one-hop communication between the relayed node and the relaying node. The encapsulated frame is formatted as a one-hop communicate between the relayed node and the target hub. The relaying node generates a second encapsulating frame having a payload that comprises the encapsulated frame from the relayed node. The second encapsulating frame is formatted as a one-hop communication from between the relaying node and the target hub. The target hub sends frames to the relayed node in a similar manner through the relaying node. The target hub and relaying node communicate during scheduled uplink, downlink, or bilink allocations, and the relaying node and the relayed node communicate during scheduled bilink allocations. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317703 | Asymmetric Network Address Encapsulation - A network component comprising a receiver configured to receive an outgoing frame from a local host, a logic circuit configured to map a destination address (DA) for a target host in the outgoing frame to a DA for a target location of the target host and encapsulate the outgoing frame using the DA for the target location, and a transmitter configured to receive a pre-encapsulated outgoing frame from a local switch, and send the pre-encapsulated outgoing frame to a gateway at a target location, wherein the transmitter does not encapsulate frames received from local switches and decapsulates an incoming frame from a remote gateway destined towards local hosts. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317704 | DENSE MODE CODING SCHEME - A lookup table for searching for a longest prefix match for a key is disclosed. The lookup table provides a match for a key in a single search cycle. The number of matches stored in the lookup table is maximized by storing each match in only one location in the lookup table. The binary tree is divided into a plurality of levels and each level has a plurality of subtrees. A subtree descriptor stored for a subtree includes a field for each node in the subtree. The state of the field indicates whether an entry for the node is stored in the table. The bit vector allows indexing of the single match stored for the key. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317705 | TRAVERSAL OF SYMMETRIC NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR FOR MULTIPLE SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTIONS - Handling of multiple connections during NAT traversal for a node behind a symmetric NAT is disclosed. The likelihood of connection failure during symmetric NAT traversal may be reduced by serializing critical time windows after port prediction. Once a connection request has been sent for a first connection, port prediction for a subsequent connection may be delayed until a connectivity check has begun for the first connection. This process may be repeated to handle NAT traversal for multiple simultaneous connections to different nodes. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317706 | FRAME RELAY SWITCHED DATA SERVICE - A new type of data transport service which uses a frame relay layer | 12-29-2011 |
20110317707 | SWITCH WITH VIRTUAL NETWORK IDENTIFIER RE-WRITE CAPABILITY - A switch includes a processor, an ingress port having ingress port logic, and an egress port. It may also include a virtual network identifier rewrite component for rewriting a virtual network identifier in a data frame received the ingress port with a new virtual network identifier. Also included is a virtual network identifier rewrite rule set, where a rule may have one or more of the following: a received virtual network identifier, a source Fibre Channel identifier (FCID) address, an ingress port identifier, and a new virtual network identifier. The ingress port logic may insert a received virtual network identifier into the data frame received at the ingress port, where the virtual network identifier may correspond to the ingress port. The virtual network identifier rewrite component may assign the new virtual network identifier to the data frame according to a specific virtual network identifier rewrite rule. | 12-29-2011 |
20120002672 | Service Node Using Services Applied by an Application Node - Packets are encapsulated and sent from a service node to an application node for applying one or more Layer-4 to Layer-7 services to the packets, with service-applied packets being returned to the service node. An identification of a virtual private network (VPN) may be carried within a request packet, encapsulating a particular packet, sent by a service node to an application node for applying a service to the particular packet; with the corresponding response packet sent to the service node including an identification of the VPN for use by the service node node in forwarding the services-applied packet. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002673 | Distributing Packets to Line Cards of a Packet Switching Device Based on Bridge Indication Values Received Therewith - A packet switching device maintains mappings of bridge identification values to line cards for each of multiple virtual bridges. When a packet is received that includes a bridge identification value, corresponding line card(s) are identified, with each being forwarded the packet. Each of these identified line cards, in response to receipt of the packet from the line card, determines whether to forward or drop the packet based on its maintained bridge table. In this manner, the original receiving line card does not need to maintain forwarding information based on destination addresses of received packets (e.g., does not need to maintain a bridge table for each virtual bridge), but rather forwards a packet to other line cards associated with the virtual bridge corresponding to the bridge identification value received in a packet. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002674 | Communication System and Server Unit Thereof - According to one embodiment, there is provided a communication system including at least a router and a server. The router interconnects a private network using private address and a global network using global address. The router has a network address translation (NAT) function for converting the private address into the global address and for converting the global address into the private address. The server unit is coupled to the global network and executes processing based on Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) messages output from a terminal via the router. One type of SIP message is a REGISTER message, where the router adds a Via header containing an Internet Protocol (IP) address of the router to the REGISTER message for designating a transmission route for use in a registration process. | 01-05-2012 |
20120008626 | END NODE AND NETWORK COORDINATOR USING A CSMA BASED PROTOCOL - A communication protocol based on CSMA between a node, in particular an electronic label, and a network coordinator is disclosed. The node comprises: a transceiver provided for communication with a network coordinator, wherein the transceiver handles a transmission channel based on CSMA; a processing unit provided for processing data received via the transmission channel and displaying the data on a display unit. The electronic label is arranged to perform: sending recurrently a data request packet; going to a low power mode after sending the data request packet; and waking-up for receiving a data response packet a predefined time interval after beginning sending the data request packet. The network coordinator is arranged to transmit the data response packet the predefined time interval after receiving the beginning of the data request packet. The invention provides a protocol based on CSMA with very low power operation in which a multitude of end nodes could receive from a network coordinator their corresponding data. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008627 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASSIGNING DEVICE IDENTIFIER WITH COLLISION AVOIDANCE - One exemplary embodiment of the invention provides an apparatus to assign device identifier with collision avoidance in a distributed network environment. The apparatus may operate, for example, by using different control areas for different group of anchor DIDAFs, or the serving DIDAF/node may assign or cancel a set of available device IDs for an anchor DIDAF/node, so the anchor DIDAF/node may assign a device ID for a device in a control area of the serving DIDAF/node within the set of the available device IDs. In additions, the used and unused device ID assignment may be filtered by the serving DIDAF/node to allow or reject the device ID assignment or the serving DIDAF/node may translate the used device ID assigned by an anchor DIDAF/node to another unused device ID. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008628 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - A network communication apparatus connected to a network for communication using Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) addresses includes: a communication control unit configured to generate an IPv6 address of the network communication apparatus, and generate a packet including the generated IPv6 as a source IP address; and a communication interface unit configured to transmit the packet generated by the communication control unit. The communication control unit generates the IPv6 address by including communication to information in an interface ID in the IPv6 address, and the communication information includes information indicating a dynamically changeable communication environment between the network communication apparatus and another apparatus connected in the network. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008629 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NODE, CONTROL SERVER,COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A packet contains an array of processing operations that are to be performed by a node of a data forwarding network. Each node in a data forwarding network receiving performs the processing it has to the packet and perform in accordance with the array of the processing operations contained in the packet. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008630 | Border Gateway Protocol Extended Community Attribute for Layer-2 and Layer-3 Virtual Private Networks - Described are a network, computer program product, and method of distributing routing information for a virtual private network (VPN) application through a packet-switched network (PSN) having fully meshed provider edge (PE) routers through Provider Backbone Bridge (PBB) tunnels. A PE router is configured to participate in a VPN and to run a BGP (Border Gateway Protocol) as an auto-discovery process for finding one or more other PE routers participating in the VPN. The VPN is associated with a PBB tunnel. A service instance identifier (I-SID) is assigned to the VPN. The PE router advertises membership in the VPN by including the I-SID assigned to the VPN in a BGP message issued during the auto-discovery process. | 01-12-2012 |
20120014386 | Delegate Gateways and Proxy for Target Hosts in Large Layer 2 and Address Resolution with Duplicated Internet Protocol Addresses - An apparatus comprising a plurality of district boundary bridges (DBBs) in a plurality of second network districts configured to couple to a plurality of core bridges in a core network district and to a plurality of end-stations in the second network districts via a plurality of intermediate switches in the second network districts; wherein the core bridges and the DBBs are aware of a plurality of Media Access Control (MAC) addresses of the DBBs but are not aware of Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and MAC addresses of the end-stations, and wherein the IP addresses of the end-stations are mapped in a directory service (DS) in the core network district to the MAC addresses of the corresponding DBBs in the corresponding second network districts of the end-stations. | 01-19-2012 |
20120020357 | TRANSPORT CONTROL SYSTEM AND TRANSPORT CONTROL SERVER - A transport control server ( | 01-26-2012 |
20120020358 | ROUTER AGGREGATION - A router programmed to function within an aggregation of a plurality of routers that appears as a single router externally is programmed to determine whether it is a first router in the aggregation of routers to receive a data packet. If the router is a first router in the aggregation of routers to receive a data packet, the router is programmed to perform layer 3 routing for the data packet including modification of the source and destination Media Access Control (MAC) addresses of the packet, and then transmit the packet to another router in the aggregation of routers for layer 2 switching of the packet. If the router is not a first router in the aggregation of routers to receive a data packet, the router is programmed to only perform layer 2 switching of the packet, with layer 3 routing for the data packet having already been performed by another router in the aggregation of routers. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020359 | METHOD FOR FORWARDING DATA PACKET, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE - A method for forwarding data packet, a communication system, a Carrier Grade Network Address Translation (CGN) device, and an access gateway are provided. The CGN device communicates with the access gateway through an Internet Protocol Version 4 (IPv4) network and is used for receiving a first data packet forwarded by the access gateway and determining whether the first data packet is an IPv4 packet or an IPv6-over-IPv4 tunnel packet; forwarding the first data packet to the IPv4 network if the first data packet is the IPv4 packet; and decapsulating the first data packet if the first data packet is the IPv6-over-IPv4 tunnel packet to a first IPv6 packet, and sending the first IPv6 packet to an IPv6 network or the IPv4 network. Therefore, technical problems of fully utilizing the IPv4 network and, gradually increasing deployment of the IPv6 network, and realizing communication are solved. | 01-26-2012 |
20120027015 | Application of Services in a Packet Switching Device - A service is applied in a packet switching device to both directions of a flow of packets through the packet switching device, with the application of this Layer-4 to layer-7 service to one direction requiring state information shared from the application of the service to packets traversing in the other direction. The service (e.g. firewall, network address translation) can be applied by different processing complexes which do not share memory; thus, state information is communicated between the processing complexes. When the service is applied by a single processing complex, packets can be directed explicitly to the single processing complex. The inline application of services in a packet switching system typically eliminates the need to change a packet's path through the packet switching system to that through a dedicated application server, and may eliminate the need for a dedicated services card or blade server. | 02-02-2012 |
20120027016 | Service Request Packet Including an Exterior Network Protocol Attribute - Packets are encapsulated and sent from a service node to one or more application nodes for applying one or more Layer-4 to Layer-7 services to the packets. Before which for a packet, the service node performs a lookup operation based on a destination address of the packet in a routing data structure derived from a exterior network protocol, such as, but not limited to Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). This lookup operation results in the identification of a next hop packet switching device to which the packet would be sent from the service node. The service node includes this identification of the next hop address in the request packet sent to the application node(s). After the service(s) are applied to the packet, an application node will send the services-applied packet to this next hop address. In this manner, application nodes do not need to run an exterior network protocol. Although, they typically will run an Interior Gateway Protocol for identifying how to forward packets to the next hop address. | 02-02-2012 |
20120027017 | MULTI-DESTINATION FORWARDING IN NETWORK CLOUDS WHICH INCLUDE EMULATED SWITCHES - Techniques are described which facilitate multi-destination forwarding in a Layer 2 Multipath (L2MP) network which includes an emulated switch. The emulated switch may correspond to two or more underlying peer link switches in the L2MP network, in which each of the peer link switches is linked to a Classical Ethernet (CE) switch over a virtual port channel (vPC). Traffic received by one of the peer link switches over the vPC is automatically forwarded to the other peer link switch (or switches). Multi-destination frames originating from the L2MP network addressed to hosts within the CE network are sent over only one of the peer link switches. | 02-02-2012 |
20120027018 | Distributed Switch Domain of Heterogeneous Components - A method of integrating virtual and physical network switching components into a heterogeneous switching domain is provided. Such method including, attaching, by a switching device, a header to a packet received from a virtual machine, the header including domain information, and processing the packet by the switching device, the processing being controlled by the header. Finally, the packet is forwarded, the forwarding being controlled by the header. | 02-02-2012 |
20120033669 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRAFFIC DISTRIBUTION IN A MULTI-CHASSIS LINK AGGREGATION - A pair of aggregation switches is connected to an edge node by a multi-chassis link aggregation group, wherein the aggregation switches are connected by a virtual fabric link (VFL) for exchange of information between the Aggregation Switches. The VFL includes a plurality of subsets of VFL physical links, wherein each subset is connected to a different pair of network interface modules on the Aggregation Switches. Traffic distribution across the plurality of subsets of VFL physical links is based on destination hardware device information in a pre-pended header of packets and/or based on a load balancing identifier in the pre-pended header. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033670 | EGRESS PROCESSING OF INGRESS VLAN ACLs - A network packet processing system includes source and destination virtual local area networks (VLANs) that are indirectly connected through a network routing device. Additionally, the network packet processing system includes a metadata generator connected to provide metadata for a network packet to be routed between the source and destination VLANS, wherein the metadata captures pre-routing source VLAN information from the network packet. The network packet processing system also includes an access control list (ACL) for specifying routing of the network packet between the source and destination VLANs that employs the pre-routing source VLAN information from the metadata and post-routing destination VLAN information from the network packet. A method of network packet processing is also included. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033671 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM FOR RECORDING COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A communication device including: a transfer unit transferring a received frame based on an identifier included in the received frame; a calculation unit calculating a size of the received frame to which the identifier is added when the received frame is a specific frame; a notification unit adding a value indicating a transmittable size or a size less than the transmittable size, when the size of the received frame after the identifier added is larger than the size that can be transmitted to a next destination communication device on a communication path, generating a transmission impossible notification frame addressed to a source communication device of the received frame, and transferring the transmission impossible notification frame to the transfer unit; and a retransmission unit correcting the size of the specific frame to be smaller than or equal to the transmittable size, when the transmission impossible notification frame is received and transferring the transmission impossible notification frame to the transfer unit. | 02-09-2012 |
20120039336 | High Performance, High Bandwidth Network Operating System - The present subject matter relates to computer operating systems, network interface cards and drivers, CPUs, random access memory and high bandwidth speeds. More specifically, a Linux operating system has specially-designed stream buffers, polling systems interfacing with network interface cards and multiple threads to deliver high performance, high bandwidth packets through the kernel to applications. A system and method are provided for capturing, aggregating, pre- analyzing and delivering packets to user space within a kernel to be primarily used by intrusion detection systems at multi-gigabit line rate speeds. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039337 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR QUALITY OF SERVICE OF ENCRYPTED NETWORK TRAFFIC - The present invention is directed towards systems and methods for providing classification of an encrypted network packet for performing QoS and acceleration techniques. Encrypted packets may be classified by a first classifier at a first portion of a network stack of a device as corresponding to a first predetermined application, and an application identifier may be included with the packet. In some embodiments, the packets may be decrypted in an order dependent on a first classification of the encrypted network packet. After decryption, packets may be reclassified as corresponding to a second predetermined application by a second classifier operating at a second portion of a network stack of the device above the first portion. Thus, network performance may be enhanced and optimized by providing QoS and acceleration engines with packet- or data-specific information corresponding to the application, while avoiding inefficiencies due to a lack of prioritization of decryption. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039338 | NETWORK SYSTEM, CONTROLLER, AND NETWORK CONTROL METHOD - A switch transfers a predetermined packet to an appliance. The appliance generates a rewritten packet by carrying out the packet header rewriting on the predetermined packet and forwards the rewritten packet back to the switch. The switch transfers the rewritten packet received from the appliance to a controller. In a case when the rewritten packet meets a predetermined condition, the controller generates entry setting data which instructs to set a new entry on the basis of a destination of the rewritten packet and the predetermined rewriting mode, and sends the entry setting data to the switch. The new entry indicates that packets belonging to the same flow as the predetermined packet are transferred to the destination without being routed through the appliance. The switch adds the new entry to the flow table in accordance with the entry setting data received from the controller. | 02-16-2012 |
20120044936 | Methods and Devices for Point to Multipoint Traffic Path Encoding - The present invention relates to network nodes and methods that use an encoding scheme for encoding a point-to-multipoint traffic path from one ingress node to a plurality of egress nodes in, for example, a Multi-Protocol Label Switching network. According to the encoding scheme a so-called common ERO is used. The common ERO specifies a list consisting of nodes that are common to several sub paths in order to provide a compression mechanism that reduces the size of path messages that are used for signaling the point-to-multipoint traffic path. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044937 | Method and Apparatus for Simulating IP Multinetting - IP Multinetting on a local area network is simulated by performing VLAN translation at a port connecting to the local area network. This allows IP addresses from multiple subnets to be associated with a single VLAN on the Local Area Network (LAN), while allowing the core switch to process the packets with a one-to-one correspondence between IP Subnet and VLAN. When a packet is received from the local area network at an IP multinetting port, the VLAN ID will be read to determine if the packet contains the IP Multinetting VLAN ID. The IP Subnet address will also be checked to see if the packet is associated with an IP Subnet that is part of the Multinetting. If so, the multinetting VLAN ID will be changed to an IP Subnet specific VLAN ID before the packet is processed by the core switch. | 02-23-2012 |
20120057595 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ANONYMIZING DEVICE, AND SERVER - A communication system ( | 03-08-2012 |
20120057596 | Outbound Transmission Of Packet Based On Routing Search Key Constructed From Packet Destination Address And Outbound Interface - A method is described that involves associating an outbound packet with a first network interface and constructing a search key from an identifier of the first network interface and the outbound packet's destination address. The method further entails submitting the search key to a routing function where the routing function identifies the outbound packet's next hop address. The method also involves transmitting the outbound packet to a node identified by the next hop address from the first network interface. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057597 | IN-LINE PACKET PROCESSING - A method and apparatus for in-line processing a data packet while routing the packet through a router in a system transmitting data packets between a source and a destination over a network including the router. The method includes receiving the data packet and pre-processing layer header data for the data packet as the data packet is received and prior to transferring any portion of the data packet to packet memory. The data packet is thereafter stored in the packet memory. A routing through the router is determined including a next hop index describing the next connection in the network. The data packet is retrieved from the packet memory and a new layer header for the data packet is constructed from the next hop index while the data packet is being retrieved from memory. The new layer header is coupled to the data packet prior to transfer from the router. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057598 | TRANSACTION AND CONNECTION INDEPENDENT PROTOCOL LOAD BALANCING - A system and method for load balancing session initiation protocol (SIP) traffic based on bridging and tracking transactions and connections between frontend and backend devices. The method includes receiving a SIP message and parsing a header of the SIP message. The parsing may include selecting a transaction identifier. The method further includes accessing a transaction table based on the transaction identifier and selecting a connection for forwarding the SIP message. The SIP message is then forwarded by the selected connection. | 03-08-2012 |
20120063458 | MULTIPLE VIRTUAL MACHINES SHARING A SINGLE IP ADDRESS - A method and apparatus allow multiple virtual machines to share the same IP address on an external network address space. The virtual machines reside on one or more physical host computer systems. A virtual network manager handles network traffic from a physical interface on the host computer and forwards network data to the appropriate virtual machine based on a destination port number. Data packets on the external network each have a destination and source port number. The virtual network manager uses a port range table that associates each virtual machine with a range of destination port numbers for incoming data packets. Each of the virtual machines is assigned a unique destination port range in the port range table and incoming data traffic on the external network is routed to the receiving virtual machines based on the destination port number in the data packet. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063459 | PACKET ROUTING - An embodiment may include circuitry to determine, at least in part, at least one first output to which to route at least one packet, based, at least in part upon, a first output determination and a second output determination. The first output determination may select at least one second output based at least in part upon at least one deterministic output selection algorithm. The second output determination may select at least one third output based at least in part upon at least one pseudo-random output selection algorithm. The at least one pseudo-random output selection algorithm may be based, at least in part, upon a counter value. Many modifications, variations, and alternatives are possible without departing from this embodiment. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063460 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING ADVERTISING OF ROUTING DATA - A method for controlling advertising of routing data to neighbor routers is presented. A list of prefixes is maintained ( | 03-15-2012 |
20120063461 | Method Of Routing A Packet - The invention concerns a method of routing a packet in a packet switching network, and a corresponding router ( | 03-15-2012 |
20120069845 | SANITIZING PACKET HEADERS - A network device may receive a packet, determine whether the packet includes two or more headers of a same type, modify the packet to correct for the two or more headers of the same type when the packet includes the two or more headers of the same type, determine whether the packet includes out-of-sequence headers, and modify the packet to correct for the out-of-sequence headers when the packet includes the out-of-sequence headers. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069846 | Serial Communication Tapping and Transmission to Routable Networks - Apparatuses and methods for tapping serial communications and transforming the serial data into a format appropriate for routable networks are significant for purposes of security and troubleshooting, especially in critical infrastructure networks. Communication taps should be completely passive such that any failure would not interrupt the serial communications. Furthermore, automatic determination of unspecified serial protocol frames allow general implementation across various networks, or across devices within a single network, without the need to customize for each implementation. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069847 | SCALABLE MULTIPROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING (MPLS) BASED NETWORKS - Example scalable multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) based networks, and methods, apparatus and articles of manufacture to implement the same are disclosed. A disclosed example method includes determining at an area border router (ABR) an OSPF metric representing a cost associated with transporting data between a provider edge router (PER) and the ABR within a non-zero OSPF area, replacing at the ABR a first MPLS label included in a BGP message received from the PER with a second MPLS label associated with the PER and assigned by the ABR, replacing at the ABR a next-hop attribute included in the BGP message with a value representing a loopback address of the ABR, updating at the ABR a route cost attribute included in the BGP message to include the OSPF metric, and re-advertising from the ABR the modified BGP message into an OSPF area | 03-22-2012 |
20120069848 | CONFIGURABLE FAST ETHERNET AND GIGABIT ETHERNET DATA PORT - An Ethernet switch has at least one ingress/egress port which is operable in two modes, in a first mode as a GE port and in a second mode as a plurality of FE ports. The port has 8 MAC interfaces each of which is capable of receiving/transmitting FE packets, and at least one of the MAC interfaces can be configured to receive/transmit GE packets. Thus, the port has two modes of operation. The port further includes receive and transmit modules which receive GE and FE packets from, and transmit GE and FE packets to, the interfaces. | 03-22-2012 |
20120076145 | PSEUDO-WIRE PROVIDING AN IN-BAND CONTROL CHANNEL USING AN OFFSET - A method implemented by a first provider equipment (PE) device to enable operations, administration and management (OAM) functionality over a pseudo-wire (PW) between the first PE device and a second PE device, wherein the PW traverses a packet switched network and carries control channel messages and a flow of data packets, and where the packet switched network includes nodes that use information outside a pseudo-wire label stack of the data packets for determining multi-path routing, the method including receiving a control channel message at the first PE to be forwarded over the pseudo-wire to the second PE, and prefixing the control channel message with a pseudo-flow header to ensure that the control channel message is forwarded over a same route by the nodes of the packet switched network as the data packets of the flow, thereby enabling OAM functionality to be accurately performed for the pseudo-wire. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076146 | Method for transmitting data - A method is described for transmitting data between participants of a serial, ring-shaped communications arrangement in which the participants are serially connected to one another, wherein a data packet is passed from a participant provided as a master to further participants provided as slaves, wherein the data packet is passed from slave to slave, and wherein address information of the data packet is altered by each slave. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076147 | Method and System for Realizing Transmission of Message Between an Extended Processor and a Switch Chip - The invention discloses a method and system for realizing transmission of message between an extended processor and a switch chip. The switch chip amends the destination MAC of the received first message to be transmitted to the extended processor as the first destination MAC, and then transmit the first message to the extended processor, wherein the first destination MAC corresponds to the service physical port of the switch chip for receiving the first message; the extended processor can resolve the first destination MAC to learn that the first message comes from the service physical port. The method and system of the invention can realize transmission of message between the extended processor and the switch chip. | 03-29-2012 |
20120082160 | ROUTING USING GLOBAL ADDRESS PAIRS - The present invention extends to methods, systems, and computer program products for routing using global address pairs. Embodiments of the invention use publicly routable Internet Protocol (“IP”) addresses to represent sites rather than individual hosts. Hosts can be represented by a global address pair, including site public IP address and a node private IP address. Nodes route packets to address processing modules using IP-in-IP encapsulation. An outer header contains a site public IP address and is destined to a site on inter-site links. An inner header contains a node private IP address and is destined to a private endpoint in intra-site links. In some embodiments, a site public IPv4 address and a node private IPv4 address are encoded into an IPv6 address. Use of an IPv6 address makes encoding of the two IPv4 address transparent to IPv6 applications. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082161 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DATA TRAFFIC OFFLOADING AT A ROUTER - This disclosure relates to a system and method for offloading selected data traffic in logical tunnels to the Internet. The offloading provides another data path for selected data traffic that can relieve the burden on a mobile operator's network, such as the backhaul and core networks. As the proliferation of data rich content and increasingly more capable mobile devices has continued, the amount of data communicated over mobile operator's networks has increased. Upgrading the existing network that was designed for voice calls is not desirable or practical for many mobile operators. This disclosure provides systems and methods for offloading data to the Internet at a router to relieve congestion on the mobile operator's network. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082162 | Method and Router for Implementing Mirroring - A method and router for implementing mirroring, said method including: configuring a remote mirroring port on a source router, establishing a corresponding layer two virtual interface, and specifying a data stream requiring mirroring and a corresponding physical egress port; establishing a layer two virtual interface corresponding to the layer two virtual interface of said source router on a destination router; forming one VPWS tunnel between the layer two virtual interfaces of said source router and said destination router; filtering out the mirroring data stream from the packet received at the remote mirroring port of said source router, and sending obtained mirroring packet from the physical egress port on said source router to said destination router; searching the layer two virtual interface on said destination router after receiving mirroring packet, and sending mirroring packet without a label from its corresponding physical port to a monitoring port, thereby implementing router remote mirroring. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082163 | Packet Routing In A Network - Packet routing information is encoded into a non-static compact representation of set membership, the compact representation of set membership being for inclusion into a header of a packet. The compact representation of set membership is computed using input parameters that include at least one packet-specific, flow-specific or processing-context-specific parameter. By making the compact representation of set membership packet-dependent, flow-dependent or processing-context-dependent it becomes harder for, for example, a potential attacker to obtain information needed to mount a DDoS attack. In a variant of the invention, the packet routing information is represented as a plurality of non-static identifiers for inclusion into a header of a packet. | 04-05-2012 |
20120087372 | Link Aggregation Based on Port and Protocol Combination - A network switch suitable for receiving packets of information from and the packets of information to a communications network includes a plurality of physical ports, packet processing functionality and memory. The packet processing functionality operates on information stored in memory to determine the LAG, from among two or more LAGs, over which a packet received by the switch should be correctly forwarded. The switch memory stores a plurality of LAG tables, each one of which can include one or more entries comprising a physical port number and a packet parameter that are used by the packet processing functionality to determinately identify the correct LAG over which to forward a packet. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087373 | EFFICIENT DATA TRANSFER WITHIN A VIRTUAL NETWORK - Improvements for the efficiency of data transfer within interconnected components of a virtual network, and in particular components of a single physical computing device are provided. The components exchange data as if they were communicating over an actual communications network using networking protocols. Data packets to be sent from one component to another are buffered by final destination address to improve efficiency of packet delivery. | 04-12-2012 |
20120093154 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO UTILIZE ROUTE PARAMETER SETS FOR EXCHANGING ROUTES IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods and apparatus to utilize route parameter sets for exchanging routes in a communication network are disclosed. An example method to exchange routes in a communication network disclosed herein comprises receiving a route comprising a route identifier identifying the route and a plurality of route parameter values characterizing the route, and sending the route identifier and a pointer to forward the route to a recipient in the communication network, the pointer being associated with a route parameter set comprising the plurality of route parameter values. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093155 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DATA EXCHANGE IN A HETEROGENEOUS MULTIPROCESSOR SYSTEM - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes generating a request for header data, the request is sent to a first processor. The method also includes receiving a response from the first processor that is indicative of video data for a virtual frame to be communicated. A multiplex table is generated based on the response. The method also includes evaluating a multiplex entry in the multiplex table for synchronization with a line number, and requesting the first processor to send at least a portion of the virtual frame after the synchronization. The method further includes communicating a packet, which includes a payload associated with the virtual frame and a packet header that includes multiplex data associated with the multiplex entry. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093156 | VIRTUAL INLINE CONFIGURATION FOR A NETWORK DEVICE - A performance enhancing proxy network device is configured to operate in a virtual inline mode, in which selected network traffic is redirected to and through the network device by a router using simple routing policies. In this way, the network device can be coupled to the router in series but can still operate as if it were physically connected inline. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093157 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPROVING PERFORMANCE IN AN HFC ARCHITECTURE - Systems and methods for improving performance in an HFC architecture are provided. Incoming data associated with a plurality of signals to be included in a downstream data signal may be received, and the incoming data may be mapped to a plurality of symbols representative of the signals. Data bits for each symbol may be mapped to at least one data register. The contents of the at least one register may be read by one or more digital-to-analog converters to facilitate a direct radio frequency synthesis, and the output of the one or more digital-to-analog converters may be provided to one or more electro-optic conversion devices configured to output a downstream data signal. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093158 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NODE, CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PORGRAM - A communication system includes a node that processes a received packet; and a control device that sets a processing rule, which defines a matching rule and processing for a packet that conforms to the matching rule, in the node. The node holds an identifier in association with a processing rule and determines whether or not to perform processing for a received packet depending upon whether or not an identifier of the received packet corresponds to an identifier associated with a processing rule corresponding to a matching rule that conforms to the received packet, wherein the processing is performed according to the processing rule corresponding to the matching rule that conforms to the received packet. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093159 | SCALING EGRESS NETWORK TRAFFIC - In an embodiment, a method is provided. The method of this embodiment provides generating one or more packets of data, the one or more packets of data being associated with a connection; and associating the one or more packets with one of a plurality of transmit queues based, at least in part, on the connection associated with the one or more packets. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093160 | System and Method for Processing and Forwarding Transmitted Information - A system and method for handling a digital electronic flow between a first and second entity in which a flow policy is determined that is to be applied to the flow and the flow is then directed along a path in accordance with the policy. An ID is supplied for each flow and a tag associated with each flow which indicates the policy to be applied to its associated flow. Flows are also associated with one another, with associated flows having associated policies. In particular the flow may be processed or forwarded. The path may include a graph structure and virtual applications. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093161 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TAGGING PACKETS ROUTED TO CUSTOMER PREMISES DEVICES VIA CLUSTERS OF DEDICATED CUSTOMER INTERFACES - A method of routing traffic to customer premises devices (CPDs), each CPD being reachable via a dedicated customer interface (DCI) from among a plurality of DCIs grouped into clusters included in respective outside plant units (OPUs). Packets destined for the CPDs are received. A destination DCI and a destination OPU for each packet is determined. The destination DCI for a particular packet destined for a particular CPD is determined by identifying the DCI via which the particular CPD is reachable. The destination OPU for the particular packet is determined by identifying the OPU that includes the destination DCI. For each particular OPU that is the destination OPU for one or more packets, the packets are buffered and transmitted via an interface for the particular OPU. For each particular DCI that is the destination DCI for one or more packets, tagging each packet with an indication of the particular DCI. | 04-19-2012 |
20120099591 | System and Method for Scalable Flow Aware Network Architecture for Openflow Based Network Virtualization - A network device includes a memory configured to store a flow table, and a processor. The processor is configured to receiving a network packet, determine the network packet corresponds to an unidentified network flow, and provide flow information for the unidentified network flow to a controller. The processor is further configured to receive a flow identifier and an flow table entry from the controller. The flow table entry includes a flow rule and an encapsulate instruction. The processor is further configured to store the flow rule in the flow table, encapsulate the network packet using the flow identifier, and forward the encapsulated network packet to the network. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099592 | Differentiated Handling of Network Traffic using Network Address Translation - In order to allow efficient differentiated handling of network traffic in a network section, a network address translator ( | 04-26-2012 |
20120099593 | UNIVERSAL FILE DELIVERY METHODS FOR PROVIDING UNEQUAL ERROR PROTECTION AND BUNDLED FILE DELIVERY SERVICES - Methods and apparatus for delivering data objects from an electronic device or system over a packet-switched network are provided, wherein source data is represented by encoded symbols in packets such that the source data is recoverable, at least approximately, from the encoded symbols, by arranging the source data into a plurality of source symbols, generating a plurality of encoding packets, wherein an encoding packet comprises a universal object symbol identifier (“UOSI”) and a plurality of encoding symbols representing source data for a packet structure identified by the UOSI, and sending the plurality of encoding packets to the packet-switched network. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099594 | MEDIA DISTRIBUTION ARCHITECTURE - A wired and wireless media transport technology is provided that allows for the simultaneous transmission of media to multiple zones while maintaining precise timing synchronization. A user can have a network of speakers, and independently select which ones are actively playing and have their playback synchronized. The media source can be a cell phone, tablet, stereo, set-top box, PC or other device. The media itself can be audio or video. The transmission method of media into the network can be wired, as through an auxiliary cable, or wireless as with Bluetooth or WiFi. The speakers/endpoints themselves are governed in a self-forming network. Audio is injected into the network from a source and the end-point network itself controls audio/video distribution, timing, and rendering. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099595 | NETWORK INTERMEDIATE APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR UBIQUITOUS NETWORK AND UBIQUITOUS NETWORK SYSTEM USING THE INTERMEDIARY APPARATUS - Discloses is an ubiquitous network intermediate apparatus and intermediate method that supports various internet services in order that wired terminals can connect to the network without an additional network setting. An ubiquitous network intermediate apparatus according to the present invention comprises a terminal access device outputting a packet received from a terminal according to a source IP address of the packet to a preset virtual path, and outputting a response packet received through the virtual path to the terminal; and a home access device outputting the packet received from the terminal access device through the virtual path to a home router, and transmitting the response packet received from the home router to the terminal access device through the virtual path according to a destination IP address. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099596 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR A DISTRIBUTED PROVIDER EDGE - Methods and systems for a distributed provider edge are provided. According to one embodiment, a one-to-one association is formed between a Virtual Routing and Forwarding device (VRF) of a provider edge device (PE) of a service provider and a customer site. The VRF includes a routing information base (RIB) and a forwarding information base (FIB). A network interface module is instantiated within the VRF for each network interface employed, such as an intranet, extranet, Virtual Private Network (VPN) and/or Internet interface. A first packet is received at the PE via a first network interface. A first network interface module associated with the first network interface accesses the RIB to acquire routing information for the first packet. A second packet is received via a second network interface. A second network interface module associated with the second network interface accesses the RIB to acquire routing information for the second packet. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099597 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETECTING A PACKET - A method of a device for detecting a packet includes performing association recognition table matching between first match information in a received packet and first match information in an association recognition table, where the first match information of the association recognition table is obtained by extracting a content of a control packet used for creating a data channel, the first match information corresponds to a packet protocol, and the packet protocol is obtained by performing protocol recognition on the control packet; and when the association recognition table matching succeeds, outputting protocol information obtained after the association recognition table matching succeeds. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099598 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A PSEUDO WIRE - A method, a device and a system for establishing a Pseudo Wire (PW) are provided. The method includes: receiving, by a switching node, a control message; constructing a first control message according the first FEC information and the routing information in the control message, and sending the first control message to a second terminal node; constructing, by the second terminal node, a second control message, where the second control message includes the second FEC information and the second routing information, and the second FEC information carries identification information of the first terminal node; and sending the second control message to the switching node. In the method, it is unnecessary to manually configure a PW routing table on the switching node or establish a PW routing table dynamically through a routing protocol, and it is unnecessary to configure mapping relations between PW segments manually. This method achieves robust maintenance. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099599 | Method and Apparatus for Relaying Packets - Apparatus for relaying packets between a first host and a second host and methods for sending packets between a first and second host are provided. The apparatus includes a memory for registering for the first host the following information: a relayed address of the first host, an address of the second host, and an outbound higher layer identifier and/or an inbound higher layer identifier. The apparatus further includes an outbound packet inspector for inspecting packets received from the first host and addressed to an address of the apparatus to determine whether they contain a registered outbound higher layer identifier and, if so, for forwarding the packets to the address of the second host and/or an inbound packet inspector for inspecting packets received from the second host and addressed to the relayed address to determine whether they contain a registered inbound higher layer identifier and, if so, for forwarding the packets to the address of the first host. | 04-26-2012 |
20120106549 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT MODULE FOR A VEHICLE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A network management module includes a network interface module, memory, and a processing module. The network interface module is operable for coupling the network management module to a vehicle communication network. The processing module is operable to manage a global vehicle network communication protocol that includes instituting a content-based network packet processing protocol and managing the vehicle communication network to support the network packet processing protocol. The content-based network packet processing protocol includes determining content type of a packet, determining a processing requirement of the packet, and prioritizing execution of the processing requirement based on the content type. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106550 | VEHICULAR NETWORK WITH CONCURRENT PACKET TRANSMISSION - A vehicular network is a closed network with known sources, destinations, and network connections that can be mapped in advance, and used to identify network resources needed to transmit a packet from a source to a destination. A network module can determine the source destination, and a priority of a packet based on the packet's content. Using the source and destination information, along with a network topology data, the network module can determine if two packets need the same network resources to be delivered to their destination. When the two packets do not use the same resources, there is no conflict, and the packets can be transmitted concurrently regardless of whether one of the packets has a higher priority than another packet. If there is a conflict, the network module transmits the packets based on the packets' priorities. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106551 | DATA BRIDGE - A data bridge controls packet transfers between network fabrics forming a closed network, such as a vehicular network. The data bridge includes two or more sets of modules, each of which communicates with a different network fabric. When a packet is to be delivered between network fabrics, a first set of modules, which is used to communicate with a first network fabric, decides whether to accept the packet or discard it. If the packet is accepted, it is delivered to a second set of modules, which is used for communicating with a second network fabric. The second set of modules makes a second, independent decision about whether the packet will be sent to the second network fabric. Each set of modules can base its decision on packet content type, and may discard any packet not to be delivered to the other network. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106552 | NODE APPARATUS, STORAGE MEDIUM AND FRAME TRANSMITTING METHOD - When stored identifying information of a transmission target frame and identifying information of a received frame are equal, a node apparatus updates transmission feasibility information stored in association with the final destination of the received frame. The transmission feasibility information indicates feasibility of transmission to each of a plurality of adjacent node apparatuses being a transmission destination, and is updated so that feasibility of transmission to the transmission destination associated with the identifying information of the received frame indicates that “the transmission is infeasible”. The node apparatus transmits the received frame, when there is no adjacent apparatus to which transmission is feasible, and when the stored identifying information of the transmission target frame is equal to the identifying information of the received frame, to the adjacent node apparatus recognized as the origin in association with the identifying information of the received frame. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106553 | PACKET FORWARDING APPARATUS AND METHOD - A network device includes at least one source physical port configured to be coupled to a network, a plurality of egress ports, and a packet processor. The packet processor includes a processing stage configured to implement a logical port assignment mechanism to assign source logical port information to a data packet received via one of the at least one source physical port, wherein the source logical port information is based on characteristics of the data packet, wherein the source logical port information corresponds to a logical entity that is different from any source physical port, and a forwarding engine to determine one or more egress ports for forwarding the data packet based on at least the assigned source logical port information. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106554 | REDIRECTION METHOD, REDIRECTION SYSTEM, MOBILE NODE, HOME AGENT, AND PROXY NODE - Disclosed is a technique to eliminate wasted tunneling encapsulation processing during redirection of a packet. According to the technique, when a packet of a first connection passing through a LMA | 05-03-2012 |
20120113989 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, LOGICAL CHANNEL CONTROL DEVICE, CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A configuration having a control device that sets a processing rule in a forwarding node, the configuration being capable of forwarding control of duplicated packets in private IP address spaces. At least one forwarding node among forwarding nodes operates as a logical channel control device that establishes a logical channel to an external node, generate or delete a virtual port information associated with said logical channel established to said external node, and gives notification thereof to the control device, and the control device computes a forwarding path of a packet using the notified port information. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113990 | COMMUNICATION SWITCHING APPARATUS FOR SWITCHING DATA IN MULTIPLE PROTOCOL DATA FRAME FORMATS - An enhanced Ethernet protocol for computing and telecommunication supports a shortened frame size for communicating data payloads among selected devices within a constrained neighborhood based on a unique identification. | 05-10-2012 |
20120120955 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR INTERCONNECTING A MULTI-PROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING NETWORK AND AN ETHERNET - A method, a device and a system for interconnecting a multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) network and an Ethernet are provided. A packet sent by a node located at the Ethernet is received, the packet is parsed, the parsed packet is re-encapsulated by means of MPLS, and the re-encapsulated packet is sent to a node located at the MPLS network, so as to implement interconnection between the MPLS network and the Ethernet. A reverse solution is similar to this. An intermediate node in the solution adopts a manner of parsing a packet and then re-encapsulating the packet when the packet is sent from one network to another network, instead of transparent transmission only. Therefore, it is unnecessary to configure a Media Access Control (MAC) address of a remote node on a node located at the Ethernet and to configure Ethernet information on a node located at the MPLS network. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120956 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR DATA COMPRESSION - A plurality, i.e. at least two, cells are combined into a macro cell. In a macro header of said macro cell a full numbering information of a first cell of said plurality of cells is stored. For further cells of said plurality of cells other than said first cell, a deviation information indicating a deviation of a numbering information of the respective further cell from said full numbering information of said first cell or one of said further cells is stored. In some embodiments, additionally the headers of the individual cells are incorporated in the macro header. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120957 | Border Gateway Protocol Procedures for Multi-Protocol Label Switching and Layer-2 Virtual Private Networks Using Ethernet-Based Tunnels - Described is a method of operating a first provider edge (PE) router to support virtual private network (VPN) applications through a packet-switched network (PSN). Routing information is obtained for a VPN route to be routed through an Ethernet switched path between the first PE router and a second PE router. The first PE router is at a source end of the Ethernet switched path and the second PE router is at a destination end of the Ethernet switched path. The VPN route is associated with the Ethernet switched path. A Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) message is sent from the first PE router to the second PE router, the BGP message containing routing information for the VPN route. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120958 | DEEP SLEEP MODE MANAGEMENT FOR A NETWORK SWITCH | 05-17-2012 |
20120120959 | MULTIPROCESSING COMPUTING WITH DISTRIBUTED EMBEDDED SWITCHING - A first one of multiple embedded processing elements ( | 05-17-2012 |
20120120960 | NODE DEVICE, INTEGRATED CIRCUIT AND CONTROL METHOD IN RING TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A node device in a ring transmission system in which a plurality of node devices are connected as a ring via serial links has a PHY transitioning between a normal mode and a loopback mode with timing that maintains symbol lock between an idle frame transmitted to a later serial link in the normal mode according a transmission instruction, and an idle frame from an earlier node device looped back for output to a later serial link during the loopback mode, thus performing relay processing on non-locally addressed data packets during the loopback mode. | 05-17-2012 |
20120127995 | BACKBONE NETWORK WITH POLICY DRIVEN ROUTING - A source device obtains a data packet that includes both a destination address and a payload. The source device selects an exit point address of multiple exit point addresses corresponding to the destination address based on one or more policies. The source device encapsulates the data packet with a header that includes the selected exit point address, and the encapsulated data packet is provided to the backbone network. The encapsulated data packet is routed through the backbone network based on the exit point address, and an edge router of the backbone network identifies an interface of the edge router that corresponds to the exit point address. The header is removed from the encapsulated data packet, and the data packet is added to a buffer of the interface for routing to one or more other devices outside of the backbone network. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127996 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR NEXT HOP SCALING - The subject matter described herein includes methods, systems, and computer readable media for next hop scaling. According to one aspect of the subject matter described herein, a system for next hop scaling is provided. The system includes a plurality of I/O modules, each having at least one I/O port for communicating packets to and receiving packets from hosts external to the packet forwarding device. The packet forwarding device further includes a plurality of packet processors associated with the I/O modules for performing packet forwarding operations. The packet forwarding device further includes a memory associated with each packet processor for storing next hop bindings, where an ingress packet processor and memory are configured to relay to an egress packet processor separate from the ingress packet processor a packet whose next hop is connected to the egress packet processor and where the egress packet processor and its memory that receive the packet are configured to perform a next hop lookup to supply a destination MAC address and forward the packet from the packet forwarding device. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127997 | METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING A NETWORK PREFIX-LIST SEARCH - A packet network device includes a route processor that operates to maintain one or more forwarding tables and it includes one or more line cards that operate to process information received by the packet network device from the network and to forward the information to its correct destination. The route processor also operates to identify which incoming prefixes can be used to update the forwarding tables or to identify prefixes stored in the packet network device that can be redistributed from one network protocol to another network protocol running on the route processor. A table management function running on the route processor operates to identify the best match between an incoming prefix and information included in policy statement associated with both an ordered prefix-list and a radix tree structure. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127998 | NETWORK SWITCH PORT AGGREGATION - A network switch configures a static forwarding to a packet processor by suppressing packet switching and forwards all traffic received on a group of ports a trunk port for aggregation. A trunk header is overloaded with message classification information for use at the downstream packet processor. Routing logic retrieves the packet classification information and stores the information in control fields that are ignored due to the static forwarding and local switching disablement. The static forwarding forwards the packet, with the appended classification information, to a packet processor via the aggregation port. Packet classification information is indicative of the type of the message traffic and is performed upon packet arrival at the switching device. The packet processor reads the classification information from the overloaded control fields, rather then expending processing resources to determine the classification, and sends the message packet on an ingress port to a switching fabric for further transport. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127999 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR NEXT HOP SCALING WITH LINK AGGREGATION - The subject matter described herein includes methods, systems, and computer readable media for next hop scaling with link aggregation. According to one aspect of the subject matter described herein, a system for next hop scaling is provided. The system includes a packet forwarding device including a plurality of packet processors for performing next hop and link aggregation group (LAG) selection operations. Within this plurality of packet processors, ingress packet processors are configured to indicate, for received packets that have a next hop on a different packet processor, that an egress next hop selection operation is needed. Egress packet processors of the plurality of packet processors are configured to perform the egress next hop and member selection operations for the packets for which an egress next hop selection operation is indicated, wherein forwarding of the packets is limited to active LAG group members local to the egress packet processor. | 05-24-2012 |
20120128000 | Systems and Methods for Measuring Available Capacity and Tight Link Capacity of IP Paths from a Single Endpoint - According to one exemplary embodiment, a method for determining the forward and reverse available capacity or tight link capacity of an IP path from a single endpoint includes the steps of: transmitting, from a source IP endpoint node toward a destination IP endpoint node, a forward packet train including a first plurality of IP test packets over the forward IP path; and receiving, at the source IP endpoint node, a corresponding reverse packet train from the destination IP endpoint node, the reverse packet train including a second plurality of IP test packets over the reverse IP path each of which correspond to a respective one of the first plurality of IP test packets. For those IP path capacity measurements embodiments which are TWAMP-based, no changes are needed to the TWAMP control protocol, e.g., since exemplary embodiments make use of padding octets to transfer additional information which can be used for available IP path capacity and tight IP link capacity calculations. | 05-24-2012 |
20120128001 | Method And Apparatus For Connecting Subscriber Devices To An IPV6-Capable Aggregation Network - The present invention relates to an access node ( | 05-24-2012 |
20120128002 | TRANSMITTING TERMINAL AND BANDWIDTH ESTIMATING METHOD - A transmitting terminal for used in a communication system having the transmitting terminal and receiving terminals which are connected to each other in a tree shape, each of the receiving terminals copies the data transmitted from the transmitting terminal and transfers the copied data to a receiving terminal in downstream, includes a receiving section that receives a receiver report including a packet loss rate and a round trip time, a bandwidth estimation target terminal selection section that selects a receiving terminal to be estimated on the basis of distribution tree information and a packet loss rate included in the receiver report, and a bandwidth estimation section that estimates a bandwidth of the network to control a transmission rate of data on the basis of the packet loss rate and the round trip time included in the receiver report transmitted from the selected receiving terminal. | 05-24-2012 |
20120134358 | Interconnecting Virtual Domains - According to certain embodiments, control packets are received through a control plane tunnel that communicates control traffic for virtual private networks (VPNs) among autonomous systems. A routing instance of each control packet is identified according to a control tag of the control packet. At least two routing instances are distinct from each other. The control packets are routed according to the routing instances. According to certain embodiments, data packets are received through a data plane tunnel that communicates data traffic for the VPNs among the autonomous systems. A forwarding instance of the control packet is identified for each data packet according to a data tag of the data packet. At least two forwarding instances are distinct from each other. The data packets are forwarded according to the forwarding instances. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134359 | SWITCH AND SWITCHING METHOD - A switch includes a plurality of port units, a tag attaching unit, a switching unit, and a tag removing unit. Each of the plurality of port units includes a port configured to receive a packet or transmit a packet. The tag attaching unit determines a sub-group identifier on the basis of an input port identifier for identifying an input port which has received an input packet and a group identifier included in the input packet for identifying a group of ports, and attaches a sub-group tag including the determined sub-group identifier to the input packet to acquire an augmented packet. The switching unit determines an output port for outputting the input packet on the basis of the determined sub-group identifier, the group identifier, and a destination address included in the augmented packet. The tag removing unit removes the attached sub-group tag from the augmented packet to acquire the input packet. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134360 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING NETWORK PACKET - A device for processing a network packet includes a capturing unit, a look-up table supplying unit, a preprocessing unit and a control unit. The capturing unit is utilized for capturing an information from the network packet. The look-up table supplying unit is utilized for supplying a look-up table. The preprocessing unit is coupled to the capturing unit and the look-up table supplying unit, for comparing the information with the look-up table to generate a comparison result. The control unit is coupled to the preprocessing unit, for choosing a processing rule to process the network packet according to the comparison result. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134361 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF UTILIZING A FRAMEWORK FOR INFORMATION ROUTING IN LARGE-SCALE DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS USING SWARM INTELLIGENCE - In some embodiments, the invention involves information routing in networks, and, more specifically, to defining a framework using swarm intelligence and utilization of the defined framework for routing information in the network, especially for cloud computing applications. In an embodiment, information about available information/services is pushed to network nodes using information packets (ants). Nodes requiring services send query packets (ants) and a node may send a response to a query ant when information is available. Ants may be forwarded throughout the network based on popularity of nodes, freshness of information/requests, routing table information, and requests or interest by consumer nodes captured in information routing table. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 05-31-2012 |
20120140772 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR CONVERTING ROUTING DATA FROM ONE PROTOCOL TO ANOTHER IN A VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK - Data (e.g., instructions) used to route Internet Protocol traffic is converted from one protocol to another (e.g., MPLS to Virtual Router) or vice-versa. This allows routers and other network devices based on either protocol to co-exist in the same network. | 06-07-2012 |
20120147888 | MANAGING STALE ROUTE REMOVAL IN A ROUTING INFORMATION BASE OF A NETWORK ELEMENT - A network element of a communications network includes a fresh route queue, a stale route queue, a Routing Information Base (RIB), a network interface, and a routing protocol module. The network interface receives link state information from other network elements. The routing protocol module determines a plurality of routes from the link state information. The routing protocol module identifies among the plurality of routes a subset of routes that are present in the stale route queue, adds the subset of routes to the fresh route queue, and deletes the subset of routes from the stale route queue. The routing protocol module then remove routes in the RIB that correspond to any routes remaining in the stale route queue, and moves the routes from the fresh route queue to the stale route queue. Related methods for managing routes in a RIB of a network element are disclosed. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147889 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR VIRTUALIZING MULTIPLE TERMINALS - An apparatus and method for virtualizing multiple terminals are provided. The apparatus includes a terminal virtualizer configured to virtualize a group of a plurality of transmitter terminals of a first user and a group of receiver terminals of a second user through the change of source and destination addresses of a packet that is transmitted between the transmitter terminal group and the receiver terminal group so that the transmitter terminal group and the receiver terminal group may be recognized as if they were single terminals. Accordingly, it is possible to provide seamless IP connectivity regardless of which terminal is currently being used by a to user. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147890 | APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING A TRANSFER DESTINATION OF A PACKET ORIGINATING FROM A VIRTUAL MACHINE - Transfer destination of a packet originating from a virtual machine is controlled so as to allow a capture device arranged in a communication network to capture a packet that is transferred using a communication tunnel. A first server acquires a first packet originating from a source virtual machine being operated by the first server, encapsulates the first packet by adding source and destination addresses. The first server further adds a transfer-destination address to the encapsulated first packet to generate a second packet when the first packet is determined to be a target packet to be captured by the capture device. Then, the first server transmits the second packet including the transfer-destination address to the second server using the communication tunnel while the second packet including the first packet is transferred to the transfer-destination address. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147891 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR BALANCING LOAD ACROSS MULTIPLE PACKET PROCESSING ENGINES - A distributed packet processing apparatus capable of distributing packet load across a plurality of packet processing engines is provided. The distributed packet processing apparatus includes a plurality of processing engines each configured to process allocated packets, a first tag generating unit configured to allocate an input packet to a processing engine, which has a processing engine index corresponding to a tag index for the input packet, among the plurality of processing engines, a second tag generating unit configured to calculate a tag index for an output packet, and an index conversion unit configure to convert the tag index for the output packet to one processing engine index among a plurality of processing indexes for the plurality of the processing engines and allocates the output packet to a processing engine having the one processing engine such that loads are distributed among the plurality of processing engines. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147892 | ANALYSIS OF NETWORK PACKETS USING A GENERATED HASH CODE - A technique for analyzing network packets includes receiving, by a network processor, a network packet having a packet header including address and control information. A set of bytes are extracted, using the network processor, from the packet header and a set of input bits for generating a hash code are derived, using the network processor, from the set of bytes. Finally, the hash code is generated using the input bits. | 06-14-2012 |
20120155466 | Method and apparatus for efficiently processing data packets in a computer network - According to an embodiment of the invention, a network device such as a router or switch provides efficient data packet handling capability. The network device includes one or more input ports for receiving data packets to be routed, as well as one or more output ports for transmitting data packets. The network device includes an integrated port controller integrated circuit for routing packets. The integrated circuit includes an interface circuit, a received packets circuit, a buffer manager circuit for receiving data packets from the received packets circuit and transmitting data packets in one or more buffers and reading data packets from the one or more buffers. The integrated circuit also includes a rate shaper counter for storing credit for a traffic class, so that the integrated circuit can support input and/or output rate shaping. The integrated circuit may be associated with an IRAM, a CAM, a parameter memory configured to hold routing and/or switching parameters, which may be implemented as a PRAM, and an aging RAM, which stores aging information. The aging information may be used by a CPU coupled to the integrated circuit via a system interface circuit to remove entries from the CAM and/or the PRAM when an age count exceeds an age limit threshold for the entries. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155467 | METHODS FOR CONFIGURING NETWORK SWITCHES - Network switches may be configured using flow tables. Flow table entries may contain header fields and associated actions. When a packet is received by a network switch, the network switch can compare fields in the packet to fields in the flow table entries and can take corresponding actions when matches are detected. A controller server can determine the topology of a network and can gather information on the capacities of network switches and other network switch capabilities. Based on this information and network configuration rules, the controller server can generate flow tables for the network switches that direct the switches to forward packets along desired paths through the network. The flow table entries for switches that are nearer the network core can be provided with more wildcarding than switches nearer the network edge. Traffic can be forwarded through encapsulation and deencapsulation engines to allow tunneling between isolated network domains. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155468 | MULTI-PATH COMMUNICATIONS IN A DATA CENTER ENVIRONMENT - Various technologies related to multi-path communications in a data center environment are described herein. Network infrastructure devices communicate traffic flows amongst one another, wherein a traffic flow includes a plurality of data packets intended for a particular recipient computing device that are desirably transmitted and received in a certain sequence. Indications that data packets in the traffic flow have been received outside of the certain sequence are processed in a manner to prevent a network infrastructure device from retransmitting a particular data packet. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155469 | Scaling Number of Virtual Links in a Fiber Channel Forwarder Device - At a network device that forwards packets between compute devices and virtual storage area networks using Fiber Channel over Ethernet techniques, data is stored for a virtual fabric port of the network device identifying each of a plurality of virtual storage area networks. For each virtual storage area network, data is stored identifying each of a plurality of compute devices that are logged into the virtual storage area network via the network device. The network device forwards packets sent to the virtual fabric port of the network device from the plurality of compute devices to corresponding ones of the plurality of virtual storage area networks. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155470 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND DEVICES FOR MULTIPHASE DECODING - The various embodiments include methods, servers and systems for communicating signaling information in a telecommunications signaling network that involves decoding a first portion of the received first message, determining if the decoded first portion identifies a destination component, determining if the destination component can be derived from the decoded first portion when the decoded first portion does not identify a destination component, recursively decoding subsequent portions of the received first message when previously decoded portions do not identify the destination component and that the destination component cannot be derived using the previously decoded portions, performing context-based routing operations using information extracted from the previously decoded portions to identify the destination component, packaging the previously decoded portions along with a remainder of the first message into a second message encoding signaling information, and sending the second message encoding signaling information to the identified destination component over a second communications link. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155471 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING - A router relays sensing data between a field network including at least one sensor node and a plant network including a management system. The routing apparatus manages a routing table in which a next address and an output interface corresponding to an extension destination address of 6 bytes and an input interface are stored and transmits sensing data to another field network or a management system using the routing table. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155472 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CLASSIFYING PACKETS - An apparatus for classifying packets obtains a connection index of a service flow corresponding to a key field value of a tunnel header of a downlink packet received from a network through tunnel, and transmit the downlink packets with the connection index as a header. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155473 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DIRECT FRAME SWITCHING USING FRAME CONTAINED DESTINATION INFORMATION - Frame contained destination information may be used by a switch to identify an appropriate output port for a given frame without performing a table access operation. This reduces the processing requirements of the switch to enable the switch to handle frames more efficiently. The frame contained destination information may be contained in the frame's local destination MAC addresses (DA) such that a portion of the DA directly indicates, for each switch that handles the frame, an output port for that switch. Different portions of the DA may be used by different switches, depending on where they are in the network hierarchy. Large switches may also use sub-fields within their allocated portion in the DA to identify internal switching components. A location resolution server may be provided to store and distribute IP and MAC addresses and respond to local ARP requests on the local domain. | 06-21-2012 |
20120163381 | Multiple Label Based Processing of Frames - A method associated with particular embodiments comprises establishing a connection between a first node and a network composed of a plurality of nodes supporting a plurality of services. Each of the services is supported by at least one of the nodes. The method further includes receiving at a first node a frame from a second node of the plurality of nodes. The frame comprises at least two labels attached to the frame by the second node. The method also includes extracting a first label value and a second label value from the two labels. The method further includes determining that the frame was sent by the second node based on an extracted first label value and that the frame is associated with a first service based on the extracted second label value. The method additionally includes processing the frame based on both of the determinations. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163382 | Method and Arrangement for Transferring Data Packets - A method in an access device for handling data packets transferred between a user device and a communication services network. The access device receives a first data packet coming from the user device, the first data packet having a source address. Then, occurrence of service tag in the received packet is detected, where the service tag indicates a type of communication service. A packet handling rule is then determined for the source address based on the detected occurrence of service tag. Occurrence of service tag in any subsequent data packets referring to the source address or to a port the first packet was received on, is then handled according to the packet handling rule. Thereby, a flexible packet forwarding mechanism can be achieved in the access device for any types of connected user devices. Related access devices are also disclosed. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163383 | Method and device for transmitting data between two secured ethernet-type networks through a routed network - This method for transmitting data between a starting network and a receiving network through a transit network comprises, during a transmission of data comprised in at least one frame of a data link layer: encapsulation of the frame in at least one packet of a network layer compatible with the transit network, and transmission of each packet to the receiving network. Each packet is a secured packet, and the encapsulation step comprises the following steps: generating at least one security encapsulation header, forming at least one encapsulation packet comprising at least one of the security encapsulation header(s) and the frame or a fragment of the frame, forming each secured packet by applying at least one cryptographic protection to each encapsulation packet. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163384 | Packet Transport Node - A packet transport node that composes a transport network, the transport network transports networks that is composed with a communication protocol, the network transports networks is established logical paths used a routing protocol. The packet transport node forwards a user data packet and a routing protocol packet to an appropriate destination. The packet transport node learns correspondence between a logical path of a transport network and a MAC address based on a MAC header of a received packet and learns correspondence between a logical path of a transport network and a logical path used in other network by snooping a routing protocol packet. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163385 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO IMPROVE PERFORMANCE OF TCP OVER LARGE BANDWIDTH-DELAY-PRODUCT NETWORKS - The apparatus, systems, and methods described herein may operate to receive at least one data packet from a transmitter connected to a first network. A packet forwarding time may be scheduled for the at least one data packet. The at least one data packet may be forwarded to a receiver connected to a second network based on the packet forwarding time such that transmission of the at least one data packet prevents a buffer overflow at the receiver. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163386 | NAME-TO-ADDRESS MAPPING SYSTEM, DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND NAME-TO-ADDRESS MAPPING MAINTENANCE METHOD - The present invention discloses a name-to-address mapping system in a locator and identifier separation network. The system includes mapping nodes and access service nodes connected to each other through the network. The mapping node includes a transceiver module, a first storing module, a node determining module, a second storing module, and an address inquiring module. The present invention also discloses the corresponding method. In the present invention, the one-hop Distributed Hash Table (DHT) algorithm is used to generate a node routing table and a local mapping table whose performances are greatly improved when compared with the Content Addressable Network (CAN) algorithm, thus the phenomenon of the non-uniform distribution of mapping relations in mapping nodes caused by the operators assigning identities section-by-section can be avoided. | 06-28-2012 |
20120170580 | BANK AWARE MULTI-BIT TRIE - Embodiments of the invention include a method performed by a bank aware mtrie control module for distributing a plurality of mtrie levels across a plurality of memory banks. The bank aware mtrie control module identifies the plurality of memory banks present and identifies one or more mtrie blocks in one or more mtrie levels, each mtrie block is an array of mtrie nodes associated with an mtrie level. The bank aware mtrie control module stores each mtrie block in one of the plurality of memory banks, all mtrie nodes in a given mtrie block are stored in the same memory bank. For each subsequent mtrie level, the bank aware mtrie control module ensures that each of the mtrie blocks in that mtrie level is stored in one of the plurality of memory banks other than the memory bank storing mtrie blocks of an immediately previous mtrie level. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170581 | POLICY HOMOMORPHIC NETWORK EXTENSION - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: establishing a proxy device; establishing a connection between the proxy device and a local network device associated with the network group; configuring the local network device to: forward, to the proxy device, a first subset of received packets via the connection, wherein the first subset of received packets comprises packets destined for the remote node, and forward a second subset of received packets as though the second subset of packets were received directly from the remote node, wherein the second subset of received packets comprises packets received from the proxy device via the connection; and configuring the proxy device to: forward packets received from the local network device via the connection toward the remote node, and forward packets received from the remote node to the local network device via the connection. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170582 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMIC ROUTING IN A MULTIPROCESSOR NETWORK USING LOCAL CONGESTION SENSING - Adaptive packet routing is employed in a multiprocessor network configuration such as an InfiniBand switch architecture. Packets are routed from host to host through one or more switches. Upon receipt of a packet at a switch, the packet header is inspected to determine the destination host. A destination field in the header is used to index into a lookup table or other memory, which produces a route type and an output port grouping. Depending on the route type, one or more primary and secondary output port candidates are identified. An output port arbitration module chooses an output port from which to send a given packet, using congestion sensing inputs for the specified ports. A heuristic may include the congestion information that is provided to the arbitration module. Switching may be performed among minimal or non-minimal routes along each hop in the path, depending upon link and packet injection information. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170583 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, DATA TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, DATA RECEPTION APPARATUS, AND PACKET DATA STRUCTURE - A data transmission apparatus for sequentially transmitting data in units of packets each containing transmission data to the receiving end. The apparatus including a reception unit receiving the transmission data as an input signal, a packet formation unit receiving the transmission data, and forming an uncompressed packet in which predetermined transmission data is stored as uncompressed data, and a compressed packet in which at least a portion of transmission data that follows the predetermined transmission data is compressed and stored as compressed data. The apparatus also including a reference information management unit holding and managing as reference information related to the uncompressed packet, and a transmission unit transmitting the packets formed by the packet formation unit. The packet formation unit forming compressed data to be stored in a compressed packet, based on the transmission data of the uncompressed packet and the reference information. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170584 | APPARATUS FOR ANALYZING A DATA PACKET, A DATA PACKET PROCESSING SYSTEM AND A METHOD - An apparatus and method for analyzing a data packet, where the first and second information is derived relating to the data packet. The first information relates to a type of the data packet, a standard to which the data packet conforms and/or which data item(s) is/are present in the data packet. The first information is used for identifying a function into which the second information is input to generate third, and this third information is output together with at least part of the data packet. | 07-05-2012 |
20120177041 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUS FOR THE INTERCONNECTION OF FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET DEVICES - Methods, apparatus and systems are provided for forwarding Fibre Channel Initialization Protocol (FIP) frames and Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) frames by a FCoE device interconnection apparatus (FIA) and with a Fibre Channel over Ethernet device interconnection apparatus controller (FIAC). An FCoE frame received by the FIA from the FCoE device includes at least destination and source Ethernet MAC address fields which are replaced, such as where the destination Ethernet MAC address is replaced by the MAC address assigned to a remote FCoE device, such as the desired end port. The frame is forwarded to the destination FCoE device. Preferably, first and second ports are coupled to the connectivity apparatus, which are then coupled to first and second FCoE devices. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177042 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUS FOR THE INTERCONNECTION OF FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET DEVICES USING A FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET INTERCONNECTION APPARATUS CONTROLLER - Methods, apparatus and systems are provided for forwarding Fibre Channel Initialization Protocol (FIP) and Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) frames by a FCoE device interconnection apparatus (FIA) and a Fibre Channel over Ethernet device interconnection apparatus controller (FIAC). In one aspect of the invention, a command is sent from a FIAC to the FIA to set the frame processing apparatus to identify received FIP frames, which are forwarded with the original destination and source Ethernet Media Access Control (MAC) addresses. A command is sent from the FIAC to the FIA to identify received FCoE frames to replace the source and destination Ethernet MAC addresses. When a FCoE frame is received by the FIA, the source and destination Ethernet MAC addresses are replaced, such as where the destination Ethernet MAC address of the received matched FCoE frame is replaced by the MAC address assigned to the desired end port. The FCoE frame is forwarded to a destination FCoE device. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177043 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUS FOR THE SERVICING OF FIBRE CHANNEL FABRIC LOGIN FRAMES - Methods, apparatus and systems are provided for processing Fibre Channel Fabric Login frames by a FCoE device interconnection apparatus (FIA) and a FCoE device interconnection apparatus controller (FIAC). A Fabric Login (FLOGI) Fibre Channel frame is encapsulated into a Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) FIP FLOGI frame at a Fibre Channel device interconnection apparatus (FIA). The encapsulated frame is transmitted from the FIA to a FCoE device interconnection apparatus controller (FIAC). A FIP link service accept (LS_ACC) frame is transmitted by the FIAC to the FIA, and the FIP LS_ACC frame is received by the FIA. The FIP frame is decapsulated into a Fibre Channel LS_ACC frame at the FIA. The Fibre Channel LS_ACC frame is transmitted back to the said Fibre Channel device. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177044 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUS FOR THE INTERCONNECTION OF FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET DEVICES USING SHORTEST PATH BRIDGING - Methods, apparatus and systems are provided for forwarding Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) frames over a Shortest Path Bridged network with a FCoE device interconnection apparatus (FIA). A FCoE frame is received from a FCoE device, the frame including at least destination Ethernet MAC address and source Ethernet MAC address fields. The destination Ethernet MAC address of the incoming frame is replaced with the MAC address of the remote FCoE device as determined by the Fibre Channel destination address identifier in the received FCoE frame. The source Ethernet MAC address of the incoming frame is replaced. The frame is encapsulated in a MAC header. The frame is forwarded to an egress FCoE device interconnection apparatus (FIA). Thereafter, the outer MAC header of the received frame is decapsulated into a FCoE frame. The decapsulated frame is forwarded to an attached FCoE device with the original destination and source Ethernet MAC addresses. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177045 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUS FOR THE INTERCONNECTION OF FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET DEVICES USING A TRILL NETWORK - Methods, apparatus and systems are provided for forwarding Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) frames over a TRILL network by a FCoE device interconnection apparatus (FIA). A FCoE frame is received from a FCoE device at the FIA. The frame includes at least destination Ethernet MAC address and source Ethernet MAC address fields. The destination Ethernet MAC address of the incoming frame is replaced with the MAC address of the remote FCoE device as determined by the Fibre Channel destination address identifier in the received FCoE frame. The source Ethernet MAC address of the incoming frame is replaced. The frame is encapsulated in a TRILL header. The frame is forwarded to an egress FCoE device interconnection apparatus (FIA). The frame is then decapsulated into a FCoE frame, which is forwarded to an attached FCoE device with the original destination and source Ethernet MAC addresses. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177046 | NETWORK NODE - In a network node, when highly sophisticated processing such as filtering is implemented, a phenomenon in which, as the processing becomes more highly sophisticated, a time required for the processing becomes long, and as a result, a delay time of packet forwarding is prolonged, is prevented from occurring. The network node of the present invention performs packet forwarding control for controlling a destination of a packet in parallel with packet forwarding processing for searching for the destination, so that the network node realizes high-speed packet forwarding processing while performing forwarding control by packet monitoring. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177047 | NETWORK DEVICE WITH A PROGRAMMABLE CORE - In network device, a plurality of ports is configured to receive and to transmit packets on a network. A packet processing pipeline includes a plurality of hardware stages, wherein at least one hardware stage is configured to output a data structure comprising a field extracted from a received packet based on a first packet processing operation performed on the packet or the data structure, wherein the data structure is associated with the packet. A configurable processor is coupled to the at least one hardware stage of the packet processing pipeline. The configurable processor is configured to modify the field in the data structure to generate a modified data structure and to pass the modified data structure to a subsequent hardware stage that is configured to perform a second packet processing operation on the data structure using the field modified by the configurable processor. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177048 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - One embodiment provides a communication apparatus including: a first storage which stores connection information and an address; a connection information reading portion which reads connection information from the first storage upon reception of a packet transmission start instruction; a header generating portion which generates a header of a packet from the read connection information; a second storage which stores data at the address; and a data reading portion which reads data corresponding to the read connection information from the second storage, wherein the connection information reading portion is constituted by a first hardware, wherein the header generating and data reading portions are constituted by a second hardware, and wherein, while the data reading portion is reading data of a first packet or while the header generating portion is generating a header of the first packet, the connection information reading portion reads connection information of a second packet. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177049 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING NETWORK INTERCOMMUNICATION - A method for network intercommunication is disclosed. The method includes a step of a Locator/ID Separation Protocol (LISP) communication end transmitting a data packet to an internet communication end. Another method for implementing network intercommunication and a corresponding system are also disclosed. The methods and system realize data intercommunication between the existing internet and the LISP network, and extends the applicable scope of the service. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177050 | SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE - According to one embodiment, a semiconductor device includes a device. The device includes a decoder, a generation circuit, a register, and a modifier. The decoder analyzes a command of a received packet. The generation circuit generates a unique device number in accordance with information in the packet. The register holds the generated unique device number. The modifier updates and outputs the packet. When a packet issued by a host is a command packet, among broadcast packets which return to the host through one or more devices, for determining the unique device number, the command packet includes parameters of an initial value and final value of device number. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177051 | DATA FORWARDING METHOD, DATA PROCESSING METHOD, SYSTEM AND RELEVANT DEVICES - A data forwarding method, a system and relevant devices are provided. The data forwarding method includes: obtaining, by a forwarding device, a packet; matching the packet with a preset stream forwarding table if the packet is not a long-session stream identifier packet, forwarding the packet according to a table entry if the table entry is matched, and sending the packet to a packet processing engine for processing if no table entry is matched; and maintaining the stream forwarding table according to the long-session stream identifier packet if the packet is a long-session stream identifier packet. A data forwarding system and relevant devices are also provided. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177052 | USER-ORIENTED COMMUNICATION METHOD, ROUTE REGISTRATION METHOD AND DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present disclosure disclose a user-oriented communication method, a route registration method and device, and a communication system. In the method, a first domain router receives a first data packet sent by a first terminal. The first data packet includes a user identifier of a first user and a user identifier of a second user, the first terminal belongs to the first user, and a second terminal belongs to the second user. The first domain router queries for a second domain router connected to the second terminal according to the user identifier of the second user and sends the first data packet to the second domain router, so that the second domain router sends the first data packet to the second terminal. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177053 | Method, System and Apparatus for Transmitting Data - The present invention discloses a method, a system and an apparatus for transmitting data, which are applied in an identification identifier locater separation network, the method includes: a source terminal sending a first data packet to a source Access Support Node (ASN), and taking an Access Identity (AID) of the source terminal and the AID of a destination terminal as a source address and a destination address of the first data packet respectively; the source ASN, after receiving the first data packet, if a Routing Identifier (RID) corresponding to the AID of the destination terminal is not queried out locally, encapsulating the first data packet which is as a payload data packet to a second data packet by using Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) format, and adding a GRE packet header and a delivery protocol packet header; and the source ASN sending the second data packet to a mapping forwarding plane, which queries the RID corresponding to the AID of the destination terminal and sends the first data packet to the destination ASN according to the queried RID. The present invention realizes a high data forwarding performance, and a network processor may be used to process, the encapsulation format is easy to extend, and the edition is convenient to upgrade. | 07-12-2012 |
20120182992 | HYPERVISOR ROUTING BETWEEN NETWORKS IN A VIRTUAL NETWORKING ENVIRONMENT - A physical host executes a virtual machine monitor (VMM) that instantiates a source virtual machine (VM). In response to the VMM receiving from the source VM a packet specifying a first destination address of a destination VM and a second destination address of a default gateway, the VMM determines whether the packet can be communicated to the destination VM without the packet being routed by the default gateway. In response to the VMM determining that the packet can be communicated to the destination VM without the packet being routed by the default gateway, the VMM forwards the packet to the destination VM such that the packet bypasses routing by the default gateway. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182993 | HYPERVISOR APPLICATION OF SERVICE TAGS IN A VIRTUAL NETWORKING ENVIRONMENT - A physical host executes a virtual machine monitor (VMM) in communication with a plurality of consumer virtual machines (VMs). In response to receipt of a packet, the VMM determines whether a service is to be performed for the packet by a service virtual machine (VM) in communication with the VMM. In response to determining that the service is to be performed for the packet by the service VM, the VMM applies a tag to the packet that differentiates the packet from any other packet sharing a common address with the packet but having a different associated consumer, passes the packet to the service VM for performance of the service, and thereafter removes the tag from the packet in response to receipt of the packet from the service VM following performance of the service. In response to receipt of the packet from the service VM, the VMM forwards the packet. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182994 | ADDRESS COMPATIBILITY IN A NETWORK DEVICE RELOAD - In one embodiment, a network device maintains address compatibility in a reload. The reload results from a reconnect event such as a reboot or a software upgrade. Before the reload, the network device establishes communication using a first address prefix. Because of the reload, the first address prefix is cleared from the network device. The service provider may provide a second address prefix. Rather than advertise the second address prefix, the network device waits for traffic from the hosts. If the hosts continue to use the first address prefix, the network device requests the first address prefix be re-assigned by the service provider. If the service provider does not re-assign the first address prefix, the network device may advertise the first address prefix in a router advertisement including a relatively short preferred lifetime. The short preferred lifetime prevents the use of the old address prefix. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182995 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DATA TRANSMISSION - A method for data transmission includes: a router receives a data packet sent by an access device of a first user, where the data packet carries target device selection information including at least a user identity of a second user, and the user identity is associated with at least one access device of the second user; the router obtains a routing address of an optimal access device among access devices associated with the user identity; and the router sends the data packet to the optimal access device according to the routing address. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182996 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR VIRTUAL CIRCUIT ROUTES - A method and apparatus for virtual circuit routes is described. A method in a network element comprises associating a virtual circuit to a layer | 07-19-2012 |
20120189008 | Method for transmitting and configuring a data packet in a network - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting a data packet in a network, wherein the data packet has a header field containing header data relevant to transmission and a user field, wherein at least one data field containing header data of a first header data type is provided in the header field, and wherein the data packet is transmitted from a transmitter device to a receiver device. In order to make possible a transmission of additional information in the header field without a loss of already existing header data information and without expanding the header data structure, it is proposed according to the invention that in the at least one data field, in addition to the header data of the first header data type, header data of at least one second header data type are also transmitted. | 07-26-2012 |
20120189009 | METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATED TO ROUTE SELECTION WITHIN A NETWORK - In some embodiments, an apparatus includes a first network device configured to receive, from a second network device, a first forwarding-state packet associated with a peripheral processing device and having a first generation identifier. The first network device is configured to receive, from a third network device, a second forwarding-state packet associated with the peripheral processing device and having a second generation identifier. The first network device is configured to implement forwarding-state information included in the first forwarding-state packet based on a comparison of the first generation identifier and the second generation identifier. | 07-26-2012 |
20120189010 | Method for transmitting broadcast service, method for receiving the broadcasting service, and apparatus for receiving the broadcasting service - Provided is a method for receiving a broadcast service. The method includes: receiving a first packetized stream; extracting presentation time information from a header of the first packetized stream; extracting trigger information comprising a target service identifier and a trigger action from a payload of the first packetized stream; and performing the trigger action to an object corresponding to the target service identifier at a time indicated by presentation time information. | 07-26-2012 |
20120189011 | A COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication apparatus comprises: a memory unit which correlates a label assigned to a packet and an address of a source of the packet, and memorizes them as an entry; a receiving unit which receives a packet from a network; a learning unit which judges whether or not there exists an entry corresponding to the received packet in the memory unit, and in case there exists no entry corresponding to the received packet in the memory unit, stores a label assigned to the received packet and an address of a source of the received packet in the memory unit; and a processing unit which, in case there exists an entry corresponding to the received packet in the memory unit, assigns an address corresponding to the received packet to the received packet. | 07-26-2012 |
20120189012 | Providing Point To Point Communications Among Compute Nodes In A Global Combining Network Of A Parallel Computer - Methods, apparatus, and products are disclosed for providing point to point data communications among compute nodes in a global combining network of a parallel computer that include: determining a class route identifier available for all of the nodes along a communications path from an origin node to a target node; configuring network hardware of each node along the communications path with routing instructions in dependence upon the available class route identifier and the network's topology; transmitting, by the origin node along the communications path, a network packet to the target node, including encoding the available class route identifier in the network packet; and routing, by the network hardware of each node along the communications path, the network packet to the target node in dependence upon the routing instructions for each node and the available class route identifier. | 07-26-2012 |
20120195314 | Destination-Based Virtual Channel Assignment in On-Chip Ring Networks - An apparatus comprising a plurality of nodes and a plurality of links connecting the nodes in a ring topology, wherein a first node from among the plurality of nodes is coupled to a first link from among the plurality of links, wherein the first link comprises a plurality of virtual channels, and wherein each of the plurality of virtual channels is assigned to provide service to a unique one of the plurality of nodes. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195315 | INFORMATION PACKET COMMUNICATION WITH VIRTUAL OBJECTS - Modules and methods that provide virtual device communication via information packets addressed to the virtual devices. Virtual devices aggregate capabilities of target devices and represent the aggregate as an operational device to remote systems. Physical device elements and virtual devices contained within modules are able to communicate and cooperate over extended distances in a peer-to-peer fashion via a virtual bus tunnel offering addressing and data transport functionality. Such modules and methods can be combined with disk drives to form RAID-like storage structures. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195316 | Method for identifying next hop - Datalink frames or networking packets contain protocol information in the header and optionally in the trailer of a frame or a packet. We are proposing a method in which part of or all of the protocol information corresponding to a frame or a packet is transmitted separately in another datalink frame. The “Separately Transmitted Protocol Information” is referred to as STPI. The STPI contains enough protocol information to identify the next hop node or port. STPI can be used avoid network congestion and improve link efficiency. Preferably, there will be one datalink frame or network packet corresponding to each STPI, containing the data and the rest of the protocol information and this frame/packet is referred to as DFoNP. The creation of STPI and DFoNP is done by the originator of the frame or packet such as an operating system. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195317 | PACKET DATA MODIFICATION PROCESSOR - A programmable processor configured to perform one or more packet modifications through execution of one or more commands. A pipelined processor core comprises a first stage configured to selectively shift and mask data in each of a plurality of categories in response to one or more decoded commands, and combine the selectively shifted and masked data in each of the categories. The pipelined processor core further comprises a second stage configured to selectively perform one or more operations on the combined data from the first stage and other data responsive to the one or more decoded commands. In one implementation, the processor is implemented as an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC). | 08-02-2012 |
20120195318 | INFORMATION SYSTEM, CONTROL SERVER, VIRTUAL NETWORK MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A control server is connected to a plurality of physical nodes that keep control information defining an operation to be taken in accordance with input/output packet characteristics and process the input/output packets according to the control information. The control server includes a first storage unit that stores configuration information about a virtual network configured to include virtual nodes that are virtualized versions of the physical nodes, and a second storage unit that stores virtual network identifying information identifying the virtual network from characteristics of an input packet, and the control server identifies a physical node that configures a virtual network that handles a packet having a characteristic in common with the packet received by the physical node based on a request from the physical node and updates control information for each physical node. | 08-02-2012 |
20120201247 | Metro Ethernet Network With Scaled Broadcast And Service Instance Domains - A method of operation for a provider edge device of a core network includes receiving a customer frame from an access network; the customer frame having a first Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) tag of a first predetermined bit length. The first VLAN tag including a service instance identifier. The service instance identifier of the first VLAN tag is then mapped into a second VLAN tag of a second predetermined bit length greater than the first predetermined bit length. It is emphasized that this abstract is provided to comply with the rules requiring an abstract that will allow a searcher or other reader to quickly ascertain the subject matter of the technical disclosure. It is submitted with the understanding that it will not be used to interpret or limit the scope or meaning of the claims. | 08-09-2012 |
20120207161 | NETWORK MULTI-PATH DISCOVERY - Potential paths between a source and destination of a network are identified based on trace-route information, then filtered to eliminate paths or links that are not supported by ancillary information associated with the network so as to identify feasible/actual paths between the source and destination. The ancillary information includes, for example, routing tables and ARP tables. If a feasible path cannot be identified based on the ancillary information, supplemental information regarding nodes further along the potential path is assessed to provide a basis for inferring the nodes that may provide a feasible path. The determined feasible paths are displayed for review, and provided to serve as filters for subsequent path-analysis tools. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207162 | TRACEBACK PACKET TRANSPORT PROTOCOL - Tokens identifying all of the physical routing devices, i.e., network nodes, through which a packet travels are recorded in a limited amount of space reserved in the header of the packet for such tokens. When insufficient space remains in the header of the packet for all tokens required to identify all physical routing devices through which the packet travels, sequences of multiple tokens are replaced with an abbreviation token representing the sequence. The sequence of tokens represented by an abbreviation token can also be abbreviation tokens, supporting recursive abbreviation of the token sequence in the header of the packet as needed to record the entire route of the packet through the network regardless of the limited space in the header for tracking the route of the packet. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207163 | FRAME DELIVERY PATH SELECTION IN HYBRID COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A hybrid network device can implement a frame delivery path selection mechanism for communicating with other network devices in a hybrid communication network. In one embodiment, the hybrid network device determines a preferred network interface among a plurality of network interfaces of the hybrid network device for communicating with a second network device. The hybrid network device determines an address associated with the preferred network interface of the hybrid network device. The hybrid network device transmits an address announcement message comprising an indication of the address associated with the preferred network interface from the hybrid network device to the second network device to cause the second network device to use the address associated with the preferred network interface for communicating with the hybrid network device. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207164 | PATH GENERATING METHOD, RELAY DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PRODUCT - On a network formed by multiple nodes, a shortest path is generated between an ingress node and an egress node. When a packet is transmitted from the ingress to the egress node, in addition to the packet being transmitted from the port to the shortest path, the packet is flooded from the other ports excluding the port to the shortest path, whereby nodes that are among the nodes forming the network and not on the shortest path automatically generate according to a conventional first-in, first-learned scheme, a path that is shortest in the network excluding the shortest path, i.e., a redundant path that shares no links or nodes with the shortest path. Therefore, the operator can automatically generate a redundant path by merely specifying the ingress node and the egress node. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207165 | System and Method for Using a Multi-Protocol Fabric Module Across a Distributed Server Interconnect Fabric - A multi-protocol personality module enabling load/store from remote memory, remote DMA transactions, and remote interrupts, which permits enhanced performance, power utilization and functionality. In one form, the module is used as a node in a network fabric and adds a routing header to packets entering the fabric, maintains the routing header for efficient node-to-node transport, and strips the header when the packet leaves the fabric. In particular, a remote bus personality component is described. Several use cases of the Remote Bus Fabric Personality Module are disclosed: 1) memory sharing across a fabric connected set of servers; 2) the ability to access physically remote I/O devices across this fabric of connected servers; and 3) the sharing of such physically remote I/O devices, such as storage peripherals, by multiple fabric connected servers. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207166 | ADDRESSING A WORKLOAD PARTITION - A method for addressing a workload partition is provided in the illustrative embodiments. A packet of data directed to the WPAR and including a combined address is received at a software stack. A determination is made whether the combined address includes an identifier that is reserved. If the identifier is not reserved, the identifier is used to identify the WPAR in the data processing system and the packet is sent to the WPAR. The software stack is an application configured to enable data communication using a protocol of the packet, and is modified to detect, recognize, and process the combined address for routing the packet to the WPAR. The combined address may be logically formed using an identifier associated with the data processing system and an identifier associated with the WPAR, which may be located in different portions of the packet. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207167 | METHOD OF SEARCHING FOR HOST IN IPV6 NETWORK - A method of searching for a host in a network using IPv4 network comprises the steps of requesting host information, including link-layer address information and IP address information about an IP to be searched for, by sending a Neighbor Solicitation (NS) packet in which the IP to be searched for is set in an ICMPv6 target address to the network, after sending the NS packet, waiting for a predetermined time by taking a processing speed of a host and a transfer rate according to a network environment and state into consideration, after the predetermined time of waiting, determining whether a Neighbor Advertisement (NA) packet of the IP to be searched for has been received, and if, as a result of the determination, the NA packet of the IP to be searched for is determined to have been received, acquiring the host information from the NA packet. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207168 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR ROUTING DATA PACKETS BETWEEN IPv4 AND IPv6 NETWORKS - A data packet routing system is provided wherein: at least one terminal belonging to a private IPv4 network is connected to a gateway itself connected to an IPv6 network; at least one interface device at the interface between said IPv6 network and a public IPv4 network implements a translation function comprising exchanging a private IPv4 address with a public IPv4 address. The gateway allocates to the terminal an IPv6 address by providing an IPv6 prefix with the private IPv4 address of the terminal in its private IPv4 network; said gateway verifying whether IPv4 address conflict exists, and if IPv4 it does exist, for replacing said private IPv4 address locally with a substitute private IPv4 address. A method is provided that routes an IPv4 data packet sent by a source terminal belonging to a first IPv4 domain via an IPv6 domain to a destination terminal belonging to a second IPv4 domain. | 08-16-2012 |
20120213225 | Packet Switching Label Assignment Across Multiple Packet Switching Forwarding Groups - In one embodiment, a packet switching device assigns a same particular packet switching label to each particular route of a plurality of particular routes having the same one or more best paths, wherein the plurality of particular routes includes routes from at least two different forwarding groups. A forwarding group is defined as a specific route, one or more routes associated with a same customer edge router, or one or more routes associated with a single virtual routing and forwarding domain (VRF). The packet switching device advertises to other packet switching device(s) to add this same particular label to packets having one of the plurality of particular routes, which they do. The packet switching device then packet switches packets based on the particular label received in a label field in a header of these packets. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213226 | PROCESSING DATA PACKET TRAFFIC IN A DISTRIBUTED ROUTER ARCHITECTURE - Embodiments of the invention are directed to efficiently processing packet traffic in a system such as a switch or router having a distributed architecture. An internal header is appended to an ingress packet by an ingress packet processing device before the packet is forwarded to a fabric switch of the system. The internal header corresponds to a configuration of an ingress interface over which the packet was received. An egress packet processing device, upon receiving the packet from the switch, processes the packet based on the internal header and a configuration of an egress interface associated with the egress device. Advantageously, some packet tag manipulation operations are performed only at the egress packet processing device; thereby somewhat freeing up ingress packet processing resources. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213227 | Method and System for Routing Information in a Network - A method and system for determining an optimal route from a node to a given sink node in a network is described. Sink node periodically transmits routing information containing an indicator of recency. This indicator of recency is periodically updated. Routing information is received by a plurality of nodes in the network. Each node receiving routing information compares the indicator of recency contained in the routing information with an indicator of recency stored at the node to determine whether the received routing information is more recent than the stored routing information. An optimal route to the sink node is determined based on this comparison. Each node also periodically transmits routing information based on stored routing information to other nodes. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213228 | Packet Flow Offload to Remote Destination with Routing Bypass - A network utilizes centralized control for the transport of a packet flow to a destination via an intermediary network. The network identifies the intermediary network best suited for offloading the packet flow and then develops a routing policy based on Multiprotocol Label Switching or other circuit-switching type techniques. This ensures that the packets of the packet flow are automatically forwarded to a peering router connected to the identified intermediary network, and ensures that the peering router automatically outputs the packets of the packet flow to the identified intermediary network in a manner that bypasses autonomous routing decisions by the routers of the network. | 08-23-2012 |
20120218999 | Method and Apparatus for Identifier Correlation - A method of identifier correlation in a communications network, the network comprising: an identifier translator, for translating at least one identifier of a communications packet, wherein a packet which has passed through the identifier translator comprises translated and untranslated identifiers; the method comprising:
| 08-30-2012 |
20120219000 | NETWORK SWITCH WITH MUTUALLY COUPLED LOOK-UP ENGINE AND NETWORK PROCESSOR - A network switch includes a look-up engine for obtaining associated data in response to a header portion of a packet and an interlinked network processor such as a RISC for performing a processing function on the header portion or the associated data. Both look-up engine and the network processor may modify a destination port bitmask. The network processor may implement additional packet header processing required for replication or server load balancing. | 08-30-2012 |
20120219001 | SEPARATION OF DATA AND CONTROL IN A SWITCHING DEVICE - A method and apparatus for switching a data packet between a source and destination in a network. The data packet includes a header portion and a data portion. The header portion includes routing information for the data packet. The method includes defining a data path in the router comprising a path through the router along which the data portion of the data packet travels and defining a control path comprising a path through the router along which routing information from the header portion travels. The method includes separating the data path and control path in the router such that the routing information can be separated from the data portion allowing for the separate processing of each in the router. The data portion can be stored in a global memory while routing decisions are made on the routing information in the control path. | 08-30-2012 |
20120219002 | NETWORK PROCESSORS AND PIPELINE OPTIMIZATION METHODS - A network processor of an embodiment includes a packet classification engine, a processing pipeline, and a controller. The packet classification engine allows for classifying each of a plurality of packets according to packet type. The processing pipeline has a plurality of stages for processing each of the plurality of packets in a pipelined manner, where each stage includes one or more processors. The controller allows for providing the plurality of packets to the processing pipeline in an order that is based at least partially on: (i) packet types of the plurality of packets as classified by the packet classification engine and (ii) estimates of processing times for processing packets of the packet types at each stage of the plurality of stages of the processing pipeline. A method in a network processor allows for prefetching instructions into a cache for processing a packet based on a packet type of the packet. | 08-30-2012 |
20120224578 | TUNNEL GATEWAY MANAGED CACHING ARCHITECTURE - In an access network, a tunnel gateway (TGW) managed network caching architecture is proposed. The proposed TGW receives a terminal request directed to a data server for a flow of data. The terminal request is forwarded to the TGW through a tunnel from a tunnel endpoint located below the TGW. The TGW selects a network cache to handle the data traffic of the flow requested by the requesting terminal. The TGW then redirects the terminal request to the selected network cache to provide the requested service. The TGW redirects the terminal request through a tunnel whose endpoint is the selected network cache. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224579 | Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Virtual Private Network (VPN) Over Routed Ethernet Backbone - In at least some embodiments, a network includes a plurality of switches and/or routers configured to implement a native Ethernet routing protocol that encapsulates virtual private network (VPN) traffic with an encapsulation attachment point Ethernet source address, with a de-encapsulation attachment point Ethernet destination address, and with a service label that uniquely identifies the VPN within the network. A single link state protocol such as IS-IS is used to carry network topology and service attachment point information. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224580 | ADDRESSING METHOD AND COMMUNICATION NETWORK HAVING SUCH AN ADDRESSING METHOD - A method retrieves subscriber identifications in a communication network having multiple subscribers which are connected to a ring-shaped transmission path. A first telegram is outputted onto the ring-shaped transmission path which comprises a sequence of telegram fields, wherein each subscriber is allocated a telegram field for entering its subscriber identification and each subscriber checks during the passing-through of the first telegram if the subscriber identification field allocated to the subscriber is vacant, and upon detecting a vacant subscriber identification field enters its subscriber identification. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224581 | STEERING FRAGMENTED IP PACKETS USING 5-TUPLE BASED RULES - A method, system, and/or computer program product steers Internet Protocol (IP) packet fragments. A switch receives a first IP packet fragment that contains a 3-tuple in its header. In response to determining that the first IP packet fragment is not a lead packet fragment in the series of IP packet fragments, the first IP packet fragment is pushed onto a data stack. The switch subsequently receives a second IP packet fragment that contains a 5-tuple, which includes the 3-tuple from the first IP packet fragment plus a source port and destination port used by the second IP packet fragment. The 3-tuple is mapped to the 5-tuple in a fragmentation table, thus enabling both the first IP packet fragment and the second IP packet fragment to be steered to the destination port to which the second IP packet fragment is being sent. | 09-06-2012 |
20120230334 | MESSAGE FORWARDING TOWARD A SOURCE END NODE IN A CONVERGED NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A network node that forwards traffic of a converged network received from a source end node receives a second message addressed to the network node, but intended for the source end node. The second message includes at least a portion of a first message originated by the source end node and previously forwarded by the network node. The network node extracts from the first message a source identifier of the source end node in a first communication protocol and determines by reference to a data structure a destination address of the second message in a second communication protocol. The network node modifies the second message to include the destination address and forwards the second message toward the source end node in accordance with the destination address. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230335 | TRAFFIC DISTRIBUTION ACROSS A PLURALITY OF ATTACHMENT CIRCUITS OF A MULTIHOMED SITE - In one embodiment, an edge device of a core network may receive a plurality of packets from a peripheral network having a plurality of active connections to the core network, where each packet has a destination address and a source address. The edge device may compute a hash on the destination address or the source address of each packet, and determine whether the computed hash corresponds to the edge device. In response to the computed hash not corresponding to the edge device, the edge device may drop the packet, and in response to the computed hash corresponding to the edge device, the edge device may process the packet to forward the packet, where the dropping and processing load balances the plurality of packets over the active connections and prevents formation of loops in the core network. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230336 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A server associates a permitted terminal identifier that identifies a permitted terminal permitted to perform tunnel communication to a first router with an endpoint address of a tunnel used in the communication of a permitted terminal. A second router that encapsulates a packet received from a requesting terminal, which requests the tunnel communication, inquires the server about an endpoint address associated with an identifier of the requesting terminal. The server notifies the second router of the target address that is the endpoint address associated with the identifier of the requesting terminal. The second router transmits the encapsulated packet to the target address. The first router to which the target address is allocated regards a received packet received at the target address as a packet used in the tunnel communication of the permitted terminal and decapsulates the received packet and then transmits the decapsulated packet to a communication destination. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230337 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PACKET CALL SETUP - An IP packet forwarding server forwards an IP data packet between a user terminal and a machine-type communications (MTC) device allocated with a private internet protocol (IP). Such an IP packet forwarding server allocates a call identifier for connection between the user terminal and the MTC device, sets up a packet call to the MTC device and the user terminal using the call identifier, obtains packet forwarding information while setting up the packet call to the MTC device and the user terminal, and forwards an IP data packet between the MTC device and the user terminal using the packet forwarding information. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230338 | BIOLOGICAL DATA NETWORKS AND METHODS THEREFOR - A network node including a network interface and a packet generator in communication with the network interface is disclosed. The packet generator is configured to generate a data packet including a first header containing network routing information, a second header containing header information pertaining to the biological sequence data, and a payload containing a representation of the biological sequence data relative to a reference sequence. The network node further includes a queue in communication with the network interface, the data packet being stored within the queue. The network node also includes a transmit controller for controlling transmission of the data packet over a network accessible through the network interface. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230339 | BIOLOGICAL DATA NETWORKS AND METHODS THEREFOR - A system and method of transmitting and receiving information pertaining to biological sequence data is disclosed. The method includes receiving, at a network interface of a node of a network, a data packet including a first header containing network routing information and a second header associated with a layered model representative of the biological sequence data. The method also includes parsing the data packet and separating the first header from the second header. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230340 | MESSAGE FORWARDING TOWARD A SOURCE END NODE IN A CONVERGED NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A network node that forwards traffic of a converged network received from a source end node receives a second message addressed to the network node, but intended for the source end node. The second message includes at least a portion of a first message originated by the source end node and previously forwarded by the network node. The network node extracts from the first message a source identifier of the source end node in a first communication protocol and determines by reference to a data structure a destination address of the second message in a second communication protocol. The network node modifies the second message to include the destination address and forwards the second message toward the source end node in accordance with the destination address. | 09-13-2012 |
20120236859 | METHOD & APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING A LINK AGGREGATION GROUP ON A STACKED SWITCH - Two network switches are configured in a stacked relationship to each other and include link aggregation sub-layer functionality. Switching tables are programmed on each switch with information used to forward packets ingressing to them over a redundant LAG that is identified in the switching table by a port that is a member of the redundant LAG. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236860 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RAPID REROUTING OF LDP PACKETS - A u-turn fast rerouting capability is depicted and described herein. A packet that is intended for a destination node is propagated from a first node toward a second node. The first node propagates the packet toward the second node based on selection of a first routing path for routing the packet from the first node toward the destination node. The second node, upon receiving the packet, determines that the packet cannot be delivered to the destination node via the first routing path. The second node inserts a u-turn label into the packet and returns the packet to the first node. The u-turn label indicates to the first node that the packet is being returned to the first node by the second node due to a condition preventing propagation of the packet toward the destination node using the first routing path. The first node, upon receiving the packet including the u-turn label, then selects a second routing path for routing the packet toward the destination node and propagates the packet toward the destination node based on the second routing path. The u-turn fast rerouting capability enables fast rerouting of packets in a manner preventing dropping of packets and preventing formation of forwarding loops. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236861 | BIOLOGICAL DATA NETWORKS AND METHODS THEREFOR - A network node for facilitating the conveyance of information pertaining to biological sequence data within a network is disclosed herein. The network node includes a packet generator configured to generate a data packet including a first header containing network routing information and a second header with attributes associated with a layered data model of existing knowledge representative of the biological sequence data. The network node also includes a network interface for transmitting the data packet to at least one of a client device and another network node. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236862 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND DATA TRANSFER METHOD - There is provided a communication device to transfer a received packet to a data terminal device, the communication device being coupled to the data terminal device in a wire or wireless system, the communication device including: a determining unit configured to determine whether or not a compression state of a compressed header added to the packet is a predetermined compression state; and a transfer unit configured to transfer the compressed header to the data terminal device and to transmit an activation request signal used on case of activating a routing module using an RoHC algorithm to the data terminal device including the routing module, when the compression state of the compressed header is the predetermined compression state, or to decompress the compressed header and to transmit the decompressed header to the data terminal device, when the compression state of the compressed header is not the predetermined compression state. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236863 | DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PREVENTING PACKET PROLIFERATION IN A MULTI-DEVICE LINK AGGREGATION NETWORK - A Provider Edge PE | 09-20-2012 |
20120236864 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING IPV6 PACKET - The present disclosure discloses a method, device, and system for processing an IPv6 packet, and relates to the field of Internet technologies. According to the present disclosure, a secure access, authentication, and authorization can be ensured in an IPv6 network, and different IPv6 address prefixes are allocated to different terminals. Therefore, normal routing in the network is ensured. A method for processing an IPv6 packet provided in an embodiment of the present disclosure includes: an access node adds access line information to an IPv6 packet; and forwards the IPv6 packet that is added with the access line information to an IP edge node. The present disclosure is applicable to a scenario of processing a packet in an IPv6 network. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236865 | CONTENTION FREE PIPELINED BROADCASTING WITHIN A CONSTANT BISECTION BANDWIDTH NETWORK TOPOLOGY - In an interconnection network, multiple nodes are connected to one of a first layer of switches. The first layer of switches is connected to one another through a second layer of switches. Each of the nodes is connected through one of multiple shared links connecting the first layer switches and the second layer of switches. A pipelined broadcast manager schedules a hierarchical pipelined broadcast through at least one switch of the first layer switches comprising non-root nodes by selecting two nodes among the non-root nodes connected to the at least one switch and scheduling each of multiple broadcast steps for the pipelined broadcast with at least one of an inter-switch broadcast phase and an intra-switch broadcast phase using the selected two nodes. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236866 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Provided is a communication system which is provided with a plurality of communication devices and transfers a packet between the plurality of communication devices through a communication path. When a packet is looped back at any of the communication devices on the communication path to verify connectivity of the communication path, a first communication device of the plurality of communication devices stores, in a first region of header information of the packet, first information for designating the communication device at which the packet is looped back, further stores, in a second region of the header information of the packet, second information on a loopback point in the designated communication device at which the packet is looped back, and sends the packet to which the first information and the second information have been added. | 09-20-2012 |
20120243538 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRE-CLASSIFYING PACKETS - The disclosed embodiments relate to a system that provides an intelligent port infrastructure for communication network devices. This is accomplished by incorporating a highly configurable pre-classifier module into the port infrastructure. This pre-classifier makes it possible to realign packet data to add a configurable number of bytes to the front of the packet, and also to select interesting data from incoming packets for further analysis. The selected data is sent into a configurable classification engine, which generates instructions that specify how to determine associated packet attributes. The packet attributes are then generated based on the instructions, and are forwarded along with the packet to downstream processing units. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243539 | USAGE OF MASKED ETHERNET ADDRESSES BETWEEN TRANSPARENT INTERCONNECT OF LOTS OF LINKS (TRILL) ROUTING BRIDGES - Techniques herein include systems and methods that extend functionality of transport networks including Transparent Interconnect of Lots of Links (TRILL) networks. Techniques include using a portion of information within transport device address encapsulation headers for purposes other than identifying source and destination device addresses. The system masks a portion of bits in an address header for an address lookup in forwarding tables of a transport network node. The remaining bits in the address field(s) become free bits that can be used for a variety of application purposes, such as flow identifier selection. By using information fields that already exist in encapsulation headers, such techniques provide additional information without increasing packet size or requiring new protocols. Embodiments can combine Equal-cost multi-path routing (ECMP) functionality, Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF) checks, and Time to live (TTL) protection at the same time. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243540 | METHOD FOR OFFLOADING PACKET SEGMENTATIONS AND DEVICE USING THE SAME - A method for offloading packet segmentations includes the steps of retrieving a packet segmentation offloading parameter in a packet and segmenting the packet into a plurality of sub-packets by taking consideration the packet segmentation offloading parameter. A device for offloading packet segmentations includes a packet parser configured to receive a packet to be transmitted, a header buffer controller configured to retrieve a header of the packet and connected to a buffer to access the header, an extractor configured to retrieve a packet segmentation offloading parameter in the packet, and a segmentation module configured to segment the packet into a plurality of sub-packets by taking consideration the header and the packet segmentation offloading parameter. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243541 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An apparatus includes a first processing unit to judge, whether the route information storing unit stores a second next destination address; a second processing unit to judge whether a received packet includes an message authentication code, in the case where the route-information storing unit stores the second next destination address; a third processing unit to judge whether the key-information storing unit stores a second shared key, which is a first shared key shared between the information processing apparatus, in the case where the received packet does not include the message authentication code for the second next destination address; a third packet generating unit to generate a third packet, which includes a next destination and information indicating that the generation of an message authentication code is impossible, in the case where the key information storing unit does not store the second shared key. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243542 | Scalable Interface for Connecting Multiple Computer Systems Which Performs Parallel MPI Header Matching - An interface device for a compute node in a computer cluster which performs Message Passing Interface (MPI) header matching using parallel matching units. The interface device comprises a memory that stores posted receive queues and unexpected queues. The posted receive queues store receive requests from a process executing on the compute node. The unexpected queues store headers of send requests (e.g., from other compute nodes) that do not have a matching receive request in the posted receive queues. The interface device also comprises a plurality of hardware pipelined matcher units. The matcher units perform header matching to determine if a header in the send request matches any headers in any of the plurality of posted receive queues. Matcher units perform the header matching in parallel. In other words, the plural matching units are configured to search the memory concurrently to perform header matching. | 09-27-2012 |
20120250686 | OFFLOAD DEVICE-BASED STATELESS PACKET PROCESSING - High-speed processing of packets to, and from, a virtualization environment can be provided while utilizing hardware-based segmentation offload and other such functionality. A hardware vendor such as a network interface card (NIC) manufacturer can enable the hardware to support open and proprietary stateless tunneling in conjunction with a protocol such as single root I/O virtualization (SR-IOV) in order to implement a virtualized overlay network. The hardware can utilize various rules, for example, that can be used by the NIC to perform certain actions, such as to encapsulate egress packets and decapsulate packets. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250687 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH PACKET FORWARDING AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREOF - A method of operation of a network communication system includes: analyzing a packet header by: loading a packet input register, generating a forwarding hash from the packet input register, and identifying a routing update by comparing the forwarding hash; accessing a packet analysis bus for updating the packet header; and enabling a routing switch for forwarding a packet including the packet header updated. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250688 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UNMARSHALLED ROUTING - In distributed object computing, messages from a source node to a destination node are often required to be routed via one or more intermediate nodes. In order to enhance efficiency of the relay process, a message envelope of a message may include a node list field that specifies the routing path of the message. The communication protocol for communicating the message may specify that when a message is received into a particular node, the node analyzes the node list field. If the identity of the node is last in the node list field, then the node is the destination node and thus the node unmarshals the message. Otherwise, the node forwards the message to the next node in the field list without unmarshalling the message. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250689 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A SHARED I/O NETWORK INTERFACE CONTROLLER - A shared network interface controller (NIC) interfaces a plurality of operating system domains as part of the load-store architecture of the operating system domains. A bus interface couples the NIC to a load-store domain bus (such as PCI-Express), using header information to associate data on the bus with an originating operating system domain. Transmit/receive logic connects the NIC to the network. Association logic allows the NIC to designate, and later lookup which destination MAC address (on the Ethernet side) is associated with which operating system domain. Descriptor register files and Control Status Registers (CSR's) specific to an operating system domain are duplicated and made available for each domain. Several direct memory access (DMA) engines are provided to improve throughput. Packet replication logic, filters (perfect and hash) and VLAN tables are used for looping back packets originating from one operating system domain to another and other operations. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250690 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING A MULTIMEDIA DATA PACKET USING CROSS LAYER OPTIMIZATION - A method and apparatus for transmitting a multimedia data packet are provided. The method includes receiving Bottom-up Network Abstraction Layer (B-NAL) information from a network entity, generating Top-down Network Abstraction Layer (T-NAL) information on the multimedia data to be transmitted, generating a multimedia data packet containing said T-NAL information, and transmitting the multimedia data packet generated in the previous process, to the network entity, in consideration of said B-NAL information. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250691 | TRANSMITTING A PACKET FROM A DISTRIBUTED TRUNK SWITCH - A method of transmitting a packet from a distributed trunk switch and a computer-readable medium storing instructions therefor is described. The method comprises populating an address table of the distributed trunk switch. The method also comprises receiving a packet from a device connected to the distributed trunk switch and transmitting the received packet via a distributed trunk (DT) port of the distributed trunk switch if the destination address of the received packet corresponds to a distributed trunk port in the address table. | 10-04-2012 |
20120257626 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IN-LINE REMOVAL OF DUPLICATE NETWORK PACKETS - Systems and methods are disclosed for in-line removal of duplicate network packets in network packet streams operating at high speeds (e.g., 1-10 Gbps and above). A hash generator applies at least one hash algorithm to incoming packets to form one or more different hash values. The packet deduplication systems and methods then use the one or more hash values for each incoming packet to identify data stored for previously received backs and use the identified data to determine if incoming packets are duplicate packets. Duplicate packets are then removed from the output packet stream thereby reducing duplicate packets for downstream processing. A deduplication window can further be utilized to limit the amount of data stored for previous packets based upon one or more parameters, such as an amount of time that has passed and/or a number of packets for which data has been stored. These parameters can also be selected, configured and/or adjusted to achieve desired operational objectives. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257627 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PACKET DE-DUPLICATION - A method of packet processing includes receiving a first packet that includes a header, the header having a plurality of fields, one of the plurality of fields being an identification field, determining an identification value for the identification field in the header of the first packet, determining whether the identification value of the first packet matches an identification value in a header of a second packet, and using another one of the fields in the header of the first packet to determine whether the first packet is a duplicate packet when the identification value of the first packet matches the identification value of the second packet. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257628 | MAPPING PRIVATE AND PUBLIC ADDRESSES - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: identifying, at the network node, a packet associated with a first address; determining, at the network node, that an alternate address mapping is unknown to the network node for the first address; generating a request message based on at least a portion of the packet; transmitting the request message to a different node; receiving a response message, the response message including a second address, wherein the second address is an alternative address for the first address; and storing the first address and the second address together as an alternate address mapping. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257629 | Termination of a Pseudowires on Multiple Line Cards - In one embodiment, line cards of packet switching or other network devices are configured for terminating pseudowires. Typically, this includes multiple line cards being configured for terminating a same pseudowire, which allows the corresponding pseudowire traffic to be received by any one of these multiple line cards. Each of these pseudowire-terminating line cards is typically configured to apply one or more features to a pseudowire packet. Examples of these features include, but are not limited to: Access Control List, Quality of Service, Netflow, and Lawful Intercept. For a received packet to be sent out one of these pseudowires, a two-stage lookup operation can be used to first identify the pseudowire over which to forward the packet; and a second lookup operation based on the pseudowire to identify forwarding information corresponding to a path through a network over which a corresponding pseudowire is configured. | 10-11-2012 |
20120263179 | IP ADDRESS DELIVERY SYSTEM AND IP ADDRESS DELIVERY METHOD - The present invention provides an IP address delivery system comprising: an IP address delivery apparatus including a path-information reading unit configured to read, from an IP address request signal, path information of a communication network extending to a request source of an IP address, an IP address correspondence table in which a correspondence relation between the path information and the IP address is registered, and an IP-address determining unit configured to determine, based on the path information obtained from the path-information reading unit and the IP address correspondence table, an IP address delivered to the request source; and a path-information granting unit configured to grant the path information to the IP address request signal. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263180 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR DISABLING AN OPERATIVE COUPLING TO A NETWORK - Methods and systems are described for disabling an operative coupling to a network. In an aspect, first data received for forwarding is forwarded between a first node in a first network and a second node in a second network by a network relay via a first operative coupling to the first network of a first network interface hardware component in the network relay and via a second operative coupling to the second network of a second network interface hardware component in the network relay. A determination is made that a specified decoupling condition is met. The second operative coupling is disabled subsequent to the forwarding and in response to the determination while the first operative coupling remains enabled for receiving second data for forwarding. | 10-18-2012 |
20120275459 | PROCESSING PACKETS BY A NETWORK DEVICE - A method and apparatus for performing a lookup in a switching device of a packet switched network where the lookup includes a plurality of distinct operations each of which returns a result that includes a pointer to a next operation in a sequence of operations for the lookup. The method includes determining a first lookup operation to be executed, executing the first lookup operation including returning a result and determining if the result includes a pointer to another lookup operation in the sequence of operations. If the result includes a pointer to another lookup operation, the lookup operation indicated by the result is executed. Else, the lookup is terminated. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275460 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING A PLURALITY OF DATA AND SWITCHING DEVICE FOR SWITCHING COMMUNICATION PACKETS - The invention concerns a method of processing a plurality of data packets in a packet switched communication network comprising at least one switching device ( | 11-01-2012 |
20120281698 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING VIRTUAL SWITCHES - Network switches that are controlled by a controller server may contain ports through which network packets are received and forwarded. An architect may configure the controller server to create virtual switches. Each virtual switch may be formed from a subset of the ports of the network switches. The architect may assign administrators to the virtual switches. The administrators may configure the virtual switches. An administrator may use a command line interface to configure a virtual switch. The administrator may use commands such as a show port command, an access list command, a show access list command, and a membership rule command to manage the virtual switch. The controller server may prevent the administrator from logging on to virtual switches that have been assigned to other administrators. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281699 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION USING A PACKET STRUCTURE - In accordance with aspects of the disclosure, a method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for wireless communication. The method, apparatus, and computer program product may be configured to generate packets, wherein each of the packets comprises a packet header comprising a packet format field comprising a first indicator that indicates whether the packet header comprises a payload length field and whether the packet comprises a payload. The method, apparatus, and computer program product may be further configured to generate a second indicator based on a type of data in the payload, and attach the second indicator to the data. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281700 | LAYER-3 SUPPORT IN TRILL NETWORKS - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch. The switch includes an IP header processor and a forwarding mechanism. The IP header processor identifies a destination IP address in a packet encapsulated with an inner Ethernet header, a TRILL header, and an outer Ethernet header. The forwarding mechanism determines an output port and constructs a new header for the packet based on the destination IP address. The switch also includes a packet processor which determines whether (1) an inner destination media access control (MAC) address corresponds to a local MAC address assigned to the switch; (2) a destination RBridge identifier corresponds to a local RBridge identifier assigned to the switch; and (3) an outer destination MAC address corresponds to the local MAC address. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281701 | BROADBAND ACCESS FOR VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS - A method for communicating between a source and a destination in a service provider internet protocol network includes receiving, at an egress edge device from an ingress edge device on the service provider internet protocol network, an upper layer packet comprising data received in turn from the source and encapsulated in accordance with a service provider format into the upper layer packet. The upper layer packet includes a virtual private network identification identifying a destination. The method also includes authenticating the upper layer packet at the egress edge device using the virtual private network identification. Upon authentication, the upper layer packet is decapsulated into a lower layer packet for the destination. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281702 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING PSEUDO WIRE - A method, a system, and a device for establishing a pseudo wire are disclosed. The method includes: receiving, by a switching provider edge at a bifurcation position, a label mapping message, obtaining information of the switching provider edge at the bifurcation position and information of at least two next hops or outgoing interfaces of the switching provider edge through parsing, comparing the information of the switching provider edge at the bifurcation position with information of a local device, and if the information of the switching provider edge at the bifurcation position matches with the information of the local device, establishing at least two pseudo wires from the switching provider edge according to the information of at least two next hops or outgoing interfaces. | 11-08-2012 |
20120287930 | Local switching at a fabric extender - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a packet at a fabric extender, performing a look up in a flow table at the fabric extender for a flow associated with the packet, processing the packet at the fabric extender based on an entry in the flow table if an entry for the flow is found in the flow table, and forwarding the packet to an upstream network device configured to forward the packet if an entry for the flow is not found in the flow table. An apparatus is also disclosed. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287931 | TECHNIQUES FOR SECURING A VIRTUALIZED COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT USING A PHYSICAL NETWORK SWITCH - A technique for securing a virtualized computing environment includes retrieving identification information from a packet received on a physical port of a network switch. Port assignment data (maintained by one of a virtual machine monitor and a virtual machine monitor management station) for a virtual machine identified in the received packet is retrieved. The identification information from the received packet is compared with the port assignment data to determine whether the virtual machine is assigned to the port. In response to determining that the virtual machine is assigned to the port, the packet is forwarded to a destination designated in the packet. In response to determining that the virtual machine is not assigned to the port, the packet is blocked. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287932 | Label Switched Routing To Connect Low Power Network Domains - A network element is described. In one embodiment includes receiving a packet from the host in the first domain at the network element in the first domain, the packet including a destination address to the host in the second domain, the destination address being formed by replacing an Interface Identifier of an IP address by a second domain label and a shortened Media Access Control (MAC) address, the second domain label identifying the second domain. A routing label and the shortened MAC address are attached to the received packet, and the packet is sent on a label switched path indicated by the label to the second domain. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287933 | MESSAGE FORWARDING USING GRE TUNNELING PROTOCOL - A method of forwarding GRE encapsulated messages by a forwarding device. The method comprises the forwarding device setting up a tunnel table entry upon receipt of a GRE encapsulated message, the GRE encapsulated message comprising subnet mask information of a subnet; and sending a response message to the subnet after setting up the tunnel table entry, the response message comprising information informing the subnet of the setting up of said tunnel table entry. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287934 | Packet Routing in a Network by Modifying In-Packet Bloom Filter - A network node (NB | 11-15-2012 |
20120287935 | INTERIOR GATEWAY PROTOCOL SUMMARIZATION PRESERVING INTERNET PROTOCOL REACHABILITY INFORMATION - In one example embodiment, a system and method is illustrated that includes receiving connectivity data for at least one network device, the connectivity data describing a connection to the at least one network device within an area. The system and method further includes processing the connectivity data to obtain a routing update for distribution to another network device outside the area. Additionally, the system and method includes a routing summary in the routing update, the routing summary including an address prefix. Further, the system and method includes reachability information in the routing update, the reachability information including an address for the at least one network device. | 11-15-2012 |
20120294310 | Wide Area Network Interface Selection Method and Wide Area Network System Using the Same - The present invention discloses a wide area network (WAN) interface selection method for a WAN system comprising a plurality of WAN interfaces. The WAN interface selection method includes steps of receiving a plurality of packets from a local area network (LAN) side; selecting respective WAN interfaces from the plurality of WAN interfaces for the plurality of packets according to network address translation (NAT) session information of the plurality of packets; and sending out the plurality of packets through the respective WAN interfaces. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294311 | PACKET TRANSFER PROCESSING DEVICE, PACKET TRANSFER PROCESSING METHOD, AND PACKET TRANSFER PROCESSING PROGRAM - The end of a communication period can be detected reliably and efficiently by a control unit and validity/invalidity of search rules in a search table can be effectively managed. A timer is provided so as to correspond to each entry area of the search table. Then, under control of a timer managing unit, the timer starts a counting operation whenever information is written in a validity management table or a packet in which a communication parameter matches a packet search condition corresponding to information on the validity management table that is set as valid is received. In addition, when a counting time of the timer exceeds a preset time-out time, information indicating the time-out is stored in a time-out management table. | 11-22-2012 |
20120300777 | SUPPORTING MULTIPLE IEC-101/IEC-104 MASTERS ON AN IEC-101/IEC-104 TRANSLATION GATEWAY - In one embodiment, a network device, such as a router, receives a frame containing a message from a first terminal unit. The network device modifies the received frame by replacing an original value of an originator identifier field in the frame with a new value that is locally unique on a particular data link. The network device than forwards the modified frame to a selected second terminal unit selected from a plurality of terminal units. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300778 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NETWORK APPARATUS, GATEWAY APPARATUS, COMPUTER PROGRAM, DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DATA TRANSFER METHOD - A network apparatus, wherein a bearer is set between the network apparatus and a gateway apparatus connects a radio access network and a core network, including: a tunneling processing unit that encapsulates user data in accordance with a tunneling protocol; a data combining unit that generates combined data in which a plurality of the encapsulated user data to be transmitted to the same the gateway apparatus are combined; a header generation unit that generates a header of the network protocol storing the bearer identifier of the bearer transmitting user data included in the combined data; and a transmission unit that transmits a packet of the combined data having the header added thereto to the gateway apparatus. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300779 | CASCADED MEMORY TABLES FOR SEARCHING - Devices, systems, methods, and other embodiments associated with cascaded memory tables for searching are described. In one embodiment, an integrated chip is implemented with two or more address tables. The two or more address tables are implemented with separate memory tables to store addresses. The two or more address tables are comprised of a first address table and a second address table. Connection lines connect the first address table and the second address table to create a cascaded address table. Search logic initiates a search of the first address table for an address. If the address is not found, the search logic initiates a search of the second address table through the connection lines. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300780 | COLLECTING NETWORK PERFORMANCE DATA FROM MULTIPLE AUTONOMOUS SYSTEMS - A computer apparatus comprises first Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) logic comprising BGP route table data; a network interface to communicatively couple to a first autonomous system; data collection logic in computer-readable storage media when executed operable to perform discovering an address prefix of a data collector that is communicatively coupled to second BGP logic of a router within a second autonomous system that is coupled to the first autonomous system, wherein the second autonomous system is independent of the first autonomous system; determining a path through the first autonomous system, the one or more networks or internetworks, and the second autonomous system to the data collector based on the BGP route table; requesting the data collector to provide one or more data values relating to performance of network elements of the second autonomous system; receiving and storing the one or more data values. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300781 | Packet Routing in a Network - A network node ( | 11-29-2012 |
20120300782 | TRIPLE-TIER ANYCAST ADDRESSING - In one embodiment, a solution is provided wherein redundant routers are treated as a single emulated switch. When a packet is received at a layer 2 edge switch from a host, the layer 2 edge switch may determine a switch identifier for the emulated switch using a destination anycast hardware address contained in the packet. The anycast hardware address may identify an emulated switch comprising a plurality of routers. Then a header may be added to the packet, the header including the switch identifier. Following that, the packet may be forwarded to another layer 2 switch along a shortest path from the layer 2 edge switch to the emulated switch. | 11-29-2012 |
20120307828 | Method and System of Frame Forwarding with Link Aggregation in Distributed Ethernet Bridges - Embodiments relate to forwarding of packets in link aggregation environments. A method for forwarding a packet through an extended switch including a first port extender and a second port extender directly or indirectly communicatively coupled to respectively a first interface and a second interface of a controlling bridge includes, associating a first port extender interface of the first port extender with a global namespace or an interface-specific namespace. The method further includes receiving a packet through the first port extender interface, marking the received packet with an indication of the namespace configuration of the first port extender interface, processing the marked packet in the controlling bridge based at least in part upon the indication, and transmitting the processed packet out of the controlling bridge. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307829 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND RELAY DEVICE - A communication control method for controlling communication between a first node and a second node via a relay device, the method includes transmitting a control packet from the first node to the second node before transmitting a first packet which is a higher priority than another packet to be relayed, stopping a packet from being output from a packet storage device for the another packet by the relay device, for a period indicated by the control packet, the packet storage device being included in one of a plurality of output ports of the relay device from which the first packet is to be output, and transmitting the first packet from the first node to the second node or from the second node to the first node during the period. | 12-06-2012 |
20120314706 | PACKET SWITCHING BASED ON GLOBAL IDENTIFIER - A communication method in a network operating in accordance with a standard that allocates a given number of bits m for layer-2 addressing of nodes in the network. The method includes accepting at a layer-2 switch in the network an assignment to one or more nodes in the network of respective layer-2 extended addresses, each including n=m+k bits, k>0. A given data packet is received at the switch for forwarding. The given data packet includes a layer-2 destination address and a layer-3 destination address in accordance with the standard. The layer-3 destination address includes t bits, t≧k. The given data packet is forwarded from the switch to one of the nodes by reading from the given data packet and combining the layer-2 destination address and k bits from the layer-3 destination address so as to reconstruct the n bits of the extended layer-2 address of the one of the nodes. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314707 | Pipelined Packet Switching And Queuing Architecture - A pipelined linecard architecture for receiving, modifying, switching, buffering, queuing and dequeuing packets for transmission in a communications network is disclosed. The linecard has two paths: a receive path and a transmit path. In the receive path, received packets are processed and switched in an asynchronous, multi-stage pipeline. The pipelined switch operates on several packets in parallel while determining each packet's routing destination. Once that determination is made, each packet is modified to contain new routing information. Each packet is buffered and enqueued for transmission over the switching fabric to a destination linecard. The transmit path includes a buffer/queuing circuit similar to that used in the receive path. Both enqueuing and dequeuing of packets is accomplished using a CoS-based decision making apparatus. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314708 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PREVENTING MAC ADDRESSES LEARNING IN A PROVIDER BACKBONE NETWORK (PBBN) - The present invention provides a method and system for preventing MAC address learning in Provider Backbone Bridge Network (PBBN). In one embodiment, this is accomplished by receiving data frames from at least one operator/client at the first PBB network which has to be communicating to the second PBB network, adding forward path learning information from the received data frames in the first PBB network and translating backbone MAC source address of the received data frame at the first PBB network by replacing the backbone MAC source address with a BEB backbone MAC address, thereby preventing of backbone MAC address learning of the first PBB network in the second PBB network. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314709 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING DATA PACKETS IN FLOW-AWARE NETWORK NODES - A method and apparatus for processing data packets in flow-aware network nodes is disclosed for storing flow data without altering transmission data throughput for a limited cost. The method and apparatus for processing data packets in flow-aware network nodes includes alternate usage of a fast access internal memory and a slower speed access external memory which provides low latency yet comprehensive flow-awareness. The method for processing data packets in flow-aware network nodes is particularly useful for overcoming requiring extensive usage of fast access memory of flow-aware network nodes known in the art. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314710 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD | 12-13-2012 |
20120320918 | BRIDGE PORT BETWEEN HARDWARE LAN AND VIRTUAL SWITCH - A computer system includes a bridge port configured between a hardware local area network (LAN) and a virtual switch; the hardware LAN, the hardware LAN comprising a first plurality of virtual machines (VMs), wherein the first plurality of VMs communicate with the hardware LAN via respective hardware network interface cards (NICs); the virtual switch, the virtual switch comprising a second plurality of VMs, wherein the second plurality of VMs communicate with the virtual switch via respective virtual NICs, wherein the first plurality of VMs communicate with the second plurality of VMs via the bridge port. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320919 | AUTOMATIC PATH SELECTION FOR HYBRID COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A hybrid network device can implement functionality for automatic path selection and modification in a hybrid communication network. The hybrid network device can select an initial network interface from a plurality of network interfaces for transmitting a packet stream. In response to determining that the medium utilization of the initial network interface exceeds the medium utilization threshold, the hybrid network device can identify one or more packet streams originating from the initial network interface to shift to corresponding one or more alternate network interfaces. The hybrid network device can attempt to reduce the medium utilization of the initial network interface below the medium utilization threshold while maintaining the medium utilization of the one or more alternate network interfaces below the corresponding medium utilization thresholds. The hybrid network device can shift the one or more packet streams from the initial network interface to the corresponding one or more alternate network interfaces. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320920 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system includes a plurality of forwarding nodes for which is set a processing rule(s) for forwarding a received packet in accordance with a route set in advance, with a processing rule being selected based on a path identifier included in the received packet, to perform packet forwarding; and a control device that sets the processing rule beforehand in the forwarding node in the route, and causes a forwarding node positioned at a start point of the route to add a path identifier in accordance with the route to a received packet and causes a forwarding node positioned at an end point of the route to delete the path identifier from a received packet, on a predetermined occasion. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320921 | PACKET ROUTING AND SWITCHING DEVICE - A network device routes data packets by storing the packets in a switching memory as a function of a destination address of the packet. The switching memory comprises switching memory queues that are mapped to ports of the device. A header of a received packet is examined to determine the network destination address to which it is to be routed, and a destination queue is assigned to the packet based on the destination address. Thereafter, the packet is divided into cells, and the cells are written to contiguous locations in the destination queue. | 12-20-2012 |
20120327936 | FCOE OVER TRILL - A method for processing packets, in a network device including at least one processing engine that i) is not configured to process destination information that conforms to a first protocol and ii) is configured to process destination information that conforms to a second protocol, includes receiving a packet at the network device, and determining, in the network device, first destination information included in the packet. The first destination information conforms to the first protocol. The method also includes generating, in the network device, second destination information conforming to a third protocol based on the first destination information. The method also includes generating, in the network device, third destination information conforming to the second protocol based on the second destination information. The method also includes processing the packet with the at least one processing engine included in the network device using the third destination information. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327937 | FCOE OVER TRILL - A method for forwarding FCoE packets in a network switching device includes receiving a first packet at the network switching device via an Ethernet link, determining, in the network switching device, an FC destination identifier included in the first packet, updating, in the network switching device, an Ethernet address based on the FC destination identifier, generating, in the network switching device, a first TRILL destination identifier based on the updated Ethernet address, and causing, in the network switching device, the first packet to be forwarded to a different device based on the first TRILL destination identifier. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327938 | MESSAGE TRANSMISSION IN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS - The disclosure relates to a method for transmitting a message in a Hierarchical Layer 2 Virtual Private Network (H-L2VPN). A destination MAC address, to which a message is to be forwarded upon receiving the message, is determined by a first peer node of the network. The first peer node determines whether one or more equivalent pseudo wires (PWs) connected thereto form a path to the destination MAC address. When it is determined that more than one equivalent PW forms a path to the destination MAC address, an arbitrary equivalent PW is selected from the more than one equivalent PW by the first peer node. The first peer node sends the message, via the selected equivalent PW, to a second peer node of the network connected to the selected equivalent PW for forwarding to the destination MAC address. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327939 | COMMUNICATION METHOD OF GATEWAY DEVICE SUPPORTING MUTUAL COMMUNICATION OF CAN AND MODBUS AND GATEWAY DEVICE USING THE SAME - A gateway device is provided. The gateway device for relaying communication between an automotive network communication device and an industrial field bus communication device includes: a Controller Area Network (CAN) input unit for receiving a CAN input data frame from an external; and a conversion unit for converting the received CAN input data frame into a Modbus output data frame according to a predetermined method. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327940 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING DATA - The present invention discloses a method, an apparatus, and a system for transmitting data. A method for sending data includes: categorizing a received packet based on field information of a preset field in a packet header; encapsulating, for each category of packets, field information of a preset field in a packet header of a packet to an overhead field of a data unit, and encapsulating a packet payload of each packet and field information of another field except the preset field in a packet header of each packet to a payload field of the data unit; and sending the generated data unit to a destination node of the packet. The method, the apparatus, and the system are capable of improving bandwidth usage of a transmission link. | 12-27-2012 |
20130003735 | DYNAMICALLY PROVISIONING MIDDLEBOXES - Hybrid security architecture (HSA) provides a platform for middlebox traversal in the network. The HSA decouples the middlebox control from network forwarding. More specifically, such embodiments may receive a data packet having a packet header including an Ethernet header identifying source and destination addresses in the network. A traffic type of the data packet is determined. Then, layer-2 forwarding information, which encodes a set of non-forwarding network service provider middleboxes in the network to be traversed by the data packet, is determined based on the traffic type. The layer-2 forwarding information is inserted into the Ethernet header and the data packet is forwarded into the network. The data packet will then traverse, according to the layer-2 forwarding information, a sequence of the middleboxes in the network, wherein at least one non-forwarding network service will be provided by each of the middleboxes to the data packet in a sequence. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003736 | VARIABLE-BASED FORWARDING PATH CONSTRUCTION FOR PACKET PROCESSING WITHIN A NETWORK DEVICE - In general, this disclosure describes techniques for applying, with a network device, subscriber-specific packet processing using an internal processing path that includes service objects that are commonly applied to multiple packet flows associated with multiple subscribers. In one example, a network device control plane creates subscriber records that include, for respective subscribers, one or more variable values that specify service objects as well as an identifier for a packet processing template. A forwarding plane of the network device receives and maps subscriber packets to an associated subscriber record and then processes the packet by executing the packet processing template specified by the subscriber record. When the forwarding plane reaches a variable while executing the specified packet processing template, the forwarding plane reads the associated variable value from the subscriber record to identify and then apply the subscriber-specific service object specified by the variable. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003737 | E-TREE USING TWO PSEUDOWIRES BETWEEN EDGE ROUTERS WITH ENHANCED LEARNING METHODS AND SYSTEMS - An e-tree service that includes establishing two pseudowires (PW) between edge network elements with enhanced address learning is described. In one embodiment, a root PW and a leaf PW are used for carrying packets from a root node and from a leaf node, respectively. When a network element receives a packet on the root PW, the network element associates the source Media Access Control (MAC) address of the packet with the logical port associated with the root PW in a root PW MAC address table, and also associates the source MAC address with the logical port associated with the leaf PW in a leaf PW MAC address table. When a network element receives a packet on the leaf PW, the network element associates the source MAC address of this packet with the logical port that is associated with the root PW in the root PW MAC address table. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003738 | TRILL BASED ROUTER REDUNDANCY - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switching system. The switching system includes a Transparent Interconnection of Lots of Links (TRILL) header processor and an Internet Protocol (IP) header processor. The TRILL header processor is configured to identify a virtual routing bridge (RBridge) identifier in a packet, and the IP header processor is configured to identify a virtual IP address in the packet. The virtual IP address is assigned to a virtual IP router associated with the virtual RBridge identifier. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003739 | SCALABLE MAC ADDRESS DISTRIBUTION IN AN ETHERNET FABRIC SWITCH - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch. The switch includes a notification mechanism. The notification mechanism constructs a single message that contains a locally learned MAC address associated with a local device, a TRILL RBridge identifier associated with the switch, and an identifier of an interface associated with the MAC address. In some embodiments, the switch includes a data structure and an entry management mechanism. The data structure stores device information learned at a remote switch, wherein the device information includes a MAC address of a device, a TRILL RBridge identifier associated with the remote switch, an identifier of an interface coupled to the device, and a type indicator of the MAC address. The entry management mechanism manages an entry in the data structure based on the RBridge identifier and the interface identifier. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003740 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTING LABEL IN SEAMLESS MULTI-PROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING NETWORK - The present invention discloses a method, apparatus, and system for allocating a label in a seamless multi-protocol label switching network, which greatly reduces the complexity of the access node device, effectively cuts down the operation costs for the operator, and enhances the scalability of the system. The method includes: obtaining label information of a first access node, where the label information comprises the pseudowire PW destination address of the first access node; and sending the label information to a second router by using a BGP message or a T-LDP message so that the second router configures a PW label and/or a flow label of the first access node to a second access node by using the access network configuration protocol according to the label information. | 01-03-2013 |
20130010795 | High Speed Ethernet MAC and PHY Apparatus with a Filter Based Ethernet Packet Router with Priority Queuing and Single or Multiple Transport Stream Interfaces - An audio-visual content delivery system includes an interface to communicate with a local area network (LAN). A packet processing circuit in the system may filter and route Ethernet packet data received from the LAN, to specific ports and/or queues without host processor intervention. The packet processing circuit may utilize a set of filter and routing mechanisms configurable in hardware to interpret various Internet Engineering Task Force networking transport protocols, and may transfer the packet data in a format recognized by a variety of consumer subsystems, each of which may be coupled to the packet processing circuit. The packet processing circuit may be implemented as a semiconductor device, and may allow encapsulated application data to be routed to a plurality of different types of application sinks or processors, forming a point-to-point or multi-point serial or parallel data stream over a standard transport covering numerous levels of the ISO data communications stack. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010796 | DISTRIBUTED ROUTING ARCHITECTURE - A hierarchical distributed routing architecture including at least three levels, or layers, for receiving, processing and forwarding data packets between network components is provided. The core level router components receive an incoming packet from a network component and identify a distribution level router component based on processing a subset of the destination address associated with the received packet. The distribution level router components that receiving a forwarded packet and identify a transit level router component based a second processing of at least a subset of the destination address associated with the received packet. The transit level router components receive the forwarded packet and forward the packet to a respective network. The mapping, or other assignment, of portions of the FIB associated with the distributed routing environment is managed by a router management component. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010797 | CUSTOM ROUTING DECISIONS - With the advent of virtualization technologies, networks and routing for those networks can now be simulated using commodity hardware rather than actual routers. For example, virtualization technologies such as those provided by VMWare, XEN, or User-Mode Linux can be adapted to allow a single physical computing machine to be shared among multiple virtual networks by providing each virtual network user with one or more virtual machines hosted by the single physical computing machine, with each such virtual machine being a software simulation acting as a distinct logical computing system that provides users with the illusion that they are the sole operators and administrators of a given hardware computing resource. In addition, routing can be accomplished through software, providing additional routing flexibility to the virtual network in comparison with traditional routing. As a result, in some implementations, supplemental information other than packet information can be used to determine network routing. | 01-10-2013 |
20130016723 | SCALING OF VIRTUAL MACHINE ADDRESSES IN DATACENTERS - A device in a server having a processor and a storage. The device has a downstream communication unit configured to receive a data packet. The device also has a protocol blind network path indication unit configured to obtain an indicator corresponding to a predetermined path to a data communication unit in the network, by accessing the protocol blind correlation structure using a destination address of the data packet. The device, furthermore, has an upstream communication unit configured to transmit a network protocol blind packet including the data packet and the indicator corresponding to the predetermined data path to the data communication unit in the network. The device also includes a combiner configured to bind the indicator to the data packet received by the downstream communication unit. | 01-17-2013 |
20130022045 | SCALABLE FORWARDING TABLE WITH OVERFLOW ADDRESS LEARNING - A node is configured to receive a packet from a host device, where the packet includes a source address associated with the host device; determine that the source address is not stored by the node; generate one or more logical distances, associated with one or more nodes, based on the source address and a respective address associated with each of the nodes; determine that another node is associated with a shortest logical distance, of the one or more logical distances; and transmit the source address to the other node based on the determination that the other node is associated with the shortest logical distance, where transmitting the source address allows the other node to store the source address or enables further nodes to obtain the source address from the other node. | 01-24-2013 |
20130022046 | DIVERSE PATH FORWARDING THROUGH TRIAL AND ERROR - In one embodiment, a node determines an intention to transmit a diversely forwarded packet through a computer network, and as such, transmits a first version of the packet having a packet identifier (ID) and a first distinguisher value to a first next-hop node, and transmits a second version of the packet having the same packet ID and a second distinguisher value different from the first distinguisher value to a second next-hop node different from the first next-hop node. In another embodiment, a next-hop node that receives the packet determines whether any previously received packet at the next-hop node had a same packet ID and a different distinguisher value. In response to determining that no previously received packet has the same packet ID and different distinguisher value, the next-hop node stores the packet ID and the distinguisher value, and forwards the packet to a selected next-hop node. | 01-24-2013 |
20130022047 | NETWORK APPARATUS AND NETWORK MANAGING APPARATUS - First-stage switches (B | 01-24-2013 |
20130022048 | METHOD AND NETWORK NODE FOR USE IN LINK LEVEL COMMUNICATION IN A DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, a network node is presented which is configured to associate each of a plurality of MAC addresses with an IP address on a network level. The network node is configured to, upon reception of a link level message comprising a target IP address and destined to multiple network nodes, compare the target IP address with associated MAC/IP addresses on a network level, and to selectively send the received link level message to at least one other network node on a link level based on the network level comparison. A method and a computer program product are also presented, according to embodiments of the present invention. | 01-24-2013 |
20130028256 | NETWORK ELEMENT WITH SHARED BUFFERS - A method for communication, in a network element that includes multiple ports, includes buffering data packets entering the network element via the ports in input buffers that are respectively associated with the ports. Storage of the data packets is shared among the input buffers by evaluating a condition related to the ports, and, when the condition is met, moving at least one data packet from a first input buffer of a first port to a second input buffer of a second port, different from the first port. Respective output ports, via which the buffered data packets are to exit the network element, are selected from among the ports. The buffered data packets are forwarded to the selected output ports. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028257 | Message Gateway and Methods for Using the Same - A computer-implemented method for transporting a message includes receiving the message from a first application via a first communication protocol, the first message including data indicating a destination for the message, generating a gateway address from the data indicating the destination, a gateway associated with the gateway address being accessible by the destination, and transporting the message to the gateway according to the gateway address using a second communication protocol, in which the first and second communication protocols are different, and in which the second communication protocol is a disruption-tolerant networking protocol. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028258 | CACHED ROUTING SERVICE - A device may receive a packet, determine whether the received packet is encapsulated with a first header associated with a cached routing service, and determine whether the received packet is to be provided with the cached routing service when the received packet is not encapsulated with the first header associated with the cached routing service. In response to determining that the received packet is to be provided with the cached routing service, the device may encapsulate the received packet with a second header associated with the cached routing service, send the encapsulated packet toward a destination of the packet, and store the encapsulated packet in a buffer in a memory. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028259 | SYSTEM FOR FINDING POTENTIAL ORIGINS OF SPOOFED INTERNET PROTOCOL ATTACK TRAFFIC - The invention computes approximate origins of data packets transmitted over the Internet. Law enforcement agencies and network operators can use it to assign responsibility for observed Internet activities. The invention uses a small number of cooperative locations (incoming links on routers or switches) to provide link identification data: whether a packet or did or did not traverse that location. The system uses these cooperative places to generate the link signature of a data packet—which cooperative locations observed and did not observe the packet. Potential origin locations are divided into pre-computed blocks that have the same link signatures to given destination locations. The blocks are used to generate reverse routing data, potential source addresses for different link signatures. Variations of the invention store relevant link identification and reverse routing data to find the origins of past packets or to compute the origins of packets from partial information about packets of interest. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028260 | DATA PROCESSING APPARATUS, DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM, AND DATA PROCESSING METHOD - A data-processing apparatus includes a plurality of processing units having frequency bands different from one another set thereto, the plurality of processing units to process packets each including data and processing information added to the data, the processing information including instruction information indicating one or more processing instructions to the data, each processing unit in the processing units including: an input/output unit to obtain, in the packets, only a packet whose address indicates the processing unit in the processing units, the address determined in accordance with the processing information; and an operation unit to execute the processing instruction in the packet obtained by the input/output unit, the input/output unit including a receiving unit to receive only an electromagnetic wave having a frequency band set to the processing unit and obtain the packet. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028261 | SYSTEM-ON-CHIP-BASED NETWORK PROTOCOL IN CONSIDERATION OF NETWORK EFFICIENCY - An SoC-based system network protocol in consideration of network efficiency is disclosed. An MSB of a command signal containing an instruction defining information that is contained in a transfer signal transferred from an initiator to a destination via a channel or in a response signal transferred from the destination via the channel indicates that a highest priority is assigned to a transaction between the initiator and the destination in the network, when the instruction contained in the command signal corresponds to address information contained in the transfer signal and response information contained in the response signal, and indicates last data of a signal transferred between the initiator and the destination when the instruction contained in the command signal corresponds to control information contained in the transfer signal and data contained in the transfer signal and the response signal. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028262 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR MESSAGE ANALYSIS - The method is for preparing data read from data communication network for testing purposes. The method has steps for reading data from a communication network, adding at least one header data field to the received data to create a packet interpretable by a network protocol dissector, and forwarding the created data packet to the network protocol dissector for further conversion of read data to a data analysis format. An arrangement and a computer program product are also disclosed. | 01-31-2013 |
20130034098 | FLEXIBLE METHOD FOR PROCESSING DATA PACKETS IN A NETWORK ROUTING SYSTEM FOR ENHANCED EFFICIENCY AND MONITORING CAPABILITY - According to an embodiment of the invention, a network device such as a router or switch provides efficient data packet handling capability. The network device includes one or more input ports for receiving data packets to be routed, as well as one or more output ports for transmitting data packets. The network device includes an integrated port controller integrated circuit for routing packets. The integrated circuit includes an interface circuit, a received packets circuit, a buffer manager circuit for receiving data packets from the received packets circuit and transmitting data packets in one or more buffers and reading data packets from the one or more buffers. The integrated circuit also includes a rate shaper counter for storing credit for a traffic class, so that the integrated circuit can support input and/or output rate shaping. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034099 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSLATING AN ADDRESS OF A PACKET TRANSFERRED BETWEEN NETWORKS - An apparatus translates a destination address of a first packet that is transferred from an external communication device in an external network to an internal communication device in an internal network through the external network, from an external-network address that has been assigned to the internal communication device using an addressing scheme for the external network, to an internal address that has been assigned to the internal communication device using an addressing scheme for the internal network. The apparatus transmits, to another apparatus, address information including the external-network address and identifier information for identifying the external communication device where the another apparatus is configured to translate a source address of a second packet that is transferred from the internal communication device to the external communication device, from the internal address to the external address. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034100 | LOOKUP FRONT END PACKET INPUT PROCESSOR - A packet processor provides for rule matching of packets in a network architecture. The packet processor includes a lookup cluster complex having a number of lookup engines and respective on-chip memory units. The on-chip memory stores rules for matching against packet data. A lookup front-end receives lookup requests from a host, and processes these lookup requests to generate key requests for forwarding to the lookup engines. As a result of the rule matching, the lookup engine returns a response message indicating whether a match is found. The lookup front-end further processes the response message and provides a corresponding response to the host. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034101 | Programmable Packet Processor With Flow Resolution Logic - A programmable packet switching controller has a packet buffer, a pattern match module, a programmable packet classification engine and an application engine. The packet classification engine has a decision tree-based classification logic for classifying a packet. The application engine has a number of programmable sub-engines arrayed in a pipelined architecture. The sub-engines include a source lookup engine, a destination lookup engine and a disposition engine, which are used to make a disposition decision for the inbound packets in a processing pipeline. | 02-07-2013 |
20130039365 | ADDRESS TRANSLATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An address translation apparatus translates an address included in a packet to relay the packet. The packet is transmitted between an external network and an internal network. The address translation apparatus includes a processor. The processor receives a packet transmitted from the internal network. The processor determines, based on a given condition, whether to perform address translation on the received packet. The processor translates, upon determining to perform address translation, a source address of the received packet from an internal address into an external address to obtain a translated packet and relays the translated packet. The processor relays, upon determining not to perform address translation, the received packet to an alternate translation apparatus without performing address translation. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039366 | Packet Classification - A packet classification system, methods, and corresponding apparatus are provided for enabling packet classification. A processor of a security appliance coupled to a network uses a classifier table having a plurality of rules, the plurality of rules having at least one field, to build a decision tree structure including a plurality of nodes, the plurality of nodes including a subset of the plurality of rules. The methods may produce wider, shallower trees that result in shorter search times and reduced memory requirements for storing the trees. | 02-14-2013 |
20130044749 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EXCHANGING INFORMATION AMONG EXCHANGE APPLICATIONS - In a system and method for performing message-based business processes among a plurality of applications, configuration data is stored in a data store in a gateway, the configuration data including information defining one or more simple transactions that can be performed by the gateway. A gateway message is received at the gateway, the gateway message including a gateway message header and a payload, the gateway message header including a routing slip block providing a template of a complex transaction in which the gateway message is participating, the complex transaction comprising one or more simple transactions performed in a defined order. The gateway executes at least one simple transaction in accordance with the template in the routing slip and the configuration data defining the one or more simple transactions. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044750 | Method of Processing Management Frame and Related Communication Device - A method of processing management frame for a first communication device in a network system is disclosed. The method comprises maintaining a device table including at least an identity of at least a communication device of the network system, and at least a medium access control (MAC) address corresponding to the identity, and determining whether to perform management frame transmission to a second communication device of the network system according to the existence of the identity of the second communication device in the device table. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044751 | PACKET PROCESSING IN MANAGED INTERCONNECTION SWITCHING ELEMENTS - Some embodiments provide a novel method for forwarding a packet at a first managed interconnection switching element in a managed network of interconnection switching elements. The method receives a packet from a source machine on a first network segment in a first network. The packet identifies a destination machine located on a second network segment in a second, different network. The method removes a context tag that identifies the first network segment. The method uses the identification of the first network segment to determine a logical switching element that connects at least the first and second network segments. The method encapsulates the packet with a logical context identifier that identifies a logical port of the logical switching element. The logical port corresponds to the second network segment. The method transmits the twice-encapsulated packet towards a second managed interconnection switching element at the second network. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044752 | FLOW GENERATION FROM SECOND LEVEL CONTROLLER TO FIRST LEVEL CONTROLLER TO MANAGED SWITCHING ELEMENT - A network control system that includes a first set of network controllers for (i) receiving a logical control plane definition of a logical switching element that couples to both a first set of network hosts in a first domain and a second set of network hosts in a second domain, (ii) translating the logical control plane definition of the logical switching element into a first set of flow entries in a first logical forwarding plane, and (iii) translating the first set of flow entries into a second set of flow entries in a second logical forwarding plane. The network control system includes a second set of network controllers in the first domain for (i) receiving a portion of the second set of flow entries and (ii) translating the portion of the second set of flow entries into a third set of flow entries in a physical control plane. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044753 | METHOD FOR CREATING STREAM FORWARDING ENTRY, AND DATA COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The present disclosure provide a method for creating a stream forwarding entry includes: receiving, by a data communication device, a packet; making statistics on the received packet to obtain a statistical value of a stream corresponding to the packet; judging whether the statistical value of the stream exceeds a preset threshold value; and if exceeds the preset threshold value, creating, by the data communication device, a stream forwarding entry for the stream corresponding to the packet, and performing stream forwarding for subsequent packets of the stream according to the stream forwarding entry. Through the present disclosure, the number of stream forwarding entries in a stream table is reduced, the required storage space is reduced, and the maintenance of the stream table is simplified; moreover, the data communication device is not vulnerable to attacks of denial of service and is highly secure. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044754 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR ACQUIRING MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL ADDRESS - In an Ethernet network, in order to reduce network resource occupancy in obtaining Medium/Media Access Control (MAC) address of a second terminal for a first terminal to enable the first terminal to send data to the second terminal, an embodiment of the present invention provide a method for acquiring a MAC address comprises the following steps: receiving a first address resolution protocol (ARP) broadcast packet from a first terminal; acquiring a MAC address of an ARP server; replacing the destination MAC address of the first ARP broadcast packet with the MAC address of the ARP server; and thereafter sending the first ARP broadcast packet to the ARP server to enable the ARP server to acquire the MAC address of the second terminal according to the first ARP broadcast packet and send an ARP reply packet including the MAC address of the second terminal to the first terminal. | 02-21-2013 |
20130058339 | NETWORK CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD - Some embodiments provide a controller for managing several managed switching elements that forward data in a network. The controller includes an interface for receiving input logical control plane data. It also includes a converter for converting the input logical control plane data to output logical forwarding plane data. The logical forwarding plane data for subsequent translation into a set of physical forwarding behaviors that direct the forwarding of data by the managed switching elements. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058340 | NETWORK CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD WITH TABLE MAPPING ENGINE - Some embodiments provide a controller for managing a plurality of managed switching elements that forward data through a network. The controller comprising a first set of tables for storing input logical control plane data, and a second set of tables for storing output logical forwarding plane data. It also includes a table mapping engine for mapping the input logical control plane data in the first set of tables to output logical forwarding plane data in the second set of tables by performing a set of database join operations on the input logical control plane data in the first set of tables. The logical forwarding plane data is subsequently translated into physical forwarding behaviors that direct the forwarding of data by the managed switching elements. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058341 | NETWORK CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD WITH PORT SECURITY CONTROLS - Port security in some embodiments is a technique to apply to a particular port of a logical switching element such that the network data entering and existing the logical switching element through the particular logical port have certain addresses that the switching element has restricted the logical port to use. For instance, a logical switching element may restrict a particular logical port to one or more certain network addresses. To enable a logical port of a logical switch for port security, the control application of some embodiments receives user inputs that designate a particular logical port and a logical switch to which the particular logical port belongs. The control application in some embodiments formats the user inputs into logical control plane data specifying the designation. The control application in some embodiments then converts the logical control plane data into logical forwarding data that specify port security functions. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058342 | LOGICAL PACKET PROCESSING PIPELINE THAT RETAINS STATE INFORMATION TO EFFECTUATE EFFICIENT PROCESSING OF PACKETS - Some embodiments provide a method of processing a packet through a logical switching element implemented by several managed switching elements. The method receives a packet for processing through a logical processing pipeline of the logical switching element. The method processes the packet through the logical processing pipeline. The method stores state information in the packet for indicating that the packet has been processed through the logical processing pipeline in order to prevent other managed switching elements from processing the packet through the logical processing pipeline. The method forwards the processed packet to a managed switching element of the several managed switching elements. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058343 | USE OF RICH CONTEXT TAGS IN LOGICAL DATA PROCESSING - For a logical switching element implemented across several managed switching elements, some embodiments provide a method that receives a packet for processing through a logical processing pipeline of the logical switching element. The method processes the packet through a first set of stages of the logical processing pipeline of the logical switching element. The method generates a set of context tag values for indicating that the packet has been processed through the first set of stages of the logical processing pipeline. The method forwards the packet to a managed switching elements of the several managed switching elements for the managed switching element to further process the packet based on the context tag of the packet. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058344 | ONE-HOP PACKET PROCESSING IN A NETWORK WITH MANAGED SWITCHING ELEMENTS - For a logical switching element implemented across several managed switching elements, some embodiments provide a method that receives a packet for processing through the logical switching element. The method performs a set of logical forwarding operations for determining a particular destination at the logical switching element to forward the packet. Based on the particular destination at the logical switching element, the method performs a set of physical forwarding operations for determining a destination at a managed switching element of the several managed switching elements that corresponds to the particular destination at the logical switching element. The method forwards the packet to the destination at the managed switching element. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058345 | Apparatus and Method for Establishing Tunnels Between Nodes in a Communication Network - Tunnels are established between nodes along a packet transfer route in a communication network so that a packet is transferred from a first relay node to a second relay node via one or more intermediate relay nodes using the established tunnels. An intermediate relay node receives, from an adjacent downstream relay node, a reply message storing relay-node addresses identifying the downstream relay node and at least one intermediate relay node between the downstream relay node and the first relay node. The intermediate relay node establishes a tunnel to the downstream relay node in association with the relay-node address of the downstream relay node, updates the reply message by removing the relay-node address of the down stream relay node from the reply message, and transfers the updated reply message to an adjacent upstream relay node along the packet transfer route. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058346 | Distributed Routing Domains in Multi-Tenant Datacenter Virtual Networks - A distributed routing domain is disclosed wherein each user or tenant can deploy a multi-subnet routing topology in a network-virtualized datacenter. A virtualization module implements the distributed routing domain and enforces a multi-subnet routing topology in a distributed fashion without requiring a standalone physical router or VM router. The topology and the routing rules are distributed in a network virtualization module on each hypervisor host, and collectively realize the multi-subnet topology for a virtual network over any physical network topology. | 03-07-2013 |
20130064246 | Packet Forwarding Using an Approximate Ingress Table and an Exact Egress Table - Techniques are provided for forwarding packets via an intermediate network device. A packet comprising a destination MAC address is received at a first port of a network device having a plurality of bi-directional ports. A second port of the network device to which the packet should be forwarded is identified through the use of at least an approximate ingress table at the first port comprising a plurality of compressed destination MAC addresses each having an associated egress port, and the packet is forwarded to the second port. At the second port, a subsequent network device to which the packet should be forwarded is identified through the use of an exact egress table at the second port including exact destination MAC addresses each associated with a network device connected to the second port, and the packet is forwarded to the subsequent network device. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064247 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING SOURCE ROLE INFORMATION - A method and device for processing source role information in which a source role tag is inserted into a packet as an inner VLAN tag of the packet and used to perform role based access control processing for the packet. | 03-14-2013 |
20130070768 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ASYNCHRONOUS HANDSHAKE-BASED INTERCONNECTS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provides techniques for a handshaking protocol, and corresponding circuit elements, for an asynchronous network. The techniques utilize a clock-less delay insensitive data encoding scheme. The proposed network may operate correctly regardless of the delay in the interconnecting wires. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070769 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IDENTIFICATION OF PACKET GATEWAYS SUPPORTING DIFFERENT SERVICE TYPES - The present invention provides a method and system for identification of the different packet gateways that support different types of services on their packet data networks. The method and system provides identification and addressing information to user equipment for one or more packet gateways that support different types of services, sometimes called QoS services. The identification and addressing information for the one or more packet gateways is provided in the present invention by and through a DNS server or an AAA server depending on the network architecture and the IP version supporting the communications with the mobile node. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070770 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR FORWARDING PACKET - The embodiments of the present invention provide a method, a device, and a system for forwarding a packet. The method includes: receiving an IPv6 packet sent by a gateway, and obtaining a flow label of the IPv6 packet, where the flow label of the IPv6 packet is corresponding to a link identity of customer premise equipment in one-to-one correspondence; decapsulating the IPv6 packet; performing network address translation on a decapsulated packet according to the flow label; and forwarding the decapsulated packet according to a translated network address. When multiple links between the gateway and an AFTR are corresponding to the same tunnel for network address translation, in the case that IP addresses of terminal users are overlapping or are the same, different terminal users can be distinguished, so that a terminal user that sends a packet can receive feedback, thus improving customer satisfaction. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070771 | Memory Saving Packet Modification - A computer-implemented method that includes creating a master copy of a header for all packets of a data transmission event, the master copy including a plurality of intact constant header information, the plurality of intact constant header information being constant for all packets of the data transmission event, storing unique header information for all packets of the data transmission event, the unique header information including information unique to at least one packet of the data transmission event, tokenizing identities of each packet of the data transmission event to create a tokenized packet ID for each packet, and indexing the stored unique header information based on the tokenizing. According to the method, at packet read-time, unique header information associated with the packet is overlayed onto the master copy to create a unique packet. | 03-21-2013 |
20130077630 | ENERGY EFFICIENT CONNECTIONLESS ROUTING WITH SIMPLE LOOKUP - An energy efficient connectionless routing method with simple lookup is disclosed for reducing the number of address lookups associated with a message packet. The energy efficient connectionless routing method with simple lookup includes determining a label sequence which will allow the message packet to traverse a plurality of MPLS domains and affixing the label sequence to the header of the message packet. This allows the message packet to traverse a plurality of MPLS domains without requiring a subsequent IP address lookup at every MPLS domain boundary. The energy efficient connectionless routing method with simple lookup is particularly useful for reducing power consumption associated with TCAM operations during IP address lookups. In addition, a Label Sequencing Edge Router is disclosed for performing the method. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077631 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING OF THE OBJECT-BASED AUDIO CONTENTS - The present invention relates to a system for transmitting and receiving audio, particularly, to a method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving of object-based audio contents, which packetizes audio objects having the same characteristic. To achieve the above, the present invention includes filtering a plurality of ESs according to common information, adding a packet header to the respective filtered ESs and generate ES packets, aggregating all the generated ES packets and then adding a multi-object packet header to the aggregated ES packets to generate an object packet, and multiplexing the generated object packet, packetizing the multiplexed object packet according to a transmitting media and transmitting the packetized object packet. | 03-28-2013 |
20130083797 | Link Aggregation Based on Port and Protocol Combination - A network switch suitable for receiving packets of information from and the packets of information to a communications network includes a plurality of physical ports, packet processing functionality and memory. The packet processing functionality operates on information stored in memory to determine the LAG, from among two or more LAGs, over which a packet received by the switch should be correctly forwarded. The switch memory stores a plurality of LAG tables, each one of which can include one or more entries comprising a physical port number and a packet parameter that are used by the packet processing functionality to determinately identify the correct LAG over which to forward a packet. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083798 | Sending Packets With Expanded Headers - In one embodiment, the present invention is directed to method for receiving a packet in a first agent, where the packet includes a first packet header with an expanded header indicator. Based on this indicator, the agent can determine if the packet includes one or more additional packet headers. If so, the agent can next determining if it supports information in the additional packet header based on a header identifier of the additional header. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 04-04-2013 |
20130089095 | PACKET DATA COMMUNICATIONS - An internet packet comprises a header field including a field identifying a source address of the internet packet, a field identifying the destination address of the internet packet and a next header field identifying whether an extension header follows the header and a type of the extension header. The extension header indicates a hop-by-hop option header including a router alert option header type indicating that the extension field is optional for a router to read, and a field providing information for a gateway support node of a packet radio system network. A gateway support node is provided with information, which may be required for example to support a mobile internet protocol (IP). By providing the router alert option field, a router is not required to read the remainder of the hop-by-hop option field. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089096 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING PROTOCOL CONNECTION IN PBB NETWORK AND BEB NODE - A method and system for managing protocol connection in a PBB network and a BEB node. A first BEB node in the PBB network receives a Pseudo Wire (PW) connection requesting message sent by a second BEB node which has a PBB instance. When it is determined according to the PW connection requesting message that the first BEB node has the same PBB instance as that of the second BEB node, the first BEB node sends a PW response message back to the second BEB node and establishes protocol connection between the first BEB node and the second BEB node for forwarding backbone frame. | 04-11-2013 |
20130094507 | PARALLEL PROCESSING OF NETWORK PACKETS - A packet processing circuit includes a plurality of header extraction circuits, and a scheduling circuit coupled to the plurality of header extraction circuits. The scheduling circuit is configured to receive one or more requests to extract header data of a respective packet from a data bus having a plurality of data lanes. In response to each request, the scheduling circuit determines a first subset of the plurality of data lanes that contain the respective header specified by the request, and assigns a respective one of the plurality of header extraction circuits to extract respective header data from the first subset of the plurality of data lanes. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094508 | Methods of and Apparatus for Managing Non-Congestion-Controlled Message Traffic in a Datacenter - Managing non-congestion-controlled message traffic in a datacenter. Any non-congestion-controlled packets originating in a sending server and intended for a receiving server are encapsulated in the sending server and transmitted through a virtual circuit having a message transport protocol with rate control. The packets are decapsulated in the receiving server. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094509 | OPEN COMMUNICATION METHOD IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - An open communication method between at least two sub-networks using a broker node. Each of the sub-networks has a different routable network addressing scheme. The method comprises receiving a packet for a specific application, the packet includes an application identifier, determining if the packet is to be relayed to another of the at least two sub-networks based upon the application identifier, determining if a node receiving the packet is a broker node, relaying the packet to a broker node if not a broker node and forwarding, by the broker node, the packet to at least one node in another of the at least two sub-networks. The node generating the packet communicates using a first of the at least two sub-networks. A broker node communicates using at least two of the at least two sub-networks via a corresponding routable network addressing schemes for each of the sub-networks. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094510 | MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL ADDRESS PROTECTION METHOD AND SWITCH - The present disclosure discloses a MAC address protection method and switch. A switch in a layer 2 ring network obtains network topology information of the layer 2 ring network, the network topology information includes a protection MAC address of a protected device, an identifier of a switch corresponding to the protection MAC address, and an identifier of each switch in the layer 2 ring network, wherein the protection MAC address is the MAC address of the protected device; and determines a local outgoing interface of the protection MAC address of the protected device according to the network topology information, establishes and stores an outgoing interface of an MAC entry corresponding to the protection MAC address according to the local outgoing interface of the protection MAC address, thereby ensuring the protected device to correctly send and receive messages to meet the topology change of the layer 2 ring network. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094511 | PACKET DIVERSION METHOD AND DEEP PACKET INSPECTION DEVICE - A packet diversion method and a DPI device are disclosed in the present invention. The method includes: receiving a packet, where the packet contains a user identifier; according to the user identifier and preset first correspondence between the user identifier and a service type, searching for the service type corresponding to the user identifier in the packet; adding an inner virtual local area network Vlan header to the packet according to the service type, preset second correspondence between a service type and a slave device identifier, and preset third correspondence between a slave device identifier and each bit in a diversion identifier field; and diverting the packet to a corresponding slave device according to the diversion identifier in the diversion identifier field. The inner Vlan header carrying the diversion identifier field is added to the packet, to indicate diversion of the packet in a same cluster. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094512 | Interworking Between Ethernet And MPLS - A network bridge configured to convey customer traffic between a customer equipment and any of an MPLS network and an Ethernet network is disclosed. The network bridge comprises a C-VLAN component, an S-VLAN component and an MPLS component. The C-VLAN component can receive an Ethernet frame that carries the customer traffic, and forward the Ethernet frame to the S-VLAN component or to the MPLS component in dependence of a C-VID value of the Ethernet frame. The MPLS component can, when the Ethernet frame is received from the C-VLAN component, add MPLS information to the Ethernet frame, and forward the Ethernet frame to the S-VLAN component. The S- VLAN component then forwards the Ethernet frame to any of the MPLS network and the Ethernet network. A related network core bridge, methods and computer-readable medium are also described. | 04-18-2013 |
20130100954 | Media Routing - A method and system for routing media from a source resource on a source appliance across a network to a destination resource on a destination appliance. The particular destination resource on a destination appliance can be specified. Alternatively, the particular destination appliance is specified but the particular resource on the destination appliance is not specified. An intermediate appliance having a resource for converting the media from a source media-type to a destination media-type can be further specified. A user interface is provided to allow a user to specify the source and destination of the media. A discovery process is provided to allow appliances to discover the other appliances and resources available on the network. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100955 | TECHNIQUE FOR PRIORITIZING TRAFFIC AT A ROUTER - A network traffic managing node of a communication network, such as a router or gateway, can implement a network traffic routing and bandwidth management mechanism. A first application associated with a first communication stream of a communication network is determined. A first maximum bandwidth is assigned to the first communication stream. The first maximum bandwidth is determined based on a first traffic class associated with the first application. A routing of the first communication stream is managed based, at least in part, on the first traffic class and the first maximum bandwidth. A second maximum bandwidth associated with a second traffic class is assigned to the first communication stream in response to determining a bandwidth associated with the first communication stream exceeds the first maximum bandwidth. A routing of the first communication stream is managed based on the second traffic class and the second maximum bandwidth. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100956 | ROUTING USING GLOBAL ADDRESS PAIRS - The present invention extends to methods, systems, and computer program products for routing using global address pairs. Embodiments of the invention use publicly routable Internet Protocol (“IP”) addresses to represent sites rather than individual hosts. Hosts can be represented by a global address pair, including site public IP address and a node private IP address. Nodes route packets to address processing modules using IP-in-IP encapsulation. An outer header contains a site public IP address and is destined to a site on inter-site links. An inner header contains a node private IP address and is destined to a private endpoint in intra-site links. In some embodiments, a site public IPv4 address and a node private IPv4 address are encoded into an IPv6 address. Use of an IPv6 address makes encoding of the two IPv4 address transparent to IPv6 applications. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100957 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, RELAY DEVICE, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An information processing system is provided which includes a plurality of networked relay nodes and a management node. Each of the relay nodes includes a transfer unit for transferring a received packet to another node in accordance with route control information, a storage unit for storing process rules, determination logic for determining whether the received packet is a process-target packet serving as a target to be processed in the relay node, processing logic for, upon receiving a process packet at the relay node, executing a process corresponding process-identifying information included in the packet on process data included in the packet in accordance with the process rules, and determination logic for determining a destination to which a result obtained by processing the process data is transferred. The process-target packet includes process-identifying information indicating a content of a process to be executed, and process-target data serving as a target of the process. | 04-25-2013 |
20130107884 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DISTRIBUTE NETWORK IP TRAFFIC | 05-02-2013 |
20130107885 | Server-Side Load Balancing Using Parent-Child Link Aggregation Groups | 05-02-2013 |
20130107886 | TRANSFERRING DATA IN A NETWORK | 05-02-2013 |
20130114598 | PACKET ORDERING BASED ON DELIVERY ROUTE CHANGES IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A hybrid network device can implement functionality to detect a change in a packet route associated with one or more packets sharing a common route, and to manage out-of-order packet arrival. In a hybrid communication network, a first network device can communicate with a second network device via a plurality of packet routes. The first network device can detect one or more route change indicators that are indicative of a change in a packet route between the first network device and the second network device from a first packet route to a second packet route based, at least in part, on a plurality of packets received from the second network device. Based on the route change indicators, it may be determined whether the plurality of packets were received according to a predetermined order and if the plurality of packets should be re-ordered based on the predetermined order. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114599 | PACKET STEERING - A method for steering packets, including receiving a packet and determining parameters to be used in steering the packet to a specific destination, in one or more initial steering stages, based on one or more packet specific attributes. The method further includes determining an identity of the specific destination of the packet in one or more subsequent steering stages, governed by the parameters determined in the one or more initial stages and one or more packet specific attributes, and forwarding the packet to the determined specific destination. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114600 | INTEGRATED FIBRE CHANNEL SUPPORT IN AN ETHERNET FABRIC SWITCH - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch. The switch includes a packet processor and a device management module. During operation, the packet processor constructs a notification message containing a Transparent Interconnection of Lots of Links (TRILL) Routing Bridge (RBridge) identifier associated with a Fibre Channel router. The device management module operates in conjunction with the packet processor and terminates TRILL forwarding for a received TRILL packet with the RBridge identifier as an egress RBridge identifier. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114601 | PHYSICAL LAYER PROCESSING OF TIMESTAMPS AND MAC SECURITY - A physical layer device provides both timestamp processing and security processing. The timestamp processing may be PTP processing according to IEEE Std. 1588 and/or OAM processing according to ITU-T Recommendation Y.1731. The security processing may be MACsec processing according to IEEE Std. 802.1AE. The timestamp processing may delay some packets to avoid impairing accuracy of timing information. For example, the accuracy of timing information could be impaired when a packet containing the timing information is delay due to additional bits added to a preceding packet to include a security tag and integrity check value. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114602 | COMMUNICATING A MESSAGE REQUEST TRANSACTION TO A LOGICAL DEVICE - A general input/output communication port implements a communication stack that includes a physical layer, a data link layer and a transaction layer. The transaction layer includes assembling a packet header for a message request transaction to one or more logical devices. The packet header includes a format field to indicate the length of the packet header and to further specify whether the packet header includes a data payload, a subset of a type field to indicate the packet header relates to the message request transaction and a message field. The message field includes a message to implement the message request transaction. The message includes at least one message that is selected from a group of messages. The group of messages to include a message to unlock a logical device, a message to reset a logical device, a message to indicate a correctable error condition, a message to indicate an uncorrectable error condition, a message to indicate a fatal error condition, a message to report a bad request packet, a message to indicate power management and a message to emulate an interrupt signal. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114603 | METHOD FOR DIVERTING PACKET MULTIPLE TIMES, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus, and a system for diverting a packet multiple times between a master network device and multiple slave devices. The method includes: receiving a packet sent by a first slave device, where the packet includes an MPLS header that carries multi-diversion information, the multi-diversion information includes a multi-diversion identifier field, and the multi-diversion identifier field is used to indicate a slave device to which the packet needs to be diverted; determining, according to the multi-diversion identifier field, a second slave device to which the packet needs to be diverted; and sending the packet to the second slave device. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114604 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING CELL SWITCH - The disclosure discloses a method and apparatus for controlling information element switch. The method comprises the following steps: a switch board determines that it has received a link request information element from each ingress line card, wherein the link request information element carries the request time stamp information; the switch board performs link allocation according to each request time stamp information, wherein the link is the link connecting the switch board with each egress line card; and each ingress line card transmits a data information element according to the result of the link allocation. With the disclosure, the problems of time delay and jitter in an information element switch process are solved, the input end flow of the switch board can also be controlled, and the requirement for the egress line card cache and difficulty in data packet recombination are reduced. | 05-09-2013 |
20130121337 | ROUTING COMMUNICATIONS BASED ON NODE AVAILABILITY - A node receives information that is to be transmitted to a destination. Upon receipt of the information, the node may query a busy device list to determine an availability of one or more neighbor nodes. The node may then identify a neighbor node that, according to the busy device list, is available to receive transmissions and is capable of propagating the information to the destination. The node may then transmit the information to the identified neighbor node. | 05-16-2013 |
20130128890 | Selecting a Link of a Link Group based on Contents of a Concealed Header - Methods, devices, and systems for selecting a link of a link group based on contents of a concealed header are disclosed. A network node operating method includes a first network node receiving a packet and concluding that a link group connecting the first network node to a second network node will forward the packet to the second network node. The method further includes determining that the packet includes a tunnel header and an original header concealed by the tunnel header, selecting one link from among a set of parallel links of the link group based at least on one or more fields of the concealed original header, and forwarding the packet to the second network node via the selected link. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128891 | CONNECTION IDENTIFIER ASSIGNMENT AND SOURCE NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION - A controller of a network control system for configuring several middlebox instances is described. The middlebox instances implement a middlebox in a distributed manner in several hosts. The controller assigns a first set of identifiers to a first middlebox instance that associates an identifier in the first set with a first packet. The controller assigns a second set of identifiers to a second middlebox instance that associates an identifier in the second set with a second packet. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128892 | METHOD AND SYSTEMS FOR ROUTING PACKETS FROM A GATEWAY TO AN ENDPOINT - A method for routing packets from a gateway to an endpoint includes the step of associating a private internet protocol (IP) address with an endpoint having a public IP address. A packet addressed to the private IP address of the endpoint is captured. A policy is applied to the packet. The packet is transmitted to the public IP address of the endpoint, responsive to the application of the policy to the packet. | 05-23-2013 |
20130136124 | PARALLELLY COUPLED STACKABLE NETWORK SWITCHING DEVICE - A network switching device includes at least two stacking ports, each stacking port being connectable via a stacking cable to a stack including at least one external network switching device. The device further includes an internal communication medium coupled to the stacking ports and capable of transmitting a frequency division multiplexed signal between the stacking ports. The device further includes a network switch and an interface to enable communication between the network switch and the internal communication medium. The interface includes a parallel coupling to the internal communication medium such that a signal with one carrier frequency being communicated between the network switch and the internal communication medium does not interfere with transmission between the two stacking ports of a signal with a different carrier frequency. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136125 | BANDWIDTH OPTIMIZATION FOR REMOTE DESKTOP PROTOCOL - The processing of a first data stream to generate a second stream conforming to a remote desktop protocol (RDP) is described. Operations may include facilitating storage of first data from the first stream at a first index indicated in the first stream, facilitating retrieval of second data from a second index included in the first stream, and facilitating generation of the second stream conforming to the RDP and including the first and second data. Additionally, the processing of a third data stream conforming to the RDP to stream a fourth stream is described. Operations include facilitating processing of the third stream to identify a package data unit (PDU), facilitating storing of a hash value corresponding to the PDU, and facilitating generating an altered PDU for inclusion in the fourth stream and including an index identifying a location in memory storing the hash value. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136126 | DATA CENTER NETWORK SYSTEM AND PACKET FORWARDING METHOD THEREOF - A data center network system and a packet forwarding method thereof are provided. The data center network system includes a virtual bridge and an address resolution protocol (ARP) server. The virtual bridge intercepts an ARP request having an identification field and a destination IP address field and adds a corresponding virtual data center identification to the identification field of the ARP request and redirecting the ARP request to the ARP server. Additionally, the ARP server queries a corresponding MAC address according to an IP address recorded in the destination IP address field of the ARP request and the corresponding VDCID recorded in the identification field of the ARP request, and transmits the corresponding MAC address in response to the ARP request. Accordingly, the same private IP address can be reused in the data center network system. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136127 | System and Method for Efficient Matching of Regular Expression Patterns Across Multiple Packets - A system and method for efficient matching regular expression patterns across multiple packets. A deep packet inspection system can be embodied in a switch ASIC using a flow tracker and a signature matching engine. The flow tracker can be positioned in an ingress portion of the switch ASIC at a location where packets in a bi-direction flow can be observed and recorded. The flow tracker generates a signature match request that is forwarded to a signature matching engine in an auxiliary pipeline. The signature matching engine is enabled to perform cross-packet signature matching using signature matching state machines and reports the signature matching results to the flow tracker using a response packet that is sent to the ingress pipeline. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136128 | ENCAPSULATING TRAFFIC WHILE PRESERVING PACKET CHARACTERISTICS - A method for encapsulating a packet of data from a data flow is described. The packet comprises a flow network header for identifying a source network address and a target destination network address and a flow transport network header for identifying a source port and a target destination port. The method comprises the following steps. The flow network header is replaced with an encapsulation network header for identifying an encapsulation network address and a decapsulation network address. The decapsulation network address specifies the address of a decapsulation node. The flow transport header is replaced with an encapsulation transport header for identifying an encapsulation port and a decapsulation port. The decapsulation port is configured to be the same as the target destination port. A method for decapsulating the encapsulated packet, as well as network nodes configured to implement the methods, are also described. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136129 | ZERO-CYCLE ROUTER FOR NETWORKS ON-CHIP - A router includes a plurality of virtual networks, a plurality of output links, at least one decoder and arbitration circuitry. Each virtual network has a plurality of virtual network inputs and a plurality of virtual network outputs. Each virtual network output is associated with an output link. The decoder decodes a header of a data unit received on a virtual network of one of the virtual network inputs. The decoder generates a first request and a second request. The first request is for the allocation of a virtual network output of the virtual network to the virtual network input. The second request is for the allocation of an output link associated with the virtual network output to the virtual network output. The arbitration circuitry performs arbitration of the first request and arbitration of the second request in parallel. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136130 | RELAY SERVER AND RELAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A relay server stores a first routing target address that is an address to which the relay server can transfer a packet and a second routing target address to which another relay server located in another LAN can transfer a packet. The relay server stores an initial communication setting and a current communication setting. The relay server transmits only the first routing target address that is permitted in the initial communication setting to another relay server and receives the second routing target address from another relay server, to establish a routing session with another relay server. The relay server registers the initial communication setting as the current communication setting. The relay server performs routing control of the packet based on pieces of address filter information about the relay server and another relay server. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136131 | RELAY DEVICE AND ACTIVATION METHOD OF ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A relay device for relaying a communication packet between a first network and a second network. The relay device stores a first correlation information correlating an Internet Protocol (IP) address assigned to an electronic device in the first network to a Media Access Control (MAC) address of the electronic device. The relay device then determines a MAC address of a forwarding destination of a specific communication packet for enabling a service provided by the electronic device after activation of the electronic device by referring to at least the first correlation information using destination information in the specific communication packet, when the specific communication packet sent from the second network toward the first network is received by the relay device; and transmits an activation request packet to the electronic device using the determined MAC address. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136132 | POWER LINE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND AN INTELLIGENT METER - A power line communication system including a plurality of intelligent devices in communication with a power line and operable to monitor energy usage at a site and communicate usage data onto the power line, and a controller also in communication with the power line, wherein each intelligent device maintains a routing table identifying a first set of other intelligent devices downstream of it relative to the controller that it can communicate with directly and identifying a second set of other intelligent devices downstream of it relative to the controller that it can communicate with through one or more of the first set of other intelligent devices. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136133 | DISTRIBUTED VIRTUAL NETWORK GATEWAYS - Computerized methods, systems, and computer-readable media are provided for distributing virtualized gateway functionality to multiple nodes within a physical network. Initially, drivers that carry out the gateway functionality are provisioned to cooperate with endpoints instantiated on the network nodes, while a directory service is implemented to maintain a mapping between virtual internet protocol (IP) addresses and location-dependent addresses, as well as a table enumerating transformation actions according to known pathways connecting the endpoints within a network. In operation, the directory service replies to requests from the driver (carrying source and destination IP addresses of data packets) with the appropriate location-dependent addresses (utilizing the mapping) and the appropriate transformation action(s) (utilizing the table). The transformation action(s) include rewriting headers of the data packets to include the location-dependent addresses, encapsulating the data packets as inner data packets within respective outer data packets, or configuring the data packets with a tunneling protocol. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136134 | SEQUENCING PACKETS FROM MULTIPLE THREADS - A device may reserve a slot for a received packet in a packet ordering queue (POQ), convey the packet to one of a plurality of threads for processing, obtain the packet from the one of the plurality of threads after the packet has been processed, organize the packet in the POQ in accordance with a position of the reserved slot, and release the packet from the POQ if the reserved slot is a head of the POQ. | 05-30-2013 |
20130142201 | CONNECTING ON-PREMISE NETWORKS WITH PUBLIC CLOUDS - A computer system for encapsulating a packet between a customer premise for delivery to customer resources within a public cloud data center. The computer system comprises a shim gateway. The shim gateway comprises a plurality of customer specific shim components. The shim gateway is configured to receive a packet from a customer premise. The packet has a VLAN tag. The packet identifies a tenant within a designated virtual network for the customer. The designated virtual network is within the public cloud data center. The shim gateway is further configured to encapsulate the packet into an encapsulated packet. Encapsulation includes mapping the VLAN tag to a destination network address of a tenant gateway for the customer. The tenant gateway is in the designated virtual network. The shim gateway is further configured to forward the encapsulated packet to the tenant gateway in the designated virtual network for delivery to the identified tenant. | 06-06-2013 |
20130148662 | MAC LEARNING IN A TRILL NETWORK - A switch of a data network implements both a bridge and a virtual bridge. In response to receipt of a data frame by the switch from an external link, the switch performs a lookup in a data structure using a source media access control (SMAC) address specified by the data frame. The switch determines if the external link is configured in a link aggregation group (LAG) and if the SMAC address is newly learned. In response to a determination that the external link is configured in a LAG and the SMAC address is newly learned, the switch associates the SMAC with the virtual bridge and communicates the association to a plurality of bridges in the data network. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148663 | Method to Carry FCoE Frames Over A TRILL Based Network - An apparatus for forwarding an Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) data frame into an Ethernet network comprising a processor configured to receive a data frame on a input port, obtain a first destination address and a virtual local area network identifier (VID), determine whether the first destination address and the VID matches an entry within a forwarding table, construct a key when the first destination address and VID matches the entry and the data frame is a FCoE frame, and forward the data frame as an outgoing data frame via an output port when the key matches a rule that permits forwarding the data frame. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148664 | METHOD FOR GENERATING AN ADDRESS FIELD, METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING ELECTRONIC MESSAGE AND DATA PACKET - A simple and flexible method for generating an address field for an electronic message involves forming first and second address part from a string with several characters, such that the second address part denotes those characters of an address whose value is determined by the corresponding character in the first address part and/or denote those characters of the address whose values are variable and generating an address field from the first and the second address parts. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148665 | Differentiated Handling of Network Traffic using Network Address Translation - In order to allow efficient differentiated handling of network traffic in a network section, a network address translator performs network address translation on incoming data packets to be transmitted into the network section and/or on outgoing data packets transmitted from the network section. In the incoming data packets, the network address translation replaces a source network address with a replacement network address. In the outgoing data packets, a replacement network address is included in place of a destination address, and the network address translation replaces the replacement network address with the destination network address. In each case, the replacement network address is selected according to a traffic class of the data packet. In the network section, differentiated handling of the data packets on the basis of the replacement network address is provided. | 06-13-2013 |
20130156035 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DOMAIN BASED PACKET FORWARDING - Disclosed are an apparatus and a method for swapping headers for authenticating policy based domains and tracing paths at the time of high-reliable data plane transmission. The method includes receiving packets forwarded through predetermined paths, confirming whether the received packets are normal packets, determining whether the path identification information corresponding to the paths of the received packets is present in a header information storage unit of a domain receiving the packets, swapping the headers included in the packets to swapping headers of the header information storage unit by using the identification information if it is determined that the path identification information is present, and correcting the path tracing information. By this configuration, degradation in data plane performance due to the lengths of headers can be solved. | 06-20-2013 |
20130156036 | ANALYSIS OF NETWORK PACKETS USING A GENERATED HASH CODE - A technique for analyzing network packets includes receiving, by a network processor, a network packet having a packet header including address and control information. A set of bytes are extracted, using the network processor, from the packet header and a set of input bits for generating a hash code are derived, using the network processor, from the set of bytes. Finally, the hash code is generated using the input bits. | 06-20-2013 |
20130156037 | NETWORK RELAY APPARATUS - The network relay apparatus is provided. The network relay apparatus includes: a main controller; a relay processor; and, a network interface unit configured to include: a plurality of line interfaces to which physical lines are respectively connected and send and receive a packet to and from outside of the network relay apparatus; a data storage configured to store circuit data; a programmable logic device by with a logic circuit having a predetermined function is realized; a configuration circuit configured to direct the programmable logic device to configure the logic circuit using the circuit data; and a state controller provided in a circuit structure other than the programmable logic device to control state of each of the plurality of line interfaces to one of an active state which allows data transmission and reception and a standby state which prohibits data transmission and reception. | 06-20-2013 |
20130156038 | Differentiated Handling of Data Traffic with Adaptation of Network Address Lookup - Differentiated Handling of Data Traffic with Adaptation of Network Address Lookup in a method of differentiated handling of data traffic, the data traffic is related to a network resource and is preceded by a lookup procedure for obtaining a network address of the network resource. A message of the lookup procedure is processed for adapting the lookup procedure. Due to the adaptation, the lookup procedure returns a network address of a replacement network resource. The replacement network resource is capable of replacing the network resource in communication of data packets of the data traffic. On the basis of the network address of the replacement network resource, differentiated handling of the data packets in said communication with the replacement network resource is accomplished. | 06-20-2013 |
20130163594 | Overlay-Based Packet Steering - Network topology independent service deployment techniques, referred to as overlay-based packet steering techniques, are provided. In one example, a server destined packet is intercepted by an in-path network device enabled as a service classifier. The service classifier encapsulates the packet and inserts the packet into a service path to a service virtualization endpoint front ending one or more service nodes. In other words, the service virtualization endpoint receives the service-directed packet on an overlay-based service path. The service-directed packet includes a service header and a service overlay tunnel encapsulation. The service virtualization endpoint inspects the service header in the service-directed packet to identify a first service node to which the service-directed packet should be forwarded and, based on the inspection, forwards the service-directed packet, on the overlay-based service path, to the first service node. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163595 | PACKET CLASSIFICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CLASSIFYING PACKET THEREOF - Disclosed is a packet processing device which includes a packet processor Classifying a packet according to a region needed to search and providing a search key corresponding to the classified packet; a search key distributing unit decoding the search key to classify an address-based search key and a content-based search key; an address-based content addressable memory (hereinafter, referred to as CAM) unit performing an address-based search operation according to the address-based search key; a content-based CAM unit performing a content-based search operation according to the content-based search key; and a packet forwarding unit processing an output toward a port corresponding to a packet transferred from the packet processor, based on results searched according to the address-based search operation and the content-based search operation. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163596 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND NETWORK DEVICE FOR PROCESSING LAYER 2 NETWORK LOOP - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for processing a Layer 2 network loop, where the method includes: receiving a packet, and obtaining a source MAC address of the packet; when a latest port among ports that are associated with the source MAC address is inconsistent with a receiving port of the packet, determining that transition of the source MAC address occurs once; when the number of times of transition of the source MAC address reaches a preset transition threshold, sending a detection packet respectively through the ports that participate in the transition of the source MAC address; and when the detection packet is received, determining a port that receives the detection packet as a port at which a loop is generated. The present invention further provides an apparatus and a network device. By using the method, a port at which a loop occurs can be precisely determined. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163597 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a communication device including a communication control unit that inserts, into a destination field of a data packet, intermediate node designation information designating an intermediate node different from a destination node of the data packet on a path to the destination node, and a transmission unit that transmits the data packet into which the intermediate node designation information is inserted. | 06-27-2013 |
20130170493 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO INCREASE FORWARDING SILICON FUNCTIONALITY THROUGH PACKET MANIPULATION - A packet preprocessing device is used in conjunction with a non-programmable packet forwarding processor (NLFP) to apply a different system function to received data packets than the function normally applied by the NLFP on the packets. Received data packets are pre-processed (e.g., modifying, manipulating, altering, spoofing, etc.) in order to enable, or cause, NLFPs that process the data packets to provide, in effect, a system-level behavior on the packets that is different from the system-level behavior for which the NLFP is/was conventionally designed. The data packet is “pre-processed” to change or manipulate the data packet, and then the NLFP processes the pre-processed data packet in accordance with its conventional function(s) which alters the overall function applied to the data packet. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170494 | OPERATING AN INFINIBAND NETWORK HAVING NODES AND AT LEAST ONE IB SWITCH - To improve efficiency of systems operating on internet protocol (IP) over Infiniband (IB) networks, mechanisms are provided for operating a system including a plurality of nodes, each connected to at least one IB switch. A determination is made whether an IP address of a node is included in a first level of a global ARP cache. An IP over IB GUID corresponding to the IP address of the node is identified. A determination is made whether an entry in a second level of the global ARP cache includes the identified IP over IB GUID of the node, and corresponding the IP over IB GUID of the node to IB address information of the node. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170495 | SWITCHING SYSTEM, SWITCHING CONTROL SYSTEM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A switch system realizes extension of the number of entries of an open flow table by using tables in a switch as existing resources. Specifically, the switch configures an open flow table by logically combining a plurality of tables, each of which defines processing to a given packet, based on a condition and a processing content defined in each table. The switch refers to the open flow table to determine the processing content to a reception packet. The switch executes the processing of the reception packet based on the determined processing content. | 07-04-2013 |
20130177019 | SCALING IPV4 AT LARGE DATACENTERS WITH DEVICE LEVEL AGGREGATION - Systems and methods are provided to support a large number of hosts while keeping the size of the FIB CAM low. Higher scalability may be achieved by consuming less FIB CAM space as hosts are added to a network. An L3 switching module may be provided capable of supporting a large number of virtual machines and/or hosts while maintaining a small FIB CAM size on a multiple device virtual switching system with device level aggregation. | 07-11-2013 |
20130177020 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD - Each edge switch counts the number of times that a first-arrival packet of the same packets was received for each port, and after a predetermined time elapsed, a main edge switch that is determined based on the transmission source and destination MAC addresses identifies a port based on the number of times, and registers the identified port in a table of the main edge switch with the transmission source MAC address. On the other hand, a sub-edge switch clears the number of times once after the predetermined time elapsed, and counts the number of times again. After that, when the predetermined time elapsed again, similar to the main edge switch, the sub-edge switch identifies a port based on the number of times, and registers the identified port in a table of the sub-edge switch with the transmission source MAC address. | 07-11-2013 |
20130177021 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A node functions as an inter-ring connection node connected to an inter-ring connection link in a communication system including a plurality of inter-ring connection links connected between adjacent ring networks. The node includes: a flow-information-pass determination unit that decides which of the inter-ring connection links a reception frame passes through, based on flow information that is stored in the frame for identifying flow to which the frame belongs; and a forwarding-destination-port decision unit that decides that a forwarding destination of the reception frame is an inter-ring connection link to which the own node is connected when the inter-ring connection link decided by the flow-information-pass determination unit is the inter-ring connection link to which the own node is connected, in the case where a destination of the reception frame is in an adjacent ring network. | 07-11-2013 |
20130182708 | Network Appliance with Integrated Local Area Network and Storage Area Network Extension Services - Techniques and a network edge device are provided herein to extend local area networks (LANs) and storage area networks (SANs) beyond a data center while converging the associated local area network and storage area network host layers. A packet is received at a device in a network. It is determined if the packet is routed to a local or remote storage area network or local area network. In response to determining that the packet routed to a remote storage area network, storage area network extension services are performed with respect to the packet in order to extend the storage area network on behalf of a remote location. In response to determining that the packet is routed to a local local area network traffic, local area network extension services are performed with respect to the packet in order to extend the local area network on behalf of the remote location. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182709 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RBRIDGE HOP-BY-HOP COMPRESSION AND FRAME AGGREGATION - Some embodiments relate to a network comprising two RBridges connected by a link where the two RBridges are not the ingress and egress RBridge for said frames, wherein said RBridges automatically exchange information as to their support of hop-by-hop reversible frame aggregation, reversible header compression, and reversible data compression, and wherein if both RBridges support any or all of these features in the same fashion, one or more of said features are automatically applied to appropriate frames at the transmitting RBridge and removed at the receiving RBridge, increasing the throughput of the link. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182710 | METHODS, APPARATUS AND ARTICLES OF MANUFACTURE TO MANIPULATE PACKET ROUTING - Example methods, apparatus and articles of manufacture to manipulate packet routing are disclosed. A disclosed example method includes receiving a first route advertisement from a first provider edge router, the first route advertisement including next-hop routing information associated with a destination and a label associated with an interface of the first provider edge router; modifying the next-hop routing information to form first modified next-hop routing information, the first modified next-hop routing information to redirect a packet addressed to the destination; and sending a second route advertisement to a second provider edge router, the second route advertisement including the first modified next-hop routing information and the label. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182711 | NETWORK SYSTEM AND FRAME COMMUNICATION METHOD - A network system has: a communication device configured to perform frame transmission and reception; a network configured to transfer the frame; a gateway connected between the communication device and the network; and a controller configured to perform management of the communication device and the network. The frame is classified into a control frame for communicating control information necessary for communication and a data frame for communicating data between communication devices. The gateway determines whether a frame received from a source communication device is the control frame or the data frame, forwards the control frame to the controller, and forwards the data frame to the network. The controller performs the management based on the control frame received from the gateway. The network transfers the data frame received from the gateway to a destination communication device without through the controller. | 07-18-2013 |
20130188641 | ADDRESS TRANSLATION - An apparatus, method, system and computer-readable medium are provided for converting traffic of a first communication type to traffic of one or more additional communication types. In some embodiments, the communication types may comprise IP communications, such as IPv4 and IPv6 communications. In some embodiments, multicast communications may be supported. For example, one or more tunnels or channels may be established to support transmitting data, such as content, to one or more destination addresses. In some embodiments, a destination address may be associated with a user device. One or more messages may comprise an address that may be extracted by a device, such as a router, to determine a destination. The one or more messages may comprise a request for service or a request to join a service group. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188642 | System and Method for Deterministic I/O with Ethernet Based Industrial Networks - A networking system is discussed. The system may be used for industrial networks, where deterministic behavior is often valued. Bounded message travel times may be achieved for a first set of network traffic. Additional traffic may be routed over the networking system without interfering with the message travel times associated with the first set of network traffic. Systems and methods for assigning priority to various sets of network traffic are discussed. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188643 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HYBRID PACKET/FABRIC SWITCH - A hybrid data center switching system includes a first switching device, a routing/switching device, a core switching device and communication links. The first switching device has a plurality of external packet interfaces and a plurality of external fabric interfaces. The external packet interfaces are configured to receive and transmit data packets in accordance with a standards-based packet protocol. The external fabric interfaces are configured to receive and transmit data packets in accordance with a fabric protocol. The routing/switching device is coupled to the plurality of external packet interfaces via a first communications link. The core switching device has a packet interface and a fabric interface. The packet interface is coupled to the routing/switching device via a second communications link. A third communications link between the external fabric interfaces and the fabric interface of the core switching device is operable for transporting data packets in accordance with the fabric protocol. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188644 | INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM NETWORK, AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention provide an Internet Protocol multimedia subsystem network, and a data transmission method and apparatus, which are used in the field of communications technologies. The data transmission method which is used in the IMS includes: performing tunnel encapsulation for an RTP packet to obtain a tunnel packet, where the tunnel packet includes a record unit, and a plurality of RTP packets are encapsulated in each record unit; and sending the tunnel packet to a peer end over a tunnel connected to the peer end. According to the embodiments of the present invention, the additional bandwidth caused by tunnel encapsulation is reduced, the bandwidth of a single packet is lowered, and the user experience and service access capabilities are improved. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188645 | Media Access Control Bridging in a Mesh Network - A network comprising a switch configured to learn a source address (SA) for a source node with a source port that receives a frame comprising the SA if the SA is not previously learned on another port and to subsequently forward any frame comprising a destination address (DA) for a destination node that matches the learned SA on the source port associated with the SA. A network comprising a switch configured to flood a frame received on a receiving port if the frame comprises a DA that is not previously learned on a source port and to distinguish the flooded frame from other forwarded frames by labeling the flooded frame, wherein the frame is flooded on a plurality of ports. A method comprising disabling a plurality of filtering database (FDB) entries that correspond to a plurality of addresses that are associated with a port, and sending the addresses in a control frame. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188646 | METROPOLITAN AREA NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A metropolitan area network (MAN) communications method, a metropolitan area server, a node switch, a node server, and a MAN communication system for solving the incapability of an IP network in ensuring transmission quality. The communications method comprises: a piece of MAN equipment accessing a MAN, the metropolitan area server in the MAN allocating for the network accessing equipment a protocol tag and a MAN address; the MAN equipment comprising the node switch and the node server; the protocol tag being used as a description of the connection between the MAN equipment and the metropolitan area server; for each cross MAN service request, the metropolitan area server allocating a data tag of the corresponding service: the data tag being used as a description of the connection among the service node related to the service. This invention is applicable in multimedia transmission, and is capable of ensuring a stable transmission rate, thereby avoiding delays. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188647 | COMPUTER SYSTEM FABRIC SWITCH HAVING A BLIND ROUTE - A fabric switch includes ports, a blind route determination function component, a location function component, and a routing function component. Packets are received and forwarded via the ports. The blind route determination function component determines whether a port at which a packet is received is configured for a blind route, the location function component provides for determining a location of routing information within the packet based at least in part on the input port at which the packet was received if a blind route is not defined for the port. The routing function component provides for determining an output port as a routing function based at least in part on the contents of the location, or the existence of a blind route. | 07-25-2013 |
20130195108 | Communication Method and Server of Transmission Control Protocol - This disclosure provides methods and servers to transmit data packets via Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) connections. In some aspects, transmitting data packets includes receiving a data packet from a first application on a first server. The data packet is analyzed to determine a destination address associated with a second server. The data packet is transmitted based on the address associated with the second server. In some aspects, transmitting data packets includes receiving a data packet from a second application on a second server. The data packet is analyzed to determine the destination address associated with a first application on the first server. The data packet is transmitted based on the address associated with the first application. In some aspects, transmitting data packets includes a flow control mechanism to control data transmission. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195109 | NETWORK GATEWAY APPARATUS - A network gateway apparatus which adds encryption to easily implement secure communication without affecting network environment settings includes two network interface cards to communicate on two networks. The processor of the network gateway apparatus initializes communications through the network interface cards and uses a TCP/IP protocol stack to communicate through the network interface cards. When a packet is received by one of the network interface cards, the processor replaces the origin MAC and IP addresses and the destination MAC and IP addresses with temporary values. Then the processor encrypts the payload. The packet is sent to the TCP/IP protocol stack, which sends the packet to one of the two network interface cards according to the temporary values. The MAC an IP addresses of the final destination of the packet are rewritten to the packet and the packet is transmitted. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195110 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL DEVICE, METHOD FOR SETTING PROCESSING RULES, AND PROGRAM - A communication system includes: a plurality of nodes provided with a packet processing unit that processes a received packet in accordance with a processing rule associating a process to be applied to a packet and a matching rule for identifying a packet to which the process is to be applied; a trunk port management unit that manages a trunking link in a network including the nodes; and a path control unit that determines whether or not to use the trunking link, in accordance with a characteristic of a packet for which a setting of a processing rule is requested by a given node, and in a case of using the trunking link, selects some trunking link according to a prescribed rule. The control device calculates a packet forwarding path including the selected link, and sets a processing rule to implement the packet forwarding path for nodes on the packet forwarding path. | 08-01-2013 |
20130201989 | STATELESS LOAD BALANCER IN A MULTI-NODE SYSTEM FOR TRANSPARENT PROCESSING WITH PACKET PRESERVATION - Stateless load balancing of network packets within a system avoids detection by a network client or end user for deep packet inspection or other bump-in-the-wire applications. At least one header field of a received packet is used in generating a hash value. The hash value is used to identify a processing resource within the system for processing the received packet. Before being sent to the identified resource, the received packet is encapsulated with a new header that includes an indication of ingress port. The encapsulation does not modify the original packet. On a return path from the identified processing resource, the ingress port is determined from the encapsulated packet, the encapsulated packet is decapsulated to obtain a recovered packet that is identical to the received packet, and the recovered packet is forwarded to the network through an egress port as determined from the recovered ingress port. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201990 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF ACCESSING NETWORK FOR ACCESS NETWORK DEVICE - A method for an access network device to access a network is disclosed, which comprises: powering on an access switch, and setting in its internal downlink protocol packet address table that all downlink protocol packets are to be oriented to a CPU module; receiving, by the access switch, a downlink protocol packet sent from a node server and orienting the downlink protocol packet to the CPU module of the access switch, and generating, by the CPU module, an uplink protocol packet and sending the uplink protocol packet to the node server, wherein the downlink protocol packet contains an access network address that is to be allocated; sending, by the node server, a network access command to the access switch, wherein the network access command contains an access network address of the access switch, and the access network address is the access network address to be allocated; and updating, by the access switch, its internal downlink protocol packet address table, as orienting only a protocol packet with a destination address being its own access network address to the CPU module. The present invention can guarantee a stable transmission rate of the data packet transmission and avoid time delay, thereby guaranteeing the quality of the network transmission. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201991 | Triggering Bandwidth Reservation and Priority Remarking - In one embodiment, a reservation proxy monitors for received connectivity check messages or beginning-of-media-flow indication messages. When either type of message is observed, the reservation proxy requests resource allocation for a media flow associated with the received message. The amount of resource allocation requested may be coordinated by exchanging messages with a call controller or policy server for one of the endpoints of the media flow, or the amount of resource allocation may be identified within the received message. | 08-08-2013 |
20130208721 | PACKET ROUTING WITH ANALYSIS ASSIST FOR EMBEDDED APPLICATIONS SHARING A SINGLE NETWORK INTERFACE OVER MULTIPLE VIRTUAL NETWORKS - Techniques are provided for packet routing in a distributed network switch. The distributed network switch includes multiple switch modules operatively connected to one another, and each switch module includes multiple bridge elements and a management controller. In one embodiment, a shared interface routing (SIR) framework is provided that includes an analysis and bifurcation layer, at least one packet interface, and an analysis assist layer. A packet is received over a first logical network and via a physical port, the packet being destined for at least a first application executing on the management controller. The analysis assist layer analyzes the packet to determine a reason code to assign to the packet. The analysis and bifurcation layer then analyzes the packet based at least in part on the reason code. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208722 | PACKET ROUTING WITH ANALYSIS ASSIST FOR EMBEDDED APPLICATIONS SHARING A SINGLE NETWORK INTERFACE OVER MULTIPLE VIRTUAL NETWORKS - Techniques are provided for packet routing in a distributed network switch. The distributed network switch includes multiple switch modules operatively connected to one another, and each switch module includes multiple bridge elements and a management controller. In one embodiment, a shared interface routing (SIR) framework is provided that includes an analysis and bifurcation layer, at least one packet interface, and an analysis assist layer. A packet is received over a first logical network and via a physical port, the packet being destined for at least a first application executing on the management controller. The analysis assist layer analyzes the packet to determine a reason code to assign to the packet. The analysis and bifurcation layer then analyzes the packet based at least in part on the reason code. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208723 | SYSTEM FOR SWITCHING BETWEEN COMMUNICATION DEVICES, SWITCHING METHOD, AND SWITCHING PROGRAM - A switching system in which a unique additional address is used for each session, and session information is transferred as it is without rewriting the session information when a communication device such as a server is switched, a switching method, and a switching program are disclosed. The switching system comprises a switching device ( | 08-15-2013 |
20130208724 | Automated Adaption to Various Industrial Ethernet Protocols - A method for configuring a field device that is connected to a field bus, wherein the field bus is designed for Industrial Ethernet Protocols, wherein the method comprises the following steps: analyzing a data packet transmitted on the field bus; determining an Industrial Ethernet Protocol being used in the data packet; and automatically activating a protocol stack suitable to determined Industrial Ethernet Protocol. | 08-15-2013 |
20130215893 | Processing Resource Management In An Island-Based Network Flow Processor - An island-based network flow processor (IB-NFP) integrated circuit has a high performance processor island. The processor island has a processor and a tightly coupled memory. The integrated circuit also has another memory. The other memory may be internal or external memory. The header of an incoming packet is stored in the tightly coupled memory of the processor island. The payload is stored in the other memory. In one example, if the amount of a processing resource is below a threshold then the header is moved from the first island to the other memory before the header and payload are communicated to an egress island for outputting from the integrated circuit. If, however, the amount of the processing resource is not below the threshold then the header is moved directly from the processor island to the egress island and is combined with the payload there for outputting from the integrated circuit. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215894 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus includes a retrieval unit that retrieves a first setting information group and a second setting information group respectively from a home gateway apparatus and a DHCP server connected to a communication line, a determining unit that determines whether the setting information related to a predetermined telephone number is included in the first setting information group retrieved by the retrieval unit, an extracting unit that extracts a first type of the setting information related to the predetermined telephone number from the first setting information group, and extracts, from the second setting information group, a second type of the setting information excluding the first type of the setting information, and a communication unit that communicates with a first apparatus and a second apparatus via the communication line using the first type of the setting information and the second type of the setting information extracted by the extracting unit. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215895 | ENCODING VIRTUAL LAN TAGS - Various embodiments are disclosed for encoding and decoding VLAN identifiers. One such method includes mapping the VLAN identifier, associated with the frame, to a number of extra bytes. The method also includes appending, to the payload, a quantity of bytes equal to the number of extra bytes. The method also includes setting at least one of the appended bytes to a value of a length provided with the frame. The method also includes transmitting the frame, including the appended bytes. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215896 | ETHERNET SWITCH AND METHOD FOR ROUTING ETHERNET DATA PACKETS - The present invention relates to data switching networks, and, in particular, to link aggregation groups in Ethernet switching networks. A technique is described in which a large number of links in a link aggregation group can be managed. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215897 | MITIGATION OF DETECTED PATTERNS IN A NETWORK DEVICE - A method for mitigating detected patterns in a network device is described herein. A packet is moved through a first pipeline of the network device, to perform processing of the packet. A pattern is detected within the packet. In response to detecting the pattern, a hardware component of the network device generates a flag as the packet is moving through the first pipeline, in parallel with the processing of the packet. One or more forwarding policies associated with the packet are determined using the flag. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215898 | SERVICE TRANSMISSION METHOD IN AN OPTICAL TRANSPORT NETWORK AND DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING THE METHOD - Embodiments of the present disclosure disclose a service transmission method and a device and a system for implementing the method. The method includes: recognizing a type of a received client service, encapsulating an OTN service, and generating an OTN signal frame or a lower order ODU; querying a tag forwarding base to acquire forwarding information of the OTN signal frame or the lower order ODU; acquiring tag information, and inserting the tag information into an overhead of the OTN signal frame or the lower order ODU; and forwarding the OTN signal frame according to the forwarding information. Therefore, in the embodiments of the present disclosure, the forwarding and the transmission of the service may be performed in an OTN plane only, thereby reducing hardware modules of an MPLS plane. | 08-22-2013 |
20130223444 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR MANAGING NETWORK PACKET FORWARDING WITH A CONTROLLER - A network controlled by a controller may include end hosts that are coupled to the switches. The network may be coupled to gateways that interface between the network and an external network. The network may include subnetworks formed from respective portions of the end hosts of the network. The controller may create virtual gateways that interface between each of the subnetworks and the network by providing the end hosts of each subnetwork with virtual gateway Ethernet addresses. The controller may receive a network packet having a virtual gateway Ethernet address from an end host of a given subnetwork. The network packet may be destined for an end host of an external network or subnetwork. The controller may forward the network packet to the destination end host by redirecting the network packet through a selected gateway or by controlling the switches to perform gateway functions. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223445 | Stateful NAT64 Function in a Distributed Architecture - Various embodiments pertain to techniques for translation of network addresses including encapsulating state information into the data packet being transferred. A NAT device receives a data packet destined for an IPv4 server from an IPv6 client device and translates the destination address. The NAT device encapsulates the translation information into the data packet, and transmits the data packet to the IPv4 server. Upon receiving a response from the IPv4 server, the NAT device translates the source address on the data packet to reflect the original destination address for the packet received from the IPv6 client, such that the client device may be unaware that it was communicating with an IPv4 server. In various embodiments, the translation information is embedded in the IP options as part of the TCP header of the data packet. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223446 | Compound Masking and Entropy for Data Packet Classification using Tree-based Binary Pattern Matching - A method in a network element of a packet data network classifies a data packet for application of a packet data network policy. A root node compound bit mask is applied to bits of a received data packet. The data packet has data in a plurality of fields. The compound bit mask has a plurality of bit masks each having bits in a different data packet field. The masked bits of the compound bit mask are applied to root node bit tables, one for each bit mask of the compound bit mask. A branch node from the root node is selected based on a bit table look up. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223447 | NETWORK SYSTEM - A method for packet processing in a network including a plurality of terminals, includes generating, by a first terminal, a packet including a geographical address. The first terminal transmits the packet transmitted to a destination. The geographical address includes a location information field having location information of the first terminal and a range field indicating whether the destination is a single destination representing that the destination is a target terminal or an area destination representing the destination is a target area. The range field has range information of the target area in the case that the destination is the area destination. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223448 | DATA TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, DATA RECEIVING APPARATUS, DATA TRANSRECEIVING SYSTEM, DATA TRANSMITTING METHOD, DATA RECEIVING METHOD AND DATA TRANSRECEIVING METHOD - A data transmitting apparatus includes a packet generator which generates a plurality of packets regarding multi-channel audio sample data and transmitter which transmits the plurality of generated packets to a data receiving apparatus. Each of the plurality of packets includes an identifier field to distinguish a position or an order of the packets. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223449 | DYNAMIC SERVICE INSERTION IN A FABRIC SWITCH - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch. The switch includes a service management module and a packet processor. During operation, the service management module identifies a service provided by an appliance coupled to the switch via a local port. The packet processor constructs a notification message for a remote switch. The notification message includes information about the service and the appliance. In this way, the switch allows the remote switch to request the service. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223450 | NETWORK SYSTEM AND FRAME COMMUNICATION METHOD - A network system has: a node performing transmission/reception of a frame based on FCoE; a network; a controller performing management of the node and the network; and a gateway provided with respect to the node. The frame is classified into a control frame and a data frame. The gateway determines whether a frame received from the node is the control frame or the data frame, forwards the control frame to the controller, and forwards the data frame to the network. The controller performs the management based on the control frame received from the gateway. The network transfers the data frame received from the gateway to a destination node without through the controller. The node has a retransmission control and reordering unit configured to perform retransmission control and reordering processing with respect to the data frame. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223451 | UNIFIED INFRASTRUCTURE OVER ETHERNET - Systems and methods that provide a unified infrastructure over layer-2 networks are provided. A first frame is generated by an end point. The first frame comprises a proxy payload, a proxy association header and a frame header relating to a control proxy element. The first frame is sent over a first network to the control proxy element. A second frame is generated by the control proxy element. The second frame comprises the proxy payload and a proxy header. The first and second frames correspond to different layer-2 protocols. The control proxy element sends the second frame over a second network employing the layer-2 protocol of the second frame. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223452 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS, PATH CONTROLLING METHOD AND PROGRAM - A communication system includes a plurality of first nodes that, in accordance with processing rules (packet handling operations) prescribing processing contents for a packet belonging to a pre-set flow, processes a packet received, which matches to the processing rules, and a second node that forwards the received packet via its ports without referencing the processing rules. The communication system also includes a control apparatus that sets, for the first nodes situated on a forwarding path for the packet belonging to the pre-set flow, processing rules to forward the packet belonging to the pre-set flow to each next hop. The control apparatus also sets, for the first node not situated on the forwarding path, processing rules to instruct dropping the packet that is forwarded from the second node and that is deviated from the forwarding path. | 08-29-2013 |
20130230047 | METHODS OF OPERATING FORWARDING ELEMENTS INCLUDING SHADOW TABLES AND RELATED FORWARDING ELEMENTS - A method may be provided to operate a forwarding element in a forwarding plane of a network including the forwarding plane and a control plane. The method may include receiving a packet through an input/output port of the forwarding element and attempting to match the packet with a flow table of the forwarding element. Responsive to the packet missing a match with the flow table, the forwarding element may attempt to match the packet with a shadow table of the forwarding element. Responsive to the packet matching with the shadow table, a new flow rule may be installed in the flow table based on a matching shadow rule from the shadow table. Related forwarding elements are also discussed. | 09-05-2013 |
20130230048 | SERVER INTERCONNECTION SYSTEM, SERVER, AND DATA FORWARDING METHOD - A server interconnection system includes three switches each having n downlink ports and an uplink port, wherein n is an integer equal to or larger than 2; and m servers each having at least two network interface cards respectively connected to downlink ports of different switches, wherein m=3p/2, p is an even number equal to or larger than 2 but equal to or less than n, wherein every three servers form a group. A first server connects to a downlink port of a first switch and a downlink port of a second switch via two network interface cards. A second server connects to a downlink port of the first switch and a downlink port of a third switch via two network interface cards. A third server connects to a downlink port of the second switch and a downlink port of the third switch via two network interface cards. | 09-05-2013 |
20130230049 | PACKET SENDING METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE - The present invention provides a packet sending method and a network device. The packet sending method includes: receiving, by a network device, a first data packet; and if a MAC entry matching a destination MAC address of the first data packet is not found in a media access control MAC address table of the network device, sending, by the network device, the first data packet according to a forwarding behavior in a MAC default entry of the MAC address table. When the MAC entry matching the destination MAC address of the first data packet is not found, the network device does not need to flood the first data packet on all interfaces, but directly sends the first data packet according to the MAC default entry in the own MAC address table, thereby reducing a need for MAC address capacity in the network device, and not increasing unnecessary network traffic. | 09-05-2013 |
20130230050 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERNETWORKING ETHERNET AND MPLS NETWORKS - MPLS networks offering PW or VPLS services may be interconnected with Ethernet networks implemented according to 802.1ah or 802.1Qay. The MPLS network may be a core and offer services to the Ethernet access networks, or vise-versa. Additionally, a mixture of different types of access networks may be interconnected by an MPLS core or an Ethernet core. Both network interworking and service interworking are provided. OAM fault detection may be implemented via maintenance entities extending across the network or end to end depending on the combination of networks and services offered by the networks. | 09-05-2013 |
20130235871 | Stateless Protocol Translation - Some aspects of the methods and systems presented relate to performing stateless address translation between IPv4 capable devices to IPv6 capable networks and devices. Stateless address translation may form a new IPv6 addresses by combining the IPv4 address of a device with an IPv6 prefix address assigned to the translator. The translation may also combine the IPv4 destination address and UDP port information with the new IPv6 address. Existing Domain Name Systems (DNSs) may be leveraged for resolving the IPv4 and IPv6 addresses across different networks. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235872 | ROUTER AND METHOD OF SUPPLYING POWER TO MEMORY UNIT IN THE SAME - A router, includes: a routing table memory unit configured to store a routing table and be capable of reading and writing the routing table at any time, the routing table being destination information of a packet; a search engine unit which has a transfer information base memory unit and which is configured to search for a destination of the packet based on a transfer information base; a power supply unit configured to supply power to the routing table memory unit and the transfer information base memory unit; and a control unit configured to control the power supply unit such that the power is supplied to the non-volatile memory when the non-volatile memory is operated, and the power supply is interrupted when the non-volatile memory is not operated. | 09-12-2013 |
20130242996 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FAST AND LARGE-SCALE LONGEST PREFIX MATCHING - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: receiving, at the first network device, a message to be forwarded; determining a destination address for the message; determining whether the destination address is assigned to the first network device; if the destination address is not assigned to the first network device, querying a second network device for a next hop of the destination address; receiving, in response to the query, an indication of the next hop for the destination address; and forwarding, by the first network device in response to the indication of the next hop, the message to the next hop. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242997 | POLICY CONTROL ENFORCEMENT AT A PACKET GATEWAY - A packet gateway (PGW) receives a plurality of IP packet fragments from a network. The IP packet fragments comprise a head fragment and one or more trailing fragments, and are associated with a first IP packet. As the fragments are received, a controller at the PGW classifies the fragments. The controller applies a same selected service treatment to the head fragment and to each of the trailing fragments based on the classification of the head fragment. The PGW then sends each treated packet fragment to an end user device. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242998 | Multiple Shortest-Path Tree Protocol - In accordance with on example, a control packet from a first network device is received at a second network device. The control packet comprises, embedded in a source address field of the control packet, control information for a spanning tree associated with a root network device. The control information is extracted from the source address field of the control packet in order to populate a shortest-path forwarding table. A data packet from the first network is then received by the second network device. Based on the shortest-path forwarding table and a media access control (MAC) address table, a host device to which the data packet is directed is identified. Finally, based on the information in the shortest-path forwarding table and the MAC address table, the data packet is forwarded to a network device directed connected to the host device. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242999 | Scalable Virtual Appliance Cloud (SVAC) and Methods Usable in an SVAC - According to one embodiment, a method for providing scalable virtual appliance cloud (SVAC) services includes receiving incoming data traffic having multiple packets directed toward a SVAC using at least one switching distributed line card (DLC), determining that a packet satisfies a condition of an access control list (ACL), designating a destination port to send the packet based on the condition of the ACL being satisfied, fragmenting the packet into cells, wherein the designated destination port is stored in a cell header of the cells, sending the cells to the destination port via at least one switch fabric controller (SFC), receiving the cells at a fabric interface of an appliance DLC, reassembling the cells into a second packet, performing one or more services on the second packet using the appliance DLC, and sending the second packet to its intended port. | 09-19-2013 |
20130243000 | COMMUNICATION PATH CONTROL TECHNIQUE - Upon receipt of a change request to change a path in a first communication and including a label assigned to a path after change and information of a transfer destination after change, a relay apparatus stores the label assigned to the path after change in association with the information of the transfer destination after change into a first storage unit. The relay apparatus then updates a second storage unit so as to change a first label assigned to a path before change in the first communication to the label assigned to the path after change. Upon determining that response messages for a request message transferred on the path before change have been received without omission with respect to the first communication, the relay apparatus deletes the first label assigned to the path before change and information of a transfer destination corresponding to the first label from the first storage unit. | 09-19-2013 |
20130243001 | NODE AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONTENT-CENTRIC NETWORK (CCN) PACKET IN CCN - A node and a method for transmitting and receiving a Content-Centric Network (CCN) packet in a CCN are provided. The method of transmitting the CCN packet, includes generating a path being used to transmit a packet with a compressed header. The method further includes determining whether a header of the CCN packet is compressible. The method further includes compressing the header based on a result of the determining. The method further includes transmitting the CCN packet with the compressed header via the path. | 09-19-2013 |
20130250952 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING ONE-ARM NODE CLUSTERING USING A PORT CHANNEL - Methods and apparatus for providing one-arm node clustering using a port channel are provided herein. An example application node may be communicatively connected to at least one application node, and the application node may be connected to a network through a port channel. The application node may include: a link included in the port channel for accommodating the network data being communicated between the remote client and server; and a processor configured to send/receive a cluster control packet to/from the at least one application node through the link included in the port channel. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250953 | ALLOWING A SINGLE TRANSMITTER TO TRANSMIT MULTIPLE DATA FRAMES IN OFDM COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a transmitting device may determine a first data frame to a first destination and a second data frame to a second destination, and may assign subcarriers in a non-overlapping arrangement to the first and second data frames. Once assigned, the transmitting device may augment a transmission physical (PHY) header with a destination and tone map tuple for each of the first and second destinations, and transmits the transmission with the first and second data frames simultaneously on the assigned subcarriers. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250954 | ON-CHIP ROUTER AND MULTI-CORE SYSTEM USING THE SAME - An on-chip router of the embodiments has plural input ports that receive packets, plural output ports that transmits the packets, plural buffers, each being provided so as to correspond to each of the input ports and accumulating at least a portion of the packets received through the input ports, a switching unit that switches the output destinations of the packets so that the packets are transmitted from any of the plural output ports, a header analyzer that has plural hop field extractors provided so as to correspond to each of the buffers, and a switching controller that controls the switching unit so that the packets are transmitted from an output port indicated by output port information of the hop field extracted by the hop field extractors. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250955 | ROUTING A DATA PACKET IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - In one aspect, a method Includes receiving a data packet at a routing node that includes a processor. The method also includes determining at least one value for the data packet, selecting a routing table from a plurality of routing tables stored at the routing node in response to the at least one value for the packet and forwarding the data packet in response to the routing table selected. Each routing table is associated with a respective one cost function. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250956 | NON-FRAGMENTED IP PACKET TUNNELING IN A NETWORK - A method and apparatus is disclosed herein for IP packet tunneling in a network. In one embodiment, the method comprises receiving, at a first network device, a first IP packet of a IP connection; creating a second IP packet by replacing information in a field in the first IP packet with a session ID identifying the IP connection; and forwarding, by the first network device, the second IP packet to the second network device in the distributed network environment. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250957 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CONTROLLING METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus includes a data input unit, a PDU data managing unit, a re-transmission controlling unit, and a pre-deciphering processing unit. The data input unit receives MAC-ehs PDU data. The PDU data managing unit determines addresses in a storage unit, generates an expansion table, and stores the MAC-ehs PDU data. The re-transmission controlling unit determines that an expected PDU segment is a PDU segment including a sequence number immediately following a last one of sequence numbers of consecutive PDU segments, judges whether a sequence number of a received PDU segment coincides with the sequence number of the expected PDU segment, makes a re-transmission request, and issues a notification indicating that a predetermined time length has elapsed or PDU segments have reached a predetermined size. The pre-deciphering processing unit obtains the PDU segments from the storage unit and completes a MAC-ehs SDU from the obtained PDU segments. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250958 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, CONTROL SERVER, FORWARDING NODE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - A communication control system includes a control server for controlling a process rule held in a forwarding node. The control server includes a network information storage unit for storing a logical network identifier which is an identifier of a logical network defined by setting of the forwarding node, and a correspondence relation between a device connected to the forwarding node and the logical network; and an address resolution unit for, upon receiving from the forwarding node an address resolution request for a destination communication device which is a destination of the packet or a communication device for forwarding the packet received from a source communication device which is a source of the packet to another device, performing interlayer address resolution for the destination communication device or the communication device, and setting the logical network identifier of the logical network to which the source communication device belongs. | 09-26-2013 |
20130259045 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MODIFYING NETWORK PACKETS TO USE UNRECOGNIZED HEADERS/FIELDS FOR PACKET CLASSIFICATION AND FORWARDING - Systems and methods are disclosed for modifying network packets to use unrecognized headers/fields for packet classification and forwarding in packet processing systems, such as network tool optimizer (NTO) devices. The packet modifications described allow standard switch or routing integrated circuits (ICs) to process, classify, and forward packets based upon data that is not typically recognized by the hardware capabilities of the standard packet routing circuitry for packet processing. Input packets are modified so that unrecognized data becomes recognized data for purposes of packet processing, classification, and forwarding by the packet routing circuitry. These modifications are then removed after packets are processed to reform the original packets. The original packets are then provided to destination devices based upon packet classification and forwarding control information. As such, packet processing, classification, and forwarding is provided in packet processing systems using headers/fields that are not supported for processing by standard switch or routing integrated circuits (ICs). | 10-03-2013 |
20130259046 | REMOTE MIRRORING - A method, system and computer readable medium for remote mirroring are described. The method can include receiving a customer data frame and making two copies of the customer data frame. An outer header, such as a mac-in-mac header, can be added to each copy. The outer header of the first copy can be configured for normal processing, while the outer header of the second copy can be configured for remote mirroring. A switch can recognize the header configured for mirroring in the second copy based on a service identifier in the header and process the second copy for mirroring on one or more ports on one or more bridges. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259047 | INTERNET GROUP MEMBERSHIP PROTOCOL GROUP MEMBERSHIP SYNCHRONIZATION IN VIRTUAL LINK AGGREGATION - In one embodiment, a system includes at least one local processor adapted for executing logic, logic adapted for receiving a packet from an access switch on a virtual link aggregation (vLAG) port of a first switch, logic adapted for modifying a source media access control (MAC) address of the packet to include a MAC address of the first switch, wherein a last byte of the modified source MAC address includes a trunk identifier of the vLAG port on which the packet was received, and logic adapted for forwarding the packet to an inter-switch link (ISL) port. Other systems, methods, and computer program products are presented according to more embodiments. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259048 | LAYER 2 PACKET SWITCHING WITHOUT LOOK-UP TABLE FOR ETHERNET SWITCHES - In one embodiment, a method for assigning a media access control (MAC) address includes receiving a request from a device for a MAC address at a port of a switching device, determining a MAC address to assign to the device based at least partially on the port, and responding to the request with the MAC address. In another embodiment, a method for retrieving a media access control (MAC) address includes sending a request for a MAC address to a MAC allocation server (MAAS), waiting a predetermined amount of time to receive a response to the request, wherein the response comprises the MAC address, and using the MAC address when the response to the request is received within the predetermined amount of time. Other systems, methods, and computer program products are presented according to more embodiments. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259049 | CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION USING MULTIPLE NETWORK PATHS - A network device includes one or more ports coupled to a network, and a time synchronization module. The time synchronization module processes (i) respective path information, and (ii) respective time synchronization information included in each of at least some of a plurality of time synchronization packets received from a master clock device over two or more different communication paths and via at least one of the one or more ports, wherein the respective path information indicates a respective communication path in the network via which the respective time synchronization packet was received. The time synchronization module determines a system time clock responsive to the processing of the path information and the time synchronization information included in the at least some of the plurality of time synchronization packets. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259050 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTI-LEVEL SWITCHING OF DATA FRAMES - Systems, methods and apparatus for multi-level switching in a network comprising a plurality of link-state routing areas. In some embodiments, a network device connecting at least two link-state routing areas is configured to receive a data frame from an area. The network device may be configured to determine whether the data frame is to be transmitted to a different area and to determine whether to modify at least one field of the data frame prior to transmitting the data frame based on whether the data frame is to be transmitted to a different area. The network device may be further configured to determine whether to block the data frame based on whether the data frame is to be transmitted to a different area and based on a field of the data frame. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259051 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LOOP AVOIDANCE IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention relates to a learning-based method for loop avoidance in a packet switched communication network. In one embodiment, this is accomplished by configuring each communication device to maintain a table of unique identifiers, where the unique identifiers include Media Access Control (MAC) address, MAC and Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) address, Internet Protocol (IP) address or any other unique device identifier, receiving one or more data packet on one or more port of the device, checking the table for unique source identifier of the received data packet, determining whether the received data packet is received from the same port of the device as in the table against the corresponding entry, and updating learned time entry with current system clock time of the device and forwarding the data packet to the next communication device if the packet is received from the same port. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259052 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, FORWARDING NODE, RECEIVED PACKET PROCESS METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system includes: a control apparatus setting a process rule defining a process content appropriate to a received packet in a forwarding node; and a forwarding node comprising a packet process unit processing a received packet in accordance with the process rule. The forwarding node further includes: a request unit transmitting a process rule setting request to the control apparatus if the received packet is a first packet for which the process rule is not set; and a restriction unit restricting transmission of the setting request for a second packet satisfying a condition obtained from the first packet. | 10-03-2013 |
20130266011 | TRANSPARENT RBRIDGE - A transparent edge Routing Bridge (RBridge) including a first communication unit configured to receive a data packet from an access segment of a network, the data packet including an egress device nickname and at least one Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) tag, a TRansparent Interconnection of Lots of Links (TRILL) header constructing unit configured to construct a TRILL header based on the VLAN tag, and a second communication unit that transmits the data packet, including the TRILL header, to an egress device corresponding to the egress device nickname via a TRILL compliant interconnection layer. | 10-10-2013 |
20130266012 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING MULTIPLE LABEL DISTRIBUTION PROTOCOL (LDP) INSTANCES IN A NETWORK NODE - A method and apparatus for implementing multiple Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) Label Switch Router (LSR) instances sharing a common data plane at a network element or node. | 10-10-2013 |
20130266013 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING LABEL DISTRIBUTION PROTOCOL (LDP) IN IPv6 NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for generating an IPv6 compliant label distribution protocol (LDP) control plane packet at a Label Switched Router (LSR). | 10-10-2013 |
20130266014 | HASHING OF NETWORK PACKET FLOWS FOR EFFICIENT SEARCHING - The invention relates to a method and apparatus for efficient storing and retrieval of captured data packets. The packets are parsed to extract flow defining parameters such as source and destination addresses, the extracted addresses are hashed and the address hash numbers are reversibly combined, for example concatenated in a pre-defined order of their values to obtain a single hash index for a flow. The packets are then saved in a packet store in accordance and/or association with their hash index. The packets may be efficiently retrieved based on the two addresses or on a single network address. | 10-10-2013 |
20130266015 | L3 Gateway for VXLAN - In an embodiment, the disclosure includes an apparatus comprising a host component which comprises a virtual switch associated with a virtual machine (VM). The host component is in communication with a routing component which is connected to a network and comprises a network address. The VM sends a communication packet to the virtual switch. The communications packet comprises address information comprising a virtual destination address. The virtual switch replaces the virtual destination address of the communications packet with the network address of the routing component. The disclosure also includes a network comprising a plurality of host components each comprising a virtual switch. The host components are connected to a common routing component. A first virtual switch is designated to respond to address requests and all non-designated virtual switches are configured not to respond to address requests. | 10-10-2013 |
20130266016 | GRID ROUTER - A grid router includes a plurality of external interface units to receive packets of services from one point and to provide packets of services to another point and a second plurality of mailbox units to store and forward the packets associated with mailboxes, one per service. Each mailbox unit is connected to each external interface unit. The units are implemented on PCs (personal computers) having memory controllers and move the packets through the router close to or at the I/O (input/output) rate of the memory controllers. | 10-10-2013 |
20130266017 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system includes a forwarding node processing a received packet in accordance with a process rule in which a matching rule for identifying a flow and a process content applied to a packet coinciding with the matching rule are associated to each other; and a control apparatus including a path calculation unit calculating a packet forwarding path for each flow; and a forwarding control policy management unit managing a packet forwarding control policy applied to the forwarding node; wherein the control apparatus sets a process rule reflecting contents of the forwarding control policy in accordance with the calculated path. | 10-10-2013 |
20130266018 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system includes a first switch that refers to a first processing rule included in a packet and processes the packet in accordance with the first processing rule; a second switch that includes a table associating and storing an identifier and a second processing rule for a packet, refers to an identifier included in a packet, and processes the packet in accordance with a second processing rule associated with the identifier; and a control apparatus that stores the first processing rule and the identifier in a packet, associates and stores, in the table of the second switch, the identifier and the second processing rule. | 10-10-2013 |
20130272304 | PACKET SWITCHING WITHOUT LOOK-UP TABLE FOR ETHERNET SWITCHES - In one embodiment, a system includes a switching processor that includes logic configured for receiving a packet having a header and a payload, logic configured for determining, without using a look-up table, a destination port based on a destination address stored in the header, and logic configured for sending the packet to the destination port. In another embodiment, a system includes a processor adapted for executing logic, logic configured for creating an address allocation table having a plurality of values, each value being associated with a plurality of interne protocol (IP) addresses which, when an algorithm is applied thereto, result in the associated value, logic configured for receiving a request for an IP address from a device electrically connected to a switch, and logic configured for determining a port to which the device is electrically connected to the switch based on the port on which the request is received. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272305 | CHAINING OF INLINE SERVICES USING SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKING - A system and method for steering traffic through a set of services is provided. A service path or chain is assigned to a received packet based on a classification of the packet. A position and/or a direction of the traffic in the service path can be determined based on the previous service performed on the traffic. A next destination for the traffic can be assigned in accordance with the assigned service chain and determined position and direction information. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272306 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING ROUTING AGGREGATION - The embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, apparatus and system for implementing routing aggregation, which relate to communication field, and solve the problem that too many routings advertised on the DHCPv6 relay agent leads to huge number of routing table entries of the backbone network. The technical solution of the present invention comprises: sending a message to a dynamic host configuration protocol DHCPv6 relay agent, such that the DHCPv6 relay agent generates an aggregation routing of requesting router prefix routings according to the message; wherein the message comprises information about a prefix pool which assigns address prefixes to the requesting routers access to the DHCPv6 relay agent or aggregation routing destination address information generated according to the information about the prefix pool. The method, apparatus and system for implementing routing aggregation may be applied in DHCPv6 network constructions. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272307 | CONNECTION FOR THE FAST ANALYSIS OF PACKET HEADERS TRANSFERRED VIA DATA BUS - A connection for the fast analysis of packet headers by a circuit connected directly to the data bus, which transfers the packets. This circuit contains sub-circuits for the protocols headers analysis. Furthermore, the circuit contains a counter, which informs the sub-circuits about the data bus status. Each of the sub-circuits is equipped with the data input from the data bus, the input of the counter, the activating input, which determines the presence of the given protocol header in the packet, and with the input of the position of the header start in the packet. Further, each of the sub-circuits is equipped with a set of activating outputs, which determine the type of the next protocol header, and with the output of the position of the next header start. All sub-circuits, using the auxiliary logic circuits and multiplexers, are connected in the structure, which corresponds to the number and structure of the anticipated protocols in the packet. Chain thus created from sub-circuits is then in the same manner divided into branches based on the anticipated number of protocols, the headers of which are to be analyzed. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272308 | Method and Apparatus for Transporting Ethernet Services - Frames of customer traffic may be encapsulated by adding Mac-in-Mac (MiM) encapsulation fields for transportation of the frames over a portion of provider network. The MiM encapsulated traffic may be further encapsulated using VPLS by adding VPLS encapsulation fields for transportation of the frames over another portion of the provider network. The MiM encapsulations use provider network_MAC addresses which enables VPLS MAC learning to occur using provider network MAC address space. MiM tunnels are mapped to VPLS service instances which are assigned pseudowire tags for transportation over the VPLS portion of provider network. The MiM header is retained when the MiM encapsulated frames are transported over the VPLS portion of the provider network. As VPLS frames exit the core network, the VPLS encapsulation fields are removed to extract the original MiM encapsulated frames for further transportation over the MiM portion of the provider network. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272309 | MAC CYCLE ALIGNMENT METHOD FOR NEIGHBORING NETWORK COORDINATION - Representative implementations of devices and techniques provide communication between networked nodes while minimizing interference from neighbor network communication. Medium Access Control (MAC) cycles at the nodes may be aligned to MAC cycles of neighbor nodes and/or networks based on decoded timing information detected by the nodes. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272310 | MAPPING SERVER, NETWORK SYSTEM, PACKET FORWARDING METHOD AND PROGRAM - A mapping server includes: a path information obtaining unit that obtains path information on external networks through a forwarding device connected to an external network; and a mapping information generating unit that generates mapping information that relates the path information and the forwarding device. | 10-17-2013 |
20130279506 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ROUTING APPLICATION TRAFFIC - Methods and systems for routing application traffic to an operable system manager are provided. In particular, an arbiter application is provided to identify a currently active system manager. The arbiter application provides an address for the active system manager to a routing node. Applications send communications to the active system manager by associating such communications with a virtual system manager address. Such communications are delivered to the routing node, which associates the actual address for the currently active system manager with the communication. The communications are then delivered to the active system manager using the actual address. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279507 | FRAME TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, FRAME TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, AND FRAME TRANSMISSION METHOD - A frame transmission system includes: a first frame transmission apparatus configured to transmit a message frame containing an medium access control (MAC) destination address in an intended user MAC frame, and containing both MAC header information and header information of an upper layer in a user MAC frame; and a second frame transmission apparatus configured to identify one output destination physical link based on the MAC header information and the header information of the upper layer acquired from the message frame, when an output destination with regard to the MAC destination address in the message frame constitutes a link aggregation group including a plurality of physical links, and generate a reply frame containing information on the identified output destination physical link and a MAC address of the second frame transmission apparatus in order to return the reply frame to the first frame transmission apparatus. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279508 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus that couples to a core network in a network system including a first access network coupled to the core network via a first relay, and a second access network coupled to the core network via a second relay, the communication apparatus including: a processor to store, when a first packet is transmitted to a first destination address included in a first address range and not included in a second address range, cache information regarding the second address range to a memory, the first address range being assigned to the first access network and the second address range being assigned to the second access network and being included in the first address range, and a transmitter to transmit, when a second packet for a second address included in the second address range is generated, the second packer to the second apparatus based on the cache information. | 10-24-2013 |
20130287024 | DUPLICATE PACKET SUPPRESSION - According to an aspect of an embodiment, a method of managing packets in a communication network including multiple communication nodes is described. The method may include receiving a packet including a packet header. The packet header may include a packet identifier uniquely identifying the packet. The method may also include determining a packet type of the packet received by a first communication node based on the packet identifier. The method may also include dropping the packet when the packet is determined to be a duplicate packet or routing the packet to a neighbor communication node in a manner that prevents the packet from being caught in a loop when the packet is determined to be a returned packet or a new packet. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287025 | DEVICE FOR REALIZING UPSTREAM AGGREGATION AND DOWNSTREAM TRANSLATION OF A VIRTUAL LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND METHOD THEREOF - A device for realizing upstream aggregation and downstream translation of a virtual local area network (VLAN) includes a buffer and a processor. The buffer is used for storing an ingress VLAN translation table and an egress VLAN translation table. The processor is used for translating an upstream packet inputted from a first user port into an upstream translation packet according to the ingress VLAN translation table, and transmitting the upstream translation packet to the Internet through an internet port, and translating a first downstream packet inputted from the internet port into a first downstream translation packet according to the egress VLAN translation table, and transmitting the first downstream translation packet to a user device through a second user port. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287026 | EXTENSION OF LOGICAL NETWORKS ACROSS LAYER 3 VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS - A method of manages a set of managed forwarding elements that forward data between machines. The method configures (1) a first managed forwarding element to operate in a first network that uses first and second address spaces that at least partially overlap with each other, (2) a second managed forwarding element to operate in a second network that uses the first address space, and (3) a third managed forwarding element to operate in a third network that uses the second address space. A machine in the second network and a machine in the third network have an identical address that belongs to both the first and second address spaces. The method directs the first managed forwarding element to connect to the second and third managed forwarding elements in a manner that enables the first managed forwarding element to forward data from a machine in the first network to the machine in the second network via the second managed forwarding element. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287027 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING PACKET IN MPLS-TP NETWORK - An apparatus and method for processing a packet in a multi-protocol label switching-transport profile (MPLS-TP) network are provided. In the method of processing a packet, a packet transport layer (PTL) index and a layer stack (LS) or multiple label pop (MPOP) loopback header are used, and it is possible to remove a size limitation on lookup results of a lookup table when multiple labels are stacked, and solve the problem of having to extract all labels as label keys regardless of label operations upon an incoming label map (ILM) table lookup. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287028 | NVGRE Biomodal Tunnel Mesh - A method implemented by a hypervisor located in a first network device (ND), the method comprising sending to and receiving from a second ND a first type of packet, wherein each packet of the first type of packet comprises media access control (MAC) layer information of a client; and sending to and receiving from a third ND a second type of packet, wherein each packet of the second type of packet contains no client MAC layer information. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287029 | PREVENTING ILLICIT COMMUNICATIONS - The present invention inspects packets to identify session initiation messages associated with select applications. A session initiation message may be any message used to initiate a communication session with another communication client. Once a session initiation message from a select application is identified, the intended communication session may be identified, monitored, prevented, or otherwise processed in a predefined manner. These select applications may be illicit applications from which communication sessions are actually or potentially unlawful or otherwise improper. The illicit communication sessions that the present invention seeks to control may be used for voice communications as well as for transferring data and facilitating application collaboration, such as is used in video conferencing or file sharing. The session initiation messages need not be received directly from the originating communication client for inspection. Packet inspections may take place at any location, such as aggregation points throughout the packet networks. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287030 | MULTI-PROTOCOL SUPPORT OVER ETHERNET PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORKS - Described are methods and communications network for carrying pseudowires over packet-switched network. A communication network includes a packet-switched network (PSN), a first provider edge (PE) device in communication with a second PE device through the PSN, and a pseudowire (PW) established between the PE devices for emulating a service across the PSN. The PW has a Virtual Circuit Connection Verification (VCCV) control channel that carries an Ethernet Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) message. In some embodiments, various data plane encapsulation formats enable a PW to emulate an Ethernet or a non-Ethernet service over an Ethernet PSN. Each encapsulation format includes an Ethernet tunnel header and a PW header that encapsulates an Ethernet or non-Ethernet payload. | 10-31-2013 |
20130294449 | EFFICIENT APPLICATION RECOGNITION IN NETWORK TRAFFIC - A system and method is provided for providing an initial determination of the type of application recognition processing that is required for incoming traffic, and directing the packets accordingly. The invention is based on optimized resource allocation that uses multiple, application-dependent data paths. An exemplary set of application-dependent data paths includes, for example, Fixed Attribute Table (FAT), Deep Packet Inspection (DPI) and CPU Processing data paths. By using optimized and application-dependent network traffic processing paths, it is possible to achieve a less resource-hungry hardware design than previously contemplated in the prior art, where all traffic proceeded along a single path and was subjected to DPI processing. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294450 | OPTIMIZED TRIE-BASED ADDRESS LOOKUP - One embodiment of the present invention provides a router. The router includes a storage, a forwarding table management mechanism, and a longest prefix matching mechanism. The storage stores, in a data structure corresponding to a rich prefix node associated with a trie, a plurality of network address prefixes represented by the trie. The forwarding table management mechanism expresses a respective network address prefix using one or more of: 1) a traversal path on the trie from a root node to a subtrie of the trie; and 2) an encoded representation of a node in the subtrie. The longest prefix matching mechanism matches a network address with a longest prefix from the network address prefixes stored in the data structure corresponding to the prefix node. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294451 | METHOD OF SENDING ADDRESS CORRESPONDENCE IN A SECOND LAYER PROTOCOL OF APPLYING LINK STATE ROUTING - The objective of the embodiments of the present invention is to provide a method and an apparatus of sending address correspondence information and updating a MAC table in a data link layer protocol of applying Link State Routing for solving the problem that too much bandwidth is occupied by broadcasting address correspondence information solicitation in a data link layer of applying link state routing. Through adopting the technical solution of the embodiments of the present invention, since besides the ingress network node, other network nodes also store address correspondence information in their address correspondence information tables, so when they receive an address correspondence information solicitation, they can directly reply with an address correspondence information response without broadcasting the solicitation, decreasing the bandwidth occupied by broadcasting address correspondence information solicitation in a data link layer of applying link state routing. | 11-07-2013 |
20130301642 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR STATIC TRILL ROUTING - A method and system for static routing in a TRILL network is disclosed. Routing bridges in the TRILL network use LLDP discovery to identify their next hop routing bridges. A data packet, with an inner header specifying a MAC address of a destination host, is sent by a source host and received by an ingress routing bridge. The ingress routing bridge encapsulates the data packet with a TRILL header and an outer header and sends the data packet to a next hop routing bridge on path to the destination host. The next hop routing bridge determines it is not the egress routing bridge for the data packet and sends the data packet onward to the egress routing bridge. The egress routing bridge decapsulates the data packet and forwards the data packet to the destination host specified in the inner header. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301643 | METHOD OF DATA TRANSMISSION IN A SYSTEM ON CHIP - Embodiments relate to a method for transmitting a message in a data path of a network, the method includes transmitting a message onto an input bus of an input interface module, the message being received in flits of a size corresponding to the width of the input bus and generating a validity indicator for each elementary flit constituting each flit received. The message is transmitted onto an output bus of the input interface module towards a receiving interface module in flits of a size corresponding to the width of the output bus along with each validity indicator generated in association with the corresponding elementary flit. The receiving interface module receives flits constituting the message and the associated validity indicators and rejects a received flit if an elementary flit of the received flit is associated with a validity indicator in the invalid state. | 11-14-2013 |
20130308641 | Translating Media Access Control (MAC) Addresses In A Network Hierarchy - In one embodiment a method includes receiving a packet including a destination media access control (MAC) address field having a MAC address of a hypervisor and a destination Internet protocol (IP) address field having an IP address of a virtual machine (VM) coupled to the hypervisor. The method further determines a MAC address of the VM using the IP address of the VM and applies the VM MAC address to the destination MAC address field of the packet to forward the packet to the VM. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308642 | DATA COMMUNICATION APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING WITH EXTERNAL APPARATUS VIA NETWORK, CONTROL METHOD OF THE DATA COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus communicating with an external apparatus via a relaying device is provided. The communication apparatus includes a communication unit configured to perform communication with the relaying device, and a control unit configured to reduce a communication speed of the communication unit to a lower speed if the communication apparatus is to be shifted from a first power mode to a second power mode in which power consumption is lower than that in the first power mode. The communication unit, if the communication apparatus shifts to the second power mode, transmits identification information of the communication apparatus to the relaying device using a first method, and after a predetermined time has passed, transmits the identification information to the relaying device using a second method. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308643 | BROADBAND ACCESS FOR VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS - Communications between a source and a destination include receiving, at an egress edge device from an ingress edge device, an upper layer packet including a virtual private network identification identifying a destination. The upper layer packet is authenticated at the egress edge device using the virtual private network identification by comparing the virtual private network identification against an expectation for the upper layer packet. Upon authentication, the upper layer packet is decapsulated into a lower layer packet for the destination. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308644 | FILTERING AND ROUTE LOOKUP IN A SWITCHING DEVICE - Methods and devices for processing packets are provided. The processing device may Include an input interface for receiving data units containing header information of respective packets; a first module configurable to perform packet filtering based on the received data units; a second module configurable to perform traffic analysis based on the received data units; a third module configurable to perform load balancing based on the received data units; and a fourth module configurable to perform route lookups based on the received data | 11-21-2013 |
20130308645 | FLOW COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A flow communication system has: a node having a flow table; and a controller configured to set a flow entry in the flow table. Each flow entry that is set in the flow table specifies packet processing which is performed with respect to a packet matching a match condition. If a hit entry exists in the flow table, the node performs the packet processing specified by the hit entry with respect to a received packet. If a deletion condition with regard to a first flow entry in the flow table is satisfied, the node deletes the first flow entry from the flow table. The deletion condition includes that a sum of packet lengths of all the received packets matching the first flow entry after the first flow entry is set up exceeds a predetermined deletion unit length. | 11-21-2013 |
20130315241 | METHOD TO PROCESS HTTP HEADER WITH HARDWARE ASSISTANCE - In processing Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) headers, a packet pre-processor is configured with at least one predetermined header field identifier. The packet pre-processor detects at least one header field identifier in a header field of an HTTP packet received over an HTTP session between a host and a server, matches the predetermined header field identifier to the header field identifier in the HTTP packet, generates a header report block comprising information corresponding to the header field identifier in the HTTP packet, and sends the HTTP packet and the header report block to a processor module for processing the HTTP packet based on the header report block. The processor module receives the HTTP packet and the header report block from the packet pre-processor, retrieves a service policy using the header report block, applies the service policy to the HTTP packet, and sends the HTTP packet to the host or the server. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315242 | Network Communication Method and Device - The present invention provides a network communication method and device. The method includes: receiving, by a VNC on a physical host, a network communication packet sent by a first virtual machine of which a host machine is the physical host and which has a mapping relationship with the VNC, where a source address carried in the network communication packet is an address of the first virtual machine, a destination address carried in the network communication packet is an address of a second virtual machine or an address of another physical host; selecting, by the physical host, a VPN network corresponding to the VNC on the physical host according to preset correspondence between the VPN network and the VNC; and sending, by the physical host, the network communication packet through the selected VPN network. The present invention lowers the restriction on setting an IP address of a virtual machine in a VPN. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315243 | ROUTING DEVICE - A routing device is provided, the routing device includes a first network interface unit, a second network interface unit and a processing unit. The first network interface unit connects the routing device to a local private network. The second network interface unit connects the routing device to the Internet. The processing unit assigns a virtual subnet to a remote routing device for a remote host in a remote private network to obtain a virtual Internet protocol (IP) address according to the virtual subnet. The processing unit receives a network packet from a local host in the local private network through the first network interface unit, and encapsulates the network packet according to a public IP address of the remote routing device to generate an alternative packet. Then, the processing unit delivers the alternative packet to the Internet through the second network interface unit. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315244 | VLAN SUPPORT OF DIFFERENTIATED SERVICES - The two types of virtual local area networks (VLANs) may be defined: p-bits-Inferred-scheduling class VLAN (p-VLAN); and VLAN- | 11-28-2013 |
20130315245 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR MAINTAINING QUALITY OF SERVICE QOS - The present invention discloses a method for maintaining quality of service QoS, which includes: identifying a CLP and a service type of a newly received ATM cell, and obtaining a corresponding QoS label; when the QoS label corresponding to the newly received ATM cell is different from a QoS label corresponding to a buffered ATM cell, encapsulating the buffered ATM cell into a pseudo wire PW packet in a concatenation manner and sending the pseudo wire PW packet, where the QoS label corresponding to the buffered ATM cell is used as a QoS label of a PSN transport header of the PW packet, or is used as QoS labels of both the PSN transport header and a PW header of the PW packet, and buffering the newly received ATM cell. The present invention further provides a corresponding provider edge PE device and a corresponding ATM PWE3 system. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315246 | ADDRESS RESOLUTION METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - An address resolution method uniformly processing ARP broadcast packets by an address server to avoid broadcasting in the network, so that the occupied bandwidth is reduced. The method also includes storing by a network device and terminal address correspondence information of local and remote terminals in communication with one another, which reduces the size of the MAC table in the data center network, reduces the load of the network device, and improves the processing capabilities of the network device, so that it is possible to deploy a large layer-2 network to thereby solve real-time relocation problems of a virtual machine. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315247 | TRI-COLOUR DATA PACKET COUNTING FOR TRI-COLOUR MARKING POLICIES - The invention is directed to counting data packets marked according to tri-color marking techniques. Packets of a packet flow that are marked according to a three color (or tri-color) marking scheme are counted using a counter implemented on a ternary content addressable memory (TCAM). Advantages of some embodiments of the invention are to enable the use of generic and cost-efficient TCAMs to quickly obtain the counts of all three colors of packets in such a packet flow. These counts can be used to provide detailed statistics on characteristics of the packet flow, which can be useful for debugging and accounting purposes. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315248 | NETWORK SYSTEM AND NETWORK FLOW TRACING METHOD - In a flow-based network such as an open flow network system, even when a network appliance such as NAT and NAPT for translating a packet header is passed through, a correspondence relation of two flows before and after the passing can be grasped to make it possible to trace the flow in end-to-end. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315249 | RELAY SERVER AND RELAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A relay server performs control to establish a routing session between the relay server and another routing relay server, control to establish a sub routing session between the relay server and a sub routing apparatus, and a packet forward control to forward a received packet via the routing session or the sub routing session. The packet forward control is such a control that, when a destination of a packet is associated with the sub routing apparatus of the relay server in a content stored in a sub address filter information storage unit, the packet is forwarded to the sub routing apparatus, while otherwise the packet is forwarded to the destination. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315250 | TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE, INTEGRATED CIRCUIT THEREOF, TRANSFER CONTROL METHOD, AND TRANSFER CONTROL SYSTEM - To achieve efficient data transfer between a first network | 11-28-2013 |
20130322444 | DETECTING AND MITIGATING FORWARDING LOOPS IN STATEFUL NETWORK DEVICES - In one embodiment, a stateful device receives a packet on a particular interface of a stateful device in a computer network, where the packet includes source identification and destination identification. The source identification and destination identification of the packet may then be swapped and checked against a stateful connection table managed at the stateful device for the particular interface, such that a loop may be detected at the particular interface in response to the swapped source identification and destination identification matching an existing entry in the stateful connection table. In the event there is such a detected loop, the packet (e.g., and any subsequent similar packets) may to be dropped, accordingly. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322445 | Implementing Control Planes for Hybrid Networks - Disclosed are various embodiments for implementing a control plane in hybrid networks. A coordinated shared network may correspond to a distributed bridge, and a control plane may be implemented in one of the nodes of the coordinated shared network. A hybrid network may support multiple heterogeneous networking technologies. A hybrid network device, such as a gateway, may support multiple different coordinated shared networks, each corresponding to distributed bridges. The control planes for the distributed bridges may be implemented in the hybrid network device. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322446 | VIRTUAL ETHERNET PORT AGGREGATION (VEPA)-ENABLED MULTI-TENANT OVERLAY NETWORK - In accordance with one embodiment, a system that may be used for enabling Virtual Ethernet Port Aggregation (VEPA) in an overlay network includes a host server providing a virtual switch, the virtual switch including logic adapted for receiving a packet from a first virtual machine (VM) on the host server, logic adapted for determining that a destination of the packet is a second VM common to the host server, logic adapted for encapsulating the packet with a tunnel header to form an overlay packet, logic adapted for sending the overlay packet via a tunnel to a physical networking element to have inspection services performed thereon, logic adapted for receiving the overlay packet from the physical networking element, logic adapted for de-encapsulating the overlay packet to retrieve a serviced packet, and logic adapted for forwarding the serviced packet to the second VM, wherein the tunnel header includes tenant specific information. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322447 | End-to-end multipathing through network having switching devices compatible with different protocols - A first cluster includes first switching devices that are compatible with a software-defined networking (SDN) protocol. A second cluster includes second switching devices within or partially overlapping the first cluster. Each second switching device is compatible with a protocol for an open systems interconnection (OSI) model layer. The first switching devices include one or more border switching devices located at a boundary between the first cluster and the second cluster. Each border switching device is also compatible with the protocol for the OSI model layer. The first switching devices effect first multipathing through the network except through the second cluster, and the second switching devices effect second multipathing just through the second cluster of the network. As such, the first switching devices and the second switching devices together effect end-to-end multipathing through both the first cluster and the second cluster of the network. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322448 | DIAMETER MESSAGE MIRRORING AND SPOOFING - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: receiving a Diameter message at the DRA from an origin device, wherein the Diameter message includes a first destination address; establishing a context object based on receiving the Diameter message, wherein the context object is associated with a copy of the Diameter message; evaluating at least one rule, comprising modifying, based on a first reference to the context object, the copy to include a second destination address, and transmitting the copy to another device based on the second destination address. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322449 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING PARTIAL NETWORKING SUPPORT FOR VEHICLE AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT INCLUDING THE APPARATUS - An apparatus and method for providing partial networking support for a vehicle, and an electronic control unit including the apparatus. The apparatus includes a service ID extraction unit configured to extract service ID information from a controller area network (CAN) frame or an Ethernet frame; a table search unit configured to search a predefined partial network table for service information and network information corresponding to the service ID information; a frame generation unit configured to generate a partial networking Ethernet frame based on the found service information; and a frame transmission unit configured to transmit the generated partial networking Ethernet frame to a network based on the found network information. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322450 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In an exemplary communication apparatus, an assignment module determines whether processing for a second packet assigned the flow ID associated with a received first packet is being executed. The assignment module determines a parallel processing module to execute processing for the first packet and a parameter to be included in a notice of assignment. The determined parallel processing module acquires a result of execution of the processing for the second packet from the computation table or the result of execution of the processing held in the parallel processing module according to the received notice of assignment. The determined parallel processing module executes the processing for the first packet using the result of execution of the processing for the second packet and the information included in the notice of assignment, and updates a computation table with a result of execution of the processing for the first packet. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322451 | System and Method for a Context Layer Switch - In accordance with an embodiment, a network device has an input port for receiving input packets, and an output port for sending output packets, where the input packets and output packets have context layer information. The network device also includes a processor configured to process the input packets and output packets using a network protocol having a context layer. | 12-05-2013 |
20130329730 | Scaling IPv4 in Data Center Networks Employing ECMP to Reach Hosts in a Directly Connected Subnet - Systems and methods are provided for scaling IPv4 networks for large data centers to reach hosts in a directly connected subnet. ToRs may be dynamically selected in a load balanced manner to ensure that any host may deliver packets to any other host in two or less hops. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329731 | INTEGRATED SWITCH FOR DYNAMIC ORCHESTRATION OF TRAFFIC - A network element within a data center comprises a switch adapted to receive a data packet, a server in communication with the switch, and a switching engine in the switch. The switching engine may be configured to modify policy header information in the data packet to direct the packet to the server. The server may be configured to modify the policy header information while the data packet is in the server to return the data packet to said switch. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329732 | FILTERING OF UNSOLICITED INCOMING PACKETS TO ELECTRONIC DEVICES - The disclosed embodiments provide a system that processes incoming network packets to an electronic device. The system includes an analysis apparatus that maintains a list of accepted incoming packet attributes for the electronic device based on outgoing packets from the electronic device. The system also includes a filtering apparatus that compares a first set of header information for an incoming packet to the list. If the first set of header information is not included in the list, the filtering apparatus discards the incoming packet. If the first set of header information is included in the list, the filtering apparatus enables subsequent processing of the incoming packet on the electronic device by, for example, providing the incoming packet to a transport-layer mechanism on the electronic device for subsequent processing of the incoming packet by the transport-layer mechanism. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329733 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING A TUNNEL PACKET - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus and a system for processing a tunnel packet. When a tunnel ingress device performs tunnel encapsulation on a data packet, a dynamic identifier is included in an encapsulated packet header, so that each tunnel-encapsulated data packet has a different triplet. In this way, when the tunnel-encapsulated data packet is fragmented, a tunnel egress device may correctly reassemble the tunnel-encapsulated data packet according to the triplet of the fragmented packet. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329734 | TECHNIQUES FOR PROVIDING VALUE-ADDED SERVICES IN SDN-BASED NETWORKS - A method for providing value added services (VAS) in a software defined network (SDN). The method comprises determining which value added services and their order should be assigned to an incoming traffic; determining for each of the one or more value added services their respective servers providing the value added services and assigning a unique diversion value to each server; instructing at least one peer network element to set a diversion field in each packet in the incoming traffic with a diversion value corresponding to a server providing a first value added service of the one or more value added services; and instructing each edge network element to set the diversion field of each packet output by the server to designate a destination node for the packet, wherein the destination node is any one of the destination server and a server providing a subsequent value added service. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329735 | PACKET TRANSFER DEVICE, PACKET TRANSFER METHOD, PACKET TRANSFER PROGRAM AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A packet transfer device includes: an address conversion unit that allocates a global address to a plurality of private addresses of the plurality of private networks and converts address information and a port number included in a header of a received packet; a transfer unit that transfers a packet having the address information and the port number which are converted by the address conversion unit; and a session restriction unit that manages a number of sessions between a user terminal in the plurality of private networks and a device in the global network for each predetermined group and, when the number of sessions is greater than a number of available sessions which is set to each group, restricts the session of the user terminal which belongs to the group having the excess number of sessions. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329736 | CONTENTION FREE PIPELINED BROADCASTING WITHIN A CONSTANT BISECTION BANDWIDTH NETWORK TOPOLOGY - In an interconnection network, multiple nodes are connected to one of a first layer of switches. The first layer of switches is connected to one another through a second layer of switches. Each of the nodes is connected through one of multiple shared links connecting the first layer switches and the second layer of switches. A pipelined broadcast manager schedules broadcast steps for a pipelined broadcast through the crossbar switches according to each separate, single static route set through at least one of an inter-switch broadcast phase during which at least one packet is passed from at least one switch of the crossbar switches to another of the crossbar switches and an intra-switch broadcast phase during which the at least one packet is passed only among a selection of nodes connected to the another of the crossbar switches. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329737 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DETERMINE AN ALTERNATE ROUTE IN A NETWORK - Methods and apparatus to determine an alternate route in a network are disclosed. Example methods disclosed herein include processing a label stack of a data packet at a first node to determine whether the data packet is undergoing alternative routing to a destination. Such example methods also include, in response to determining that the data packet is undergoing alternative routing, processing the label stack to determine multiplicity values for neighbor nodes of the first node, respective ones of the multiplicity values representing respective numbers of times the data packet has been routed to respective ones of the neighbor nodes while undergoing alternative routing to the destination. Such example methods further include updating the label stack to increase a respective multiplicity value associated with the first node prior to routing the data packet from the first node to a first one of the neighbor nodes selected based on the multiplicity values. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329738 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, DATA BASE, CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system comprises: a plurality of forwarding nodes each of which processes an incoming packet in accordance with a packet handling operation; a data base which stores a first table for determining a role of a user of a source node from information about the source node and a second table for defining an accessible or inaccessible resource for each role and which transmits a response about a resource accessible or inaccessible by the user of the source node in response to a request from a control apparatus; and a control apparatus which uses, when receiving a request for setting the processing rule from any one of the forwarding nodes, information about the source node included in the request for setting the processing rule, querying the data base for a resource accessible or inaccessible by the user of the source node, creating the processing rule based on the response from the data base, and setting the processing rule in the forwarding node. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329739 | OBTAINING INFORMATION FROM DATA ITEMS - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for obtaining information from a predetermined portion of a header of a data item such as an IP packet transmitted via a communication network such as a packet network, the portion carrying a codepoint selected from a first set of codepoints each of which has a pre-defined meaning according to a first pre-defined communication protocol. The method comprises: receiving the data item (s | 12-12-2013 |
20130336320 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REASSEMBLY OF PACKETS DISTRIBUTED ACROSS A CLUSTER - The present application is directed towards systems and methods for handling fragmented packets in a cluster environment. Fragments received by the cluster may be hashed based on a tuple of network layer information, such as source and destination IP addresses. The tuple of network layer information may be used to identify a device of the cluster as a “fragment owner” or node responsible for assembling the fragments of the packet. The fragment may be transmitted or steered to the fragment owner for accumulation and assembly. Once all fragments of the packet have been received by the fragment owner, the packet may be assembled and a second hash may be calculated based on a four-tuple of network and transport layer information, such as source and destination IP addresses and port numbers. The packet may then be steered or transmitted to the “packet owner” or node responsible for processing the packet. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336321 | RELAY FORWARD SYSTEM, PATH CONTROL DEVICE, AND EDGE APPARATUS - In a relay forward system, in setting a label switched path between edge nodes: information which is dependent on a user network such as routing information in the user network, which is also referred to as user network routing information, and information which is dependent on a label switching network such as a relay route of a label switched path and a path ID for specifying a label switched path, which is also referred to as internode path information are separated from each other; and are also managed separately in the whole relay forward system, to thereby control forwarding of a packet. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336322 | Anycast-Based Internet Protocol Redirection To Alleviate Partial Routing Tables - Systems and methods are described that instruct routers having constrained hardware/memory to redirect all outbound traffic to a helper router. The helper router contains a full routing table that can forward any packet to its destination. In a large service provider network, helper routers may be distributed at multiple locations across the network. Since packets must detour through the helper router, the distributed helper routers minimize latency. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336323 | OPTIMIZED BI-DIRECTIONAL COMMUNICATION IN AN INFORMATION CENTRIC NETWORK - Embodiments describe enhancing bi-directional communication in an information centric computer network through a piggyback session, which comprises mapping requests for data received to content, sending at least one piggyback packet to a remote node, wherein a piggyback packet is a data packet comprising a request field and a content field, receiving at least one piggyback packet from the remote node, and processing the piggyback packets. Processing may comprise splitting the request field and the content field in at least one received piggyback packet, sending the content extracted from the received piggyback packet to a client application running on the computing apparatus and setting one or more events to trigger the processing of at least one piggyback packet. Additional embodiments describe the structure of a piggyback packet and the management of a piggyback session at a router device by validating incoming piggyback packets and determining a recipient accordingly. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336324 | TUNNEL PROVISIONING WITH LINK AGGREGATION - A method for processing data packets in a communication network includes establishing a path for a flow of the data packets through the communication network. At a node along the path having a plurality of aggregated ports, a port is selected from among the plurality to serve as part of the path. A label is chosen responsively to the selected port. The label is attached to the data packets in the flow at a point on the path upstream from the node. Upon receiving the data packets at the node, the data packets are switched through the selected port responsively to the label. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336325 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING MULTIMEDIA FRAME IN BROADCAST SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for transmitting a multimedia frame through a heterogeneous network in a broadcast system supporting a multimedia service based on an internet protocol are provided. The method includes generating header information including a frame identifier distinguishing a multimedia frame and information measuring a quality of a connection service between network layers and end-to-end network capabilities, and combining the header information and multimedia data to configure the multimedia frame. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336326 | Arp packet processing method, communication system and device - An Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packet processing method. a communication system and a device are disclosed. The method includes: receiving an ARP packet, and judging the type of the ARP packet; when the ARP packet is an ARP request, responding to the ARP request if an entry corresponding to the ARP request is found in a local ARP table; and when the ARP packet is an ARP response. reporting the ARP response if an entry corresponding to the ARP response is found in the local ARP table and a reporting parameter in the entry indicates permission of reporting; or discarding the ARP response if no entry corresponding to the ARP response is found in the ARP table. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336327 | NETWORK SYSTEM, PACKET PROCESSING METHOD AND RECORDING MEDIUM - In an open flow network system, a packet to be subjected to multicast transmission is transmitted to a plurality of VLANs which are different. Specifically, a packet transfer processing unit determines, when receiving a packet, whether or not the packet is for the multicast transmission. In case of the multicast transmission, whether or not the packet has been completely transmitted to ports specified for destinations is checked. When not having completely transmitted, a packet header of a packet is rewritten, and the written packet is copied and transmitted to a destination port and a network processor (NP). Through the loop-back processing, whether or not the packet received from NP is for the multicast transmission is determined. In case of the multicast transmission, it is checked whether or not the packet has been completely transmitted to the ports specified for destination. When having not been completely transmitted, the packet is rewritten in the packet header and is copied and transmitted to the destination port and the NP. When having been completely transmitted, the packet is discarded and the processing is ended. | 12-19-2013 |
20130343385 | HYPERVISOR INDEPENDENT NETWORK VIRTUALIZATION - In one embodiment, a first physical overlay switch located at an edge of an IP network includes logic adapted for: receiving a packet having a virtual local area network (VLAN) identifier (ID) from a virtual switch, encapsulating the packet with an overlay header, tunneling the encapsulated packet via the IP network to a second physical overlay switch, receiving a second encapsulated packet having a second overlay header from the second physical overlay switch, de-encapsulating the second encapsulated packet to create a second packet having a second VLAN ID, and sending the second packet to the virtual switch. In another embodiment, a method includes receiving a packet having a VLAN ID at a first physical overlay switch located at an edge of an IP network, encapsulating the packet with an overlay header, and tunneling the encapsulated packet to a second physical overlay switch via the IP network. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343386 | FIRST HOP LOAD BALANCING - In an implementation, a packet is received from a network device. A group identifier is retrieved from the received packet. A plurality of layer-2 switch identifiers that are associated with the retrieved group identifier is determined. A switch identifier is selected from the plurality of layer-2 switch identifiers. The received packet is forwarded to a layer-2 switch identified by the selected switch identifier. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343387 | HIGH-SPEED CLD-BASED INTERNAL PACKET ROUTING - A method of routing internal network traffic within a computing system comprises receiving a network packet at a configurable logic device (CLD), parsing the network packet to obtain a destination address, searching a predetermined range of a routing table wherein each row of the routing table specifies a range of possible destination addresses and routing information, identifying a matching row of the routing table wherein the destination address falls within the range of possible destination addresses of the matching row, and routing the packet according to the routing information. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343388 | BINDING OF NETWORK FLOWS TO PROCESS THREADS - A method of routing internal network traffic within a computing system, comprises receiving a network packet at a configurable logic device (CLD), parsing the network packet to obtain a source address and a destination address, searching a predetermined range of a routing table wherein each row of the routing table specifies a range of possible destination addresses and a thread group identifier, identifying a matching row of the routing table wherein the destination address falls within the range of possible destination addresses of the matching row, calculating a hash value based at least in part on the source and destination addresses, and determining a thread identifier based at least in part on the hash value and the thread group identifier. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343389 | HIGH-SPEED CLD-BASED PIPELINE ARCHITECTURE - A method of processing network traffic within a computing system, comprises at a first configurable logic device (CLD), receiving an ingress network packet from an external network interface, associating the ingress network packet with a timestamp indicating the time of receipt, parsing the ingress network packet to locate a link-layer checksum value and a routing-layer checksum value, determining whether the link-layer and routing-layer checksum values are correct based on the ingress network packet contents, and transmitting the ingress network packet to a second CLD via a high-speed interconnection; and at the second CLD receiving the ingress network packet, parsing the ingress network packet to locate a source address and a destination address, determining a destination and a route for the ingress network packet based at least in part on the source and destination addresses, and transmitting the ingress network packet to the determined destination via the determined route. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343390 | MANAGING THE CAPTURE OF PACKETS IN A COMPUTING SYSTEM - A method for managing the capture of packets in a computing system comprises maintaining a buffer tail pointer in a memory of an instruction executing device, receiving a series of packets at an instruction executing device, for each received packet prepending a header comprising a packet length and a packet pointer set to a current value of the buffer tail pointer, determining a next free memory location by adding the current value of the buffer tail pointer to the length of a previous packet identified by the buffer tail pointer, temporarily writing the packet and prepend header to the next free memory location in a circular packet buffer in a memory coupled to the instruction executing device, and setting the buffer tail pointer to the next free memory location | 12-26-2013 |
20130343391 | Systems and Methods of IPV6 Mapping - Example embodiments of the systems and methods of IPv6 mapping disclosed herein involve computing an IPv6 source and/or destination address based on the type of service being used by the user, which is derived from the digits input to the device by the user or system, and the destination phone number input by the user. The mapping is done in second half (for example, 64 bits) of the IPv6 address (the interface ID). The first half of the IPv6 address is a defined subnet (known as a “prefix” in IPv6 terms) for phone number routing. The subnet comprises a global routing prefix and a subnet identification. The interface ID is split into three sections: an identifier, a country code, and an end point number. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343392 | DIGITAL BROADCASTING SIGNAL TRANSMITTING METHOD AND DEVICE, RECORDING MEDIUM THEREOF, AND RECEIVING DEVICE THEREOF - In a digital broadcasting signal transmission system, a transmission frame includes a frame body and a frame header, and the frame body is divided into a plurality of sub-bands in the frequency domain and is divided into a plurality of symbols in the time domain. The frame header is provided in the former part of the transmission frame and is transmitted with a signal in the time domain. The frame body includes a plurality of services, and the services respectively receive at least one sub-band and at least one symbol. The frame header includes information on the plurality of services, and information on the plurality of services includes information on the sub-band and the symbol to which the services are allocated, information on channel encoding levels of the services, and information on digital modulation levels of the services. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343393 | COMPUTER SYSTEM, SERVER, OPEN FLOW CONTROLLER AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a computer system according to the present invention, a host sends a packet in which protocol information above a TCP layer and within a transport layer is included in an option area of a TCP header. An open flow controller set a flow entry wick defines a forwarding destination corresponding to the protocol information, in a switch. An open flow switch forwards the received packet toward a forwarding destination which corresponds to the protocol information included in the TCP header of the received packed. As a result, an adaptation of the computer system is increased. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343394 | Method and Apparatus for Converting Virtual Local Area Network Identity - A method and an apparatus for converting a virtual local area network identity are presented. An egress RB obtains and stores a service information table of each routing bridge and receives a data packet in TRILL encapsulation sent by a source terminal and forwarded by a neighboring routing bridge. The egress RB queries a stored service information table according to an identity of an ingress RB and a VID in the data packet and obtains a local VID of a service that the data packet belongs to according to a service information table of an egress RB. The egress RB converts a virtual local area network identity in the received data packet into a local virtual local area network identity and sends the data packet with the converted virtual local area network identity to a destination terminal. | 12-26-2013 |
20140003431 | PER-PEER REQUEST DELIVERY TIMEOUTS | 01-02-2014 |
20140003432 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING HEADERS | 01-02-2014 |
20140003433 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SERVICES IN DISTRIBUTED SWITCH | 01-02-2014 |
20140003434 | Method for Mapping Packets to Network Virtualization Instances | 01-02-2014 |
20140003435 | PACKET SCHEDULING METHOD AND APPARATUS CONSIDERING VIRTUAL PORT | 01-02-2014 |
20140003436 | Internet Protocol and Ethernet Lookup Via a Unified Hashed Trie | 01-02-2014 |
20140003437 | Communication Device Having VPN Accommodation Function | 01-02-2014 |
20140010233 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication device includes a flow identification unit specifying a user corresponding to received data, a bandwidth control unit controlling transmission of the received data so as not to exceed a bandwidth corresponding to the selected communication path in two bandwidths allocated to the specified user, and a label addition unit adding the label value corresponding to the selected communication path to the data received from the bandwidth control unit and transmitting the data. The label addition unit executes, upon detecting a trigger for a change in the selection of the communication path, changing the selection of the label value and transmitting a feedback signal for giving notice of the change in the selection of the communication path to the bandwidth control unit in a given order. The bandwidth control unit executes a process of changing the setup of the bandwidth on the basis of the received feedback signal. | 01-09-2014 |
20140016640 | ROUTER APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND PACKET TRANSFER METHOD - A router apparatus connecting a first network and a second network including a storage unit which stores association information associating an address of one of a plurality of second router apparatuses with an address of a corresponding one of a plurality of server apparatuses with an identical address, each of the plurality of second router apparatus connecting the first network to each of a plurality of third networks to which the respective plurality of server apparatuses is connected, a receiving unit which receives a packet transmitted from a terminal apparatus and transferred via the second network, an encapsulating unit which encapsulates the packet received into a packet with a destination address corresponding to the address of the second router apparatus associated with an address of the packet based on the association information, and a transmitting unit which transmits the packet encapsulated by the encapsulating unit to the first network. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016641 | Communication System and Communication Control Device - Provided is a communication system which connects a unified C/U router to a network having C/U separation, wherein the stopping of U-plane communication of the unified C/U router is prevented even when the messages transmitted from a C-plane controller of the network having C/U separation do not arrive because of faults in the network having C/U separation. The routing information of a C-plane message (routing protocol) received by a U-plane controller is sent to an adjacent peer without being reflected in a routing table of the U-plane controller. The routing table of the U-plane controller is generated on the basis of the routing information (FIB information) received directly from the C-plane controller. In addition, a keep-alive packet from the unified C/U router is not sent to the C-plane controller and keeps alive the connection with the user router at the transmission destination. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016642 | Extended Subnets - There is provided a router for use in a datacenter, the router including a frame receiving module operative to receive a traffic frame and a frame forwarding module operative to forward the traffic frame to a second router in a second datacenter if a Destination Media Access Control (DMAC) address included in the traffic frame is different from all of the following: | 01-16-2014 |
20140016643 | DIVERSE PATH FORWARDING THROUGH TRIAL AND ERROR - In one embodiment, a node determines an intention to transmit a diversely forwarded packet through a computer network, and as such, transmits a first version of the packet having a packet identifier (ID) and a first distinguisher value to a first next-hop node, and transmits a second version of the packet having the same packet ID and a second distinguisher value different from the first distinguisher value to a second next-hop node different from the first next-hop node. In another embodiment, a next-hop node that receives the packet determines whether any previously received packet at the next-hop node had a same packet ID and a different distinguisher value. In response to determining that no previously received packet has the same packet ID and different distinguisher value, the next-hop node stores the packet ID and the distinguisher value, and forwards the packet to a selected next-hop node. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016644 | PROPAGATION OF ROUTING INFORMATION IN RSVP-TE FOR INTER-DOMAIN TE-LSPs - In one embodiment, a traffic engineering (TE) label switched path (LSP) is established between a head-end node in a local domain and a tail-end node in a remote domain. The TE-LSP spans one or more intervening domains located between the local domain and the remote domain. The head-end node sends a routing information request over the TE-LSP to a target node on the TE-LSP that is in the remote domain. The head end node receives routing information from the target node. The received routing information includes a list of address prefixes reachable by the target node. The head end node uses the received routing information to calculate routes reachable via the TE-LSP to the target node. The calculated routes have a next-hop interface set to be the TE-LSP. The calculated routes are inserted into a routing table of the head-end node. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016645 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus includes a receiver, a memory, a processor, and a transmitter. The receiver receives a route information frame and a first frame that is not the route information frame. The memory holds a route information table. The route information table records route information included in the route information frame. When the route information table does not include the source address of the first frame, the processor associates the source address with the address of a transfer-source apparatus that has transferred the first frame to the receiver, and registers these addresses in a registration table. In order to transmit a second frame addressed to a destination apparatus that is not recorded in the route information table, the processor obtains the address of a transfer-source apparatus registered in association with the address of the destination apparatus. The transmitter transmits the second frame to the address obtained by the processor. | 01-16-2014 |
20140023075 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND ALGORITHMS FOR NAMED DATA NETWORK ROUTING WITH PATH LABELING - The present disclosure relates generally to the field of routing with path labeling (in named data networks). In various examples, routing with path labeling may be implemented in one or more named data networks in the form of systems, methods and/or algorithms. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023076 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND ALGORITHMS FOR NAMED DATA NETWORK ROUTING WITH PATH LABELING - The present disclosure relates generally to the field of routing with path labeling (in named data networks). In various examples, routing with path labeling may be implemented in one or more named data networks in the form of systems, methods and/or algorithms. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023077 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA PACKETS - A method and an apparatus for routing data packets. The solution in a communication network including a set of nodes, storing information regarding nodes of the network; and when transmitting a data packet to a destination node in the network, determining and including in the data packet the recipient identification; determining and including in the data packet the direction of the destination node in the network; determining and including in the data packet a hop count indicator indicating the number of node-to-node hops to the destination node; setting in the data packet the transmission direction indicator equal to a value corresponding to direction down and transmitting the packet. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023078 | Method and Apparatus for Transporting Ethernet Services - Frames of customer traffic may be encapsulated by adding Mac-in-Mac (MiM) encapsulation fields for transportation of the frames over a portion of provider network. The MiM encapsulated traffic may be further encapsulated using VPLS by adding VPLS encapsulation fields for transportation of the frames over another portion of the provider network. The MiM encapsulations use provider network_MAC addresses which enables VPLS MAC learning to occur using provider network MAC address space. MiM tunnels are mapped to VPLS service instances which are assigned pseudowire tags for transportation over the VPLS portion of provider network. The MiM header is retained when the MiM encapsulated frames are transported over the VPLS portion of the provider network. As VPLS frames exit the core network, the VPLS encapsulation fields are removed to extract the original MiM encapsulated frames for further transportation over the MiM portion of the provider network. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023079 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING ADDRESS RESOLUTION PROTOCOL ARP ENTRY - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and an apparatus for configuring an ARP entry. The method includes: acquiring, by a first router, when determining that a second router is a reachable neighbor, information needed for configuring an ARP entry; and configuring, by the first router during neighbor route calculation performed with the second router, the ARP entry according to the acquired information needed for configuring the ARP entry. When neighbor establishment between the first router and the second router is completed, because the ARP entry configuration on neighbor routers has been completed and IP traffic can be forwarded normally, the problem that partial traffic is lost when the neighbor routers perform traffic forwarding for the first time is avoided. | 01-23-2014 |
20140029615 | NETWORK-BASED CONTENT FILTERING UTILIZING USER-SPECIFIED PARAMETERS - Network-based content filtering utilizing user-specified parameters is disclosed. Example methods disclosed herein to perform network-based content filtering include receiving, at an incoming edge router of a provider network, incoming data to be routed in the provider network to a destination device, and before routing the incoming data in the provider network, determining whether to restrict the routing of the incoming data in the provider network to the destination device based on a parameter associated with the destination device, the parameter being related to a content classification of the incoming data. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029616 | DYNAMIC NODE CONFIGURATION IN DIRECTORY-BASED SYMMETRIC MULTIPROCESSING SYSTEMS - Systems and methods that allow for dynamically deconfiguring, reconfiguring and/or otherwise configuring nodes (e.g., processors) in a symmetric multiprocessing system (e.g., a symmetric multiprocessor) in a manner that avoids, or at least limits, inefficiencies such as renumbering of node IDs, system reboots, SW configuration handle changes, and the like. In one arrangement, a number of modules, tables and/or the like that are configured to generate node IDs and/or convert node IDs from one form to another form can be intelligently implemented within an SMP to allow the various processes and/or components of an SMP to utilize the node IDs in a more efficient manner. For instance, as SDs in an SMP are often configured to work with CNIDs (e.g., for use in determining at which node a particular requested cache line resides), any node GNIDs that are sent to the SD for processing can first be converted into corresponding CNIDs. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029617 | PACKET PROCESSING APPROACH TO IMPROVE PERFORMANCE AND ENERGY EFFICIENCY FOR SOFTWARE ROUTERS - Methods, apparatus and systems for improved performance and energy efficiency of software-based routers. A software router running on a host computer system employing multiple Network Interface Controllers (NICs) maintains a routing table wherein packet flows are classified as managed flows (MFs) under which packets are received at and forwarded from the same NIC and unmanaged flows UFs under which packets are received at and forwarded from different NICs. Forwarding table data is employed by a NIC to facilitate packet identification and flow classification operations under which the NIC determines whether a received packet is an MF, UF, or an unclassified flow. Under various schemes, packet forwarding for MFs is handled by the software router architecture such that either only the packet header is copied into memory in the host or the entire packet forwarding is handled by the NIC. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029618 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR OPTIMIZING LAYER THREE ROUTING IN AN INFORMATION HANDLING SYSTEM - An information handling system is provided. The information handling system includes systems and methods for providing an anycast MAC addressing of a virtual redundancy router protocol instance that spans a plurality of aggregation switches. The anycast MAC address may be provided by a virtual bridging device and then used as an address of a virtual IP instance accessible through the virtual bridging device. Using the anycast MAC address with the virtual IP instance, a packet to be routed from one rack to another rack in a data center may be dynamically routed based a current load distribution. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029619 | POLICY BASED ROUTING - According to an example, a method for policy based routing may include receiving a data packet, and generating a weight table including an index corresponding to a weight based distribution of a plurality of redirect hosts. The method may further include generating a hash table including an index corresponding to a random distribution of the weight based distribution, using an IP address of the data packet to determine a corresponding index value in the hash table index, determining an availability status of a redirect host of the plurality of redirect hosts corresponding to the index value, and routing, by a processor, the data packet to the redirect host if the availability status is determined to be available. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029620 | PACKET HANDLING METHOD, FORWARDING DEVICE AND SYSTEM - A packet handling method, comprising: receiving a TCP ACK packet currently sent by a client; searching in a storage device for a TCP packet requested for retransmission by the TCP ACK packet when it is determined that the Acknowledge Number field value in the TCP header of the TCP ACK packet currently sent by the client is equal to that previously sent by the client over the same TCP connection; discarding the TCP ACK packet and transmitting the TCP packet to the client when the TCP packet requested for retransmission is found in the storage device. In comparison to the prior art, where the TCP packet at anytime is directly transmitted by a server to the client via the forwarding device, bandwidth between the server and the forwarding device is saved, thereby network congestion is reduced, and network resource utilization is increased. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029621 | METHOD FOR LEARNING MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL ADDRESS, NETWORK DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for learning a media access control address, a network device and a system. The method includes: generating a key value according to a key field of a received packet, and obtaining an index value corresponding to the key value according to the key value; performing a linear random iteration on the index value according to a preset number of iterations; searching, according to an iteration index value obtained during a first iteration, in a MAC address pool for a MAC address corresponding to the iteration index value obtained during the first iteration; and learning a MAC address of the packet according to a search result. By using the embodiments of the present invention a media access control address space may be fully utilized, and the problem of media access control address conflicts may be solved to the greatest extent. | 01-30-2014 |
20140036917 | ADDRESS RESOLUTION MECHANISM FOR HYBRID COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A hybrid device can execute hybrid ARP functionality to manage one-to-many associations between a single network layer address and multiple link layer addresses of other hybrid devices. In accordance with the hybrid ARP functionality, the hybrid device can determine a transmission route, a corresponding one of a plurality of network interfaces of a destination hybrid device, and a corresponding one of a plurality of link layer addresses of the destination hybrid device, based on address resolution store entries associated with the destination hybrid device. The identified link layer address can be populated in a frame for transmission to the destination hybrid device. Additionally, the hybrid ARP functionality can be configured to operate in conjunction with conventional ARP functionality implemented by upper protocol layers. The hybrid ARP functionality can serve as a “proxy” between the conventional ARP functionality and one or more hybrid devices of the hybrid communication network. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036918 | HIGH-SPEED CONTENT ROUTING - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: receiving, at a first input line card of the network device, a message, the message including a destination address; transmitting the message, by the first input line card, to the second input line card based on the determination that the second input line card is configured with routing information related to the destination address; determining, by the second input line card and based on the routing information related to the destination address, that the message should be forwarded via a first output line card of the network device to another network device; transmitting the message, by the second input line card, to the first output line card based on the determination that the message should be forwarded; and transmitting the message, by the first output line card, to another network device. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036919 | Forward Progress Assurance and Quality of Service Enhancement in a Packet Transferring System - A method comprising detecting at least one Quality of Service (QoS) requirement is met that indicates a very important packet (VIP) is outstanding from a source node in a multi-hop network comprising multiple nodes, sending an initiation message to an adjacent node in response to the detection that may activate a protocol in which a reserved channel is activated, and receiving the VIP via the reserved channel. Also, a method comprising receiving an initiation message from an adjacent node in a multi-hop network that comprises information identifying the VIP comprising a source node, a destination node, a packet type, wherein the initiation message activates a protocol in which a reserved channel is activated, searching for the VIP identified by the initiation message, and forwarding the VIP promptly if present via the reserved channel or forwarding an initiation message to adjacent nodes closer to the source node. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036920 | IDENTIFYING A PORT ASSOCIATED WITH A NETWORK NODE TO WHICH A SELECTED NETWORK LINK IS CONNECTED - A system for use in a computer network is disclosed for identifying the destination of a network link from a source of the link, in which a predetermined identifier is transmitted between the connected network nodes. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036921 | Systems and Methods for Deep Packet Inspection with a Virtual Machine - System and methods are provided for performing deep packet inspection of data packets. An example system includes a packet forwarding component and a virtual machine component. The packet forwarding component is configured to receive data packets for transmission and to select one or more of the data packets based at least in part on a first set of rules for deep packet inspection. The virtual machine component is configured to perform deep packet inspection on the selected data packets according to a second set of rules to determine whether the selected data packets are allowed for transmission. The packet forwarding component is further configured to transmit the selected data packets when the selected data packets are allowed for transmission after the deep packet inspection. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036922 | PRIORITY PACKET PROCESSING - A network node in a vehicular network processes packets based on a prioritization scheme. The prioritization scheme uses packet type, priority, source, destination, or other information to determine a priority of the packets. Packets can be stored in one of multiple queues organized according to packet type, or other criteria. In some cases, only one queue is used. The packets are time stamped when put into a queue, and a time to live is calculated based on the timestamp. The time to live, as well as other factors such as packet type, packet priority, packet source, and packet destination can be used to adjust a packet's priority within the queue. Packets are transmitted from the queues in priority order. In some cases, the network node can identify a top-priority packet, and transmit the top priority packet without first storing the packet in the queue. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036923 | Packet Transfer Apparatus - A packet transfer apparatus connects two networks of different protocols. The packet transfer apparatus, connected to a first communication network and a second communication network, performs the steps of: storing first destination correspondence information; receiving a packet of the first communication protocol; based on the first destination correspondence information, determining destination information of a packet of the second communication protocol corresponding to destination information of the received packet of the first communication protocol; generating the header of the packet of the second communication protocol, based on the determined destination information of the packet of the second communication protocol; converting the received one or more packets of the first communication protocol into one or more packets of the third communication protocol; and adding the generated header of the packet of the second communication protocol to the packets of the third communication protocol. | 02-06-2014 |
20140044130 | AVOIDING UNKNOWN UNICAST FLOODS RESULTING FROM MAC ADDRESS TABLE OVERFLOWS - In one embodiment, a system includes a processor adapted for running a switch controller application, logic configured for detecting a switch in a network, logic configured for determining that the switch is capable of communicating via the switch controller application, and logic configured for overwriting a default rule for handling unknown unicast packets in the switch such that the switch sends any unknown unicast packet received by the switch to the system instead of flooding when an unknown unicast packet is received. In another embodiment, a method includes detecting a switch in a network, determining that the switch is capable of communicating via a switch controller application, and overwriting a default rule for handling unknown unicast packets in the switch such that the switch sends any unknown unicast packet received by the switch to the switch controller instead of flooding when an unknown unicast packet is received. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044131 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORWARDING PACKETS IN IPV6 ACCESS NODE - In view of the technical problems that exist during implementing IP address anti-spoofing in an access node device in an IPv6 access network, the present invention proposes a packet forwarding method and apparatus in an IPv6 Access Node, for forwarding a packet from a Residential Gateway. In the method, the access node device first receives a packet from the Residential Gateway, then obtains a network prefix in a source UPv6 address of the packet, judges whether the network prefix in the source IPv6 address of the packet is a valid network prefix of a CPN corresponding to the Residential Gateway, and if yes, forwards the packet finally. Particularly, in the present invention the access node device can automatically obtain valid network prefix using technical means such as snooping a network prefix allocation reply message. Therefore, the present invention greatly increases operation efficiency and security of the IPv6 access network and simplifies network management of the IPv6 access network. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044132 | TECHNIQUE FOR ETHERNET ACCESS TO PACKET-BASED SERVICES - An Ethernet Metropolitan Area Network provides connectivity to one or more customer premises to packet-bases services, such as ATM, Frame Relay, or IP while advantageously providing a mechanism for assuring security and regulation of customer traffic. Upon receipt of each customer-generated information frame, an ingress Multi-Service Platform (MSP) “tags” the frame with a customer descriptor that specifically identifies the recipient customer. In practice, the MSP tags each frame by overwriting the Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) identifier with the routing descriptor. Using the customer descriptor in each frame, a recipient Provider Edge Router (PER) or ATM switch can map the information as appropriate to direct the information to the specific customer. In addition, the customer descriptor may also include Quality of Service (QoS) allowing the recipient Provider Edge Router (PER) or ATM switch to vary the QoS level accordingly. | 02-13-2014 |
20140050218 | NETWORK INTERFACE CARD HAVING OVERLAY GATEWAY FUNCTIONALITY - In one embodiment, a system includes a network interface card (NIC) having a plurality of network ports including multiple Peripheral Component Interconnect express (PCIe) ports, a multi-lane PCIe interface adapted for communicating with a server, an Ethernet controller adapted for communicating with a network, and logic adapted for providing overlay network gateway functionality. In another embodiment, a NIC includes a plurality of network ports including multiple PCIe ports, a multi-lane PCIe interface adapted for communicating with a server, an Ethernet controller adapted for communicating with a network, and logic adapted for providing overlay network gateway functionality to traffic that passes through the NIC. In yet another embodiment, a method for providing overlay network gateway functionality in a network includes providing overlay network gateway functionality for network traffic received by a NIC implemented in a server, wherein the NIC provides an interface between a server and a network. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050219 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING PATH MANAGEMENT PACKET - An apparatus and method for processing a path management packet is provided, the method including determining whether a router for processing a received path management packet is a storing node, and when the router is determined to be a storing node, controlling the path management packet to be stored in a routing table, or when the router is determined to be a non-storing node, failing to store the path management packet in the routing table and controlling the path management packet to be transmitted to a subsequent node. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050220 | PURE CONTROL-PLANE APPROACH FOR ON-PATH CONNECTION ADMISSION CONTROL OPERATIONS IN MULTIPROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS - The embodiments described herein present methods and apparatuses for on-path CAC operations in a MPLS-VPN environment. In an example embodiment, an ingress PE device receives a quality of service (QoS) resource reservation request; constructs an outgoing message that includes information allowing an egress PE device to identify the virtual private network routing and forwarding table (VRF) associated with a resource reservation resulting from the QoS resource reservation request; and transmits the outgoing message to the egress PE device, where the information allowing VRF identification is echoed back by the egress PE device and used by the ingress PE device to identify the VRF associated with the resource reservation resulting from the QoS resource reservation request. Other embodiments are described. | 02-20-2014 |
20140056300 | Method of Multiprotocol Label Switching Encapsulation for United Router Farm Forwarding - A network component for supporting packet forwarding in a United Router Farm (URF), the network component comprising a processor configured to receive a packet, encapsulate the packet using a URF header comprising a URF Layer Two (L2) header that indicates Media Access Control (MAC) addresses of current and next hops, an outer label that indicates a tunnel to a destination node in the URF, and an inner label that indicates an egress port on the destination node, and send the packet to a next hop in the URF after encapsulating the packet. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056301 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, DEVICE, AND METHOD FOR REDUCING A NETWORK ADDRESSING HEADER - A method for reducing a network addressing header is executable by a network communication device. Upon receiving a network packet, a first address in an IPv4 header of the packet is converted to a mapping index. A least significant segment of an address field of an IPv6 header of the packet is generated based on the mapping index, and the IPv6 header is utilized to encapsulate the packet. The IPv4 header is recoverable via the least significant segment of the IPv6 header, so that the IPv4 header may be optionally omitted in transmission of the packet. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056302 | HYPERVISOR INDEPENDENT NETWORK VIRTUALIZATION - A method includes receiving a packet having a VLAN ID at a first physical overlay switch located at an edge of an IP network, encapsulating the packet with an overlay header, and tunneling the encapsulated packet to a second physical overlay switch via IP network. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056303 | INTEGRATED SWITCH FOR DYNAMIC ORCHESTRATION OF TRAFFIC - A network element within a data center comprises a switch adapted to receive a data packet, a server in communication with the switch, and a switching engine in the switch. The switching engine may be configured to modify policy header information in the data packet to direct the packet to the server. The server may be configured to modify the policy header information while the data packet is in the server to return the data packet to said switch. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056304 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - One embodiment provides a communication apparatus including: a first storage which stores connection information and an address; a connection information reading portion which reads connection information from the first storage upon reception of a packet transmission start instruction; a header generating portion which generates a header of a packet from the read connection information; a second storage which stores data at the address; and a data reading portion which reads data corresponding to the read connection information from the second storage, wherein the connection information reading portion is constituted by a first hardware, wherein the header generating and data reading portions are constituted by a second hardware, and wherein, while the data reading portion is reading data of a first packet or while the header generating portion is generating a header of the first packet, the connection information reading portion reads connection information of a second packet. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056305 | RELAY SERVER AND RELAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A relay server presents, to an operator having made a login request, a list of connecting-target apparatuses to which the operator is able to connect. When, for example, a client terminal is selected from the list, the relay server stores, as address filter information of the relay server, an address of a communication apparatus operated by the operator, and transmits the address filter information to the client terminal. The relay server stores address filter information received from the client terminal. Then, a routing session for a VPN is established between the relay server and the client terminal, and routing of a packet is performed based on the address filter information. | 02-27-2014 |
20140064275 | System and Method for Routing Using Path Identifiers - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a first packet sent by a first node. The packet includes a first Layer 3 source address, a first Layer 3 destination address, a first Layer 2 source hardware identifier, a first Layer 2 destination hardware identifier, and a first path identifier. The first path identifier is situated between a Layer 2 header of the first packet and a Layer 3 header of the first packet. The method includes automatically determining a first port of the first network element associated with a second node. The second node is associated with the first Layer 2 destination hardware identifier. A second path identifier is automatically determined based on the first port. The first packet is prevented from being delivered to the second node in response to determining that the first path identifier and the second path identifier are different. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064276 | HASHING-BASED ROUTING TABLE MANAGEMENT - Techniques are provided for hash-based routing table management in a distributed network switch. A frame having a source address and a destination address is received. If no routing entry for the source address is found in a routing table of a switch module in the distributed network switch, routing information is determined for the source address and a routing entry is generated. The routing table is modified to include the routing entry and based on a set of hash functions. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064277 | SLICED ROUTING TABLE MANAGEMENT - Techniques are provided for hash-based routing table management in a distributed network switch. A frame having a source address and a destination address is received. If no routing entry for the source address is found in a routing table of a switch module in the distributed network switch, where the routing table is divided into slices of buckets, then routing information is determined for the source address and a routing entry is generated. The routing table is modified to include the routing entry and based on a set of hash functions and properties of the slices. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064278 | MODIFICATION OR ADDITION TO FORWARDING TABLE BASED ON ADDRESS - Embodiments herein relate to addition or modification to a forwarding table based on an address. A first packet having a source address and a location value may be received. The source address includes a source of the first packet and the location value indicates at least part of a route along a network to the source address. The forwarding table is not modified or no new entry is added to the forwarding table, if the forwarding table does not include the source address. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064279 | RESILIENT PEER-TO-PEER APPLICATION MESSAGE ROUTING - Embodiments of present invention relates to a method of, and device for facilitating, resilient peer-to-peer application message routing. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064280 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LOW-COMPLEXITY, HIGH-SPEED PREPROCESSING OF ENCAPSULATED PACKETS IN A BROADBAND COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Systems and methods for performing preprocessing of received data packets, to reduce processing burdens and improve efficiency of communications terminal receivers, are provided. A first stage filter receives a data frame comprising data packets representing respective encapsulated fragments of a PDU. The first stage filter parses a header of one of the packets to locate a start field, and determines whether the start field indicates that the packet comprises a start fragment of the PDU. When the start field indicates that the packet comprises the start fragment, the first stage filter determines, based on packet label information of the packet header, whether to forward the packet to a second stage filter or to discard the packet, and forwards or discards the packet accordingly. When the start field indicates that the packet does not comprise the start fragment, the first stage filter forwards the packet to the second stage filter. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064281 | SLICED ROUTING TABLE MANAGEMENT - Techniques are provided for hash-based routing table management in a distributed network switch. A frame having a source address and a destination address is received. If no routing entry for the source address is found in a routing table of a switch module in the distributed network switch, where the routing table is divided into slices of buckets, then routing information is determined for the source address and a routing entry is generated. The routing table is modified to include the routing entry and based on a set of hash functions and properties of the slices. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064282 | CACHED ROUTING TABLE MANAGEMENT - Techniques are provided for cached routing table management in a distributed network switch. A frame having a source address and a destination address is received. If no routing entry for the source address is found in a routing table of a switch module in the distributed network switch, then routing information is determined for the source address and a routing entry is generated. The routing table is modified to include the routing entry, based on a set of hash functions. Upon accessing the generated routing entry in the modified routing table responsive to a subsequent lookup request for the source address, the set of caches is modified to include the generated routing entry. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064283 | SYSTEM AND METHOD PROVIDING DISTRIBUTED VIRTUAL ROUTING AND SWITCHING (DVRS) - Systems, methods, architectures and/or apparatus for providing a distributed Virtual Routing and Switching (dVRS) solution at a data center (DC) by logically representing the networking resources of the data center as a plurality virtual nodes, each virtual node comprising an IP infrastructure based on a physical network node and a plurality of virtual switches, each virtual switch including a VRS instance linked to one or more VRS instances at other virtual switches via a VLAN to provide thereby a virtual service, wherein the physical network node performs control plane processing and provides to each virtual switch the specific routing information associated with the local services of that virtual switch. Thus, from a data plane perspective the virtual switches route and/or switch traffic directly to tunnels pointing to remote VRS instances without involving the Controller in the forwarding of the packets. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064284 | ETHERNET SWITCH AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - An Ethernet switch which is connected to a plurality of external devices using an encapsulating I/O protocol over Ethernet, and is connected to a I/O protocol switch using N_Port ID virtualization includes: a storage unit which stores destination information describing an external device whose connection is established in the FCoE in the plurality of external devices; and a processor. When the processor receives a packet addressed from a first external device to a second external device in the external devices, the processor checks whether or not the destination information describes the second external device. When the second external device is described in the destination information, the processor transmits the packet to the second external device. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064285 | Multiple Prefix Connections with Translated Virtual Local Area Network - A system comprising an access node (AN) coupled to a plurality of service providers (SPs) and a host and configured to forward a plurality of services between the SPs and the host using a plurality of first connections between the AN and the host and a plurality of second connections between the AN and the SPs, and a router gateway (RG) positioned between the host and the AN and coupled to the AN via an access line that comprises the first connections, wherein the AN translates a plurality of first identifiers for the first connections to a plurality of second identifiers for the second connections to route the services appropriately between the host and the SPs over the first connections and the corresponding second connections. | 03-06-2014 |
20140071989 | MAPPING PBT AND PBB-TE TRAFFIC TO VPLS AND OTHER SERVICES - Transferring data in a network is disclosed. Transferring includes receiving a Provider Backbone Transport (PBT) frame, identifying a plurality of location specific identifiers in the PBT frame, mapping the PBT frame to a service based at least in part on the plurality of location specific identifiers, formatting the PBT frame according to the service to obtain a service frame, and transferring the service frame to a network associated with the service. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071990 | OVERLAY NETWORK CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING STORAGE AREA NETWORK (SAN) TRAFFIC - In one embodiment, a method for sending FCoE traffic over an overlay network includes receiving a block of media access control (MAC) addresses for use in local fabric initialization protocol (FIP) operations and advertising to all local FCoE initiators to route FCoE traffic to a server by asserting an overlay-capable virtual switch within the server as a FCF for any requesting FCoE initiators. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071991 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REDIRECTING NETWORKED TRAFFIC - A method of redirecting network traffic from a first, uncontrolled network to a second, controlled network by rewriting the Type of Service field in the header information of an Internet Protocol (IP) packet so as to include a service code indicating that the IP packet cannot access the uncontrolled network, thereby redirecting the network traffic to a second network element. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071992 | ADDRESS TRANSLATOR, MESSAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND EQUIPMENT - An address translator includes an SIP message detecting function. Upon detection of an SIP message, the address translator sends the SIP message to an SIP address translator. The SIP address translator extracts addresses for translation, and makes a query to the address translator. The SIP address translator translates an IP address included in the SIP message, using translation information of the address translator. Thus, an SIP communication is accomplished between terminals belonging to different regions in association of the address translator and the SIP address translator. | 03-13-2014 |
20140079060 | MULTI-CHANNEL MPEG BETWEEN HEADEND AND FIBER NODE - A system and related methodology are provided that are configured to receive, at a first network element, multiple channels of video delivered as respective streams of packets, form a packet switched communication frame including a sub-layer header, encapsulate packets from the multiple channels of video into a payload field of the communication frame to obtain encapsulated packets, identify the encapsulated packets in the payload field with respective tags in the sub-layer header, designate the encapsulated packets in the payload field with respective launch values in the sub-layer header, and transmit the communication frame to a second network element. The first network element may be a universal edge quadrature amplitude modulator (UEQAM) and the second network element may be a relatively distant fiber node of a cable plant. The sub-layer header may also include Program Clock Reference (PCR) offset data that can be used for PCR re-stamping. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079061 | FACILITATING INSERTION OF DEVICE MAC ADDRESSES INTO A FORWARDING DATABASE - Techniques are disclosed for hash-based routing table management in a distributed network switch having multiple switch modules. Upon determining that an attempt to insert a first routing entry into a first hash table of the routing table has failed, a second routing entry, which exists in the first hash table, is attempted to be moved to a second hash table of the routing table. If the move attempt is successful, then the first routing entry is added to the location previously occupied by the second routing entry. If the move attempt is unsuccessful, then a third routing entry, which exists in the first hash table, is attempted to be moved. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079062 | Ultra Low Latency Multi-Protocol Network Device - Presented herein are techniques to achieve ultra low latency determination of processing decisions for packets in a network device. A packet is received at a port of a network device. A processing decision is determined in a first processing decision path based on content of the packet and one or more network policies. A processing decision is determined in a second processing decision path, in parallel with the first processing path, by accessing a table storing processing decisions. The second processing decision path can output a processing decision faster than the first processing decision path for packets that match one or more particular packet flow parameters contained in the table. A processing decision determined by the second processing decision path, if one can be made, is used, and otherwise a processing decision determined by the first processing decision path is used. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079063 | Low Latency Networking Device Using Header Prediction - A network device receives a packet that includes a plurality of header fields. The packet is parsed to sequentially obtain the plurality of header fields. One or more header fields not yet available at the network device are predicted based on one or more header fields that are available at the network device. A network processing decision is generated for the packet based on the predicted one or more header fields and the one or more header fields that are available at the network device. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079064 | FACILITATING INSERTION OF DEVICE MAC ADDRESSES INTO A FORWARDING DATABASE - Techniques are disclosed for hash-based routing table management in a distributed network switch having multiple switch modules. Upon determining that an attempt to insert a first routing entry into a first hash table of the routing table has failed, a second routing entry, which exists in the first hash table, is attempted to be moved to a second hash table of the routing table. If the move attempt is successful, then the first routing entry is added to the location previously occupied by the second routing entry. If the move attempt is unsuccessful, then a third routing entry, which exists in the first hash table, is attempted to be moved. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079065 | LAN EMULATION OVER INFINIBAND FABRIC APPARATUS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS - A method and device for local area network (LAN) emulation over an Infiniband (IB) fabric. An IB LAN driver at a first node on an IB fabric receives the port and associated local identifier (LID) of one or more remote peer nodes on the IB fabric. An IEEE 802.3 Ethernet MAC address with one LID imbedded is generated. The imbedded LID is for one or more remote peer nodes. The IB LAN driver sends the Ethernet MAC address to an Address Resolution Protocol (ARP). A logical address of a remote peer node is generated by a network protocol. The logical address is mapped to an Ethernet MAC address. The IB LAN driver sends the Ethernet MAC address onto the IB fabric to the one or more remote peer nodes. The remote peer nodes appear to reside on an Ethernet network to the network protocol. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079066 | CUSTOMER PREMISE EQUIPMENT AND NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION METHOD USING SAME - A customer premise equipment (CPE) capable of translating between different internet protocol (IP) address versions connects at least one local device to a network. A table is created for recording dual stack devices which support both IPv4 and IPv6 address versions. When a local device which is not recorded as a dual stack device in the table requests access to a remote device, an IP address of the remote device is analyzed. If the IP address of the remote device is determined to be not compatible with the IP address of the local device, a version of the IP address of the remote device is translated to be same as a version of the IP address of the local device, to enable communication between the local device and the remote device. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079067 | INFORMATION CENTRIC NETWORK (ICN) NODE BASED ON SWITCH AND NETWORK PROCESS USING THE NODE - The present invention relates to an apparatus for supporting information centric networking. An information centric network (ICN) node based on a switch according to the present invention includes an ICN process configured to request information for providing content desired by a user or process an ICN protocol for responding to the requested information; a line card configured to transfer a received packet to the ICN process by recognizing a header format of the packet and, or output the received packet by determining an output port; and a switch module configured to relay a transfer of the packet between the line cards. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079068 | UPSTREAM LABEL ALLOCATION ON ETHERNETS FOR MP2MP LSPS - An apparatus or method for upstream label allocation on LANs for multipoint (MP) label switched paths (LSPs). In one embodiment of the method, a first router receives a first incoming labeled data packet, wherein the first incoming labeled data packet comprises a first data packet and one or more first labels. The first router creates a first outgoing labeled data packet, wherein creating the first outgoing labeled data packet includes the step of swapping the one or more first labels of the first incoming labeled data packet with a context label and a forwarding label, wherein the first outgoing labeled data packet comprises the first data packet, the context label, and the forwarding label. Ultimately, the first router transmits the first outgoing labeled data packet to second and third routers via a LAN. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079069 | LAYER-2 TO MPLS SERVICE MEDIATION ARCHITECTURE - An architecture for providing service mediation in a network having a Layer-2 domain and an MPLS domain includes at least one Layer-2 provider edge device in communication with a first customer site; at least one Layer-2 edge device in communication with the Layer-2 provider edge device; at least one MPLS mediation edge device in communication with the Layer-2 edge device; and at least one MPLS provider edge device in communication with both the MPLS mediation edge device and a second customer site. An end-to-end connection is established using native Layer-2 signaling, if any, in the Layer-2 domain and PWE3 signaling protocols in the MPLS domain. The MPLS mediation edge device resolves associations between Layer-2 edge devices and MPLS provider edge devices. The service is “mediated” in the sense that native Layer-2 signaling is terminated at the MME, and a new domain, i.e., pseudowire, is established across the MPLS domain. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079070 | TERMINAL, CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION MODULE, PROGRAM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - A terminal communicating with a network including a forwarding device for forwarding a packet and a control device for controlling the forwarding device in accordance with a request from the forwarding device, includes: a communication unit that receives a processing rule specifying a method of processing the packet, which is determined by the control device, from the control device, a storage unit that stores the received processing rule, and a processing unit that in a case of communicating with the network, processes the packet in accordance with the processing rule that corresponds to the packet by referring to the processing rule stored in the storage unit. | 03-20-2014 |
20140086245 | MODIFIED ETHERNET PREAMBLE FOR INTER LINE CARD COMMUNICATIONS IN A MODULAR COMMUNICATION CHASSIS - A method of providing information regarding an Ethernet frame, within the Ethernet preamble of the Ethernet frame, comprises inserting into the Ethernet preamble an inter-line-card header that includes a start control character, a version number, a parity bit, a source port, a destination port, and a forwarding domain entry; and preserving said inter-line-card header, inside of said Ethernet preamble, in a Media Access Control (MAC) sub-layer in said Ethernet frame. The method may include a step of selecting the decoding format for the inter-line-card header corresponding to the version number and/or forwarding other Ethernet frames according to additional forwarding information provided by the forwarding domain entry. The inter-line-card header may be preserved in the MAC sub-layer by keeping the Ethernet preamble at the beginning of an Ethernet frame received over an Ethernet backplane, and passing the combined preamble and associated Ethernet frame to an inter-line-card header processing module. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086246 | NETWORK ON A CHIP SOCKET PROTOCOL - The invention is a transaction interface protocol wherein the interface protocol has a transaction identifier signal in each of the request and response channels. It is used between a target network interface unit (NIU) master and an initiator NIU slave that are directly connected through a transaction interface. The target NIU response channel uses the transaction ID signal to identify the entry in a context array associated with the corresponding request. The coupling of target NIU and initiator NIU enable the formation of an on-chip interconnect comprising multiple network-on-chip (NoCs) wherein the topology of the interconnect is simpler, smaller, faster, and has lower latency. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086247 | NETWORK ON A CHIP SOCKET PROTOCOL - The invention is a transaction interface protocol wherein the interface protocol has a transaction identifier signal in each of the request and response channels. It is used between a target network interface unit (NIU) master and an initiator NIU slave that are directly connected through a transaction interface. The target NIU response channel uses the transaction ID signal to identify the entry in a context array associated with the corresponding request. The coupling of target NIU and initiator NIU enable the formation of an on-chip interconnect comprising multiple network-on-chip (NoCs) wherein the topology of the interconnect is simpler, smaller, faster, and has lower latency. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086248 | Method for IP Longest Prefix Match Using Prefix Length Sorting - Prefix length memory tables are used to enable fast IPv4 LPM lookups using a single memory access for a first range of IP prefixes, and using two memory accesses for larger IP prefixes. Each of the prefix length memory tables is used to hold a set of forwarding rules associated with a different prefix length range. IP LPM operations are then performed in parallel in each of the prefix length memory tables of the set, and the forwarding rule matching the longest prefix is returned from each of the memory tables. A priority encoder is used to select between positive results from the multiple prefix length memory tables to enable the forwarding rule with the largest matching prefix to be used to key into the next hop forwarding table. The method utilizes low cost DDR SDRAM rather than TCAM, and also exhibits low overhead. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086249 | Method for IPv6 Longest Prefix Match - IPv6 longest prefix match lookups are implemented by splitting disjoint forwarding rules from non-disjoint forwarding rules and storing these forwarding rules in separate TCAMs. When an IPv6 address is received, the full IP address is passed to the TCAM containing the disjoint forwarding rules and the first n bits of the IP address are passed to the TCAM containing the non-disjoint forwarding rules. If a hit is received in the TCAM containing the disjoint forwarding rules, a result of the hit is used to implement a forwarding decision and the search in the TCAM containing the non-disjoint forwarding rules is terminated. If no hit is obtained from the disjoint TCAM, the search result of the non-disjoint TCAM is used. If a continue flag is set in the result received from the disjoint TCAM, a sub-trie based lookup is implemented based on the remaining m bits of the IPv6 address. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086250 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND ADDRESS LEARNING METHOD - A communication device includes a first memory configured to store transfer information for controlling frame transfer; a processor configured to register a transmission source address of a received frame and corresponding transfer information in the first memory; and a second memory configured to store an upper limit number of registrable addresses for each of designated groups, wherein the processor is configured to determine whether or not the transmission source address of the received frame is registrable in the first memory, based on a result of comparison between a number of registered addresses in a group corresponding to the received frame and an upper limit number assigned to the group corresponding to the received frame. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086251 | ETHERNET DIFFERENTIATED SERVICES ARCHITECTURE - An edge node of a communication network and method to classify incoming Ethernet traffic based on predetermined criteria. An ingress switch is configured to receive an incoming Ethernet frame. A frame classifier is configured to identify flows and to correlate a flow to a corresponding bandwidth profile and corresponding forwarding treatments defined for the flow. | 03-27-2014 |
20140092904 | System and method for requesting content using an electronic device - A method and system are provided for requesting content using an electronic device. The electronic device is operable to connect to a communication network using a network connection. The method includes detecting connection information regarding the network connection, determining at least one property of the content to be requested using the connection information and sending a protocol request to a server using the communication network, the protocol request comprising header information indicative of the at least one property. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092905 | ROUTING MESSAGES IN A COMPUTER NETWORK USING DETERMINISTIC AND PROBABILISTIC SOURCE ROUTES - In one embodiment, a data packet message is provided which includes a routing header configured to accommodate both a deterministic source route and a probabilistic source route for encoding a nodal source route. The nodal source route is selectively encoded with one or both of a deterministic source route and a probabilistic source route based upon one or more predetermined criteria. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092906 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BINDING FLOWS IN A SERVICE CLUSTER DEPLOYMENT IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example and includes receiving a first packet of a connection between a client and a server. The first packet is tagged with a tag comprising a member id of a service node in a service cluster that includes a plurality of nodes having distinct member ids. The method can also include mapping the member id to the service node in a tag-to-node map; receiving a second packet of the connection, where the second packet is tagged with the tag comprising the member id; determining the service node from the tag-to-node map; and forwarding the second packet to the service node. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092907 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VIRTUAL AND PHYSICAL NETWORK INTEGRATION - The disclosure herein describes a virtual extensible local area network (VXLAN) gateway. During operation, the VXLAN gateway receives, from a physical host, an Ethernet packet destined for a virtual machine residing in a remote layer- | 04-03-2014 |
20140092908 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUS FOR CONVERGED NETWORK ADAPTERS - Methods, apparatus and systems are provided for creating virtual links between Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) nodes. FIP Discovery Advertisement frames are received from multiple FCoE device interconnection apparatus (FIA). The FIP Discovery Advertisement frames comprises source Ethernet MAC addresses, a destination Ethernet MAC address of All-ENode-MACs, Fabric FIP descriptor, and a Priority FIP descriptor. A list is stored of one or more of the source Ethernet MAC address, FIP Priority descriptor, and FIP Fabric descriptor for each unique FTP Discovery Advertisement frame received as indicated by the Fabric descriptor. The Name Server is queried for each source Ethernet MAC address in said storage. For all FCoE devices that match in more that one Name Server, connect to those FCoE devices using the highest priority Ethernet MAC address from matching list items. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092909 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUS FOR THE SERVICING OF FIBRE CHANNEL FABRIC LOGIN FRAMES - Methods, apparatus and systems are provided for processing Fibre Channel Fabric Login frames by a FCoE device interconnection apparatus (FIA) and a FCoE device interconnection apparatus controller (FIAC). A Fabric Login (FLOGI) Fibre Channel frame is encapsulated into a Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) FIP FLOGI frame at a Fibre Channel device interconnection apparatus (FIA). The encapsulated frame is transmitted from the FIA to a FCoE device interconnection apparatus controller (FIAC). A FIP link service accept (LS_ACC) frame is transmitted by the FIAC to the FIA, and the FIP LS_ACC frame is received by the FIA. The FIP frame is decapsulated into a Fibre Channel LS_ACC frame at the FIA. The Fibre Channel LS_ACC frame is transmitted back to the said Fibre Channel device. | 04-03-2014 |
20140098818 | Internal Cut-Through For Distributed Switches - Processing techniques in a network switch help reduce latency in the delivery of data packets to a recipient. The processing techniques include internal cut-through. The internal cut-through may bypass input port buffers by directly forwarding packet data that has been received to an output port. At the output port, the packet data is buffered for processing and communication out of the switch. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098819 | CONVERGENCE NETWORK BASED ON IDENTIFIER AND COMMUNICATION METHOD USING THE SAME - A convergence network based on an identifier and a communication method using the same are provided. The convergence network based on the identifier includes an underlying network including a plurality of communication entities and an access router configured to separate IDs and locators of the communication entities; at least one domain network configured in an overlay form using the access router, and configured to have a different identifier based on a communication type or a service type; and a global name server GNS configured to register an identifier for identifying each of a communication entities and a domain network. The communication entities communicate over the at least one domain network using the identifier. | 04-10-2014 |
20140105211 | ELIMINATING IPV6 NEIGHBOR SOLICITATIONS IN CONSTRAINED COMPUTER NETWORKS - In one embodiment, the techniques herein provide that a node may receive a packet from a neighboring node in a low power and lossy network (LLN). The node may then extract, from the packet, a link-layer source address from a link layer header and an internet protocol (IP) source address from an IP header. The node may then determine whether the neighboring node originated the packet and, based on that determination, the node may correlate the link-layer source address with the IP source address to provide neighbor discovery. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105212 | COMMUNICATIONS OVER MULTIPLE PROTOCOL INTERFACES IN A COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - According to one aspect of the present disclosure, a method and technique for communications over multiple protocol interfaces in a computing environment is disclosed. The method includes: identifying a network interface for egress data packet communications; responsive to the identified network interface differing from a data packet fragmentation technique desired for the data packet communications, deriving fragmentation data according to the desired data packet fragmentation technique; generating an application layer header for the data packet communications; storing values of the fragmentation data in select fields of the application layer header; fragmenting the data packet communications according to the desired data packet fragmentation protocol; and transmitting the data packet communications including the application layer header over the identified network interface. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105213 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING PACKETS IN VIRTUAL NETWORK - The embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method for transmitting packet in a Virtual Network. In the method, an access switch receives a Layer 3 packet carrying a VNID (Virtual Network IDentifier) from a VM in a remote Data Center. The access switch determines a DN (Designated Node) corresponding to the VNID and generates a Layer 2 frame according to the Layer 3 packet, where the Layer 2 frame includes the MAC (Media Access Control) address of the DN. The access switch to the DN transmits the Layer 2 frame according to the MAC address of the DN such that the DN determines a Layer 3 destination address according to the Layer 2 frame. This avoids packet flooding in Data Center when VM was migrated. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105214 | MESSAGE FORWARDING METHOD, SYSTEM, AND RELAY AGENT DEVICE - The present disclosure provides a message forwarding method and system, and a relay agent device. The forwarding method includes: receiving a first DHCPv6 message from a DHCPv6 client through a layer-3 interface; generating a Relay-forward message, where the first DHCPv6 message is encapsulated into the Relay-forward message and an identifier of the layer-3 interface is added therein; and sending the Relay-forward message to a DHCPv6 server. | 04-17-2014 |
20140112341 | INTERWORKING NETWORK ELEMENT - The invention relates to a method and device for managing the interconnection between network domains. In one embodiment this is accomplished by classifying the received frame based on service level agreement, wherein the classifying includes checking the received frame Ethertype value is same as the port on which the frame is received, recognizing an Ethertype of the egress port of the received frame, wherein the recognizing includes checking the received frame Ethertype value is same or not and translating the frame into a compatible Ethertype and forwarding the same to the next available port. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112342 | Cascaded Communication of Serialized Data Streams Through Devices and Their Resulting Operation - In one embodiment, an apparatus cascades groups of serialized data streams through devices, and performs operations based on information communicated therein. A received group of serialized data streams is aligned, but not framed, and forwarded to a next device (e.g., a next stage in a linear or tree cascaded formation of devices). Eliminating the framing and subsequent serialization operations performed on the received group of serialized data streams reduces the latency of communications through the cascaded devices, which can be significant when considered in relation to the high-speed communication rates. The received group of serialized data streams is also framed to create a sequence of data frames for processing (e.g., associative memory lookup operations, controlling multiplexing of received downstream serialized data streams, general or other processing) within the device. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112343 | Private Allocated Networks Over Shared Communications Infrastructure - Methods and systems for implementing private allocated networks in a virtual infrastructure are presented. One method operation creates virtual switches in one or more hosts in the virtual infrastructure. Each port in the virtual switches is associated with a private allocated network (PAN) from a group of possible PANs. In one embodiment, one or more PANs share the same physical media for data transmission. The intranet traffic within each PAN is not visible to nodes that are not connected to the each PAN. In another operation, the method defines addressing mode tables for the intranet traffic within each PAN. The entries in the addressing mode tables define addressing functions for routing the intranet traffic between the virtual switches, and different types of addressing functions are supported by the virtual switches. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112344 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROLLER, SWITCH, STORAGE MANAGING APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system includes a server apparatus having an iSCSI initiator, a storage having an iSCSI target, a storage managing apparatus, an open flow controller and open flow switches. The storage managing apparatus stores route data of an iSCSI communication packet for every management ID determined based on an iSCSI initiator name and an iSCSI target name. The server apparatus transmits the iSCSI communication packet in which a management ID is stored in a destination port number. The open flow switch transfers the packet according to the entry. The open flow controller generates and distributes the entry to transfer the iSCSI communication packet to the open flow switch. A communication method is provided in which the flow control is carried out based on the iSCSI data without imposing a high load of the packet processing in the open flow switch by the communication system having the above-mentioned configuration. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112345 | SERVICE ACCESS METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONDUCTING THE SAME - For service access, a physical address of a specified application service corresponding to a specified IP segment is acquired by a user mode component in accordance with an IP-segment information of the specified IP segment, which is included in a virtual network interface card configured in a system container, and an address information including the physical address is transmitted to a router module of a machine kernel. A routing table is established by the router module in accordance with the address information. Then a network data packet is acquired and forwarded to a destination service site by the router module in accordance with the routing table. | 04-24-2014 |
20140119371 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR STACKING FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCHES WITH FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET STACKING LINKS - An information handling system is provided. The information handling system includes systems and methods for expanding the port count in a single Fibre Channel domain by adding modular Fibre Channel switches. Such a system includes a system enclosure that contains a plurality of Fibre Channel modules configured to send and receive Fibre Channel packets, the Fibre Channel modules providing a plurality of Fibre Channel ports and a switch processor coupled to the plurality of Fibre Channel ports and to a plurality of Ethernet ports. The switch processor is configured to apply a stacking header to Fibre Channel packets for transmission from one of the plurality of Ethernet ports over a stacking link to another switch processor in another system enclosure. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119372 | OTV SCALING: SITE VIRTUAL MAC ADDRESS - Techniques for providing an extended layer 2 network. Embodiments receive, at a first network device in a first layer 2 network within the extended layer 2 network, a data packet specifying a destination Media Access Control (MAC) address. Upon determining that the destination MAC address is a site virtual MAC (S-VMAC) address, the data packet is forwarded to a second network device in a second layer 2 network within the extended layer 2 network and associated with the S-VMAC address, where the second network device is configured to determine a second destination MAC address for the data packet based on an Internet Protocol (IP) address specified in the data packet, and is further configured to forward the data packet to a destination device associated with the determined second destination MAC address. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119373 | EFFICIENT DATA TRANSMISSION IN AN OVERLAY VIRTUALIZED NETWORK - Machines, systems and methods for data transmission in a data communications network are provided. The method comprises receiving a data packet for transmission, the data packet having a first header portion and a second header portion, wherein the first header portion comprises an identifier indicating that any information in the first header portion is not to be used; and determining destination information comprising at least a physical address of a destination in the data communications network to which the data packet is to be transmitted based on information included in the second header portion. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119374 | DOWNLINK SERVICE PATH DETERMINATION FOR MULTIPLE SUBSCRIPTION BASED SERVICES IN PROVIDER EDGE NETWORK - A method performed in a network element of a provider edge network to determine a downlink service path for a downlink packet. The method includes preserving an indication of the downlink service path while processing an uplink packet that has been transmitted from a subscriber end station toward a provider end station. The method also includes receiving the downlink packet at a line card of the network element. The downlink packet has been transmitted from the provider end station toward the subscriber end station. The method further includes determining, at the line card, the downlink service path for the downlink packet by using the indication of the downlink service path that was preserved while processing the uplink packet. The downlink service path is operable to identify a plurality of services and an order in which the plurality of services are to be performed on the downlink packet. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119375 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND NETWORK COMMUNICATION METHOD - A network communication system comprises a cloud network and at least one physical machine. The cloud network comprises at least one physical switch. Each the physical machine comprises a plurality of virtual machines and a virtual switch. Each of the virtual machines is connected to the at least one physical switch in the cloud network through the virtual switch. The virtual switch encapsulates a destination machine address of an egress frame sent by the virtual machines, attaches a destination switch address to the egress frame to be forwarded to the at least one physical switch, and receives and analyzes an ingress frame obtained from the at least one physical switch, so as to convert the destination switch address of the ingress frame to the destination machine address, for forwarding the ingress frame to one of the virtual machines. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119376 | L2/L3 MULTI-MODE SWITCH INCLUDING POLICY PROCESSING - Methods and apparatus for processing data packets in a computer network are described. One general method includes receiving a data packet; examining the data packet to classify the data packet including classifying the data packet as a L2 or L3 packet and including determining at least one zone associated with the packet; processing the packet in accordance with one or more policies associated with the zone; determining forwarding information associated with the data packet; and if one or more policies permit, forwarding the data packet toward an intended destination using the forwarding information. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119377 | HEADER COMPRESSION WITH A CODE BOOK - A method of transmitting data packets is disclosed. The method comprises acquiring a data packet to be transmitted; parsing the data packet to extract at least a part of its header; matching the extracted part of the header with header items stored in a code book database; preparing, if the extracted part of the header matches a header item stored in the code book database, an adapted data packet comprising a code from the code book corresponding to the match replacing the at least part of the header, and the rest of the data packet; and transmitting the adapted data packet, if the adapted data packet is prepared, or the data packet, if no adapted data packet is prepared. A corresponding method of receiving data packets is also disclosed. The method comprises receiving a data transmission; determining whether the data transmission comprises a compressed header indicator for a data packet with a compressed header; and if the data packet is determined to comprise a compressed header, performing the steps of: parsing the data packet to extract a code; looking up a code book database using the extracted code to find corresponding header data; and decompressing the data packet by replacing the compressed header indicator and the extracted code by the header data. A transmitter, receiver, communication system, and computer program for implementing the methods are also disclosed. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119378 | LOOKUP FRONT END PACKET INPUT PROCESSOR - A packet processor provides for rule matching of packets in a network architecture. The packet processor includes a lookup cluster complex having a number of lookup engines and respective on-chip memory units. The on-chip memory stores rules for matching against packet data. A lookup front-end receives lookup requests from a host, and processes these lookup requests to generate key requests for forwarding to the lookup engines. As a result of the rule matching, the lookup engine returns a response message indicating whether a match is found. The lookup front-end further processes the response message and provides a corresponding response to the host. | 05-01-2014 |
20140126576 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a communication device and a communication system in which multi-hop communication is possible and management of communication routes is easy. | 05-08-2014 |
20140133485 | DATA PACKET ROUTING - Among other things, one or more techniques and/or system are provided for routing a data packet. Because the data packet may correspond to a source device having an address on a first network that may be similar to an address of a second device on a second network, the data packet may be translated to create a transformed data packet that may be distinguishable from data packets of the second device. For example, the data packet may be translated from a first address format, such as IPv4, to a second address format, such as IPv6, to create a transformed data packet. The transformed data packet may comprise a prefix that may distinctly identify the source device during routing. In this way, the transformed data packet may be identifiable as corresponding to the source device during routing through a network to a destination device. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133486 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FORMING AND USING A GROUP OF LINK AGGREGATION GROUPS TO REDUCE TRAFFIC ON INTERCONNECT LINKS - An information handling system is provided. The information handling system includes a first switch that has a computer processor in communication with a plurality of ports for receiving and sending packets and a memory including a look-up table. The look-up table associates at least some of the plurality of ports with a group of link aggregation groups (LAGs) such that an incoming packet is received by the first switch as belonging to a first LAG of the group of LAGs and an outgoing packet is sent out from the switch as belonging to either the first LAG or a second LAG of the group of LAGs depending on a type of the outgoing packet. Methods for forming and using a group of LAGs to reduce traffic on interconnect links are also provided. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133487 | ROUTER WITH PASSIVE INTERCONNECT AND DISTRIBUTED SWITCHLESS SWITCHING - A multi-chassis router with passive interconnect and distributed switchless interconnect for connecting a plurality of nodes in full mesh is disclosed. This system allows direct and indirect communication between a source node and a destination node. In direct communication, data propagates via links connecting the source and destination nodes. In indirect communication, data is first sent to an intermediate node via links connecting the source and intermediate nodes. The intermediate node sends the data either to the destination node via links connecting the intermediate node and the destination node. A passive device with replaceable plugs connects the plurality of nodes in full mesh. The passive device facilitates setting up and updating a network. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133488 | BACKPLANE INTERFACE ADAPTER WITH ERROR CONTROL AND REDUNDANT FABRIC - A backplane interface adapter with error control and redundant fabric for a high-performance network switch. The error control may be provided by an administrative module that includes a level monitor, a stripe synchronization error detector, a flow controller, and a control character presence tracker. The redundant fabric transceiver of the backplane interface adapter improves the adapter's ability to properly and consistently receive narrow input cells carrying packets of data and output wide striped cells to a switching fabric. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133489 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING PACKET-BASED MEDIA DATA HAVING HEADER IN WHICH OVERHEAD IS MINIMIZED - Provided is a method for transmitting packet-based media data having a header in which an overhead is minimized. A method for media data transmission may comprise the steps of: encapsulating media data to allow a media fragment unit (MFU) header and an M-unit header to share one format; allowing an MMT payload format to include a header field for an operation which is not supported by an RTP header, and transferring the encapsulated media data from a specific entity to another entity; and controlling the transfer of the media data. Therefore, a transmission overhead is minimized, so that it is possible to efficiently transmit media data. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133490 | Parallelly Coupled Stackable Network Switching Device - A network switching device includes at least two stacking ports, each stacking port being connectable via a stacking cable to a stack including at least one external network switching device. The device further includes an internal communication medium coupled to the stacking ports and capable of transmitting a frequency division multiplexed signal between the stacking ports. The device further includes a network switch and an interface to enable communication between the network switch and the internal communication medium. The interface includes a parallel coupling to the internal communication medium such that a signal with one carrier frequency being communicated between the network switch and the internal communication medium does not interfere with transmission between the two stacking ports of a signal with a different carrier frequency. | 05-15-2014 |
20140140344 | IDENTIFYING NATed DEVICES FOR DEVICE-SPECIFIC TRAFFIC FLOW STEERING - The present disclosure describes methods and apparatus for differentiating subscriber devices of a subscriber hidden by a network address translation device and enables traffic flow steering on a per device basis rather than a per subscriber basis. Identification of subscriber devices is achieved by assigning a reserved set of external ports to each subscriber device. Different service paths can be defined for different subscriber devices to provide a subscriber with a different experience for each subscriber device of the subscriber. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140345 | DEVICES, METHODS, AND SYSTEMS FOR CENTRALIZED CONTROL OF IP ROUTING - Devices, methods, and systems are described for the execution of centralized control of IP routing. The described methods may be used for video production systems. The methods may also be configured for other applications or in any IP routing environment to provide centralized routing control of any IP traffic. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140346 | Communication System and Network Relay Device - An address table can be easily shared (synchronized) between two switching devices for which multi-chassis link aggregation is set. When a destination port of a frame received at a port P | 05-22-2014 |
20140146817 | System and Method for VXLAN Intern-Domain Communications - VXLAN inter-domain communications and packet forwarding are supported between a virtual machine (VM) in a Virtual eXtensible Local Area Network (VXLAN) domain and an external client or another domain via a Layer Two (L2)/Layer Three (L3) switch, router, or network. A VXLAN Tunnel End Point (VTEP) coupled to the VM at a server and to the L2/L3 switch, router, or network and associated with the VXLAN domain is configured to implement a method for enabling the VXLAN inter-domain communications. The method includes receiving a packet at the (VTEP), replacing a source or destination Media Access Control (MAC) address in the packet if the packet is part of communications between a VXLAN domain for the VMs and an external component without encapsulating or decapsulating the packet, and forwarding the packet. Alternatively, the VTEP encapsulates or decapsulates an incoming packet if the packet is part of a VXLAN internal domain communications. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146818 | DYNAMIC IPoE CLIPS SUBSCRIBER METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present disclosure include methods and apparatus for providing virtual channelization of un-channelized media. A parent circuit is configured to expect dynamic IPoE CLIPS clients. Traffic having a source address is received from an access point. A circuit lookup is performed based on the source address. Upon a determination from the circuit lookup that a circuit corresponding to the traffic from the source address does not exist, the parent circuit determines whether the source address of the traffic falls within a predefined range of addresses and notifies a control plane of the parent circuit that a new IP address has been detected for dynamic IPoE CLIPS. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146819 | PACKET FORMAT AND COMMUNICATION METHOD OF NETWORK NODE FOR IP ROUTING COMPATIBILITY AND NETWORK NODE THEREFOR - A communication method of a network node for internet protocol (IP) routing compatibility, includes generating a packet including a name of a content that includes first information indicating a location of the content, and second information identifying the content, and transmitting the generated packet. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146820 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR QUALITY OF SERVICE SUPPORT FOR ETHERNET MULTISERVICE INTERWORKING OVER MULTIPROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING - A method and system for maintaining quality of service parameters for transmissions as a native Ethernet service between a first network having a first communication protocol and a second network having a second communication protocol. The interworking device includes a first network interface operable to communicate with the first communication network using the first communication protocol, a second network interface operable to communicate with the second communication network using second communication protocol and a processing unit in communication with the first network interface and the second network interface. The processing unit receives a frame from the first network in the first communication protocol, maps parameters corresponding to quality of service parameters in the first communication protocol to quality of service parameters in the second communication protocol and assembles a data packet in the second communication protocol. The assembled data packet includes mapped quality of service parameters. | 05-29-2014 |
20140153571 | FLOW KEY LOOKUP INVOLVING MULTIPLE SIMULTANEOUS CAM OPERATIONS TO IDENTIFY HASH VALUES IN A HASH BUCKET - A flow key is determined from an incoming packet. Two hash values A and B are then generated from the flow key. Hash value A is an index into a hash table to identify a hash bucket. Multiple simultaneous CAM lookup operations are performed on fields of the bucket to determine which ones of the fields store hash value B. For each populated field there is a corresponding entry in a key table and in other tables. The key table entry corresponding to each field that stores hash value B is checked to determine if that key table entry stores the original flow key. When the key table entry that stores the original flow key is identified, then the corresponding entries in the other tables are determined to be a “lookup output information value”. This value indicates how the packet is to be handled/forwarded by the network appliance. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153572 | SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORK OVERLAY - A software-defined network overlay capability is configured to control one or more overlay networks using software-defined networking (SDN) in which control functions and forwarding functions are separated. The software-defined network overlay capability may be configured to vertically move packets across network layers, e.g., into an overlay network (e.g., into a tunnel via encapsulation), out of an overlay network (e.g., out of a tunnel via decapsulation), or the like. The software-defined network overlay capability may be configured to move packets from native forwarding infrastructure into an overlay network, between overlay networks (e.g., into a first overlay network from a second overlay network without leaving the second overlay network, out of a first overlay network and into a second overlay network, out of a first overlay network while remaining within a second overlay network, or the like), from an overlay network onto native forwarding infrastructure, or the like. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153573 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SCALING IPV6 ADDRESSES IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method is provided and includes receiving, at an ingress switch in a network, a packet from an attached host that is coupled to a destination host, where the packet includes an Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) address of a destination host, comparing the IPv6 address with a plurality of entries in a longest prefix match (LPM) table, in which each entry includes a value string and a corresponding mask string configured to detect a match for a specific combination of a segment prefix and a switch-id in the IPv6 address, identifying an egress switch from a matching entry in the LPM table, and forwarding the packet to the egress switch. The IPv6 address includes a combination of segment prefix and switch-id associated with the egress switch. The segment prefix corresponds to an identifier of a network segment, and the switch-id corresponds to an identifier of a switch in the network. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153574 | NOTIFICATION BY NETWORK ELEMENT OF PACKET DROPS - Methods and apparatus for implementing notification by network elements of packet drops. In response to determining a packet is to be dropped, a network element such as a switch or router determines the source of the packet and returns a dropped packet notification message to the source. Upon receipt of notification, networking software or embedded hardware on the source causes the dropped packet to be retransmitted. The notification may also be sent from the network element to the destination computer to inform networking software or embedded logic implemented by the destination computer that the packet was dropped and notification to the source has been sent, thus alleviating the destination from needing to send a Selective ACKnowledge (SACK) message to inform the source the packet was not delivered. (Too narrow) | 06-05-2014 |
20140153575 | PACKET DATA PROCESSOR IN A COMMUNICATIONS PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE - Described embodiments provide a network processor having a hardware accelerator that identifies a received packet and, based on a flow identification associated with the received packet, might pre-fetch pre-established portions of data from the received packet into local data memory (e.g., local data cache) for processing by a general purpose processor core. In addition to the packet data, the software necessary for the general-purpose processor core to process the data might also be pre-fetched into local instruction memory (e.g., local instruction cache). The flow identification might be used to select different portions of the packet and different software to be pre-fetched. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153576 | Sharing IP Network Resources - A system and method for sharing access to an internet protocol (IP) network among multiple internet service providers (ISPs) uses multiprotocol label switching (MPLS). End-users are coupled to a broadband customer access network. Each end-user is also associated with at least one of the ISPs. An aggregation router interfaces the customer access network with a network backbone. The network backbone includes a border router for interfacing between the network backbone and the network of an ISP. When the border router is activated, it creates a forwarding equivalency class (FEC) corresponding to the ISP. The border router stores a label for the FEC and the interface for reaching the ISP in an FEC table. The border router advertises the label binding for the FEC to all upstream nodes. An intermediate node receiving the label binding creates its own FEC table, associates a new label with the FEC, and advertises the new label binding to its upstream nodes. The aggregation router receives and builds a FEC table containing the label bindings for all ISPs reachable over the network backbone. When the aggregation router receives a data packet from an end-user, the aggregation router determines the ISP associated with the end-user, labels the data packet with the label corresponding to the FEC for that ISP, and routes the packet on the network backbone. The packet eventually reaches the border router, which pops off the label and passes the packet to the ISP. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153577 | SESSION-BASED FORWARDING - The present disclosure discloses a method and network device for session based forwarding. Specifically, the disclosed system receives a first packet in a session, and performs a route lookup to determine a route for the first packet. Then, the system caches a reference to the route and a neighbor in the session, and also caches a reference to the session in a tunnel within which packets in the session are to be forwarded. Based on a comparison between the route version number cached in the session and the route version number in a route table corresponding to the route referenced by a route index in the session, the system determines whether the route is stale. If so, the system performs another route lookup to update the route. Moreover, the system uses cached reference to the session in the tunnel for forwarding subsequent packets in the session. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153578 | Border Gateway Protocol Extended Community Attribute for Layer-2 and Layer-3 Virtual Private Networks - Described are a network, computer program product, and method of distributing routing information for a virtual private network (VPN) application through a packet-switched network (PSN) having fully meshed provider edge (PE) routers through Provider Backbone Bridge (PBB) tunnels. A PE router is configured to participate in a VPN and to run a BGP (Border Gateway Protocol) as an auto-discovery process for finding one or more other PE routers participating in the VPN. The VPN is associated with a PBB tunnel. A service instance identifier (I-SID) is assigned to the VPN. The PE router advertises membership in the VPN by including the I-SID assigned to the VPN in a BGP message issued during the auto-discovery process. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153579 | Distributed Storage of Routing Information in a Link State Protocol Controlled Network - A distributed hash table is implemented to store routing information on a network. Node IDs exchanged in connection with implementation of a link state routing protocol are used as keys in the distributed hash table, and routes are stored at one or more nodes on the network. When a route is learned, the route is processed against the set of keys to determine which nodes should store the route. When a route is needed, the route is processed against the set of keys to determine which nodes should have the route information. The manner in which the route is processed against the set of keys is the same in both instances, so that the DHT may be used to store and retrieve route information on the network. The DHT may be implemented to store MAC addresses, IP addresses, MPLS labels, or other information. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153580 | REFERENCE ENCODING AND DECODING FOR IMPROVING NETWORK HEADER COMPRESSION THROUGHPUT FOR NOISY CHANNELS - A method of reducing packet loss resulting from header compression during data transmission comprising of calculating, by a transmitter, the difference between one or more delta fields of each packet among a plurality of packets and a base frame of data wherein for at least a portion of the packets, the base frame is a packet other than a packet immediately preceding the packet for which the difference is calculated, encoding the difference and compressing the plurality of packets using the transmitter; transmitting, using the transmitter, the plurality of compressed packets and an uncompressed full-header packet through a communications channel to a receiver, receiving the plurality of compressed packets and the uncompressed full-header packet by the receiver, and decompressing, by the receiver, the plurality of compressed packets using the difference between the one or more delta fields of each packet among the plurality of compressed packets and the base frame. | 06-05-2014 |
20140161126 | SECURITY FOR PACKETS USING A SHORT MAC HEADER - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods and apparatus for applying security to packets, for example, packets utilizing short MAC headers. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161127 | PACKET BUFFERING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A buffer system and buffering method. The system includes: a buffer for inputting, holding and outputting packets in a voltage island area powered at all times in a system, a memory for inputting, holding and outputting packets, which operates by a stable supply of power, whose power is shut down during the power saving mode of the system, a selector for inputting packets to be outputted from the buffer and the memory and selectively outputting a packet, a buffer controller for controlling the buffer, the memory and the selector so that i) the buffer inputs and holds packets until the memory is operated by a stable supply of power, and ii) the memory, when the main area returns from the power saving mode to the normal operating mode through the supply of power, inputs and holds packets after the memory is operated by a stable supply of power. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161128 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATING ACROSS DIFFERENT DOMAINS AND NETWORK APPARATUS - The embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method of communicating across different domains and network apparatus. In the method, sending a Path Computation Request message to a Path Computation Element; wherein the Path Computation Request message includes an Include Route Object, and the Include Route Object is configured to specify a domain sequence; wherein the Include Route Object includes at least two sub-objects, and the at least two sub-objects identified the different domains. Through the embodiments of the present disclosure, standard way of representation for domain sequence has been implemented by using sub-object for area. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161129 | Message Transport System Using Publication and Subscription Mechanisms - A message transport system may use a publication subscription mechanism to connect nodes and transport messages through the nodes. Each node may establish connections to other nodes, and subscription requests and publication notifications may be passed across the nodes to establish paths for messages. When a message is published, the message may be passed over those connections for which a subscription is active. A path identifier may be added to the message as it is passed between nodes, and the path identifier may be used by a subscribing node for identification of the information being received. When a subscriber notification is removed, the path may be deconstructed across multiple nodes. The nodes may be arranged such that each node is agnostic to any connections past the nodes to which it is connected, and may allow any node to subscribe to any information published within the network. | 06-12-2014 |
20140169367 | SELECTIVE DEEP PACKET INSPECTION - Methods, systems, and computer program products for packet inspection are provided herein. The method includes the steps of receiving a first packet of a stream of packets and processing the first packet using a slow processing path. The method also includes the steps of examining a network layer or transport layer of the first packet to determine whether a protocol used by the stream of packets is relevant, and transferring subsequent packets in the stream to a fast processing path if the protocol used is not relevant. The method further includes the steps of examining an application layer of a pre-determined number of packets subsequent to the first packet to determine whether a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) field of each of the pre-determined number of packets is relevant, and transferring packets subsequent to the pre-determined number of packets to a fast processing path if the URLs are not relevant. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169368 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORWARDING INFORMATION BASE SCALING - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a packet at an edge device in a first network site in communication with a second network site through a transport network, the packet comprising a destination address for a host at the second network site, verifying at the edge device a connection with the host, and inserting the destination address in a forwarding information base at the edge device upon verifying the connection with the host. An apparatus and logic are also disclosed herein. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169369 | Unified System Networking With CEE-PCIE Tunneling - Converged Enhanced Ethernet (CEE) tunneling over Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCIe) bus. An initiating device, connected to a CEE network, initiates a command. An encoding device encodes a CEE frame comprising the command, target device address, initiator signals, and an address of a CEE switch closest to the target device, connected to a PCIe network. The initiating device transmits an inquiry to the CEE switch through the CEE frame. The CEE switch comprises an address table with an entry specifying a generic PCIe device. The CEE switch is configured to convert the CEE frame into PCIe readable signals and to transmit them to PCIe devices. The initiating device receives a response indicating a PCIe acknowledgement from a corresponding device from the PCIe devices. The corresponding device is associated with the target device address. Based on the response, the initiating device initiates a transaction to the corresponding device through CEE frames. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169370 | Segment Routing Techniques - An apparatus and method is disclosed for segment routing (SR). In one embodiment, the method includes a node creating a segment stack that identifies one segment calculated using a first algorithm and a second segment calculated using a second, different algorithm. The node then attaches this header to a packet and sends it to another node. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169371 | Unified System Networking with CEE-PCIE Tunneling - Converged Enhanced Ethernet (CEE) tunneling over Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCIe) bus. An initiating device, connected to a CEE network, initiates a command. An encoding device encodes a CEE frame comprising the command, target device address, initiator signals, and an address of a CEE switch closest to the target device, connected to a PCIe network. The initiating device transmits an inquiry to the CEE switch through the CEE frame. The CEE switch comprises an address table with an entry specifying a generic PCIe device. The CEE switch is configured to convert the CEE frame into PCIe readable signals and to transmit them to PCIe devices. The initiating device receives a response indicating a PCIe acknowledgement from a corresponding device from the PCIe devices. The corresponding device is associated with the target device address. Based on the response, the initiating device initiates a transaction to the corresponding device through CEE frames. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169372 | Network Discovery Apparatus - A network device has a packet input unit, a checking unit, and a discovery unit. The packet input unit is configured to receive ingress packets. The checking unit is configured to determine whether identifying characteristics of received ingress packets match stored identifying characteristics of a packet flow that is stored in a memory, to perform a network action when the identifying characteristic of the received ingress packet matches the stored identifying characteristic. The discovery unit is configured to intercept an egress packet received from the control plane processor, the egress packet corresponding to the received ingress packet, to determine one or more differences in selected portions of a header portion of the received ingress packet resulting from processing at the control plane processor, and to store in the memory a new network action based on the one or more differences. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169373 | RELAY SERVER AND RELAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A relay server stores a routing apparatus belonging to a VPN group to which the relay server itself belongs, a second routing object address that is an address of the routing apparatus, and the like. The relay server stores a relationship of assignment of a virtual address to the second routing object address. The virtual address is an address that does not overlap with addresses of any other apparatuses. The relay server, upon receipt of a packet from a routing session, converts a source of the packet from an actual address into the virtual address and forwards the packet to a routing object device of the relay server itself. The relay server, upon receipt of a packet from the routing object device of the relay server itself, converts a destination of the packet from the virtual address into an actual address and forwards the packet to the routing session. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169374 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A TRANSLATION MECHANISM IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method is provided and includes receiving a packet associated with a flow, determining a tunnel identifier for the flow, and determining a flow identifier for the flow. The method includes associating the flow identifier and the tunnel identifier to an Internet protocol (IP) address to generate a binding to be used for a network address and port translation (NAPT). In other embodiments, a routing decision is executed based on the binding between the identifiers and the IP address. The flow identifier can be a context identifier (CID), and the tunnel identifier can be a softwire tunnel ID. In yet other embodiments, the packet can be tagged as part of an encapsulation operation, which includes providing information about a network location at which the network address and port translation is to be executed. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169375 | MOBILE SERVICE ROUTING IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A data flow is received from a mobile network relating to a mobile subscriber. Subscriber data is received for the subscriber identifying a service path corresponding to the subscriber and at least one service policy corresponding to the subscriber, the service path including a set of network service nodes in a plurality of network service nodes. Packets of the data flow are routed according to the service path, the packets corresponding to a request for a resource. At least one packet is appended with service header data identifying the service policy. Each service node performs at least one service based on received request data, each service node in the set of service nodes performing a service defined in a service subscription of the subscriber. At least one particular service node in the set of network service nodes performs a particular service based at least in part on the service policy. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169376 | LOOP MITIGATION MECHANISM FOR ETHERNET NETWORKS - A technique is provided for mitigating loops in Ethernet networks. A first port in an Ethernet device receives an Ethernet frame. The frame includes a source identifier, a destination identifier, and a Virtual Local Area Network Identifier (VLAN ID). According to various embodiments, the VLAN ID (VID) has the encoding of both a community group as well as a source bridge ID. A VID database is accessed using the destination identifier and the VID to determine whether the first port has ingress enabled. A filtering database is accessed to determine an egress port for forwarding the Ethernet frame. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169377 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SENDING INTERNET PROTOCOL PACKETS - An embodiment of the present disclosure provides a method for sending an IP packet. The method includes: acquiring, an IP address and a MAC address of a first network element; sending, the IP address to generate a first table entry; sending, the IP address and the MAC address to generate a second table entry; advertising, a routing message; receiving a first IP packet; forwarding, the first IP packet. An embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a corresponding device. According to the method and the device, a local device communicates with a remote device via a router; there is no need for the router to discover the local device via a routing protocol and dynamically establish and maintain the destination IP address in the routing forward table, as a table entry of the local device, thereby reducing the overhead of the router. | 06-19-2014 |
20140177633 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC REPURPOSING OF PAYLOAD STORAGE AS A TRACE BUFFER - A method for debugging network activity involving receiving, by HCA, a packet stream comprising multiple packets, comparing a packet header of each of the packets to a trigger condition to determine whether the trigger condition has been met, after the trigger condition has been met, comparing each packet header of the packets to one or more trace filters stored in the HCA to identify matching packets, duplicating one or more portions of the matching packets and storing the duplicated portions of the matching packets in a trace buffer, where the trace buffer is located in the HCA and is dynamically repurposed from a payload RAM to the trace buffer when a corresponding port of the HCA for transmitting or receiving the packet stream is set to trace mode, and stopping the trace and copying the one or more portions of packets from the trace buffer to host memory. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177634 | SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORK-BASED DATA PROCESSING METHOD, NODE, AND SYSTEM - The present disclosure discloses a software defined network SDN-based data processing system, and the system includes: a source data node, configured to receive a first data packet, and send to a corresponding source control node; the source control node, configured to receive the first data packet, where the first data packet carries a destination address of the first data packet; and determine a destination control node; and the destination control node, configured to receive the first data packet, and generate a second data packet and a matching policy rule. According to a software defined network-based data processing system in an embodiment of the present disclosure, the collaboration capability between nodes is improved so as to reduce the redundancy of multi-node processing in a network device, thereby improving the service processing efficiency of the network. The present disclosure further discloses a software defined network-based data processing method and device. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177635 | APPLICATION NON DISRUPTIVE TASK MIGRATION IN A NETWORK EDGE SWITCH - An apparatus and a method are described for zero packet loss task migration in an network switch in a computer network. The invention relates to active or programmable networks, i.e. networks based on packet switching algorithms and switch configurations which are subject to change. A well-defined protocol enables an intelligent switch to migrate tasks from one forwarding engine to another without any packet loss. This enables the algorithms and configurations of the switch to be updated or modified arbitrarily. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177636 | BANDWIDTH OPTIMIZATION FOR REMOTE DESKTOP PROTOCOL - The processing of a first data stream to generate a second stream conforming to a remote desktop protocol (RDP) is described. Operations may include facilitating storage of first data from the first stream at a first index indicated in the first stream, facilitating retrieval of second data from a second index included in the first stream, and facilitating generation of the second stream conforming to the RDP and including the first and second data. Additionally, the processing of a third data stream conforming to the RDP to stream a fourth stream is described. Operations include facilitating processing of the third stream to identify a package data unit (PDU), facilitating storing of a hash value corresponding to the PDU, and facilitating generating an altered PDU for inclusion in the fourth stream and including an index identifying a location in memory storing the hash value. | 06-26-2014 |
20140185614 | MULTIPLE DOMAIN ADDRESSING IN MESSAGE ROUTING - In one embodiment, a method determines a first address of a sender and a second address of a receiver. The first address includes a first hierarchy of a plurality of domains and the second address includes a second hierarchy of a plurality of domains. The method then calculates a crossover point and an index based on the crossover point and the first hierarchy of the first address. The method sends a message from the sender to the receiver where the message includes the index. Before the index reaches a predefined value, each node that receives the message adjusts the index and sends the message to a parent node based on the first address. Also, when the index reaches a predefined value, each node sends the message to a child node based on the second address until a domain in which the receiver is located is reached. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185615 | SWITCH FABRIC SUPPORT FOR OVERLAY NETWORK FEATURES - A method for communication in a packet data network including a subnet containing multiple nodes having respective ports. The method includes assigning respective local identifiers to the ports in the subnet, such that each port receives a respective local identifier that is unique within the subnet to serve as an address for traffic within the subnet that is directed to the port. In addition to the local identifiers, respective port identifiers are assigned to the ports, such that at least one of the port identifiers is shared by a plurality of the ports, but not by all the ports, in the subnet. The plurality of the ports are addressed collectively using the at least one of the port identifiers. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185616 | Network interface controller supporting network virtualization - A network interface device includes a host interface for connection to a host processor having a memory. A network interface is configured to transmit and receive data packets over a data network, which supports multiple tenant networks overlaid on the data network. Processing circuitry is configured to receive, via the host interface, a work item submitted by a virtual machine running on the host processor, and to identify, responsively to the work item, a tenant network over which the virtual machine is authorized to communicate, wherein the work item specifies a message to be sent to a tenant destination address. The processing circuitry generates, in response to the work item, a data packet containing an encapsulation header that is associated with the tenant network, and to transmit the data packet over the data network to at least one data network address corresponding to the specified tenant destination address. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185617 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO LIMIT TRANSMISSION OF DATA TO A LOCALIZED AREA IN AN IPV6 NETWORK - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for limiting transmission of data to a localized area in a networked environment. A method according to one embodiment includes receiving a request to transmit data from a source device to a sink device. If the data to be transmitted is localized data, a hop value associated with the data is set to a first predetermined value. If the data to be transmitted is not localized data, a hop value associated with the data is set to a second predetermined value. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185618 | PATH SPLITTING WITH A CONNECTION-ORIENTED NETWORK - In one embodiment this disclosure provides a network device that includes an input port configured to link to a first device to receive a packet from the first device, wherein the received packet having a first label encoded therein, the value of the first label is specific to the link between the network device and the first device; the input port having an input port identifier, the input port identifier and the first label form an input tuple; a plurality of output ports configured to link to respective ones of a plurality of second devices, each output port having a respective output port identifier; a forwarding table that includes at least one input tuple and a corresponding set of output tuples; wherein each output tuple comprises an output port identifier and a second label, the value of the second label is specific to the link between the network device and a respective one of the second plurality of devices; and routing circuitry configured to compare the input tuple of the received packet with at least one input tuple of the forwarding table, identify the corresponding set of output tuples, and select one output tuple from among the set of corresponding output tuples; the routing circuitry is also configured to replace the first label of the received packet with the second label and send the packet to the output port specified by the output port identifier in the selected output tuple. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185619 | NETWORK SYSTEM - To provide a network system including a network constructed by combining a plurality of switching devices. The network includes a first partial network including switching devices and a second partial network that is formed outside the first partial network and includes switching devices. The switching device in the first partial network connected to the second partial network blocks passage of a broadcast signal that is transmitted from a terminal device and that has a specific logical port number as transmission information at a physical port. | 07-03-2014 |
20140192808 | TUNNEL SUB-INTERFACE USING IP HEADER FIELD - In one implementation, sub-interfaces are defined in Layer three (L3) tunnels, such as generic routing encapsulization (GRE) or Internet protocol security (IPsec) tunnels. Sub-interfaces inside a L3 tunnel may be preferred to using several L3 tunnels. The flow label of the tunnel header is used to define sub-interfaces of a tunnel interface. The flow label is populated with a routing instance identifier to index the sub-interfaces. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192809 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS TO COMPRESS IDENTIFICATION - Logic to reduce the probability of hashing collisions via a single hash function. Logic may hash the service set identification (SSID) to generate a compressed SSID and determine multiple compressed SSID segments based upon the compressed SSID. Logic may generate multiple SSID segments by hashing modified versions of the SSID or modifying hashed versions of the SSID. And logic may identify the compressed SSID segment with an index number. Logic may receive one or more compressed SSID segments, determine an index number associated with the segment(s) and compare the received SSID segment against a compressed SSID segment of an SSID that is sought. Logic may generate the multiple compressed SSID segments, store the segments in memory, and compare the compressed SSID segment received in a beacon with a corresponding compressed SSID segment in the memory. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192810 | TRANSFER DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND ROUNDABOUT PATH DETECTING METHOD - A transfer device that is installed in a unit network that includes a gateway includes a sending/receiving unit that sends/receives a frame to/from a transfer device that is installed in another unit network in a network that includes the unit network, a determining unit that determines, based on destination address or source address in a packet in the frame sent/received by the sending/receiving unit, whether the packet is related to communication between an internal device that is installed in the network and an external device that is installed outside the network, and a notifying unit that notifies, when the determining unit determines that the packet is related to the communication between the internal device and the external device, the external device of an instruction to switch a gateway. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192811 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR DEFINING A LOOK-UP SYSTEM FOR A NETWORK ELEMENT OF A SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORK - A method for defining a look-up system having functionality suitable for a network element of a software-defined network “SDN” includes maintaining ( | 07-10-2014 |
20140192812 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUS FOR THE INTERCONNECTION OF FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET DEVICES - Methods, apparatus and systems are provided for forwarding Fibre Channel Initialization Protocol (FIP) frames and Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) frames by a FCoE device interconnection apparatus (FIA) and with a Fibre Channel over Ethernet device interconnection apparatus controller (FIAC). An FCoE frame received by the FIA from the FCoE device includes at least destination and source Ethernet MAC address fields which are replaced, such as where the destination Ethernet MAC address is replaced by the MAC address assigned to a remote FCoE device, such as the desired end port. The frame is forwarded to the destination FCoE device. Preferably, first and second ports are coupled to the connectivity apparatus, which are then coupled to first and second FCoE devices. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192813 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR DEFINING IMPLEMENTATION OF A LOOK-UP TABLE FOR A NETWORK ELEMENT OF A SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORK - A method and a device for defining implementation of a look-up table for a network element of a software-defined network “SDN” is presented. The network element includes hardware for implementing the look-up table in two or more mutually alternative ways. The method includes selecting ( | 07-10-2014 |
20140192814 | Method And Apparatus For Sharing TCAP Traffic Load - The present invention relates to a point code emulation apparatus and method for dividing a Common Channel Signaling System No. 7 (or SS7) signaling network into two or more networks. The point code emulator is adapted to receive TCAP messages from two or more subnets and converts, for the messages crossing over the subnets, the information of the TCAP messages, including originating point code, destination point code, and transaction identifier, (and optionally, calling party number and called party number), and forwards to the other one of the two or more subnets. Correspondence among the two or more subnets may be provisioned by an authorized user of the system, may be learned automatically by the system based on ISUP message correspondences or previous TCAP transactions, or may be automatically discovered by the system broadcasting messages to nodes in the destined one of the two or more subnets. | 07-10-2014 |
20140198789 | LOW LATENCY IN-LINE DATA COMPRESSION FOR PACKET TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS - Deep packet inspection (DPI) techniques are utilized to provide data compression, particularly necessary in many bandwidth-limited communication systems. A separate processor is initially used within a transmission source to scan, in real time, a data packet stream and recognize repetitive patterns that are occurring in the data. The processor builds a dictionary (ruleset), storing the set, of repetitive patterns and defining a unique token ID to be associated with each pattern. Thereafter, the DPI engine uses this ruleset to recognize the repetitive data patterns and replace each relatively long data pattern with its short token ID, creating a compressed data packet. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198790 | DATA LINK LAYER ANALYSIS WITH PACKET TRACE REPLAY - Systems and methods to analyze layer-2 data frame switch forwarding are provided. A packet replay module may be configured to replay a data frame from at least one of a packet trace file and a live network, and a first switch may include a first port and may be configured to receive the data frame from the packet replay module and to determine a runtime attribute associated with forwarding the data frame in a second switch. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198791 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING PACKET FOR ROUTING AND VERIFYING PATH IN DOMAINS - Disclosed are an apparatus and method for processing a packet for routing and verifying a path in a domain. The apparatus for processing the packet includes an authentication processing unit configured to authenticate a transmission path of a packet in a corresponding node inside a domain; and a transmission processing unit configured to verify whether or not authentication has been performed such that a reception packet passes through the corresponding node and whether or not the packet has passed through an immediately previous node that is passed through along the transmission path and transmit the packet. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198792 | RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING STORED THEREIN A TRANSFER PROGRAM, TRANSFER APPARATUS, AND TRANSFER METHOD - A non-transitory computer-readable recording medium has stored therein a program for causing a computer to execute a process, the process includes transferring communication data, transmitted from a first apparatus, which includes data and a first attribute regarding the data, to a second apparatus, receiving a notification that includes a second attribute regarding the data and a transfer destination of the communication data inclusive of the second attribute, transferring the communication data inclusive of the second attribute to a third apparatus of the transfer destination included in the notification; and transferring the notification to other transfer apparatus. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198793 | TRAFFIC FORWARDING IN A POINT MULTI-POINT LINK AGGREGATION USING A LINK SELECTOR DATA TABLE - A method, system and non-transitory computer-readable medium for forwarding data packet traffic in a point multi-point link aggregation using a link selector data table. A data packet is received at a device having a point multi-point link aggregation comprising a plurality of physical links. It is determined whether data extracted from the received data packet can be matched to one of a plurality of records in a link selector data table, where each record comprises data to identify a communication flow and data to identify one of the physical links, each record being generated from a data packet sampled in a transmission coming to the device along ones of the physical links. The received data packet is forwarded on the physical link identified by the one record, where the extracted data is matched to one of the plurality of records. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198794 | CONNECTING MULTIPLE CUSTOMER SITES OVER A WIDE AREA NETWORK USING AN OVERLAY NETWORK - A method and apparatus for connecting multiple customer sites over a wide area network (WAN) using an overlay network is described. In one embodiment of the invention, each one of multiple customer edge (CE) routers establishes a Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) session with one or more BGP route reflectors and announces their private IP network prefixes and one or more transport IP addresses to reach that CE router. The BGP route reflector(s) reflect those IP network prefixes and the one or more transport IP addresses to reach that specific CE router to the other CE routers. The CE routers receive those reflected IP network prefixes and the corresponding transport IP address(es) to reach that CE router in which those IP network prefixes belong and register them in their corresponding routing/forwarding data structures. In this way, the CE routers learn how to reach each other. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198795 | Metro Ethernet Network With Scaled Broadcast and Service Instance Domains - A method of operation for a provider edge device of a core network includes receiving a customer frame from an access network; the customer frame having a first Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) tag of a first predetermined bit length. The first VLAN tag including a service instance identifier. The service instance identifier of the first VLAN tag is then mapped into a second VLAN tag of a second predetermined bit length greater than the first predetermined bit length. It is emphasized that this abstract is provided to comply with the rules requiring an abstract that will allow a searcher or other reader to quickly ascertain the subject matter of the technical disclosure. It is submitted with the understanding that it will not be used to interpret or limit the scope or meaning of the claims. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198796 | SMS TECHNOLOGY FOR COMPUTERIZED DEVICES - A method and system for delivering SMS and MMS messages from a mobile telephone to devices having addresses on an Internet Protocol network are provided. In an embodiment of the invention a device having an IP address and a Media Access Control (MAC) address is registered on a network router and a telephone number is associated with the registered device on the router, such that when the router receives an SMS or MMS message for the telephone number associated with the device the router retrieves the IP address for the device and routes the message to the device. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198797 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING PSEUDO WIRE - A method for establishment a pseudo wire (PW) is disclosed, including: receiving a first label mapping (LM) message, where the first LM message carries a PW ID, PW parameters, and label switching path (LSP) tunnel information that are selected by the sender of the first LM message; matching a local PW according to the PW ID; performing parameter negotiation of the local PW according to the PW parameters; matching a local tunnel according to the LSP tunnel information; binding the local tunnel and the local PW when the matching between the PW ID and the LSP tunnel information is successful; and establishing a PW when the parameter negotiation is successful. A device and system for establishing a PW are also disclosed. With the present invention, a PW service is associated with an LSP tunnel to improve the reliability of the information transmission process. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198798 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM - A communication terminal communicating with a network including a control apparatus that generates a processing rule defining a packet processing method, the communication terminal comprises: a request unit that requests an address of the control apparatus when requesting for establishing a connection to the network; a communication unit that establishes a communication channel to the control apparatus based on an address acquired by the address request; and a processing unit that processes a packet based on a processing rule transmitted by the control apparatus via the communication channel. | 07-17-2014 |
20140204943 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PACKET ROUTING - Systems and methods to route packets of information within an integrated circuit, across one or more boards, racks, blades, and/or chassis, and/or across a connected network of packet processing engines include various modes of operation. Packets are routed to their destination, for example an individual packet processing engine. The packets of information include address-mode indicators, one or more destination port indicators, and/or (long-distance) addresses. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204944 | METHOD FOR AVOIDING A LOOP IN A NETWORK - According to an example, a method for avoiding a loop in a network, which is performed by each ED in each VPN site, comprises: interacting with other EDs in a same VPN site to elect a DED; assigning an authorized forwarding instance to each ED in the same VPN site when the ED is elected as the DED; obtaining the authorized forwarding instance from the DED when the ED is not elected as the DED; allowing traffic of the authorized forwarding instance transmitted from or to a public network, and blocking traffic of unauthorized forwarding instance transmitted from or to the public network. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204945 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA PACKET FROM CONTENT PROVIDER IN CONTENT-CENTRIC NETWORK AND CONTENT PROVIDER - A method of transmitting a data packet from a content provider in a content-centric network CCN includes verifying whether a content request packet requesting a content identical to a content of a content request packet being received from a content requester is present in a pending interest table (PIT), increasing a value of a counter corresponding to the content request packet, comparing the value of the counter to a predetermined threshold value, and transmitting a data packet using a predefined broadcast media access control (MAC) address in response to the content request packet being received and the value of the counter being greater than or equal to the threshold value. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204946 | Method, Apparatus and System for Generating Label Forwarding Table on Ring Topology - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for generating a label forwarding table for a non-destination router on a ring topology. Embodiments of the present invention further provide an apparatus for generating a label forwarding table for a non-destination router on a ring topology and a method and system for generating two label switching paths LSPs of different ring directions on a ring topology. Technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention are based on a clockwise label forwarding table and a counterclockwise label forwarding table that are generated for each non-destination router on the ring topology. When it is found that traffic cannot be forwarded to a destination router by using one of the two label forwarding tables, the non-destination router performs traffic switching and uses the other label forwarding table to forward the traffic. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204947 | IDENTIFICATION OF A PRIVATE DEVICE IN A PUBLIC NETWORK - Methods, network address translation (NAT) devices, network nodes and system for allowing identification of a private device in a public network or treating traffic of a private device in a public network. The NAT may allocate a private IPv4 address to the private device, reserve a block of ports on the public IPv4 address for the private device and send an identification of the block of ports to a network node in the public network. The network node of the public network may receive an identification of a block of ports on the public IPv4 address indicating that the block of ports is reserved for the private device and activate a rule for treating traffic of the private device. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204948 | FLEXIBLE AND EXTENSIBLE FLOW PROCESSING IN SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORKS - A network device acting as a forwarding element within a software-defined network receives a representation of configurable flow table definitions and configurable logic for selecting between flow tables. The network device creates a flow table based on each of the configurable flow table definitions and installs the configurable logic for selecting between flow tables. The network device receives data to populate configurable key columns and action columns of the flow tables and populates the flow tables using that data. The network device then selects from forwarding decisions for packets according to the configurable logic for selecting between flow tables, the flow tables, and each packet's values in relevant header fields required by the configurable logic. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204949 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DIRECT FRAME SWITCHING USING FRAME CONTAINED DESTINATION INFORMATION - Frame contained destination information may be used by a switch to identify an appropriate output port for a given frame without performing a table access operation. This reduces the processing requirements of the switch to enable the switch to handle frames more efficiently. The frame contained destination information may be contained in the frame's local destination MAC addresses (DA) such that a portion of the DA directly indicates, for each switch that handles the frame, an output port for that switch. Different portions of the DA may be used by different switches, depending on where they are in the network hierarchy. Large switches may also use sub-fields within their allocated portion in the DA to identify internal switching components. A location resolution server may be provided to store and distribute IP and MAC addresses and respond to local ARP requests on the local domain. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204950 | DIFFERENTIATED HANDLING OF DATA TRAFFIC WITH USER-CLASS DEPENDENT ADAPTATION OF NETWORK ADDRESS LOOKUP - Data traffic between a user at a user equipment and a network resource is preceded by a lookup procedure for obtaining a network address of the network resource. A message of the lookup procedure is processed depending on a class of users to which the user belongs. If the user belongs to a first class of users, the message of the lookup procedure is processed for adapting the lookup procedure to return a first network address of a replacement network resource capable of handling the data traffic. If the user belongs to a second class of users, the message of the lookup procedure is processed for adapting the lookup procedure to return a second network address of a replacement network resource capable of handling the data traffic. | 07-24-2014 |
20140211798 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR USING EXTENSION HEADERS TO SUPPORT PROTOCOL STACK MIGRATION - An IP packet may include an IP header and one or more optional IP extension headers. The packet may contain non-IP protocol data in one of the IP extension headers. An application that uses non-IP protocol data may use the non-IP protocol data from the IP extension header. This allows an application designed for a non-IP protocol stack to operate on a device with an IP protocol stack with minimal modification. The non-IP protocol data may support routing options within a network or sub-network. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211799 | ROUTING DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING NETWORK PACKET THEREOF - A method for processing a network packet is used for a routing apparatus. The routing apparatus includes a forwarding engine module and a core module. In the method, a network packet from a source interface is received. Whether or not the network packet meets a Network Address Translation (NAT) packet condition is determined Subsequently, the following steps are executed when the network packet meets the NAT packet condition. In these steps, transmission information of the network packet is read and a NAT mapping table is searched by using the transmission information. When a mapping entry corresponding to the transmission information is found in the NAT mapping table, the method involves enabling the forwarding engine module to update the header of the network packet according to the NAT forwarding information of the corresponding mapping entry and set a destination interface of the network packet. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211800 | Accelerated MAC address resolution for IPv6 traffic with IS-IS Protocol - A method is executed by a router for improved Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) protocol and Neighbor Discovery (ND) protocol execution to avoid dropped data traffic caused by Media Access Control (MAC) address resolution for next hops of routes determined by the IS-IS protocol. An IS-IS adjacency is established between the router and a neighbor router over a link, where a MAC address for the neighbor router is received from the neighbor router. A routing information base (RIB) is updated to include the neighbor router as a next hop for at least one destination address by the IS-IS process. The MAC address of the neighbor router is provided to an ND process to update the RIB, a forwarding information base (FIB) or L2 forwarding table of at least one line card of the router to include the MAC address of the neighbor router in response to the providing of the MAC address to the ND process. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211801 | MULTIPLE MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) ADDRESS RESOLUTION VERTICAL TRAVEL - One or more devices or stations include a globally unique media access control (MAC) address, and one or more local virtual MAC Addresses. The local virtual MAC addresses are generated by an external entity, such as server. The stations and the server may be connected through an access point. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211802 | TRUNKING IN A MATRIX - A multistage switch includes a matrix of coupled switch devices. A logical link comprising a plurality of physical links couples a destination through the plurality of physical links to a plurality of ports in the multistage switch. Each switch device performs trunk aware forwarding to reduce the forwarding of received frames through the matrix of coupled switch devices to the destination in order to reduce unnecessary traffic in the multistage switch. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211803 | BRIDGE ROUTING MODULE - A bridge routing module can be incorporated into a closed network fabric, such as a vehicular network. The bridge routing module includes an interface circuit to be coupled to other elements of the closed network fabric, for example other bridge routing modules or switch modules. The bridge routing module includes memory to store information associating packet content types with packet routing parameters, among other things. A processing module included in the bridge routing module analyzes packets to identify the type of content carried by the packets, and determines packet routing parameters based on the packet's content type. Ingress and egress of the packet are controlled in accordance with the packet routing parameters determined by the processing module. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211804 | PACKET COALESCING - In general, in one aspect, the disclosures describes a method that includes receiving multiple ingress Internet Protocol packets, each of the multiple ingress Internet Protocol packets having an Internet Protocol header and a Transmission Control Protocol segment having a Transmission Control Protocol header and a Transmission Control Protocol payload, where the multiple packets belonging to a same Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol flow. The method also includes preparing an Internet Protocol packet having a single Internet Protocol header and a single Transmission Control Protocol segment having a single Transmission Control Protocol header and a single payload formed by a combination of the Transmission Control Protocol segment payloads of the multiple Internet Protocol packets. The method further includes generating a signal that causes receive processing of the Internet Protocol packet. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211805 | NETWORK MULTI-PATH DISCOVERY - Potential paths between a source and destination of a network are identified based on trace-route information, then filtered to eliminate paths or links that are not supported by ancillary information associated with the network so as to identify feasible/actual paths between the source and destination. The ancillary information includes, for example, routing tables and ARP tables. If a feasible path cannot be identified based on the ancillary information, supplemental information regarding nodes further along the potential path is assessed to provide a basis for inferring the nodes that may provide a feasible path. The determined feasible paths are displayed for review, and provided to serve as filters for subsequent path-analysis tools. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211806 | SLICED ROUTING TABLE MANAGEMENT WITH REPLICATION - Techniques are provided for hash-based routing table management in a distributed network switch. A frame having a source address and a destination address is received by a switch module having bridge elements and a routing table divided into slices of buckets, each slice having a respective property and including one or more buckets. If a routing entry for the source address is found in a first slice of a first set of buckets of the routing table responsive to a lookup request for the source address, and the property of the first slice satisfies a replication condition, then the routing entry is replicated to a second set of buckets of the routing table. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211807 | ROUTING METHOD AND NETWORK TRANSMISSION APPARATUS - It is determined whether or not the address of a first type specified in an address resolution query is an address that allows direct routing to a first network. If the direct routing is determined to be allowed, a routing table is configured such that a packet including, as a destination, the address of a second type obtained by the address resolution query is forwarded to the first network. If the direct routing is determined not to be allowed, the routing table is configured such that a packet including the obtained address of the second type as a destination is forwarded to a second network. | 07-31-2014 |
20140219276 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MAINTAINING PACKET ORDER IN AN ORDERED DATA STREAM - A source processor can divide each packet of a data stream into multiple segments prior to communication of the packet, allowing a packet to be transmitted in smaller chunks. The source processor can process the segments for two or more packets for a given data stream concurrently, and provide appropriate context information in each segments header to facilitate in order transmission and reception of the packets represented by the individual segments. Similarly, a destination processor can receive the packet segments packets for an ordered data stream from a source processor, and can assign different contexts, based upon the context information in each segments header. When a last segment is received for a particular packet, the context for the particular packet is closed, and a descriptor for the packet is sent to a queue. The order in which the last segments of the packets are transmitted maintains order amongst the packets. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219277 | CONDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR PACKET PROCESSING - A network switch includes a plurality of ports, a parser coupled to the plurality of ports, and a processor coupled to the ports and configured to process a received packet via one of the ports. The received packet includes a first header field, a second header field, and a destination header field, each of the first, second, and destination header fields including a TTL field. The parser is configured to decide a valid bit for each of the first header field, the second header field and the destination header field, based on an availability for each of the first header field, the second header field and the destination header field. The processor is configured to execute an instruction to cause, based on the valid bits of the first and second header fields, content of a select one of the first or second header field's TTL field to be copied to the destination header field. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219278 | ASSESSING RESPONSE ROUTES IN A NETWORK - Method and system are provided for assessing response routes in a network of connected nodes wherein a querying node propagates a query through multiple routes of intermediate nodes to a data source node and the data source node returns data to the querying node. The method at a data source node may include: receiving a query instance including metadata with route information of the route of intermediate nodes in the network that the query instance has travelled through from a querying node to the data source node; comparing the route information to a route policy; and responding to a query instance which meets the route policy by returning the query response via the route of intermediate nodes of the query instance. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219279 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR NETWORK ADDRESS LOOKUP ENGINES - Internet routers are a key component in today's Internet. Each router forwards received packets toward their final destinations based upon a Longest Prefix Matching (LPM) algorithm select an entry from a routing table that determines the closest location to the final packet destination among several candidates. Prior art solutions to LPM lookup offer different tradeoffs and that it would be beneficial for a design methodology that provides for low power large scale IP lookup engines addressing the limitations within the prior art. According to embodiments of the invention a low-power large-scale IP lookup engine may be implemented exploiting clustered neural networks (CNNs). In addition to reduced power consumption embodiments of the invention provide reduced transistor count providing for reduced semiconductor die footprints and hence reduced die cost. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219280 | Systems and Methods for Dual Network Address Translation - Included are systems and methods for providing dual network address translation. Accordingly, some embodiments include translating, via a processor at a network operations center (NOC), a public source address and a public destination address to and from assigned unique private addresses for data to be communicated across a wide area network, while including gateway functions to manage an application with an imbedded IP address. Some embodiments include communicating, via the processor at the NOC, the data to a ReNAT virtual private network (VPN) with packets wrapped in a private ReNAT defined protocol that includes the public source address and the public destination address. Still some embodiments include mapping, via the processor at the NOC, a unique private address in the data to customer defined private IP addresses. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219281 | Communication system, forwarding node, path management server, communication method, and program - A packet forwarding node includes a storage unit to store a packet forwarding table used for forwarding a packet based on an identifier which identifies a link between nodes on a packet forwarding path and a forwarding unit to receive an incoming packet including a plurality of the identifiers, and to forward the incoming packet based on an identifier corresponding to the packet forwarding node. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219282 | Method and Apparatus for Simulating IP Multinetting - IP Multinetting on a local area network is simulated by performing VLAN translation at a port connecting to the local area network. This allows IP addresses from multiple subnets to be associated with a single VLAN on the Local Area Network (LAN), while allowing the core switch to process the packets with a one-to-one correspondence between IP Subnet and VLAN. When a packet is received from the local area network at an IP multinetting port, the VLAN ID will be read to determine if the packet contains the IP Multinetting VLAN ID. The IP Subnet address will also be checked to see if the packet is associated with an IP Subnet that is part of the Multinetting. If so, the multinetting VLAN ID will be changed to an IP Subnet specific VLAN ID before the packet is processed by the core switch. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219283 | METHOD FOR PACKET CLASSIFICATION AND DEVICE THEREFOR - Disclosed are a method of packet classification and a device thereof. A method for packet classification according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises the steps of: partitioning the entire rule set by using key values corresponding to packet fields, into a plurality of rule subsets; generating recursive flow classification (RFC) tables for each of the plurality of partitioned rule subsets; loading, in the same cache line, both partition information and RFC table information commonly corresponding to key values of received packets; searching for a rule subset by using the partition information on the key values of the received packets, which are loaded in the cache line; and searching for an RFC table for a rule by using the RFC table information on the key values of the received packets, which are loaded in the cache line. | 08-07-2014 |
20140233564 | Packet Modification to Facilitate Use of Network Tags - A technique for accommodating network tagging technology includes receiving a packet that includes a network tag at a modifying node capable of modifying the packet in relation to the network tag; determining whether the packet is to be forwarded to a non-recognizing node in a network, the non-recognizing node not being capable of processing packets with network tags at a desired speed or at all; and in response to determining that the packet is to be forwarded to the non-recognizing node, modifying the packet to obtain a modified packet and sending the modified packet to the non-recognizing node, wherein the modified packet is capable of being processed by the non-recognizing node at the desired speed. After being processed by the non-recognizing node, the modified packet is received by a restoring node, where the cached information is used to restore the network tag of the packet. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233565 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PATH MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION UNIT DISCOVERY - An information handling system is provided. The information handling system includes a plurality of network devices. One of the plurality of network devices is a source device and another of the plurality of network devices is a destination device. If path maximum transmission unit (PMTU) information for a path between the source device and the destination device is not known, the source device sends a PMTU send packet to the destination device, and the destination device sends a PMTU receive packet with a received PMTU value to the source device. Other associated systems and methods for PMTU discovery are also provided. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233566 | DIRECTED ROUTE LOAD/STORE PACKETS FOR DISTRIBUTED SWITCH INITIALIZATION - Techniques are described for transmitting a packet from a source switch module to a destination switch module. Embodiments include receiving, at a first switch module, a packet that includes (i) an ordered listing of Ethernet link identifiers, specifying a path to the destination switch module and (ii) payload data to be processed at the destination switch module. Embodiments determine that the first switch module is not a destination of the packet, based on the ordered listing of Ethernet link identifiers. Additionally, an Ethernet port of the first switch module on which to transmit the packet is determined based on the ordered listing of Ethernet link identifiers. Embodiments then transmit the packet to a second switch module using the determined Ethernet port of the first switch module. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233567 | HIGH SPEED NETWORK BRIDGING - An apparatus having a parser and a circuit is disclosed. The parser is configured to generate a source address, a destination address and information by parsing a packet received via one of a plurality of networks. The circuit is configured to search a plurality of memories in parallel during a single cycle of operation in the apparatus. The searching includes a plurality of lookups in the memories of a plurality of data sets associated with the source address, the destination address and the information, respectively. The circuit is also configured to bridge the packet between the networks in response to the data sets. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233568 | TECHNIQUES FOR PACKET MANAGEMENT IN AN INPUT/OUTPUT VIRTUALIZATION SYSTEM - Techniques for managing packets in an input/output virtualization (IOV) capable computing environment are described herein. One aspect comprises receiving, at one or more transceivers comprising an input/output capable adapter, a packet addressed to an input/output virtualization capable adapter destination, and forwarding the packet to a virtual router; applying, by a processor circuit coupled to the one or more transceivers, one or more packet management policies to the packet via the virtual router; routing the packet via the virtual router to the input/output virtualization capable adapter destination; and transmitting the packet to the input/output virtualization capable adapter destination via an input/output virtualization capable adapter architecture. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233569 | Distributed Gateway in Virtual Overlay Networks - A method for distributing the inter-network forwarding policies to a distributed gateway located within a network virtualization edge (NVE). The NVE may receive a data packet within a first virtual overlay network and determine that the data packet is destined for a destination end point located within a second virtual overlay network. The NVE may validate the data packet corresponds to an inter-network forwarding policy stored within the distributed gateway and forward the data packet to the second virtual overlay network. Alternatively, the NVE may forward the data packet toward a gateway or query the corresponding policy from a controller if no corresponding inter-network forwarding policy is located on the distributed gateway. A distributed gateway may receive the forwarding policies from a designated gateway or from a centralized controller. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233570 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ROUTING DATA TRAFFIC - Method and media gateway ( | 08-21-2014 |
20140233571 | HEADER PROCESSING ENGINE - Roughly described, a header processing engine for a network interface device has a header recognizer to parse the headers of a data packet stored at a buffer to identify the type and position of each header in the packet; a constructor unit; and a processor including an execution pipeline. The header recognizer is configured to, for each header: select in dependence on the header type commands stored at a command memory; and form one or more messages for the constructor unit identifying the selected commands and the position of the header in the data packet. The commands selected for the packet headers are collectively such as to, if executed by the constructor unit, cause the constructor unit to generate a data structure which operates to cause the processor to process of the packet headers without accessing the data packet at the buffer. | 08-21-2014 |
20140241355 | Systems and Methods for Paravirtualized IP Over Infiniband Bridging - Systems and methods for paravirtualized Internet Protocol over Infiniband (IPoIB) bridging for virtual machines. An example method may comprise associating, by a hypervisor executing on a host computer system, an Infiniband (IB) interface of the host computer system with a paravirtualized IPoIB interface of a virtual machine executing on the host computer system; receiving, via the paravirtualized IPoIB interface, a paravirtualized IPoIB packet originated by the virtual machine, the paravirtualized IPoIB packet comprising an IP packet and a first header including an IPoIB hardware address; translating the paravirtualized IPoIB packet into an IPoIB frame comprising the IP packet and a second header including the IPoIB hardware address; and forwarding the IPoIB frame via the IB interface to one of: an IB switch, an external IB node. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241356 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FLOW TABLE LOOKUP PARALLELIZATION IN A SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKING (SDN) SYSTEM - A method implemented in a Software Defined Networking (SDN) network for flow table lookup parallelization is disclosed. The SDN network contains at least a SDN controller and at least a forwarding element and the SDN network utilizes a plurality of flow tables to perform lookup for forwarding traffic. The method starts with determining dependency of flow tables within the forwarding element using a set of dependency determination rules. A dependency graph is then constructed based on determined dependency of flow tables. A dependency degree count for each flow table within the forwarding element is determined based on the dependency graph. Based on the dependency degree count determination for each flow table, a plurality of parallel lookup groups (PLGs) for the forwarding element is formed, where each parallel lookup group contains one or more flow tables having a same dependency degree count. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241357 | TECHNIQUES FOR CUSTOMIZING FORWARDING DECISIONS VIA A HARDWARE LOOKUP RESULT - Techniques for customizing forwarding decisions in a network device via a hardware lookup table result are provided. In one embodiment, a network processor of the network device can perform a lookup into a lookup table based on one or more sections of a received packet. The network processor can then determine, based on the lookup, an entry in the lookup table and retrieve, using a pointer included in the lookup table entry, a mode value from a results table. The mode value can identify an operational flow (e.g., a series of forwarding decisions) to be carried out by the network processor for forwarding the received packet. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241358 | PACKET PROCESSING MATCH AND ACTION UNIT WITH A VLIW ACTION ENGINE - An embodiment of the invention includes receiving packet header vectors where a header vector includes a number of packet header words. Match operations are performed on the packet header words. At least one packet header word is modified based on the match operations. At least one processor is used for each packet header word to perform the packet match operations and modify at least one packet header word. Instructions are received from an instruction word where a VLIW instruction word includes all of the instruction words. Each processor performs an operation in response to the instruction word. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241359 | PACKET PROCESSING VLIW ACTION UNIT WITH OR-MULTI-PORTED INSTRUCTION MEMORY - An embodiment of the invention includes a memory and apparatus for packet processing in a switching network. The memory includes a plurality of words where each word includes a plurality of bits. Each word in the plurality of words is addressed by separate and distinct read address. A logic circuit performs a logical “OR” function on all the bit in all the words addressed by the separate and distinct read addresses and outputs a result. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241360 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTI-LEVEL QUALITY OF SERVICE CLASSIFICATION IN AN INTERMEDIARY DEVICE - The present invention is directed towards systems and methods for providing multi-level classification of a network packet. In some embodiments, network performance may be enhanced and optimized by providing QoS and acceleration engines with packet- or data-specific information. In addition to source and destination IP addresses and port numbers, packet- or data-specific information can include direction of traffic (client to host or server; server or host to client; or both), Virtual LAN (VLAN) ID, source or destination application or associated application, service class, ICA priority, type of service, differentiated service code point (DSCP), or other information. Some or all of this information may be used to classify the network packet at a plurality of layers of a network stack, allowing for deep inspection of the packet and multiple levels of granularity of classification. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241361 | PACKET PROCESSING MATCH AND ACTION UNIT WITH CONFIGURABLE MEMORY ALLOCATION - A packet processing block. The block comprises an input for receiving data in a packet header vector, the vector comprising data values representing information for a packet. The block also comprises circuitry for performing packet match operations in response to at least a portion of the packet header vector and data stored in a match table, and circuitry for performing one or more actions in response to a match detected by the circuitry for performing packet match operations and according to information stored in an action table. Each of said match table and said action table comprise one or more memories selected from a pool of unit memories, wherein each memory in the pool of unit memories is configurable to operate as either a match memory or an action memory. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241362 | PACKET PROCESSING MATCH AND ACTION UNIT WITH CONFIGURABLE BIT ALLOCATION - A packet processing block. The block has an input for receiving data in a packet header vector, the vector comprising data representing information for a packet and a match unit for performing match operations between packet header vector data and at least one match table. Various embodiments provide advantages in connection with storing certain action or next table bits outside of the match table, or constants in the table, or by forming the match table from multiple unit match table memories. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241363 | FRAME RELAY SWITCHED DATA SERVICE - A new type of data transport service which uses a frame relay layer 2 data link connection identifier (DLCI) to select among various service types, feature sets, and/or closed user groups (CUGs). A layer 3 address may be extracted from a layer 2 frame, and the layer 3 address information may be used to route a data packet over a packet-switched network according to the service classes, feature sets, and/or CUGs selected. At the destination, the layer 3 data packet may again be enclosed in a layer 2 frame with a DLCI indicating the service classes, features sets, and/or CUGs. Because the use of conventional permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) is not required in aspects of the invention, new methods of measuring and managing network traffic are presented. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241364 | EFFICIENT TRILL FORWARDING - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch. The switch includes a storage and a lookup mechanism. The storage stores a first table that contains an entry corresponding to a media access control (MAC) address of a device and an identifier of a remote switch associated with the device. The storage also stores a second table that contains an entry indicating a local outgoing interface corresponding to the remote switch. The lookup mechanism identifies the local outgoing interface corresponding to the device based on the first table and the second table. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241365 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM | 08-28-2014 |
20140241366 | Comprehensive Multipath Routing for Congestion and Quality-of-Service in Communication Networks - A packet routing method includes computing, for each source node in the data network and each destination node in the data network, a set of multiple routes providing a full range of performance from the source node to the destination node. The multiple routes are preferably precomputed and stored. The full range of performance is defined by a set of dominant routes, defined in terms of a partial order on a multi-dimensional space whose dimensions correspond to performance metrics such as bandwidth, latency metric, and jitter. The method selects, for a packet originating from a source node and addressed to a destination node, a route from the computed set of multiple routes and forwards the packet in accordance with the selected route. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241367 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROLLER, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - In a centrally controlled communication system where a packet loss may occur in a switch on a forwarding path, transmission of a packet of a high-priority protocol is enabled. The communication system includes a group of switches which process a received packet(s) by referring to a flow entry that defines processing content to be applied to the packet(s) and a controller that controls the group of switches. The controller comprises a topology detection unit that detects a network topology composed of a link(s) satisfying predetermined transmission quality from among links connecting respective ones of the switches, based on information obtained from the group of switches. When communication using a predetermined communication protocol that requires the predetermined communication quality occurs between arbitrary nodes, the controller creates a flow entry to be applied to a packet(s) of the predetermined communication protocol, and then set the created flow entry in each switch on a path set between the arbitrary nodes. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241368 | CONTROL APPARATUS FOR FORWARDING APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD FOR FORWARDING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM - A control apparatus for forwarding apparatuses is connected to forwarding apparatuses which forward a packet according to a forwarding rule and includes: an address storage unit that stores correspondence relationships between upper layer addresses and lower layer addresses; an address management unit that refers to the address storage unit to search for a corresponding lower layer address from an upper layer destination address of a packet to be forwarded through one or more of the forwarding apparatuses; and a forwarding rule setting unit that sets a forwarding rule for causing the one or more forwarding apparatuses on a forwarding path of the packet to be forwarded to perform a process of writing the searched lower layer address in a lower layer destination address field of the packet to be forwarded. | 08-28-2014 |
20140247829 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SYNCHRONIZING FORWARDING DATABASES ACROSS MULTIPLE INTERCONNECTED LAYER-2 SWITCHES - A method and a multi-switch architecture include learning a media access control (MAC) address at a first switch in a multi-switch architecture; storing the MAC address in a forwarding database of the first switch; transmitting a data frame to one or more switches in the multi-switch architecture via inter-switch connectivity between the first switch and the one or more switches, wherein the data frame is created to enable the one or more switches to learn the MAC address therefrom; learning the MAC address from the data frame at the one or more switches; and storing the MAC address in a forwarding database for each of the one or more switches. This further includes transmitting the data frame via ports and queues in the inter-switch connectivity that are separate from ports and queues in a data path between the first switch and the one or more switches to avoid data path interference. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247830 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING TRANSPORT OF DATA PACKETS IN A NETWORK - A method for supporting transport of data packets in a network, wherein the data packets are transmitted from a source node to a destination node by employing a tunnel from a first tunnel endpoint to a second tunnel endpoint, wherein a tunnel header is added to the data packets at the first tunnel endpoint, wherein the data packets are transmitted between the tunnel endpoints via a network domain that includes one or more intermediate nodes functioning as transport network, and wherein the intermediate nodes forward the data packets, is characterized in that the tunnel is provided in the form of a virtual tunnel by removing the tunnel header from the data packets where the data packets enter the network domain and adding back the tunnel header to the data packets where the data packets exit the network domain. A corresponding system for supporting transport of data packets is disclosed. | 09-04-2014 |
20140254594 | IN NIC FLOW SWITCHING - Methods, apparatus, and systems for implementing in Network Interface Controller (NIC) flow switching. Switching operations are effected via hardware-based forwarding mechanisms in apparatus such as NICs in a manner that does not employ use of computer system processor resources and is transparent to operating systems hosted by such computer systems. The forwarding mechanisms are configured to move or copy Media Access Control (MAC) frame data between receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx) queues associated with different NIC ports that may be on the same NIC or separate NICs. The hardware-based switching operations effect forwarding of MAC frames between NIC ports using memory operations, thus reducing external network traffic, internal interconnect traffic, and processor workload associated with packet processing. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254595 | INTERNET ROUTING OVER A SERVICE-ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE BUS - In some aspects, a non-gateway node transmits an internet route request to neighbor nodes and receives, from a gateway node, a response message including an address of the gateway node and a gateway indicator. The non-gateway node sets a gateway pointer equal to this address. In other aspects, a gateway node receives an internet route request from neighbor nodes and transmits, to the neighbor nodes, a response message including an address of the gateway node and a gateway indicator. In additional aspects, a non-gateway node receives, from gateway nodes on the network, an announcement of internet connectivity that includes address of the gateway nodes. The non-gateway node adds these addresses to a list of potential gateways. When the non-gateway nodes receives packets for transmission to an internet destination, it selects a gateway address from the list, and transmits the packets to a destination gateway associated with the gateway address. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254596 | INDEXED SEGMENT ID - An apparatus and method for using indexed segment identifiers in segment routing. An example method involves receiving a globally unique index value at a node. The method also involves receiving a base value at the node, where the base value comprises a segment routing value configured to identify a nodal segment. The method then involves calculating a segment identifier based on the index value and the base value. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254597 | FORWARDING ETHERNET PACKETS - Forwarding Ethernet packets is disclosed, including: receiving an incoming packet; determining a value based at least in part on performing a hash operation on at least a portion of a destination Internet Protocol (IP) address included in the incoming packet; comparing the value against a pre-established look-up table to determine whether a corresponding index value is found, wherein the pre-established look-up table stores index values and corresponding data sets to respective ones of the index values; determining a destination media access control (MAC) address associated with the incoming packet based at least in part on whether the corresponding index value is found in the pre-established look-up table; and forwarding the incoming packet to a virtual machine associated with the determined destination MAC address. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254598 | MEDICAL DEVICE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A medical device communication method that may be implemented within a variety of medical devices including but not limited to infusion pumps. The method may be implemented with a protocol stack for at least intra-device communication. Embodiments provide connection-oriented, connectionless-oriented, broadcast and multicast data exchange with priority handling of data, fragmentation, and reassembly of data, unique static and dynamic address assignment and hot swap capability for connected peripherals or subsystems. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254599 | Message Handling in an IP Multimedia Subsystem - A method and apparatus for handling a Session initiation Protocol communication in an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network. A Proxy Call Session Control Function receives a Session Initiation Protocol message sent from a trusted remote network. The P-CSCF adds to the message a further header, which identifies a Public User Identity of a trusted entity located in the remote network served by a Serving Call Session Control Function in the IMS network. The message is then sent to the S-CSCF. The S-CSCF, and any other node that the message is sent to, knows from the presence of the further header to use the Public User Identity of the trusted entity to determine the served user rather than the P-Asserted Identity contained in the SIP message. | 09-11-2014 |
20140269709 | VIRTUAL GATEWAYS AND IMPLICIT ROUTING IN DISTRIBUTED OVERLAY VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENTS - Embodiments of the invention relate to providing default gateway virtualization in a distributed overlay virtual environment. One embodiment includes a method that includes creating a packet by a first virtual machine (VM) including a first destination address. The packet is received from the first VM by a first virtual switch. A second destination address for a second VM is obtained by the first virtual switch based on information in the packet. The first destination address in the packet is replaced with the second destination address. The packet is encapsulated using a header that is addressed for a second virtual switch. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269710 | PORT EXTENDER - An extended bridge structure that includes a controlling bridge and port extenders is disclosed. A port extender according to some embodiments of the present invention includes a processor that processes receives packets in a way that executes at least one procedure that substitutes for a function of the controlling bridge. A controlling bridge according to the present invention provides data to the port extender that enables it to execute the at least one procedure that substitutes for a function of the controlling bridge. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269711 | COMMUNICATION OVER MULTIPLE VIRTUAL LANES USING A SHARED BUFFER - A method for communication includes, in a sender node that sends packets to a receiver node over a physical link, making a decision, for a packet that is associated with a respective virtual link selected from among multiple virtual links, whether the receiver node is to buffer the packet in a dedicated buffer assigned to the respective virtual link or in a shared buffer that is shared among the multiple virtual links. The packet is sent, and the decision is signaled, from the sender node to the receiver node. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269712 | TAGGING VIRTUAL OVERLAY PACKETS IN A VIRTUAL NETWORKING SYSTEM - Embodiments of the invention provide a method for packet distribution in a virtual networking system comprising multiple virtual networks interconnected over an underlying layer network, wherein each virtual network comprises one or more computing nodes. The method comprises, for each virtual network, sending at least one outgoing packet targeting a computing node at a different virtual network, and receiving at least one incoming packet targeting a computing node of the virtual network. Each packet has a corresponding virtual networking tag that includes routing information identifying a destination virtual network for the packet. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269713 | SIGNALING FOR SERVICE FLOWS - A method for operating a Cable Modem Termination System (CMTS) device comprising storing a data structure correlating a plurality of border gateway protocol (BGP) attribute tags to packet header data, receiving a packet via a network of connected devices, determining a BGP attribute tag of the packet according to packet header data of said packet, determining an action to apply to the packet based on the data structure and the BGP attribute tag, and applying the action to the packet, wherein the action includes routing the packet in accordance with a BGP. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269714 | UNIVERSAL LABELS IN INTERNETWORKING - In an embodiment, a method comprises: receiving a data communications packet comprising one or more labels in a label stack; determining whether a table identifier is present in the label stack. In response to determining that the table identifier is present in the label stack: based, at least in part, on the table identifier, a label table is determined; a next hop for the data communications packet is determined by performing a next-hop lookup in the label table using at least one of the one or more labels; and the data communications packet is forwarded to the next hop. In an embodiment, the method is performed by one or more computing devices. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269715 | FINDING NONEQUIVALENT CLASSIFIERS TO REDUCE TERNARY CONTENT ADDRESSABLE MEMORY (TCAM) USAGE - The problem of providing an efficient physical implementation of a (first) classifier defined by a first rule set, at least a part of which first classifier having a sparse distribution in Boolean space, is solved by (1) converting the first classifier, having a corresponding Boolean space, into a second classifier, wherein the second classifier has a corresponding Boolean space which is not semantically equivalent to the Boolean space corresponding to the first classifier, and wherein the second classifier is defined by a second set of rules which is smaller than the first set of rules defining the first classifier; and (2) defining a bit string transformation which transforms a first bit string into a second bit string, wherein applying the first bit string to the first classifier is equivalent to applying the second bit string to the second classifier. In at least some example embodiments, the first bit string includes packet header information. In at least some example embodiments, the second classifier is implemented on a TCAM. In at least some example embodiments, the bit string transformation is implemented on an FPGA. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269716 | EXTENDED TAG NETWORKING - Techniques are provided for enabling tag networking. In one example, a network device (e.g., switch, router, etc.) is configured to receive a packet of a traffic flow and to analyze the traffic flow to determine the packet belongs to a particular type of traffic. The network device can then add and/or change a tag in a data field of the packet. The tag, among other things, serves as an identifier for the particular type of traffic flow. The tag is identifiable by a downstream node that is preconfigured to recognize the tag and to carry out logic in response to recognizing the tag. Advantageously, the tag functionality of the present approach provides a generalized way of adding information to packets; the information and the associated functionalities are customizable during a runtime of the network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269717 | IPV6/IPV4 RESOLUTION-LESS FORWARDING UP TO A DESTINATION - In one embodiment, a switch in a computer network intercepts a packet to a destination target, the packet having a solicited node multicast address of the target as a destination media access control (MAC) address of the packet. As such, the switch may determine whether the solicited node multicast address is a hit or miss within a switch hardware table of the switch, and in response to a hit, re-writes the destination MAC address with a known value of the destination target from the table, and unicasts the packet to the destination target. In one or more additional embodiments, in response to a miss, and in response to a single-switch architecture, the switch drops the packet, while in response to a miss, and in response to a multi-switch architecture, the switch may compute a repository switch for the solicited multicast destination, and unicasts the packet to the computed repository switch. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269718 | PACKET EXTRACTION OPTIMIZATION IN A NETWORK PROCESSOR - A packet processor provides for rule matching of packets in a network architecture. The packet processor includes a lookup cluster complex having a number of lookup engines and respective on-chip memory units. The on-chip memory stores rules for matching against packet data. A lookup front-end receives lookup requests from a host, and processes these lookup requests to generate key requests for forwarding to the lookup engines. Based on information in the packet, the lookup front-end can optimize start times for sending key requests as a continuous stream with minimal delay. As a result of the rule matching, the lookup engine returns a response message indicating whether a match is found. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269719 | IN-BAND MANAGEMENT USING L2 ADDRESSES OVER B-VLAN IN AN SPBM NETWORK - Methods, systems and computer readable media for in-band management using L2 addresses over a B-VLAN in an SPBm network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269720 | SCALABLE INFINIBAND PACKET-ROUTING TECHNIQUE - An InfiniBand switch fabric is described. This InfiniBand switch fabric includes a hierarchy of switches having physical ports. These physical ports have associated local routing tables for nearest-neighbor connections to the physical ports. Moreover, relationships between the nearest-neighbor connections to each of the physical ports specified in the local routing tables are based in part on network-layer global identifiers that are assigned based on the hierarchy. Furthermore, local routing tables in the switches facilitate paths or routes for packets through the InfiniBand switch fabric without using a global routing table in the switches. In addition, the InfiniBand switch fabric includes a fabric manager, coupled to the switches, having the global routing table to assign the network-layer global identifiers. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269721 | SEGMENT ROUTING OVER LABEL DISTRIBUTION PROTOCOL - An apparatus and method is disclosed for segment routing (SR) over label distribution protocol (LDP). In one embodiment, the method includes a node receiving a packet with an attached segment ID. In response, the node may attach a label to the packet. Thereafter, the node may forward the packet with the attached label and segment ID to another node via a label switched path (LSP). | 09-18-2014 |
20140269722 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication method using link aggregation, the method includes receiving a transfer frame; calculating, by a first communication device, an identification number of an output port for the transfer frame among a plurality of ports using a hash function, by using a combination of a source address of the transfer frame, a destination address of the transfer frame, and a cyclic number that is generated for every combination of the source address and the destination address and represents an order of the transfer frame as a hash key; and transmitting the transfer frame from the output port. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269723 | Apparatus and Method for Processing Alternately Configured Longest Prefix Match Tables - A network switch includes a memory configurable to store alternate table representations of an individual trie in a hierarchy of tries. A prefix table processor accesses in parallel, using an input network address, the alternate table representations of the individual trie and searches for a longest prefix match in each alternate table representation to obtain local prefix matches. The longest prefix match from the local prefix matches is selected. The longest prefix match has an associated next hop index base address and offset value. A next hop index processor accesses a next hop index table in the memory utilizing the next hop index base address and offset value to obtain a next hop table pointer. A next hop processor accesses a next hop table in the memory using the next hop table pointer to obtain a destination network address. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269724 | METHOD AND DEVICES FOR FORWARDING IP DATA PACKETS IN AN ACCESS NETWORK - A method of controlling forwarding of IP data packets through a service network. An IP data packet including an original source port number enters the network through a gateway node. A controller defines a path allocated to a service type through a forwarding node and a service-providing server allocated to the network; allocates an identifier to the service type; provides path-related forwarding rules to the forwarding node based on the identifier; and provides to the gateway node, the service-type identifier and a mapping rule between the identifier and the service type. The gateway node receives the IP data packet and determines which service type the IP data packet refers to; replaces the original source port number with a source port number encoding the identifier of the determined service type based on the mapping rule; and provides the IP data packet to the forwarding node for forwarding on the path. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269725 | SERVICE TO NODE RESOLUTION USING INTERIOR GATEWAY PROTOCOLS - An apparatus and method for resolving services to nodal segments. The method involves receiving an advertisement. The advertisement includes a service address associated with a service. The method further involves identifying an originator node for the service, where the originator node is associated with a nodal segment identifier. The method further involves updating the advertisement. Updating the advertisement involves adding information identifying the originator node to the advertisement. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269726 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example avoiding data copy and task switching by processing protocol headers of network PDUs as a serial tape to be processed in order such as by a single method. Other processing includes reducing stages and simplifying protocol processing and multiplexing during network communications. Address changing in an active network can be implemented by assigning multiple addresses to an entity so that a new address can replace the old address. Peer-to-peer application searching can be performed among networks that can be accessible or non-accessible networks. Utilizing anycast sets that include selected and alternative addresses to enable immediate or near immediate alternative route selection on failure or congestion. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269727 | FAST REROUTE FOR SEGMENT ROUTING TRAFFIC - An apparatus and method are disclosed for fast reroute (FRR) for native segment routing (SR) traffic. In one embodiment, a node receives a packet that includes a segment routing (SR) segment identifier (ID) stack. The node determines what type of segment is designated as the active segment in the segment ID stack. Based, at least in part on the type of active segment, the node selects an update routine out of several possible update routines and performs the selected update routine. The update routine modifies the segment ID stack. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269728 | PROCESSING DATA PACKETS USING A POLICY BASED NETWORK PATH - Methods and systems are provided for processing data packets in a data network using a policy based network path. A policy enforcing point receives a data packet associated with a service session and routes it toward its destination along a network path which is determined according to data packet information and one or more packet processing criteria. The data packet information may include one or more of information associated with the packet, information associated with prior packets, and information obtained from a network computer. The network path may be selected from a database of network paths. The network path may include an order list of further policy enforcing points and corresponding network application appliances. The policy enforcing point may generate a new data packet based on the data packet and the policy based network path and send the new data packet to a next policy enforcing point. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269729 | PACKET FORWARDING METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - A packet forwarding method, includes: receiving an IP packet, and obtaining a destination IP address carried in the IP packet; obtaining an IP address of a next-hop device on a link from a routing table according to the destination IP address; obtaining a MAC address of the next-hop device and a corresponding port number according to the IP address of the next-hop device; and if failing to obtain the MAC address of the next-hop device and the corresponding port number, obtaining a corresponding interface on the routing device from the routing table according to the destination IP address, and obtaining the MAC address of the next-hop device and the corresponding port number from a fuzzy ARP table according to the interface; and forwarding the IP packet to the next-hop device according to the MAC address of the next-hop device and the port number. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269730 | COMMUNICATION NETWORKS THAT PROVIDE A COMMON TRANSPORT DOMAIN FOR USE BY MULTIPLE SERVICE DOMAINS AND METHODS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR USING THE SAME - A method of operating a communication network comprises receiving loopback addresses from a plurality of edge networks at a provider router of a core backbone network, the edge networks and the core backbone network being logically distinct from each other, advertising the loopback addresses to a transport route reflector element, propagating the advertisement of the loopback addresses to other provider routers of the core backbone network using a protocol for communicating between autonomous systems, and using the transport route reflector element to advertise at least one of the loopback addresses to a service route reflector element in one of the plurality of edge networks. | 09-18-2014 |
20140286336 | System and Method for Paging Flow Entries in a Flow-Based Switching Device - A network switching device includes a macroflow sub-plane that performs packet-based routing in the network switching device and a microflow routing sub-plane that performs flow-based routing in the network switching device. The microflow routing sub-plane receives a first data packet, determines that the first data packet is associated with a first flow page, wherein the first flow page comprises a plurality of flow entries, determines that the first flow page is not resident in a routing table of the microflow routing sub-plane, and requests the first flow page from a software defined network (SDN) controller. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286337 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUBSCRIBER AWARE NETWORK MONITORING - A system and method for subscriber aware network monitoring is provided. The method includes: determining subscriber and session data, wherein the subscriber has a non-unique IP (Internet Protocol) address; retrieving identifying data from a packet; and comparing the identifying data with the determined subscriber and session data to determine the subscriber associated with the packet. The system includes: at least one network probe configured to determine subscriber and session data, wherein the subscriber has a non-unique Internet Protocol (IP) address; at least one traffic probe configured to retrieve identifying data from a packet; and a processing module configured to compare the identifying data with the stored subscriber and session data to determine the subscriber associated with the packet. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286338 | SYSTEM, RELAY DEVICE, METHOD, AND MEDIUM - A system includes a first device which outputs a packet including an address identifying a second device and identifier of one of a plurality of communication circuits that output packets to a network, and a relay device which outputs the packet to the second device instead of to the one of the plurality of communication circuits corresponding to the identifier, when it is determined based on the address that the second device is coupled to the relay device. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286339 | Hardware Acceleration for Routing Programs - The present disclosure describes techniques for hardware acceleration for routing programs. In some aspects communications between a routing determination program and a packet router are monitored in a router, both the routing determination program and the packet router being part of a software layer of the router. The communications include the routing determination program providing configuration data to the packet router. Based on the monitored communications, a packet processor is changed to reflect the configuration data, the packet processor being part of a hardware layer of the router. The packet processor performs packet routing operations of receiving packets, determining the next routers in the paths to the target destinations of the packets, and sending the packets to the next routers independent of the software layer. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286340 | Multipath effectuation within singly contiguous network fabric via switching device routing logic programming - Each of a network fabric controller device and a network fabric forwarder devices includes network connecting hardware and network managing logic. The network connecting hardware of the devices connects them to a singly contiguous network fabric including switching devices that route data between initiator nodes and target nodes and that have routing logic programmable by the controller device. The controller device does not directly route the data themselves. The network managing logic of the devices effects multipaths for transmission of the data through the singly contiguous network fabric from the initiator node to the target nodes via programming of the routing logic of the switching devices. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286341 | SIGNALING CO-ROUTED AND NON CO-ROUTED LSPS OF A BIDIRECTIONAL PACKET TE TUNNEL - Particular embodiments may enable setup and signaling of co-routed and non co-routed label switched paths (LSPs) of a bidirectional packet traffic engineering (TE) tunnel in an unambiguous manner with respect to provisioning of the LSPs/tunnel. A head-end node may set up the bidirectional packet TE tunnel by computing a forward (and possibly a reverse) direction LSP, and then signal the bidirectional TE tunnel utilizing, e.g., extensions to an associated Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) signaling method. The extensions to the associated RSVP signaling method include a plurality of additional Association Types of an Extended Association object carried in a RSVP Path message transmitted by the head-end node to the tail-end node over the forward direction LSP, wherein the additional Association Types explicitly identify the provisioning of the forward and reverse direction LSPs as co-routed or non co-routed. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286342 | METHOD FOR GENERATING ENTRY, METHOD FOR RECEIVING PACKET, AND CORRESPONDING APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of present invention provide a method for generating an entry, and the method includes: receiving, by a stream forwarding apparatus, a first packet, where the stream forwarding apparatus is an apparatus in a network architecture in which controlling and forwarding are separated; searching, a flow table for a first entry matching the first packet, where a set formed by fields that are in the first entry and match the first packet is a first set; generating, a second entry according to the first entry, where a set formed by fields that are in the second entry and match the first packet is a second set, the first set is a subset of the second set. According to the technical solution in embodiments, the stream forwarding apparatus obtain an exact matching entry without interacting with a control plane apparatus through a control channel. | 09-25-2014 |
20140294005 | Using a Virtual Internet Protocol Address to Represent Dually Connected Hosts in an Internet Protocol Overlay Network - Techniques are presented herein for distributing address information of host devices in a network. At a first router device, a packet is received from a first host device that is destined for a second host device. The first host device is dually-connected to the first router and a second router device. The second router device is part of a virtual port channel pair with the first router device. A message is sent to the second router device, the message indicating that the first host device is connected to the second router device. The packet is encapsulated with an overlay header and is sent to a third router device that is connected to the second host device. The encapsulated packet contains a Layer 2 address associated with the first host device and a Layer 3 address associated with the first host device. | 10-02-2014 |
20140294006 | DIRECT SERVICE MAPPING FOR NAT AND PNAT - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method of processing a packet at a firewall. The method includes: receiving a packet having a source address, destination address, source port, and destination port; comparing the packet to match criteria of a rule, wherein the match criteria includes at least one service group having a plurality of port combinations; matching both the source port and destination port with one of the plurality of port combinations; determining an index into the service group of the matching port combination; and translating a port of the packet based on the index into the service group and a NAT service group defined for the rule. | 10-02-2014 |
20140294007 | PACKET COMMUNICATION DEVICE, PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PACKET COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A packet communication device includes a search unit that searches, when having received a packet, for a combination of a label that identifies a transfer path of the packet and an output unit that outputs the packet to a physical line to which the transfer path is set. Further, the packet communication device includes an identifying unit that identifies a plurality of combinations including a common output unit that is the same output unit combined with a plurality of labels from among the combinations searched by the search unit. Further, the packet communication device includes a multiplex unit that multiplexes the plurality of labels combined with the common output unit in the packet to be output from the common output unit to the physical line when a plurality of combinations including the common output unit has been identified by the identifying unit. | 10-02-2014 |
20140294008 | Network Relay Device - A network relay device capable of easily recognizing a state of hash value collision is provided. Each of a plurality of entries contained in an address table includes: a first area in which first information is registered, the first information indicating a relation between a plurality of ports and MAC addresses existing beyond the plurality of ports; and a second area in which second information is registered. In learning a transmission-source MAC address of a frame received at a port, a frame processing unit calculates a hash value by using the transmission-source MAC address first. Next, if a MAC address different from the transmission-source MAC address has been registered in the first area of an entry corresponding to the hash value, the frame processing unit registers the second information in the second area. | 10-02-2014 |
20140294009 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL METHOD OF COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND PROGRAM - There is provided a communication apparatus including a transmission source mapping algorithm acquisition unit configured to acquire an algorithm that assigns an external address and an external port number to an internal address and an internal port number of a transmission source, as a transmission source mapping algorithm, a destination mapping algorithm acquisition unit configured to acquire an algorithm that assigns an external address and an external port number to an internal address and an internal port number of a destination, as a destination mapping algorithm, and a generation unit configured to generate an external port number newly assigned to the internal address and the internal port number of the destination in a case where the transmission source mapping algorithm is more complicated than the destination mapping algorithm. | 10-02-2014 |
20140294010 | ASYMMETRICAL LINK AGGREGATION - According to one embodiment, an apparatus and method for asymmetrical link aggregation is disclosed, wherein the method is implemented in an access switch, the access switch connects to at least two aggregation switches through a first set of ports and respective links, the access switch connects to an external network through a second set of ports, and the at least two aggregation switches connects to an internal network, the method comprising: in response to receiving a frame from one of the second set of ports, selecting one of the first set of ports based on the source address of the frame; and sending the frame using the selected one of the first set of ports. | 10-02-2014 |
20140294011 | METHOD OF PROMOTING A QUICK DATA FLOW OF DATA PACKETS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK, COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND DATA PROCESSING UNIT - In a communication network including a plurality of network domains in which switches and controllers are separated, in controllers providing the information to which neighbour switches are to forward data packets, inter-domain communication is introduced. For example, a local controller alerts another local controller enabling this other local controller to perform process steps in preparation of arrival of a data packet prior to that data packet arriving at its network domain. | 10-02-2014 |
20140301394 | EXACT MATCH HASH LOOKUP DATABASES IN NETWORK SWITCH DEVICES - In a method for forwarding packets in a network device a plurality of hash values is generated based on a lookup key. The plurality of hash values includes at least a first hash value generated using a first hash function, a second hash value generated using a second hash function and a third hash value generated using a third hash function. The third hash function is different from the first hash function and the second hash function. A lookup table is searched using the first hash value and the second hash value to determine an offset for the lookup key. Then, a forwarding table is searched using the third hash value and the offset determined for the lookup key to select a forwarding entry corresponding to the lookup key. The packet is forwarded to one or more ports of the network device based on the selected forwarding entry. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301395 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SYNCHRONIZING MSS AND PMTU IN NCORE AND CLUSTER SYSTEMS - Systems and methods of propagating maximum segment size and path maximum transmission unit of network paths between an intermediary device of a cluster with a plurality of destinations are described. A first core of a node including multiple cores and intermediary to a client and a plurality of servers may receive a response to a packet transmitted to a destination indicating that the packet has a size greater than a MTU of a network path between the node and a destination. The first core identifies the MTU of the network path and determines that the identified MTU is different than an MTU used by the first core. The first core replaces the MTU stored in an entry corresponding to the destination in a PMTU table maintained with the identified MTU. The first core transmits, to other cores of the node, the identified MTU to update each core's PMTU table. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301396 | METHOD FOR CONSTRUCTING VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK, METHOD FOR PACKET FORWARDING, AND GATEWAY APPARATUS USING THE METHODS - Disclosed are a method for constructing a virtual private network, a method for packet forwarding, and a gateway apparatus using the methods. A method for constructing a virtual private network, according to an example embodiment of the present invention, may comprise receiving a first tunnel connection request from the lower gateway, and transmitting a permission message for the first tunnel connection request to the lower gateway; transmitting a second tunnel connection request to the upper gateway, and receiving a permission message for the second tunnel connection request from the upper gateway; and generating a second tunnel, and storing information about the second tunnel in a tunnel routing table. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301397 | FLOW IDENTIFICATION METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention include a flow identification method, device, and system. In the system for implementing the flow identification method, a switching device acquires an enhanced flow table entry matching tunnel encapsulation, where the enhanced flow table entry matching the tunnel encapsulation includes an identifier of the tunnel encapsulation and a flow-table-field matching the tunnel encapsulation; and the switching device identifies, according to the enhanced flow table entry matching the tunnel encapsulation, a data packet that has undergone tunnel encapsulation processing. By adopting the technical solutions disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention, packet content that has undergone the tunnel encapsulation processing and is in the data packet may be identified. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301398 | SWITCHING ARCHITECTURE WITH PACKET ENCAPSULATION - The invention includes, among other things, a system for passing TDM traffic through a packet switch. In one embodiment, the system includes a packet switch that has a plurality of data ports and is capable of routing FSDU packets between the plurality of data ports. A TDM encapsulation circuit process a TDM data flow that is incoming to the switch. A circuit demultiplexer processes the incoming data flow to buffer data associated with different TDM circuits into different buffer locations. A timer monitors the amount of time available to fill the FSDU, and when the time period reaches the frame boundary, an FSDU generator generates an FSDU that is filled with data associated with the TDM circuits. Header information is added for allowing the packet switch to route the generated FSDU to a port associated with the respective TDM circuit. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301399 | Transmission of Data Within a Communications Network - The invention relates to methods for providing a network element | 10-09-2014 |
20140307736 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING A PARSER TO EXTRACT INFORMATION FROM FIELDS OF A DATA PACKET HEADER - A method for providing a parser by a network node, which includes a table defining a plurality of rules and a plurality of match fields required for extraction from an incoming data packet header in order to apply each of the respective rules is described. The method comprises determining at least one occurrence in the table of a first match field that requires extraction; and determining a parser for use in accordance with the at least one determined occurrence of the first match field. Furthermore, the step of determining at least one occurrence of the first match field comprises initializing a counter associated with the first match field and incrementing the counter for each of the plurality of rules that requires extraction of the first match field. And the step of determining a parser comprises determining the parser for use in accordance with the counter. A network node for carrying this method is also described. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307737 | Exact Match Lookup with Variable Key Sizes - In a method for populating an exact match lookup table in a network device, a lookup key to be stored in a database of the network device is determined. The database is distributed among two or more memory banks. At least based on a size of the lookup key, (i) a first memory bank from among the two or more memory banks, and (ii) a hash function from among a plurality of possible hash functions, are selected. A hash operation is performed on the lookup key using the selected hash function to compute a first hashed lookup key segment. The first hashed lookup key segment is stored in the selected first memory bank, and one or more hashed lookup key segments corresponding to the lookup key are stored in one or more subsequent memory banks of the two or more memory banks. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307738 | Communication Method, Apparatus and System - Embodiments of the present invention provide a communication method, apparatus, and system, where the communication method includes: receiving a packet, encapsulating all or a part of the packet into an Ethernet operation, administration and maintenance packet, and then, according to a corresponding relationship between a port that receives the packet and a corresponding maintenance entity group end point, sending the encapsulated packet to an apparatus that includes the maintenance entity group. The communication method, apparatus, and system provided by the embodiments of the present invention implement IP address-based communication and management for a device that does not have an IP address by means of port mapping and packet encapsulation. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307739 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ACCESSING A MULTI-BANK SRAM - A device may include multi-bank SRAM logic configured to receive an lookup result that includes a first number of addresses, parse each of the first number of addresses from the received lookup result, simultaneously provide at least one of the first number of parsed addresses to each of a first number of SRAMs, simultaneously read data from each of the first number of SRAMs and simultaneously transmit the read data from each of the first number of SRAMs. | 10-16-2014 |
20140314081 | Automatic Assignment of Internet Protocol Addresses in a Ring Network - In one embodiment, a negotiation is performed between each adjacent pair of a plurality of packet switching devices in a ring network to determine an Internet Protocol (IP) subnet to be used for communicating between said packet switching devices of said adjacent pair. Packets are communicated by said packet switching devices of said adjacent pair using a different IP address of said determined IP subnet. In one embodiment, each of the plurality of packet switching devices is initially assigned an IP subnet to use on one of its two interfaces participating in the ring network; and wherein said negotiation determines which of said two interfaces will use said initially assigned IP subnet. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314082 | METHOD AND AN APPARATUS FOR A GATEWAY - An apparatus comprises at least one processor and at least one memory including computer code. The at least one memory and the computer code are configured to with the at least one processor cause the apparatus to at least perform receiving a first message from a first port, the first message for transmission in a communications network. The first message comprises at least one destination address. The apparatus is also configured to perform determining whether the first message is deliverable and generating a second message comprising the at least one destination address for each undeliverable address; and transmitting the second message. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314083 | Low Latency Communication Via Memory Windows - A high performance computer system has compute nodes interconnected by an inter-node communication network. The compute nodes include local packetized interconnects. Shared memory between compute nodes is emulated by tunneling packetized interconnect packets between the compute nodes. A memory region on one of the compute nodes is used as a window into a memory region in another compute node. Special registers may be provided to expedite remote operations on small amounts of data. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314084 | System and Method for Efficient Matching of Regular Expression Patterns Across Multiple Packets - A system and method for efficient matching regular expression patterns across multiple packets. A deep packet inspection system can be embodied in a switch ASIC using a flow tracker and a signature matching engine. The flow tracker can be positioned in an ingress portion of the switch ASIC at a location where packets in a bi-direction flow can be observed and recorded. The flow tracker generates a signature match request that is forwarded to a signature matching engine in an auxiliary pipeline. The signature matching engine is enabled to perform cross-packet signature matching using signature matching state machines and reports the signature matching results to the flow tracker using a response packet that is sent to the ingress pipeline. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314085 | PROTOCOL CIRCUIT LAYER - A protocol circuit layer is described. The protocol circuit layer may employ a routing layer to determine optimal routes when establishing a circuit. The circuit layer may employ a link layer to send data packets over links to other network nodes. A naming layer may employ circuits to establish a distributed database of associations between network node addresses and their network locations. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314086 | QUERYING A TRAFFIC FORWARDING TABLE - The invention relates to a computer implemented method of querying a traffic forwarding table at a device in a computer network, the traffic forwarding table having entries which are accessible using a key, the method comprising: identifying a forwarding address for use in querying the traffic forwarding table, wherein the forwarding address constitutes only part of a key and wherein a remaining part of the key is an embedded index in the traffic forwarding table; combining the forwarding address with a plurality of embedded indices of the traffic forwarding table to generate a set of keys for querying the traffic forwarding table; and generating a query message for the forwarding table using at least one of said set of keys. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314087 | ARCHITECTURE FOR AN ACCESS NETWORK SYSTEM MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL CONTROL UNDER HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK MANAGEMENT ENVIRONMENT - A method for processing messages within a telecommunication network, including receiving, by a central office (CO) from a network manager, a message packaged within a first data frame, the message conforming to a first protocol and being addressed to a customer premises equipment (CPE), wherein the CO communicates with the network manager using the first protocol, and communicates with the CPE using a second protocol, determining if the CPE to which the message is addressed supports the first protocol, when the determining is affirmative, then encapsulating the message conforming to the first protocol within a second data frame confirming to the second protocol, when the determining is not affirmative, then translating the message from the first protocol to the second protocol, and packaging the translated message within a second data frame confirming to the second protocol, and sending the second data frame to the CPE using the second protocol. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314088 | METHOD FOR OBTAINING INTERNET PROTOCOL HEADER REPLACEMENT MAPPING AND NETWORK NODE - The present invention discloses a method for obtaining an Internet protocol header replacement mapping, which belong to the field of communications technologies. The method includes: obtaining, by a network node, fixed IP header information which is bound to a UE, where the network node is an MME or an eNB or a PGW or an SGW; establishing an IP header replacement mapping according to the fixed IP header information, where the IP header replacement mapping is correspondence between the fixed IP header information and an index or a bearer; and performing data transmission with the UE according to the IP header replacement mapping. In the present invention, the network node establishes the IP header replacement mapping according to the obtained fixed IP header information which is bound to the UE, the method is more flexible. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314089 | LAYER 2 ACCESS METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM ON HFC NETWORK - The present invention provides a Layer 2 access method, device and system on a hybrid fiber-coaxial network, where the method includes: receiving a DHCP packet of a terminal device, extracting a source MAC address and a device type from the DHCP packet, and generating a correspondence between the source MAC address and an SVLAN according to a correspondence between the device type and the SVLAN; and when a data packet of the terminal device is received, extracting the source MAC address from the data packet, obtaining the corresponding SVLAN according to the stored correspondence between the MAC address and the SVLAN, and forwarding the data packet of the terminal device according to the corresponding SVLAN. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314090 | Method and System for Forwarding Data in Layer-2 Network - A method for forwarding data in a layer-2 network is provided. A first node receives a first data packet including a customer destination MAC address and customer data; generates a second data packet including a source virtual MAC address, a destination virtual MAC address and at least part of the first data packet. The at least part of the first data packet includes the customer destination MAC address and the customer data. The source virtual MAC address is a virtual MAC address assigned to the first node, and the destination virtual MAC address corresponds to the customer destination MAC address. The virtual MAC address assigned to the first node includes a first virtual MAC address segment with a first mask, which indicates a virtual MAC address space including virtual MAC addresses of child nodes of the first node. Then the first node forwards the second data packet. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314091 | FRAMEWORKS AND INTERFACES FOR OFFLOAD DEVICE-BASED PACKET PROCESSING - High-speed processing of packets to, and from, a virtualization environment can be provided while utilizing hardware-based segmentation offload and other such functionality. A hardware vendor such as a network interface card (NIC) manufacturer can enable the hardware to support open and proprietary stateless tunneling in conjunction with a protocol such as single root I/O virtualization (SR-IOV) in order to implement a virtualized overlay network. The hardware can utilize various rules, for example, that can be used by the NIC to perform certain actions, such as to encapsulate egress packets and decapsulate packets. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314092 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, EDGE DEVICE, EDGE DEVICE CONTROL METHOD, EDGE DEVICE CONTROL PROGRAM, NON-EDGE DEVICE, NON-EDGE DEVICE CONTROL METHOD, AND NON-EDGE DEVICE CONTROL PROGRAM - A communication system includes an Ethernet™ network and a MPLS-TP network connected with each other. A communication device transmits an OAM frame including frame type information showing that a frame type is an OAM frame, MPLS communication device identification information for identifying a communication device configuring the MPLS-TP network, and process content information showing a process content. When the type of a frame from the Ethernet network is an OAM frame, an edge device provides the frame with header information including an OAM identifier including MPLS communication device identification information included by the frame. When a communication device identified based on MPLS communication device identification information included by an OAM identifier of header information of a received frame is the device itself, a communication device executes an OAM process based on a process content shown by process content information. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314093 | Method for Processing a Request in an Information-Centric Communication Network - A method for processing a request for content by a routing device in a communication network implementing a name-based routing. The device includes plural interfaces to receive a request for content and a data packet associated with a content, and a routing table adapted to determine, based on a content name, at least one interface to route the request. The method includes: receiving the request through a first interface; if the device is not able to provide said data packet, searching for the name of the content in a table of pending requests associated with the first interface; in case the content name does not appear in the table, storing the name of the content in the table; and transmitting the request through at least one second interface, the second interface being determined as a function of the name of the content on the basis of the routing table. | 10-23-2014 |
20140321465 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR USING LINK-TAIL OF LINK LIST TO STORE DATA PATTERN WHICH IS INDICATIVE OF END OF LINK LIST AND AUXILIARY INFORMATION - A link list processing apparatus has a storage device and a link list controller. The link list controller sets link list information, and writes the link list information into the storage device to create a link list in the storage device. The link list has a plurality of nodes each having a next node address field. The link list information includes a data pattern configured to indicate an end of the link list as well as auxiliary information. The link list controller stores the data pattern into the next node address field of a link-tail node of the link list. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321466 | PACKET PROCESSING METHOD FOR GETTING PACKET INFORMATION FROM LINK LIST AND RELATED PACKET PROCESSING APPARATUS THEREOF - A packet processing method includes at least the following steps: deriving a start address from a packet index of a packet to be processed; deriving link-list access control information corresponding to the packet to be processed; and reading packet information for the packet to be processed from a link list stored in a packet information table according to the start address and the link-list access control information, wherein the link list comprises a plurality of entries each indexed by a current address and storing a next address and one packet information. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321467 | Apparatus and Method for Table Search with Centralized Memory Pool in a Network Switch - A network switch includes packet processing units in a first processor core. An interface module is connected to the packet processing units. The interface module supports a unified table search request interface and a unified table search response interface. A common memory pool is connected to the interface module. The common memory pool includes a variety of memory types configurable to support multiple parallel table search requests. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321468 | FAST APPLICATION RECOGNITION SYSTEM AND FAST APPLICATION PROCESSING METHOD - A fast application recognition system includes an output management unit to buffer an input packet and transmit the packet to an outside according to control information, a preprocessing path selection unit to receive the packet from the output management unit, extract control information corresponding to a packet's header information, and return the extracted control information to the output management unit, a primary processing unit to receive a packet not processed at the preprocessing path selection unit, extract control information corresponding to a packet's pattern using a primary pattern database, and return the extracted control information to the output management unit, and a statistics control unit to receive a packet from the output management unit according to the control information and the primary processing unit, extract control information corresponding to a packet's pattern using a secondary pattern database, and return the extracted control information to the output management unit. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321469 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RETAINING SOURCE IP IN A LOAD BALANCING MUTLI-CORE ENVIRONMENT - Described herein is a method and system for distributing requests and responses across a multi-core system. Each core executes a packet engine that further processes data packets allocated to that core. A flow distributor executing within the multi-core system forwards client requests to a packet engine on a core that is selected based on a value generated when a hash is applied to a tuple comprising a client IP address, a client port, a server IP address and a server port identified in the request. The packet engine maintains the client IP address, selects a first port of the core, and determines whether a hash of a tuple comprising those values identifies the selected core. A modification is then made to the client request so that the client request includes a tuple comprising the client IP address, the server IP address, the first port and the server port. | 10-30-2014 |
20140328342 | Privacy Preserving Query Method and System for Use in Federated Coalition Networks - In at least one embodiment, a method and a system include a node potentially having information responsive to an information request distributed into, for example, a federated coalition network where the node receives at least one information request packet, conducts a search of information at the node to determine if requested information is present, when the requested information is present, then the node sends an acknowledgement to a requesting node, linear network codes the requested information into m packets where m is greater than or equal to k, which is the number of packets needed to be received by the requesting node to reconstruct the requested information, selects multiple paths between the node and the requesting node such that no third party will see more than k−1 different packets, and transmits the m packets distributed over the selected paths. In a further embodiment, the method and system include operation of the network to have the capability to provide responsive information in a protected way. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328343 | ROUTING INTERNET PROTOCOL VERSION 6 LINK-LOCAL ADDRESSES IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method for routing IPv6 link-local addresses in a network environment is provided and includes receiving a packet at a first switch from an attached first host in a virtual local area network (VLAN) associated with a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance of a network environment, where the packet is destined to an Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) link-local address of a remote second host in the VLAN, and routing the packet at Layer 3 to a second switch, to which the second host is attached. In specific embodiments, the second switch routes the packet at Layer 3 to the second host if the VRF does not include duplicate IPv6 link-local addresses corresponding to the IPv6 link-local address of the second host; the second switch bridges the packet at Layer 2 to the second host if the VRF includes at least one duplicate IPv6 link-local address. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328344 | PACKET PROCESSING MATCH AND ACTION PIPELINE STRUCTURE WITH DEPENDENCY CALCULATION REMOVING FALSE DEPENDENCIES - An embodiment of the invention includes a plurality of tables in a hardware network for performing packet processing. Each table in the plurality of tables includes a table declaration. The table declaration includes a first set of fields used for input matching and a second set of fields used as inputs for action processing. A first table is selected from the plurality of tables. Successor tables to the first table are selected from the plurality of tables. There is a third set of fields for each successor table of the successor tables. The contents of the third set of fields are output fields where the output fields are modified by the first table when a next table of the first table is the successor table of the first table. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328345 | Ascertaining Per-Hop Network Characteristics - A tool that may be used for querying and obtaining per-hop information along a network path, and/or for verifying the host name of each hop against a data repository such as the DNS. The query and response may be transmitted in, e.g., the destination options header of data packets, such as an IPv6 destination options header. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328346 | MAINTAINED MESSAGE DELIVERY DURING ROUTING DOMAIN MIGRATION - In one embodiment, an ingress device of a first routing domain in a computer network buffers received packets, and in response to receiving a request from a particular node indicating that the particular node has migrated from the first routing domain to a second routing domain, determines how to reach the particular node in the second routing domain, and forwards the buffered received packets to the particular node in the second routing domain, accordingly. In another embodiment, a device in the first routing domain migrates from the first routing domain to a second routing domain, and determines its new IP address. The device may then send a request to the first ingress router to forward buffered packets for the device to the second routing domain at the new IP address, and may thus receive buffered packets forwarded from the first ingress router at the device in the second routing domain. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328347 | Function Mode Routing - Methods and entities of routing messages to or from a network entity in an IP network is disclosed. A function mode is indicated in a message routed to or from the network entity. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328348 | Classification of the Intercepted Internet Payload - The present disclosure provides embodiments of a method, an arrangement and an entity adapted to provide a Law Enforcement Agency with payload data of an intercepted Internet Protocol flow. The payload data belongs to one or more target identities using a specific Internet service. An Mediation functionality MF3 comprises a receiver configured to receive from an Intercepting Control Element intercepted payload data belonging to one or more target identities using a specific Internet service. The mediation functionality MF3 further comprises classifying means for classifying the payload data by identifying the specific IP service to which the received payload data belongs, and marking means configured to mark each IP packet of the received payload data with a service identifier corresponding to classification of the specific IP service to which the received payload data belongs. The marked payload data offers real-time usage and analysis of the content of interest. | 11-06-2014 |
20140334488 | Data Plane Learning of Bi-Directional Service Chains - Techniques are provided to decouple service chain structure from the underlying network forwarding state and allow for data plane learning of service chain forwarding requirements and any association between services function state requirements and the forward and reverse forwarding paths for a service chain. In a network comprising a plurality of network nodes each configured to apply a service function to traffic that passes through the respective network node, a packet is received at a network node. When the network node determines that the service function it applies is stateful, it updates context information in a network service header of the packet to indicate that the service function applied at the network node is stateful and that traffic for a reverse path matching the classification criteria is to be returned to the network node. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334489 | OPENFLOW MATCH AND ACTION PIPELINE STRUCTURE - An embodiment of the invention includes a packet processing pipeline. The packet processing pipeline includes match and action stages. Each match and action stage in incurs a match delay when match processing occurs and each match and action stage incurs an action delay when action processing occurs. A transport delay occurs between successive match and action stages when data is transferred from a first match and action stage to a second match and action stage. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334490 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, MANAGEMENT DEVICE, PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING PROCESSING PROGRAM STORED THEREIN - A communication device includes: a processor, wherein the processor adds a header corresponding to a second communication rule used by a network to uplink data which is transmitted from a terminal device to a control device to generate uplink transfer data when the communication device does not have a control element which is used for converting the communication rule of the data and corresponds to a first communication rule used by the terminal device; and the processor transmits, through the network, the generated uplink transfer data to a management device which includes the control element, that converts the communication rule of the uplink data in the uplink transfer data from the first communication rule to the second communication rule using the control element, and that transmits the uplink data to the control device. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334491 | PREDICTION BASED METHODS FOR FAST ROUTING OF IP FLOWS USING COMMUNICATION/NETWORK PROCESSORS - Aspects of the disclosure pertain to a system and method for providing prediction based, fast routing of IP flows. A hash table-based mechanism is implemented by the system such that classification information obtained and/or utilized for a first packet of an IP flow is applied to subsequent packets of the IP flow, thereby promoting packet processing efficiency for the flow. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334492 | Methods for Dynamically Binding Header Field Identifiers in a Network Control Protocol - Header field identifiers can be dynamically bound to header fields in software defined networks via signaling between software defined network (SDN) controllers and switches. Dynamically establishing header binding definitions may allow new header fields to be recognized and manipulated (e.g., matched, modified, etc.) by SDN switches without having to update the corresponding standard. To achieve this, an SDN controller sends a binding request to an SDN switch to propose that a header field identifier be dynamically associated with a header field type. If the SDN switch acknowledges the binding request, then the header field identifier is used to identify the header field type in messages (e.g., control messages, etc.) transmitted to the SDN switch. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334493 | MESSAGE FORWARDING METHOD, SYSTEM, AND RELAY AGENT DEVICE - The present disclosure provides a message forwarding method and system, and a relay agent device. The forwarding method includes: receiving a first DHCPv6 message from a DHCPv6 client through a layer-3 interface; generating a Relay-forward message, where the first DHCPv6 message is encapsulated into the Relay-forward message and an identifier of the layer-3 interface is added therein; and sending the Relay-forward message to a DHCPv6 server. | 11-13-2014 |
20140341217 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EXCHANGING INFORMATION AMONG EXCHANGE APPLICATIONS - In a system and method for processing messages in a gateway, a gateway message is received at the gateway, the gateway message including a gateway message header and a payload, the gateway message header including a unique message identifier block, a target block identifying where the gateway message is going, and a history block providing a log of what has happened to the gateway message. Each block in the gateway message header is processed by the gateway in accordance with a message type, the processing including determining a target application for receiving the payload. The payload is provided to the determined target application. Each block includes one or more values. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341218 | DISTRIBUTED METHODOLOGY FOR PEER-TO-PEER TRANSMISSION OF STATEFUL PACKET FLOWS - Techniques for enabling peer-to-peer transmission of stateful packet flows in a virtualized network environment are provided. In certain embodiments, a computer system receives a packet belonging to a stateful flow between a first virtual machine and a second virtual machine, accesses flow associating information (e.g., network address) from the packet, determines a second computer system comprising a state analysis owner for the stateful flow, using the flow associating information, and transmits the first packet to the second computer system. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341219 | Communication Terminal, Method of Communication, Communication System and Control Apparatus - A communication terminal comprises: first unit that communicates with a network system that includes a forwarding apparatus forwarding a packet and a control apparatus informing the forwarding apparatus of a processing rule prescribing a packet processing method; second unit that determines a processing operation to be executed by the network system from among packet processing operations to be executed by the communication terminal; and third unit that requests the control apparatus to inform the forwarding apparatus of a processing rule corresponding to the determined packet processing operation. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341220 | PROFINET ETHERNET ADAPTER - A PROFINET adapter having at least one first and one second Ethernet interface for coupling a subscriber to a PROFINET network. The PROFINET adapter comprises a third Ethernet interface, a number of at least one application interface and a splitter. The third Ethernet interface is designed at least for exchanging Ethernet-based data packets. The splitter is connected to the switch, the PROFINET protocol stack, the application interfaces and the third Ethernet interface, and is designed to divide real-time data packets and near real-time data packets according to a certain configuration and to transmit them between the switch and the application interface and/or the third Ethernet interface. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341221 | OPTIMIZING PRIVATE VIRTUAL LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (VLANS) - A network device is provided in a private virtual local area network (VLAN). The network device receives a packet on one of multiple private VLAN ports of the network device, and assigns a classified VLAN signature to the packet. The network device also assigns a primary VLAN signature to the packet, and stores a media access control (MAC) address and the classified VLAN signature of the packet in a single MAC address table. | 11-20-2014 |
20140348166 | OPTIMAL FORWARDING FOR TRILL FINE-GRAINED LABELING AND VXLAN INTERWORKING - An example method for determining an optimal forwarding path across a network having VxLAN gateways configured to implement both FGL networking and VxLAN capabilities can include learning RBridge nicknames associated with the VxLAN gateways in the network. Additionally, the method can include determining a path cost over the FGL network between each of the VxLAN gateways and a source node and a path cost over the VxLAN between each of the VxLAN gateways and a destination node. Further, the method can include determining an encapsulation overhead metric associated with the VxLAN and selecting one of the VxLAN gateways as an optimal VxLAN gateway. The selection can be based on the computed path costs over the FGL network and the VxLAN and the encapsulation overhead metric. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348167 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AN ALERT USING A NETWORK VIRTUALIZATION USING GENERIC ROUTING ENCAPSULATION (NVGRE) TUNNELING MECHANISM - A data packet comprising a header, the header having a format associated with a Network Virtualization Using Generic Routing Encapsulation (NVGRE) technology is generated at an originating tunnel end point device in a network. A predetermined bit in a reserved portion of the header is set to a predetermined value. In one embodiment, the reserved portion comprises a Reserved0 portion of the data packet. The data packet is then transmitted. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348168 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AN ALERT USING A VIRTUAL EXTENSIBLE LAN (VXLAN) TUNNELING MECHANISM - A data packet comprising a header, the header having a format associated with a Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) technology is generated at an originating tunnel end point device in a network. A predetermined bit in a reserved portion of the header is set to a predetermined value. The data packet is then transmitted. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348169 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING BROADCAST SERVICE, METHOD FOR RECEIVING THE BROADCASTING SERVICE, AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING THE BROADCASTING SERVICE - Provided is a method for receiving a broadcast service. The method includes: receiving a first packetized stream; extracting presentation time information from a header of the first packetized stream; extracting trigger information comprising a target service identifier and a trigger action from a payload of the first packetized stream; and performing the trigger action to an object corresponding to the target service identifier at a time indicated by presentation time information. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348170 | SCALABLE FORWARDING TABLE WITH OVERFLOW ADDRESS LEARNING - A node is configured to receive a packet from a host device, where the packet includes a source address associated with the host device; determine that the source address is not stored by the node; generate one or more logical distances, associated with one or more nodes, based on the source address and a respective address associated with each of the nodes; determine that another node is associated with a shortest logical distance, of the one or more logical distances; and transmit the source address to the other node based on the determination that the other node is associated with the shortest logical distance, where transmitting the source address allows the other node to store the source address or enables further nodes to obtain the source address from the other node. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348171 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONTROLLER, AND METHOD AND PROGRAM FOR CONTROLLING FORWARDING PATH OF PACKET FLOW - In a network device to be used for a packet handling, the network device includes a first unit to communicate with a controller according to a first protocol, and to receive a packet handling rule from the controller which is capable of sending the packet handling rule to a plurality of the network devices via a network between the controller and the network device. A second unit classifies, based on a classification rule for classifying a received packet, whether to handle the packet according to the packet handling rule sent from the controller or to handle the packet according to a table entry that the network device autonomously set based on a second protocol. A third unit requests the packet handling rule to the controller when the packet handling rule for forwarding the received packet is not set in the network device. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348172 | Communication System, Communication Device, Controller, and Method and Program for Controlling Forwarding Path of Packet Flow - In a network device to be used for a packet handling, the network device includes a first unit to communicate with a controller according to a first protocol, and to receive a packet handling rule from the controller which is capable of sending the packet handling rule to a plurality of the network devices via a network between the controller and the network device. A second unit to classifies, based on a classification rule for classifying a received packet, whether to handle the packet according to the packet handling rule sent from the controller or to handle the packet according to a table entry that the network device autonomously set based on a second protocol. A third unit requests the packet handling rule to the controller when the packet handling rule for forwarding the received packet is not set in the network device. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348173 | Scaling Number of Virtual Links in a Fiber Channel Forwarder Device - At a network device that forwards packets between compute devices and virtual storage area networks using Fiber Channel over Ethernet techniques, data is stored for a virtual fabric port of the network device identifying each of a plurality of virtual storage area networks. For each virtual storage area network, data is stored identifying each of a plurality of compute devices that are logged into the virtual storage area network via the network device. The network device forwards packets sent to the virtual fabric port of the network device from the plurality of compute devices to corresponding ones of the plurality of virtual storage area networks. | 11-27-2014 |
20140355607 | REVERSE PATH FORWARDING ROUTER SYSTEM - An apparatus configured to route packets over networks may be configured to determine whether a packet is valid prior to routing a received packet. The apparatus may receive the packet on one of a plurality of interfaces. The apparatus may identify the interface on which the packet is received and also a source of the packet. Additionally, the apparatus may access a bundle of acceptable interfaces on which a packet from the source may be received. The number of acceptable interfaces may be greater than a single interface, but less that all of the interfaces of the apparatus configured to receive packets from over the networks. If the interface on which the packet is received is an acceptable interface identified by the bundle, then the packet is valid and routed to a next location. Otherwise, the packet is determined to be invalid and dropped. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355608 | EXCLUDING A DATA FRAME FROM A LINK AGGREGATION GROUP - Examples disclose a computing device, method, and machine-readable storage medium to identify a destination address associated with a data frame upon ingress. Additionally, the computing device, method, and machine-readable storage medium exclude the data frame from a link aggregation group (LAG) based upon a determination to route the data frame to a port associated with the LAG. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355609 | ROUTING AGGREGATION AND PREFIX DELEGATION - One embodiment of the invention includes a method for prefix delegation to a customer premises equipment (CPE) device in a network system. The method includes receiving a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) request that is generated at the CPE device. The address request can include an interface identifier associated with a network topology of the CPE device. The method also includes delegating a prefix for the CPE device in response to the address request, the delegated prefix corresponding to a subnet assignment for the CPE device based on the interface identifier in the address request. The method further includes transmitting the prefix to the CPE device in a response packet, and setting a route aggregation scheme for data routed to the endpoint device based on the delegated prefix. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355610 | SWITCHED POWER LINE COMMUNICATION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for power line communication (PLC) are provided. The apparatus receives a first packet, selects a bus from a plurality of PLC buses, each PLC bus isolated from other buses of the plurality of buses, and forwards the first packet to a destination PLC modem connected to the selected bus. A method and system for switched power line communication (PLC) is also provided. The system provides power to a plurality of PLC buses via a main circuit breaker, receives a first signal for communicating to a PLC bus, selects a PLC bus from the plurality of buses based on the first signal, communicates a second signal to the selected PLC bus, the second signal based on the first signal, and filters the second signal communicated to the selected PLC bus to prevent the second signal from passing through the main circuit breaker. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355611 | Methods, Systems, and Computer Program Products for Routing Traffic Between Nodes in a Network that are Connected by Redundant Links - A communications network is operated by providing a plurality of redundant links between a first network node and a second network node. A first identifier is associated with a first one of the plurality of redundant links and a second identifier is associated with a second one of the plurality of redundant links. The first and second identifiers are associated with the regulatory constraint. Traffic that is marked with the first identifier is routed to the first one of the plurality of redundant links and traffic that is marked with the second identifier is routed to the second one of the plurality of redundant links so that operation of the communications network is in compliance with the regulatory constraint. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355612 | NETWORK SYSTEM AND ROUTING METHOD - A network system and a routing method are disclosed herein. The routing method includes receiving a route planning request corresponding to a packet flow; calculating a corresponding value according to the route planning request; comparing the corresponding value with a plurality of matching values stored in a storage space; and under a condition that the corresponding value matches a corresponding one of the matching values, acquiring an assigning path stored in the storage and routing the packet flow along the assigning path. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355613 | PACKET CAPTURE - Roughly described, a network interface device for connection between a host data processing device and a network, comprising: a controller for supporting communication with a host data processing device over a data bus interface; and a packet capture unit between the controller and the network and comprising: a packet inspector configured to parse incoming data packets to identify data packets of a first data flow; a duplication engine to generate a duplicate data flow from the first data flow; and a packet capture engine to process said duplicate data flow into a packet capture data stream having a predefined format. The network interface device is configured to cause: the first data flow to be made available to a consumer process of a host data processing device to which the network interface device is connected; and the processed packet capture data stream to be stored at a packet capture buffer. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355614 | DATA INTERACTION METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - A data interaction method is provided, which includes: sending simultaneously an address detection request for a UDP channel and an address detection request for a TCP channel; and when both address detection for the UDP channel and address detection for the TCP channel fail, sending an address detection request for an HTTP channel; when detection of at least one channel succeeds, collecting two types of addresses corresponding to each channel in the at least one channel; performing address exchange and address matching with a peer client host; and performing channel connectivity detection based on matched addresses, and selecting a channel with a highest priority from channels on which connectivity detection is successful for data interaction with the peer client host. Therefore, efficiency of traversing a NAT host during address detection is improved. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355615 | TRAFFIC FORWARDING - The present disclosure provides a method and an apparatus for traffic forwarding, wherein the method is applied to a control apparatus in a network, including: determining a switch apparatus having egress ports associated with N equal-cost paths simultaneously in the network, wherein N is equal to or greater than 2; informing the switch apparatus to create a traffic distribution group, and to add the egress ports on the switch apparatus associated with the N equal-cost paths to the traffic distribution group; and issuing, to the switch apparatus, a traffic table corresponding to the traffic distribution group, wherein the traffic table includes a destination address of the N equal-cost paths and the traffic distribution group used as an egress port through which the switch apparatus forwards traffic to the destination address. | 12-04-2014 |
20140362857 | Stacking Metadata Contexts for Service Chains - Presented herein are techniques useful in a network comprising a plurality of network nodes each configured to apply one or more service functions to traffic that passes through the respective network nodes. A network node receives packets encapsulated in a service header that includes information defining a variable set of context headers stacked into an association of metadata that is relevant to one or more service functions within a service path comprised of one or more network nodes. The network node interprets a forwarding state and a next-hop network node for the service path from the service header, and determines a service action or associated metadata from the set of context headers. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362858 | Efficient Management of Linked-Lists Traversed by Multiple Processes - A network device, such as a switch, implements enhanced linked-list processing features. The processing features facilitate packet manipulation actions performed, e.g., by hardware or software processes. Hardware processes may run for egress ports, for example, to traverse the linked-lists to apply the packet manipulation actions on packets before sending packets out of the ports. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362859 | SCALABLE AND SEGREGATED NETWORK VIRTUALIZATION - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch. The switch includes a virtual network module and a forwarding module. The virtual network module includes a global virtual local area network (VLAN) tag in a packet. The global VLAN tag is mapped to an edge VLAN tag in the packet and is associated with a datacenter domain. The datacenter domain indicates a set of ports associated with a datacenter. The forwarding module identifies an egress edge port for the packet based on the global VLAN tag. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362860 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTERCONNECTING MULTIPLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACES - A system and method for interconnecting multiple communication interfaces is provided. The system includes a router comprising a fabric controller. The fabric controller is operable to communicate with a plurality of ports, each port having an associated physical address. The plurality of physical addresses is divided into a plurality of non-overlapping address sets. The router is operable to communicate with two or more devices during the same time period, each device being attached to a different port in the plurality of ports. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362861 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR USE IN A SPACEWIRE-BASED NETWORK - An apparatus for use in a SpaceWire-based network is configured to send and receive data packets, and process data included in a received data packet. A header of the received data packet is stored in a buffer whilst the data is being processed, a processed data packet including the stored header and the processed data is generated, and the processed data packet is transmitted. The header of the received data packet may be modified, and the modified header attached to the processed data to generate the processed data packet. When the data packet is received via a first port, the processed data packet may be transmitted via the first port, or may be transmitted via a second port. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362862 | PACKET SWITCHING WITHOUT LOOK-UP TABLE FOR ETHERNET SWITCHES - In one embodiment, a system includes a switching processor and logic integrated with the switching processor, the logic being configured to receive a packet, wherein the packet comprises a header and a payload, determine, without using a look-up table, a destination port based on a destination address stored in the header, and send the packet to the destination port. In another embodiment, a system includes logic integrated with and/or executable by a processor, the logic being configured to create an address allocation table comprising a plurality of values, each value being associated with a plurality of IP addresses which, when an algorithm is applied thereto, result in the associated value, receive a request for an IP address from a device electrically connected to a switch, and determine a port to which the device is electrically connected to the switch based on the port on which the request is received. | 12-11-2014 |
20140369354 | SCALABILITY OF PROVIDING PACKET FLOW MANAGEMENT - Systems and methods for managing packet flows in a communication network are provided. Packet information can be cached on different levels and used to avoid external queries. The cache information can also be correlated with other types of information, such as location information, to be able to serve that information quicker than if one or more external queries were to be made. A demux manager can provide routing and session setup, by routing packets that already have a session to the session manager and assigning packets to a session manager if they are not already assigned to a session. The tiered architecture also provides scalability to many users and minimizes delays even during high call volumes because the load can be distributed well across the gateway's resources. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369355 | MULTIPLE GATEWAY DEVICE, MULTIPLEX LINE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MULTIPLE LINE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A multichannel gateway is provided such that a line manager detects the lines status and updates line information in a memory. A packet acquirer acquires a packet for transmission from a terminal, and a segmentation necessity determiner calculates a packet sizes (segment sizes) based on the line information so that if the packet is segmented and transmitted to each line, the transmission time will be the same. When the segmentation necessity determiner determines based on the segment sizes that segmentation of the packet is necessary, a packet divider segments the packet into the segments, attaches a header and generates transmission packets. A packet transmitter transmits the transmission packets by way of the corresponding lines to other terminals. A packet combiner removes the headers from the transmission packets received by a packet receiver and combines the packets in the received order. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369356 | OPPORTUNISTIC COMPRESSION OF ROUTING SEGMENT IDENTIFIER STACKS - A method and device are disclosed for opportunistic compression of routing segment identifiers. In one embodiment, the method includes participating in routing of a first data packet through a first node in a network, and subsequently entering into an arrangement with an adjacent node in the network. The first data packet includes a first plurality of routing segment identifiers, and additional data packets to be routed through the first node also include the first plurality of routing segment identifiers. The arrangement entered into includes representation of the first plurality of routing segment identifiers by a single compression identifier. The method further includes participating in routing of at least one of the additional data packets using the compression identifier instead of the first plurality of routing segment identifiers. In an embodiment, the device includes one or more network interfaces and a processor configured to perform the steps of the method. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369357 | SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL STACK OPTIMISATION - Apparatus comprising a Session Initiation Protocol agent arranged to send and receive Session Initiation Protocol messages to and from peer Session Initiation Protocol agents. The apparatus is configured, for a Session Initiation Protocol message to be sent, to translate one or more header fields of the message into an alternative format and to include the translated field(s) within or prefixed to the message, together with the untranslated field(s). | 12-18-2014 |
20140369358 | CONNECTIVITY PLATFORM - Disclosed are a connectivity platform that allows for proprietary connectivity modules to plug into the operating system and also allows the operating system users and various existing networking applications in the operating system that are authorized by those providers to use that connectivity via existing APIs without the need for the applications to change or for extra configuration of the application to be performed. In an example disclosed herein, the providers provide NAT or firewall traversal and implement the appropriate transport mechanism. This allows for applications and computing devices to communicate in environments where connectivity is prevented by intermediate systems. | 12-18-2014 |
20140376550 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UNIFORM GATEWAY ACCESS IN A VIRTUALIZED LAYER-2 NETWORK DOMAIN - The disclosure herein describes a system, which provides uniform access to a gateway in an extended virtualized layer-2 network. During operation, the system identifies a media access control (MAC) address, which is associated with a respective gateway in the extended virtualized layer-2 network, in a layer-2 header of a data frame. This MAC address is specific to the extended virtualized layer-2 network (e.g., for a different extended virtualized layer-2 network, a different MAC address is associated with a respective gateway). The system modifies the layer-2 header by swapping the MAC address with another MAC address, which uniquely identifies a gateway in the extended virtualized layer-2 network, in the layer-2 header and forwards the frame with the modified header to the gateway. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376551 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NULL VIRTUAL LOCAL AREA NETWORK IDENTIFICATION TRANSLATION - A method and apparatus are described including setting a default virtual local area network identification number of a switch to 0, receiving a data packet from a local area network interface, applying a virtual local area network header with identification number 0, if the data packet is untagged, determining if a virtual local area network identification number in a header of the data packet is a first predefined value, translating the virtual local area network identification number to a second predefined value in the header of the data packet if the virtual local area network identification number is equal to the first predefined value and forwarding the data packet to a local area network protocol stack network interface. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376552 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING PACKET IN BROADCASTING SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for transmitting and receiving packets in a broadcasting system are provided. The present disclosure allocates a padding size field by using padding octets, and thus can increase transmission efficiency. Also, the present disclosure does not restrict the number of padding octets while maintaining compatibility with existing disclosures, and thus can carry out as much padding as desired and as necessary. In addition, the present disclosure variably allocates the padding size field depending on the number P of padding octets, and thus can increase header efficiency. Furthermore, since the number of padded octets in a header is immediately known, the size of an actual payload is known in advance, and thus rapid transmission is possible. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376553 | FRAME SEARCH PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - A frame search processing apparatus includes a frame information extraction unit ( | 12-25-2014 |
20150009990 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR TRANSMITTING PACKETS THROUGH AGGREGATED END-TO-END CONNECTION - A method carried out by a first communications router for transmitting data packets to a second communications router by establishing an aggregated end-to-end connection with the second communications router. The aggregated end-to-end connection comprises a plurality of established end-to-end connections which are classified into a first group and at least one non-first group of established end-to-end connection(s). The first group of established end-to-end connection(s) satisfy all of one or more conditions and the at least one non-first group of established end-to-end connection(s) do not satisfy all of the one or more conditions. Data packets are transmitted through the first group of established end-to-end connection(s) and the at least one non-first group of established end-to-end connection(s), although, it is preferred to transmit data packets through the first group of established end-to-end connection(s). The present invention further comprises a method and system for determining whether each of the established end-to-end connections of an aggregated end-to-end connection belongs to a first group of established end-to-end connection(s) or at least one non-first group of established end-to-end connection(s) and determining whether data packets are first type data packets. The first type data packets are transmitted through the first group of established end-to-end connection(s). | 01-08-2015 |
20150009991 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR TRANSMITTING PACKETS THROUGH AGGREGATED END-TO-END CONNECTION - A method and a first communications router for transmitting data packets to a second communications router by establishing an aggregated end-to-end connection with the second communications router. The aggregated end-to-end connection comprises a plurality of established end-to-end connections. Data packets are transmitted through a first established end-to-end connection when a first condition is satisfied, and through a second established end-to-end connection when a second condition is satisfied. The first and second established end-to-end connections belong to the aggregated end-to-end connection. The first communications router comprises a plurality of network interfaces. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009992 | Communication Between Endpoints in Different VXLAN Networks - A method for bridging communication between a plurality of Virtual eXtensible Local Area Network (VXLAN) networks, wherein the method comprises joining the VXLAN networks, obtaining a forwarding entry table that associates a plurality of endpoints with a plurality of VXLAN tunnel endpoints (VTEPs) within the VXLAN networks, receiving a VXLAN encapsulated data packet from one of the VXLAN networks, and transmitting the VXLAN encapsulated data packet using the forwarding entry table to a different VXLAN network. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009993 | METHOD AND APPARATUS PROVIDING SINGLE-TIER ROUTING IN A SHORTEST PATH BRIDGING (SPB) NETWORK - A method, apparatus and computer program product for providing Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) and gateway Media Access Controller (MAC) distribution is presented. At least one subnet associated with a Layer 2 Virtual Switching Network (L2VSN) is provided on a network device. A message is propagated to a distributed Datapath. Network devices install the message as a routable MAC address on the L2VSN for the Layer 3 Virtual Switching Network/Virtual Routing and Forwarding (L3VSN/VRF) associated with the message. Edge devices route packets on the L2VSN addressed to the gateway MAC address. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009994 | METHOD AND APPARATUS PROVIDING SINGLE-TIER ROUTING IN A SHORTEST PATH BRIDGING (SPB) NETWORK - A method, apparatus and computer program product for providing Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) and gateway Media Access Controller (MAC) distribution is presented. At least one subnet associated with a Layer 2 Virtual Switching Network (L2VSN) is provided on a network device. A message is propagated to a distributed Datapath. Network devices install the message as a routable MAC address on the L2VSN for the Layer 3 Virtual Switching Network/Virtual Routing and Forwarding (L3VSN/VRF) associated with the message. Edge devices route packets on the L2VSN addressed to the gateway MAC address. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009995 | Encapsulating Data Packets Using an Adaptive Tunnelling Protocol - Some embodiments of the invention provide a novel method of tunneling data packets. The method establishes a tunnel between a first forwarding element and a second forwarding element. For each data packet directed to the second forwarding element from the first forwarding element, the method encapsulates the data packet with a header that includes a tunnel option. The method then sends the data packet from the first forwarding element to the second forwarding element through the established tunnel. In some embodiments, the data packet is encapsulated using a protocol that is adapted to change with different control plane implementations and the implementations' varying needs for metadata. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009996 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - An information processing system includes a host module and a plurality of function modules. The host module includes an interface selector, an interface information notification module, an interface information confirmer and a communication control information storage. The interface selector is configured to select one of the plurality of function modules. The interface information notification module is configured to notify interface information of the selected one function module to at least the one function module which the interface selector has selected. The interface information confirmer is configured to receive a first identifier of the selected one function module from the one function module which the interface selector has selected. The communication control information storage is configured to store the first identifier associated with the interface information. Each of the plurality of function modules includes an interface information obtainer and an interface information response module. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009997 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DATA DEMULTIPLEXING - The demultiplexing system receives packets of a message, identifies a sequence of message handlers for processing the message, identifies state information associated with the message for each message handler, and invokes the message handlers passing the message and the associated state information. The system identifies the message handlers based on the initial data type of the message and a target data type. The identified message handlers effect the conversion of the data to the target data type through various intermediate data types. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009998 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING DEVICE CONTEXT USING AN IP ADDRESS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a system configuration and an apparatus for preventing the infringement of user privacy, and for collecting and analyzing information regardless of the service feature and type, while a system providing a context aware service collects and analyzes user information. The present invention discloses a method of configuring and using a context analyzer and a device profile database in order for the system providing the context aware service to collect and analyze information regardless of the service feature and type. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009999 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION BETWEEN RELAY DEVICES - A relay device is arranged on a path of a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packet transmitted and received between a transmission-side end device and a reception-side end device. The relay device stores packet information obtained by snooping on a first TCP packet that is addressed to the reception-side end device and received from the transmission-side end device and on a second TCP packet that is addressed to the transmission-side end device and received from another relay device that is arranged between the relay device and the reception-side end device on the path. The relay device performs, based on the packet information, first communication control between the relay device and the another relay device, where the first communication control is independent of second communication control that is performed between the transmission-side end device and the reception-side end device. | 01-08-2015 |
20150010000 | Hybrid Packet Processing - Some embodiments provide a method of processing an incoming packet for a managed forwarding element that executes in a host to forward packets in a network. The method performs a lookup into a forwarding table to identify a flow entry matched by the incoming packet. The flow entry specifies a high-level action to perform on the incoming packet. The method provides packet data to a module executing separately from the managed forwarding element in the host. The module performs a set of processes in order to identify a set of low-level actions for the managed forwarding element to perform on the incoming packet without additional lookups into the forwarding table. The method receives data from the separate module specifying the set of low-level actions. The method performs the set of low-level actions on the incoming packet in order to further process the packet. | 01-08-2015 |
20150010001 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OVERLAY ROUTING WITH VXLAN - In general, embodiments of the invention relate to routing packets between hosts or virtual machines in different layer 2 domains. More specifically, embodiments of the invention relate to using overlay routing mechanisms in an Internet Protocol (IP) fabric to enable communication between hosts or virtual machines in different layer 2 domains to communication. The overlay routing mechanisms may include direct routing, indirect routing, naked routing, or a combination thereof (e.g., hybrid routing). | 01-08-2015 |
20150010002 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OVERLAY ROUTING WITH VXLAN ON BARE METAL SERVERS - In general, embodiments of the invention relate to routing packets between servers in different layer 2 domains. More specifically, embodiments of the invention relate to using overlay routing mechanisms in an Internet Protocol (IP) fabric to enable communication between servers in different layer 2 domains to communication. The overlay routing mechanisms may include direct routing, indirect routing, naked routing, or a combination thereof (e.g., hybrid routing). | 01-08-2015 |
20150010003 | ACCESSING IP NETWORK AND EDGE DEVICES - The present disclosure provides a method and an edge device for accessing an IP network. A record is pre-configured to associate and record a port number, a VLAN ID and an EVI service instance ID in the record. A first packet is received from a user side. A corresponding EVI service instance ID is searched in the record according to a port number of a port through which the first packet is received, and a VLAN ID of the first packet. The first packet is then forwarded in an EVI service instance corresponding to the EVI service instance ID. | 01-08-2015 |
20150010004 | Method and Apparatus For Binding Terminals - A method and apparatus for binding terminals are disclosed in the field of communication technologies. In the method: a server receives first information including at least one of first geographical location information, first time information and first address information of the first terminal. The server receives second information including at least one of second geographical location information, second time information, and second address information of the second terminal. The server binds the first terminal and the second terminal according to the first information and the second information. | 01-08-2015 |
20150010005 | BUS INTERFACE APPARATUS, ROUTER, AND BUS SYSTEM INCLUDING THEM - In the bus system, bus interface apparatuses and routers are connected together through packet exchange buses which have been established on the integrated circuit. The bus interface apparatuses are respectively connected to transmission nodes which transmit data of mutually different numbers of bits in one cycle of operation of the bus system. Each of the bus interface apparatuses generates and transmits a packet based on data received from the transmission node connected and header information including size information indicating the number of bits with respect to the transmission node connected. The router analyzes the packet, gets the size information from the header information, determines how to allocate a space in the buffer for storage by reference to the size information gotten, and stores the received packet in the buffer. | 01-08-2015 |
20150010006 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO SUPPORT DATA APPLICATIONS IN A MULTI-HOMING, MULTI-MODE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method includes receiving a data packet from a data interface and comparing an Internet Protocol (IP) address of the data interface to a destination IP address associated with the packet. Further, the method includes dropping the data packet when the IP address of the data interface does not match the destination IP address. | 01-08-2015 |
20150010007 | LAN MULTIPLEXING APPARATUS - The control device of a LAN multiplexing apparatus performs a process to encapsulate a MAC frame received from at least any one of the LAN and the wireless LAN with a packet header including a packet network address including at least a multiplexing identifier and a MAC address and to send the encapsulated packet to the packet network, and a process to send a MAC frame obtained by decapsulating a packet received from the packet network to at least any one of the LAN and the wireless LAN corresponding to a destination of the MAC frame. | 01-08-2015 |
20150016456 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF DYNAMIC NEXT-HOP ROUTING - A method implementing dynamic next-hop routing at a network device is disclosed. The network device contains a routing information base (RIB) and a forwarding information base (FIB). The method starts with receiving a request to create a dynamic next-hop type using a next-hop schema. The dynamic next-hop type is for a prefix associated with an application. The next-hop schema includes a set of functions and a set of fields associated with the set of functions. The dynamic next-hop type is created using the next-hop schema at the RIB, where the set of fields associated with the set of functions of the dynamic next-hop type is processed. The created dynamic next-hop type is then downloaded to the FIB, where the set of functions of the dynamic next-hop type is processed. Afterward, an identifier associated with the dynamic next-hop type for the prefix associated with the application is returned. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016457 | Pipelined Egress Packet Modifier - An egress packet modifier includes a script parser and a pipeline of processing stages. Rather than performing egress modifications using a processor that fetches and decodes and executes instructions in a classic processor fashion, and rather than storing a packet in memory and reading it out and modifying it and writing it back, the packet modifier pipeline processes the packet by passing parts of the packet through the pipeline. A processor identifies particular egress modifications to be performed by placing a script code at the beginning of the packet. The script parser then uses the code to identify a specific script of opcodes, where each opcode defines a modification. As a part passes through a stage, the stage can carry out the modification of such an opcode. As realized using current semiconductor fabrication process, the packet modifier can modify 200M packets/second at a sustained rate of up to 100 gigabits/second. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016458 | Script-Controlled Egress Packet Modifier - An egress packet modifier includes a script parser and a pipeline of processing stages. Rather than performing egress modifications using a processor that fetches and decodes and executes instructions in a classic processor fashion, and rather than storing a packet in memory and reading it out and modifying it and writing it back, the packet modifier pipeline processes the packet by passing parts of the packet through the pipeline. A processor identifies particular egress modifications to be performed by placing a script code at the beginning of the packet. The script parser then uses the code to identify a specific script of opcodes, where each opcode defines a modification. As a part passes through a stage, the stage can carry out the modification of such an opcode. As realized using current semiconductor fabrication process, the packet modifier can modify 200M packets/second at a sustained rate of up to 100 gigabits/second. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016459 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORWARDING PACKET IN IDENTIFIER/LOCATOR SEPARATION ENVIRONMENT - A method of a node forwarding a packet in an identifier/locator separation environment is provided. The packet forwarding method includes providing a routing table for storing information on domains, searching the routing table using an identifier (ID) of a domain to which a destination node belongs to obtain first information that is information on a next hop, storing the first information in a forwarding table together with an ID of the destination node, searching the forwarding table using the destination node ID to obtain second information that is information on a next hop, and forwarding the packet using the second information. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016460 | Using Headerspace Analysis to Identify Flow Entry Reachability - Some embodiments provide a method for using headerspace analysis. The method receives several flow entries for distribution to a forwarding element in a network. Each flow entry includes a set of conditions to be matched by a packet header and a set of actions to perform on a packet that matches the set of conditions. The method models each of the flow entries as a function that operates on a representation of a packet header. The method determines a set of packet headers of packets to be received by the forwarding element. The method determines a set of the flow entries that are not matched by a packet header of any packet to be received by the forwarding element by applying the functions to representations of the identified set of packet headers. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016461 | DUPLICATE MAC ADDRESS DETECTION - Systems and methods for differentiating between a duplicate MAC address situation and a multiple MAC address movement situation are provided. A node receives a new MAC address determines if it is a known or unknown MAC address by comparing it with a stored MAC address table. If it is a previously known MAC address, the node initiates a duplicate MAC address detection process to determine if at least one of the duplicate MAC addresses is no longer valid or is the result of a MAC mobility event. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016462 | TRAFFIC FORWARDING IN A LAYER 2 EDGE NETWORK - Methods and network devices are provided for forwarding a message in a layer 2 edge network that includes an access server device connected to sender and gateway devices. Forwarding information including destination IP address, destination MAC address, destination VLAN ID and destination device ID is established. A message is received by the access server device from the sender device. The message includes first destination MAC address, first destination IP address, first destination VLAN ID, and first destination device ID. When the first destination MAC address of a received message is a MAC address of the gateway device, the received message is forwarded according to the first destination MAC address, first destination VLAN ID and first destination device ID. Otherwise the message is modified and forwarded according to second destination MAC address, second destination VLAN ID, and second destination device ID determined to be associated with the first destination IP address. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016463 | MEDIA OVER IP PERFORMANCE ENHANCEMENT - A method of transmitting data traffic from a network node comprising the steps of identifying a plurality of data packets as being members of a data session adding a timestamp to the header or data payload of each packet within the session wherein the timestamp is an additional timestamp and transmitting the packets to their destination. | 01-15-2015 |
20150023348 | Cross-Layer Forwarding in a Low-Power and Lossy Network - In accordance with techniques presented herein, a packet is received at a forwarding device operating in a multi-service Low-power and Lossy Network (LLN). The forwarding device is configured to retrieve service requirements associated with the packet and obtain forwarding information from a plurality of networking layers associated with forwarding of the packet. The forwarding device is further configured to evaluate the service requirements in view of the forwarding information to dynamically adjust one or more parameters within the LLN for use in forwarding packets within the LLN. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023349 | PACKET DISCOVERY AND LEARNING FOR VLAN PROVISIONING - A method and system for performing VLAN provisioning using packet discovery and learning allows a network transport device to support existing VLAN configurations in a new network environment. When Ethernet frames having a VLAN tag are received from a client-side device, an association of the VLAN tag with the client port is recorded at the network transport device. Then, when an Ethernet frame including the VLAN tag is received from a network-side device, the Ethernet frame is directed to the client port associated with the VLAN tag. Additional security measures may restrict a learning period for recording VLAN tag associations. The network transport device may also flood client-side devices and/or network-side devices to associate respective client ports and/or network ports with a VLAN tag. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023350 | NETWORK CONNECTION VIA A PROXY DEVICE USING A GENERIC ACCESS POINT NAME - A system may receive, based on a generic access point name stored by a user device, a request to establish a network connection. The request may include a user device identifier that identifies the user device. The system may determine, based on the user device identifier, a specific access point name associated with the user device. The specific access point name may be different from the generic access point name. The system may determine, based on the specific access point name, information that identifies a gateway node for processing traffic associated with the user device. The system may cause the network connection to be established based on the user device identifier and the information that identifies the gateway node. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023351 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING LINK AGGREGATION - A network node or corresponding method of performing link aggregation reduces a number of Content Addressable Memory (CAM) entries required to make a forwarding decision for a given ingress flow, reducing cost, size, and power consumption of the CAM and accompanying static RAM. In one embodiment, an ingress flow is mapped to an egress flow identifier. Subsequently, the egress flow identifier is mapped to a member of an aggregated group associated with an egress interface based on information available in a given ingress flow. Finally, the given ingress flow is forwarded to the member of the aggregated group associated with the egress interface. A hashing technique or two lookups may be used alone or in combination in mapping the ingress flow to the egress flow identifier to reduce CAM memory usage. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023352 | IMPLEMENT EQUAL COST MULTIPLE PATH OF TRILL NETWORK - According to an example, a method for implementing ECMP in a TRILL network includes: forming a backup group with multiple primary Routing Bridges (RBs) interconnected in the TRILL network; configuring an IP address and a MAC address both associated with each virtual Gateway for each primary RB; configuring a same virtual RB identifier for each primary RB; advertising, by each primary RB, adjacency information about a neighbor RB identifier within the TRILL network; wherein the adjacency information about the neighbor RB identifier includes adjacency information about the virtual RB identifier; enabling a secondary RB accessing a host in the TRILL network to compute and obtain the ECMP information associated with the virtual RB identifier in the TRILL network, in which next hops in the ECMP information associating with the virtual RB identifier are the primary RBs in the backup group are in a one-to-one correspondence. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023353 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM - A communication system includes: a plurality of nodes each of which requests a processing rule for processing a received packet; and a control apparatus that determines in response the request a processing rule corresponding to the received packet and notifies the determined processing rule to at least one of the plurality of nodes. One of the plurality of nodes forwards to the control apparatus a first packet for acquiring a destination address for a predetermined communication. The control apparatus in response to determination of the destination address determines a processing rule for processing a second packet to be transmitted to the destination address and notifies the determined processing rule to at least one of the plurality of nodes. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023354 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ALLOCATING PACKET SWITCHING RESOURCE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and a device for allocating a packet switching resource, which includes: receiving, by a management plane unit, a service transport request carrying service information, where the service information includes source node information, sink node information, quality of service QoS requirement information, and bandwidth requirement information; determining, by the management plane unit, at least one transport path according to the service information and a preset resource allocation policy, and generating a routing table entry/forwarding table entry according to the at least one transport path; and sending, by the management plane unit, the routing table entry/forwarding table entry to data plane units of packet switching devices of each transport path of the at least one transport path. According to the embodiments, transparent and controllable allocation of a network bandwidth resource is implemented, so that utilization efficiency of a network resource is improved. | 01-22-2015 |
20150030024 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR A DATA CENTER ARCHITECTURE FACILITATING LAYER 2 OVER LAYER 3 COMMUNICATION - An information handling system is provided. The information handling system includes a plurality of core devices coupled to each other and to a plurality of distribution devices and a plurality of top-of-rack devices coupled to a plurality of servers and to the distribution devices. The plurality of servers are running hypervisors thereon that each manage a virtual switch and a plurality of virtual machines (VMs). The information handling system further includes a plurality of local network address resolution mediators, with each local network address resolution mediator running on one of the plurality of servers and receiving packets from VMs running thereon, and a global network address resolution mediator running on one of the plurality of core devices. The global network address resolution mediator is in communication with each of the plurality of local network address resolution mediators to collect and distribute packets from the plurality of VMs. | 01-29-2015 |
20150030025 | Management of Multiple Network Routes - Managing network communications between network hosts that have multiple physical network ports coupled to the network. A first host broadcasts address resolution requests from first physical network ports of the first host and receives responses to the address resolution requests from second physical network ports of a second host. The responses include respective connection bandwidths of the second physical network ports. The first host generates connectivity information describing a plurality of available communication routes in the network between first physical network ports of the first host and second physical network ports of the second host based on the responses, from which a subset of available communication routes can be selected for data transfer. | 01-29-2015 |
20150030026 | MPLS LSP Connectivity Test When the Initiator Address is Unknown - The present disclosure provides for carrying reachability information in an echo request message and/or an echo reply message, which can be used to reach an initiator when the initiator's address is unknown. An echo request message includes an FEC (forwarding equivalence class) stack that identifies a label switched path (LSP). The echo request message is received by a label switching routing element (LSR) on the LSP, and the echo request is originated by an initiator. In response to a detection that the FEC stack changes at the LSR, a segment reachability (SR) sub-TLV (type-length-value) element can be generated, where the SR sub-TLV includes reachability information that can be used to reach the initiator, and the reachability information includes an incoming label allocated by the LSR to reach the initiator. | 01-29-2015 |
20150030027 | Switch Device With Device-Specified Bridge Domains - A switch includes registers, a parser and port selection logic. The registers store an address in multiple locations. The address defines a bridge domain. Each bridge domain defines a set of switch ports. The parser identifies when a received frame includes a virtual local area network (VLAN) identifier. The parser uses the VLAN identifier to locate the address in the registers. The port selection logic is responsive to one of a first index from a first table that includes port identifiers and the bridge domain and a second index from a second table that includes VLAN identifiers. The switch is configured by defining an address scheme, inserting an address field in the first and second tables, and generating maps from the tables. The maps direct the port selection logic to direct received frames to desired port(s). | 01-29-2015 |
20150030028 | OBTAINING INFORMATION FROM DATA ITEMS - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for obtaining information from one or more headers of a data item transmitted via a communication network, a predetermined portion of at least one header carrying a symbol or combination of symbols having a first pre-defined meaning according to a first pre-defined communication protocol. The method comprises inspecting at least one header of a received data item whereby to identify the symbol or combination of symbols carried by the predetermined portion thereof; identifying whether at least one other portion of a header of the data item is carrying the same symbol or combination of symbols; and in the event that it is identified that at least one other portion of a header of the data item is carrying the same symbol or combination of symbols, ‘interpreting and/or processing at least one of the one or more headers according to a second pre-defined communication protocol, the second communication protocol differing from the first communication protocol. | 01-29-2015 |
20150030029 | Frame Passing Based on Ethertype - Example embodiments disclosed herein relate to passing or forwarding a frame. A frame is received from a first device. The frame includes a first header including a destination Media Access Control (MAC) address followed by a second header including a source MAC address followed by a third header including an Ethertype. The frame is passed or forwarded to a second device based on the Ethertype. | 01-29-2015 |
20150030030 | Network Adapter Based Zoning Enforcement - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to enforcing zoning at a network adapter of an end point device. Thus, a network adapter can monitor the communications that are sent and/or received by the adapter and discard communications that are prohibited based on the zoning rules applicable to the adapter. In some embodiments, zoning configuration information can be defined and stored at a central entity and sent to the various network adapters. Alternatively, or in addition, each network adapter can also check outgoing communications to ensure that they include a proper source address. More specifically, outgoing communications may be checked to ensure that their source address is the address (or one of the addresses) that are associated with the network adapter. This can be used to detect and/or prevent malfunctions and/or intentional tampering or hacking. | 01-29-2015 |
20150036687 | MAPPING SELECTIVE DSCP VALUES TO GTP-U - An apparatus and a method are provided by which a packet is received, a service identification in the packet is detected, it is decided based on the detected service identification whether a tunnel protocol extension header is to be generated or not, and, when the tunnel protocol extension header is to be generated, the tunnel protocol extension header is generated, the received packet is encapsulated with the generated tunnel protocol extension header and the encapsulated packet is forwarded. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036688 | PACKET RELAY DEVICE AND PACKET RELAY METHOD - A packet relay device has a packet receiving unit, a switch, a packet sending unit, an associative memory, and a packet search unit. The packet search unit has action registers which hold information specifying an action to be executed, holds address range information including consecutive address ranges of the associative memory and the action registers in association with each other, and registers a plurality of flow entries at a plurality of addresses in the same address range. The flow entries have conditions identifying the flows associated with the same action. The device inputs header information of the packets into the associative memory, determines the action to be executed in accordance with information read out from the action register corresponding to the address range including an address output from the associative memory, and executes the determined action. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036689 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, RECEIVING APPARATUS, AND CONTROLLING METHODS THEREOF - A transmitting apparatus is provided. The transmitting apparatus includes: a baseband packet (BBP) generator configured to generate a BBP including a header and payload data; a frame generator configured to generate a frame including the BBP; a signal processor configured to signal-process the generated frame; and a transmitter configured to transmit the signal-processed frame. The header includes information about a type of the payload data, whether an additional header exists, a length of the payload data, and a Least Significant Bit (LSB) of the length of the payload data. Therefore, various types of data are mapped on a physical layer based on information included in the header, and data processing efficiency is improved. | 02-05-2015 |
20150043581 | Intelligent Handling of Virtual Machine Mobility in Large Data Center Environments - At a physical device in a network configured to host a virtual switch and one or more virtual machines, a packet is received at the virtual switch from a source virtual machine that is directly attached to that virtual switch. A destination Media Access Control (MAC) address is identified from the packet indicating a destination virtual machine for the packet. In response to determining that the destination MAC address of the packet is not present in a database of MAC addresses accessible by the virtual switch, the destination MAC address of the packet is replaced with a shared MAC address associated with a plurality of physical switches in the network. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043582 | PACKET TRANSFER APPARATUS AND PACKET RELAY METHOD - It is provided a packet transfer apparatus comprising: a packet reception part; a packet transmission part; a packet generation part for generating an own-apparatus-originated packet serving as a packet for instructing a predetermined operation and outputting the own-apparatus-originated packet; a packet search part for determining a content of flow control and searching for an output circuit; a search memory for storing the content of the flow control and information for identifying the output circuit outputting the packet; and a packet transfer processing part. The packet reception part determines whether the received packet is the own-apparatus-originated packet; and outputs a self-origination flag indicating a result of the determining and header information of the received packet to the packet search part. The packet search part determines the content of the flow control for the received packet by referring to the search memory based on the self-origination flag and the header information. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043583 | Load Balancing and Session Persistence in Packet Networks - Methods and systems for performing load balancing and session persistence in IP (e.g., IPv6) networks are described herein. Some aspects relate to a destination options extension header that may be defined as a load balancing session persistence option (LBSPO) for storing a client identifier and a server identifier for each of a client and a server during a session. Packets sent between the client and the server may include the LBSPO with the client and server identifiers. A load balancer with a virtual IP address of a target application can perform session persistence and assign a destination server to a client based on a preexisting session between the server and the client, as determined by the LBSPO information. While a target VIP node may process data packets based on the LBSPO information, once established, the LBSPO information may remain unchanged for the duration of the session. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043584 | Converged Fabric for FCoE - Network devices, systems, and methods, including program instructions are disclosed which provide a converged fabric for Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE). A network device includes a Fiber Channel Controller (FCC), located outside of a lossless Ethernet network. The FCC has a processing resource coupled to a memory. The memory includes program instructions executed by the processing resource to terminate Fiber Channel (FC) Initialization Protocol (FIP) frames, generated to and by initiator and target devices, on the FCC. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043585 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND PROGRAM - A communication apparatus, comprises: a storage unit that stores a rule for identifying a packet and a process to be executed on a packet corresponding to the rule; a first unit that refers to a predetermined area in an incoming packet and searches the storage unit for a process corresponding to the incoming packet; and a second unit that determines a control apparatus to be queried for a process corresponding to the incoming packet from among a plurality of control apparatuses, based on the predetermined area. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043586 | Control Apparatus, Communication Apparatus, Communication System, Communication Method, and Program - A control apparatus connected to a communication apparatus(es) that processes received packets in accordance with control information includes a control information generation unit generating control information to be set in the communication apparatus(es) and a communication apparatus control unit setting the generated control information in the communication apparatus(es). This control apparatus sets proxy-response control information in the communication apparatus(es), the proxy-response control information defining a processing content(s) for causing the communication apparatus(es), when the communication apparatus(es) receives a certain packet, to generate a response packet for the certain packet and to transmit the response packet to a source of the certain packet. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043587 | Communication System, Communication Apparatus, Control Apparatus, Communication Apparatus Control Method and Program - A communication system includes: a plurality of communication apparatuses that process a received packet(s) based on externally-set communication control information; and a plurality of control apparatuses that set the communication control information in the plurality of communication apparatuses. At least one of the plurality of communication apparatuses includes a control information notification unit that notifies, when a first control apparatus that sets the communication control information in the at least one communication apparatus is replaced by a second control apparatus, the second control apparatus of the communication control information set in the at least one communication apparatus. The second control apparatus takes over control of the at least one communication apparatus by using the notified communication control information. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043588 | Communication System, Upper Layer Switch, Control Apparatus, Switch Control Method, and Program - A communication system includes: a core network including a lower layer switch that holds control information associating match condition(s) including lower layer header information, and processing content, and processes a received packet using control information having a match condition that matches the received packet; an upper layer switch, disposed at an edge of the core network, which rewrites a prescribed region of a header of a lower layer of a packet with content associated with communication content of an upper layer; and a control apparatus that instructs the upper layer switch to rewrite the header region of the lower layer, and also sets control information including, in a match condition, header information after the rewriting, in the lower layer switch. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043589 | Extending OpenFlow to Support Packet Encapsulation for Transport over Software-Defined Networks - A method for controlling a data flow in a domain of an OpenFlow protocol controlled software-defined network (SDN) comprising receiving a request from a network element for instructions to route the data flow through the OpenFlow SDN, determining a route for the data flow through the OpenFlow SDN, transmitting a unified header to the network element in the OpenFlow SDN, wherein the unified header facilitates transmission of data flows through the OpenFlow SDN that are encoded according to a plurality of network abstraction types, and transmitting instructions for forwarding the data flow along the route through the OpenFlow SDN, wherein the instructions for forwarding the data flow along the route through the OpenFlow SDN comprise one or more match fields, one or more mask values corresponding to the match fields, and one or more actions for the network element in the OpenFlow SDN to perform on the data flow. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043590 | GLOBAL IP-BASED SERVICE-ORIENTED NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - Data is transferred. A data packet associated with an application flow is received. A Pseudowire label is determined based at least in part on an application header associated with the data packet. The data packet is encapsulated with the Pseudowire label. The data packet is transferred over a Pseudowire using the Pseudowire label. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043591 | PACKET FORMAT OF NETWORK ABSTRACTION LAYER UNIT, AND ALGORITHM AND APPARATUS FOR VIDEO ENCODING AND DECODING USING THE FORMAT, QOS CONTROL ALGORITHM AND APPARATUS FOR IPV6 LABEL SWITCHING USING THE FORMAT - The construction method of NALU (Network Abstraction Layer Unit) for IPv6 label switching and its using algorithms of video encoding, QoS control, and decoding are provided. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the NALU format is composed of the NALH (Network Abstraction Layer Header) including the label and the NAL (Network Ab—straction Layer) payload. Here, the label is determined based on layer information which is combination of a spatial scalable level, a temporal scalable level, and a quality scalable level of the encoded data. The decoder uses the label to decide which one of multiple decoding modules is used to decode the current NAL payload. Moreover, the label can be included in the packet header so that the MANE (Media Aware Network Element) can use the label to decide whether to forward the packet or drop it. For example, the label in the packet header can be used for QoS control of video service by using the flow label field in IPv6 packet header. The IPv6 router can identify priority of the video packet by using the 20 bit long flow label, into which the label in NALH can be inserted. According to the embodiment, the MANE assumed in the MPEG and JVT (Joint Video Team) can be implemented effectively. | 02-12-2015 |
20150049763 | HANDLING HIGH THROUGHPUT AND LOW LATENCY NETWORK DATA PACKETS IN A TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT DEVICE - Handling network data packets classified as being high throughput and low latency with a network traffic management device is disclosed. Packets are received from a network and classified as high throughput or low latency based on packet characteristics or other factors. Low latency classified packets are generally processed immediately, such as upon receipt, while the low latency packet processing is strategically interrupted to enable processing coalesced high throughput classified packets in an optimized manner. The determination to cease processing low latency packets in favor of high throughput packets may be based on a number of factors, including whether a threshold number of high throughput classified packets are received or based on periodically polling a high throughput packet memory storage location. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049764 | Distributed Storage System, Control Apparatus, Client Terminal, Load Balancing Method and Program - A distributed storage system includes: a plurality of servers that store data that is associated with key information, respectively; a packet forwarding apparatus that, on receipt of a new packet that contains the key information and is addressed to one of the plurality of servers, requests a control apparatus to decide a forwarding destination from among the plurality of servers; and the control apparatus. The control apparatus includes: a forwarding destination selection section that decides a forwarding destination of the packet based on key information in a header part of the packet; and an entry setting section that sets, in a packet forwarding apparatus(es) on a path to the forwarding destination, a flow entry for forwarding a subsequent packet(s) with same key information to the forwarding destination. The packet forwarding apparatus(es) forwards a packet(s) with the same key information to the forwarding destination using the set flow entry. | 02-19-2015 |
20150055653 | UPDATING CONTACT INFORMATION FOR CLIENT DEVICES REGISTERED TO THE SAME USER FOR AN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM SERVICE - In an embodiment, a single registrar component of an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network, receives a request to register a client device associated with a user to an IMS service. The single registrar component sends an acknowledgment to the request that indicates an assignment of device-specific routing identifier(s) (e.g., GRUUs) for the client device. The acknowledgment is further configured to include an indication other device-specific routing identifier(s) for other client device(s) that have already registered to the IMS service in association with the same user. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055654 | Segmented Source Routing in a Network - A method implemented in a network controller configured to perform source routing, the method comprising receiving a request from a network node to determine a path for transporting a data packet from a source node to a destination node, determining the path to transport the data packet from the source node to the destination node, partitioning a description of the path into a plurality of route segments, and distributing the route segments to one or more network nodes to append routing information to the data packet, wherein the network nodes route the data packet using the appended routing information and without using a forwarding table, and wherein each of the route segments describes a portion of the path. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055655 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FORWARDING OF A PACKET - A method is provided in one example and includes receiving, at a head switch, a packet that comprises information indicative of a destination media access control address and a destination domain address, determining that the destination media access control address fails to correlate with at least one stored media access control address comprised by a content addressable memory table, determining a different head switch media access control address based, at least in part, on the destination domain address, generating an encapsulated packet that comprises at least one encapsulation portion and at least one packet portion, the packet portion corresponding to the packet, such that the encapsulation portion of the encapsulated packet designates the different head switch media access control address, and forwarding the encapsulated packet based, at least in part, on the different head switch media access control address. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055656 | NETWORK APPLIANCE REDUNDANCY SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS, NETWORK APPLIANCE REDUNDANCY METHOD AND PROGRAM - A network appliance redundancy system includes: a first switch arranged upstream of two different models of network appliances each of which switchably operates in an active system and a standby system; a second switch arranged downstream of the two different models of network appliances; and a control apparatus comprising a translation rule management unit learning a header translation rule(s) of a network appliance operating in the active system on the basis of header information of a packet transmitted from the first switch and header information of a packet received by the second switch via the network appliance operating in the active system and instructing, when the appliances in the active and standby systems are switched, the second switch to rewrite header information on the basis of the header translation rule(s) so as to obtain the same output packet as that from the network appliance operating in the active system. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055657 | APPLICATION BASED PACKET FORWARDING - Methods, systems, and apparatus, including computer program products, featuring receiving at a network device a plurality of packets associated with a flow, one or more of the plurality of packets having associated header data and content. Based on the content of one or more first packets in the plurality of packets, the network device identifies an application associated with the flow, where none of the first packets is addressed to the network device. For one or more second packets associated with the flow, the network device determines a forwarding destination for the second packets based on the application associated with the flow and forwards the packet according to the determined forwarding destination. | 02-26-2015 |
20150063351 | INTER-DOMAIN NETWORK TENANT IDENTIFIER - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a packet at a tunnel end point in a multi-tenant network, the packet comprising a destination, performing a lookup for the destination in a database comprising a mapping of global identifiers to local tenant identifiers for different hosting locations, each of the global identifiers uniquely identifying a tenant across all of the hosting locations, identifying a destination tunnel end point and a local tenant identifier for the destination, and inserting the destination tunnel end point and the local tenant identifier into the packet and forwarding the packet. An apparatus and logic are also disclosed herein. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063352 | WIRELESS NETWORKING WITH FLEXIBLY-ORDERED RELAYERS - The broadcast nature of wireless communication may be utilized by transmitting a packet frame identifying at least one relay node that can transmit the packet frame without transmitting an acknowledgement frame confirming receipt of the packet frame by a respective relay node. A relay node may cancel a relay obligation to transmit a packet frame based on detecting transmission of the packet frame by another node or based on detection of an acknowledgement frame confirming that a destination node received the packet frame. A transmission chain corresponding to the transmission of a packet frame may be assigned a priority. Alternatively or in addition, a relay node within a transmission chain may be assigned a priority. A priority may determine the amount of delay inserted prior to transmitting a packet frame. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063353 | IMPLEMENTATION OF VIRTUAL EXTENSIBLE LOCAL AREA NETWORK (VXLAN) IN TOP-OF-RACK SWITCHES IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method for implementation of virtual extensible local area network (VXLAN) in top-of-rack (ToR) switches in a network environment is provided and includes receiving a packet encapsulated with a VXLAN header having an unknown virtual tunnel endpoint (VTEP) Internet Protocol (IP) address in a network environment, and installing an entry at an index location of a forwarding table. The index location includes an encoding of the VTEP-IP address as a VTEP index (VTEP-IDX), and the entry maps a VXLAN interface to an IP address associated with a VXLAN network interface (VNI). In specific embodiments, the VTEP-IDX is logN bits, where N is a size of the forwarding table. The forwarding table indicates a destination VTEP IP address when encapsulating the packet, and the source VTEP IP address when decapsulating the packet. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063354 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system, includes: a node that requests a processing rule for processing a packet; and a control apparatus that notifies the node of the processing rule in response to the request. The control apparatus, upon being notified of change of a connection relationship between a communication apparatus to which a packet is addressed and the node, determines a forwarding path for a packet addressed to the communication apparatus and notifies the node of a processing rule for realizing the forwarding path. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063355 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING DATA SERVICE ADDRESSING IN AN ENGINEERED SYSTEM FOR MIDDLEWARE AND APPLICATION EXECUTION - A system and method can support data service address resolution in a network environment. An intermediate node can receive an incoming data packet from a source node, wherein the incoming data packet targets a destination node, and wherein the incoming data packet includes a global identifier for the destination node and a local identifier for the intermediate node. Furthermore, the intermediate node can obtain local addressing information for the destination node based on the global identifier for the destination node. Then, the intermediate node can send an outgoing data packet to the destination node based on the obtained local addressing information for the destination node. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063356 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HOST CHANNEL ADAPTER (HCA) FILTERING IN AN ENGINEERED SYSTEM FOR MIDDLEWARE AND APPLICATION EXECUTION - A system and method can provide a data service in a network environment. The network environment can include a node, which supports a data service component that can provide a data service. Additionally, a filter can be provided on a networking device, such as a host channel adaptor (HCA) that is associated with the node. The networking device operates to use the filter to identify one or more packets targeting the data service component without protocol termination. Furthermore, the filter can forward said one or more packets to the data service component. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063357 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, RECEIVING APPARATUS, AND SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF - A transmitting apparatus, a receiving apparatus and methods of controlling these apparatuses are provided. The transmitting apparatus includes: a baseband packet generator configured to, based on an input stream including a first type stream and a second type stream, generate a baseband packet including a header and payload data corresponding to the first type stream; a frame generator configured to generate a frame including the baseband packet; a signal processor configured to perform signal-processing on the generated frame; and a transmitter configured to transmit the signal-processed frame, wherein the header includes a type of the payload data in the baseband packet and the number of the first type stream packets in the baseband packet. | 03-05-2015 |
20150071284 | APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING ENCODED VIDEO STREAM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING THE SAME - Discussed is an apparatus for transmitting an encoded video stream, comprising: a slice generating unit that divides a frame, comprised in a video stream, into at least one or more slice; and a transmitting unit transmitting the slice in units of a packet within a slice deadline, which is a time limit required for transmission of the slice, the transmitting unit that preferentially transmits a header packet that contain a slice header information over other packets, and the slice header that comprises of information necessary for reconstructing the slice, wherein the transmitting unit comprises: a packet transmitter that retransmits the packet when the packet fails to be transmitted within the predetermined retry limit; and a header protector performing control for the header packet to be repeatedly transmitted within the slice deadline even when number of retransmissions of the header packet exceeds the predetermined retry limit. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071285 | DISTRIBUTED SERVICE CHAINING IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method for distributed service chaining in a network environment is provided and includes receiving a packet belonging to a service chain in a distributed virtual switch (DVS) network environment, wherein the packet includes a network service header (NSH) indicating a service path identifier identifying the service chain and a location of the packet on the service chain, evaluating a service forwarding table to determine a next service node based on the service path identifier and the location, with a plurality of different forwarding tables distributed across the DVS at a corresponding plurality of virtual Ethernet Modules (VEMs) associated with respective service nodes in the service chain, and forwarding the packet to the next service node, with substantially all services in the service chain provided sequentially to the packet in a single service loop on a service overlay. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071286 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UTILIZATION OF A SEGMENTATION IDENTIFICATION TO SUPPORT TRANSMISSION OF DATA TO A DESTINATION NODE - A method is provided in one example and includes receiving, at a receiving node, a packet that comprises information indicative of an internet protocol address and a segmentation identification, selecting a virtual routing and forwarding table corresponding with the segmentation identification, identifying a destination node based, at least in part, on the internet protocol address and the virtual routing and forwarding table, and transmitting the packet to the destination node. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071287 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUS FOR THE INTERCONNECTION OF FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET DEVICES USING A FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET INTERCONNECTION APPARATUS CONTROLLER - Methods, apparatus and systems are provided for forwarding Fibre Channel Initialization Protocol (FIP) and Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) frames by a FCoE device interconnection apparatus (FIA) and a Fibre Channel over Ethernet device interconnection apparatus controller (FIAC). In one aspect of the invention, a command is sent from a FIAC to the FIA to set the frame processing apparatus to identify received FIP frames, which are forwarded with the original destination and source Ethernet Media Access Control (MAC) addresses. A command is sent from the FIAC to the FIA to identify received FCoE frames to replace the source and destination Ethernet MAC addresses. When a FCoE frame is received by the FIA, the source and destination Ethernet MAC addresses are replaced, such as where the destination Ethernet MAC address of the received matched FCoE frame is replaced by the MAC address assigned to the desired end port. The FCoE frame is forwarded to a destination FCoE device. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071288 | Inter Domain Link for Fibre Channel - A method includes establishing a communication link between a first Fibre Channel Forwarder (FCF) and a Fibre Channel (FC) fabric. The first FCF provides a first domain. The method includes establishing a communication link between a second FCF and the FC fabric. The second FCF provides a second domain. The method includes establishing a first intra-domain link between the first FCF and a first device. The first device including one of a Fibre channel over Ethernet Data Forwarder (FDF) and a Fibre Channel Data Forwarder (FCDF). The method includes establishing an inter domain link between the first device and the second domain. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071289 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADDRESS RESOLUTION - In an address resolution system in a centralized network control environment including a plurality of software defined network (SDN) switches, an address resolution protocol (ARP) controller checks whether an ARP table has a MAC address corresponding to the destination IP address of an ARP request packet when the ARP request packet is received from a source host. An SDN controller determines whether to broadcast the ARP request packet according to the existence of the MAC address corresponding to the destination IP address in the ARP table. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071290 | DATA ROUTING ACCELERATION - Systems, devices and methods for improving network performance are disclosed. In particular, in one embodiment, a method of processing data packets in an electronic network is provided. The method includes receiving data packets at a receive stack of an electronic network device and creating a first packet from at least a portion of each of the set of data packets. The first packet includes an indicator that the first packet is a first packet type. Additionally, the method includes passing the first packet to one of a bridge and IP layer of the receive stack. A first packet inhibitor at the one of the bridge and IP layer is bypassed upon recognizing the first packet as a first packet type. The first packet is routed to a transmit stack of the electronic network device from the one of the bridge and IP layer. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071291 | MESSAGE HANDLING IN AN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A method and apparatus for handling a Session Initiation Protocol communication in an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network. A Proxy Call Session Control Function receives a Session Initiation Protocol message sent from a trusted remote network. The P-CSCF adds to the message a further header, which identifies a Public User Identity of a trusted entity located in the remote network served by a Serving Call Session Control Function in the IMS network. The message is then sent to the S-CSCF. The S-CSCF, and any other node that the message is sent to, knows from the presence of the further header to use the Public User Identity of the trusted entity to determine the served user rather than the P-Asserted Identity contained in the SIP message. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071292 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING PACKETS IN A NETWORK DEVICE - Systems are presented for processing packets in a network switch. One network device includes a processor, an Ethernet switch, a PCIe switch, and a packet processor. The processor is for executing a controller program, and the Ethernet switch is for switching packets among a ports. Further, the PCIe switch is coupled to the processor and the Ethernet switch, and the packet processor, coupled to the Ethernet switch and the PCIe switch, is operable to modify an application header of an incoming packet and send the incoming packet to one of the ports. The controller program is operable to configure the Ethernet switch and the packet processor to define processing of packets. The controller program is operable to send a first configuration rule to the Ethernet switch, the first configuration rule defining that packets of a network flow requiring header modification be forwarded to the packet processor. | 03-12-2015 |
20150078381 | PACKET NETWORK ROUTING - A line card for use in a router or packet switch is disclosed. A problem with conventional routers or packet switches is that they can take over a second to fully react to a network state update from another router or packet switch. Such network state packets are used in dynamic routing protocols intended to route packets around a failed or overloaded router. In operating in according with dynamic routing protocols, conventional routers or packet switches react to such network state packets by updating the routing tables used by the line cards to send packets, or data extracted from packets, to the egress port (often on a different line card in the router or network switch) appropriate for the destination address found in the packet. Any packets which arrive between the network state packet's arrival and the completion of the ensuing routing table update on the line cards, can be misrouted—which can cause them to be delayed or dropped by the network. The described embodiments address this problem by operating the line card to react to a network state update packet by miming a restricted routing algorithm to provide interim routes whilst a conventional comprehensive routing algorithm runs in parallel to provide a comprehensive set of routes. In this way, a faster, if less thorough, reaction to the arrival of a network state update packet is provided, which reduces the risk of packets being misrouted whilst the network converges. The technique has application to any packet networks, but is especially useful in Internet Protocol packet networks or Multi-Protocol Label Switching networks. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078382 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM STORING COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A node address table (NAT) stores therein a MAC address and a node ID (NID) representing the position of a node in a rack in association with each other for each node, and retrieves NIDs of a destination and its own node based on a destination of a packet and the MAC address of the own node. A destination determination unit determines a routing destination of the packet based on the NIDs of the destination and the own node. A routing unit routes the packet to the routing destination determined by the destination determination unit. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078383 | High Payload Data Packet Transmission System and Relay to Lower Latency - The invention provides a method of forming s custom data packet for a point-to-point trunk network, the method comprising the steps of providing a First-In First-Out (FIFO) register to capture data packets transmitted via a packet-switched computer network at speeds equal to or greater than 1 Gbps, the packet switched data packets having a packet switched header and a packet switched frame check sequence (FCS), providing selectors connected to the FIFO outputs, each selector receiving a packet-switched data packet and stripping out the packet-switched header and replacing if with a mini-header and filling each stripped data packet with 1 to 1,500 bytes of customer data to transform each data packet to a high payload data packet, replacing the packet-switched FCS with a mini-FCS. Sending each high payload data packet across the point-to-point trunk network having a reduced latency of less-than 1 microsecond for roundtrip transmission and recreating the standard packet-switched data packet based on the mini-header and mini-FCS. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078384 | Tracking Prefixes of Values Associated with Different Rules to Generate Flows - Some embodiments provide a method for a forwarding element that forwards packets. The method receives a packet and consults a tree structure to identity a prefix length associated with an IP address in the packet header. The method skips lookup of each subtable with a set of IP addresses that have a different prefix length than the identified prefix length. The method identifies a matching rule from a particular subtable. The method generates a flow based on the matching rule. The flow is used to process packets that have the same prefix. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078385 | Generating Flows Using Common Match Techniques - Some embodiments provide a method for a forwarding element that forwards packets. The method receives a packet and performs a hash lookup operation on one or more hash tables to find a matching rule for a packet. The method consults a common match data set to generate a wildcard mask. The method generates a flow based on the matching rule and the wildcard mask. The flow is used to process other packets that match each bit which is un-wildcarded. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078386 | Performing a Multi-Stage Lookup to Classify Packets - Some embodiments provide a method for a forwarding element that forwards packets. The method receives a packet. The method performs a first stage lookup of a hash table for a first hash of a first set of header fields and un-wildcards bits of a wildcard mask that corresponds to the first set of header fields. If a matching hash is found in the first stage lookup, the method performs a second stage lookup of the hash table for a second hash of a second set of header fields and un-wildcards bits of the wildcard mask that corresponds to the second set of header fields. The method identifies a matching rule for the packet. The method generates a flow based on the matching rule and the wildcard mask, wherein the flow is used to process each other packets that match each bit which is un-wildcarded. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078387 | Asymmetric Network Address Encapsulation - A network component comprising a receiver configured to receive an outgoing frame from a local host, a logic circuit configured to map a destination address (DA) for a target host in the outgoing frame to a DA for a target location of the target host and encapsulate the outgoing frame using the DA for the target location, and a transmitter configured to receive a pre-encapsulated outgoing frame from a local switch, and send the pre-encapsulated outgoing frame to a gateway at a target location, wherein the transmitter does not encapsulate frames received from local switches and decapsulates an incoming frame from a remote gateway destined towards local hosts. | 03-19-2015 |
20150085863 | EFFICIENT MEMORY BANDWIDTH UTILIZATION IN A NETWORK DEVICE - A system for efficient memory bandwidth utilization may include a depacketizer, a packetizer, and a processor core. The depacketizer may generate header information items from received packets, where the header information items include sufficient information for the processor core to process the packets without accessing the payloads from off-chip memory. The depacketizer may accumulate multiple payloads and may write the multiple payloads to the off-chip memory in a single memory transaction when a threshold amount of the payloads have been accumulated. The processor core may receive the header information items and may generate a single descriptor for accessing multiple payloads corresponding to the header information items from the off-chip memory. The packetizer may generate a header for each payload based at least on on-chip information and without accessing off-chip memory. Thus, the subject system provides efficient memory bandwidth utilization, e.g. at least by reducing the number of off-chip memory accesses. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085864 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA - A method is described for transmitting data between participants of a serial, ring-shaped communications arrangement in which the participants are serially connected to one another, wherein a data packet is passed from a participant provided as a master to further participants provided as slaves, wherein the data packet is passed from slave to slave, and wherein address information of the data packet is altered by each slave. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085865 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMICALLY ALLOCATING SERVICES FOR SUBSCRIBERS DATA TRAFFIC - Access services are dynamically allocated for processing received data traffic by creating routing information for data traffic associated with a particular subscriber, subscriber equipment and/or network address information. The routing information identifies services that the data traffic can be subjected to and the order in which the services are provided. When an attached request is received, appropriate services for the requesting subscriber are retrieved from a database based on particular identifying information which may include the identification of the subscriber, subscriber equipment, network address or other information. The services are organized in a routing path and the allocated network address and the routing path are transferred to a smart router. Data traffic, associated with the allocated network address is then routed through servers to provide the identified services. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085866 | Service Process Control Method and Network Device - A service process control method and a network device. The method includes: selecting, according to an execution policy of at least one service deployed on a network device, M data processing modules for processing a packet received by the network device, and determining a processing sequence for the selected M data processing modules to process the packet; and invoking the selected M data processing modules to sequentially process, according to the processing sequence, the packet. In the foregoing technical solutions of embodiments of the present invention, an execution sequence for a data processing module to process the packet is dynamically generated according to a policy set corresponding to the service, thereby reducing an unnecessary processing process and redundant information collection in a service execution procedure, improving service processing flexibility, and enhancing overall performance of the device. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085867 | Distributed Fibre Channel Forwarder - A distributed Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Forwarder (FCF) and a distributed Fibre Channel Switch are described. The Distributed FCF is realized by instantiating respective connections between at least one Controlling FCF and a plurality of FCoE Data-Plane Forwarder (FDF) devices and between individual FDF devices. The Distributed FC Switch is realized by instantiating respective connections between at least one Controlling Switch and a plurality of FC Data-Plane Forwarder (FCDF) devices and between individual FCDF devices. | 03-26-2015 |
20150092776 | Virtual LDP Session - A receiving node receives a virtual LDP initialization (vInit) message from a first node, where the vInit message comprises a request to establish a vLDP session between a requesting node and a target node. If the receiving node does not own a destination address of the vInit message, the receiving node is determined to be a relay node. The relay node inserts a relay label into the vInit message, where the relay label is an outgoing label that the relay node uses to reach the first node, and forwards the vInit message toward the destination address. If the receiving node owns the destination address, the receiving node is determined to be the target node, which extracts a stack of relay labels from the vInit message. The relay labels are used to define a return path to the requesting node for messages transmitted over the vLDP session. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092777 | INTEGRATED CIRCUIT, CODE GENERATING METHOD, AND DATA EXCHANGE METHOD - An integrated circuit, a code generating method, and a data exchange method are described. The integrated circuit includes a plurality of field effect transistors, a plurality of sense-amplifiers, and a processing circuit. Each field effect transistor is configured to represent an address in a mapping table and includes a source, a drain, a channel and a gate. Each sense-amplifier is connected to the drain and configured to sense an electric current from the drain and identify a threshold voltage of the corresponding field effect transistor. The processing circuit is configured to categorize each of the threshold voltages identified by the corresponding sense-amplifiers into a first state and a second state and mark the state of each of the threshold voltages at the corresponding address in the mapping table. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092778 | Tracking Prefixes of Values Associated with Different Rules to Generate Flows - Some embodiments provide a method for a forwarding element that forwards packets. The method receives a packet. The method consults a tree structure to generate a wildcard mask. The consulting includes traversing the tree structure by tracing a set of bits from the packet header and un-wildcarding the corresponding set of bits from the wildcard mask. The method identifies a matching rule for the packet. The method generates a flow based on the matching rule and the wildcard mask. The flow is used to process each other packet that matches each un-wildcarded bit of the flow. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092779 | SENDING PACKETS WITH EXPANDED HEADERS - In one embodiment, the present invention is directed to method for receiving a packet in a first agent, where the packet includes a first packet header with an expanded header indicator. Based on this indicator, the agent can determine if the packet includes one or more additional packet headers. If so, the agent can next determining if it supports information in the additional packet header based on a header identifier of the additional header. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092780 | Label Distribution Method and Device - Embodiments of the present invention provide a label distribution method and device. A first routing device sends a first BGP update message including a first VPN instance identifier and a first RT to a second routing device. The first routing device receives a second BGP update message including a second VPN instance identifier and a second RT. The first routing device allocates a first VPN instance label to a second VPN instance after the second routing device determines that the first RT is equal to the second RT. The first routing device sends a third BGP update message including the first VPN instance label to the second routing device. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092781 | Systems and Methods for Optimized Route Caching - A method for optimized route caching includes comparing a destination address of a network packet to a first set of prefixes in a routing cache, and comparing the destination address to a second set of prefixes in a full routing table when a longest matching prefix for the destination address is not found in the routing cache. The method further includes copying the longest matching prefix and a set of sub-prefixes of the longest matching prefix from the full routing table to the routing cache, and forwarding the network packet. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092782 | METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTING TRANSMISSION PATH INFORMATION AND ROUTING BRIDGES - A method for distributing transmission path information, including: distributing, by a first routing bridge which stores a MAC address of a host on a local link, transmission path information of the host on the local link to a remote routing bridge of a non-local link, the transmission path information including the MAC address of the host on the local link and identification information of a second routing bridge, so that the remote routing bridge learns the transmission path information from the first routing bridge. The present application further provides corresponding routing bridges. The present application may enable the remote routing bridge to timely learn the transmission path information of the host under the condition that a data packet sent by the host is not received, so as to send data to the host according to a new transmission path. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092783 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING TUNNELS BETWEEN NODES IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Tunnels are established between nodes along a packet transfer route in a communication network so that a packet is transferred from a first relay node to a second relay node via one or more intermediate relay nodes using the established tunnels. An intermediate relay node receives, from an adjacent downstream relay node, a reply message storing relay-node addresses identifying the downstream relay node and at least one intermediate relay node between the downstream relay node and the first relay node. The intermediate relay node establishes a tunnel to the downstream relay node in association with the relay-node address of the downstream relay node, updates the reply message by removing the relay-node address of the down stream relay node from the reply message, and transfers the updated reply message to an adjacent upstream relay node along the packet transfer route. | 04-02-2015 |
20150098469 | TCP SEGMENTATION OFFLOAD IN A SERVER ON A CHIP - A system and method are provided for performing transmission control protocol segmentation on a server on a chip using coprocessors on the server chip. A system processor manages the TCP/IP stack and prepares a large (64 KB) single chunk of data to be sent out via a network interface on the server on a chip. The system software processes this and calls the interface device driver to send the packet out. The device driver, instead of sending the packet out directly on the interface, calls a coprocessor interface and delivers some metadata about the chunk of data to the interface. The coprocessor segments the chunk of data into a maximum transmission unit size associated with the network interface and increments a sequential number field in the header information of each packet before sending the segments to the network interface. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098470 | HIERARCHICAL HASHING FOR LONGEST PREFIX MATCHING - A system for hierarchical hashing for longest prefix matching may include a memory and a processor. The memory may be configured to store hash tables that include prefixes and associated next hop information, where the hash tables are associated with lengths of the prefixes and at least one of the hash tables is associated with a range of lengths of the prefixes. The processor may be configured to determine a destination address associated with a packet received over a first port, determine next hop information associated with a longest prefix that matches the destination address by searching at least a first hash table of the hash tables that stores a largest number of the prefixes relative to the hash tables, and prepare the packet for transmission over a second port that is determined based at least on the next hop information. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098471 | Methods and Systems for Enabling NAT Traversal - A method for facilitating traversal of NATs includes a network node communicatively connected to a terminal in a local network that includes a NAT of a particular NAT type providing to a server a request for NAT-related information for NATs of that NAT type in a manner that enables the server to identify the NAT type. The method further includes the network node receiving from the server the NAT-related information for the NATs of that particular NAT type and providing the received information to the terminal, thus enabling the terminal to traverse it's NAT. In this manner, NAT-related information obtained by testing a NAT of a specific NAT type may be re-used for other NATs of the same type, irrespective of the local network in which those NATs are used, and the network node may serve as a proxy for the server for providing NAT-related information to terminals. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098472 | Routing Packet From Edge Device to Home Network or From Home Network to Remote Access Network - A packet originating from, or destined for, a client device is routed according to a routing policy which redirects the packet to a home network of the client device, or to a remote access network on which the client device is present, by obtaining a route and constructing a multi-layer tunnel header, each layer of the multi-layer tunnel header corresponding to a respective node on the route. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098473 | Data Center Switch - A method of transferring data in a network is provided. Data is received at a sub-switch of a first bundled switch having a plurality of sub-switches, the sub-switch being configured to only couple to connections external to the first bundled switch. The method also includes transferring the data from the first bundled switch using a multi-lane cable coupled to a second bundled switch, a first end of the multi-lane cable coupled to a sub-switch in the first bundled switch and a second end of the multi-lane cable coupled to at least two sub-switches in the second bundled switch. | 04-09-2015 |
20150103825 | DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK FOR AN AIRCRAFT - A method of providing current operation data for a plurality of data generating components connected to a data communications network. The network may include input units that generate data and subscribing units that require the generated data to function. The generated data may be formatted or processed in a manner so that it can be used by the subscribing units. The formatted and processed data may then be supplied to the subscribing units. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103826 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING A MULTI-PROTOCOL FABRIC MODULE ACROSS A DISTRIBUTED SERVER INTERCONNECT FABRIC - A multi-protocol personality module enabling load/store from remote memory, remote Direct Memory Access (DMA) transactions, and remote interrupts, which permits enhanced performance, power utilization and functionality. In one form, the module is used as a node in a network fabric and adds a routing header to packets entering the fabric, maintains the routing header for efficient node-to-node transport, and strips the header when the packet leaves the fabric. In particular, a remote bus personality component is described. Several use cases of the Remote Bus Fabric Personality Module are disclosed: 1) memory sharing across a fabric connected set of servers; 2) the ability to access physically remote Input Output (I/O) devices across this fabric of connected servers; and 3) the sharing of such physically remote I/O devices, such as storage peripherals, by multiple fabric connected servers. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103827 | Configurable Service Proxy Mapping - Presented herein are techniques in which a service proxy in a service node is configured to receive a packet encapsulated in a service header that includes a variable set of context headers. The service proxy is configured to use the context headers in the service header to map data in the packet to a local identifier that is associated with one of a plurality of service-functions hosted by the service node. The service proxy is further configured to forward the data in the packet to the service-function associated with the local identifier. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103828 | Time-Sensitive Switch for Scheduled Data Egress - Systems and methods for scheduling data egress using a time-sensitive (TS) network switch. The TS network switch may include a functional unit, a plurality of ports, and a plurality of queues. Each port may be associated with a set of network addresses for TS packets and may be configured with a set of egress periods. Each queue may be associated with a TS packet type and a port. The functional unit may be configured to receive TS packets asynchronously from a network node via a first port, determine a second port for egressing a TS packet, determine an egress period for egressing the TS packet, determine that the TS packet cannot currently be egressed from the second port, queue the TS packet in a first queue, where the first queue is associated with the second port, and egress the TS packet in the respective time window from the second port. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103829 | Network Relay System and Switching Device - A port switch of type A has a distribution mode for maintaining a backward compatibility with a port switch of type B. A distribution identifier calculating unit performs a logical operation with the same operational expression to the same bit region as the type B in a header contained in a frame, thereby calculating a k-bit (k>j) distribution identifier partly containing the same j-bit bit region as the type B. A distribution table indicates a correspondence relation between three sub-links and the k-bit distribution identifier, and has contents in which the j-bit distribution identifier in the distribution table of the type B is replaced with the k-bit distribution identifier partly containing the same j-bit value as that of the j-bit distribution identifier. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103830 | THE HANDLING OF DATA TRANSFERS IN A NETWORK WITH A RING TOPOLOGY - A method for handling, by a ring node of a network having a ring topology, a data transfer of data packets through the network via which the data packets are transmitted to their destination node, wherein each ring node has two neighbouring ring nodes. The method includes detecting data packets of an incoming data transfer received from a non ring node to be transmitted through the network to their destination node. Furthermore, a ring direction is added to the data packets of the incoming data transfer, the indication indicating in which direction the data packets of the incoming data transfer are passed through the network having the ring topology. The data packets of the incoming data transfer are forwarded to one of the two neighbouring ring nodes based on the added indication. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103831 | System and Method for Interoperability Between Multiple Networks - Systems and methods for interoperating between real time networks. Systems may include a plurality of ports and switch circuitry coupled to the plurality of ports. At least one port may be coupled to a first real time network carrying first traffic. One or more other ports may be coupled to a second real time network carrying second traffic. Switch circuitry may route packets between the first real time network and the one or more second real time networks based on a mapping. Routing information may be inserted in packets routed from the one or more second real time networks to the first real time network and routing information may be removed from the packets routed from the first real time network to the one or more second real time networks. Packets may be routed based on the mapping to distinct queues for the first and second traffic. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103832 | Switch for Scheduled Data Egress - Systems and methods for scheduling data egress from a network switch. Systems may include switch circuitry, a plurality of ports, and a plurality of queues. Each port may be associated with a respective set of routing information for network packets and each port may be configured with a respective set of egress periods. Each network packet may have respective routing information and a type that specifies a respective egress period. Each queue may be associated with a respective network packet type and a port of the plurality of ports. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103833 | DIRECTED ROUTE LOAD/STORE PACKETS FOR DISTRIBUTED SWITCH INITIALIZATION - Techniques for transmitting a packet from a source switch module to a destination switch module. Embodiments retrieve path information specifying a route to the destination switch module. A packet is created that includes (i) at least a portion of the path information and (ii) a set of load/store operations to be executed by the destination switch module. Embodiments then transmit the packet to a first switch module using a first port, the first port specified in the retrieved path information. The first switch module is configured to transmit the packet based on the at least a portion of the path information in the packet, and the destination switch module is configured, upon receiving the packet, to copy the set of load/store operations into an execution buffer to be automatically executed. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103834 | DIRECTED ROUTE LOAD/STORE PACKETS FOR DISTRIBUTED SWITCH INITIALIZATION - Techniques for transmitting a packet from a source switch module to a destination switch module. Embodiments receive, at a first port of a first switch module, a packet that includes (i) path information specifying a route to the destination switch module and (ii) a set of load/store operations to be executed by the destination switch module. An indication of the first port is inserted into a return path information portion of the received packet. Upon determining that the first switch module is not the destination switch module, embodiments transmit the packet to a second switch module using a second port, the second port specified in the path information of the received packet, wherein the destination switch module is configured, upon receiving the packet, to copy the set of load/store operations into an execution buffer to be automatically executed. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103835 | System and Method for Routing Using Path Identifiers - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a first packet sent by a first node. The packet includes a first Layer 3 source address, a first Layer 3 destination address, a first Layer 2 source hardware identifier, a first Layer 2 destination hardware identifier, and a first path identifier. The first path identifier is situated between a Layer 2 header of the first packet and a Layer 3 header of the first packet. The method includes automatically determining a first port of the first network element associated with a second node. The second node is associated with the first Layer 2 destination hardware identifier. A second path identifier is automatically determined based on the first port. The first packet is prevented from being delivered to the second node in response to determining that the first path identifier and the second path identifier are different. | 04-16-2015 |
20150110108 | DISTRIBUTED DATA TRANSMISSION IN DATA NETWORKS - Systems and methods are disclosed for distributed data transmission in an RF mesh network or other data network. An exemplary system includes at least two distribution devices. A first distribution device can receive a first data message that includes a first header and payload data. The first distribution device can determine that the second distribution device is not identified in the first header as receiving the payload data. The first distribution device can generate a second data message based on determining that the second distribution device is not identified in the first header. The second data message includes the payload data and the second header. The second header identifies the second distribution device as being selected to receive the payload data. The first distribution device transmits the second data message to the second distribution device. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110109 | PATHWAY DECISION FORWARDING FOR RACK DOMAINS - Methods and systems for improved pathway decision forwarding for rack domains include a gravity well forwarding protocol that enables local forwarding decisions at each network node involved with forwarding packets. The gravity well forwarding protocol may administer gravity well values for each of a plurality of rack domain nodes in a rack domain. The local forwarding decisions may involve selecting output ports corresponding to a higher/lower gravity well value at a network switching element, depending on a destination gravity well value associated with a network packet. Assignment of the gravity well values among the rack domain nodes may be used according to considerations, including security considerations, throughput considerations, loading considerations, redundancy considerations, physical location, and/or physical proximity, among other considerations, in the rack domain. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110110 | System and Method for a Flexible Number of Lookups in Pipeline-Based Packet Processors - A system and method for a flexible number of lookups in pipeline-based packet processors. Pipeline-based packet processors can be configured to allow multiple lookups per physical table. In one embodiment, a start of packet (SOP) cell is assigned to a first slot of a packet processing pipeline, and a non-SOP cell is assigned to a second slot of a packet processing pipeline. Access of a table by the second slot can be usurped by the SOP cell in the first slot. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110111 | Forward Packet with Edge Device - When a User Edge Device (UED) receives a unicast packet from a user side, the UED searches in a Media Access Control (MAC) table. When a matching entry in the MAC table is found, the UED forwards the unicast packet locally. When no matching entry in the MAC table is found, the UED transmits the unicast packet to a Network Edge Device (NED). When the UED receives a broadcast packet from the user side, the UED broadcasts the broadcast packet within a same Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) of a local site and forwards to the NED. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110112 | NETWORK SYSTEM CAPABLE OF ENHANCING CONNECTION PERFORMANCE - A network system capable of enhancing connection performance includes a first connection object, a second connection object, and a virtual lease line (VLL) network. The VLL network includes a number of router devices, a number of path control devices, and a management server. Each router device is coupled to one corresponding path control device, and each router device and the corresponding path control device are located in one corresponding area. The management server is coupled to all of the path control devices; the management and the path control devices establish a VLL constituted by a number of router devices according to areas in which the first connection object and the second connection object locates. The first connection object and the second connection object are coupled to each other and communicate with each other via the VLL established in the VLL network. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110113 | PACKET PARSING AND KEY GENERATION IN A NETWORK DEVICE - A packet being processed by a network device is parsed by a programmable processing unit executing computer readable instructions stored in a non-transitory computer readable storage medium. Parsing the packet includes identifying one or more protocol layers within a header of the packet, identifying respective locations of protocol headers within the header of the packet, and providing the respective identified locations of protocol headers within the header of the packet to a hardware key generator block. A lookup key corresponding to the packet is generated by the key generator block using the respective identified locations. Generating the lookup key includes extracting, using an identified location of a protocol header, one or more fields from the corresponding protocol header. The lookup key is provided to a lookup engine. A lookup operation with respect to the packet is performed by the lookup engine and based on the lookup key. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110114 | Processing Concurrency in a Network Device - One or more processing operations with respect to a packet are performed at a packet processing node of a network device, the packet processing node configured to perform multiple different processing operations with respect to the packet. A first accelerator engine is triggered for performing a first additional processing operation with respect to the packet. The first additional processing operation constitutes an operation that is different from the multiple different processing operations that the packet processing node is configured to perform. The first additional processing operation is performed by the first accelerator engine. Concurrently with performing the first additional processing operation at the first accelerator engine, at least a portion of a second additional processing operation with respect to the packet is performed by the packet processing node, the second additional processing operation not dependent on a result of the first additional processing operation. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110115 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR SESSION ROUTING - A method, a device and a system for session routing are provided. The method includes: when a first terminal enters a first network in which a first routing device is located, the first routing device obtains an address of a second routing device in a second network; the first routing device establishes a tunnel with the second routing device according to the address of the second routing device; and the first routing device maintains a session between the first terminal and the second routing device through the tunnel. There is no need to set a home network for the terminal, and since the routing device to which the terminal belongs varies with the network in which the terminal is located, the communication traffic of the terminal may not be concentrated on one routing device for forwarding, thus reducing the processing load of a single routing device. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110116 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING OPERATION REQUEST IN STORAGE SYSTEM - According to embodiments of the present invention, in a storage system, a switch receives an operation request, where the operation request carries request identification; the switch queries, according to the request identification, a flow table of the switch to obtain a flow table entry matching the operation request; and the switch forwards the operation request to a target storage device among storage devices according to a forwarding rule of the matching flow table entry. By using a characteristic of a SDN, the operation request is processed according to the forwarding rule of the flow table entry of the switch, thereby implementing load balancing of the storage devices and reducing information interaction between the storage devices. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110117 | Multi-Link Aggregation Method and Device - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a multi-link aggregation method, including: establishing, by a first device, a transparent transmission channel with a second device, where the transparent transmission channel spans multiple links connected to the first device and the second device; performing, by the first device, network address translation on a first target packet to obtain a second target packet; and transmitting, by the first device, the second target packet to the second device through the transparent transmission channel, so that the second device performs network address translation on the second target packet to obtain a third target packet, and the second device sends the third target packet to a target device identified by destination address information of the first target packet | 04-23-2015 |
20150117448 | PACKET TRANSFER SYSTEM - IHS packet transfer systems and methods include a chassis housing a source IHS and a destination IHS. A component interconnect system in the chassis communicatively couples the source IHS and the destination IHS and includes a routing table that includes a destination IHS IP address of the destination IHS and a subnet associated with a component interconnect system domain. The routing table also includes a destination IHS memory address in the destination IHS, and a destination IHS port identifier for a port that is connected to the destination IHS. The component interconnect system provides a routing engine that receives, from the source IHS, a data packet that includes the destination IHS IP address and, in response, uses the routing table and the destination IHS IP address to retrieve the destination IHS memory address and the destination IHS port identifier for providing the data packet to the destination IHS. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117449 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HASH-BASED FORWARDING OF PACKETS WITH HIERARCHICALLY STRUCTURED VARIABLE-LENGTH IDENTIFIERS - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system for forwarding packets with hierarchically structured variable-length identifiers (HSVLIs). During operation, the system receiving a packet with an HSVLI. The packet includes a first value and a second value. The first value uniquely represents an interest corresponding to the HSVLI. The second value is derived based on at least a subset of the HSVLI components. The system then makes a forwarding decision for the packet based on the first hash value and second hash value. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117450 | METHOD AND COMPUTING DEVICE FOR PACKET CLASSIFICATION - The invention relates to a method for packet classification and a computing device for executing the method. The method comprises the steps of analysing packet classification rules to obtain a plurality of categories of rules. The method comprises building a plurality of decision trees, one for each category of rules. The method comprises adding pre-processing information in a header of each leaf of the plurality of decision trees for use in relation with at least one field of a header of a packet, for selecting at least one rule for classification of the packet. The pre-processing information comprises at least one sub-rule for matching against a selected field of a packet header. The method further comprises steps for leaf traversal. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117451 | COMMUNICATION BETWEEN HETROGENOUS NETWORKS - A system to communicate between a first network and a second network includes a first network, a second network, and a connecting device connected there between. The first network has a first network protocol and includes a plurality of network nodes. The second network has a second protocol different from the first protocol and includes a plurality of network switches and a controller. The connecting device transmits data from an originating network node to a destination network switch and transmits data from an originating network switch to a destination network node according to a packet routing table populated from the plurality of network nodes and a packet flow table populated from the plurality of network switches. The controller may determine the destination network switch by constructing and transmitting an ARP broadcast message to the plurality of network switches and receiving an ARP response from the destination network switch. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117452 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MINIMUM PATH MTU DISCOVERY IN CONTENT CENTRIC NETWORKS - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system for facilitating fragmentation of packets with hierarchically structured variable-length identifiers (HSVLIs). During operation, the system receives an interest packet with an HSVLI corresponding to a piece of content. The system then identifies a minimum path maximum transmission unit (MTU) value carried in the packet. In response to the piece of content not being stored locally, the system then determines an egress port for the packet based on the HSVLI. The system further determines an MTU associated with the egress port. Subsequently, in response to the MTU associated with the egress port being less than the minimum path MTU value carried in the packet, the system updates the minimum path MTU value in the packet to the MTU value associated with the egress port. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117453 | HASH-BASED FORWARDING OF PACKETS WITH HIERARCHICALLY STRUCTURED VARIABLE-LENGTH IDENTIFIERS OVER ETHERNET - A system is provided for forwarding packets with hierarchically structured variable-length identifiers (HSVLIs) over Ethernet. The system receives an Ethernet-encapsulated registration message from a content server, which includes a packet containing an HSVLI. A destination MAC of the registration message is an Ethernet group MAC address. The system then creates an entry in a forwarding information base corresponding to the HSVLI indicating a MAC address of the content server and a port on which the registration message is received. The system receives an interest packet from a client which includes the HSVLI. The packet has the Ethernet group MAC address as its destination MAC address and the client's MAC address as its source MAC address. The system forwards the interest packet to the content server, which has the content server's MAC address as its destination MAC address and a local switch's MAC address as its source MAC address. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117454 | Dynamic Generation of Flow Entries for Last-Hop Processing - Some embodiments provide a method for a first managed forwarding element that implements logical forwarding elements of a logical network. The method receives a first packet from a second managed forwarding element. The first packet includes context information that indicates a logical network destination that maps to a physical destination connected to the first managed forwarding element. At the first managed forwarding element, the method dynamically generates a flow entry for processing subsequent packets received by the first managed forwarding element from the physical destination and sent to a source of the first packet. The method processes a second packet received by the first managed forwarding element from the physical destination with the dynamically generated flow entry. The dynamically generated flow entry specifies to send the second packet to the second managed forwarding element before logically forwarding the second packet through the logical network. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117455 | SCALABLE AND PREDICTIVE PACKET PROCESSING - A system for scalable and predictive packet processing may include a memory and a processor. The memory may be configured to store packet processing results performed on a packet. The processor may be configured to apply the stored packet processing results to subsequently received packets that have the same flow identifier as the processed packet without performing ingress packet processing on the subsequent packets. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117456 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - An information processing system according to the present invention includes a plurality of information processing apparatuses connected by a multihop network, and each of the information processing apparatuses includes a first communication unit configured to transmit and receive a first packet including information about a destination address and a second communication unit configured to communicate at a frequency higher than that of the first communication unit and transmit and receive a second packet including a payload, and in each of the information processing apparatuses, when the first communication unit receives the first packet, the second communication unit is woken up, so that efficient data transfer can be achieved while the power consumption is saved. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117457 | INFORMATION-GATHERING SYSTEM, SENSOR TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND TERMINAL CONNECTION CONTROL METHOD - In a terminal connection control method for a system having a plurality of centers, the plurality of centers include a first center for initial connection and a plurality of second centers, the first center includes information of the plurality of second centers, destination information of the first center and information of a terminal are previously stored in the terminal, when the terminal requires the system for connection, the terminal requires the first center for connection based on the destination information of the first center, and sends the terminal information to the first center, the first center selects, from the plurality of second centers, a destination of the terminal which sends connection requirement based on information received from the terminal and based on information of the second centers, and the first center sends the destination information of the selected second center to the terminal which sends the connection requirement. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117458 | LOCATION-BASED NETWORK ROUTING - Apparatus and method for routing packets in a computer network. A network switch for routing packets in a computer network includes a plurality of ports for communicative connection of computing devices to the switch, and routing logic. The routing logic is configured to extract, from a packet received via a first of the ports, a destination address that identifies a destination device to which the packet is directed; to extract from the destination address a switch ID value and a port ID value; to compare the switch ID value extracted from the destination address to a switch ID value identifying the network switch; and to transmit the packet via a second of the ports of the network switch corresponding to the port ID value based on the switch ID value extracted from the destination address being equal to the switch ID value identifying the network switch. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117459 | EFFICIENT FORWARDING INFORMATION BASE CACHING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A Forwarding Information Base (FIB) caching system and scheme that selects and generates a minimal number of non-overlapping prefixes for the FIB cache to improve computer-based network communications and operations efficiency, accuracy and speed. Because the cached prefixes do not cover any longer prefixes in the full FIB, the present invention thus avoids cache-hiding issues. The system further comprises a FIB caching updating component that systematically handles cache misses, cache replacement, and routing updates. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117460 | CONFIGURED HEADER COMPRESSION COVERAGE - A method of configuring a header compression or decompression algorithm in a packet network. The method comprises the steps of analysing or receiving packet information associated with packet traffic, and determining a representative header length to consider as the header length for a plurality of packets. The method further comprises using the representative packet header length to configure one or more compression or decompression algorithms used in the network. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117461 | Packet Classification - A packet classification system, methods, and corresponding apparatus are provided for enabling packet classification. A processor of a security appliance coupled to a network uses a classifier table having a plurality of rules, the plurality of rules having at least one field, to build a decision tree structure including a plurality of nodes, the plurality of nodes including a subset of the plurality of rules. The methods may produce wider, shallower trees that result in shorter search times and reduced memory requirements for storing the trees. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117462 | METHOD FOR ENCAPSULATING A MESSAGE - Networks with a plurality of independent nodes are useful when the nodes can communicate with one another and with nodes and resources outside the network. The present disclosure addresses ways to encapsulate packets as they move from a sender to a receiver, and also addresses ways for speeding up messages between nodes by orderly queuing and processing of messages. The present disclosure also includes techniques for mapping nodes in a home area network to IP addresses in a local area network. | 04-30-2015 |
20150124812 | Dynamic Multipath Forwarding in Software Defined Data Center Networks - A mechanism is provided in a logically centralized controller for dynamic multipath forwarding in a software defined network. The mechanism identifies a set of multiple forwarding paths for a flow. The mechanism assigns a virtual destination address for each multiple forwarding path in the set of multiple forwarding paths. The mechanism installs virtual destination address based forwarding rules in switches for each multiple forwarding path and installs rewriting rules in an egress switch for all paths in the set of multiple forwarding paths. Each rewriting rule rewrites one of the virtual destination address to the real destination address. The mechanism configures an ingress switch to dynamically select a path from the set of multiple forwarding paths based on a multipath policy and rewrite the destination address from the real destination address to a virtual destination address corresponding to the selected path. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124813 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING VIRTUALIZED SWITCH CLASSIFICATION TABLES - A system and method can support dynamic provisioning in a network switch environment, such as supporting virtualized switch clasification tables in a network switch. The system can provide a plurality of memory blocks that can be used to build one or more classification tables for supporting packet processing. Furthermore, the system can comprise a management entity that operates to monitor traffic profile associated with a network port in the network switch. Then, the management entity can allocate one or more memory blocks in the plurality of memory blocks for a logical classification table, and associate the logical classification table with the network port. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124814 | ENABLING SCALABLE VIRTUAL MACHINE TRACKING IN A DATA CENTER FABRIC - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving at a first network element a packet from a second network element; processing the packet at the first network element to obtain information regarding an identity of a virtual machine (“VM”) hosted by the second network element contained within the packet; and storing at the first network element the identifying information. The identifying information stored at the first network element is accessible by at least one third network element. In some embodiments, the first network element comprises a physical switch and the second network element comprises a virtual switch. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124815 | SERVICE CHAINING IN A CLOUD ENVIRONMENT USING SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKING - A system and method for steering traffic through a set of services is provided. A service path or service chain is assigned to a received packet based on a classification of the packet and correlation of the packet with a traffic flow. A new service chain identifier can be created if no such correlation exists. A next service type and a particular instance of the next service type can be determined in accordance with the service chain identifier. A next destination for the traffic can be set in accordance with the instance of the next service. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124816 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTENT TRANSMISSION AND CONTENT RECEPTION - A method of transmitting content to a content receiver and of receiving content from a content transmitted is provided. The method may include receiving, at a content transmitter, a content transmission request fragmenting a segmented content corresponding to the content transmission request into at least one frame, generating a header comprising a frame identifier for the at least one frame, and transmitting the at least one frame and the header to the content receiver. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124817 | IP-BASED FORWARDING OF BRIDGED AND ROUTED IP PACKETS AND UNICAST ARP - Disclosed herein are methods of forwarding data over an IP network. The methods may include receiving a packet from a source host connected to the IP network, identifying the IP address of a destination host designated in the packet, determining the location on the IP network where the destination host designated by the packet is connected, without reference to the MAC address specified in the packet, by using location-identification information stored on the IP network, and forwarding the packet to the location on the IP network where the destination host is connected without reference to the MAC address specified in the packet. Also disclosed herein are related network devices implementing such techniques and operations, as well as IP networks which include such network devices. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124818 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING MEDIA DATA INTERLINKED WITH COMPOSITION INFORMATION AND TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS INFORMATION VIA A HETEROGENEOUS IP NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting media data via a heterogeneous IP network, in which temporal or spatial relationships between MMT assets and transmission characteristics of MMT assets are formed into separate messages in composing MMT assets, thus efficiently transmitting media streaming. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124819 | METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR ROUTING A DATA UNIT - For routing a data unit through a chain of nodes, the nodes are assigned addresses that are increasing in one direction of appearance of the nodes in the chain. For routing the data unit, the receiving node first verifies if the destination address of the data unit corresponds with the address of its first hop neighbour or its second hop neighbour, and the node routes the data unit directly to its first hop neighbour or its second hop neighbour if this is the case. Otherwise, the node determines the difference between the destination address of the data unit and its own address or the difference between the source and destination address of the data unit, selects a routing direction depending on the sign of this difference, and selects a first hop link when the difference is in magnitude below a threshold value or a second hop link when the difference is above the threshold value. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124820 | METHOD FOR SHARDING ADDRESS LOOKUPS - Various embodiments of the present disclosure provide methods for randomly mapping entries in a suitable lookup table across multiple switch devices and/or multiple switch chipsets in each of the multiple switch devices by using two or more independent hash functions. In some embodiments, the number of entries in the lookup table is equal to be the least common multiple of all possible M (i.e., a number of switch devices) choosing R values (i.e., a desired redundancy level). | 05-07-2015 |
20150124821 | SOURCE ADDRESS TRANSLATION IN OVERLAY NETWORKS - Systems, methods, and non-transitory computer-readable storage media for translating source addresses in an overlay network. An access switch in an overlay network, such as a VXLAN, may receive an encapsulated packet from a tunnel endpoint in the overlay network. The encapsulated packet may originate from a host associated with the tunnel endpoint and be encapsulated at the tunnel endpoint with a first source tunnel endpoint address and a destination tunnel endpoint address. The access switch may replace the first source tunnel endpoint address in the encapsulated packet with a second source tunnel endpoint address of the access switch to yield a translated packet. The access switch may then transmit the translated packet towards the destination tunnel endpoint address. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124822 | MANAGING ROUTING INFORMATION FOR TUNNEL ENDPOINTS IN OVERLAY NETWORKS - Systems, methods, and non-transitory computer-readable storage media for managing routing information in overlay networks. A first tunnel endpoint in an overlay network may receive an encapsulated packet from a second tunnel endpoint. The encapsulated packet may have been encapsulated at the second tunnel endpoint based on another packet originating from a source host that is associated with the second tunnel endpoint. The encapsulated packet can include a source host address for the source host and a source tunnel endpoint address for the second tunnel endpoint. The first tunnel endpoint can then update a lookup table based on an association between the source host address and the source tunnel endpoint address. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124823 | TENANT DHCP IN AN OVERLAY NETWORK - Systems, methods, and non-transitory computer-readable storage media for dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) relay functionality in overlay networks. A system on a overlay network fabric can first receive a DHCP request from a host device, the system including a tunnel endpoint (TEP) configured to connect the host device to the overlay network fabric via a tunnel. The system then enables a relay agent information option for relaying the DHCP request with sub-options inserted into the DHCP request, and inserts information into to the sub-options in the DHCP request to yield a modified DHCP request. Here, the information can include an address of the system and an interface of a circuit associated with the system, etc. Next, the system forwards the modified DHCP request to a destination DHCP server based on an address of the destination DHCP server associated with the DHCP request. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124824 | INCAST DROP CAUSE TELEMETRY - Aspects of the subject disclosure relate to ways to capture packet metadata following an incast event. In some implementations, a method of the subject technology can include steps for receiving a plurality of data packets at a network device, storing each of the plurality of packets in a buffer, and detecting a packet drop event for one or more incoming packets, wherein the one or more incoming packets are not stored in the queue. In some aspects, the method can further include steps for indicating a marked packet from among the received data packets, dequeuing each of the plurality of packets in the buffer, capturing metadata for each dequeued packet until the marked packet is dequeued. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124825 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFICATION OF LARGE-DATA FLOWS - Apparatus, systems and methods may be used to monitor data flows and to select and track particularly large data flows. A method of tracking data flows and identifying large-data (“elephant”) flows comprises extracting fields from a packet of data to construct a flow key, computing a hash value on the flow key to provide a hashed flow signature, entering and/or comparing the hashed flow signature with entries in a flow hash table. Each hash table entry includes a byte count for a respective flow. When the byte count for a flow exceeds a threshold value, the flow is added to a large-data flow (“elephant”) table and the flow is then tracked in the large-data flow table. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124826 | NETWORK FABRIC OVERLAY - Disclosed herein are methods of forwarding packets on a network, such as a leaf-spine network having leaf devices and spine devices. The methods may include receiving a packet at an ingress leaf device, and determining based, at least in part, on a header of the packet whether the packet is to be transmitted to a spine device. The methods may further include ascertaining based, at least in part, on a header of the packet whether to perform encapsulation on the packet, encapsulating the packet according to a result of the ascertaining, and then transmitting the packet to a spine device according to a result of the determining. Also disclosed herein are network apparatuses which include a processor and a memory, at least one of the processor or the memory being configured to perform some or all of the foregoing described methods. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124827 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PERFORMING SERVICE TAG SWITCHING IN AN APPLICATION DELIVERY CONTROLLER - The disclosure is directed towards systems and methods for performing service tag switching. A device intermediary to a client and a server receives a packet including a virtual network device identifier tag that identifies a list of functions to be performed on the packet. The device tags the packet with a first service tag identifying a first functional entity of the device to which to route the packet. The device routes the packet to the first functional entity configured to perform a first function. Responsive to the first function being performed, the device selects a subsequent service tag identifying a subsequent functional entity to route the packet. The device tags the packet with the subsequent service tag and routes the packet to the subsequent functional entity. Once all of the list of functions to be performed on the packet have been performed, the device forwards the packet to its destination. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124828 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PORT ALLOCATION - Systems and methods of the present disclosure relate to allocating ports for packets distributed via a computer network. A packet engine on a core of a multicore device intermediary between a client and a server receives a first packet from the client. The first packet includes an outer header of an encapsulation protocol encapsulating a payload with an inner header. The first packet is directed by a packet distributor of the device to the first core selected based on a first tuple of the outer header. A port allocator of the packet engine determines a source port number to cause the packet distributor to identify the first core based on a second tuple of the inner header. The packet engine modifies the inner header of the payload to include the determined source port number. The device forwards the first packet including the modified inner header to the server. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124829 | CONNECTIVITY SYSTEM FOR MULTI-TENANT ACCESS NETWORKS - A system may provide connectivity service in a multi-tenant network. A first node in the multi-tenant network can receive data packets, each of the data packets identifying one of a plurality of tenant devices. The first node can determine an Internet Protocol (IP) address associated with each of the data packets. The first node can determine a Virtual Local Area Network Identifier (VLAN ID) based on the IP address, the VLAN ID being a unique identifier of a respective one of the tenants. The first node can add the VLAN ID of a corresponding one of the tenants into a header of each of the data packets. The first node can transport the data packets to a second node in the multi-tenant network via a multi-tenant network tunnel protocol. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124830 | LABEL SWITCHING PATH ESTABLISHMENT METHOD, DATA FORWARDING METHOD, AND DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a label switching path establishment method, a data forwarding method, and a device. The establishment method includes: determining, by a first service controller, each hop on an LSP from a preset ingress to a preset egress, allocating, from first label space information of each hop, a label to each hop, determining incoming and outgoing information of each hop according to topology information of each hop, generating forwarding data of each hop, and sending the forwarding data of each hop to a node device corresponding to each hop to complete establishment of the LSP. A technical solution of the present invention can alleviate burden of a node device in an MPLS network and increase the number of LSPs that the node device is capable of supporting. | 05-07-2015 |
20150131661 | VIRTUAL NETWORK DEVICE IN A CLOUD COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - A device, of a cloud computing environment, includes a virtual network device that receives a packet with an address, and determines whether the packet is a broadcast packet or a unicast packet. The virtual network device processes the packet based on whether the packet is a broadcast packet or a unicast packet. The packet is transmitted to local address(es) or remote address(es) when the packet is a broadcast packet. The local address(es) is associated with at least one hardware component of the device, and the remote address(es) is associated with at least one other device, of the cloud computing environment, that is separate from the device. The packet is transmitted based on whether the address, of the packet, matches the local address(es) or the remote address(es) when the packet is a unicast packet. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131662 | MULTI-THREADED MULTI-PATH PROCESSING - One or more implementations can include methods, systems and computer readable media for multi-threaded multipath processing. In some implementations, the method can include determining that a next hop for a destination includes a first next hop and a second next hop. The method can also include generating a first packet having a first destination address based on a nickname of a remote switch and on an identifier of a first path. The method can further include generating a second packet having a second destination address based on the nickname of the remote switch and on an identifier of a second path. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131663 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ROUTING PACKETS - A system for routing packets that includes leaf network devices, spine network devices, and a border gateway protocol controller to perform a method for routing packets in a network. The method includes receiving packets at a leaf device and, using the destination IP address of the packet to determine to which spine network device the packet is to be sent. The spine network devices each include a non-overlapping portion of a routing table. The spine network devices include functionality to determine a route for the packet based on its destination IP address, to determine to which leaf network device the packet is to be sent, and to send the packet to the discovered leaf network device. The leaf network device that receives the packet includes functionality to, based on the destination MAC address of the packet, determine out of which leaf network device interface to send the packet. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131664 | DISTRIBUTING AND VIRTUALIZING A NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION (NAT) - A method, apparatus, and system for distributing and vitalizing a NAT are described. The method includes: maintaining a mapping table associating first and second endpoint addresses of a device, the first and second endpoint addresses indicating the device for first and second routers, respectively; maintaining a routing table for routing between the first and second routers, the routing table associating the first and second routers with first and second location addresses, respectively; and forwarding the first and/or second endpoint addresses to a selected router, the selected router being one of the first router, the second router, or a router exchanging network traffic between the first and second routers, wherein the selected router translates network traffic indicating the first endpoint address to indicate the second endpoint address. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131665 | Forwarding Database - A system includes a network interface configured to receive a message comprising a routing address, and forward the message in accord with a route. The system further includes logic, operatively connected to the network interface. The logic is configured to apply a mask to the routing address to determine a masked address, and perform an exact match on the masked address. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131666 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING PACKET - In a software defined network, when an SDN switch receives a packet, the SDN switch calculates a flow entry index using a matching field value belonging to a matching rule that is extracted from the received packet and a flow matching mask field value representing whether a matching field belonging to a matching rule is a field that is designated as a wildcard, processes a packet that is received according to an action that is set to a flow entry that is matched to the flow entry index from a flow table. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131667 | SDN-BASED NETWORK DEVICE WITH EXTENDED FUNCTION AND METHOD OF PROCESSING PACKET IN THE SAME DEVICE - Extension of a function of an Software defined networking (SDN) network device is provided. The network device includes a plurality of flow tables, a plurality of function modules configured to perform different processing on a packet, and an entry module configured to determine an operation to be performed first on the packet between a table search operation and a function module execution operation, in which as a result of the operation determined by the entry module, a table search operation or a function module execution operation to be performed next is designated, and the designation is repeated until an output instruction for the packet is given. | 05-14-2015 |
20150139231 | Wired Meshed Network and a Method for Routing Packets over a Wired Meshed Network - A method for routing packets in a wired meshed network is disclosed including detecting neighboring nodes in a wired meshed network by setting up a point-to-point connection from a configured node to a neighboring node, assigning an IPv4 address to each detected node, and routing packets between the nodes via a link state routing protocol. The invention includes a wired meshed network having a plurality of nodes and a neighbor detection unit for detecting neighboring nodes, adapted for setting up a point-to-point connection from a configured node to a neighboring node. The wired meshed network also includes a network management system assigning an IPv4 address to each detected node and a routing unit for routing packets between the nodes using a link state routing protocol. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139232 | Virtual Machine Data Packet Encapsulation and Decapsulation - According to an example, a method for virtual machine (VM) data packet encapsulation and decapsulation may include receiving a data packet including a media access control (MAC) header and an internet protocol (IP) header. The method may further include encapsulating, by a processor, the received data packet to include an encapsulating MAC header, an encapsulating IP header, a VM MAC header with a same content as the MAC header of the received data packet, and a VM IP header with a same content as the IP header of the received data packet. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139233 | INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - A method for processing information is provided. The method includes: a first member in an equipment group learns forwarding information when forwarding traffic, wherein an ESADI instance based on the equipment group is created on each member in the equipment group; when learning new forwarding information, the first member generates an ESADI frame by utilizing the ESADI instance created thereon, wherein the ESADI frame carries the new forwarding information; and the first member transmits the ESADI frame to a TRILL network where it is. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139234 | Nickname and transparent interconnection of lots of links (TRILL) packet processing method and apparatus - Provided are a nickname and a transparent interconnection of lots of links (TRILL) packet processing method and apparatus. The method includes: a routing bridge (RB) in a TRILL network allocating a nickname to a terminal attached to the RB, the nickname being used for forwarding a packet in the TRILL network; and the RB sending the allocated nickname to the terminal, the terminal encapsulating, according to the nickname, a TRILL packet which uses a fine grained label to distinguish a multi-tenant service. By means of the solution, the problems of cumbersome design and low processing efficiency for implementing multi-tenancy in the related art caused by additional format conversion and label mapping processes required for implementing fine grained distinguishing of multiple tenants are solved, thereby achieving an effect that fine grained distinguishing of multi-tenant services is implemented by TRILL nickname based peer-to-peer forwarding, saving the additional processes and improving the processing efficiency. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139235 | PACKET PROCESSING APPARATUS USING ACTION COMMAND PARAMETERIZATION - A packet processing apparatus has an ingress packet processing circuit, an egress packet processing circuit, a traffic manager, and a processor. The ingress packet processing circuit processes an ingress packet received from an ingress port to generate at least one parameter. The egress packet processing circuit has at least one programmable look-up table, refers to the at least one parameter to determine at least one action command set, and executes the at least one action command set for generating an egress packet to be forwarded through an egress port. The traffic manager is coupled between the ingress packet processing circuit and the egress packet processing circuit. The processor programs the at least one programmable look-up table. No action command in the at least one action command set is transmitted from the ingress packet processing circuit to the egress packet processing circuit through the traffic manager. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139236 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR BRIDGING A WAN ACCELERATOR WITH A SECURITY GATEWAY - The solution described herein provides systems and methods for the interoperability of network processing programs that process network packets at different levels of the network stack. This solution bridges the communications of a network packet between a first network processing program operating at a first level of a network stack in an intermediary and a second network processing program operating at a second level of the network stack of the intermediary. The first network processing program may modify an incoming network packet so that the packet may traverse the network stack to an upper level of the stack to the second network processing program. After processing the network packet at the upper layers of the stack or by the second network processing program, the first network processing program modifies the network pack in order to transmit the packet to the intended destination while traversing the intermediary. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139237 | NODE DEVICE AND DATA RELAYING METHOD - A node device includes: a communication unit to transmit a data frame containing frequency information and receive the data frame; a storage unit to store a table in which frame identification information and the frequency information are associated; and a control unit to: determine whether a destination of the received data frame is its own node device; determine whether the frame identification information of the received data frame is registered in the table; determine whether the number of transmission times is less than or equal to the number of transmission times corresponding to the frame identification information registered in the table; update the frequency information corresponding to the frame identification information registered in the table with the frequency information of the received data frame; and increase the number of transmission times, wherein the communication unit transmits the data frame for which the number of transmission times is increased. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139238 | MULTI-TENANT ISOLATION IN A CLOUD ENVIRONMENT USING SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKING - Systems and methods for ensuring multi-tenant isolation in a data center are provided. A switch, or virtualized switch, can be used to de-multiplex incoming traffic between a number of data centers tenants and to direct traffic to the appropriate virtual slice for an identified tenant. The switch can store tenant identifying information received from a master controller and packet forwarding rules received from at least one tenant controller. The packet handling rules are associated with a specific tenant and can be used to forward traffic to its destination. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139239 | DIRECTED ROUTE LOAD/STORE PACKETS FOR DISTRIBUTED SWITCH INITIALIZATION - Techniques for transmitting a packet from a source switch module to a destination switch module. Embodiments receive, at a first port of a first switch module, a packet that includes (i) path information specifying a route to the destination switch module, (ii) a set of load/store operations to be executed by the destination switch module and (iii) return path information specifying a route from the destination switch module to the source switch module. Upon determining that the first switch module is the destination switch module, the set of load/store operations are copied from the received packet into an execution buffer for automatic execution. Once the set of load/store operations are executed, embodiments transmit the packet to a second switch module using the first port on which the packet was received. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139240 | MULTI-CHIP MODULE WITH A HIGH-RATE INTERFACE - A multi-chip module (MCM) may include a substrate, and first and second physical-layer (PHY) chips mounted on the substrate. In some implementations, the first PHY chip includes a multiplexer and a PHY circuit. The multiplexer is configured to receive a multiplexed data stream from a media access control (MAC) device, to demultiplex the multiplexed data stream into first and second data streams, to output the first data stream to the PHY circuit, and to output the second data stream to the second PHY chip. In some implementations, the first PHY includes a router and a PHY circuit. The router is configured to receive a plurality of data packets from a MAC device, to route one or more of the data packets having a first address to the PHY circuit, and to route one or more of the data packets having a second address to the second PHY chip. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139241 | STATELESS PACKET SEGMENTATION AND PROCESSING - High-speed processing of packets to, and from, a virtualization environment can be provided while utilizing segmentation offload and other such functionality of commodity hardware. Virtualization information can be added to extension portions of protocol headers, for example, such that the payload portion is unchanged and, when physical address information is added to a frame, a frame can be processed using commodity hardware. In some embodiments, the virtualization information can be hashed and added to the payload or stream at, or relative to, various segmentation boundaries, such that the virtualization or additional header information will only be added to a subset of the packets once segmented, thereby reducing the necessary overhead. Further, the hashing of the information can allow for reconstruction of the virtualization information upon desegmentation even in the event of packet loss. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139242 | ANTI-STARVATION AND BOUNCE-REDUCTION MECHANISM FOR A TWO-DIMENSIONAL BUFFERLESS INTERCONNECT - A slot reservation method is disclosed. The slot reservation method generates slot reservations in two dimensions to address starvation and to reduce bounce of messages transmitted through an interconnect. An interconnect implemented using the slot reservation method is capable of being scaled to larger network-on-chip implementations. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139243 | System and Method for Utilizing a Unique Identifier while Registering a Device in a Network - An information handling system includes a server having a management system module. The management system module broadcasts an address resolution protocol request including a unique identifier in the information handling system. The management system module also receives multiple address resolution protocol responses to the address resolution protocol request. Each of the multiple address resolution protocol responses includes a different media access control address associated with the unique identifier. The management system module also creates a unique identifier table correlating each of the media access control addresses with the unique identifier | 05-21-2015 |
20150146722 | OPTIMIZED CONTENT ROUTING DISTRIBUTION USING PROXIMITY BASED ON PREDICTIVE CLIENT FLOW TRAJECTORIES - System, method, and computer program product to perform an operation, the operation comprising capturing, at one or more peering routers, parameters for a plurality of data packets sent by a client device and specifying a destination network address, identifying which peering router captured the parameters for each of the plurality of data packets, determining, based on the identified peering routers, a first peering router nearest to the client, relative to the other peering routers, identifying a first content cache, of a plurality of content caches in a content distribution network, nearest to the first peering router, and fulfilling a content request from the client device using content stored on the first content cache. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146723 | Apparatus and Methods for Accessing a Data Network - A packet data network gateway, P-GW, is located in a second network for supporting user plane data to terminal devices in a wireless communications system that additionally comprises a first network having a first packet data network gateway, P-GW operably couplable to the P-GW. The P-GW comprises a processor arranged to: check a destination address of received packets from the first P-GW to determine whether the received packets are destined for any of the terminal devices, and in response thereto: extract one or more properties of said received packets if they are destined for any of the terminal devices served with user plane data; or discard said received packets if they are not destined for the terminal device(s). | 05-28-2015 |
20150146724 | Traffic Optimization Using Network Address and Port Translation in a Computer Cluster - Techniques are presented herein for optimizing and load balancing network traffic exchanged between devices in a network environment. At a first device in a cluster of devices in a network, a packet is received from a second device in the cluster. The packet comprises identifier information that is assigned to the first device. The identifier information is reassigned to the second device in the cluster such that subsequent packets with the identifier information are sent directly to the second device. A mapping table is updated to indicate that the identifier information is reassigned to the second device. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146725 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROCESSING INTERNET PROTOCOL PACKETS - A method carried out by a network node using in a system for forwarding IP packets. When the network node receives an IP packet from a first network interface, the network node determines whether the destination address of the IP packet matches an IP address in the IP address section of a first routing rule. If the destination address of the IP packet matches the IP address in the IP address section of the first routing rule, the network node forwards the IP packet to a second network interface. The first routing rule comprises at least one IP address section and at least one network interface section. One or both of the first network interface and the second network interface is not assigned with an IP address. The network node comprises at least three network interfaces. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146726 | HYBRID DATA PLANE FORWARDING - A hybrid switching device is disclosed that allow packets transmitted according to different communication protocols to be forwarded in a seamless manner using the same resources of a universal data plane, thereby alleviating the need to employ separate forwarding engines for different types of data planes and/or communication protocols. In operation, if the destination address of a packet received by the switching device is not stored therein, the switching device determines the protocol type of the originating port and, in response thereto, selects an appropriate packet flooding operation to ensure that the packet reaches its destination without creating unnecessary data loops within the switching device. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146727 | Forwarding Packets and PE Devices in VPLS - A method is provided for a first provider edge (PE) device to forward packets in a virtual private local area network service (VPLS) network. The VPLS network includes PE devices that are each connected by one or more attachment circuits (ACs) to one or more customer edge (CE) devices. The first PE device receives a unicast packet on a first AC, which is associated with a first virtual switch instance (VSI) on the first PE device. The first PE device searches, in a media access control (MAC) address table associated with the first VSI, for an entry that matches a MAC destination address carried in the packet. When a matching entry is not found for the MAC destination address, the first PE device only floods the unicast packet to other ACs associated with the first VSI. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146728 | COMMUNICATION PACKET PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD - A communication packet processing apparatus and method for absorbing coexistence of different methods of communication packet reception processing is provided by the same software. A communication packet processing apparatus for transmitting and receiving packets possesses a communication interface for transmitting and receiving packets and a first table storing correspondent information of the communication interface. The correspondent information includes a method of communication packet reception processing that the communication interface can correspond to. The method of communication packet reception processing includes a first method and a second method. The communication interface operates under one or both of the first method and the second method. The communication packet processing apparatus refers to the first table when starting up, and if the first method is designated, confirms whether the communication interface corresponds to the first method, and then if the result is affirmative, operates under the first method. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146729 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING HEADER COMPRESSED PACKET IN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - An electronic device process data including a compressed header is provided. The electronic device includes a controller configured to generate a data packet comprising a header compressed based on at least one data packet previously transmitted, and a transmitter configured to transmit the data packet. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146730 | HETEROGENEOUS MEDIA PACKET BRIDGING - Methods and systems for bridging network packets transmitted over heterogeneous media channels are provided. According to one embodiment, a network switching/routing blade server comprises network interfaces, including a first and second set operable to receive packets encapsulated within a first and second set of media transmissions, respectively, and each having a first and second framing media format, respectively. A single bridging domain is provided by a shared bridging application. A memory stores data structures for translating between the first and second framing media formats via an intermediate format. The netmods pass a received packet, through a switching fabric, to the bridging application, which determines a relay location for the packet and whether the relay location is among the other set of netmods. Responsive to an affirmative determination, the bridging application uses the translation data structures to translate the packet before relaying the packet to the relay location. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146731 | VARIABLE-BASED FORWARDING PATH CONSTRUCTION FOR PACKET PROCESSING WITHIN A NETWORK DEVICE - In general, this disclosure describes techniques for applying, with a network device, subscriber-specific packet processing using an internal processing path that includes service objects that are commonly applied to multiple packet flows associated with multiple subscribers. In one example, a network device control plane creates subscriber records that include, for respective subscribers, one or more variable values that specify service objects as well as an identifier for a packet processing template. A forwarding plane of the network device receives and maps subscriber packets to an associated subscriber record and then processes the packet by executing the packet processing template specified by the subscriber record. When the forwarding plane reaches a variable while executing the specified packet processing template, the forwarding plane reads the associated variable value from the subscriber record to identify and then apply the subscriber-specific service object specified by the variable. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146732 | CONTROL PROTOCOL ENCAPSULATION - A processor is configured to determine non-core functions to be performed by an unmanaged device disposed on a packet based computer network. A control message generator is configured to (i) generate a point-to-point control message conforming to a point-to-point control protocol for controlling the unmanaged device over a point-to-point serial bus connection to perform the determined non-core functions, and (ii) encapsulate the point-to-point control message in a transport packet for transport over the packet based computer network. A packet transmitter is configured to transmit the transport packet including the encapsulated point-to-point control message via a port coupled to the packet based computer network, the packet based computer network configured to route the transport packet including the encapsulated point-to-point control message based on a header included in the transport packet so that the point-to-point control message is received at the unmanaged device via the packet based computer network. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146733 | PRIVATE TUNNEL USAGE TO CREATE WIDE AREA NETWORK BACKBONE OVER THE INTERNET - A wide area network using the internet as a backbone utilizing specially selected ISX/ISP providers whose routers route packets of said wide area network along private tunnels through the internet comprised of high bandwidth, low hop-count data paths. Firewalls are provided at each end of each private tunnel which recognize IP packets addressed to devices at the other end of the tunnel and encapsulate these packets in other IP packets which have a header which includes as the destination address, the IP address of the untrusted side of the firewall at the other end of the tunnel. The payload sections of these packets are the original IP packets and are encrypted and decrypted at both ends of the private tunnel using the same encryption algorithm using the same key or keys. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146734 | VPN USAGE TO CREATE WIDE AREA NETWORK BACKBONE OVER THE INTERNET - A wide area network using the internet as a backbone utilizing specially selected ISX/ISP providers whose routers route packets of said wide area network along private tunnels through the internet comprised of high bandwidth, low hop-count data paths. Firewalls are provided at each end of each private tunnel which recognize IP packets addressed to devices at the other end of the tunnel and encapsulate these packets in other IP packets which have a header which includes as the destination address, the IP address of the untrusted side of the firewall at the other end of the tunnel. The payload sections of these packets are the original IP packets and are encrypted and decrypted at both ends of the private tunnel using the same encryption algorithm using the same key or keys. | 05-28-2015 |
20150295819 | FLOW BASED OVERLAY NETWORK - In one embodiment, a system includes a hardware processor and logic integrated with and/or executable by the processor, the logic being configured to receive an overlay packet, determine at least one characteristic of the overlay packet and/or inner packets of the overlay packet in order to classify the overlay packet into a classification, associate a flow identifier to the overlay packet, determine one or more policies to associate with the flow identifier, where the one or more policies are based on the at least one characteristic of the overlay packet and/or the inner packets of the overlay packet, and store the flow identifier in a header of the overlay packet, where the flow identifier is a string of characters of a predetermined length, the flow identifier being unique from all other flow identifiers in a particular overlay network and associated with an identified flow of the overlay packet. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295823 | PACKET PROCESSING METHOD AND BACKGROUND SERVER - A packet processing method and a background server are provided. The packet processing method includes: receiving, by a bearer system of a background server, an IPIP packet sent by an access server via an IP tunnel; and removing a reverse proxy IP address and a windows server IP address that are in an outer layer of the IPIP packet, and changing a destination IP address in the IPIP packet, of which the reverse proxy IP address and the windows server IP address are removed, into the windows server IP address, to obtain an IP packet. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295825 | Look-Up Table Creation Method and Query Method, Controller, Forwarding Device, and System - The present invention discloses a look-up table creation method and query method. The creation method includes: receiving a look-up table create message sent by a controller, where the look-up table create message includes an identifier of a look-up table and a look-up mode of the look-up table; creating a look-up table according to the look-up table create message and setting a look-up mode of the look-up table; receiving an entry add message sent by the controller, where the entry add message includes a to-be-added forwarding action and an index parameter of the forwarding action; and adding, according to the entry add message, an entry corresponding to the entry add message to the look-up table. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295862 | HIERARCHICAL PROGRAMMING OF DUAL-STACK SWITCHES IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method for hierarchical programming of dual-stack switches in a network environment is provided and includes receiving packets from the network at a line card in the modular switch, a first portion of the packets being destined to Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) destination IP (DIP) addresses and a second portion of the packets being destined to IPv4 DIP addresses, and performing hierarchical lookups of the IPv6 DIP addresses and the IPv4 DIP addresses. Layer 3 (L3) lookups for the IPv6 DIP addresses are performed at the line card, and L3 lookups for IPv4 DIP addresses are performed at a fabric module in the modular switch. The line card and the fabric module are interconnected inside a chassis of the modular switch. In specific embodiments, the method further comprises inspecting the packets' destination Media Access Control (DMAC) addresses comprising router MAC addresses indicative of IPv6 or IPv4 address families. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295885 | Identifying End-Stations on Private Networks - A protocol such as OpenFlow providing communication between an SDN framework controller on one network and a data plane device for another network can be used to modify or process network packets so that an external application or server can communicate with the controller and obtain information needed to uniquely associate the packets with particular end-stations even after those packets have traversed a NAT router. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296058 | Methods to Manage Services over a Service Gateway - In activating a service, a service gateway retrieves a service table entry using a service or server address of the service entry, where the service table entry has an association with another service entry. An association to the service entry is added and a marker value is set to indicate associations with two service entries. After a time duration, the association with the other service entry is removed, and the marker value is changed accordingly. In deactivating a service entry, the service gateway calculates a hash value for the service or server address of the service entry. After matching the hash value to a hash value of another service entry, an association with the other service entry is added. A marker value is set to indicate associations with two service entries. After a time duration, the association with the service entry is removed, and the marker value is changed accordingly. | 10-15-2015 |
20150304194 | FINDING LATENCY THROUGH A PHYSICAL NETWORK IN A VIRTUALIZED NETWORK - Techniques are described for determining latency in a physical network that includes a number of network devices over which packets travel. A virtual network controller receives a plurality of messages from a plurality of network devices in a network, each of the messages including a packet signature comprising a hash of an invariant portion of an original packet that uniquely identifies the original packet, an identifier of one of the plurality of network devices from which the respective message was received, and a timestamp indicating a time an original packet was processed by the network device from which the respective message was received. The virtual network controller determines a latency of a physical network path in the network based on analysis of contents of the identified messages having a common packet signature. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304205 | Link Keepalive Method, Controller and Switch - The present document discloses a link keep-live method, a controller and a switch, including: acquiring link information by the controller, after the link information is acquired, sending the link information to a source switch and/or destination switch of a link corresponding to the link information; and, correspondingly sending keep-live mode information and a link keep-live starting instruction to the source switch and/or destination switch, triggering the source switch and/or destination switch to perform the link keep-live between the source switch and destination switch according to the link information and keep-live mode information; or, after the controller acquires the link information, sending the link information to the source switch and/or destination switch of the link corresponding to the link information, triggering the source switch and/or destination switch to determine a mode adopted for link keep-live, performing the link keep-live between the source switch and destination switch according to the determined mode. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304210 | Method for Processing Subnet Route and Message Forwarding Equipment - Provided are a method for processing a subnet route and message forwarding equipment. The method includes: it is detected that a next-hop host route to which the subnet route is directed becomes invalid; when the next-hop host route becomes invalid, a deletion instruction for deleting the next-hop host route is generated and issued; the deletion instruction is intercepted, and converted into a first updating instruction for modifying the next-hop host route; and a next-hop egress of the next-hop host route is updated into a Central Processing Unit (CPU) of the message forwarding equipment according to the first updating instruction. According to the disclosure, management over the subnet route can be simplified, and switching efficiency of the subnet route can be improved. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304212 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MATCHING FLOW TABLE, AND SWITCH - A method and an apparatus for matching a flow table, and a switch are provided. An exact match entry and a wildcard entry that are in each flow entry are stored separately, the exact match entry is stored in a memory, the wildcard entry is stored in a TCAM, and an index value index is used to represent the exact match entry, so that the wildcard entry uses less TCAM resources, thereby increasing utilization of the TCAM; and a proper searching algorithm is used to separately perform matching on the exact match entry and the wildcard entry, which increases a searching speed. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304214 | FAST REROUTE IN MULTI-PROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING TRAFFIC ENGINEERING NETWORK - In an example, multi-protocol label switching traffic engineering (MPLS TE) fast reroute (FRR) is implemented in an MPLS TE network. The MPLS TE network includes a bypass protection (BP)-label switching path (LSP) protecting a working LSP. A node receives a packet from an upstream adjacent node of the node in a working LSP. The packet includes a label which is an incoming label of the working LSP at the node. When detecting a downstream adjacent node of the node in the working LSP is unreachable, the node replaces the label in the packet with an outgoing label of a WP-LSP at the node, and forwards the packet in the WP-LSP which delivers the packet to an ingress node of a BP-LSP. The BP-LSP then delivers the packet to an egress node of the BP-LSP and the packet is forwarded from the BP-SLP to the working LSP. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304215 | PACKET RELAY APPARATUS, PACKET TRANSFER METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A packet relay apparatus having one or more communication interfaces coupled to a network, a processor coupled to the one or more communication interfaces, and a memory coupled to the processor, said packet relay apparatus holds path information including a plurality of combinations of a final destination and a next transfer destination of a packet, and conditions for applying individual combinations of the path information; determining, on the basis of information included in a received packet, whether or not the received packet satisfies the condition for applying each combination of the path information; and transferring the received packet to one or more next transfer destinations of one or more combinations of the path information associated with the condition determined to be satisfied and including a final destination identical to final destination information included in the received packet. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304217 | SECURITY FOR PACKETS USING A SHORT MAC HEADER - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods and apparatus for applying security to packets, for example, packets utilizing short MAC headers. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304219 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING A NEXT HOP - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a device for routing an incoming packet to a destination, the device comprising a processor associated with a storage, in communication with a network interface, the processor being configured to receive the incoming packet; access from the storage a plurality of at least two server bits, each server bit representing a possible next hop to the destination, where if the quantity of possible next hops to the destination is less than a power of two then the quantity of server bits is equal to the next highest power of two, and wherein a quantity n is equal to the exponent of the next highest power of two; determine one or more hash bits calculated from a hash value derived from a source address, a destination address, a source port, and a destination port of the packet, wherein the quantity of hash bits is half the number of server bits; and repeatedly, for n repetitions, determine one or more output bits from a plurality of at least two inputs bits and the one or more hash bits, each input bit representing a server bit in the first repetition, the output bits representing half of the remaining possible next hops to the destination, the output bits becoming final output bits in the nth repetition or input bits to a next repetition after the first repetition. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304461 | Network interface unit and method for operating a network interface unit - A network interface unit includes: at least one input terminal for receiving Ethernet data packets; at least one output terminal; and a segmentation unit configured for (i) segmenting at least one of a received Ethernet data packet and an Ethernet data packet modified by the network interface unit into at least one data segment having a predefined length, and (ii) for outputting the at least one data segment via the output terminal. | 10-22-2015 |
20150312054 | Reducing encapsulation overhead in overlay-based networks - Machines, systems and methods for efficient data communication are provided. The method comprises receiving a data packet to be transmitted to a destination node in a overlay-based communications network, wherein the destination information is included in a virtual header that includes a virtual address of the destination node; determining a physical address of the destination node based on the virtual address of the destination node; replacing the virtual header for the received data packet with a physical header that includes the physical address; and transmitting the data packet over the communications network to a destination host based on the physical address included in the physical header. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312146 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR HOSTING APPLICATION BY ACCESS NODE - A method and device for hosting an application by an access node which provides network access to a terminal in a mobile communication system are provided. The method includes receiving a request packet for a service request from a user application of a mobile terminal, delivering the request packet to an application included in the access node, if a destination of the request packet corresponds to the application of the access node, providing a service to the user application of the mobile terminal through the application, and delivering the request packet to a corresponding public application on an external network, if the application corresponding to the destination of the request packet does not exist in the access node. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312149 | DATA PROCESSING - Measures for processing data in a packet-switched network. At a first device in the network, a packet transmitted from a second device in the network is received. The received packet comprising an Internet Protocol (IP) address for a third device in the network. On the basis of the IP address for the third device comprised in the received data packet, lookup in an IP routing table of the second device is initiated to obtain a next-hop address for the received packet. The obtained next-hop IP address is determined to be an IP address of a device connected to the first device. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312150 | METHOD FOR CLASSIFYING A DATA SEGMENT WITH RESPECT TO ITS FURTHER PROCESSING - A method is provided for classifying a data segment with respect to its further processing in a data transporting unit, in particular in a network processor. The data segment is provided by an input interface. A first key for a lookup table is ascertained as a function of an identifier (chid) established in advance and as a function of an identifier (devid) of the input interface from which the data segment stems. A second key for the lookup table is ascertained. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312206 | CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A control apparatus includes: a first control information setting unit configured to set first control information for forwarding packets between predetermined machines in relay apparatuses on a predetermined path on the basis of a first hierarchical address; and a second control information setting unit configured to set, when receiving a packet whose destination address is a second hierarchical address, which is a higher level address than the first hierarchical address, from one of the machines in which the first control information has already been set, via one of the relay apparatuses, second control information for converting a first hierarchical destination address of the packet whose destination address is the second hierarchical address into a first hierarchical address specified in the first control information and forwarding the converted packet, in the relay apparatus. | 10-29-2015 |
20150319009 | Method and Device for VLAN Interface Routing - One of the embodiments of the present invention relates to a method for routing frames via a node with at least one VLAN—“Virtual Local Area Network” interface which is configured to process frames associated with at least one VLAN. The method comprises: receiving an ingress frame at a source physical port of said node, wherein said ingress frame carries one or more VLAN tags and each of said VLAN tags is arranged to identify one VLAN ID; determining a forwarding destination for said frame within or among at least one service domain; and transmitting a corresponding egress frame at a destination physical port of said node, wherein said egress frame carries one or more VLAN tags and each of said VLAN tags is arranged to identify one VLAN ID. The embodiments of the present invention further provide corresponding network node device and computer program product. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319074 | Cluster and Forwarding Method - Embodiments of the present invention provide a cluster that includes a first node and a second node, and the first node and the second node are configured to cooperatively perform a forwarding service on a first packet, where the first node is configured to receive the first packet by using an inbound interface and determine the inbound interface; and the second node is configured to determine an outbound interface according to a forwarding table corresponding to the forwarding service and forward the first packet by using the outbound interface of the second node. In addition, the embodiments of the present invention further provide other clusters and forwarding methods. The foregoing technical solutions help to reduce software and hardware resources occupied by a cluster. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319078 | Computing Service Chain-Aware Paths - A method implemented by a path computation element (PCE), comprising receiving a path computation request to compute a network path for a source-destination pair in a service chain (SC) network, wherein the path computation request comprises at least one network routing constraint and a service function (SF) input associated with a plurality of SFs, computing a plurality of network paths through the network for the source-destination pair according to the network routing constraint, selecting at least a first of the network paths according to the SF input, and sending a path computation response indicating at least the first network path in response to the received path computation request. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319082 | Method, RB and TRILL Network for Implementing TRILL OAM Packet - A method for implementing operation, administration and maintenance (OAM), a routing bridge (RB) and a Transparent Interconnection of Lots of Links (TRILL) network are described. A designated virtual local area network identifier (DVLAN ID) of a TRILL network is designated to be used for TRILL OAM, so that an inner virtual local area network identifier (VLAN ID) and an outer VLAN ID of a TRILL OAM packet are both a DVLAN ID, thereby ensuring availability of a TRILL OAM function. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319084 | ROUTING MESSAGES IN A COMPUTER NETWORK USING DETERMINISTIC AND PROBALISTIC SOURCE ROUTES - In one embodiment, a data packet message is provided which includes a routing header configured to accommodate both a deterministic source route and a probabilistic source route for encoding a nodal source route. The nodal source route is selectively encoded with one or both of a deterministic source route and a probabilistic source route based upon one or more predetermined criteria. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319085 | FLOW-BASED NETWORK SWITCHING SYSTEM - A flow-based network switching system includes a memory having a flow table and a packet processor coupled to the memory. The packet processor includes a user-programmable flow-based rule storage that includes a plurality of flow-based rules. A flow-based handler and session manager in the packet processor is operable to retrieve application layer metadata from a first packet received over a network, determine a first flow session associated with the first packet using the application layer metadata from the first packet and the flow table, and retrieve at least one of the plurality of flow-based rules from the programmable flow-based rule storage using the application layer metadata from the first packet. A flow-based rule processing engine in the packet processor is operable to apply the at least one flow-based rule to the first packet. Packets with applied flow-based rules are forwarded through the network. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319087 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING DATA IN CONTENT TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A switching device for data processing includes: a processor unit to generate a pseudo-first-form packet by attaching a second-form header to an end portion of a first-form packet when a second-form packet is input, the second-form packet including the first-form packet encapsulated with the second-form header; and a switching unit to transfer the second-form packet to the processor unit when the second-form packet is input from a network, and transfer the pseudo-first-form packet generated by the processor unit to a cache device such that the cache device processes the pseudo-first-form packet. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319088 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FACILITATING SWITCH VIRTUALIZATION IN A NETWORK OF INTERCONNECTED SWITCHES - One embodiment of the present invention provides a computing system. The computing system includes a processor and a memory storing instructions that are executed by the processor. The computing system stores in a first table a first mapping between a first switch identifier and a next-hop switch identifier for the first switch identifier, and stores in a second table a second mapping between the first switch identifier and a first media access control (MAC) address of a remote device. The computing system encapsulates a first packet, which has first MAC address as a destination address, in a first encapsulation header with the first switch identifier as an egress switch identifier of the first encapsulation header. This encapsulated packet is forwarded in a network of interconnected switches based on the first encapsulation header. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319089 | TECHNIQUES FOR REALIZING SERVICE CHAINING - Techniques for realizing service chaining, a corresponding apparatus and an SDN (Software Defined Network) controller are disclosed. The method includes temporarily modifying an original destination MAC (media access control) address of a packet and an original source MAC address the packet during the time the packet makes a hop from one middlebox to another. A restore operation is used to restore the original source and destination MAC addresses after the hop is made. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319098 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR IMPLEMENTING NETWORK PACKET BROKERS AND TAPS - Arrangements and methods for improving data communication in a network are disclosed. The method includes receiving data packets and segregating the data packets into at least original packets and replicated packets. The method also includes prioritizing original packets having service level agreement (SLA) requirements, the prioritizing is performed with respect to at least one of queuing and de-queuing such that SL parameters for the original packets met. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319272 | DEVICE AND FRAME STRUCTURE FOR POWERLINE COMMUNICATIONS - Embodiments of the invention provide a device and a frame structure for powerline communications. The header may comprise two parts that are separately encoded. A common header segment is encoded alone, and an embedded header segment is encoded with payload data | 11-05-2015 |
20150326407 | REDIRECTING VIRTUAL MACHINE TRAFFIC - According to an example, in a method for redirecting virtual machine traffic a virtual switch may be implemented in a physical server. In addition, a packet sent from a first virtual machine to a second virtual machine may be detected, in which the first virtual machine and the second virtual machine are in the same virtual local area network (VLAN), and in which the packet has a first VLAN label that identifies the VLAN. Moreover, the first VLAN label may be replaced with a second VLAN label in the packet, in which the second VLAN label differs from the first VLAN label, and the packet may be sent to an uplink switch, in which the uplink switch may send the packet to a network security module. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326470 | System and Method for Loop Suppression in Transit Networks - An embodiment method of loop suppression in a layer-two transit network with multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) encapsulation includes receiving a packet at a provider edge (PE) router for the layer-two transit network. The packet is stored in a non-transitory memory on the PE router. The packet is stored according to a packet data structure having an MPLS label field and a layer-two header. A time-to-live (TTL) attribute is then determined for the packet. The TTL attribute is written to the non-transitory memory in the MPLS label field. The packet is then routed according to information in the layer-two header. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326473 | Service Chain Path Route Reservations - An apparatus comprising an ingress port, an egress port, a port associated with a service function, a memory, and a processor coupled to the ingress port, the egress port, the port, and the memory, and configured to receive from the ingress port a data packet that comprises a packet header that is associated with a service identifier (ID), forward the data packet to the port for processing by the service function, receive the data packet from the port in response to forwarding the data packet to the port, and forward the data packet to the egress port to a network node. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326475 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ACHIEVING MULTIPLE TENANCY USING VIRTUAL MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL (VMAC) ADDRESSES - The disclosure is directed towards systems and methods for segmenting network traffic using virtual media access control (vMAC) addresses. A device intermediary to a plurality of clients and a plurality of servers establishes a plurality of traffic domains to segment network traffic. The device generates a plurality of vMAC addresses to assign to the plurality of traffic domains. Each of the vMAC addresses can include an identifier of a traffic domain corresponding to the traffic domain to which the vMAC address is assigned. The device receives, from a second device, an address resolution protocol (ARP) request to determine a media access control (MAC) address to transmit data packets. The device selects, from the plurality of virtual MAC addresses, the virtual MAC address to use as the MAC address in a response based on an internet protocol (IP) address identified via the ARP request. The device then transmits, to the second device, a response to the request. The response can identify, as the MAC address, the selected vMAC address of a traffic domain. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326477 | PACKET PROCESSING APPARATUS, FLOW ENTRY CONFIGURATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A packet processing apparatus includes: a flow table in which flow entries can be stored in areas allocated in order of priority groups; an entry management unit that determines, upon receiving a new flow entry from a prescribed control apparatus, a storage position in the flow table based on which priority group among the plural priority groups the new flow entry belongs to, and on a level 2 priority that is used for determining position within the priority group; and an entry retrieval unit that scans from the beginning of the flow table, retrieves an entry having match condition(s) that match(es) a received packet, and determines processing to be applied to the received packet. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326503 | MAP SHARING FOR A SWITCH DEVICE - A method of implementing map sharing for a network switch appliance, the network switch appliance having a plurality of network ports and a plurality of instrument ports, the method includes: receiving a first input for creating a map for the network switch appliance, wherein the map comprises one or more packet processing rules, and wherein the act of receiving the first input is performed by a processing unit; receiving a second input for prescribing a map sharing privilege for the map; and storing the map and the map sharing privilege in association with the map in a non-transitory medium. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326504 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ENCODING MDIO INTO SGMII TRANSMISSIONS - A method of communication between an Ethernet Media Access Controller (MAC) and a physical interface (PHY) is disclosed. The method includes establishing communication between the MAC and the PHY via a first serial link in accordance with a Serializer Deserializer (SERDES) protocol. In a data transfer mode, data is transferred along the first serial link. Idle frames are transferred within an idle time gap along the link in an idle mode. The PHY is managed by encoding Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) information in one or more MDIO frames, and transferring the one or more MDIO frames within the idle time gap along the first serial link. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326526 | KEEPING A TERMINAL ACCESS LOCATION RECORD ALIVE - A SDN controller may receive a packet from a terminal device and may update an IP/MAC address mapping record and a terminal access location record of the terminal device. The SDN controller may periodically send an ARP request packet and may keep the IP/MAC address mapping record and the terminal access location record of the terminal device alive. The SDN controller may also periodically age the IP/MAC address mapping record and the terminal access location record of the terminal device. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326696 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADAPTING TO NETWORK PROTOCOL UPDATES - A system and method are provided for updating network protocols. A new ASIC is designed to adapt to future network protocols, the ASIC including at least one packet editing program. The ASIC is configured to classify a received packet to determine new protocols to which the packet is to be updated, delete selected existing headers of the packet, insert new headers in the packet based on the classification, and modify selected headers based on the classification. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327285 | Control Apparatus, Communication Apparatus, Communication Method and Program - A communication apparatus selects, among a plurality of control information, the control information matching a packet received and which is highest in a priority level. The communication apparatus processes a packet received based on the selected control information. The control apparatus includes a control information generation unit that generates a plurality of control information having match conditions overlapping at least partially one with another, a ranking in a priority level different one from another and processing contents different one from another, and a control unit that sets the plurality of control information in the communication apparatus. The communication apparatus performs the processing of modifying the control information, among the plurality of control information, which is highest in a priority level, based on a modifying condition previously set on the control information basis. Communication policies may be changed over by modifying the priority level. | 11-12-2015 |
20150333920 | Sleeping Link Waking Method and Apparatus - The present invention discloses a sleeping link waking method and apparatus, and relates to the field of communications network technologies, which can automatically wake a sleeping link in a timely manner according to an actual load condition of a network, and reduce labor maintenance costs. According to embodiments of the present invention, a first router receives a first LSP packet sent by a management router, where the first LSP packet includes a first TLV, and the first TLV is used to determine a sleeping link to be woken; the first router determines, according to the first TLV, the sleeping link to be woken; and the first router wakes the sleeping link. The solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention are suitable to be used to wake a sleeping link. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333921 | MULTICAST ROUTING - A method for multicast routing may include receiving, at a router of a receiving multicast domain, a data packet from a forwarding multicast domain. The method may further include configuring the router to operate as if a multicast forwarding information base entry is directly connected, and configuring the router with a reverse path forwarding override with source discovery such that a path used by multicast traffic is different from a path used for unicast traffic. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333930 | DYNAMIC SERVICE FUNCTION CHAINING - Described herein are systems, methods, and apparatus for processing network packets in a computer network, including in particular the processing of subscriber traffic in a mobile network. According to the teachings hereof, distributed computing resources can be organized into a service platform to provide certain value-add services—such as deep packet inspection, transcoding, lawful intercept, or otherwise—using a service function chaining model. The platform may operate on traffic egressing or ingressing to a mobile network (or other target network) to the public Internet. The service platform can alternatively be deployed wholly or partially within a target network. Service function chains may be built dynamically based on configured platform policies, packet contents, computing resource status, load, network location, current network conditions, and the like. The teachings hereof support dynamic modification of service function chains, including service function chain re-ordering, service level modification, and dynamic insertion/deletion of service functions. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333967 | NETWORK EXTENSION GROUPS - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch in a network of interconnected switches. The switch includes a network extension module, which maintains a mapping between a first virtual local area network (VLAN) identifier and a first global VLAN identifier of a network extension group. The network extension group is represented by a range of global VLAN identifiers for a tenant. A global VLAN identifier is persistent in a respective switch of the network and represents a virtual forwarding domain in the network. During operation, the network extension module includes the global VLAN identifier in a packet belonging to the first VLAN. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334001 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS, AND NETWORK TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT METHOD - A communication system includes: a control apparatus configured to set control information, which causes each control target switch to distinguish a link layer discovery protocol packet of a first network from a link layer discovery protocol packet of a second network different from the first network and to perform corresponding predetermined processing, in each control target switch; a group of switches each of which is configured to transmit a link layer discovery protocol packet of the first network to a predetermined topology management apparatus in accordance with control information set by the control apparatus; and a topology management apparatus configured to manage a network topology configured by the group of switches on the basis of information included in a link layer discovery protocol packet of the first network received from each of the switches. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334014 | IP ADDRESS BASED UDP RELAY - The present subject matter discloses a method for UDP relay in communication networks. In one implementation, a UDP port number included in a header of a message is identified. The method further includes ascertaining the IP address based on a mapping table, where the mapping table includes a list of plurality of UDP port numbers mapping to the IP addresses of corresponding destination servers. Further, the message is modified to obtain a modified message based at least on the IP address. Subsequently, the modified message is unicasted to the destination IP address. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334015 | Method and apparatus for handling messages - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, there is provided an apparatus, comprising a receiver configured to receive a data packet, at least one processing core configured to determine, based on contents of the data packet, a new destination address for the packet, wherein the received data packet does not comprise the new destination address in a header field, the at least one processing core being configured to insert the new destination address into a destination address header field of the data packet, and a transmitter configured to cause the data packet to be transmitted after the new destination address has been inserted. In some embodiments, the new destination address is determined on the basis of a compression context used to compress the data packet. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334017 | FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET (FCoE) ZONING IN A DISTRIBUTED ETHERNET SWITCH - Systems, methods, and computer program products to perform an operation comprising, receiving a login request from an endpoint connected to first physical port of a first switch module of a distributed network switch, wherein the distributed network switch comprises a plurality of switch modules, wherein each switch module comprises a plurality of ASICs, responsive to the login request, storing, in a FCDF database, an entry comprising an identifier of the first physical port and a unique identifier of the endpoint, and responsive to receiving, from a cFCF, a zoning update comprising the unique identifier of the endpoint and an FCID for the endpoint, storing the FCID in the FCDF database entry for the endpoint, identifying a first ASIC, of the plurality of ASICs of the first switch module, connected to the first physical port, and updating a zoning table of the first ASIC to include the zoning update. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334020 | Parallel Processing for Low Latency Network Address Translation - A packet is received at an ingress port of a networking device and a forwarding result that identifies an egress port for the packet is generated. In parallel with the generation of the forwarding result, a network address translation (NAT) result that identifies one or more NAT rules for possible application to the packet is generated. The forwarding result and the NAT result are then used to generate a routing decision result. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334032 | CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION NODE CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - The present invention reduces the labor required for setting VLAN information in the ports of the communication nodes in a centralized-control-type communication system. A control apparatus includes: a connection detection unit configured to detect connection of a terminal or a virtual machine to a control target communication node; a first VLAN information determination unit configured to determine VLAN information that is set in a port of the communication node, the port having been connected to the terminal or the virtual machine, on the basis of a virtual network to which the detected terminal or virtual machine belongs; and a VLAN information setting unit configured to set the determined VLAN information in the port. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334053 | FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET (FCoE) ZONING IN A DISTRIBUTED ETHERNET SWITCH - Method to perform an operation comprising, receiving a login request from an endpoint connected to first physical port of a first switch module of a distributed network switch, wherein the distributed network switch comprises a plurality of switch modules, wherein each switch module comprises a plurality of ASICs, responsive to the login request, storing, in a FCDF database, an entry comprising an identifier of the first physical port and a unique identifier of the endpoint, and responsive to receiving, from a cFCF, a zoning update comprising the unique identifier of the endpoint and an FCID for the endpoint, storing the FCID in the FCDF database entry for the endpoint, identifying a first ASIC, of the plurality of ASICs of the first switch module, connected to the first physical port, and updating a zoning table of the first ASIC to include the zoning update. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334055 | PACKET PROCESSING METHOD AND FORWARDING ELEMENT - Embodiments provide a method, including: receiving, by a forwarding element, a packet through an inbound port; searching for, by the forwarding element, a port table according to the inbound port and determining a first offset, a first length, and an identifier of a first table; determining, by the forwarding element, a first key according to the first offset and the first length, searching for the first table according to the first key, and determining a first instruction; and processing, by the forwarding element, the packet according to the first instruction. In addition, a forwarding element is provided. In the foregoing technical solutions, before processing a packet, the forwarding element does not need to interpret a data format of the packet, so that the forwarding element can flexibly support packets in different data formats. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334057 | PACKET FORWARDING - According to an example, a method for forwarding an Ethernet packet may include receiving an Ethernet packet having a destination MAC address that is a MAC address of a gateway, selecting a port from multiple ports, wherein each of the ports of the multiple ports connects to one member device of a VRRP router that is working as the gateway; and sending the Ethernet packet via the selected port. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334089 | MANAGING MAC MOVES WITH SECURE PORT GROUPS - A method includes determining that a source MAC address is associated with a particular port that is a member of a secure group ( | 11-19-2015 |
20150341235 | Packet Processing Method, Forwarder, Packet Processing Device, and Packet Processing System - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a packet processing method, a forwarder, a packet processing device, and a packet processing system that are applicable to a control and forwarding decoupled architecture including a forwarder and a controller. The method includes: acquiring, by the forwarder, packet reporting control information including a reporting control indication and a control threshold; and stopping, by the forwarder according to the reporting control indication in a case in which a control parameter reaches or exceeds the control threshold, sending a packet reporting message related to one flow. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341259 | ROUTING MANAGEMENT METHOD, ROUTING METHOD, NETWORK CONTROLLER, AND ROUTER - A routing management method includes: receiving, by a network controller, a request for creating a Layer 2 Virtual Private Network, determining, according to routing information of each router in a public network and information about a connection between each local area network and the public network, path information of a tunnel that a packet between any two of the local area networks should pass by when being transmitted in the public network; determining, according to the path information of each tunnel, forwarding information that each router forwards a packet along each tunnel, and allocating, to each router that each tunnel passes by, a label and processing information that is for the label before each router forwards the packet; and sending each piece of routing control information to each router, so that each router forwards the packet. The method reduces a calculation overhead of a router in a public network. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341261 | SKIPPING AND PARSING INTERNET PROTOCOL VERSION 6 (IPv6) EXTENSION HEADERS TO REACH UPPER LAYER HEADERS - Embodiments presented herein describe techniques for parsing an Internet Protocol version 6 frame and skipping extension headers of the frame. A configurable skip list is provided that specifies extension headers for a networking device to skip when parsing the frame. The networking device examines “next header” fields of each extension header to determine a next extension header in the chain. If the next extension header matches an extension header in the skip list, the networking device iterates to the next header in the chain until the end of the chain (or an extension header that does not contain a match in the list) is reached. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341263 | ASSOCIATING INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) ADDRESSES WITH ETHERNET VIRTUALISATION INTERCONNECTION (EVI) LINKS - The present disclosure describes an example of a method for transmitting a first message and a second message on an Ethernet Virtualisation Interconnection (EVI) link. In this example, the first message is transmitted on the EVI link via a first transmission path identified by a first pair of IP addresses, and the second message is transmitted on the EVI link via a second transmission path identified by a second pair of IP addresses. The first message and the second message are forwarded by a flow-based forwarding device having a plurality of interfaces. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341264 | PROCESSING A MESSAGE BASED ON A BOUNDARY IP ADDRESS AND DECAY VARIABLE - A technique for determining a boundary IP address is disclosed. The technique includes processing a header to extract candidate IP address, locating a gateway IP address, and selecting the boundary IP address based on the location of the gateway IP address. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341265 | SKIPPING AND PARSING INTERNET PROTOCOL VERSION 6 EXTENSION HEADERS TO REACH UPPER LAYER HEADERS - Embodiments presented herein describe techniques for parsing an Internet Protocol version 6 frame and skipping extension headers of the frame. A configurable skip list is provided that specifies extension headers for a networking device to skip when parsing the frame. The networking device examines “next header” fields of each extension header to determine a next extension header in the chain. If the next extension header matches an extension header in the skip list, the networking device iterates to the next header in the chain until the end of the chain (or an extension header that does not contain a match in the list) is reached. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341266 | COMMUNICATION NODE, CONTROL APPARATUS, METHOD FOR MANAGEMENT OF CONTROL INFORMATION ENTRIES AND PROGRAM - The communication node includes an entry memory adapted to store a preset number of the control information entries, each stipulating the processing applied to a packet received, in association with the user information, and a packet processor that references the entry memory to process the packet received. The communication node also includes an entry management section that exercises control so that, on the basis of a preset reference, the proportion of the number of the control information entries for one user stored in the entry memory to the number of the control information entries storable in the entry memory will not surpass a preset value. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341267 | CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SWITCH CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A control apparatus sets a first entry(ies) for filtering packets received by the switch(es) in a first table(s) included in the switch(es) and sets a second entry(ies) including a rule(s) for processing a packet(s) selected by the first entry(ies) from the received packets in a second table(s) included in the switch(es). | 11-26-2015 |
20150341269 | SUPPORTING ACCESS CONTROL LIST RULES THAT APPLY TO TCP SEGMENTS BELONGING TO 'ESTABLISHED' CONNECTION - Embodiments presented herein provide a TCAM-based access control list that supports disjunction operations in rules. According to one embodiment, a numeric range table is tied to the access control list. Each entry in the numeric range table includes an encode field that provides for scanning TCP flags in a TCP header of an incoming Ethernet frame. Further, each entry provides a first mask and a second mask used to test for desired set and unset TCP flags in a given frame. Each entry also provides an operation field that performs a disjunction operation that compares the first mask, the second mask, and set TCP flags in a given frame. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341278 | OPTIMIZED PATH MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION UNIT DISCOVERY - Embodiments of the present invention provide path MTU discovery of a network path, such as an IPv4 network. According to various embodiments of the invention, a node receives a packet at a node along the network path between a source node and a destination node, compares a MTU size of a next hop along the network path with the size of the packet, responsive to the MTU size of the next hop along the network path being less than the size of the packet, a DF flag being set to not allow fragmentation, a RC flag being set to identify that a portion of the packet is reserved for PMTU size, and a PMTU bit being set to positive, truncates the packet to the MTU size of the next hop, stores the MTU size in the portion of the packet reserved for PMTU size, and forwards the packet. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341285 | METADATA TRANSPORT BETWEEN MOBILE NETWORK CORE AND EXTERNAL DATA NETWORK - Described herein are systems, methods, and apparatus for processing network packets in a computer network. According to the teachings hereof, distributed computing resources can be organized into a service platform to provide certain value-add services—such as deep packet inspection, transcoding, lawful intercept, or otherwise—using a service function chaining model. The platform can be used operate on traffic coming from or going to a mobile network (or other target network) to the public Internet. The platform may send to the mobile network various kinds of metadata related to or reflecting the services it is performing and/or the traffic that is flowing to or from the mobile network, among other things. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341307 | Distributed Address Resolution Protocol Forwarding - A network device within a data communication network includes a plurality of network interfaces, each programmed with a respective set of Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) routing entries for correlating network addresses with physical addresses. Each network interface is further programmed with an additional respective set of Longest Prefix Match (LPM) routing entries for correlating other network addresses with designated network interfaces to enable traffic matching one of the LPM routing entries to be forwarded to the appropriate designated network interface within the network device. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341473 | PACKET FLOW CLASSIFICATION - Technologies for packet flow classification on a computing device include a hash table including a plurality of hash table buckets in which each hash table bucket maps a plurality of keys to corresponding traffic flows. The computing device performs packet flow classification on received data packets, where the packet flow classification includes a plurality of sequential classification stages and fetch classification operations and non-fetch classification operations are performed in each classification stage. The fetch classification operations include to prefetch a key of a first received data packet based on a set of packet fields of the first received data packet for use during a subsequent classification stage, prefetch a hash table bucket from the hash table based on a key signature of the prefetched key for use during another subsequent classification stage, and prefetch a traffic flow to be applied to the first received data packet based on the prefetched hash table bucket and the prefetched key. The computing device handles processing of received data packets such that a fetch classification operation is performed by the flow classification module on the first received data packet while a non-fetch classification operation is performed by the flow classification module on a second received data packet. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341741 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a communication device including a communication control unit that inserts, into a destination field of a data packet, intermediate node designation information designating an intermediate node different from a destination node of the data packet on a path to the destination node, and a transmission unit that transmits the data packet into which the intermediate node designation information is inserted. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341954 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a data transmission method, apparatus and system. The method includes: receiving an RTS frame sent by a legacy STA on a channel including a primary channel, and sending an indicating frame to the legacy STA and a new station, for enabling the legacy STA to send data on the channel including the primary channel according to the indicating frame, and enabling the new station to send data on a secondary channel not occupied by the legacy STA according to the indicating frame. By adopting the data transmission method, apparatus and system provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure, uplink OFDMA data transmission under a compatible mode is achieved, and the problem of bandwidth waste caused by data transmission of the legacy STA is solved. | 11-26-2015 |
20150350056 | ROUTING SWITCH DEVICE - The present disclosure provides a method and device for use by a routing switch device. In response to a determination to switch the routing switch device to switch from a conventional mode to an OpenFlow mode the following operations are performed. Table items of a forwarding table in the conventional mode are converted to flow table items in the OpenFlow mode. The converted flow table items are stored in a flow table of the routing switch device. Processing a received data packet based, at least in part, on the converted flow table items stored in the flow table. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350068 | CLIENT APPLICATIONS COMMUNICATING VIA A USER TUNNEL - Methods, systems, and apparatuses are provided for managing communication of data to/from a device. For example, multiple client applications running on the device can communicate to a second device through a same primary socket connection. A mux module can receive data from two different client applications over respective client connections. The received data can include header information identifying the second device as the destination. When the first data from a first client application is received at the mux module, the primary socket connection can be created; and when the second data from a second client application is received, the existing primary socket connection can be identified and re-used. The primary socket connection can be managed by a controller of the mux module. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350070 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR USE IN A SPACEWIRE-BASED NETWORK - An apparatus for use in a SpaceWire-based network is configured to send and receive data packets, and process data included in a received data packet. A header of the received data packet is stored in a buffer whilst the data is being processed, a processed data packet including the stored header and the processed data is generated, and the processed data packet is transmitted. The header of the received data packet may be modified, and the modified header attached to the processed data to generate the processed data packet. When the data packet is received via a first port, the processed data packet may be transmitted via the first port, or may be transmitted via a second port. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350071 | SELECTING AN INTERFACE FOR PACKET ROUTING BASED ON APPLICATION-LAYER DATA - The disclosed embodiments relate to a system for selecting an interface for routing an outbound packet. During operation, the system receives an outbound packet to be routed to a destination address. Next, the system obtains application-layer data associated with the outbound packet, including one or more of a process identifier, an application identifier and a user identifier. The system then selects an interface through which to route the outbound packet based on the application-layer data, and uses the selected interface to route the outbound packet. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350074 | PACKET DATA COMMUNICATIONS - An internet packet comprises a header field, the header field including a field identifying a source address of the internet packet, a field identifying the destination address of the internet packet and a next header field identifying whether an extension header follows the header and a type of the extension header. The extension header indicates a hop-by-hop option header, the hop-by-hop extension header including a router alert option header type indicating that the extension field is optional for a router to read, and a field providing information for a gateway support node of a packet radio system network. A gateway support node is thereby provided with information, which may be required for example to support a mobile internet protocol (IP). However, by providing the router alert option field, a router is not required to read the remainder of the hop-by-hop option field. As a result, a reduction in the performance of the router in routing internet packets, which may have been incurred if the router was required to read all the hop-by-hop extension field can be limited. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350078 | FLOW-DRIVEN FORWARDING ARCHITECTURE FOR INFORMATION CENTRIC NETWORKS - A flow-driven forwarding strategy includes receiving an Interest packet, where the interest packet includes a flow state indicator. The content associated with the Interest packet is checked to determine whether that content is locally stored. Another check is performed to determine whether any previously received Interest packet has requested the content. In response to the content not being locally stored and no related Interest packet has been previously received, the flow state indicator is checked in the Interest packet. In response to the flow state indicator indicating that the Interest packet is associated with an active flow, forwarding information is extracted from a flow state table if a hop count has a value of zero or from the Interest packet if the hop count has a value greater than zero. The Interest packet is then forwarded to a next hop in accordance with the forwarding information. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350110 | Implementing a Transition Protocol in Which a First Rule Set for Routing Packets Received by a Group of Switches During a First Time Period is Updated to a Second Rule Set - A transition protocol is provided herein in which a first rule set for routing packets received by a group of switches during a first time period is to be updated to a second rule set. During a transition period, at least some switches in the group of switches route packets to a controller, while other switches in the group of switches route packets to a next hop that is unchanged by the change in the rule set. The controller forwards packets that are received from at least some of the switches in the group to a destination node each of the packets, as determined from the updated rule set. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350114 | DIFFERENTIAL DELAY COMPENSATION - In one embodiment, a method comprises receiving a plurality of data frames representing at least one virtually concatenated data stream, storing the plurality of data frames in a memory; and recording, for each of a plurality of data frames, a physical write address that indicates a position in the memory and a virtual write address that includes a multiframe indicator and a byte number indicator. | 12-03-2015 |
20150358228 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING DIFFERENT ROUTING PATHS BETWEEN NETWORKS - A method and apparatus is disclosed for analyzing IP data flows for the determination of an alternate routing path for network traffic between a known first network and a destination within an unknown second network on the Internet. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358229 | Re-Routing of Diameter Commands - The invention relates to a method, by a diameter routing unit ( | 12-10-2015 |
20150358231 | VEPA SWITCH MESSAGE FORWARDING - According to an example, a VEPA switch may receive a message and a determination may be made as to whether a Datapath of the VEPA switch includes a flow table entry for forwarding the message. In response to a determination that the VEPA switch does not include a flow table entry for forwarding the message, the message may be forwarded to a SDN controller through a SDN protocol that is to construct the flow table entry for forwarding the message according to information contained in the message, in which the constructed flow table entry identifies an egress port of the VEPA switch for forwarding the message. The VEPA switch may also obtain the constructed flow table entry from the SDN controller and forward the message via the egress port identified in the obtained flow table entry. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358232 | Packet Forwarding Method and VXLAN Gateway - A packet forwarding method and a VXLAN gateway. A VXLAN packet is received. The VXLAN packet includes a communication packet that is sent from a first VM to a second VM; a second VNI of a subnet in which a next-hop device of the communication packet is located is determined according to a first VNI of the VXLAN packet and an IP address of the second VM of the VXLAN packet; the communication packet is encapsulated according to the second VNI; and then an encapsulated VXLAN packet is forwarded to the next-hop device through a tunnel corresponding to the second VNI, to avoid that the VXLAN gateway can implement forwarding of the VXLAN packet only after the VXLAN gateway modifies the communication packet in the payload of the VXLAN packet, and improve efficiency of forwarding the VXLAN packet. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358233 | ITEM AGGREGATION IN SHORTEST PATH BRIDGING MAC-IN-MAC MODE (SPBM) NETWORK - According to an example, when transmitting MAC forwarding table items to other BEB devices in an SPBM network for synchronization, a BEB device aggregates a plurality of MAC forwarding table items in a MAC forwarding table belonging to a same MAC segment into an aggregated MAC forwarding item, and transmits the aggregated MAC forwarding table item to the other BEB devices. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358433 | EFFICIENT PACKET CLASSIFICATION FOR DYNAMIC CONTAINERS - A novel algorithm for packet classification that is based on a novel search structure for packet classification rules is provided. Addresses from all the containers are merged and maintained in a single Trie. Each entry in the Trie has additional information that can be traced back to the container from where the address originated. This information is used to keep the Trie in sync with the containers when the container definition dynamically changes. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358434 | EFFICIENT PACKET CLASSIFICATION FOR DYNAMIC CONTAINERS - A novel algorithm for packet classification that is based on a novel search structure for packet classification rules is provided. Addresses from all the containers are merged and maintained in a single Trie. Each entry in the Trie has additional information that can be traced back to the container from where the address originated. This information is used to keep the Trie in sync with the containers when the container definition dynamically changes. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358435 | FLOW MATCHING OPTIMIZATION IN SCALED ENVIRONMENTS - In one embodiment, a method includes identifying at a network device, a number of items for matching at a hash table, the number of items exceeding matching available with ternary content addressable memory (TCAM) at the network device, defining at the network device, an optimal cyclic redundancy check (CRC) polynomial based on the number of items for matching at the hash table, and generating at the network device, an optimal hash function based on the optimal CRC polynomial to extend packet classification capability at the network device. An apparatus is also disclosed herein. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358436 | NETWORK NODE AND METHOD OF OPERATING THE NETWORK NODE - A method of operating a network node includes receiving a response packet including an encoded content name, decoding the encoded content name, and transmitting the response packet based on the decoded content name. | 12-10-2015 |
20150365322 | PROVIDING VIRTUAL PRIVATE SERVICE CHAINS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method provided in one embodiment includes receiving a first data packet of a data flow at a first classifier in which the first data packet includes a first identifier. The method further includes determining a second classifier associated with the first identifier in which the second classifier is further associated with at least one service chain of a service chain environment. The method still further includes forwarding the first data packet to the second classifier. The second classifier is configured to receive the first data packet, determine a particular service chain of the at least one service chain to which the first data packet is to be forwarded, and forward the first data packet to the particular service chain. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365324 | HIGH-EFFICIENCY SERVICE CHAINING WITH AGENTLESS SERVICE NODES - An example method for distributed service chaining is provided and includes receiving a packet belonging to a service chain in a distributed virtual switch (DVS) network environment, the packet includes a network service header (NSH) indicating a service path identifier identifying the service chain. The packet is provided to a virtual Ethernet module (VEM) connected to an agentless service node (SN) providing an edge service such as a server load balancer (SLB). The VEM associates a service path identifier corresponding to the service chain with a local identifier such as a virtual local area network (VLAN). The agentless SN returns the packet to the VEM for forwarding on the VLAN. Because the VLAN corresponds exactly to the service path and service chain, the packet is forwarded directly to the next node in the service chain. This can enable agentless SNs to efficiently provide a service chain for network traffic. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365331 | Service Packet Processing Method, Apparatus, and System - The present invention discloses a service packet processing method, apparatus, and system. The method includes a first service atom receiving a second packet sent by a central switching device, where a first service packet is encapsulated in the second packet and the second packet further includes a first service path identifier. The first service atom performs first service processing according to information in the first service packet, to obtain a first processing result. The first service atom queries a first path switching entry according to the first processing result and the first service path identifier. The first service atom sends a third packet to the central switching device, where a source device identifier of the third packet is a device identifier of the first service atom, a second service packet is encapsulated in the third packet, and the third packet includes the second service path identifier. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365504 | CONTROL FRAME HANDLING BY A PROVIDER BACKBONE BRIDGE - A method and Bridge in a Provider Backbone Bridge Network, PBBN, for enabling frames from a Higher Layer Entity attached alternatively to a Provider Instance Port on an I-Component of a Backbone Edge Bridge or to a Customer Backbone Port on a B-Component of the Backbone Edge Bridge, to reach an intended entity in the PBBN. A Virtual Instance Port Service Access Point, VIP SAP, is configured for every VIP and every Higher Layer Entity configured on the I-Component. An Enhanced VIP Port Connectivity function utilizes the VIP SAP to tunnel customer-initiated Layer 2 Control Protocols, L2CPs. A Special Multiplexed SAP handles the frames of the Higher Layer Entity, and is assigned an I-SID value that is universally recognized to identify the L2CPs. A Service Instance Multiplex Entity utilizes the Special Multiplexed SAP to transfer frames between the Provider Instance Port or the Customer Backbone Port and the entity inside the PBBN. | 12-17-2015 |
20150372900 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system comprises: a node that requests a processing rule for processing a packet; a control apparatus that notifies a processing rule to the node in response to the request; and a plurality of path calculation apparatuses that calculate a forwarding path of the packet received by the node. The plurality of path calculation apparatuses calculate the forwarding path based on at least one policy for calculating the forwarding path, and notifies the calculated forwarding path to the control apparatus. The control apparatus generates based on one of a plurality of the notified forwarding paths the processing rule for forwarding the packet received by the node. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372906 | METHOD FOR ROUTING DATA, COMPUTER PROGRAM, NETWORK CONTROLLER AND NETWORK ASSOCIATED THEREWITH - A method for routing data in a computer network ( | 12-24-2015 |
20150372908 | HYBRID APPROACH FOR PERFORMANCE ENHANCING PROXIES - There are provided a transparent performance enhancing proxy, a method for operating a transparent performance enhancing proxy between a source device and a destination device, and corresponding computer program product. The method includes preserving, without translation, packet header information of a header for a packet received from the source device to be forwarded to the destination device. The method further includes during a transmission control protocol connection setup phase for the packet, preserving transmission control protocol connection semantics. The method also includes during a transmission control protocol data transfer phase for the packet, running a transmission control protocol by masquerading as the source device to the destination device and masquerading as the destination device to the source device to transmit the packet to the destination device with the preserved packet header information. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372909 | Method, Apparatus and System for Determining Transmission Path of Packet - A method, an apparatus and a system are provided, which relate to the communications field, for determining a transmission path of a packet, and can solve a problem that a determined transmission path of a packet is not accurate enough. The method includes determining, by a network device, a packet; acquiring, by the network device, a characteristic of the packet and an attribute of the packet according to the packet; and sending, by the network device, the characteristic of the packet, the attribute of the packet, and an attribute of the network device to a control device, so that the control device determines a transmission path of the packet according to the characteristic of the packet, the attribute of the packet, and the attribute of the network device. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372910 | System, Apparatus and Method for Managing Redundancy Elimination in Packet Storage During Observation of Data Movement - A network sensor that features a data store and a packet processing engine. In communication with the data store, the packet processing engine comprises (1) a cache management logic and (2) deduplication logic. The cache management logic is configured to analyze packets to determine whether (a) a packet under analysis include duplicated data and (b) content of the packet is targeted for storage in a same continuous logical storage area as the duplicated data. The deduplication logic, when activated by the cache management logic, is configured to generate a deduplication reference for insertion into the packet prior to storage. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372913 | TRANSITIONING BETWEEN COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS BETWEEN NETWORKS - A method is provided in one particular example and may include obtaining routing information for a plurality of Internet Protocol (IP) addresses in a first network that natively supports a first Internet protocol, the routing information for the plurality of IP addresses in the first network further comprising an additional IP address in the first network and an indication that the additional IP address in the first network is to be used as a tunnel endpoint within the first network for receiving data destined to any of the plurality of IP addresses in the first network; and sending data destined to any one of the plurality of IP addresses in the first network to the additional IP address in the first network. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372916 | ROUTING VIA MULTIPLE PATHS WITH EFFICIENT TRAFFIC DISTRIBUTION - A network element includes circuitry and one or more interfaces. The interfaces are configured to connect to a communication network. The circuitry is configured to assign multiple egress interfaces corresponding to respective different paths via the communication network for routing packets to a given destination-address group, to hold, for the given destination-address group, respective state information for each of multiple sets of hash results, to receive via an ingress interface a packet destined to the given destination-address group, to calculate a given hash result for the packet and identify a given set of hash results in which the given hash result falls, and to forward the packet via one of the multiple egress interfaces in accordance with the state information corresponding to the given destination-address group and the given set of hash results. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372917 | LOAD BALANCING OVERLAY NETWORK TRAFFIC USING A TEAMED SET OF NETWORK INTERFACE CARDS - In one embodiment, a server includes a processor and logic integrated with and/or executable by the processor. The logic is configured to hash at least a portion of a packet according to a hashing algorithm to obtain a hash value. The logic is also configured to select an uplink with which to forward the packet based on the hash value. In another embodiment, a method includes hashing at least a portion of at least one packet according to a hashing algorithm to obtain a hash value using an accelerated network interface card (NIC) of a server. The accelerated NIC is configured to provide overlay functionality. The method also includes selecting an uplink, based on the hash value, from a plurality of uplinks available to send traffic out to a network using the accelerated NIC. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372934 | Switch for Scheduled Time-Sensitive Data Egress - Systems and methods for scheduling data egress using a time-sensitive (TS) network switch. The TS network switch may include a functional unit, a plurality of ports, and a plurality of queues. Each port may be associated with a set of network addresses for TS packets and may be configured with a set of egress periods. Each queue may be associated with a TS packet type and a port. The functional unit may be configured to receive TS packets asynchronously from a network node via a first port, determine a second port for egressing a TS packet, determine an egress period for egressing the TS packet, determine that the TS packet cannot currently be egressed from the second port, queue the TS packet in a first queue, where the first queue is associated with the second port, and egress the TS packet in the respective time window from the second port. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372947 | PACKET PROCESSING METHOD AND DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a packet processing method and a device. The method includes: receiving a data packet that is generated and sent by a destination device after the destination device receives a first interest packet that is forwarded by a source device via the forwarding node, where the data packet carries a content name that is the same as a content name of content requested by using the first interest packet; when forwarding the first interest packet, generating, a PIT entry corresponding to the first interest packet in the PIT; and when determining that the data packet carries a second interest packet, matching the content name carried in the data packet with a content name in the PIT entry, and forwarding the data packet to the source device according to a port in the matched PIT entry. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373055 | Systems and Methods for Network Interoperability - Systems and methods for interoperating between networks. A first network may be configured to operate according to a first real time network protocol and each of one or more second networks may be configured to operate according to respective second real time traffic protocols. A mapping may specify data routing between a plurality of ports and the routing may maintain real time behavior between the first network and the one or more second networks. Additionally, routing information may be inserted in packets routed from the one or more second networks to the first network and removed from packets routed from the first network to the one or more second networks. The packets may be routed, based on the mapping, to distinct queues for the first network and the one or more second networks for processing by an application executing on at least one device. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373160 | METHOD OF USING BIT VECTORS TO ALLOW EXPANSION AND COLLAPSE OF HEADER LAYERS WITHIN PACKETS FOR ENABLING FLEXIBLE MODIFICATIONS AND AN APPARATUS THEREOF - Embodiments of the apparatus for modifying packet headers relate to a use of bit vectors to allow expansion and collapse of protocol headers within packets for enabling flexible modification. A rewrite engine expands each protocol header into a generic format and applies various commands to modify the generalized protocol header. The rewrite engine maintains a bit vector for the generalized protocol header with each bit in the bit vector representing a byte of the generalized protocol header. A bit marked as 0 in the bit vector corresponds to an invalid byte, while a bit marked as 1 in the bit vector corresponds to a valid byte. The rewrite engine uses the bit vector to remove all the invalid bytes after all commands have been operated on the generalized protocol header to thereby form a new protocol header. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373162 | CUT-THROUGH FORWARDING OF CCNx MESSAGE FRAGMENTS WITH IP ENCAPSULATION - One embodiment provides a system that facilitates cut-through forwarding of message fragments over a network. During operation, the system receives a packet that corresponds to a fragment of a message and contains a fragment header. The system stores in a data structure a mapping relationship between the fragment header and a hierarchically structured variable-length identifier (HSVLI), wherein the HSVLI comprises contiguous name components ordered from a most general level to a most specific level. The system makes a forwarding decision for the packet based on the fragment header prior to receiving all fragment packets associated with the message, thereby facilitating cut-through forwarding of the message fragments over a network. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373165 | METHOD OF HANDLING LARGE PROTOCOL LAYERS FOR CONFIGURABLE EXTRACTION OF LAYER INFORMATION AND AN APPARATUS THEREOF - Embodiments of the apparatus for handling large protocol layers relate to an implementation that optimizes a field selection circuit. This implementation provides software like flexibility to a hardware parser engine in parsing packets. The implementation limits a size of each layer and splits any layer that exceeds that size into smaller layers. The parser engine extracts data from the split layers just as it would from a non-split layer and, then, concatenates the extracted data in a final result. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373166 | METHOD OF IDENTIFYING INTERNAL DESTINATIONS OF NETWORK PACKETS AND AN APPARATUS THEREOF - Embodiments of the apparatus of identifying internal destinations of network packets relate to a network chip that allows flexibility in handling packets. The handling of packets can be a function of what the packet contents are or where the packets are from. The handling of packets can also be a function of both what the packet contents are and where the packets are from. In some embodiments, where the packets are from refers to unique port numbers of chip ports that the packets arrived at. The packets can be distributed for processing within the network chip. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373167 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - The present invention relates to a network communication apparatus | 12-24-2015 |
20150381385 | PACKET ENCAPSULATION WITH REDIRECTED DMA FOR SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKS - A method, system, and computer program product for encapsulating a packet within a virtualized network. The method includes writing one or more first translation control entries (TCEs) from a TCE table of a client system to a TCE table of a host system, and writing one or more second TCEs to the TCE table of the host system. The first TCEs indicate a location within the client system of payload data for the packet, and the second TCEs indicate a location within the host system of at least one of header and footer information to be included with the payload data. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381386 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VXLAN ENCAPSULATION OFFLOAD - A method for virtual extensible local area network (VXLAN) encapsulation. The method includes receiving a first augmented MAC frame on a first ingress port of a first network device, where the first augmented MAC frame includes a first egress port ID (EPID), a first ingress port ID (IPID), and a first MAC frame. The method further includes identifying a first destination VXLAN tunnel endpoint (VTEP) internet protocol (IP) address based on the first EPID, where the first destination VTEP IP address is associated with a first destination VTEP. The method further includes identifying a source VTEP IP address based on the first IPID, performing VXLAN encapsulation of the first MAC frame to obtain a VXLAN frame, and sending the VXLAN frame to the first destination VTEP via a first egress port of the first network device. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381478 | PROXY FOR PORT TO SERVICE INSTANCE MAPPING - A method for managing a chain of service appliances. A method for interoperating with a legacy service appliance which does not understand/interpret the service chain header format. The method specifies a proxy device which receives a data packet with chain header that contains a chain ID. The chain ID identifies a particular service chain of network services to be performed on the data packet by a plurality of service appliances. The method removes a chain header from the data packet. The method sends the data packet to the service appliance via a logical port that corresponds to the data packet's chain ID. The method includes receiving the data packet back from the service appliance via the logical port. Lastly, the method includes restoring the chain header in the data packet based upon the logical port through which the data packet is received. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381480 | NETWORK SYSTEM, RESOURCE CONTROL DEVICE, AND VIRTUAL MACHINE GENERATION DEVICE - In a resource control device ( | 12-31-2015 |
20150381485 | Overlay Switch - The present invention discloses an overlay switch (OSW) and a method used by the same. A received unicast packet needs to pass a waypoint chain including a number of waypoints. A network address of a first waypoint of the waypoint chain and an underlay network address of a second OSW connected to the first waypoint are obtained. In response to a determination that the second OSW is not the first OSW the unicast packet is encapsulated into a first underlay network packet according to a specification of an overlay network. A field of a destination header of the first underlay network packet includes the underlay network address of the second OSW. The first underlay network packet is sent to the second OSW. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381488 | NETWORK VIRTUALIZATION USING JUST-IN-TIME DISTRIBUTED CAPABILITY FOR CLASSIFICATION ENCODING - A method for providing a “just-in-time” distributed capability for classification encoding is described. When a source transport node processes a new flow (a flow for the first time), the source transport node in some embodiments sends a metadata packet “just-in-time” to the destination transport node to propagate the classification encoding to use for the given flow. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381489 | TECHNIQUES FOR ENABLING THE EFFICIENT OPERATION OF ARBITRARILY INTERCONNECTED MESH NETWORKS - Wireless mesh networks (or “meshes”) are enabled for arbitrary interconnection to each other and may provide varying levels of coverage and redundancy as desired. Interoperability between meshes having differing configurations, internal operations, or both, may be freely intermixed and inter-operated in unrestricted combination. Enhanced explicit inter-bridge control protocols operate using pre-existing control packets. Pre-existing broadcast packet floods are used to learn the best paths across interconnected meshes (termed a “multi-mesh”). Enhanced routing protocols operating within each mesh may optionally examine information limited to the respective mesh when forwarding traffic, thus enabling robust multi-mesh scaling with respect to memory and processing time required by the routing protocols. Communication scalability is improved by enabling frequency diversity across the multi-mesh by configuring meshes within interference range of each other for operation at a plurality of frequencies. Each mesh may operate at a respective non-interfering frequency. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381491 | PACKET ENCAPSULATION WITH REDIRECTED DMA FOR SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKS - A method, system, and computer program product for encapsulating a packet within a virtualized network. The method includes writing one or more first translation control entries (TCEs) from a TCE table of a client system to a TCE table of a host system, and writing one or more second TCEs to the TCE table of the host system. The first TCEs indicate a location within the client system of payload data for the packet, and the second TCEs indicate a location within the host system of at least one of header and footer information to be included with the payload data. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381492 | DUAL PURPOSE ON-CHIP BUFFER MEMORY FOR LOW LATENCY SWITCHING - In one embodiment, an apparatus includes a buffer memory, at least one ingress port, at least one egress port, at least one processor, and logic integrated with and/or executable by the at least one processor, the logic being configured to communicate with a software-defined network (SDN) controller, store one or more look-up tables in a first portion of the buffer memory, receive a packet using an ingress port, and determine an egress port for the packet. In another embodiment, a method for switching packets in a SDN includes storing one or more took-up tables in a first portion of a buffer memory of a SDN-capable switching device, receiving a packet using an ingress port of the switching device, and determining an egress port for the packet. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381493 | SERVICE CHAINING ACROSS MULTIPLE NETWORKS - In some examples, a controller comprises one or more processors; a control unit configured to obtain, from a router in a first network, a route that specifies a next hop to an address prefix reachable by the first network; and a service chain unit configured to generate a modified route that specifies a service node as the next hop for the address prefix, wherein the service node is external to the first network, and wherein the control unit is further configured to send the modified route to a second network, the modified route marked with an import route target configured for a provider edge router of the second network so that traffic from the first network and destined for the second network is forwarded to the service node. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381494 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS TO OFFLOAD OVERLAY NETWORK PACKET ENCAPSULATION TO HARDWARE - A method for offloading packet encapsulation for an overlay network is provided. The method, at a virtualization software of a host, sends a mapping table of the overlay network to a physical network interface controller (NIC) associated with the host. The mapping table maps the identification of each of a set of virtual machine (VM) of a tenant on the host to an identification of a tunnel on the overlay network. The method, at the virtualization software, receives a packet from a VM of the tenant. The method sends the packet to the physical NIC. The method, at the physical NIC, encapsulates the packet for transmission over the overlay network by using the mapping table. The method of claim also tags the packet by the virtualization software as a packet that requires encapsulation for transmission in the overlay network prior to sending the packet to the physical NIC. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381495 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING MULTI-TENANCY SUPPORT FOR SINGLE ROOT I/O VIRTUALIZATION - A method for providing support for multi-tenancy in single root input/out virtualization (SR-IOV) enabled physical network interface controller (NIC) is provided. The NIC is associated with a host. The SR-IOV provides a physical function (PF) and a set of virtual functions (VFs) for the NIC. The method at a VF of the physical NIC, receives a mapping table of an overlay network which associates an identification of each of a set of virtual machine (VM) of a tenant on the host to an identification of a tunnel end point on the overlay network. The method receives a transmit packet from a VM connected to the VF and performs a lookup in the mapping table to identify source and destination tunnel end points associated with source and destination VMs in the packet. The method encapsulates the packet, for transmission through the tunnel end point associated with the source VM. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381529 | MAINTENANCE OF A FABRIC PRIORITY AMONG OPERATIONS WITHIN A FIBRE CHANNEL EXCHANGE - A first device that is coupled to a second device receives a first Fibre Channel frame, wherein the first Fibre Channel frame has a priority indicated by the second device. The first device responds to the second device with a second Fibre Channel frame that has an identical priority to the priority indicated by the second device. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381773 | Dual-Homed External Network Access in a Distributed Internet Protocol (IP) Router - Dual-homed forwarding techniques ensure that packets destined for a private network location are forwarded directly to the private network. Host devices adapted for dual-homed forwarding techniques may first search a forwarding table to identify an outgoing interface associated with a packet's destination address, and then search an egress table to identify an entry associated with the outgoing interface. The identified entry in the egress table indicates whether the outgoing interface is a remote interface, and if so, a dual-homing identifier associated with the outgoing interface. If so, the host device searches the forwarding table a second time to determine whether any local interfaces are associated with the dual-homing identifier. The packet is then forwarded either over the local outgoing interface associated with the dual-homing identifier or the originally identified outgoing interface. | 12-31-2015 |
20160006583 | CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SWITCH CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM - A plurality of switches include first packet forwarding function that processes a packet based on control information set externally, and second packet forwarding function that learns relationship between a transmission source address and a receiving port of a received packet and determines an output port of a packet. A control apparatus comprises: communication unit that communicates with the plurality of switches; control information setting unit that sets control information instructing the first packet forwarding function of the plurality of switches to forward a packet using the second packet forwarding function; path calculation unit that calculates a packet forwarding path based on connection relationship among the plurality of switches; and VLAN setting unit that sets a VLAN ID predetermined for the packet for input/output ports of the packet in a switch(es) on the packet forwarding path. | 01-07-2016 |
20160006651 | Stacking Metadata Contexts for Service Chains - Presented herein are techniques useful in a network comprising a plurality of network nodes each configured to apply one or more service functions to traffic that passes through the respective network nodes. A network node receives packets encapsulated in a service header that includes information defining a first set of context headers stacked into an association of metadata that is relevant to one or more service functions within a service path comprised of one or more network nodes. The network node performs at least one of the service functions in the service path and rewrites the service header with a second set of context headers. The second set of context headers include metadata derived from performing the service function(s) at the network node. | 01-07-2016 |
20160006654 | BI-DIRECTIONAL FLOW STICKINESS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method for bi-directional flow stickiness in a network environment is provided and includes receiving a packet of a flow from a source address in a network, and destined to a destination address outside the network, looking up a flow table for an entry corresponding to the flow, and caching a forward flow entry and a reverse flow entry in the flow table if the look up results in a miss, the forward flow entry indicating a routing lookup, and the reverse flow entry indicating a previous hop from which the packet was received to maintain a bi-directional flow stickiness. Some embodiments also include receiving another packet from the destination address outside the network destined to the source address in the network, and forwarding it to the previous hop listed in the reverse flow entry. | 01-07-2016 |
20160006655 | CONTROL METHOD, PACKET PROCESSING DEVICE, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A control method executed by a packet processing device, the control method includes receiving, by a first processor, a received packet; identifying first processing execution information corresponding to the received packet, from among a plurality of first processing execution information, by referring to the first memory, based on packet identification information included in the received packet; and transmitting processing specification information included in the identified first processing execution information together with the received packet, to a second processor, when the processing specification information included in the identified first processing execution information specifies processing by the second processor; receiving, by the second processor, the processing specification information included in the identified first processing execution information and the received packet; and executing the processing for the received packet in accordance with second processing execution information specified by the received processing specification information, by referring to the plurality of second processing execution information. | 01-07-2016 |
20160006656 | Packet Processing Method and System, and Device - The application disclose a packet processing method that includes: receiving, by a service distribution node, service routing information sent by a controller, where the service routing information includes a flow identifier, a service identifier, and a next-hop address, the flow identifier is used to identify a packet flow, the service identifier is used to identify a sequence of a service node instance that processes the packet flow, and the next-hop address is used to identify the service node instance that processes the packet flow; receiving a first packet; acquiring a first flow identifier according to the first packet, and searching the service routing information according to the first flow identifier to acquire a matched service identifier and a matched next-hop address; and sending a second packet to a first service node instance that has the matched next-hop address, which implements service processing on a packet flow. | 01-07-2016 |
20160006687 | Adaptive Load Balancing For Bridged Systems - Methods, systems, and computer program products for providing adaptive load balancing for bridged systems are disclosed. Examples generally relate to both physical and virtualized computer systems. A computer-implemented method may include mapping a first network interface to each of a plurality of intermediate network interfaces, determining a second network interface to use from the intermediate network interfaces for sending an outbound packet received from the first network interface, updating the outbound packet by replacing a source layer-2 network address of the outbound packet with a layer-2 network address assigned to a mapping between the first network interface and the second network interface, and sending the updated outbound packet using the second network interface. | 01-07-2016 |
20160014025 | GENERATING A HOST ROUTE | 01-14-2016 |
20160014028 | PREFIX DISTRIBUTION-BASED TABLE PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATION IN SDN | 01-14-2016 |
20160014037 | DATA PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD AND SYSTEM, TERMINAL DEVICE AND NETWORK DEVICE | 01-14-2016 |
20160014046 | METHOD FOR ALLOCATING FRAME TRANSMISSION TIME SLOTS | 01-14-2016 |
20160014242 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM | 01-14-2016 |
20160020923 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MONITORING NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - A system and method for monitoring network communications are provided. The method comprises capturing one or more packets of data in a networking stack of a computing device. Then, a unique identifier is associated with the computing device that uniquely identifies the computing device. The unique identifier and a sample of the contents of each of the one or more captured packets of data are then stored. The method may further comprise generating hybrid flow data by processing the stored unique identifier and the sample of the contents of each of the one or more captured packets of data. The hybrid data flow comprises the unique identifier, the sample of the contents of each of the one or more captured packets of data, derived network flow data, and derived statistical packet data. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020993 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PERFORMING DEBUGGING OPERATIONS ON NETWORKS USING A CONTROLLER - A controller implemented on computing equipment may control switches in a network. The controller may provide flow tables that implement network policies to the switches to control packet forwarding through the network. The controller may provide debug table entries to the switches for use in a debug table that is separate from the flow table. The debug table entries may match incoming network packets and increment corresponding counters on the switches. The controller may retrieve count information from the counters for performing debugging operations on the network. For example, the controller may identify conflicts between fields of a selected flow table entry, determine whether elephant packet flows are present between switches, determine whether desired load balancing is being performed, determine whether a network path has changed, determine whether packet loss has occurred, and/or determine whether network packets are taking undesired paths based on the retrieved count information. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021000 | SEGMENT ROUTING USING A REMOTE FORWARDING ADJACENCY IDENTIFIER - Disclosed is an apparatus and method for segment routing using a remote forwarding adjacency identifier. In one embodiment, a first node in a network receives a packet, wherein the packet is received with a first segment-ID and another segment ID attached thereto. The first node detaches the first and the other segment IDs from the packet. Then the first node attaches a first label to the packet. Eventually, the first node forwards the packet with the attached first label directly to a second node in the network. In one embodiment, the other segment ID corresponds to a forwarding adjacency or tunnel label switched path between the first node and another node. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021004 | GLOBAL IP-BASED SERVICE-ORIENTED NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - Data is transferred. A data packet associated with an application flow is received. A Pseudowire label is determined based at least in part on an application header associated with the data packet. The data packet is encapsulated with the Pseudowire label. The data packet is transferred over a Pseudowire using the Pseudowire label. | 01-21-2016 |
20160028611 | DISJOINT MULTI-PATHING FOR A DATA CENTER NETWORK - According to one embodiment, an apparatus includes a processor and logic integrated with and/or executable by the processor. The logic is configured to determine paths between a plurality of switches connected together in a system by performing path calculations based on a topology of the system. The logic is also configured to calculate one or more disjoint multi-paths from among the paths, the one or more disjoint multi-paths connecting a source device to a destination device. The source device is connected to a first switch of the plurality of switches, and the destination device is connected to a second switch of the plurality of switches. Moreover, the logic is configured to write the one or more disjoint multi-paths into a forwarding table of at least one device. Other systems and computer program products are presented according to more embodiments. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028612 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF SHORTEST PATH BRIDGING (SPB) ENHANCED RESILIENCE WITH LOOP MITIGATION - A method forward Ethernet frames at a node in a network supporting an implementation of shortest path bridging (SPB) protocol is disclosed. The method starts with a shortest path computation for the node (referred to as the computing node). The shortest path computation selects at least a shortest path to each destination node in the network, where a neighboring node on the shortest path to reach each node is recorded. Then it computes a downstream loop-free alternate (LFA) node for a destination node, where the LFA node is downstream of the computing node but not on the selected shortest path to the destination node from the computing node. Then when connectivity to the neighboring node on the computed shortest path is detected to be abnormal, the node forwards an Ethernet frame with a destination media access control (MAC) address corresponding to the destination node through the LFA node. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028621 | PROVIDER EDGE IN VIRTUAL PRIVATE LAN SERVICE NETWORK - In a VPLS network, a first PE in a VPN instance sends topology information and a bridging MAC address of the first PE to another PE in the VPN instance, receives and stores topology information and bridging MAC addresses from the another PE. The first PE further generates a CE MAC table in the VPN instance according to the stored topology information and bridging MAC addresses of the another PE; calculates a unicast minimal spanning tree by taking the first PE as a root, generates a unicast MAC table in the VPN instance according to the unicast minimal spanning tree. Each PE further selects one of the PEs in the VPN instance as a root bridge, calculates a broadcast minimal spanning tree by taking the root bridge as a root, and generates a broadcast MAC table in the VPN instance according to the broadcast minimal spanning tree. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028622 | NETWORK PATH SETUP METHOD BASED ON IDENTIFIER, AND APPARATUS THEREOF - Exemplary embodiments of the present invention relate to a network path setup method based on identifier and apparatus thereof. A network path setup method in a repeater equipment, the method comprising: receiving a packet; determining whether source/destination node identifiers included in the received packet are stored in a routing table; and updating the routing table based on a node identifier and a port number which is used for packet transmission to the node when it is determined as that the node identifier is not stored. According to exemplary embodiments of the present invention, it simplifies a routing table to quickly search packet paths and reduces traffics since it does not require to define an additional header. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028624 | VIRTUAL MACHINE MIGRATION - According to an example, virtual machine (VM) migration may include generating a redundant tunnel between a common edge device (ED) of a plurality of common EDs of a multi-site network (MSN) and a gateway ED of the MSN. A gateway media access control (MAC) address and a static route may be configured for forwarding an Internet protocol (IP) message between the common ED and the gateway ED using the redundant tunnel. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028625 | PACKET FORWARDING BASED ON PATH ENCODING - In general, a capability for forwarding packets based on path encoding is presented. The capability for forwarding a packet based on path encoding may be configured to enable forwarding of a packet along a network path by determining a path encoding label for the network path, associating the path encoding label for the network path with the packet, and forwarding the packet along the network path based on the path encoding label associated with the packet. The network path for a packet may include an ordered sequence of node output interfaces of an ordered sequence of nodes. The path encoding label for the network path includes an ordered sequence of node interface labels corresponding to the ordered sequence of node output interfaces of the nodes of the network path. The nodes of the network path forward the packet along the network path based on the path encoding label. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028627 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS THEREOF - To provide a stable high speed wireless network, the relay process is solved at the lower layers (PHY layer, MAC layer) without depending on upper layers to reduce the load of the upper layers to the utmost. Discrimination is made between a packet of one's own station and a relay packet to process the presence and absence of the relay packet without using a CPU to construct a wireless network executing the relay processing at a high speed. Further, the retransmission is executed without using a CPU to provide a stable wireless network. In addition, the table for relay process (routing table) is constantly updated to add to the table the information of the packets of which processes are not executed to eventually suppress unnecessary processes. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028628 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS, ADDRESS ALLOCATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system includes an allocated address storage unit that stores an address allocated using host location information, and an address management unit that refers to the allocated address storage unit and uses the host location information to allocate an address to a host to which the address has not been allocated. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028631 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RANGE MATCHING - Methods and systems for range matching. The system holds a definition of one or more ranges of Internet Protocol (IP) addresses. The definition may specify any desired number of ranges of any suitable size, and some ranges may overlap one another or be contained in one another. The definition may also specify certain returned values and/or relative priorities for the various ranges. In a pre-processing phase, a hash table that is subsequently queried with addresses to be range-matched. The hash table may be updated at run-time. During operation, the system receives addresses (e.g., extracts addresses from monitored communication traffic) and identifies by querying the hash table, for each address, whether the address falls within any of the ranges. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028683 | Using a Virtual Internet Protocol Address to Represent Dually Connected Hosts in an Internet Protocol Overlay Network - Techniques are presented herein for distributing address information of host devices in a network. At a first router device, a packet is received from a first host device that is destined for a second host device. The first host device is dually-connected to the first router and a second router device. The second router device is part of a virtual port channel pair with the first router device. A message is sent to the second router device, the message indicating that the first host device is connected to the second router device. The packet is encapsulated with an overlay header and is sent to a third router device that is connected to the second host device. The encapsulated packet contains a Layer 2 address associated with the first host device and a Layer 3 address associated with the first host device. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028851 | Distributed Service Processing of Network Gateways Using Virtual Machines - A network gateway device includes an ingress interface, an egress interface, and a load balancing module coupled to the ingress and egress interfaces. The load balancing module configured to receive a packet from the ingress interface, determine a set of a plurality of processes corresponding to a connections session associated with the packet based on a policy. For each of the identified processes, the load balancing module is to identify a service processing module executed by a virtual machine that is capable of handling the identified process, and to send the packet to the identified service processing module to perform the identified process on the packet. The packet is then transmitted to the egress interface of the gateway device to be forwarded to a destination. | 01-28-2016 |
20160028859 | PACKET PROCESSING PROGRAM, PACKET PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND PACKET PROCESSING METHOD - A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing therein a packet processing program for causing a computer to execute a process includes specifying, according to acquisition of an IP packet, on the basis of information for specifying a communication session included in a header of the acquired IP packet, a communication session in which the acquired IP packet is transmitted and received, referring to management information corresponding to the specified communication session, and discarding the acquired IP packet when the management information corresponding to an IP packet identifier of the acquired IP packet is present and, when the management information corresponding to the IP packet identifier of the acquired IP packet is absent, storing the management information corresponding to the IP packet identifier of the acquired IP packet in the storage. | 01-28-2016 |
20160036697 | HETEROGENEOUS OVERLAY NETWORK TRANSLATION FOR DOMAIN UNIFICATION - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving first overlay network traffic via a first input overlay tunnel at a multi-protocol virtual tunnel end point (VTEP) implemented in an accelerated network interface card (NIC) of a server. The method also includes routing the first overlay network traffic to a second overlay network tunnel which adheres to a second overlay network protocol in response to a determination that a destination of the first overlay network traffic is specified as the second overlay network tunnel. Moreover, the method includes receiving second overlay network traffic via the first input overlay tunnel at the multi-protocol VTEP. The method also includes bridging the second overlay network traffic to a first destination overlay network tunnel terminated at the multi-protocol VTEP in response to a determination that a destination of the second overlay network traffic is specified as the first destination overlay network tunnel. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036699 | Increased Network Scalability by Router Aware Switches - Handling of ELS REQ and RSP packets that contain addresses in the payload is shifted to the edge fabric switches connected to the node devices issuing and receiving the ELS REQ packet, the ingress and egress switches. This allows the ELS REQ and RSP packet payload address modification operations to be removed from the tasks handled by the router processor. As this removes a processing burden from the router processors, those router processors are free to handle other normal operations, thus allowing more processor bandwidth to be provided to those other operations, which allows further growth of the network as one limitation has been removed. The need to replicate or provide commands between switches or routers is avoided as there are no redundant paths at that point. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036700 | DISTRIBUTED VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK - A system includes: multiple access points, the multiple access points including at least a first access point and a second access point; the system performs operations including: receiving, by the second access point from a client device, a data packet to be transmitted to a device outside of the system; forwarding the data packet by the second access point to the first access point; assigning, by the first access point, a first sequence number to the data packet to be used for transmitting the data packet outside of the system; transmitting the data packet with the first sequence number to the device outside of the system. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036702 | FORWARDING PACKETS - A first access switch in the first Fabric receives a notification sent by a second access switch in the first Fabric, and the notification includes a nickname of the second access switch. The first access switch identifies an egress interface to a TRILL path from the first access switch to an access switch corresponding to the nickname in the notification. The first access switch stores the egress interface to the TRILL path in a fiber channel (FC) forwarding table. The first access switch forwards a received FCoE packet by using the egress interface stored in the FC forwarding table. The FCoE packet is forwarded by the first access switch without encapsulation with a TRILL header. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036703 | SCALABLE MAC ADDRESS VIRTUALIZATION - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch. The switch includes one or more ports, a media access control (MAC) address management apparatus, and a forwarding apparatus. The MAC address management apparatus generates a routable MAC address mapped to an end device's MAC address learned from one of the one or more ports. The routable MAC address includes an endpoint identifier identifying an endpoint for the end device. The forwarding apparatus swaps the learned MAC address with the routable MAC address in a header of a packet. Alternatively, the MAC address management apparatus provides one or more routable MAC addresses to a hypervisor for assigning to virtual machines running on the hypervisor. The forwarding apparatus then determines an egress port from the one or more ports for a packet comprising a routable MAC address based on the endpoint identifier. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036715 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A wireless communication device including: a memory, and a processor coupled to the memory and configured to: wirelessly receive a packet including a header that is compressed by another wireless communication device, decompress the compressed header based on a set compression mode among a plurality of compression modes, each of the plurality of compression modes having a different amount of feedback information transmitted from the wireless communication device to the another wireless communication device, obtain a quality of a wireless channel from the another wireless communication device to the wireless communication device, and select the set compression mode based on the obtained quality of the wireless channel. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036723 | LOW-COST FLOW MATCHING IN SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKS WITHOUT TCAMS - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method for processing data packets by a first-hop switch in a data network, including: receiving a first data packet associated with a flow; determining whether the flow associated with the first data packet is found in a flow table in the first-hop switch; modifying the first data packet by replacing a packet header field with flow definition information; and transmitting the modified first data packet based upon the flow definition information. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036773 | INTERNET PROTOCOL ADDRESS RESOLUTION - A first edge node in a first site network receives an Internet Protocol (IP) address resolving request packet from a device in the first site network. The first edge node replaces a source Media Access Control (MAC) address of an Ethernet frame header and a sender MAC address in a packet body of the IP address resolving request packet with the MAC address of the first edge node. The first edge node forwards the IP address resolving request packet to a second site network via a tunnel linking the first site network and the second site network. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036774 | GLOBAL VLAN SERVICES - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch in a network of interconnected switches. The switch includes a forwarding domain apparatus and a forwarding apparatus. The forwarding domain apparatus maintains a mapping between a first virtual local area network (VLAN) identifier and a first global VLAN identifier in a local storage device. The global VLAN identifier represents a layer-2 forwarding domain in the network and is distinct from a customer VLAN or a service-provider VLAN. The mapping is independent of a type of the VLAN identifier. During operation, the forwarding apparatus encapsulates a first packet belonging to the first VLAN in a network encapsulation header. The encapsulated packet is forwardable in the network based on the network encapsulation header. The forwarding apparatus includes the first global VLAN identifier in the network encapsulation header of the first packet. | 02-04-2016 |
20160043840 | PACKET TRANSMITTER, INTERFACE DEVICE AND COMPUTING SYSTEM INCLUDING THE SAME - A packet transmitter includes a higher layer transmission block and a lower layer transmission block. The higher layer transmission block generates a higher layer data signal including payload data and a header for each packet of a plurality of packets based on an application layer data signal and an application layer control signal. The higher layer transmission block outputs the header after the payload data through the higher layer data signal. The lower layer transmission block generates a lower layer data signal including the header and the payload data for each packet based on the higher layer data signal and a higher layer control signal. The lower layer transmission block outputs the payload data after the header through the lower layer data signal. | 02-11-2016 |
20160043931 | Method for Switching a Communication Connection from a First Connection Path to a Second Connection Path - There are described packets transmitted via the first connection path comprise a first packet propagation time. Said packets are temporarily stored in a first intermediate memory of a receiver unit. The packets transmitted via the second connection path comprise a second packet propagation time and are temporarily stored in a second intermediate memory of the receiver unit. All packets stored in the first step in the first intermediate memory are emitted. Subsequently, packets stored in the second intermediate memory are emitted. According to a first embodiment, each x | 02-11-2016 |
20160043946 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AGGREGATING MULTI-USER MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT FRAMES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems, methods, and apparatuses for aggregating multi-user media access control protocol data units (MPDU) frame in a wireless network are provided. One aspect of this disclosure provides a method of wireless communication. The method includes generating, by an apparatus, an aggregated media access control protocol data unit (A-MPDU) frame comprising a plurality of media access control protocol data unit (MPDU) frames. A first MPDU frame of the plurality of MPDU frames is intended for at least a first device of a first type and a second MPDU frame of the plurality of MPDU frames is intended for at least a second device of a second type. The method further comprises inserting a value that is not defined for the second device into a media access control (MAC) header field of the first MPDU frame intended for the first device or the second MPDU frame intended for the second device. | 02-11-2016 |
20160043947 | SUBSCRIBER STATION FOR A BUS SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BROADBAND CAN COMMUNICATION - A user station for a bus system implementing broadband CAN communication includes: a communication control device for creating or reading at least one message for/from at least one further user station of the bus system, in which exclusive, collision-free access of a user station to a bus of the bus system is ensured at least intermittently; and a data interleaving device for interleaving data packets of at least two messages into a single message, so that the data packets are situated in one data segment of the single message. The single message has a shared outer frame header for the data packets in front of the data segment and a shared outer frame end for the data packets after the data segment. | 02-11-2016 |
20160043948 | COMMUNICATIONS OVER MULTIPLE PROTOCOL INTERFACES IN A COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - According to one aspect of the present disclosure, a system for communications over multiple protocol interfaces in a computing environment includes a processor and a memory storing interface logic executable by the processor to: identify a first communications protocol of a network interface for egress data packet communications; responsive to the identified first communications protocol of the network interface differing from a second communications protocol to be used for the data packet communications, derive fragmentation data according to a data packet fragmentation protocol corresponding to the second communications protocol; generate an application layer header for the data packet communications; store values of the fragmentation data in select fields of the application layer header; fragment the data packet communications according to the data packet fragmentation protocol; and transmit the data packet communications including the application layer header over the identified network interface. | 02-11-2016 |
20160043950 | PROGRESSIVE MAC ADDRESS LEARNING - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch in a network of interconnected switches. The switch includes a storage device, a hardware management apparatus, and a layer-2 management apparatus. The storage device stores a forwarding table, which includes an entry comprising a MAC address and an egress port for the MAC address. The hardware management apparatus determines whether a destination MAC address of a frame is present in a hardware table in memory of the switch. The layer-2 management apparatus, in response to a determination that the destination MAC address is not present in the hardware table, looks up a first entry comprising the destination MAC address in the forwarding table, and creates a second entry comprising the destination MAC address in the hardware table based on the first entry. | 02-11-2016 |
20160043951 | ROUTING REQUESTS WITH VARIED PROTOCOLS TO THE SAME ENDPOINT WITHIN A CLUSTER - Embodiments are directed to routing requests with different protocols to the same destination. In one scenario, a computer system receives a request that uses a specified protocol. The request includes a request source identifier and a request destination identifier. The computer system identifies, based on both the request source identifier and the request destination identifier, a destination to send the request to and generates a routing entry for the request that indicates which destination the first request was sent to. The computer system receives another request that uses a different protocol. This request includes a request source identifier and a request destination identifier of its own. The computer system determines that the request source identifier and request destination identifier of the subsequent request match those of the generated routing entry, and routes the subsequent request to the destination indicated in the routing entry. | 02-11-2016 |
20160043969 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA THROUGH AN AGGREGATED CONNECTION - The present invention discloses methods and systems for processing data packets received at a first network node and for processing encapsulating packets received at a second network node. The first network node receives data packets from its network interface. It then selects a first tunnel and selects none or at least one second tunnel according to a selection policy. Original encapsulating packets (OEPs) are transmitted to a second network node through the first tunnel and at least one duplicate encapsulating packet (DEP) is transmitted through the at least one second tunnel. The second network node receives an encapsulating packet with a global sequence number (GSN) through an aggregated connection. The second network node determines whether one or more data packets corresponding to the encapsulating packet have been received earlier. The second network node may then determine whether or not to forward the one or more data packets. | 02-11-2016 |
20160050090 | METHOD OF TRANSPORTING DATA WITH EMBEDDED CLOCK - A method for transporting data to a display device includes: receiving image data having a first part data and a second part data; determining a coding information of a header according to a bit number of the image data with consecutively same bit value, wherein the coding information indicates whether the second part data in bits is to be inverted or not; coding the image data according to the coding information; and packing the header and the coded image data to a packet for transporting to the display device. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050117 | MANAGING NETWORK FORWARDING CONFIGURATIONS USING ALGORITHMIC POLICIES - Techniques for managing forwarding configurations in a data communications network include accessing, at least one controller, a packet-processing policy defined by a user in a general-purpose programming language other than a programming language of data forwarding element forwarding rules, the packet-processing policy specifying how data packets are to be processed through the data communications network via the at least one controller. A forwarding configuration for at least one data forwarding element in the data communications network may be derived from the user-defined packet-processing policy, and may be applied to the at least one data forwarding element. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050138 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADVERTISING BORDER CONNECTION INFORMATION OF AUTONOMOUS SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for advertising border connection information of autonomous system are disclosed. Moreover, the method includes: establishing and maintaining, by a border node of the autonomous system, the border connection information of the autonomous system; flooding the border connection information within the autonomous system; and receiving, by nodes of the autonomous system, the border connection information. The method and the apparatus for advertising border connection information of autonomous system of embodiments of the present invention may adapt to dynamic change of network topology, and dynamically advertise the border connection information of the autonomous system within the system in time, so as to optimize networks and improve quality of service of the networks. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050144 | ROUTING DEVICE AS A COMMAND CLIENT - A routing device determines data associating commands with devices connected to a local area network (LAN). The routing device receives a request for execution of a particular command and identifies a particular device to execute the particular command based on the command data. The routing device generates an instruction message that causes the particular device to execute the particular command, and the routing device forwards the instruction message to the particular device via the LAN. The request may be received via a wide area network (WAN), and the request may include an address for the routing device on the WAN. When generating the instruction message, the routing device may replace, in the request, the address for the routing device with an address associated with the particular device. The instruction message may further include parameters associated with execution of the particular command by the particular device. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050146 | ACCELERATED STORAGE APPLIANCE USING A NETWORK SWITCH - A storage appliance includes: control circuitry; a plurality of storage communication ports; and switch circuitry configured to forward packets compliant with a storage protocol to identified ones of the plurality of storage communication ports. In an aspect, a memory supports a forwarding table or tables. The apparatus can implement storage appliance operations by division of the storage appliance operations into (i) data movement operations performed by the switch circuitry instead of the general processor circuitry and (ii) general computation operations performed by the switch circuitry instead of the general processor circuitry. The control circuitry supports a plurality of packet fields of packets compliant with the storage protocol, the plurality of packet fields including at least a first packet field of the storage protocol for at least one of a data link layer address and a network layer address that identifies one of the plurality of storage communication ports via one of the plurality of forwarding tables in the memory, and a second packet field of the storage protocol identifying said one of the plurality of forwarding tables. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050147 | DISTRIBUTING ROUTE - This disclosure proposes a method for distributing a route, the method includes: respective BGP routers report updated routes to a BGP route reflector; the BGP route reflector distributes a target route to the target BGP router configured with VRF according to the collected updated routes, where the target route carries a RT tag of the VRF and multiple next hops, and different NT tags are allocated in advance for the respective next hops in the target route; and the target BGP router receives the target route reflected by the BGP route reflector, adds the target route to a corresponding VRF routing table according to the RT tags, and forwards a received message to the next hop of which the NT tag matches with one of the RT tags of VRF of the message, when the received message matches with the target route. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050277 | FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH SYSTEM - A Fibre Channel (FC) switch system includes a server IHS and a storage IHS that each communicate using an FC protocol. A switch IHS couples the server IHS to the storage IHS. A first converter in the switch IHS receives first FC data traffic from the server IHS and converts it to first FC over Ethernet (FCoE) data traffic. A protocol processing engine in the switch IHS is coupled to the first converter and receives the first FCoE data traffic from the first converter and processes it to provide second FCoE data traffic for delivery to the storage IHS. A second converter in the switch IHS is coupled to the protocol processing engine and the storage IHS and receives the second FCoE data traffic from the protocol processing engine, converts it to second FC data traffic, and sends the second FC data traffic to the storage IHS. | 02-18-2016 |
20160057049 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING NETWORK TOPOLOGY INFORMATION IN MULTIPLE AREAS - A system and method identifies topology information of an autonomous system as well as other autonomous systems, and can provide topology information in response to requests. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057050 | DEVICES, METHODS, AND SYSTEMS FOR PACKET REROUTE PERMISSION BASED ON CONTENT PARAMETERS EMBEDDED IN PACKET HEADER OR PAYLOAD - Devices, methods, and systems are described for the execution of packet reroute authorization based on payload specific parameters embedded in either the payload or packet header. The described methods may be used for media production systems. The methods may also be configured for other applications in any packet based routing environment to provide payload or execution description parameters embedded in either the payload or packet header for routing control of any packet based traffic. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057051 | INTEGRATION OF LMR AND IP NETWORKS - Integration of a land mobile radio (LMR) communications system and other wireless IP based systems such as LTE by way of a multi bearer router. The LMR system may be either trunked or conventional. The multi bearer router maintains LMR IDs and also IP addresses for base stations, multi bearer terminals and other components of the integrated system. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057056 | IN NIC FLOW SWITCHING - Methods, apparatus, and systems for implementing in Network Interface Controller (NIC) flow switching. Switching operations are effected via hardware-based forwarding mechanisms in apparatus such as NICs in a manner that does not employ use of computer system processor resources and is transparent to operating systems hosted by such computer systems. The forwarding mechanisms are configured to move or copy Media Access Control (MAC) frame data between receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx) queues associated with different NIC ports that may be on the same NIC or separate NICs. The hardware-based switching operations effect forwarding of MAC frames between NIC ports using memory operations, thus reducing external network traffic, internal interconnect traffic, and processor workload associated with packet processing. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057057 | Systems and Methods for Optimized Route Caching - A method for optimized route caching includes comparing a destination address of a network packet to a first set of prefixes in a routing cache, and comparing the destination address to a second set of prefixes in a full routing table when a longest matching prefix for the destination address is not found in the routing cache. The method further includes copying the longest matching prefix and a set of sub-prefixes of the longest matching prefix from the full routing table to the routing cache, and forwarding the network packet. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057070 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF JUMBO FRAME OVER EXISTING NETWORK STACK - This disclosure is directed generally to systems and methods for implementation of Jumbo frames in an existing network stack. In some embodiments, a connection handler of a device receives data having a size greater than an Ethernet frame size. That data includes header data and payload data. The device partitions the data into segments including a first segment and a second segment. The first segment includes the header data and a first portion of the payload data, while the second segment includes a second portion of the payload data. The device stores the first and second segments in first and second network buffers, respectively, of a pool of network buffers. The device forms a packet chain of the first and second network buffers having a size greater than the Ethernet frame size. The device transmits the packet chain via a network connection. | 02-25-2016 |
20160065385 | Proxy Address Resolution Protocol On A Controller Device - Techniques are presented herein for reducing network congestion in data center environments. A virtual switch, hosted by a server device in the network, registers with a controller device to enable the virtual switch to exchange address information with the controller device. The virtual switch generates mapping information comprising Media Access Control addresses of one or more virtual machines that are in communication with the virtual switch. The mapping information is sent to the controller device | 03-03-2016 |
20160065456 | SYSTEM AND METHOD PROVIDING SERVICE CHAINING IN A MOBILE NETWORK - Methods, systems and apparatus for associating packets or traffic flows with service functions to be applied thereto such that repeated identification of the packets or traffic flows at each of multiple service delivery modules may be avoided. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065457 | FLOW INHERITANCE - The present invention relates to a network device that supports software defined networking (SDN) and a packet processing method in the network device. The network device in accordance with the present invention includes: a flow table configured to store a processing action for each flow; and a packet processing module configured to search the flow table for a flow entry matched with a packet being received to determine a list of processing actions for the packet. Here, the packet processing module is configured to use inheritance relationship information between flows defined in the flow table to generate an action list that includes one or more actions for the packet in order to determine the processing actions for the packet. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065462 | HARD ZONING CORRESPONDING TO FLOW - A network controller may include a flow identifier to identify a flow using frame information. The frame information may be transmitted by a network switch. The network controller may include a retriever to retrieve hard zoning configuration data corresponding to the flow. The hard zoning configuration data may be used by the network switch to update an access control list. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065463 | FORWARDING PACKETS - Based on an example, a core backbone (CB) device receives via a second-level stacking port connected with a source port extender (PE) device, a packet containing a source port number and a local identifier of a source forwarding chip. The CB device transmits the packet via a second-level stacking port connected with a destination PE device, wherein the packet contains the source port number, a global identifier of the source forwarding chip, a local identifier of a destination forwarding chip and a destination port number. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065464 | MODEM, USER TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR SENDING MESSAGE - A modem capable of distributing IPv6 addresses upon request is connected to a user terminal. The user terminal requests and receives multiple IPv6 addresses from the modem, the IPv6 addresses including quality of service values corresponding to different priorities. The user terminal determines a range of quality of service required according to a priority of the message to be sent, and selects an IPv6 address with a quality of service value belonging to the determined range to send the message. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065465 | PACKET RECORDING - An apparatus and a method for processing a received data packet are provided. The method involves determining whether the received data packet is to be recorded and applying to the packet a virtual LAN identification tag from a first group of one or more predetermined virtual LAN identification tags if it is determined that the packet is to be recorded. A recording management system is also provided, including an apparatus and a forwarding network element. The forwarding network element is arranged to inspect as received data packet and determine a virtual LAN identification tag of the packet. The forwarding network element is further arranged to cops the data packet if the virtual LAN identification tag of the packet is in the first group and to send the copy of the data packet to a recording element. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065466 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SIGNALING MULTI-DESTINATION AGGREGATED MULTI-USER MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNITS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems, methods, and apparatuses for aggregating multi-user media access control protocol data units (MPDU) in a wireless network are provided. One aspect of this disclosure provides a method of wireless communication. The method includes generating, by an apparatus, an aggregated media access control protocol data unit (A-MPDU) frame comprising a plurality of A-MPDU sub-frames, wherein at least one sub-frame of the plurality of A-MPDU sub-frames is addressed to at least a first device and at least one other sub-frame of the plurality of A-MPDU sub-frames is addressed to at least a second device. The method comprises inserting an indication that the A-MPDU frame is addressed to at least the first and second devices into a physical layer convergence procedure (PLCP) protocol data unit (PPDU) field. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065467 | Configurable Signaling Field and its Indication - A method of providing a configurable signaling (SIG) field is proposed to reduce the SIG overhead of a data packet in a wireless network. The SIG field comprises both HE-SIG-A field and HE-SIG-A2 field. HE-SIG-A field contains only necessary information for a default network scenario (e.g., indoor non-OFDMA SU-MIMO) to avoid HE-SIG-A2. HE-SIG-A | 03-03-2016 |
20160065468 | SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORK-BASED DATA PROCESSING METHOD, NODE, AND SYSTEM - The present disclosure discloses a software defined network SDN-based data processing system, and the system includes: a source data node, configured to receive a first data packet, and send to a corresponding source control node; the source control node, configured to receive the first data packet, where the first data packet carries a destination address of the first data packet; and determine a destination control node; and the destination control node, configured to receive the first data packet, and generate a second data packet and a matching policy rule. According to a software defined network-based data processing system in an embodiment of the present disclosure, the collaboration capability between nodes is improved so as to reduce the redundancy of multi-node processing in a network device, thereby improving the service processing efficiency of the network. The present disclosure further discloses a software defined network-based data processing method and device. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065471 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONTROLLER, AND METHOD AND PROGRAM FOR CONTROLLING FORWARDING PATH OF PACKET FLOW - A communication system includes a network device to be used for packet handling; and a controller capable of sending, to the network device, a packet handling rule according to a first protocol. The network device classifies, based on a condition, indicative of a scope under which the controller is capable of controlling the network device, whether to handle the packet according to the packet handling rule sent from the controller or to handle the packet according to a table entry that the network device autonomously sets based on a second protocol. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065473 | PERSISTENT STORAGE IN A SWITCH - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch. The switch includes a packet processor, a model management module, and a persistent storage module. The packet processor identifies a switch identifier associated with the switch in the header of a packet. The model management module identifies a first class from a class model. This class model defines a name and one or more attributes for the first class. The persistent storage module creates a first table for the first class in a local persistent storage. The first table includes a respective column for a respective attribute of the first class. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065501 | DATA TRANSFERRING SYSTEM, DATA TRANSFERRING METHOD, CONTROLLER, CONTROLLING METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A data transferring system includes a switch and a controller. The switch transfers data from a transmission source to a transmission destination with reference to a table in which a first information and a second information are associated. The controller includes a setter configured to set a tentative table to the switch, the tentative table storing the second information for outputting data, which is matched with the condition represented by the first information, to the controller, an obtainer configured to obtain a route information representing a route between the transmission source and the transmission destination, and an updater configured to update the tentative table to a table in which an outputting destination of data, which is matched with the condition represented by the first information, is changed in accordance with the route information. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065536 | HOME GATEWAY APPARATUS AND PACKET TRANSFER METHOD - In order to provide a home gateway apparatus capable of smoothly executing transfer processing while ensuring security, when transferring a packet between a node ( | 03-03-2016 |
20160066354 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to an embodiment, a communication system is connected to a plurality of communication devices. The system includes a controller configured to control, by using a group identifier representing semantics of a group including at least one of the communication devices, the at least one of the communication devices that has been authenticated when the group is operated. An index is assigned to the at least one of the communication devices. | 03-03-2016 |
20160072641 | Data transmission method, apparatus, and computer storage medium - Disclosed is a data transmission method. When it is determined that a transmitting end device and a receiving end device both support a link binding capability, a binding group is established; when data is selected to be transmitted by a binding link in the binding group, the data to be transmitted is encapsulated according to a binding data format and is transmitted through the binding link; and when data is selected to be transmitted by a non-binding link, the data to be transmitted is encapsulated according to a common data format and is transmitted through the non-binding link. Also disclosed are a data transmission apparatus and a computer storage medium. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072642 | HIGH-BANDWIDTH CHASSIS AND RACK MANAGEMENT BY VLAN - Embodiments generally relate to remote computer network management. The present technology discloses techniques that can enable a high-bandwidth server management method by applying VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network). It employs an optimized RMCP protocol using a dual-pathway VLAN mechanism for data transmission either internal or external to a server rack. The present technology may enable a network computing device to perform the optimized RMCP protocol. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072695 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING NEXT HOP AND ADVERTISING ROUTING INFORMATION - Embodiments of the present application disclose a method and an apparatus for determining a next hop and advertising routing information, which relate to the field of communications and are used for reducing operation complexity of a forwarding device and reducing network maintenance workload. The method for determining the next hop provided by the embodiments of the present application includes: receiving, by a control device, first routing information sent by a first forwarding device, where the first routing information includes an identifier of the first forwarding device; determining a first routing path according to the identifier of the first forwarding device, an identifier of a second forwarding device and a routing path group; and determining a next hop in second routing information for the second forwarding device according to the first routing path, where the second forwarding device is a receiver of the second routing information advertised by the control device. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072698 | SERIAL NETWORKING FIBER OPTIC INFLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM NETWORK CONFIGURATION - Serial networking dedicated fiber optic inflight entertainment (IFE) systems, methods therefor and components thereof, that exhibit improved configuration and failover attributes through implementation of novel network configuration protocols. In some aspects of the invention, such an IFE system comprises a plurality of head end line replaceable units (HE-LRUs) and a plurality of serial networking line replaceable units (SN-LRUs), wherein each of the SN-LRUs individually detects that a closed system network has been formed between the plurality of HE-LRUs and the plurality of SN-LRUs based on a plurality of packets sourced by at least one of the HE-LRUs and received on a plurality of ports of each of the SN-LRUs, and wherein in response to detecting that the closed system network has been formed one of the SN-LRUs blocks one of its ports based on further detecting that the SN-LRU is a middle SN-LRU. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072705 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING ADDRESS RESOLUTION PROTOCOL IN SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORKING ENVIRONMENT - A method and device for processing an address resolution protocol (ARP) in a software-defined networking (SDN) environment is disclosed. The method includes receiving, by a first network device, an ARP request packet from a first terminal so that the first terminal communicates with a second terminal and transmitting, by the first network device, an ARP response message including MAC address information of the second terminal to the first terminal as a response to the ARP request packet. Accordingly, a load of the controller can be reduced by sharing and processing an ARP proxy function with the network device in the SDN environment. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072709 | FILTERING NETWORK DATA TRANSFERS - Aspects of this disclosure relate to filtering network data transfers. In some variations, multiple packets may be received. A determination may be made that a portion of the packets have packet header field values corresponding to a packet filtering rule. Responsive to such a determination, an operator specified by the packet filtering rule may be applied to the portion of packets having the packet header field values corresponding to the packet filtering rule. A further determination may be made that one or more of the portion of the packets have one or more application header field values corresponding to one or more application header field criteria specified by the operator. Responsive to such a determination, at least one packet transformation function specified by the operator may be applied to the one or more of the portion of the packets. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072710 | DATA PACKET ROUTING - Among other things, one or more techniques and/or system are provided for routing a data packet. Because the data packet may correspond to a source device having an address on a first network that may be similar to an address of a second device on a second network, the data packet may be translated to create a transformed data packet that may be distinguishable from data packets of the second device. For example, the data packet may be translated from a first address format, such as IPv4, to a second address format, such as IPv6, to create a transformed data packet. The transformed data packet may comprise a prefix that may distinctly identify the source device during routing. In this way, the transformed data packet may be identifiable as corresponding to the source device during routing through a network to a destination device. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072711 | Relay System and Relay Device - A ring control unit controls the ring network by transmitting and receiving a control frame through ring ports, and receives an address table deletion command via the control frame. When a first deletion command is received, an address table processing unit prohibits a learning process to the address table and then starts deleting the address table. Then, when a N-th (N is an integer of 2 or more) deletion command is received in a period before the completion of the deletion of the address table, the address table processing unit continues to execute the deletion of the address table. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072732 | BROADCAST SIGNAL TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, BROADCAST SIGNAL RECEIVING APPARATUS, AND BROADCAST SIGNAL TRANSCEIVING METHOD IN A BROADCAST SIGNAL TRANSCEIVING APPARATUS - Disclosed is a broadcast signal transmitting apparatus, a broadcast signal receiving apparatus, and a broadcast signal transceiving method in a broadcast signal transceiving apparatus. The broadcast signal transmitting method comprises the following steps: compressing the headers of data packets of an IP stream identified by IP address information, wherein the compressed data packets include a first packet, the header of which contains static field information, a second packet, the header of which contains dynamic field information, and a third packet, the header of which contains the compressed static field information and/or the compressed dynamic field information; signaling IP-PLP mapping information for mapping the IP stream and a component PLP for transmitting the IP stream, the IP stream compression information, and the header information of the first packet to L2 signaling information; and transmitting the header information of the second and third packets via the component PLP, and transmitting the L2 signaling information via a common PLP. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072754 | Method and Device for Forwarding Message - The disclosure provides a method and a device for forwarding a message. The method is applied to a layer-2 network device and comprises: a message from a source end is received, the type of the message is judged, and when the type is judged to be a specified type, the message is forwarded according to the processing flow corresponding to the specified type. Through the technical solution provided by the disclosure, the technical problems that addresses may conflict, an IGMPv3 multicast source address cannot be distinguished and the like when a multicast IP address needs to be converted into an MAC address in the process of forwarding a message in the related art are solved, and the usability and security of the multicast function are improved. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072929 | PROCESSING APPARATUS FOR BUS DATA - A communication controller apparatus couples a device comprising a device processor to a data bus. The communication controller comprises an input/output controller coupled to the bus to receive a plurality of types of data packets. The types of data packets comprise at least one type of data packets having a high priority determined by timing criticality. The input/output controller is operable to process data packets received via the bus before providing any of the received data packets to the device processor. The communication controller comprises a high priority data path comprising a high priority data packet queue a low priority data path to the device comprising a low priority data packet queue. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072930 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS, COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a data transmission method and apparatus, a communications device, and a communications system, which relate to the communications field, and the method includes: receiving at least two IP packets; determining at least two multiplexing packets from the at least two IP packets according to a multiplexing policy; encapsulating the at least two multiplexing packets into one GTP-U packet; and sending the GTP-U packet. In the present invention, at least two IP packets that meet a multiplexing policy are encapsulated into one GTP-U packet, and the GTP-U packet is sent. When an IP packet is being transmitted on a PRN, resources consumed for obtaining a transmission route each time when forwarding is performed are significantly reduced compared with the prior art. In addition, a proportion of an IP packet to a GTP-U packet increases, thereby improving transmission efficiency. | 03-10-2016 |
20160080245 | METHOD FOR SCALABLE COMPUTER NETWORK PARTITIONING - Various techniques for partitioning a computer network is disclosed herein. In certain embodiments, control plane functions (e.g., computation of network routes) and/or forwarding plane functions (e.g., routing, forwarding, switching) may be partitioned and performed individually on per domain basis based on (1) a network configuration of a particular domain (e.g., end points and/or lower-level domains in the particular domain); and (2) one or more higher-level domains connected to the particular domain in the hierarchy. Thus, a particular domain can manage various network operations of the domain without concerns regarding end points or network nodes in other domains of the hierarchy. Thus, network configuration and operation may be partitioned to reduce hardware costs and operational complexity even as the size of the overall computer networks increases. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080247 | OPTIMAL FORWARDING IN A NETWORK IMPLEMENTING A PLURALITY OF LOGICAL NETWORKING SCHEMES - An example method for determining an optimal forwarding path across a network having gateways configured to implement a plurality of logical networking protocols can include determining a path cost over a first logical network between each of the gateways and a source node and a path cost over the a second logical network between each of the gateways and a destination node. Additionally, the method can include determining an encapsulation cost difference between switching packets over the first and second logical networks. The method can also include determining an encapsulation overhead metric associated with one of the first or second logical networks, and weighting one of the first or second path cost by the encapsulation overhead metric. Further, the method can include selecting one of the gateways as an optimal gateway. The selection can be based on the computed path costs. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080253 | SERVICE ROUTING SYSTEM, DEVICE, AND METHOD - The present invention provides a service routing system, device, and method. In embodiments of the present invention, a first service flow classifier generates a notification message that includes service flow category information, a service path controller generates, according to the notification message, a first forwarding entry corresponding to each of i programmable switches that are connected to k service enablers, and the i programmable switches each forward a data packet of a service flow according to the corresponding first forwarding entries, so that the k service enablers process the data packet of the service flow according to a sequence. In this way, network reliability can be improved. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080254 | OFS IN-BAND COMMUNICATION METHOD AND OFS - An OFS in-band communication method and an OFS are disclosed. The method includes: receiving an LLDP data packet; creating a controller list entry or updating a controller list entry when it is determined, by using a role sub-field, that a sender type of the received LLDP data packet is OFC; acquiring a first-time TCP handshake packet used for establishing a TCP connection, and checking, according to a destination MAC and a destination IP that are carried in the TCP handshake packet, whether a corresponding controller list entry exists in a controller list; and if yes, updating a flow entry according to the MAC, the IP, and the in_port in the corresponding controller list entry in the controller list, so that an OFS can forward, by using a flow table, a packet to be sent to an OFC to the OFC. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080256 | TUNNEL PROVISIONING WITH LINK AGGREGATION - A method for processing data packets in a communication network includes establishing a path for a flow of the data packets through the communication network. At a node along the path having a plurality of aggregated ports, a port is selected from among the plurality to serve as part of the path. A label is chosen responsively to the selected port. The label is attached to the data packets in the flow at a point on the path upstream from the node. Upon receiving the data packets at the node, the data packets are switched through the selected port responsively to the label. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080258 | METHOD FOR END POINT IDENTIFICATION IN COMPUTER NETWORKS - Various techniques for partitioning a computer network is disclosed herein. In certain embodiments, control plane functions (e.g., computation of network routes) and/or forwarding plane functions (e.g., routing, forwarding, switching) may be partitioned and performed individually on per domain basis based on (1) a network configuration of a particular domain (e.g., end points and/or lower-level domains in the particular domain); and (2) one or more higher-level domains connected to the particular domain in the hierarchy. Thus, a particular domain can manage various network operations of the domain without concerns regarding end points or network nodes in other domains of the hierarchy. Thus, network configuration and operation may be partitioned to reduce hardware costs and operational complexity even as the size of the overall computer networks increases. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080260 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of communications, and provide a data transmission method, apparatus and system. The method includes: detecting whether data transmitted in a received GTP-U data packet is data of a predetermined type; if a result of the detection is that data transmitted in the GTP-U data packet is data of a predetermined type, decapsulating the GTP-U data packet, to obtain the data of the predetermined type and a destination address of the data of the predetermined type; and sending the data of the predetermined type and the destination address to a message gateway, so that the message gateway forwards the data of the predetermined type according to the destination address. A gateway includes: a detection module, a decapsulation module, and a sending module. A message gateway includes: a receiving module and a forwarding module. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080261 | Last-Hop Processing for Reverse Direction Packets - Some embodiments provide a method for a first managed forwarding element that implements a logical network. The method receives a packet from a second managed forwarding element. The first packet has an initial set of characteristics defining a first connection between a source machine connected to the second managed forwarding element and a destination machine connected to the first managed forwarding element. The method determines whether a second connection exists with the initial set of characteristics between a different machine connected to a third managed forwarding element and the destination machine. When a second connection exists with the initial set of characteristics, the method modifies at least one characteristic of the packet such that the modified packet does not have the same set of characteristics. The method delivers the modified packet to the destination machine. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080263 | SDN-BASED SERVICE CHAINING SYSTEM - A method for providing service chaining in a software-defined network (SDN)-based network system, the method including: receiving, at a controller, a first packet-in message from a first switch of a plurality of switches, which has received a service request packet from a user, to indicate that the first switch does not have a corresponding entry in a field extracted from the service request packet; extracting from the packet-in message both a service identifier that identifies a type of a service requested through the service request packet and a user identifier that identifies the user; and searching an entry database for an entry list that enables the service request packet to be forwarded to a network function list that corresponds to the service identifier and the user identifier, with reference to a service table, a user table, and a network function table which are associated with one another. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081074 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication terminal includes a processor; and a non-transitory memory storing thereon a program which is executed by the processor, the program causing the processor to: transmit a first interest packet requesting transmission of an index of content to a plurality of communication devices via a content-oriented network; receive a first data packet from a first communication device among the plurality of communication devices in response to the first interest packet, wherein the first data packet includes i) the index and ii) first remaining battery level information indicating a remaining battery level of the first communication device, and determine to transmit to the first communication device a second interest packet requesting for transmission of the content to the wireless communication terminal when it is determined that the first remaining battery level information is more than a predetermined threshold value. | 03-17-2016 |
20160087871 | APPLICATION TOPOLOGY BASED ON NETWORK TRAFFIC - Methods and apparatuses for generating an application topology are provided. A processor determines a first application profile based, at least in part, on a first network packet. A processor determines a second application profile based, at least in part, on a second network packet. A processor determines a link between a first application and a second application based, at least in part, on address information of the first network packet. A processor generates a topology comprising the first and second application profiles based, at least in part, on the link, the first application profile and the second application profile. A processor updates the first and second application profiles based, at least in part, on matching the first application profile and second application profile with an application deployment template. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087878 | Adaptive Network Function Chaining - Disclosed herein are system, method, and computer program product embodiments for dynamically applying network functions to traffic flows based on heuristics, policy conditions and client-specified conditions. A network monitors a network traffic flow to determine whether the network traffic flow meets a first criterion of a first rule. The criterion specifies that when the first criterion is met a network function be used to analyze or process the network traffic flow. When the network traffic flow is determined to meet the first criterion, the network determines a first route through the network to a network function provider that provides the network function and configures one or more routers along the first route to forward the network traffic flow to the network function provider for analysis or processing. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087882 | HEADER SPACE ANALYSIS EXTENSION SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSPORT NETWORKS - A method for validation of a packet transport network includes performing a header space analysis, with input headers to obtain output headers from the header space analysis, between one or more ingress points and a particular egress point; determining disjointness of the output headers; and determining validity of a point-to-point connection property of the packet transport network based on the disjointness of the output headers. The header space analysis allows near-real-time validation that packet transport flows in an Multiprotocol Label Switching-Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) network have been correctly programmed on the switches by a Software Defined Networking (SDN) controller or other technique such that the correct label mappings have been made to carry a flow from a source to a destination, and all flows from any source to a destination are isolated from one another. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087884 | Packet Processing Method and Router - This application discloses a packet processing method and an LSR. The method includes: receiving, by an Ingress LSR of a first MPLS tunnel, a first notification packet that is based on an IGP, where the first notification packet includes an ELC flag, which is used to indicate that the first Egress LSR has ELC; after learning from the first notification packet that the first Egress LSR has ELC, inserting a label into a first packet, to generate a second packet, where the label forms an MPLS label stack, which includes, from bottom to top, a first EL, a first ELI, and a first TL; and sending the second packet to the first Egress LSR through the first MPLS tunnel. According to the solutions of this invention, a Transit LSR of the first MPLS tunnel may perform load balancing when forwarding the second packet. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087891 | PATH COMPUTATION ELEMENT AND METHOD FOR SETTING PATH OF USER NETWORK INTERFACE - Provided herein is a path computation element based on Transport Network Assigned (TNA) address and a method for path computation based on User Network Interface (UNI). The path computation element and UNI based path computation method of the present disclosure minimize overhead caused by abstract Traffic Engineering (TE) link, and minimize manual environment set up, and routing information exchange and advertisements in a local domain or between domains. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087892 | NETWORK RESOURCE SHARING FOR ROUTING AND FORWARDING INFORMATION - A system, computer-readable media, and methods for network resource sharing of routing and forwarding information are disclosed. The method may include receiving a first address for a device connected to a network and receiving one or more second addresses for the device. The method may also include identifying a first switch through which the device connects to the network and identifying a second switch for storing the first address and the one or more second addresses. Further, the method may include storing the first address in the first switch and storing the first address and the one or more second addresses in the second switch. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087893 | Local Packet Switching at a Satellite Device - A data packet is received, at a parent switching device, from a first host device via a remote switching device. The data packet has a first source media access control (MAC) address corresponding to the first host device and information indicative that the data packet passed through the remote switching device via a first port. An entry is added to a parent switching table in the parent switching device, the parent switching table associating the first MAC address and the first port of the remote switching device with one another. A switching table entry update message is sent to the remote switching device indicating that the first MAC address and the first port are associated with one another so as to enable a subsequent data packet destined for the first host device and received at the remote switching device to be switched directly to the first host. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087902 | FLOW TO PORT AFFINITY MANAGEMENT FOR LINK AGGREGATION IN A FABRIC SWITCH - Implementations of the present disclosure involve an apparatus, device, component, and/or method for a hardware efficient flow to port affinity management table for link aggregation for a network fabric switch with Ethernet Gateway functionality. Rather than maintaining a state per traffic flow list, the present disclosure utilizes a handle or hash value derived from the traffic flow and associates an output port state to the hash value. The output port state for the hash value is further associated with a portlist that is based on at least a traffic flow policy of the server or group of servers associated with the traffic flow. In addition, the management table may be adjusted based on state changes to one or more of the output ports such that, if a port becomes unavailable, the management table may be adjusted to account for the unavailability of the port. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088124 | TECHNIQUES FOR VALIDATING PACKETS - Various embodiments are generally directed to an apparatus, method and other techniques receiving packets each comprising a number of frames, comparing first information in a first frame of a packet with a connection handle established for a communication session, validating the packet when the first information corresponds with the connection handle and discarding the first frame of the packet when the first information does not correspond with the connection handle. | 03-24-2016 |
20160094440 | FORWARDING A PACKET BY A NVE IN NVO3 NETWORK - A method for forwarding a packet by a first Network Virtualization Edge (NVE) in Network Virtualization Overlays, Layer 3 (NVO3) and an NVE is provided. The method comprises, in response to receiving an IP packet from a first Virtual Access Point (VAP) of the first NVE, looking up forwarding information to obtain an IP address of a second NVE; in response to lookup fails, or the IP address of the second NVE being different from an IP address of the first NVE or the second VAP being different from the first VAP, dropping the IP packet; and in response to the IP address of the second NVE being the same as an IP address of the first NVE and the second VAP being the same as the first VAP, forwarding the IP packet. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094444 | Network Packet Flow Controller - An intermediate node obtains a lead packet of a plurality of packets in a session having a unique session identifier, modifies the lead packet to identify at least the intermediate node, and then forwards the lead packet toward the destination node though an intermediate node electronic output interface to the IP network. The intermediate node also receives, through an intermediate node electronic input interface in communication with the IP network, a backward message from a next node having a next node identifier. The backward message includes the next node identifier and the session identifier. The intermediate node forms an association between the next node identifier and the session identifier, stores the association in memory to maintain state information for the session, and obtains (e.g., receives) additional packets of the session. Substantially all of the additional packets in the session are forwarded toward the next node using the stored association. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094446 | MULTIPLE RADIO LINK CONTROL (RLC) GROUPS - Technology to process radio link control (RLC) groups is disclosed. In an example, a carrier aggregation (CA) capable user equipment (UE) operable process radio link control (RLC) groups can include a UE radio frequency (RF) transceiver and a processor. The UE RF transceiver can be configured to receive packets from more than one cell via a sending node RF transceiver. The processor can be configured to process service data units (SDU) of the packets in a radio link control (RLC) entity of a protocol stack (PS). Each SDU can be associated with an RLC flow identifier (RFI). The RFI can comprise an RLC group identifier (RGI) indicating the sending node RF transceiver, and a radio bearer identifier (RBID). | 03-31-2016 |
20160094447 | Data Transmission Method, Apparatus, Device, and Base Station - The present invention provides a data transmission method, apparatus and device, and a base station, and relates to the field of communications technologies. The method of the present invention includes: receiving data sent by a radio unit; acquiring a standard identity of the data, where the standard identity is used to identify a standard type of the data; routing the data according to the standard identity of the data; and sending the routed data to a digital unit corresponding to the standard identity of the routed data. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094449 | TECHNOLOGIES FOR BRIDGING BETWEEN COARSE-GRAINED AND FINE-GRAINED LOAD BALANCING - Technologies for bridging between coarse-grained and fine-grained load balancing include a computing node of a cluster computing device and a network controller. The computing node may add a flow entry to a local flow table based on flow information received from the network controller. The computing node may transmit a multicast network packet including the flow information and next hop information to other computing nodes of the cluster device. The computing node may also add a different flow entry to the local flow table and a next hop entry to a local next hop table based on a multicast network packet received from another computing node of the cluster device. The computing node may locally process a network packet received from a remote computing device or forward the received network packet to another computing node of the cluster device based on the flow entries added to the local flow table. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094460 | Packet Key Parser for Flow-Based Forwarding Elements - Some embodiments provide a forwarding element that parses a packet to selectively extract a set of header field values for a flow key. The forwarding element then uses the flow key to find a matching flow to process the packet. In some embodiments, the forwarding element chooses the set of header values following the match pattern of a set of one or more flows. The forwarding element of some embodiments chooses the set of header values based on a wildcard mask that is associated with a flow entry or a flow table mask that is associated with a flow table. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094514 | Translating Network Attributes of Packets in a Multi-Tenant Environment - A method of translating network attributes of packets in a multi-tenant environment, and an appliance and a program product implementing the method. The method comprises the following steps: receiving a packet from a multi-tenant environment; referring to the information of tenants, translating a selected network attribute of the packet into a unique identity representing the packet in the multi-tenant environment; and forwarding the translated packet including the unique identity. | 03-31-2016 |
20160099867 | DATA PLANE LEARNING OF BI-DIRECTIONAL SERVICE CHAINS - Techniques are provided to decouple service chain structure from the underlying network forwarding state and allow for data plane learning of service chain forwarding requirements and any association between services function state requirements and the forward and reverse forwarding paths for a service chain. In a network comprising a plurality of network nodes each configured to apply a service function to traffic that passes through the respective network node, a packet is received at a network node. When the network node determines that the service function it applies is stateful, it updates context information in a network service header of the packet to indicate that the service function applied at the network node is stateful and that traffic for a reverse path matching the classification criteria is to be returned to the network node. | 04-07-2016 |
20160099868 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING PACKET AND FORWARDER - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for processing a packet in a software-defined network (Software-Defined Network), where the method is performed by a forwarder, and the method includes: receiving an input packet; determining a flow to which the input packet belongs according to the input packet; determining a context identifier set corresponding to the flow to which the input packet belongs according to a first correspondence between flows and context identifier sets, where a context identifier set corresponding to each flow in the first correspondence includes at least one context identifier; determining a context corresponding to the context identifier set according to a second correspondence between context identifiers and contexts; and processing the input packet according to the context corresponding to the context identifier set. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100040 | METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE FOR DATA PROCESSING - A method for data processing is executable by a network device. The network device is configured to forward a packet in a network to another network. Before forwarding the packet to the other network, the network device adds corresponding destination information address and transport layer protocol information into a header of the packet. The packet will be fast forwarded in subsequent networks or network devices, thereby saving forwarding time and improving forwarding efficiency. | 04-07-2016 |
20160105360 | DEVICE DESCRIPTION PROFILE FOR A FABRIC NETWORK - Methods and systems for obtaining device information include sending a device description request message to a remote device. The device description request message includes indications of criteria for a responding device, and the indications of criteria for the responding device include a fabric identifier for the responding device. Moreover, the fabric identifier identifies a fabric to which the responding device is connected. The indications of criteria also include a device mode for the responding device. The device mode indicates a mode for the responding device. The indications of criteria further include a vendor identifier for the responding device with the vendor identifier identifies a vendor for the responding device. Obtaining device information also includes a product identifier for the responding device that identifies a product type for the responding device. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105361 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BIDIRECTIONAL MESSAGE ROUTING BETWEEN SERVICES RUNNING ON DIFFERENT NETWORK NODES - Methods and systems are disclosed for secure bi-directional message routing between services running on a different nodes in a computer cluster. According to some embodiments, a multi-tenant computer cluster is accessed online via a controller. The controller, acting as central management system, may establish secure independent connections with each of the many nodes. Messages from the controller to any given node, and vice versa, are wrapped in a routing envelope and transferred over an independent and secure virtual private network tunnel. This allows the plurality of nodes to be centrally managed and utilized as a cluster while not being allowed to communicate with each other. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105362 | PACKET SENDING METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE - The present application provides a packet sending method and a network device. The packet sending method includes: receiving, by a network device, a first data packet; and if a MAC entry matching a destination MAC address of the first data packet is not found in a media access control MAC address table of the network device, sending, by the network device, the first data packet according to a forwarding behavior in a MAC default entry of the MAC address table. When the MAC entry matching the destination MAC address of the first data packet is not found, the network device does not need to flood the first data packet on all interfaces, but directly sends the first data packet according to the MAC default entry in the own MAC address table, thereby reducing a need for MAC address capacity in the network device, and not increasing unnecessary network traffic. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105369 | TRANSMITTING NODE, RECEIVING NODE AND METHODS THEREIN - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a receiving node ( | 04-14-2016 |
20160105377 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, CONTROL DEVICE AND CONTROL METHOD - An information processing system includes a switch device including a plurality of ports; and a control device configured to: specify a flow in which a transmission port is to be changed among the plurality of flows, and a transmission port after the change, by referring to load distribution information that associates flow information and port information with each other and statistics information indicating use rates of the ports, and transmit a changing instruction packet including information of the specified flow and the port after the change, for instructing the switch device to change the transmission port to the switch device, wherein the switch device is configured to update information in header information, which each of the series of packets included in the specified flow includes, so as to become information with which the port after the change is selected, when the changing instruction packet is received from the control device. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105379 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EXTENDING PORTS - A system and method includes a first switching device that includes a first control unit with a first and third port coupled to the first control unit and a second switching device that includes a second control unit with the a second port coupled to the second control unit. The system and method may include a network link coupling the first and second switching devices. The first control unit configured to receive a data packet and adding a drop indication. The second control unit configured to detect the drop indication. In some embodiments the first control unit is configured to apply a rule, and mark a data packet with a drop indication in a header, the header being a header normally attached to the data packet. The second switching device may interpret the drop indication with a set of rules to determine a course of action. | 04-14-2016 |
20160112309 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An information processing apparatus that sets, based on packet identification information that is common to packets included in a packet group that flows through a network including the communication devices performing relaying, and information about network function devices selected by the packet group, each of the network function devices being connected to the communication devices via a layer 2 network, performing a predetermined process for a packet and performing input and output of the packet by a same interface, one of interfaces of the communication devices as a forwarding destination of a packet input to the network function device in such a way that there is no overlap between the network function devices selected by the packet group and in such a way that overlap with another network function device selected by another packet group is allowed. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112312 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus includes a connection port and a processor. The connection port is connected to a switch apparatus. The processor is configured to acquire data to be transmitted to an external apparatus. The processor is configured to generate a packet destined to the external apparatus. The packet contains the data. The processor is configured to store the packet in a buffer. The processor is configured to acquire the packet from the buffer. The processor is configured to transmit the packet to the switch apparatus via the connection port. The processor is configured to acquire a state of a network to which the connection port is connected. The processor is configured to control, on basis of the state of the network and a predetermined packet generation time, a number of packets to be generated. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112313 | Service Routing Packet Processing Method and Apparatus, and Network System - The application provides a service routing packet processing method and apparatus. The method includes: receiving, by a first service router SR, a first service routing packet; querying, by the first SR, a service routing table according to path identification information and identification information of a source service node SN that are carried in the first service routing packet, to determine identification information of a destination SN, where the service routing table includes a correspondence between the path identification information, the identification information of the source SN, and the identification information of the destination SN; generating, by the first SR, a second service routing packet according to the identification information of the destination SN and the first service routing packet; and sending, by the first SR, the second service routing packet. According to the technical solutions of the present invention, support of an independent SN for service routing can be implemented. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112314 | USING SEGMENTATION IDENTIFICATION TO IDENTIFY DESTINATION NODE WITHIN NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Packet transmission techniques are disclosed herein. An exemplary method includes receiving a packet that identifies an internet protocol (IP) address assigned to more than one destination node; selecting a virtual routing and forwarding table based, at least in part, on a segmentation identification in the packet; identifying a designated destination node in the packet based, at least in part, on the selected virtual routing and forwarding table; and transmitting the packet to the designated destination node. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112315 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication apparatus includes a first storage unit, a second storage, and a first registrator. The first storage stores at least a destination address representing an IPv6 address that is a destination of a packet and a next hop address representing an IPv6 address of a next hop representing the next destination to which the packet is transferred in association with each other. The second storage stores an IPv6 address of a default router to which the packet is transferred when it is not possible to determine the next hop address by using the first storage. When a second RA packet representing an RA packet other than first RA packets representing a RA packet for 6LowPAN is received, the first registrator registers an IPv6 address from which the second RA packet has been transmitted as an IPv6 address of the default router. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112316 | DECISION FACTORY AND ITS APPLICATION IN FRR - Exemplary methods include generating a plurality of prefix entries, wherein each prefix entry includes information for associating incoming traffic to a data structure. In one embodiment, the methods further include generating a plurality of data structures, wherein one or more of the plurality of data structures includes a reference to a master entry. In one embodiment, the methods further include generating the master entry, wherein the master entry includes information for determining how to use the data structures to forward incoming traffic to one or more of the plurality of other network devices. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112317 | PRE-BUILT MATCH-ACTION TABLES - A method is implemented by a processor of a computing device for generating an output match action table (MAT) or output MAT template from an input MAT template. The input MAT template is transformed through successive updates of symbolic actions using policy rules into the output MAT or output MAT template. The method includes selecting a first MAT row from the input MAT template and selecting a first action field from the first MAT row. A check is made whether the first action field includes a first symbolic action. The first symbolic action is looked up to determine whether a first policy rule has been defined for the first symbolic action. A first action specified by the first policy rule is written into a corresponding action field of a corresponding MAT row in the output MAT template or the output MAT to replace the first symbolic action. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112318 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, METHOD, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - A system includes a first apparatus coupled to a second apparatus through communication paths. The first apparatus generates leading packets, each including destination information to identify the second apparatus in leading data among data read from a first memory based on a memory transfer request the second apparatus being a destination of the data specified by the memory transfer request, transmits the leading packets to the communication paths, respectively, generates last packets including the destination information in last data among the data read from the first memory based on the memory transfer request, and transmits the last packets to the communication paths, respectively. The second apparatus counts the last packets received through the communication paths, and control to store the last data included in the received last packets in a second memory when the number of the last packets counted coincides with the number of the communication paths. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112319 | Hash-based Address Matching - In one embodiment, a packet switching device comprises: a lookup chip including one or more processors and on-lookup chip memory, and off-lookup chip memory. In one embodiment, the lookup chip is configured to determine processing information for packets including performing a longest prefix match on a destination address of packets using progressive, exact matching of one or more single prefix length hash keys generated from the packets with entries in one or more hash tables until a matching hash table entry is found. The matching hash table entry is associated with particular information identifying how to process (e.g., manipulate, forward, drop) the corresponding packet. In one embodiment, entries of a hash table are distributed between said on-lookup chip memory and said off-lookup chip memory. In one embodiment, signatures of lookup keys are included in a hash table entry to quickly evaluate whether there is a match. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112330 | CONTROL APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD AND MEDIUM - A first control apparatus according to the present invention includes: a first receiving unit which receives a second message from any one of switch apparatuses of an OpenFlow network which is a connection path connecting a terminal apparatus with a communication destination apparatus; a first receiving packet processing unit which processes the second message; a first application executing unit which executes a first application corresponding to the second message; a first message generating unit which receives messages from the first receiving packet processing unit and the first application executing unit, and generates a first message; a first message receiving unit which receives a first message from another first control apparatus; a first determination unit which selects the first message received from the first message generating unit or the first message received from the first message receiving unit; and a first sending unit which sends the selected first message. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112900 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS, BASE STATION, AND USER EQUIPMENT - A data transmission method and apparatus, a base station, and a user equipment are disclosed. The method includes: obtaining a size and priority information of a first data packet that needs to be transmitted; determining a transmission bandwidth used for transmitting the first data packet; if the transmission bandwidth is less than the size of the first data packet and active packet discarding is allowed according to the priority information of the first data packet, processing the size of the data packet to obtain a second data packet, where a size of the second data packet is less than the transmission bandwidth; and sending the second data packet to a user equipment by using the transmission bandwidth. | 04-21-2016 |
20160119153 | Zero Standby Power for Powerline Communication Devices - An embodiment is an integrated System on Chip (SoC) including a communication interface configured to implement a communication protocol including functional blocks that are energized or de-energized individually so that a minimum power consumption is used to receive and detect a signal, and a receiver identification (ID) detection function configured to determine whether the signal is intended for the device in which the SoC resides. The SoC further includes a power management function configured to control which functions in the SoC and/or device in which the SoC resides are energized or de-energized depending on the results of the receiver ID detection function, and a power source capable of energizing a minimum number of the functional blocks required to receive and detect a signal, wherein the power source can be used in a low power state and switched over to a main power supply when the SoC is energized. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119219 | METHOD FOR REACHABILITY MANAGEMENT IN COMPUTER NETWORKS - Various techniques for partitioning an overlay network is disclosed herein. In certain embodiments, an overlay network can be partitioned into overlay partitions with manageable sizes. Each overlay partition can independently manage and update reachability information only for end points that belong to a virtual network with at least one end point in the overlay partition. Thus, each overlay partition can operate independently from others to achieve fast reachability updating for relocated virtual machines or other end points. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119226 | Transparent Network Service Header Path Proxies - A controller that is in communication with the plurality of network nodes establishes a service path for a service chain defined by an ordered sequence of service functions to be performed at respective ones of one or more of the plurality of network nodes. The controller assigns a predetermined service path identifier and a predetermined service index value for a segment of the service chain that includes only one or more network nodes not capable of decapsulating packets to extract a network service header so as to designate the one or more network nodes determined not capable of decapsulating packets to extract the network service header as a single service hop segment in the service chain. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119227 | DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FLOW IDENTIFICATION IN AN ACCESS NETWORK - A system and method for tracking and adjusting packet flows through a network having a service delivery node and one or more residential services gateways. Packet flows are recognized as they pass through one or more residential services gateway and flow analytics information corresponding to the packet flows recognized in the residential services gateways are transferred from the residential gateways to the flow identification control unit. The flow analytics information received from the residential services gateways is analyzed within the flow identification control unit and traffic through one or more of the service access platform and the residential services gateways is adjusted, if necessary, as a function of the flow analytics information analyzed by the flow identification control unit. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119228 | FORWARDING PACKETS - A control device may allocate a global label for a switch device based on a forwarding equivalent class (FEC), and issue the global label to the switch device. Subsequently, for a packet not carrying the global label, after matching the packet not carrying the global label with the FEC, the switch device may encapsulate the global label for the packet, and forward the packet. For a packet carrying the global label, the switch device may forward the packet carrying the global label by using a global label forwarding entry. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119229 | Method for Establishing Tunnel, Method for Allocating Label, Device and Network System - A network system includes a first Egress PE | 04-28-2016 |
20160119230 | HYPERVISOR INDEPENDENT NETWORK VIRTUALIZATION - A method includes receiving a first packet having a first virtual local area network (VLAN) identifier (ID) directly from a first virtual switch using a first physical overlay switch located at an edge of an internet protocol (IP) network, encapsulating the first packet with an overlay header and tunneling the first encapsulated packet via Layer-3 operations across the IP network to a second physical overlay switch in response to a determination that a source of the packet is physically separated from a destination of the packet by the IP network, receiving a second encapsulated packet having a second overlay header from the second physical overlay switch, de-encapsulating the second encapsulated packet to create a second packet having a second VLAN ID, and sending the second packet having the second VLAN ID directly to the first virtual switch operating in the first hypervisor domain. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119235 | FILTERING AND ROUTE LOOKUP IN A SWITCHING DEVICE - Methods and devices for processing packets are provided. The processing device may include an input interface for receiving data units containing header information of respective packets; a first module configurable to perform packet filtering based on the received data units; a second module configurable to perform traffic analysis based on the received data units; a third module configurable to perform load balancing based on the received data units; and a fourth module configurable to perform route lookups based on the received data units. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119281 | RELAY APPARATUS, RELAY SYSTEM, AND RELAY METHOD - Upon receipt of a packet addressed to a virtual IP address assigned to each first device from a second device outside a base network, a processor identifies a base relay apparatus that accommodates the first device, to which the virtual IP address is assigned, on the basis of the virtual address and a protocol type of the received packet, and also identifies a reception port number of the identified base relay apparatus, which corresponds to a combination of the virtual IP address and the protocol type of the received packet, from among reception port numbers each assigned to a combination of the first device accommodated to identify a transfer destination, and a protocol type. Then, the processor relays the received packet to the identified reception port number of the identified base relay apparatus. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119451 | WIRELESS DEVICE, METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR COMPRESSED MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL HEADER - Wireless device, method, and computer readable media for compressed media access control header and/or compressed acknowledgement are disclosed. The wireless device may include circuitry configured to transmit a media access control (MAC) protocol data unit (MPDU) delimiter with a field that indicates a subsequent MAC header is a compressed MAC header, and transmit a compressed MAC frame with the compressed MAC header. The compressed MAC header does not include one or more of the following group: duration, receive address, and transmit address. The circuitry may be further configured to receive a schedule in a transmission opportunity and receive a second compressed MAC frame. The circuitry may be further configured to determine that the receive address field is an address of the HEW device based on the schedule and determine that the receive address field is an address of an access point that transmitted the schedule based on the schedule. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119821 | ESTABLISHING LABEL SWITCHED PATHS HAVING REFRESH INTERVAL INDEPENDENT FAST REROUTE FACILITY PROTECTION - In one example, techniques of this disclosure may enable a point of local repair (PLR) network device to signal availability of link protection or node protection to a merge point (MP) network device and enable a network device to actively determine whether or not it is a merge point router. Based on whether or not the network device determines it is a MP, the network device may selectively clean up LSP states when there is an upstream link or node failure. The RSVP-TE protocol may be extended to enable a network device to send a tear down message to a downstream router, which may enable the downstream router to conditionally delete locale LSP state information. In some instances, a PLR network device may directly send a tear down message to a MP network device even though the PLR network device may not have a working bypass LSP. | 04-28-2016 |
20160127149 | METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING GRE TUNNEL, ACCESS DEVICE AND AGGREGATION GATEWAY - A method for implementing a GRE tunnel is provided. The access device obtains an address of an aggregation gateway group including at least one aggregation gateway. The access device sends a tunnel setup request in which an address of the access device is encapsulated by using the address of the aggregation gateway group as a destination address. The tunnel setup request is used to request for setting up a GRE tunnel. The access device receives a tunnel setup accept response sent back by an aggregation gateway and obtains an address of the aggregation gateway from the response. The aggregation gateway belongs to the aggregation gateway group. The access device configures the address of the aggregation gateway as a network side destination address of the GRE tunnel. A dynamic setup of a GRE tunnel on an access network that uses an aggregation technology is implemented. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127151 | MAPPING PBT AND PBB-TE TRAFFIC TO VPLS AND OTHER SERVICES - Transferring data in a network is disclosed. Transferring includes receiving a Provider Backbone Transport (PBT) frame, identifying a plurality of location specific identifiers in the PBT frame, mapping the PBT frame to a service based at least in part on the plurality of location specific identifiers, formatting the PBT frame according to the service to obtain a service frame, and transferring the service frame to a network associated with the service. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127225 | Label-switched Packets with Device-independent Labels - In one embodiment, a device-independent label is associated with multiple network devices such that the packet switching devices in a network will forward a packet based on the device-independent label to one of these multiple network devices. In one embodiment, these device-independent labels include, but are not limited to, domain-identifying labels and forwarding-punt labels. In one embodiment, a domain-identifying label is defined as a label that identifies a plurality of network nodes without identifying a single particular network node, single particular interface, nor single particular link. In one embodiment, a first-domain forwarding-punt label is placed at the top of the label stack to identify to forward the label-switched packet to any one of a plurality of designated forwarding nodes corresponding to the first-domain forwarding-punt label (e.g., for sending to a packet switching device which will have forwarding information for the second domain-identifying label.). | 05-05-2016 |
20160127229 | PACKET DATA ROUTING - Measures, including methods, systems, non-transitory computer-readable storage mediums and computer programs for use in routing packet data. At a network switching device, a data packet is received from a device located upstream of the network switching device. The received data packet comprises routing data associated with a routing decision which has been taken for the data packet upstream of the network switching device. The routing data comprises an abstract media access control (MAC) address corresponding to a next hop destination for the data packet located downstream of the network switching device. At the network switching device, the abstract MAC address in the data packet is replaced with a real MAC address of the next hop downstream destination. At the network switching device, the data packet is forwarded towards the next hop downstream destination. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127231 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, METHOD, AND MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A device is configured to refer correspondence relationship information, obtain pieces of information on first packets that are transmitted and received to and from a virtual machine coupled to the device through a first interface from among interfaces and pieces of information on second packets that are transmitted and received to and from a virtual machine coupled to the through a second interface from among the interfaces when the correspondence relationship information is changed, and determine that a virtual router is deployed on the virtual machine when either the transmission source address or the destination address is identical between the set of the first packets and the set of the second packets, the virtual router transferring a packet between the first interface and the second interface and translating transmission source addresses or transmission destination addresses between a set of the first packets and a set of the second packets. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127232 | MANAGEMENT SERVER AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING PACKET TRANSFER - A computer detects a key server located on a path through which a packet transmitted from a terminal is transferred. The key server is one of network servers located on the path. The key server satisfies a predetermined condition. Each of the network servers is configured to receive the packet and change a destination address set in the packet. The computer detects the key server located on a first path. The computer detects the key server located on a second path upon the first path being modified to obtain the second path. The computer assigns, if the key server located on the second path is different from the key server located on the first path, a first address to the key server located on the second path. The first address has been assigned to the key server located on the first path. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127233 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE USER COMMUNICATIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus for multiple user communications in wireless networks are provided. In some aspects, an apparatus for wireless communication is provided. The apparatus comprises a processing system configured to generate a clear to transmit message comprising a header having a local address field therein. The clear to send message indicates a transmission opportunity. The clear to send message further comprises a request that a plurality of devices concurrently transmit data at a specific time. The apparatus further comprises an interface configured to output the clear to send message for transmission to the plurality of devices. The processing system is further configured to insert one of a broadcast MAC address corresponding to the plurality of devices and a unicast MAC address corresponding to one of the plurality of devices into the local address field. The processing system is further configured to generate the header without generating a duration field therein. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127272 | VIRTUAL NETWORK - A SDN controller receives a forwarding request message including a header portion of a layer-2 packet. The SDN controller determines whether a source host and a destination host of the layer-2 packet are in the same virtual network according to a virtual network table. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127522 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF - A transmitting apparatus, a receiving apparatus, and a method of signal processing are provided. The transmitting apparatus includes at least one processor configured to implement: a packet generator which generates a packet including a header and a payload, based on an input stream; and a signal processor which signal-processes the generated packet. The header includes a base header, and the base header includes various fields indicating at least one of a packet type, and a value indicating that the packet transmits one single complete input packet, a segment of an input packet, or a plurality of input packets. The fields included in the base header may also indicate presence of an additional header and a substream identifier. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127949 | FRAME HEADER TRANSMITTING DEVICE AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING FRAME HEADER USING THE SAME - A method of transmitting a frame header in wireless communication includes: forming a frame header by integrating a MAC header and a PHY header; repeatedly transmitting the frame header multiple times to a scrambler; and generating, by the scrambler, data by scrambling the repeatedly transmitted frame header with a specific code. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128077 | PACKET DROP BASED DYNAMIC RECEIVE PRIORITY FOR NETWORK DEVICES - A hypervisor executed by a processing device retrieves a plurality of packets from a network device and forwards the packets to one or more virtual machines. The hypervisor determines a number of the plurality of packets successfully received by the one or more virtual machines, and when a function of the number is below a first threshold, decreases a priority for the network device associated with handling incoming packets. | 05-05-2016 |
20160134435 | SCALING ADDRESS RESOLUTION FOR MASSIVE DATA CENTERS - There is provided a network device disposed at an interface between an access segment and an interconnecting layer of a data center. The network device includes an address cache and an address resolution processor configured to receive an address request addressed to virtual machines in a transmission domain of the network device. The address request requesting a layer 2 address of a target virtual machine in the data center, and specifying a layer 3 address of the target virtual machine. In response to receiving a reply, the network device updates the address cache to include an entry specifying the layer 2 address of an edge device of an access segment which has the target virtual machine having a respective layer 3 address corresponding to the specified layer 3 address. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134511 | PACKETMIRROR PROCESSING IN A STACKING SYSTEM - A CB device receives a first packet sent from another device through a stacking port. In response to determining, based on source port information carried in the first packet, that the first packet entered the stacking system from a PE device and the first packet is a non-unicast packet, the switch module performs mirroring processing to the first packet to obtain a mirrored packet, and transmits the first packet and the mirrored packet to a packet buffering module of the CB device. In response to determining that a second packet from the packet buffering module entered the stacking system from the PE device and the second packet is the non-unicast packet, the second packet is forbidden from being forwarded through a first-level stacking port of the CB device. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134520 | OPTIMIZED INTER-VRF (VIRTUAL ROUTING AND FORWARDING) ROUTE LEAKING IN NETWORK OVERLAY BASED ENVIRONMENTS - In one embodiment, a method includes importing a route target for a remote Virtual Routing and Forwarding instance (VRF) at a leaf node in an overlay network, the leaf node comprising at least one local VRF configured thereon, processing routes received for the route target at the leaf node, and installing the routes for the remote VRF at the local VRF at the leaf node to enable inter-VRF communication via the leaf node. An apparatus and logic are also disclosed herein. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134525 | PACKET FORWARDING METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - The present application discloses a packet forwarding method, including: determining, by an Ingress PE in an Ethernet virtual private network instance (EVI), that a state of the EVI on a first Egress PE is Active, where an Ethernet virtual private network (EVPN) corresponding to the EVI includes a first CE; determining, by the Ingress PE, that a state of the EVI on a second Egress PE is Inactive; skipping, by the Ingress PE, forwarding a broadcast, unknown unicast, and multicast BUM packet to the second Egress PE, where the BUM packet is from the first CE; and forwarding, by the Ingress PE, the BUM packet to the first Egress PE. Repeated BUM traffic that is transmitted in a bearer network and is not finally sent to a remote site is reduced; therefore, a waste of bandwidth in the bearer network is reduced. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134530 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCALABLE CONTENT ROUTING AND MOBILITY IN NAMED DATA NETWORKS - Various disclosed embodiments include methods, systems, and computer-readable media for named data network (NDN) inter/intra-domain mobility. A complete de-coupling of identity and addressing space is established. This provides separation of control and forwarding allowing rich policy based routing, using SDN principles, as well as policy based global resolution. In one embodiment, the de-coupling of identity from location is achieved by a changeable forwarding label field in a header that can have nodal/domain/global scope. This disclosure provides content routing/mobility to be handled with a high degree of flexibility. This disclosure also provides mobility as a service for a component of a name space. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134531 | Network Based Service Function Chaining - Service aware network devices coordinate function chains of virtual functions. The network devices are aware of which virtual functions exist and how to interconnect them in the most efficient manner and define and process service graphs that can be maintained, monitored and redirected. The network devices themselves implement and manage the service graphs, as opposed to the virtual servers that host the virtual functions. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134532 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, RECEIVING APPARATUS AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - Provided are a transmitting apparatus, a receiving apparatus and controlling methods thereof. The transmitting apparatus includes: at least one processor configured to implement a packet generator which generates a packet including a header and a payload based on a plurality of input packets; and a signal processor which signal-processes the generated packet, and a transmitter configured to transmit the signal-processed packet. A base field included in the header includes a first field set to a first value representing that the base field is a first length or a second value representing that the base field is a second length. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134533 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LAYER 3 PROXY ROUTING - A system and method for efficiently handling layer 3 proxy routing after mobile devices move between subnets includes a controller and one or more ports coupled to the controller. The controller is configured to receive a gateway address request on the one or more ports, determine whether the gateway address request is received on an inter-domain link from a second gateway, determine whether the gateway address request is originated from the second gateway when the gateway address request is received on the inter-domain link, determine a layer 2 address of the second gateway when the gateway address request is not originated from the second gateway, form a gateway address response including the layer 2 address of the second gateway, and transmit the gateway address response on one of the one or more ports. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134534 | SWITCHING DEVICE, CONTROLLER, METHOD FOR CONFIGURING SWITCHING DEVICE, AND METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING PACKET - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for configuring a switching device, wherein the method includes: setting a first flow entry in at least one flow table, where the first flow entry includes a match field, the match field is used for designating information that needs to be matched, and instructing the switching device to perform matching between a value of information that is of a received packet and needs to be matched and a first field of each record in a database, to obtain a first record matching the packet, where each record in the database includes the first field, and the first field is used for denoting a designated value of the information that needs to be matched. The present invention reduces a quantity of flow entries. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134536 | HYBRID WILDCARD MATCH TABLE - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to a wildcard matching solution that uses a combination of static random access memories (SRAMs) and ternary content addressable memories (TCAMs) in a hybrid solution. In particular, the wildcard matching solution uses a plurality of SRAM pools for lookup and a spillover TCAM pool for unresolved hash conflicts. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134566 | MULTI-BAND TRANSCEIVER FRONT-END ARCHITECTURE WITH REDUCED SWITCH INSERTION LOSS - A T/R and routing switch includes a plurality of banks of a plurality of switches that can be individually switched into or out of a transmit and receive circuit. A control module can be provided to switch one of the switches into the circuit to connect one of a receive signal path or a transmit signal path to one of a plurality of communication links. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134587 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FORWARDING PACKET - Provided is a method for forwarding a packet, which includes that: when a matched network address port group translation entry is found according to a source Internet Protocol (IP) address and a source port number of a received packet, or according to a target IP address and a target port number of the received packet, the packet is translated according to the network address port group translation entry and then sent out. Also provided is a device for forwarding a packet. By adopting the solution, memory resources occupied by static configuration Network Address Port Translation (NAPT) rules and entries can be reduced, maintenance can be facilitated, and configurations can be reduced effectively. | 05-12-2016 |
20160142226 | METHOD FOR PACKET TUNNELING THROUGH SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORK, METHOD OF INTELLIGENTLY CONTROLLING FLOW OF A PACKET THROUGH SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORK AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the disclosure provide a method for packet tunneling through a software defined network (SDN), a method of intelligently controlling flow of a packet through an SDN network, and a system. The method for packet tunneling through an SDN includes: sending programmable instructions to an SDN controller from a processor executing an application program that includes the programmable instructions; wherein the programmable instruction comprises primitive operations regarding processing a packet for tunneling in accordance with a tunneling protocol; configuring a flow table by the first SDN controller in accordance with the programmable instructions; and processing and distributing the packet in accordance with the flow table by the SDN switch. The method may enable a system support multiple tunneling technologies without complicating the implementation of the SDN switch, and enable the system support new tunneling technologies without the need for updating the SDN switch, thereby reducing complexity of the SDN switch. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142248 | USING BIT INDEX EXPLICIT REPLICATION (BIER) IN LOW-POWER AND LOSSY NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a first node in a network receives one or more bitmaps from one or more child nodes of the first node according to a directed acyclic graph (DAG). Each of the one or more child nodes is associated with a corresponding unique bit position in the one or more bitmaps. The first node stores, in a forwarding table, the one or more bitmaps received from the one or more child nodes of the first node. The first node receives a message that includes a destination bitmap that identifies one or more destinations of the message via one or more set bits at bit positions associated with the one or more child nodes. The first node forwards the message towards the identified one or more destinations based on the destination bitmap and the one or more bitmaps stored in the forwarding table of the first node. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142282 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING SERVICE TRANSMISSION PATH - The present disclosure discloses a method, an apparatus and a system for determining a service transmission path. The method includes: receiving a service chaining object sent by a client device based on an expanded path computation element communication protocol (PCEP), wherein the service chaining object includes service processing capacities that service nodes need to provide when transmitting a service in a network; determining at least one service node matched with the service chaining object in the network according to service processing capacities that service nodes in pre-stored service node attribute information are capable of providing; and generating a service transmission path based on the determined service nodes, for transmitting the service initiated by the client device. The problems of large flow pressure and low utilization rate of the service nodes deployed in the network may be well solved. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142285 | OPENFLOW SWITCH AND METHOD FOR PACKET EXCHANGING THEREOF, SDN CONTROLLER AND DATA FLOW CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - An OpenFlow switch, a packet exchanging method thereof, an SDN controller and a data flow control method thereof are provided. The OpenFlow switch includes a network unit, a storage unit and a processing unit. The network unit is connecting to a network, wherein the network at least includes Ethernet switches. The storage unit stores a flow table including action rules, and each of the action rules includes a condition and an action. The processing unit receives a packet, the processing unit analyzes the packet and determines whether the packet satisfies the condition of each of the action rules. If the processing unit determines that the packet satisfies the condition of a first action rule, the processing unit executes the action of the first action rule, which includes: substitutes a flow address for a destination MAC address of the packet, and transmits the packet to the network through the network unit. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142287 | PACKET FORWARDING - ECMPs are selected from multiple TRILL paths to a gateway. The source MAC address of a received Ethernet packet whose destination MAC address is the MAC address of the gateway is replaced with a local MAC address. A path is selected from the ECMPs, and the Ethernet packet whose source MAC address has been replaced is sent via the selected path. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142290 | SERVICE PATH ALLOCATION METHOD, ROUTER AND SERVICE EXECUTION ENTITY - Embodiments of the present invention provide a service path allocation method, a router, and a service execution entity. In the method provided in the embodiments, a router obtains a user identifier and IP 5-tuple information after receiving a packet, queries for a corresponding target service processing path according to the user identifier and the IP 5-tuple information, and, after encapsulating the service packet, sends the service packet to the first-hop service execution entity in the service path for corresponding service processing. For a different service flow, the executed target service processing path is different. In the method provided in the embodiments, different service paths can be allocated to different service flows according to a user's customization and a service type, thereby implementing dynamic allocation of the service paths and increasing a utilization ratio of network resources. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142291 | ENHANCED ROUTE TRACING - A network comprises a destination node; a source node configured to output an enhanced route trace packet; and one or more intermediate nodes configured to forward the enhanced route trace packet toward the destination node based on a routing table until the enhanced route trace packet reaches the destination node. Each of the one or more intermediate nodes is further configured to insert identifying information into the enhanced route trace packet. The destination node is configured to send a response packet to the source node containing all the identifying information entered by the one or more intermediate nodes. The destination node is also configured to insert identifying information into the response packet. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142293 | PACKET SENDING METHOD, ROUTER, AND SERVICE SWITCHING ENTITY - The application provide a packet sending method, a router, and a service switching entity. According to the application, a router determines a flow group identifier of a service packet and information about a next-hop service switching entity according to a user identifier and IP 5-tuple information; and forwards the packet to the next-hop service switching entity according to the information about the next-hop service switching entity, so that the next-hop service switching entity determines a corresponding destination service instance according to the user identifier, the flow group identifier, a router identifier, and a processing result, and forwards the packet to the destination service instance, to perform corresponding service processing, thereby implementing service packet forwarding among service instances. The router in the method provided in the embodiments has a flow steering function, and steers a flow to a specified path to perform node-by-node processing. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142295 | STATEFUL SERVICES ON STATELESS CLUSTERED EDGE - In order to enable dynamic scaling of network services at the edge, novel systems and methods are provided to enable addition of add new nodes or removal of existing nodes while retaining the affinity of the flows through the stateful services. The methods provide a cluster of network nodes that can be dynamically resized to handle and process network traffic that utilizes stateful network services. The existing traffic flows through the edge continue to function during and after the changes to membership of the cluster. All nodes in the cluster operate in active-active mode, i.e., they are receiving and processing traffic flows, thereby maximizing the utilization of the available processing power. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142296 | STATEFUL SERVICES ON STATELESS CLUSTERED EDGE - In order to enable dynamic scaling of network services at the edge, novel systems and methods are provided to enable addition of add new nodes or removal of existing nodes while retaining the affinity of the flows through the stateful services. The methods provide a cluster of network nodes that can be dynamically resized to handle and process network traffic that utilizes stateful network services. The existing traffic flows through the edge continue to function during and after the changes to membership of the cluster. All nodes in the cluster operate in active-active mode, i.e., they are receiving and processing traffic flows, thereby maximizing the utilization of the available processing power. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142297 | STATEFUL SERVICES ON STATELESS CLUSTERED EDGE - In order to enable dynamic scaling of network services at the edge, novel systems and methods are provided to enable addition of add new nodes or removal of existing nodes while retaining the affinity of the flows through the stateful services. The methods provide a cluster of network nodes that can be dynamically resized to handle and process network traffic that utilizes stateful network services. The existing traffic flows through the edge continue to function during and after the changes to membership of the cluster. All nodes in the cluster operate in active-active mode, i.e., they are receiving and processing traffic flows, thereby maximizing the utilization of the available processing power. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142308 | CONVEYING DEVICE-DEPENDENT CONTEXT IN A NETWORK ADDRESS - A method for conveying context information that governs packets flowing in at least a first direction between at least one wireless device and a corresponding node communicating with the device comprises an embedder node populating a context portion, of a header of a packet for flow in a second reverse direction, that, once populated with context information that governs packet flow in the first direction, is imparted in the packet flow along the network in either the first or second direction and is conveyed in both directions, an unpacker node retrieving the context information from the context portion of a packet flowing in the first direction, and a configurer node applying the retrieved information to govern packet flow in the first direction therefrom. The embedder, unpacker and/or configurer nodes can be the same. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142309 | Method And System For Dynamic Routing And/Or Switching In A Network - Communication devices may determine routes for packets based on packet marking, routing parameters and/or costs associated with routes. A route may be selected and the packets may be communicated via the selected route. The parameters may comprise service class, real time compression, packet preemption, quality measurements, tier bypass and/or power usage information. The costs may comprise capacity, efficiency and/or performance information for power usage, bandwidth, memory and/or processing. The marking may comprise traffic type, user device capabilities, service class, quality measurements, latency requirements and/or power usage information. Endpoint devices, software applications and/or service providers may insert the marking into packets. Routes may be determined and/or selected based on shortest path bridging, audio video bridging, the marking, the routing parameters and/or the costs. Parameters and/or costs may be received and/or discovered from communication devices. Packets and/or the marking may be parsed and/or inspected. Costs may be based on routing parameters. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142310 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO ROUTE TRAFFIC IN A VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK - Methods and apparatus to route traffic in a virtual private network are disclosed herein. An example method to route such traffic includes receiving, at a first provider router that is not an edge router, first route information from a provider edge router. The first route information identifies a customer address in a customer network coupled to the provider edge router. The method also includes replacing, at the first provider router, a first next hop address included in the first route information with a second next hop address. The first next hop address identifies the provider edge router and the second next hop address identifies the first provider router. In some examples, the method also includes advertising the first route information to a second provider router located in a different region than the first provider router. In some examples, before advertising the first route information, a first route target identifying a first set of routers is replaced with a second route target identifying a second set of routers that does not include provider edge routers. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142312 | Packet Forwarding Method and Device - Embodiments disclose a packet forwarding method and device. The method includes: obtaining, by a packet forwarding device, a feature character included in a packet to be forwarded. The feature character is obtained by parsing, according to a preset packet content parsing policy, other content included in the packet to be forwarded except a 5-tuple. The method includes determining, according to a correspondence between different feature characters and corresponding routing information, routing information corresponding to the obtained feature character, and sending, according to the determined routing information, the packet to be forwarded | 05-19-2016 |
20160142313 | Intelligent Handling of Virtual Machine Mobility in Large Data Center Environments - At a physical device in a network configured to host a virtual switch and one or more virtual machines, a packet is received at the virtual switch from a source virtual machine that is directly attached to that virtual switch. A destination Media Access Control (MAC) address is identified from the packet indicating a destination virtual machine for the packet. In response to determining that the destination MAC address of the packet is not present in a database of MAC addresses accessible by the virtual switch, the destination MAC address of the packet is replaced with a shared MAC address associated with a plurality of physical switches in the network. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142315 | TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, FORWARDING CONTROL METHOD, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - A plurality of hash values is obtained by using a plurality of hash functions based on identification information of input data. A forwarding of the input data is controlled with reference to forwarding information based on any one of the hash values. A selection of a hash value to be used for the reference based on hash management information is controlled. The hash management information indicates whether or not each of the hash values is in-use to refer the forwarding information for each hash function. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142316 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SCALABLE AND FLEXIBLE TABLE SEARCH IN A NETWORK SWITCH - A network switch comprises a packet processing pipeline including a plurality of packet processing clusters configured to process a received packet through multiple packet processing stages based on table search/lookup results. The network switch further includes a plurality of search logic units each corresponding one of the plurality of packet processing clusters, wherein each of the search logic units is configured to convert a unified search request of a table from its corresponding packet processing cluster to a plurality table search commands specific to one or more memory clusters that maintain the table, provide the plurality table search commands specific to the memory clusters in parallel and collect and provide the table search results from the memory clusters to the corresponding packet processing cluster. The network switch further includes said one or more memory clusters configured to maintain the table to be searched, search the table in parallel according to the plurality table search commands from the search logic unit, and process and provide the table search results to the search logic unit. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142341 | PACKET SCHEDULING USING HIERARCHICAL SCHEDULING PROCESS - System and method of data routing according to a hierarchical scheduling process. Incoming data traffic is allocated to various queues of a buffer. A scheduling tree has a top level for queues, a bottom level for egress ports, and a plurality of intermediate levels corresponding to different granularities with respect to service categories. Each queue is assigned to a particular node in each intermediate level of the scheduling tree. The scheduling tree traverses through multiple scheduling stages from the bottom to the top level to select a winner node in each level based on a variety of fairness and differentiating variables. As a result, a queue associated with the winner nodes in various levels is selected and data from the queue is read out and sent to the selected egress port for transmission. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142365 | ADDRESS RESOLUTION REWRITING - A network controller may rewrite an address resolution request and an address resolution response. The address resolution request may be rewritten by changing a request source link address to a link address of a first switch. The address resolution response may be rewritten by changing a response source link address to a link address of a second switch. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142520 | NETWORK SWITCHING WITH CO-RESIDENT DATA-PLANE AND NETWORK INTERFACE CONTROLLERS - A system with co-resident data-plane and network interface controllers embodying a method for network switching of a data packet incoming from a network at a packet input processor portion of a network interface resource comprising the packet input processor, a packet output processor, and a network interface controller, implemented on a chip, to a target entity, is disclosed. Additionally, the system embodying a method for network switching of a data packet outgoing from an internal facing interface of a network interface controller portion of the network interface resource to a network is disclosed. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142521 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNALLING IN HEADER FIELD - A method, apparatus, and non-transitory computer-readable recording medium for transmitting signalling in a field of a header. The method includes identifying the field of a header; replacing n bits in the field with n signalling bits, where positions in the field replaced by the n signalling bits are contiguous or non-contiguous, and where the n signalling bits and the positions in the field are user-defined; and transmitting the header. The apparatus includes a processor configured to identify a field of a header; a controller configured to replace n bits in the field with n signalling bits, where positions in the field replaced by the n signalling bits are contiguous or non-contiguous, and where the n signalling bits and the positions in the field are user-defined; and a transceiver configured to transmit the header. | 05-19-2016 |
20160149724 | FORWARDING PACKETS - According to various examples, in a site network, a layer-2 gateway device via which a terminal accesses a layer-2 network establishes a virtual link and an IS-IS relation with a layer-3 edge device, sends information of an learned MAC address to the layer-3 edge device, receives a packet sent by the layer-3 edge device via the virtual link, performs tunnel decapsulation on the packet, and searches a local MAC forwarding table based on a VLAN ID and a destination MAC address in the decapsulated packet to forward the packet in the site network according to a search result. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149799 | Loop Avoidance Method, Device and System - A loop avoidance method, device and system. The system includes a first network device and a second network device in an internal network, a first Ethernet port and a second Ethernet port of the two network devices are of a first type, and loop avoidance priorities of the Ethernet ports are different from each other; root media access control (MAC) addresses of the two network devices are the same, and are different from respective network bridge MAC addresses; the second network device receives a loop detection frame from the first Ethernet port through the second Ethernet port, where a source address of the loop detection frame is the root MAC address, and blocks the second Ethernet port according to the loop avoidance priority. A network device blocks, according to a loop avoidance priority, an Ethernet port connected to an external network to avoid changing a topology of an internal network. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149800 | Routing Loop Determining Method and Device - A routing loop determining method and a device. The method includes: acquiring, by a forwarding device in a layer 3 network, a first packet, where a time to live (TTL) value of the first packet is reduced to 0 by the forwarding device; acquiring, by the forwarding device, a second packet whose destination Internet Protocol IP address is the same as that of the first packet; recording, by the forwarding device, a feature of the second packet; forwarding, by the forwarding device, the second packet; and acquiring, by the forwarding device, a third packet according to the feature of the second packet, where a feature of the third packet is the same as that of the second packet, and determining that a routing loop exists. The present disclosure resolves a problem that a loop in a layer 3 network cannot be detected, and improves accuracy of sending a packet. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149804 | PARALLEL MULTIPATH ROUTING ARCHITECTURE - Disclosed are various embodiments for a parallel multipath routing architecture. An edge node of an overlay network receives packets to be communicated to a destination network address. The received packets are encoded for communication through multiple paths of the overlay network leading to a second edge node communicatively coupled to the destination network address. The packets are duplicated across the multiple paths to minimize the likelihood of packet loss. The second edge node discards duplicated instances of the packets and regenerates the original packets for forwarding to the destination network address. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149809 | DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD BETWEEN A ROAMING RADIO EQUIPMENT ITEM AND A NETWORK ACCESS GATEWAY - A data communication method between a mobile radio communications equipment and a gateway connected to a network, the data being organized in the form of packets comprising at least one first internal header and a second external header, comprises: an initial information exchange phase comprising: transmission by the radio communications equipment to the gateway of at least one predictable field out of the fields of the external and internal headers, reception by the radio communications equipment from the gateway of at least one predictable field of the external header, a phase of transmission of at least one data packet comprising: the deletion of the external and internal headers of at least one data packet, the generation, in at least one data packet, of a header of level lower than a network layer comprising at least one non-predictable field of the internal header, the transmission of at least one data packet. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149810 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING CONTENT ACQUISITION PATH AND PROCESSING REQUEST - The present disclosure provide a method for determining a content acquisition path, a method for processing a content request and a corresponding apparatus and system. The method for determining the content acquisition path includes: receiving a request from a user, where the request is used for requesting an original content provider to provide a content, and the request carries a name of the content, a network address of the original content provider and a network address of the user; calculating at least two forwarding paths to the original content provider, and determining a content acquisition path according to link cost on each forwarding path and a cache hit rate of a network node on each forwarding path to the content; and sending the request to a next network node according to the content acquisition path, for enabling the next network node to forward or respond to the request. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149811 | METHOD TO OPTIMIZE FLOW-BASED NETWORK FUNCTION CHAINING - In a forwarding network comprising a function chain network controller, a plurality of intermediate network functions (NFs) and flow-based chain selectors (FBCSs) forming VNFs and configured to transfer data packets via a plurality of links, a method comprising a FBCS requesting substitution in the header representation of function chain entries of a data packet header in a flow with a different representation of function chain entries, wherein the flow bypasses at least one intermediate FBCS based on the substituted function chain entries representation. The function chain network controller discovers FBCS capable nodes and their topology, and maintains a function chain substitution state and distributes it to the FBCS relevant substitutions. The function chain network controller distributes a list of adjacent FBCSs to the FBCS, and distributes a list of abstracted adjacent FBCSs to the FBCS and translates requests from an abstracted value to a real value. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149812 | SECURITY DEVICE IMPLEMENTING FLOW LOOKUP SCHEME FOR IMPROVED PERFORMANCE - A security device performing flow classification and storing flow information in a flow table includes a flow engine generating a flow key identifying a flow to which a received data packet belongs, the flow engine applying a hash function to the flow key to generate a flow hash value and an entry hash value being orthogonal to each other. The security device includes a hash map and a flow data table. The hash map table is indexed by the flow hash value and an entry index value is derived from the entry hash value. The flow data table is indexed by the flow hash value and the entry index value to return at least a retrieved flow key from a flow record of an indexed entry. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149834 | STORAGE DEVICE IN WHICH FORWARDING-FUNCTION-EQUIPPED MEMORY NODES ARE MUTUALLY CONNECTED AND DATA PROCESSING METHOD - According to one embodiment, a storage device includes a plurality of memory nodes. Each of memory nodes includes a plurality of input ports, a plurality of output ports, a selector, a packet controller and a memory. The selector outputs a packet input to the input port to one of the output ports. The packet controller controls the selector. The memory stores data. The memory nodes are mutually connected at the input ports and the output ports. The memory node has an address that is determined by its physical position. The packet controller switches the output port that outputs the packet based on information including at least a destination address of the packet and an address of the memory node having the packet controller when receiving a packet that is not addressed to the memory node having the packet controller. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149857 | PROCESS FOR ASSIGNING A NETWORK ADDRESS TO A TERMINAL NETWORK-ELEMENT, NETWORK, INTERCONNECTION NETWORK-ELEMENT, ADDRESSING SERVER AND ASSOCIATED TERMINAL NETWORK-ELEMENT - The invention relates to a process for assignment, by an addressing server for a network, of a network address to a terminal network-element connected to one of the connection ports of one of the interconnection network-elements of said network, comprising: transmission of a network address request by said terminal network-element to said interconnection network-element, the determination by said interconnection network-element of a location of said terminal network-element where said location combines a topological identifier for said interconnection network-element with at least one identifier for said connection port, the transmission by said interconnection network-element to said addressing server of said request with said location, assignment by said addressing server to said terminal network-element of said network address based on said location. | 05-26-2016 |
20160156543 | DISTRIBUTED SERVICE ROUTING PROTOCOL SUITABLE FOR VIRTUAL NETWORKS | 06-02-2016 |
20160156551 | LABEL-BASED FORWARDING WITH ENHANCED SCALABILITY | 06-02-2016 |
20160156552 | FLOW TABLE ENTRY IN SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKING | 06-02-2016 |
20160156553 | PROTOCOL CIRCUIT LAYER | 06-02-2016 |
20160156554 | TRANSPARENT RBRIDGE | 06-02-2016 |
20160156555 | Packet Forwarding Method, Apparatus, and System | 06-02-2016 |
20160156557 | Packet Processing VLIW Action Unit with Or-Multi-Ported Instruction Memory | 06-02-2016 |
20160157127 | Method and Apparatus for Packet Capture Using Preambles and Postambles | 06-02-2016 |
20160164654 | WIRELESS DEVICE, METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR MULTI-USER REQUEST-TO-SEND AND CLEAR-TO-SEND IN A HIGH EFFICIENCY WIRELESS LOCAL-AREA - Apparatuses, methods and computer readable media for multi-user request-to-send and clear-to-send are disclosed. An apparatus of a high-efficiency wireless local area network (HEW) master station comprising circuitry is disclosed. The circuitry may be configured to: select a first group of stations to transmit a multi-user request-to-send (MU-RTS) transmission to and generate a MU-RTS packet for the first group of stations. The circuitry may be configured to transmit the MU-RTS packet to the first group of stations. The MU-RTS may include a resource map that indicates a subchannel for each of the first group of stations to receive data on and/or a power control indication for at least one of the stations of the one or more stations. The MU-RTS may indicate that some of the first group of stations should transmit a multi-user clear-to-send (MU-CTS) and others of the first group of stations should not transmit a MU-CTS. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164772 | SERVER-CENTRIC HIGH PERFORMANCE NETWORK ARCHITECTURE FOR MODULAR DATA CENTERS - Disclosed are systems and methods for network architecture that is a server-centric network architectural design. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164776 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKING SERVICE FUNCTION CHAINING - Systems and methods are disclosed for steering packet traffic through an online network. One method includes receiving, at a switch of a network, a packet of data; classifying, by the switch, the packet to a service function chain based on fields of a packet header of the packet, the service function chain including a set of service functions to be performed on the packet; setting, by the switch, fields of the packet header to identify the service function chain classified; and transmitting, by the switch over the network, the packet to a service function device that performs a service function on the packet, the service function being in the set of service functions. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164778 | SERVER-CENTRIC HIGH PERFORMANCE NETWORK ARCHITECTURE FOR MODULAR DATA CENTERS - Disclosed are systems and methods for network architecture that is a server-centric network architectural design. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164779 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORWARDING MPLS DATA PACKET - The application discloses a method and an apparatus for forwarding an MPLS data packet, which are used in an environment of hybrid networking of an SR network and a non-SR network. The method is as follows: when obtaining a to-be-sent MPLS data packet, a first SR router in an SR network determines whether a next-hop router supports an SR characteristic; the first SR router encapsulates the MPLS data packet into an IP tunnel when determining that the next-hop router does not support the SR characteristic, and sends an encapsulated MPLS data packet to the next-hop router to enable the encapsulated MPLS data packet to be forwarded, based on an IP routing table, to a second SR router. In this way, correct forwarding of an MPLS data packet is completed in an environment of hybrid networking of an SR router and a non-SR router. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164805 | PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS - The present disclosure provides a packet transmission method and an apparatus. A first network device receives, through an inter-system cascade port, a first packet sent by a second network device, and adds a first remote RMT identifier to the first packet to obtain a second packet; d the first network device determines, according to the first RMT identifier in the second packet and an attribute of a sending port for the second packet, whether there is a need to perform pruning processing on the second packet; and if the sending port for the second packet is a multi-homed port, the first network device performs pruning processing on the second packet; if the sending port for the second packet is a single-homed port, the first network device deletes the first RMT identifier in the second packet, and sends the first packet through the single-homed port. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164830 | Method for processing raw IP packet and device thereof - Methods for processing a raw Internet Protocol (IP) packet and corresponding devices are provided. A method is applied on a Broadband Network Gateway (BNG) side, and the method includes that after it is acquired that a Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) goes on line, a public network IP address and a public network identifier range are allocated to the CPE; and after a downlink raw IP packet is received, the packet is forwarded to a corresponding CPE according to a destination IP address of the packet and a route of a public network identifier, another method is applied on a CPE side, and the includes that: a public network IP address and a public network identifier range allocated by a BNG are received; after an uplink raw IP packet transmitted by a user is received, a source IP address in the packet is replaced with the public network IP address, a value of an identifier field in the packet is replaced with a value in the public network identifier range allocated by the BNG, and then the uplink raw IP packet is transmitted to the BNG. The present invention remedies the defect that an existing Network Address Translation (NAT) technology does not support forwarding of a raw IP packet. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165014 | INTER-DOMAIN SERVICE FUNCTION CHAINING - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a packet in a service function chain at a network device located at a border of a first administrative domain, the packet comprising a service function path identifier and a service index, processing the packet at the network device, wherein processing comprises modifying the packet based on the service function path identifier and the service index to direct the packet to a second administrative domain, and forwarding the packet from the network device to the second administrative domain for processing in the service function chain. The service function chain extends over the first and second administrative domains. An apparatus and logic are also disclosed herein. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165015 | EMBEDDED RTCP PACKETS - Various of the disclosed embodiments reduce the impact of RTCP overhead by including RTCP information in the media packets themselves. The values in the RTCP headers may be selected based on the context and organized in a unique format for transport in the media packets. For example, RTT, packet loss, and bandwidth estimates may dictate when and how RTCP data is moved into the media packet. An interface may be provided for extracting the data so that clients may easily integrate the embodiments with existing RTCP-based systems. Inclusion of the RTCP information in the media packet may increase the media packet size, which may be anticipated in bandwidth assessments and accommodations. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165588 | APPARATUS, METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY IN A HIGH-EFFICIENCY WIRELESS LOCAL-AREA NETWORK - Methods, devices and a computer-readable medium are disclosed for an uplink transmission opportunity in a high-efficiency wireless local-area network (HEW) are disclosed. A HEW station is disclosed that may include circuitry configured to receive a trigger frame with a first duration from a HEW master station, determine a second duration based on the first duration, generate a packet with the second duration, and transmit the packet with the second duration in an uplink transmission opportunity to the master station in accordance with at least one from the following group: orthogonal frequency division multiple-access and multiple-user multiple-input multiple-output. The trigger frame may include a resource map and the HEW station may transmit the packet on a channel indicated in the resource map. The second duration may be indicated in a legacy portion of the packet. The second duration may extend to one short interframe space before an acknowledgement of the packet. | 06-09-2016 |
20160173319 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGEMENT OF AN OPENFLOW AGENT IN OPENFLOW DEVICES | 06-16-2016 |
20160173373 | NETWORK SERVICE HEADER METADATA FOR LOAD BALANCING | 06-16-2016 |
20160173375 | APPARATUS AND METHODS OF ROUTING WITH CONTROL VECTORS IN A SYNCHRONIZED ADAPTIVE INFRASTRUCTURE (SAIN) NETWORK | 06-16-2016 |
20160173376 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING STORED PROGRAM | 06-16-2016 |
20160173377 | System and Method for Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access Power-Saving Poll Transmission | 06-16-2016 |
20160173378 | USER PACKET PROCESSING METHOD AND FORWARDING PLANE DEVICE | 06-16-2016 |
20160173379 | FAST SOFTWARE L2 SWITCHING USING A CACHING TECHNIQUE | 06-16-2016 |
20160173445 | CCN ROUTING USING HARDWARE-ASSISTED HASH TABLES | 06-16-2016 |
20160173655 | CONNECTION BASED BANDWIDTH OPTIMIZATION OF DATA PACKETS | 06-16-2016 |
20160173657 | PACKET PROCESSING METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM | 06-16-2016 |
20160182177 | TECHNIQUES FOR SYNCHRONIZED EXECUTION OF A COMMAND AT NETWORK FABRIC NODES | 06-23-2016 |
20160182191 | VOIP SYSTEM | 06-23-2016 |
20160182254 | Multiple Prefix Connections with Translated Virtual Local Area Network | 06-23-2016 |
20160182367 | PARALLEL DIRECTION DECODE CIRCUITS FOR NETWORK-ON-CHIP | 06-23-2016 |
20160182370 | Probe Routing in a Network | 06-23-2016 |
20160182371 | Route Control For Internet Exchange Point | 06-23-2016 |
20160182372 | Method and Apparatus of Compressing Network Forwarding Entry Information | 06-23-2016 |
20160182373 | TECHNOLOGIES FOR NETWORK DEVICE FLOW LOOKUP MANAGEMENT | 06-23-2016 |
20160182444 | TRANSLATING NETWORK ADDRESS | 06-23-2016 |
20160182445 | MOBILE CELLULAR NETWORK BACKHAUL | 06-23-2016 |
20160182692 | NETWORK SWITCHING WITH LAYER 2 SWITCH COUPLED CO-RESIDENT DATA-PLANE AND NETWORK INTERFACE CONTROLLERS | 06-23-2016 |
20160191272 | Systems and Methods for Network Interoperability - Systems and methods for interoperating between networks. A first network may be configured to operate according to a first real time network protocol and each of one or more second networks may be configured to operate according to respective second real time traffic protocols. A mapping may specify data routing between a plurality of ports and the routing may maintain real time behavior between the first network and the one or more second networks. Additionally, routing information may be inserted in packets routed from the one or more second networks to the first network and removed from packets routed from the first network to the one or more second networks. The packets may be routed, based on the mapping, to distinct queues for the first network and the one or more second networks for processing by an application executing on at least one device. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191311 | WORK MODE NEGOTIATION - A work mode negotiation method is disclosed. A core backbone (CB) device transmits a Mode Negotiate Request packet through an Ethernet port to a port extender (PE) device, wherein the Mode Negotiate Request packet carries a set of identifications of the PE devices for cascade. Next, the CB device receives a Mode Negotiate Reply packet through the Ethernet port sent by the PE device, and transmits a Mode Negotiate Acknowledge packet through the Ethernet port to the PE device. Finally, the CB device changes a current work mode of the Ethernet port from an Ethernet mode to a cascade mode after transmitting the Mode Negotiate Acknowledge packet. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191373 | Conditional Instructions for Packet Processing - A network switch includes a plurality of ports, a parser coupled to the plurality of ports, and a processor coupled to the ports and configured to process a received packet via one of the ports. The received packet includes a first header field, a second header field, and a destination header field, each of the first, second, and destination header fields including a TTL field. The parser is configured to decide a valid bit for each of the first header field, the second header field and the destination header field, based on an availability for each of the first header field, the second header field and the destination header field. The processor is configured to execute an instruction to cause content of a select one of the first or second header field's TTL field to be copied to the destination header field. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191381 | VIRTUAL MACHINE NETWORK CONTROLLER - Embodiments relate to virtual networks. An aspect includes a method for controlling a virtual network including analyzing header content of packet traffic, where the packet traffic corresponds to one or more virtual machines run on a computer. The method includes performing flow routing of the packet traffic through a virtual network based on the analyzing overlay virtual network identifiers or virtual extensible local area network (VXLAN) identifiers in the header content. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191382 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SMALL DATA PACKET, AND DEVICE - The present invention provides a method for transmitting a small data packet, and a device. The method includes: receiving, by a data transmission device, small data packet indication information sent by a gateway; and if the data transmission device determines, according to the small data packet indication information, that a to-be-sent data packet is a small data packet, transmitting, by the data transmission device, the small data packet in a control plane transmission manner. The present invention can ensure that a data transmission device accurately determines a small data packet, and avoid a network signaling increase caused by a determining error, thereby reducing a network load. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191384 | Batch Processing of Packets - Some embodiments provide a method for a managed forwarding element. The method receives a set of packets for processing by the managed forwarding element. For each of several packets in the set, the method associates the packet with one of several groups of other packets in the set. Each group of packets shares a set of characteristics. For each group of packets the method identifies a set of actions to perform and executes the specified set of actions on all of the packets in the group together. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191385 | CCN FRAGMENTATION GATEWAY - A method is provided for managing fragmentation of packets for content object retrieval at a content centric networking (CCN) gateway in a CCN network. The method includes receiving a first CCN interest packet including a name for a first content object from a user equipment in an access network, storing a fragmentation stream identifier in a header of the first CCN interest packet, and setting a path minimum maximum transmission unit (MTU) in the first CCN interest packet to an MTU value required by a link between the CCN gateway and a node forwarding the first CCN interest packet to the CCN gateway. The method further includes forwarding the first CCN interest packet with updated fragmentation stream identifier and path minimum MTU toward a content provider, receiving a set of packets of including fragments of the first content object from the content provider, reassembling and verifying the first content object from the set of packets, and refragmenting the first content object to minimum MTU of the access network and storing the refragmented first content object in the content store. The first content object is then returned to the user equipment in the access network. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191386 | NETWORK-BASED ETHERNET SWITCHING PACKET SWITCH, NETWORK, AND METHOD - Embodiments of the disclosure are directed to implementing a router Media Access Control (MAC) Ethernet switch in a network. An Ethernet-over-Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) packet switch system includes a transport switching element communicatively coupled to one or more routers in a client layer and communicatively coupled via a photonic switching layer with a plurality of transport switching elements forming a transport layer; wherein the transport switching element is configured to flood addresses, in the transport layer, associated with the one or more routers to disseminate learned end-point addresses of the one or more routers so that service-based addressing is resolved by the transport layer. The addresses from the client layer are flooded in the control plane which is a lower layer control plane relative to the client layer to allow the transport switching element and the plurality of transport switching elements to use of the addresses | 06-30-2016 |
20160191387 | ROUTING METHOD AND NETWORK TRANSMISSION APPARATUS - It is determined whether or not the address of a first type specified in an address resolution query is an address that allows direct routing to a first network. If the direct routing is determined to be allowed, a routing table is configured such that a packet including, as a destination, the address of a second type obtained by the address resolution query is forwarded to the first network. If the direct routing is determined not to be allowed, the routing table is configured such that a packet including the obtained address of the second type as a destination is forwarded to a second network. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191388 | Pattern Matching Values of a Packet Which May Result in False-Positive Matches - In one embodiment, a packet switching device determines that a packet matches one of a plurality of predetermined patterns, however, this matching may produce a false-positive match of one of the underlying rules corresponding to the plurality of predetermined patterns. In one embodiment, determining the packet matches one of the plurality of predetermined patterns includes determining a first pattern match of a packet when each particular portion of a plurality of different portions of the packet is found to be matching a corresponding particular pattern portion by performing a table lookup operation based on the particular portion as an address in a corresponding different current portion-iteration table to retrieve a corresponding partial result. In one embodiment, the first pattern match is filtered using a second validation technique for removing false-positive first pattern matches. In one embodiment, the second validation technique includes using hashing. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191421 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SWITCH, CONTROLLER, ANCILLARY DATA MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, DATA FORWARDING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system, comprises: a first network switch that transmits to a network controller a control message containing ancillary data; the network controller that retrieves the ancillary data from the control message containing the ancillary data, holds the ancillary data, and transmits to a second network switch a control message containing the ancillary data; and the second network switch that receives the control message containing the ancillary data from the network controller, retrieves a packet to be outputted and the ancillary data, and forwards the packet and the ancillary data to a specified destination. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191629 | MESSAGE PROCESSING UNIT OF PLC SYSTEM - Disclosed is a message processing unit provided in a PLC system including a master and a plurality of slaves. The message processing unit is provided to each of the slaves and includes a first filter configured to receive a message transmitted from the master and to determine whether the message is a broadcast message, a second filter configured to receive the message delivered from the first filter and to determine whether the message is a message-to-be-processed, and a processor configured to process the message he delivered from the first filter or the second filter. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191678 | TECHNOLOGIES FOR DATA INTEGRITY OF MULTI-NETWORK PACKET OPERATIONS - Technologies for ensuring data integrity for multi-packet operations include a computing device and a remote computing device communicatively coupled via a network. The computing device is configured to perform a segmentation offload operation on an original network packet, compute a hash value on the payload of each segmented payload of the original network packet, and store the hash value and an indication into the segmented network packet that indicates the hash value is stored in the segmented network packet. The remote computing device is configured to extract the indication and the hash value from a received network packet in response to determining the indication indicates the hash value is stored in the segmented network packet, compute a hash value on the payload of received network packet, and determine an integrity of the payload based on a comparison of the extracted hash value and the computed hash value. | 06-30-2016 |
20160197740 | METHOD FOR THE PROVISION AND TRANSMISSION OF DATA, IN PARTICULAR WITH A LINK TO A VEHICLE | 07-07-2016 |
20160197825 | FILTERING OF DATA PACKETS TO BE FORWARDED IN THE CAR2X NETWORK | 07-07-2016 |
20160197826 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS AND RECEIVING APPARATUS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF | 07-07-2016 |
20160197829 | INSTALLATION OF CACHED DOWNWARD PATHS BASED ON UPWARD DATA TRAFFIC IN A NON-STORING LOW-POWER AND LOSSY NETWORK | 07-07-2016 |
20160197830 | Selective Routing Of Network Traffic For Remote Inspection In Computer Networks | 07-07-2016 |
20160197831 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NAME RESOLUTION IN SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKING | 07-07-2016 |
20160197839 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING QOS FOR IN-BAND CONTROL TRAFFIC IN AN OPENFLOW NETWORK | 07-07-2016 |
20160197852 | PROTOCOL INDEPENDENT PROGRAMMABLE SWITCH (PIPS) SOFTWARE DEFINED DATA CENTER NETWORKS | 07-07-2016 |
20160197854 | MECHANISM FOR ENABLING LAYER TWO HOST ADDRESSES TO BE SHIELDED FROM THE SWITCHES IN A NETWORK | 07-07-2016 |
20160197876 | METHOD FOR CENTRALIZED ADDRESS RESOLUTION | 07-07-2016 |
20160198025 | NETWORK SYSTEM AND NETWORK FLOW TRACING METHOD | 07-07-2016 |
20160205017 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF | 07-14-2016 |
20160205018 | HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE METHODOLOGIES FOR CREATING AND MANAGING PROTABLE SERVICE FUNCTION CHAINS | 07-14-2016 |
20160205019 | PORT EXTENDER | 07-14-2016 |
20160205020 | Method for Implementing Layer 3 Virtual Private Network and Device | 07-14-2016 |
20160205042 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSCEIVING DATA OVER ON-CHIP NETWORK | 07-14-2016 |
20160205588 | MAC Header Compression in Long-Range Wireless Local Area Networks | 07-14-2016 |
20160254927 | TAGGING VIRTUAL OVERLAY PACKETS IN A VIRTUAL NETWORKING SYSTEM | 09-01-2016 |
20160254928 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR STACKING FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCHES WITH FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET STACKING LINKS | 09-01-2016 |
20160254994 | SYNONYMOUS LABELS | 09-01-2016 |
20160254995 | Control Device and Control Method in SDN Network | 09-01-2016 |
20160254997 | REFRESH FLOW ENTRY | 09-01-2016 |
20160254999 | System And Method Of Using An Exact Match Table And Longest Prefix Match Table As A Combined Longest Prefix Match | 09-01-2016 |
20160255001 | PACKET FORWARDING CONTROL | 09-01-2016 |
20160255002 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING FLEXIBLE LOOKUP KEYS IN SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORKS | 09-01-2016 |
20160255019 | METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATED TO A DISTRIBUTED SWITCH FABRIC | 09-01-2016 |
20160255048 | COMMUNICATIONS OVER MULTIPLE PROTOCOL INTERFACES IN A COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT | 09-01-2016 |
20160255177 | TRANSCEIVER THAT INDICATES THE PACKET BANDWIDTH IN A WIRELESS OFDM NETWORK WITH MULTIPLE OVERLAPPED FREQUENCY BANDS | 09-01-2016 |
20160255179 | METHOD OF INDICATING PACKET BANDWIDTH IN A WIRELESS OFDM NETWORK WITH MULTIPLE OVERLAPPED FREQUENCY BANDS | 09-01-2016 |
20160380881 | ADAPTIVE NETWORK FUNCTION CHAINING - Disclosed herein are system, method, and computer program product embodiments for dynamically applying network functions to traffic flows based on heuristics, policy conditions and client-specified conditions. A network monitors a network traffic flow to determine whether the network traffic flow meets a first criterion of a first rule. The criterion specifies that when the first criterion is met a network function be used to analyze or process the network traffic flow. When the network traffic flow is determined to meet the first criterion, the network determines a first route through the network to a network function provider that provides the network function and configures one or more routers along the first route to forward the network traffic flow to the network function provider for analysis or processing. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380887 | SOURCE IMPOSITION OF NETWORK ROUTES IN COMPUTING NETWORKS - Various techniques for source imposition of network routes are disclosed herein. In one embodiment, a method includes receiving label values at a source host from a label server. The individual label values corresponding to a network route to one of the hosts or network nodes in the computing network. The method also includes constructing a label stack to reach a destination virtual machine on a destination computing device in the computing network based on the received label values corresponding to the destination computing device and a location of the source computing device in the computing network. The method also includes imposing the constructed label stack on a packet destined to the destination virtual machine on the destination computing device. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380893 | TRAFFIC FORWARDING IN A NETWORK WITH GEOGRAPHICALLY DISPERSED SITES - An example method is provided for a first edge device to perform traffic forwarding in a network with geographically dispersed first site and second site. The method may comprise reconfiguring, for a workload migrated from the second site to the first site, the first edge device located at the first site as a default gateway of the workload from the second edge device located at the second site by causing the workload to learn an association between a default gateway Internet Protocol (IP) address associated with the second edge device to a Media Access Control (MAC) address associated with the first edge device. The method may further comprise receiving, from the workload, traffic for forwarding to a destination, and in response to determination that the destination is not within the second site, forwarding the received traffic to the destination without using the second edge device. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380894 | PATH MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION UNIT HANDLING FOR VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS - Techniques are described herein for optimizing communications in a network. At a router in a virtual private network, a packet is received from a device in a subnetwork protected by the router. The router examines the packet to determine a source address that identifies the device and a destination address that identifies a destination network device for the packet. The router also analyzes the packet to determine a size of the packet and determines whether or not the size of the packet is larger than a maximum transmission unit size. If the size of the packet is larger than the maximum transmission unit size, the router encapsulates the packet with a header that includes the destination address and a new source address that identifies the router. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380922 | Method and Apparatus for Stateless Transport Layer Tunneling - Some embodiments of the invention provide a method of tunneling a data packet by encapsulating the data packet with a protocol header and specifying information in the fields of the header in a manner that a network switch can offload processing tasks to its network interface controller. The switch on a transmit side sends the processed data packet through the tunnel to another switch on a receive side. The two sides represent the two ends of the tunnel established between the two switches. Each of the transmit and received side switches is controlled by a switch controller, which in some embodiments is implemented as software. The switch controllers and network interface controllers together process the data packet which is being transferred through the tunnel between the switches. | 12-29-2016 |
20170237648 | RECORDING MEDIUM AND PACKET RELAY METHOD | 08-17-2017 |
20170237656 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SERVICE FUNCTION FORWARDING IN A SERVICE DOMAIN | 08-17-2017 |
20170237658 | ASSIGNING VARIABLE LENGTH ADDRESS IDENTIFIERS TO PACKETS IN A PROCESSING SYSTEM | 08-17-2017 |
20170237659 | RELIABLE TRANSPORT OF ETHERNET PACKET DATA WITH WIRE-SPEED AND PACKET DATA RATE MATCH | 08-17-2017 |
20170237660 | ANCHORING IP DEVICES IN ICN NETWORKS | 08-17-2017 |
20170237661 | PROCESSING PACKETS BY A NETWORK DEVICE | 08-17-2017 |
20170237662 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF USING AN EXACT MATCH TABLE AND LONGEST PREFIX MATCH TABLE AS A COMBINED LONGEST PREFIX MATCH | 08-17-2017 |
20170237663 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF LOADING AN EXACT MATCH TABLE AND LONGEST PREFIX MATCH TABLE | 08-17-2017 |
20170237664 | PERFORMING A MULTI-STAGE LOOKUP TO CLASSIFY PACKETS | 08-17-2017 |
20170237688 | CENTRAL SWITCH FOR COUPLING VIRTUAL DESKTOPS TO PERIPHERAL DEVICES | 08-17-2017 |
20170237691 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE VIRTUAL SWITCH INSTANCES ON A NETWORK SWITCH | 08-17-2017 |
20170237706 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING NETWORK RULE ENTRY | 08-17-2017 |
20170237836 | COALESCING MESSAGES USING A NETWORK INTERFACE CONTROLLER | 08-17-2017 |
20180026874 | END POINT SCALING ON SEGMENT ROUTING FABRICS | 01-25-2018 |
20180026876 | Method for Transferring Application Specific Packets | 01-25-2018 |
20180026881 | TUNNEL PROVISIONING WITH LINK AGGREGATION | 01-25-2018 |
20180026883 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EPHEMERAL ENTRIES IN A FORWARDING INFORMATION BASE IN A CONTENT CENTRIC NETWORK | 01-25-2018 |
20180026884 | CLOUD OVERLAY FOR OPERATIONS ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT | 01-25-2018 |
20180026887 | LINK SELECTION FOR COMMUNICATION WITH A SERVICE FUNCTION CLUSTER | 01-25-2018 |
20180026888 | Stateless Protocol Translation | 01-25-2018 |
20180026889 | PROGRESSIVE MAC ADDRESS LEARNING | 01-25-2018 |
20180026902 | PACKET BUFFERING | 01-25-2018 |
20180026934 | Using a Virtual Internet Protocol Address to Represent Dually Connected Hosts in an Internet Protocol Overlay Network | 01-25-2018 |
20180027101 | HIGH-EFFICIENCY SERVICE CHAINING WITH AGENTLESS SERVICE NODES | 01-25-2018 |
20190149459 | SERVICE SPECIFIC ROUTE SELECTION IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS | 05-16-2019 |
20190149462 | METHOD AND SYSTEM USING A SCALABLE LABEL SCHEME FOR ALIASING IN A MULTIHOMED ETHERNET VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK (EVPN) NETWORK | 05-16-2019 |
20190149466 | TIME SLOT DESIGNING DEVICE, TIME SLOT DESIGNING METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING TIME SLOT DESIGNING PROGRAM STORED THEREON | 05-16-2019 |
20190149468 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A BIT INDEXED SERVICE CHAIN | 05-16-2019 |
20190149469 | CONTENT ROUTING IN AN IP NETWORK | 05-16-2019 |
20190149470 | METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE FOR HANDLING PACKETS IN A NETWORK BY MEANS OF FORWARDING TABLES | 05-16-2019 |
20190149471 | DUAL PURPOSE ON-CHIP BUFFER MEMORY FOR LOW LATENCY SWITCHING | 05-16-2019 |
20190149472 | PIPELINED EVALUATIONS FOR ALGORITHMIC FORWARDING ROUTE LOOKUP | 05-16-2019 |
20190149484 | CHASSIS SWITCHES, NETWORK INTERFACE CARDS, AND METHODS FOR MANAGEMENT OF PACKET FORWARDING | 05-16-2019 |
20190149516 | STATEFUL CONNECTION POLICY FILTERING | 05-16-2019 |
20190149628 | JUST IN TIME TRANSCODING AND PACKAGING IN IPV6 NETWORKS | 05-16-2019 |
20220141080 | AVAILABILITY-ENHANCING GATEWAYS FOR NETWORK TRAFFIC IN VIRTUALIZED COMPUTING ENVIRONMENTS - At a computing service, an indication of associations of a set of network interfaces with a gateway is obtained. Individual ones of the interfaces are configured in respective availability-based resource groups. In response to detecting that a message originates at a resource within a particular availability-based resource group, a network interface of the set is selected based at least partly on the source of availability-based resource group, and the message is transmitted to a network address assigned to the selected interface. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141144 | STATEFUL PACKET INSPECTION AND CLASSIFICATION - Stateful inspection and classification of packets is disclosed. A first differentiated services header value (DSHV) to associate with a first packet type and a corresponding first quality of service treatment is received from a configuration interface for a first packet type associated with a network traffic flow originating from a first application type. A second DSHV is received from the configuration interface to associate with a second packet type. A first packet having the first packet type is received and the first quality of service treatment is applied to the first packet. A second packet having the second packet type is received and the second quality of service treatment is applied to the second packet. | 05-05-2022 |